No matching fragments found in this document.
The
Technical Bulletins
of
Dianetics and Scientology
by
L. Ron Hubbard
FOUNDER OF DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY
Volume
III
1957-1959
_____________________________________________________________________
I will not always be here on guard.
The stars twinkle in the Milky Way
And the wind sighs for songs
Across the empty fields of a planet
A Galaxy away.
You won't always be here.
But before you go,
Whisper this to your sons
And their sons -
"The work was free.
Keep it so. "
L. RON HUBBARD
[pic]
L. Ron Hubbard
Founder of Dianetics and Scientology
EDITORS' NOTE
"A chronological study of materials is necessary for the complete
training of a truly top grade expert in these lines. He can see how the
subject progressed and so is able to see which are the highest levels of
development. Not the least advantage in this is the defining of words and
terms for each, when originally used, was defined, in most cases, with
considerable exactitude, and one is not left with any misunderstoods."
-L. Ron Hubbard
The first eight volumes of the Technical Bulletins of Dianetics and
Scientology contain, exclusively, issues written by L. Ron Hubbard, thus
providing a chronological time track of the development of Dianetics and
Scientology. Volume IX, The Auditing Series, and Volume X, The Case
Supervisor Series, contain Board Technical Bulletins that are part of the
series. They are LRH data even though compiled or written by another.
So that the time track of the subject may be studied in its entirety,
all HCO Bs have been included, excluding only those upper level materials
which will be found on courses to which they apply. If an issue has been
revised, replaced, or cancelled, this has been indicated in the upper right-
hand corner along with the page number of the issue which should be
referred to.
The points at which Ron gave tape recorded lectures have been indicated
as they occurred. Where they were given as part of an event or course,
information is given on that event or course on the page in the
chronological volumes which corresponds to the date. The symbol "**"
preceding a tape title means that copies are available from both
Publications Organizations. A tape preceded by "*" means that it will soon
be available. No asterisk (*) means that neither Publications Organization
nor Flag has a master copy of that lecture. If you have, or know anyone who
has, copies of these tapes, please contact the Flag Audio Chief, P.O. Box
23751, Tampa, Florida, 33623, U.S.A. The number in the tape title is a code
for the date; example: 5505C07-55 = year, 1955; 05 = month, May; C = copy;
07 = day, 7th; 7 May 1955. The abbreviation tells what group the tape is a
part of. For an explanation of the abbreviations see Volume X, page 539.
At the back of this volume is a Subject Index covering only the
material in this volume. Use the index to locate the LRH source material in
context, don't just get data from the index. This index has been combined
with indexes from other volumes to form the Cumulative Index which is in
Volume X, starting on page 287.
TECHNICAL BULLETINS
1957 - 1959
CONTENTS
1957
Jan The Code of a Scientologist (PAB 103)
2 Jan 16th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures(2 Jan-11
Feb) 3
15 Jan Dissemination (PAB 104) OEC Vol 6-457
Feb The Story of a Static (PAB 105) 4
6 Feb Procedure CCH (HCO Training Bulletin) 5
15 Feb Good Processes (PAB 106) 9
25 Feb 17th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (18 Feb-31
Mar) 13
Mar Specific for Terror Stomach (PAB 107) 14
8 Mar Goal of Indoctrination Course 16
15 Mar Learning Rate (Part 1) (PAB 108) 17
Apr Learning Rate (Part 2) (PAB 109) 20
8 Apr Group Auditing 23
9 Apr List of "Purposes" 25
10 Apr HPA/HCA Course Curriculum 26
12 Apr London Congress on Nuclear Radiation and Health Lectures
(12 Apr-15 Apr) 27
15 Apr Education (PAB 110) 28
ca Apr Today's Riches in Scientology (Ability 45) 32
May Eyesight and Glasses (PAB 111) 36
3 May Training-What It Is Today-How We Tell People About It
40
3 May Ministerial Qualifications (FC PL) see OEC Vol 5-281
15 May The Rights of the Field Auditor (PAB 112) 41
17 May Definitions (HCO Training Bulletin) 42
15 May Hubbard Certified Auditor Course Lectures (15 May-30 May)
42
20 May Interim Process (HCO Training Bulletin) 43
ca May The Radiation Picture and Scientology (Ability 47) 44
May All About Radiation 49
24 May Stable Data for Instructors 50
June Rights of the Directors of Training and Processing, Staff
Auditors,
and Instructors Regarding Preclears and Students (HCO Info
Bull) 51
3 June Explanation of Aberrative Character of Radiation 52
3 June Auditing a 10-Year Old Child 53
ca June The Hubbard Certified Auditor Course (Ability 48) 54
8 June The Teaching of the 18th ACC 58
1957 (cont.)
10 June What to Tell New HGC Auditors to Process on Preclears
(HGC Processing Bulletin) 60
11 June Training and CCH Processes (reissued 12 May 1972) 61
13 June Student Intensives and Co-Auditing Processes 75
15 June Group Processing (PAB 114) see footnote- 24
16 June People's Questions see- 75
18 June People's Questions 75
ca June What About Validation? (Ability 49) 76
July The Rehabilitation of Abilities (PAB 115) 79
July Addition to the Auditor's Code 82
ca July Levels of Skill (Ability 50) 83
4 July Freedom Congress Lectures (4 July 7 July) 86
15 July Solids and Chronic Somatics (PAB 116) 87
15 July 8-C on Students (HCO Training Bulletin) 90
15 July 18th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (8 July-16
Aug) 90
17 July Changes in Training Drills (HCO Training Bulletin) 91
ca July The Adventure of Communication (Ability 51 ) 92
29 July Withholds and Communication 93
31 July More Workable Commands for Testing 95
1 Aug Confronting Present Time (PAB 117) 96
10 Aug CCH 18 (ACC Bulletin) 99
ca Aug Confronting (Ability 52) 100
15 Aug Ministerial Qualifications (FC PL) see OEC Vol 5-281
15 Aug Validation Committee (PAB 118) 102
ca Aug Communication (Ability 53) 104
29 Aug Government Project Stable Data 106
1 Sept The Big Auditing Problem (PAB 119) 107
2 Sept When a Verbal Direction Is Given 111
3 Sept HCA/HPA Course Processes (HCO Training Bulletin) 111
4 Sept Stable Data for Instructors (HCO Training Bulletin)
112
5 Sept All Preclears Are Expected to (HASI PL) OEC Vol 4-498
ca Sept More Confronting (Ability 54) 113
9 Sept Processes to Be Run on HGC Preclears from This Date
117
15 Sept Control Trio (PAB 120) 119
24 Sept Curriculum of CCH (HCO Training Bulletin) 121
1 Oct Rudiments and Goals (PAB 121) 122
ca Oct The Eighteenth ACC (Ability 56) 126
15 Oct The Five Levels of Indoctrination and Procedure CCH (PAB
122) 128
29 Oct A Basic Chart of Process Types 131
ca Oct Escape (Ability 57) 133
1957 (cont.)
1 Nov The Reality Scale (PAB 123) 136
2 Nov Intensive Processes for Use in Operation Clear and
Operation
Staff Clear (HCO Training Bulletin) see Vol
VIII--393
13 Nov Project Clear Check Sheet 143
ca Nov We Are the Free People (Ability 58) 145
15 Nov Communication and Is-ness (PAB 124) 146
1 Dec The Parts of Man (PAB 125) 149
ca Dec Scientology: The Philosophy of a New Age (Ability 60)
153
3 Dec Clear Procedure-Definitions, Goals 155
4 Dec Clear Procedure Continued-Step One: Participation in
Session
by the Pc 157
7 Dec HGC Procedure 162
15 Dec Problems: Handling and Running (PAB 126) 164
16 Dec Present Time Problem 168
18 Dec Psychosis, Neurosis and Psychiatrists 169
Dec Scientology: Clear Procedure-Issue One 172
29 Dec Ability Congress Lectures (29 Dec-31 Dec) 193
Dec Control and the Mechanics of S.C.S 194
1958
Jan The Threat to Havingness (PAB 127) 195
11 Jan HGC Procedure 197
13 Jan HGC Running of Pcs 198
15 Jan The Factors Behind the Handling of IQ (PAB 128) 199
18 Jan Control 204
20 Jan 19th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (6 Jan-14
Feb) 204
21 Jan Mest Clear Procedure 205
21 Jan ACCs-HPA/HCA 206
25 Jan Inept Students (Org PL) OEC Vol 4-148
25 Jan Reviewing Week's Profiles 207
26 Jan Future Plans 208
28 Jan Future Plans see-208
Feb Clearing of Fields 209
1 Feb Confronting (PAB 129) 211
3 Feb Free Clearing Project 216
ca Feb The Attainment of "Clears" (Ability 66) 217
6 Feb CCH Ob-Help in Full-Starting Session 219
13 Feb Rules Governing the Running of CCH Ob "Help" 220
ca Feb Man's Contest with the Machine Age (Ability 67) 221
15 Feb "Death" (PAB 130) 223
1958 (cont.)
1 Mar Processes 229
Mar The Scale of Withhold (PAB 131) 230
15 Mar Report on Two Cases That Have Received Psychiatric and
Euro-Russian Therapy from the Government (PAB 132) 234
22 Mar Clearing Reality 235
ca Mar Does Clearing Cancel the Need for Training? (Ability 70)
236
1 Apr Procedure CCH (PAB 133) 238
2 Apr ARC in Comm Course 242
8 Apr Auditing the Pc on Clear Procedure 243
8 Apr A Pair of Processes 245
11 Apr CCH 88-Enforced Nothingness 246
11 Apr Staff Members' Outside Auditing Regulation OEC Vol 4-609
15 Apr Procedure CCH Continued (PAB 134) 247
23 Apr Vital Training Data for Training Hats and Registrar
250
ca Apr How We Work on the Third Dynamic (Ability 72) 251
May Signs of Success 253
May Procedure CCH Continued (PAB 135) 254
2 May Beingness Again 257
ca May Assists in Scientology (Ability 73) 259
9 May Who Should Take Which Class 264
15 May Procedure CCH Continued (PAB 136) 265
22 May Enemies of the Pc 268
ca May Scientology and the Reactive Mind (Ability 74) 269
24 May A Comment on Beingness Processing 271
28 May Procedure for Certifying Clears see-289
29 May Standard Clear Procedure and an Experimental Road:
Clearing by Valences 273
29 May An Example of Clearing by Valences 276
June Some More CCH Processes (PAB 137) 278
3 June Amendment to HCO B 11 April 1958 see OEC Vol 4-609
ca June "Offbeat" Processing (Ability 76) 282
4 June Running Valences 284
12 June Ministerial Qualifications (FC PL) OEC Vol 5-281
14 June Standardization of Clear Procedure 285
15 June Standard Clear Procedure and an Experimental Road:
Clearing by Valences (PAB 138) see footnote-275
ca June Learning How to "Clear" (Ability 77) 286
30 June Procedure for Certifying Clears 289
July An Example of Clearing by Valences (PAB 139) see footnote-
277
4 July Clearing Congress Lectures (4 July-6 July) 290
7 July Contents and Coverage of HCA/HPA Course 291
9 July Staff Clearing 291
1958 (cont.)
12 July Standardization of Clear Processes 292
14 July 20th American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (7 July-15
Aug) 293
14 July 20th ACC Training Procedure 294
15 July Carrying On 295
28 July Clear Procedure 296
29 July The Rock 299
Aug Beingness Again (PAB 141) see footnote-258
5 Aug The Basic Locating Question of the Rock 300
10 Aug ACC Auxiliary Procedure 301
15 Aug Auditing the Pc on Clear Procedure (PAB 142) see footnote-
244
20 Aug Present Time Problem-Running of 303
20 Aug Out of Sessionness 304
ca Aug The Axioms of Scientology-The Prelogics-The Logics-The
Axioms
of Dianetics (Ability 80) see-305
Aug Axioms and Logics 305
28 Aug Change Auditor's Code 306
Sept A Pair of Processes (PAB 143) see footnote-245
3 Sept HCA Course Examination 306
12 Sept Post Case Analysis Routine 307
12 Sept Havingness-New Commands 307
15 Sept More on Training Drill Two 308
15 Sept Psychosis, Neurosis and Psychiatrists (PAB 144) see
footnote-171
29 Sept Vital Training Data 309
Oct HCO Board of Review (HCO PL) OEC Vol 4-269
Oct More on Training Drill Two (PAB 145) see footnote-308
5 Oct Abbreviations see-334
9 Oct Correction of HCO Policy Letter 1 Oct 1958 see OEC Vol 4-
271
15 Oct ACC Clear Procedure 311
15 Oct Procedure CCH (PAB 146) 323
ca Oct New HCA Course You Can Begin at Home (Ability 83) 328
18 Oct London Clearing Congress Lectures (18 Oct-20 Oct) 332
25 Oct Abbreviations 334
27 Oct 5th London Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (21 Oct-29
Nov) 333
ca Oct The Axioms of Scientology-The Prelogics-The Logics-The
Axioms
of Dianetics (Certainty Vol 5, No 21 ) see-305
27 Oct HPA Courses for Staff see-339
27 Oct How to Read Profiles on OCA: Comparing Current Week
Profile
with Week Before 334
Nov Communication Course (PAB 147) 335
3 Nov American College of Personnel Efficiency, Dublin 338
7 Nov HPA Courses for Staff 339
1958 (cont.)
11 Nov ACC Schedule 339
13 Nov TR 9 (b) and TR 9 (c) 340
17 Nov Clear Bracelets 341
25 Nov Step 6 341
25 Nov Techniques to Be Used on HGC Preclears (Academy Training
Bull) 342
ca Nov Violence (Certainty Vol 5, No 22) 343
ca Nov The Theory of Training in Scientology (Ability 85) 344
26 Nov ACCs 347
1 Dec People Permitted to Audit Engrams by Scientology Processes
348
1 Dec Dummy Auditing-Step Two: Acknowledgment (PAB 149) 349
6 Dec How to Run an Engram
352
7 Dec Training Drill Change
353
15 Dec Academy Training Curriculum & Examination (HCO PL)
OEC Vol 4-274
15 Dec Dummy Auditing-Step Three: Duplication (PAB 150) 354
16 Dec Extension Course Curriculum 357
17 Dec Basic Postulate of Overt Act-Motivator Sequence 359
17 Dec Auditing ARC Breaks on Registrar and Assistant Registrar
360
20 Dec Processing a New Mother 361
22 Dec New HGC Process-A New Straight Wire 363
ca Dec Something Has Happened!!! (Ability 86 M) 365
26 Dec BScn/HCS Course 366
27 Dec The First First Dynamic Process 367
28 Dec Short Sessioning 368
31 Dec ACC Clear Procedure Change 369
31 Dec Routing of Profiles (HCO Secretarial Letter) OEC Vol 4-502
1959
Jan Dummy Auditing-Step Four: Handling Originations (PAB 151)
370
3 Jan 1950 Success Congress Lectures (3 Jan-4 Jan) 374
5 Jan 21st American Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (5 Jan-13
Feb) 374
ca Jan What Are Clears? (Ability 87) 375
ca Jan The 1959 HCA Course Becomes a Clearing Course (Ability 87)
376
6 Jan Field Activities 378
6 Jan Change of HCO Policy Letter of 15 December 1958 380
7 Jan Anti-Q & A TR (21st ACC Training Drill) see Vol VIII-221
10 Jan HGC Allowed Processes 381
11 Jan An Amusingly Effective Process 383
12 Jan Tone of Voice-Acknowledgement 383
15 Jan The Five Levels of Indoctrination (PAB 152) 384
18 Jan ACC Preparatory Processes for Running Engrams see-389
1959 (cont.)
19 Jan New HCA/HPA Course 387
20 Jan ACC Preparatory Process Schedule for Running Engrams
389
22 Jan Not-Is Straight Wire 390
ca Jan A Campaign for Ethical Auditing (Ability 88 M) 391
23 Jan Ethics (HCO PL) OEC Vol 1-361
24 Jan Scientology Axiom 58 393
Feb CCH (PAB 153) 394
3 Feb HGC Current Procedure 397
3 Feb Flattening a Process 398
4 Feb Op Pro by Dup 399
9 Feb Auditor's Code No l9 see footnote-417
15 Feb CCH (Concluded) (PAB 154) 400
16 Feb HGC Processes for Those Trained in Engram Running or
Trained
in These Processes 402
16 Feb Staff Auditors' Conference of February 16, 1959 404
19 Feb Auditor's Code No 19 417
24 Feb Selected Persons Overt Withhold Straightwire 417
26 Feb Identification 418
26 Feb Engram Running on Old Dianetic Cases or Restarted Cases
419
ca Feb How to Study Scientology (Ability 90 M) 420
27 Feb How to Select Selected Persons 427
28 Feb Analysis of Cases 428
28 Feb ARC Breaks with Auditors 430
28 Feb Clearing Commands 430
Mar Two Rules for Happy Living 431
Mar Processes Used in 21st ACC (PAB 155) 433
4 Mar HGC Allowed Processes (cancelled-see 468) 436
6 Mar Training Drills 437
6 Mar How to Do a Diagnosis on Dynamic Straightwire 438
10 Mar Supplemental Data Sheet to HCO Bulletin of Feb 16, 1959
and
Staff Auditors' Conference of Feb 16, 1959 439
13 Mar Muzzled Auditing 440
15 Mar Processes Used in 21st ACC (PAB 156) 441
17 Mar An Insanity Questionnaire 443
17 Mar Do It Yourself Therapy 444
23 Mar An Insanity Questionnaire see-443
ca Mar The Subject of Clearing (Ability 92 M) 445
24 Mar HAS Co-Audit 449
24 Mar Minimum Standards 450
25 Mar HAS Co-Audit - Comm Course 451
31 Mar Know to Mystery Straight Wire for Extreme Cases see-460
1959 (cont.)
Apr Processes Used in 21st ACC (Concluded) (PAB 157) 453
3 Apr HAS Co-Audit and Comm Course 456
6 Apr Special Hubbard Professional Auditor's Course Lectures
(6 Apr-1 May) 457
8 Apr Emotional Tone Scale Expanded see-459
14 Apr Letter from Australia 458
15 Apr Emotional Tone Scale Expanded 459
17 Apr Know to Mystery Straight Wire for Extreme Cases 460
17 Apr The Credo of a Good and Skilled Manager see footnote Vol I-
97
22 Apr The Credo of a Good and Skilled Manager see footnote Vol I-
97
22 Apr Old and New Reality Scale 461
23 Apr Definitions 462
3 May Solution to Solutions 462
4 May An Affinity Process 463
4 May How to Write a Curriculum 464
7 May New Process 465
8 May An Un-doable Command 467
12 May 6th London Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (4 May-13
June) 467
21 May HGC Allowed Processes and ACC Processes as of May 21, 1959
468
26 May Man Who Invented Scientology 470
5 June Formula 10 472
6 June When Cases Crack Well on Selected Persons Overts Withhold
473
9 June Needed Material 474
10 June Co-Audit Formula 475
11 June The Dates of the Australian ACC 475
22 June How to "Sell Scientology" 476
23 June Clear Test 476
23 June What Is Scientology 477
2 July Add Formula 10 (HCO PL) 478
3 July General Information 479
4 July Theta Clear Congress Lectures(4 July-6 July) 490
9 July Definition of Scientology-Written by LRH for Legal When
Setting Up HASI Ltd. 491
14 July Special Information for Franchise Holders 492
17 July Africa Over the Top 494
18 July Technically Speaking 494
18 July Income Tax Reform 495
21 July HGC Allowed Processes 497
22 July Actual Working Definition of Psychology 499
26 July HGC Regimen see footnote-502
28 July Our Goals 500
1959 (cont.)
5 Aug HGC Processes 502
7 Aug The Handling of Communication Processes-Some Rapid Data
503
12 Aug A Second Type of Franchise 506
13 Aug Suggested HCA Course Schedule 509
13 Aug Franchise Holders 512
19 Aug HAS Co-Audit-Finding Terminals 513
19 Aug How to Handle Work see OEC Vol 0-122
19 Aug To a Roman Catholic 514
27 Aug Growth with Competence 515
3 Sept Why "Victim" Works as a Process 518
9 Sept A Short Story by Cable 521
9 Sept Organizational Health Chart see footnote OEC Vol. 7-115
14 Sept News Bulletin 522
15 Sept Dissemination Tips OEC Vol 6-101
23 Sept The Perfect Dissemination Program OEC Vol 6-105
25 Sept HAS Co-Audit 524
26 Sept Data on Clearing a Staff Member After Specific Terminals
Are
Flat with Overt-Withhold Straight Wire 525
28 Sept Technical Notes on Child Processing 526
29 Sept The Organization of a PE Foundation 527
29 Sept Universe Processes 529
5 Oct Universe Processes 530
5 Oct Universe Processes see-529
13 Oct A Useful Process 532
13 Oct DEI Expanded Scale 533
14 Oct London Up 535
15 Oct My Whereabouts in November 535
20 Oct An Experimental Process 536
25 Oct Psychoanalysis Goes Capitalistic 537
30 Oct To Retain Co-Audit Pc's Interest in Case 538
31 Oct Create Processes-Dangers & Advantages 539
ca Nov On Bringing Order (Ability 107) 541
7 Nov Melbourne Congress Lectures (7 Nov-8 Nov) 542
9 Nov 1st Melbourne Advanced Clinical Course Lectures (9 Nov-30
Nov) 542
12 Nov Acknowledgements in Auditing 543
18 Nov 1st Melbourne ACC Material 545
18 Nov Congratulations HASI-South Africa 546
30 Nov Allowed Processes 1st Melbourne ACC 547
4 Dec Allowed Processes 1st Melbourne ACC see-547
11 Dec New Horizons in Scientology 548
15 Dec HAS Co-Audit 550
15 Dec Urgent Change in All Co-Audit Courses 551
16 Dec Responsibility for O/Ws 552
ca Dec Techniques of Child Processing (Ability 110) 553
23 Dec Responsibility 555
31 Dec Blow-offs 557
Subject Index 561
Alphabetical List of Titles 593
PERIODICALS BY ISSUE NUMBER
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
No
103 1 Jan 57 The Code of a Scientologist
104 15 Jan 57 Dissemination OEC Vol 6-457
105 1 Feb 57 The Story of a Static 4
106 15 Feb 57 Good Processes 9
107 1 Mar 57 Specific for Terror Stomach 14
108 15 Mar 57 Learning Rate (Part 1) 17
109 1 Apr 57 Learning Rate (Part 2) 20
110 15 Apr 57 Education 28
111 1 May 57 Eyesight and Glasses 36
112 15 May 57 The Rights of the Field Auditor 41
114 15 June 57 Group Processing see footnote- 24
115 1 July 57 The Rehabilitation of Abilities 79
116 15 July 57 Solids and Chronic Somatics 87
117 1 Aug 57 Confronting Present Time 96
118 15 Aug 57 Validation Committee 102
119 1 Sept 57 The Big Auditing Problem 107
120 15 Sept 57 Control Trio 119
121 1 Oct 57 Rudiments and Goals 122
122 15 Oct 57 The Five Levels of Indoctrination
and Procedure CCH 128
123 1 Nov 57 The Reality Scale 136
124 15 Nov 57 Communication and Is-ness 146
125 1 Dec 57 The Parts of Man 149
126 15 Dec 57 Problems: Handling and Running 164
127 1 Jan 58 The Threat to Havingness 195
128 15 Jan 58 The Factors behind the Handling of IQ 199
129 I Feb 58 Confronting 211
130 15 Feb 58 "Death" 223
131 1 Mar 58 The Scale of Withhold 230
132 15 Mar 58 Report on Two Cases That Have Received Psychiatric
and Euro-Russian Therapy from the Government 234
133 1 Apr 58 Procedure CCH 238
134 15 Apr 58 Procedure CCH Continued 247
135 1 May 58 Procedure CCH Continued 254
136 15 May 58 Procedure CCH Continued 265
137 1 June 58 Some More CCH Processes 278
138 15 June 58 Standard Clear Procedure and An Experimental
Road: Clearing by Valences see footnote-275
139 1 July 58 An Example of Clearing by Valences see footnote---277
141 1 Aug 58 Beingness Again see footnote-258
142 15 Aug 58 Auditing the Pc on Clear Procedure see footnote-244
143 1 Sept 58 A Pair of Processes see footnote-245
144 15 Sept 58 Psychosis, Neurosis and Psychiatrists see footnote-171
145 1 Oct 58 More on Training Drill Two see footnote-308
146 15 Oct 58 Procedure CCH 323
147 1 Nov 58 Communication Course 335
149 1 Dec 58 Dummy Auditing Step Two: Acknowledgment 349
150 15 Dec 58 Dummy Auditing-Step Three: Duplication 354
151 1 Jan 59 Dummy Auditing-Step Four: Handling Originations 370
152 15 Jan 59 The Five Levels of Indoctrination 384
153 1 Feb 59 CCH 394
154 15 Feb 59 CCH (Concluded) 400
155 1 Mar 59 Processes Used in 21st ACC 433
156 15 Mar 59 Processes Used in 21st ACC 441
157 1 Apr 59 Processes Used in 21st ACC (Concluded) 453
ABILITY MAGAZINE
Issue
45 ca Apr 57 Today's Riches in Scientology 32
47 ca May 57 The Radiation Picture and Scientology 44
48 ca June 57 The Hubbard Certified Auditor Course 54
49 ca June 57 What About Validation? 76
50 ca July 57 Levels of Skill 83
51 ca July 57 The Adventure of Communication 92
52 ca Aug 57 Confronting 100
53 ca Aug 57 Communication 104
54 ca Sept 57 More Confronting 113
56 ca Oct 57 The Eighteenth ACC 126
57 ca Oct 57 Escape 133
58 ca Nov 57 We Are the Free People 145
60 ca Dec 57 Scientology: The Philosophy of a New Age 153
66 ca Feb 58 The Attainment of "Clears" 217
67 ca Feb 58 Man's Contest with the Machine Age 221
70 ca Mar 58 Does Clearing Cancel the Need for Training? 236
72 ca Apr 58 How We Work on the Third Dynamic 251
73 ca May 58 Assists in Scientology 259
74 ca May 58 Scientology and the Reactive Mind 269
76 ca June 58 "Offbeat" Processing 282
77 ca June 58 Learning How to "Clear" 286
80 ca Aug 58 The Axioms of Scientology-The Prelogics
-The Logics-The Axioms of Dianetics see- 305
83 ca Oct 58 New HCA Course You Can Begin at Home 328
85 ca Nov 58 The Theory of Training in Scientology 344
86 M ca Dec 58 Something Has Happened!!! 365
87 ca Jan 59 What Are Clears? 375
The 1959 HCA Course Becomes a Clearing Course 376
88 M ca Jan 59 A Campaign for Ethical Auditing 391
90 M ca Feb 59 How to Study Scientology 420
92 M ca Mar 59 The Subject of Clearing 445
107 ca Nov 59 On Bringing Order 541
110 ca Dec 59 Techniques of Child Processing 553
125 ca Feb 61 Personal Integrity Vol IV- 203
129 June 61 The Sad Tail of PDH Vol IV- 321
CERTAINTY MAGAZINE
Vol-No
5-21 ca Oct 58 The Axioms of Scientology-The Prelogics
-The Logics-The Axioms of Dianetics see--305
5-22 ca Nov 58 Violence 343
LONG CONTENTS
PAB No. 103, 1 Jan. 1957 THE CODE OF A SCIENTOLOGIST, 1
The A.M.A.'s proposed principles of medical ethics, 2
PAB No. 105,1 Feb. 1957 THE STORY OF A STATIC, 4
Thetan, trying to prove he is not simple, 4
HCO Training Bulletin 6 Feb. 1957 PROCEDURE CCH, 5
Goal of CCH, 5
HPA/HCA Processes, 5
Communication Processes, 5
Location-Control Processes, 6
Duplication Processes, 7
Havingness Processes, 7
Objective Havingness, 7
Subjective Havingness, 8
Thought Processes, 8
PAB No. 106, 15 Feb. 1957 GOOD PROCESSES, 9
Best processes, 9
Control, 9
Fight the Wall, commands and how to run, 9
Opponents [process], commands, 10
Individuality [process], 10
Can't Have [process], 1 0
Lie about Effect [process], 1 0
Problem, when is it flat, 10
Solids [process], 11
Vacuums, 11
Remedy of restimulation, 11
How to split valences, 11
Out of valence, how to handle, 11
PAB No. 107, 1 Mar. 1957 SPECIFIC FOR TERROR STOMACH, 14
Anatomy of confusion, 14
Stomach, guilty of the overt act of eating, 14
HCO B 8 Mar. 1957 GOAL OF INDOCTRINATION COURSE, 16
PAB No. 108, 15 Mar. 1957 LEARNING RATE (Part 1), 17
Process lag and learning lag, 18
Aberration in education, 18
PAB No. 109, 1 Apr. 1957 LEARNING RATE (Part 2), 20
Learning rate-consequences, 20
Power of choice over data, 21
Learning rate used to sell Scientology, 21
Difference between education and Scientology, 22
HCO B 8 Apr. 1957 GROUP AUDITING, 23
Control factors available to the auditor, 23
Group Processing model processes, 23
Assistant Group Auditor, 24
HCO B 9 Apr. 1957 LIST OF "PURPOSES", 25
Purposes posted on Org Board, 25
HCO B 10 Apr. 1957 HPA/HCA COURSE CURRICULUM, 26
HPA/HCA full Course, 26
Five Levels of Indoctrination, 26
PAB No. 110, 15 Apr. 1957 EDUCATION, 28
Learning rate, the rate one will permit ideas to inflow, 28
The trouble with education, 28
Education and aberration, 29
University students, suicide and nervous breakdown, 29
Necessities of education, 29
Knowledge isn't recalling, 30
Child education, 3 0
Five Learning Processes, 31
Ability Issue 45, ca. Apr. 1957 TODAY'S RICHES IN SCIENTOLOGY, 32
Significance of mechanics of the mental image picture, 32
Importance of various truths, 33
Then and Now Solids, 33
Age and auditing, 34
PAB No. 111, 1 May 1957 EYESIGHT AND GLASSES, 36
Gold discs, 3 6
Eyes, how they function, 36
Effort Processing and eyesight, 36
Eyesight and havingness, 37
Eyesight and confronting, 37
Blindness, 38
HCO B 3 May 1957 TRAINING-WHAT IT IS TODAY-HOW WE TELL PEOPLE ABOUT IT, 40
Stable datum of all training, 40
HPA/HCA training, 40
PAB No. 112, 15 May 1957 THE RIGHTS OF THE FIELD AUDITOR, 41
HCO Training Bulletin l7 May 1957 DEFINITIONS, 42
Definitions of consultant, instructor, coach, 42
HCO Training Bulletin 20 May 1957 INTERIM PROCESS, 43
Objective Show Me, commands and how to run, 43
Ability Issue 47, ca. May 1957 THE RADIATION PICTURE AND
SCIENTOLOGY, 44
Hysteria and radiation, 44
Russian propaganda, 45
Danger of radiation, 45
Wundtian psychology, 46
Reaction to radiation is wholly mental, 46
Worry about radiation, 47
Surviving radiation, 48
HCO B 24 May 1957 STABLE DATA FOR INSTRUCTORS, 50
HCO Info. Bulletin 1 June 1957 RIGHTS OF THE D of
T and D of P, STAFF AUDITORS, AND INSTRUCTORS
REGARDING PRECLEARS AND STUDENTS, 51
HCO B 3 June 1957 EXPLANATION OF ABERRATIVE CHARACTER OF RADIATION, 52
Radiation, invalidation of solids, 52
HCO B 3 June 1957 AUDITING A 10-YEAR OLD CHILD, 53
CCH I session, 53
Ability Issue 48, ca. June 1957 THE HUBBARD CERTIFIED AUDITOR
COURSE, 54
Goals of Scientology, 55
HCA curriculum, 55
HCO B 8 June 1957 THE TEACHING OF THE 18TH ACC, 58
Communication Course, 5 8
Upper Indoctrination Course, 58
CCH Course, 5 8
HGC Processing Bulletin 10 June 1957 WHAT TO TELL NEW HGC AUDITORS TO
PROCESS ON PRECLEARS, 60
Stable datum, 60
HCO B 11 June 1957 TRAINING AND CCH PROCESSES, 61
Training 0, Confronting Preclear, 61
Training 1, Dear Alice, 61
Training 2, Acknowledgments, 61
Training 3, Duplicative Question, 62
Training 4, Preclear Originations, 62
Training 5, Hand Mimicry, 63
Training 6, Plain 8-C, 63
Training 7, Hi-School Indoc, 63
Training 8, Tone 40 on an Object, 64
Training 9, Tone 4() on a Person, 64
CCH 0, Rudiments, Goals and Present Time Problem, 65
CCH 1, Give Me Your Hand, Tone 40, 65
CCH 2, Tone 40 8-C, 66
CCH 3, Book Mimicry, 66
CCH 4, Hand Space Mimicry, 66
Training 10, Locational Processing, 67
CCH 5, Location by Contact, 67
CCH 6, Body-Room Contact, 67
CCH 7, Contact by Duplication, 68
CCH 8, Trio, 68
CCH 9, Tone 40 "Keep it from going away", 69
CCH 10, Tone 40 "Hold it still", 69
CCH 11, Tone 40 "Make it a little more solid", 69
Training 11, ARC Straight Wire, 69
CCH 12, Limited Subjective Havingness, 70
CCH 13, Subjective Solids, 70
CCH 14, Then and Now Solids, 71
Training 12, Think a Thought, 71
CCH 15, Rising Scale Processing, 72
GP Nos. I through 15, 72
Training 13, Fishing a Cognition, 73
HCO B 13 June 1957 STUDENT INTENSIVES AND CO-AUDITING
PROCESSES, 75
HCO B 18 June 1957 PEOPLE'S QUESTIONS, 75
Answer people's questions, 75
Ability Issue 49, ca. June 1957 WHAT ABOUT VALIDATION?, 76
Training skills, 76
Need of training, 77
Problem of retraining, 78
PAB No. 115, 1 July 1957 THE REHABILITATION OF ABILITIES, 79
Willingness to learn, 79
Importance of willingness to do, 80
Power of choice, 81
How to handle children, 81
Using good 8-C on children, 82
Technique for rehabilitation of abilities, 82
HCO B 1 July 1957 ADDITION TO THE AUDITOR'S CODE, 82
Ability Issue 50, ca. July 1957 LEVELS OF SKILL, 83
Book auditor, 83
Certified auditor, 83
Specially trained auditors, 83
Staff auditors, 83
Levels of auditors and levels of processes, 84
Importance of book auditor, 85
PAB No. 116,15 July 1957 SOLIDS AND CHRONIC SOMATICS, 87
Chronic somatic handling, 87
Master cognition, "I knew it all the time", 88
HCO Training Bulletin 15 July 1957 8-C ON STUDENTS, 90
Error of instructor softness, 90
HCO Training Bulletin 17 July 1957 CHANGES IN TRAINING DRILLS, 91
Training 5, Sit in that Chair, 91
Training 6, 8-C, 91
Ability Issue 51, ca. July 1957 THE ADVENTURE OF COMMUNICATION, 92
Success level of a person is his communication level, 92
Communication, be, do and have, 92
CCH and ARC, 92
HCO B 29 July 1957 WITHHOLDS AND COMMUNICATION, 93
Rehabilitation of communication, 93
Withhold Process, 93
HCO B 31 July 1957 MORE WORKABLE COMMANDS FOR TESTING, 95
PAB No. 117, 1 Aug. 1957 CONFRONTING PRESENT TIME, 96
Unreality of processes too high for a preclear, 96
Confronting and irresponsibility, 96
Disconnection from present time, 97
Connectedness [process], 97
Time shift, 98
Total responsibility, 98
Anchor points and pain in the head, 98
ACC Bulletin 10 Aug. 1957 CCH 18, 99
Ability Issue 52, ca. Aug. 1957 CONFRONTING, 100
Training 0, Confronting Preclear, 100
Definition of Scientology Clear, 101
PAB No. 118, 15 Aug. 1957 VALIDATION COMMITTEE, 102
Game of life, 102
Professional auditor, 102
Doctors of Scientology, 102
Ability Issue 53, ca. Aug. 1957 COMMUNICATION, 104
ARC triangle, the way it is used, 104
Games conditions, 104
HCO B 29 Aug. 1957 GOVERNMENT PROJECT STABLE DATA, 106
PAB No. 119, 1 Sept. 1957 THE BIG AUDITING PROBLEM, 107
Auditing does require stamina, 107
Increased awareness is the only factor which offers any road out, 107
Effects of radiation, 108
Native state, 109
Retrograded state of children and natives, 109
Child requires understanding and assistance in controlling the
environment around him, 110
HCO B 2 Sept. 1957 WHEN A VERBAL DIRECTION IS GIVEN, 111
Verbal direction from LRH, 111
HCO Training Bulletin 3 Sept. 1957 HCA/HPA COURSE PROCESSES, 111
HCO Training Bulletin 4 Sept. 1957 STABLE DATA FOR INSTRUCTORS, 112
Ability Issue 54, ca. Sept. 1957 MORE CONFRONTING, 113
First step of handling anything, 113
Basic anatomy of problems, 113
State of man regarding human spirit, 114
Confronting and mental image pictures, 114
Problems of Comparable Magnitude, 114
TR 0, how it is run, 115
Confronting, 11 6
HCO B 9 Sept. 1957 PROCESSES TO BE RUN ON HGC PRECLEARS FROM THIS DATE, 117
Processes to run on preclears who have points below zero line of
OCA/APA, 117
Processes to run on preclears who have most points above zero line of
OCA/APA, 117
How to run Trio, 117
OCA/APA: nervous-depressed, 118
OCA/APA: critical, 118
PAB No. 120,15 Sept. 1957 CONTROL TRIO, 119
Control of thinkingness, 119
Undercut in Trio, 119
Recall a moment of loss, 120
HCO Training Bulletin 24 Sept. 1957 CURRICULUM OF CCH, 121
PAB No. 121, 1 Oct. 1957 RUDIMENTS AND GOALS, 122
Clearing commands, 122
Clearing the Auditor, 122
Subject of goals, 123
Goals Process, 123
How to clear up a goal, 124
Future Process, 125
Help and goals, 125
Ability Issue 56, ca. Oct. 1957 THE EIGHTEENTH A.C.C., 126
World crisis, 126
Past civilizations have vanished, 126
Scientology can win, one man at a time, 127
PAB No. 122, 15 Oct. 1957 THE FIVE LEVELS OF INDOCTRINATION AND
PROCEDURE CCH, 128
Need of training, 128
Target of CCH, 129
Make-or-break point of case, 129
Background theory of CCH, 130
29 Oct. 1957 A BASIC CHART OF PROCESS TYPES, 131
Ability Issue 571 ca. Oct. 1957 ESCAPE, 133
Escape from this universe, 134
Scientology, the way out, 134
PAB No. 123, 1 Nov. 1957 THE REALITY SCALE, 136
Two-way comm, 136
Hello and Okay Process, 136
Survival of things, who causes it, 137
Loss, why it is held on to, 137
Sound in communication, 138
Condemning facts of psychoanalysis, 138
Reality Scale, 139
Postulates and considerations, 139
Lines and terminals, Reality Scale, 139
Breaking a solid communication line, 140
Havingness Scale, part of Reality Scale, 141
Waste, what you can't have, 141
HCO B 13 Nov. 1957 PROJECT CLEAR CHECK SHEET, 143
Information sheet on Project Clear, 144
Ability Issue 58, ca. Nov. 1957 WE ARE THE FREE PEOPLE, 145
PAB No. 124, 15 Nov. 1957 COMMUNICATION AND IS-NESS, 146
Being dangerous toward environment, 146
Inflow and outflow, prevention of, 146
Consequences of defense, 147
Mechanism of disease, 147
Consequences of cut communication, 148
PAB No. 125, 1 Dec. 1957 THE PARTS OF MAN, 149
Exteriorization, 149
Mind, 150
Association-Differentiation are the two principles of the mind, 150
Body, subject of, 151
Electronic structure around body, 151
Ability Issue 60, ca. Dec. 1957 SCIENTOLOGY: THE
PHILOSOPHY OF A
NEW AGE, 153
Period of instability and change, 153
Clears are the lucky, 153
HCO B 3 Dec. 1957 CLEAR PROCEDURE-DEFINITIONS, GOALS, 155
Three possible goals in processing (defines mest clear, theta clear,
Operating Thetan), 155
Operating Thetan, our actual goal, 155
HCO B 4 Dec. 1957 CLEAR PROCEDURE CONTINUED-STEP ONE: PARTICIPATION IN
SESSION BY THE PC, 157
Present time problem is a highly vital point of preclear
participation, 158
What CCH 0 consists of, 158
Getting special cases to participate in session, 159
Process which turns on a somatic must be continued until it no longer
turns on somatics, 159
Basic difference amongst cases lies in ability to knowingly cause,
160
How to gain participation of the pc, 161
HCO B 7 Dec. 1957 HGC PROCEDURE, 162
Present time problem running, 162
S-C-S steps, 162
Spotting steps, 163
PAB No. 126, 15 Dec. 1 957 PROBLEMS: HANDLING AND RUNNING, 164
Difference between condition and terminal, 164
Problems of Comparable Magnitude, 165
Necessity to have evaluation by others, 166
Responsibility and automaticity, 167
HCO B 16 Dec. 1957 PRESENT TIME PROBLEM, 168
Definition and example of present time problem, 168
Things to audit PT problem with, 168
HCO B 18 Dec. 1957 PSYCHOSIS, NEUROSIS AND PSYCHIATRISTS, 169
Difference between neurosis and psychosis, 169
Aspects of thetan, 169
Madness is compounded of disarranged abilities, 170
Dec. 1957 SCIENTOLOGY: CLEAR PROCEDURE-ISSUE ONE, 172
Clear Procedure steps, 173
Auditing truths, 174
Three possible goals in processing (defines mest clear, theta clear,
Operating Thetan), 175
Step One: Participation in session by the pc, 176
Loss of ARC is more important than loss of havingness, 177
Present time problem is a highly vital point of preclear
participation, 177
What CCH 0 consists of, 178
Getting special cases to participate in session, 178
Process which turns on a somatic must be continued until it no longer
turns on somatics, 179
Basic difference amongst cases lies in ability to knowingly cause,
180
How to gain participation of the pc, 181
Step Two: Placing the preclear at cause, 182
Running CCHs, 183
Step Three: Establish control of pc's body by pc, 184
S-C-S Processes, 185
Reason for holding on to body, 186
Step Four: Find the auditor, 188
Step Five: Pc versus mest, 189
Spotting Processes, 189
Step Six: Creative Processing, 191
Step Seven (Optional): Establish pc's control over his "bank", 191
Step Eight: Make some time, 191
An intensive in brief for practical use, 191
Present time problem running, 192
S-C-S steps, 192
Spotting steps, 192
PAB No. 127, 1 Jan. 1958 THE THREAT TO HAVINGNESS, 195
Threat to havingness is present time problem, 195
How to handle threat to havingness, 196
11 Jan. 1958 HGC PROCEDURE, 197
HCO B 13 Jan. 1958 HGC RUNNING OF PCS, 198
PAB No. 128, 15 Jan. 1958 THE FACTORS BEHIND THE HANDLING
OF IQ, 199
Testing, a very old subject, 199
Difference between personality and IQ, 200
Theory behind IQ change, 201
Why psychotherapy never worked, 201
Reach and withdraw mechanism, 201
Traps, how you are kept in one, 202
Basic mechanism of valence closure, 202
HCO B 18 Jan. 1958 CONTROL, 204
Find the Auditor is part of Control, 204
HCO B 21 Jan. 1958 MEST CLEAR PROCEDURE, 205
CCH 0, 205
S-C-S, 205
Control Connectedness, 205
Clean-up of field, 205
Creative Processing, 205
HCO B 21 Jan. 1958 ACCs-HPA/HCA, 206
HCO B 25 Jan. 1958 REVIEWING WEEK'S PROFILES, 207
HCO B 26 Jan. 1958 FUTURE PLANS, 208
HCO B 1 Feb. 1958 CLEARING OF FIELDS, 209
Rules of fields, 209
Testing for fields, 209
Clearing fields, 210
Solution to automaticity of form, 210
PAB No. 129, 1 Feb. 1958 CONFRONTING, 211
What made governments persevere, 211
Good and bad 8-C, 212
Why teenagers revolt, 212
Confronting drama, 213
Things which are worth confronting, 213
HCO B 3 Feb. 1958 FREE CLEARING PROJECT, 216
Ability Issue 66, ca. Feb. 1958 THE ATTAINMENT OF "CLEARS", 217
Clear defined, 217
State of Bodhi, 217
HCO B 6 Feb. 1958 CCH Ob-HELP IN FULL-STARTING SESSION, 219
Help 9-way bracket, 219
HCO B 13 Feb. 1958 RULES GOVERNING THE RUNNING OF CCH Ob
"HELP", 220
Ability Issue 67, ca. Feb. 1958 MAN'S CONTEST WITH THE MACHINE AGE, 2
Industrial technology vs. mental technology, 221
PAB No. 130, 15 Feb. 1958 "DEATH", 223
Parts of man-thetan, mind, body, 223
What happens when man dies, 224
Death and havingness, 225
Death and exteriorization, 225
Picking up a new body, 226
Death, handling of dead bodies, 227
Theta body, 228
HCO B 1 Mar. 1958 PROCESSES, 229
How to run Problems of Comparable Magnitude, 229
Connectedness command with "you" added, 229
PAB No. 131, 1 Mar. 1958 THE SCALE OF WITHHOLD, 230
Why mental machinery is made, 230
Facsimiles are control mechanisms, 231
Ability to hold on to things, 232
Scale of withhold, 233
PAB No. 132, 15 Mar. 1958 REPORT ON TWO CASES THAT HAVE RECEIVED
PSYCHIATRIC AND EURO-RUSSIAN THERAPY FROM THE
GOVERNMENT, 234
HCO B 22 Mar. 1958 CLEARING REALITY, 235
Rule regarding reality on terminal, 235
Ability Issue 70, ca. Mar. 1958 DOES CLEARING CANCEL THE NEED FOR
TRAINING?, 236
Clear needs training, 237
Why Scientology is senior to life, 237
PAB No. 133,1 Apr. 1958 PROCEDURE CCH, 238
Steps and purpose of CCH Zero, 238
CCH I known as "Give me that hand", 240
Reality Scale and CCH 1, 240
HCO B 2 Apr. 1958 ARC IN COMM COURSE, 242
Formal auditing and Tone 40 auditing, two different types of
auditing, 242
HCO B 8 Apr. 1958 AUDITING THE PC ON CLEAR PROCEDURE, 243
Two processes clear a pc: Help, CCH Ob and Step 6, Mock-ups, 243
Barriers to auditing, 244
HCO B 8 Apr. 1958 A PAIR OF PROCESSES, 245
Op Pro by Dup, 245
Forgetting, 6-way bracket, 245
HCO B 11 Apr. 1958 CCH 88-ENFORCED NOTHINGNESS, 246
Enforced Nothingness, CCH 88, increases havingness, 246
OCA/APA high critical cured by CCH 88, Enforced Nothingness, 246
PAB No. 134,15 Apr. 1958 PROCEDURE CCH CONTINUED, 247
Commands and goal of CCH 2 (Tone 40 8-C), 247
Product, purpose and procedure of CCH 3 (Book Mimicry), 247
Purpose and procedure of CCH 4 (Hand Space Mimicry), 248
A CCH case history, 249
HCO B 23 Apr. 1958 VITAL TRAINING DATA FOR TRAINING HATS AND REGISTRAR, 250
Ability Issue 72, ca. Apr. 1958 HOW WE WORK ON THE THIRD DYNAMIC, 251
Barbarian societies, 251
Insanity of governments, 251
How to cure barbarism, 252
HCO B 1 May 1958 SIGNS OF SUCCESS, 253
What is a squirrel, 253
PAB No. 135, 1 May 1958 PROCEDURE CCH CONTINUED, 254
Purpose, procedure and commands of CCH 5 (Tone 40 Locational
Processing), 254
Purpose, procedure and commands of CCH 6 (Opening Procedure by
Duplication 1957), 254
CCH 7, 8, 9: Tone 40 8-C processes, 255
How to bring preclear's thinkingness under control, 255
Commands of CCH 12 (Limited Subjective Havingness), 256
Commands of CCH 13 (Subjective Solids), 256
HCO B 2 May 1958 BEINGNESS AGAIN, 257
Best solution to valences is beingness processing, 257
Assumption of beingness, 257
Ability Issue 73, ca. May 1958 ASSISTS IN SCIENTOLOGY, 259
Difference between formal session and assist, 260
What techniques comprise an assist, 260
How to help in an emergency, 261
How to handle confusion, 262
Example of an assist on an accident, 263
HCO B 9 May 1958 WHO SHOULD TAKE WHICH CLASS, 264
PAB No. 136, 15 May 1958 PROCEDURE CCH CONTINUED, 265
CCH 14, Then and Now Solids, 265
Procedure and purpose of CCH 14, 265
Procedure CCH (long form), 267
HCO B 22 May 1958 ENEMIES OF THE PC, 268
Run Help on enemies of pc, 268
Ability Issue 74, ca. May 1958 SCIENTOLOGY AND THE REACTIVE MIND, 269
Primary characteristic of reactive mind, 269
Clearing in Dianetics vs. clearing in Scientology, 270
HCO B 24 May 1958 A COMMENT ON BEINGNESS PROCESSING, 271
Beingness again, 271
Assumption of beingness, 271
HCO B 29 May 1958 STANDARD CLEAR PROCEDURE AND AN
EXPERIMENTAL ROAD: CLEARING BY VALENCES, 273
Description of 1947-1949 clearing, 273
Standard Clearing Procedure, 274
Clearing by Valences, 274
HCO B 29 May 1958 AN EXAMPLE OF CLEARING BY VALENCES, 276
LRH session, Clearing by Valences, 276
PAB No. 137, 1 June 1958 SOME MORE CCH PROCESSES, 278
Commands of and how to run Control Trio, 278
How to establish goals, 279
Losses and exteriorization, 280
Characteristics of a Scientologist, 281
Ability Issue 76, ca. June 1958 "OFFBEAT" PROCESSING, 282
Experimental auditing and standard techniques, 282
Goal of Scientology, 283
HCO B 4 June 1958 RUNNING VALENCES, 284
Commands for Wasting Valence, 284
Never run pro-survival valences, 284
HCO B 14 June 1958 STANDARDIZATION OF CLEAR PROCEDURE, 285
Four points of auditing error, 285
What Clear Procedure consists of, 285
Standardize valences, 285
Eliminate Wasting Help, 285
Ability Issue 77, ca. June 1958 LEARNING HOW TO "CLEAR", 286
Know-how in auditing to clear, 286
Hubbard Clearing Scientologist Course, 287
Ladder of courses, 288
HCO B 30 June 1958 PROCEDURE FOR CERTIFYING CLEARS, 289
HCO B 7 July 1958 CONTENTS AND COVERAGE OF HCA/HPA COURSE, 291
HCO B 9 July 1958 STAFF CLEARING, 291
HCO B 12 July 1958 STANDARDIZATION OF CLEAR PROCESSES, 292
Four points of auditing error, 292
What Clear Procedure consists of, 292
Standardize valences, 29 2
HCO B 14 July 1958 20TH ACC TRAINING PROCEDURE, 294
CCH 0, 294
ARC Straight Wire, 294
Start-C-S oldest version, 294
Connectedness, control version, 294
Help-5 or 9 way bracket, 294
Step 6 as in Clear Procedure, 295
HCO B 1 5 July 1 958 CARRYING ON, 295
Org staffs carrying on while some of their members attend 20th ACC,
295
HCO B 28 July 1958 CLEAR PROCEDURE, 296
CCH 0-Starting session, 296
ARC break, 296
Start-Change-Stop, 296
Use and commands of Connectedness, 297
Scouting and running Help, 297
How to clear commands, 298
Clear Procedure, Step Six, 298
HCO B 29 July 1958 THE ROCK, 299
HCO B 5 Aug. 1958 THE BASIC LOCATING QUESTION OF THE ROCK, 300
Rock bracket, 3 00
HCO B 10 Aug. 1958 ACC AUXILIARY PROCEDURE, 301
Start session, 301
Clear auditor with pc, 301
Get pc into session, 301
Clear key words, 301
Clear up psychosomatics, 302
Clear up states of mind, 302
Isolate basic rock, 302
Run general Help and Step 6, 302
HCO B 20 Aug. 1958 PRESENT TIME PROBLEM-RUNNING OF, 303
HCO B 20 Aug. 1958 OUT OF SESSIONNESS, 304
HCO B 28 Aug. 1958 CHANGE AUDITOR'S CODE, 306
HCO B 3 Sept. 1958 HCA COURSE EXAMINATION, 306
HCO B 12 Sept. 1958 POST CASE ANALYSIS ROUTINE, 307
Clearing auditor with the pc after D of P interview, 307
HCO B 12 Sept. 1958 HAVINGNESS-NEW COMMANDS, 307
Factual Havingness, 307
HCO B 15 Sept. 1958 MORE ON TRAINING DRILL TWO, 308
Avoidance of double acknowledgement, 308
Mis-acknowledgement of pc, 308
HCO B 29 Sept. 1958 VITAL TRAINING DATA, 309
Case of a student, 309
Academy training, 309
HCO B 15 Oct. 1958 ACC CLEAR PROCEDURE, 311
ARC in auditing, 311
Theory of auditing, 312
Reality level of pc, 312
CCH 1, Give me that hand, Tone 40, 313
CCH 2, Tone 40 8-C, 313
CCH 3, Hand Space Mimicry, 314
CCH 4, Book Mimicry, 314
CCH 0, 314
Present time problem, 315
TR 11, ARC Straight Wire, 316
Start-Change-Stop, 317
Connectedness, 317
CCH 3(c), S-C-S on a person, 317
Commands of GP-3, Connectedness, 318
Factual Havingness commands, 318
Confrontingness, 318
Body Confrontingness, 319
Subjective Confrontingness, 319
Participation, 319
Survival, 320
Creating, 320
Help, 320
Help on the rock, 320
General Help bracket, 321
Responsibility, 321
Answers, 321
Origins (originations), 321
The buttons, 321
How to run Clear Procedure, Step 6, 322
PAB No. 146, 15 Oct. 1958 PROCEDURE CCH, 323
Commands of and how to run Trio, 323
Exteriorization and loss, 324
Think of something you might withhold from (valence) [process], 325
Locational Processing and Problems of Comparable or Incomparable
Magnitude, which to run, 325
Goals as a process, 326
Clearing up a goal, 327
Ability Issue 83, ca. Oct. 1958 NEW HCA COURSE YOU CAN BEGIN AT HOME, 328
A Scientologist in his training must approximate the route of actual
research and discovery, 328 Length of time to become an auditor, 329
Training plan, 330
Frailties of "correspondence courses" , 331
Scientologists can get the job done, 332
HCO B 25 Oct. 1958 ABBREVIATIONS, 334
Abbreviations of Director of Processing and Director of Procurement,
334
HCO B 27 Oct. 1958 HOW TO READ PROFILES ON OCA: COMPARING
CURRENT WEEK PROFILE WITH WEEK BEFORE, 334
PAB No. 147, 1 Nov. 1958 COMMUNICATION COURSE, 335
TR One and Tone 40 on an Object, 335
Communicating to a specific individual, 336
How to communicate to a group, 336
How to do TR One, 337
Can you own ideas, 337
HCO B 3 Nov. 1958 AMERICAN COLLEGE OF PERSONNEL EFFICIENCY, DUBLIN, 338
HCO B 7 Nov. 1958 HPA COURSES FOR STAFF, 339
HCO B 11 Nov. 1958 ACC SCHEDULE, 339
HCO B 13 Nov. 1958 TR 9 (b) AND TR 9 (c), 340
Training 9 (b), Starting the session, 340
Training 9 (c), Ending the session, 340
HCO B 17 Nov. 1958 CLEAR BRACELETS, 341
HCO B 25 Nov. 1958 STEP 6, 341
Academy Training Bulletin 25 Nov. 1958 TECHNIQUES TO BE USED ON HGC
PRECLEARS, 342
Certainty Vol. 5, No. 22, ca. Nov. 1958 VIOLENCE, 343
Violence leads to barbarianism, 343
Ability Issue 85, ca. Nov. 1958 THE THEORY OF TRAINING IN SCIENTOLOGY, 344
How students are handled, 344
Gradient scale in training, 345
Evaluation of importance of data in philosophy, 346
HCO B 26 Nov. 1958 ACCs, 347
Schedules of ACCs, 347
HCO B 1 Dec. 1958 PEOPLE PERMITTED TO AUDIT ENGRAMS BY SCIENTOLOGY
PROCESSES, 348
PAB No. 149, 1 Dec. 1958 DUMMY AUDITING-STEP TWO: ACKNOWLEDGMENT, 349
Acknowledgment is a control factor, 349
Reason for obsessive talking, 350
How TR Two is done, 350
HCO B 6 Dec. 1958 HOW TO RUN AN ENGRAM, 352
Locating the engram, 352
HCO B 7 Dec. 1958 TRAINING DRILL CHANGE, 353
TR 5N to replace TR 5 as Comm Course drill, 353
PAB No. 150,15 Dec. 1958 DUMMY AUDITING-STEP THREE: DUPLICATION, 354
Theory of TR Three, 355
Auditor must be able to duplicate, 355
How TR Three can unjam the track, 356
HCO B 16 Dec. 1958 EXTENSION COURSE CURRICULUM, 357
How to write an Extension Course section, 358
HCO B 17 Dec. 1958 BASIC POSTULATE OF OVERT ACT-MOTIVATOR SEQUENCE, 359
HCO B 17 Dec. 1958 AUDITING ARC BREAKS ON REGISTRAR AND
ASSISTANT REGISTRAR, 360
HCO B 20 Dec. 1958 PROCESSING A NEW MOTHER, 361
Ideal conditions for birth, 361
How to run out the delivery, 361
How to handle new baby, 361
HCO B 22 Dec. 1958 NEW HGC PROCESS-A NEW STRAIGHT WIRE, 363
Commands of and how to run ARC Break Straight Wire, 363
Good and bad points of ARC Break Straight Wire, 364
Cause of husband and wife quarrel, 364
Ability Issue 86 M, ca. Dec. 1958 SOMETHING HAS HAPPENED!!!, 365
Technical advances-engram running, TRs, styles of auditing, 365
HCO B 26 Dec. 1958 B.SCN/HCS COURSE, 366
HCO B 27 Dec. 1958 THE FIRST FIRST DYNAMIC PROCESS, 367
Invent something worse than you [process], 367
HCO B 28 Dec. 1958 SHORT SESSIONING, 368
Short sessioning as a technique, 368
HCO B 31 Dec. 1958 ACC CLEAR PROCEDURE CHANGE, 369
Omit "What part of that can you confront best?" from ACC Clear
Procedure, 369
PAB No. 151, 1 Jan. 1959 DUMMY AUDITING-STEP FOUR: HANDLING
ORIGINATIONS, 370
What is an origination of the preclear, 370
How to handle originations, 371
Three steps in handling an origin, 372
What is a communication bridge, 373
Ability Issue 87, ca. Jan. 1959 WHAT ARE CLEARS?, 375
Three grades of Clear, 375
Mest clear, 375
Theta clear, 3 7 5
Operating Thetan, 375
Difference between mest clear and theta clear, 376
The 1959 HCA Course becomes a Clearing Course, 376
Clearing processes for mest clear, 377
HCO B 6 Jan. 1959 FIELD ACTIVITIES, 378
Bringing order is keynote of handling any area, 378
Auditor confidence, 379
Key rehabilitation process, 379
Group recruiting, 379
HCO B 6 Jan. 1959 CHANGE OF HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 DECEMBER 1958, 380
HCO B 10 Jan. 1959 HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES, 381
OCA/APA low pcs, 381
OCA/APA medium pcs, 381
OCA/APA high pcs, 381
Other processes for all, 381
Result retarders, 3 82
Clearing procedures, 382
HCO B 11 Jan. 1959 AN AMUSINGLY EFFECTIVE PROCESS, 383
Invent a Problem, 383
HCO B 12 Jan. 1959 TONE OF VOICE-ACKNOWLEDGEMENT, 383
PAB No. 152,15 Jan. 1959 THE FIVE LEVELS OF INDOCTRINATION, 384
Five dummy auditing processes, 384
8-C, 384
High School Indoctrination, 384
How to flunk Upper Indoc TRs, 385
Tone 40 on an Object, 385
Tone 40 on a Person, 386
HCO B 19 Jan. 1959 NEW HCA/HPA COURSE, 387
HCO B 20 Jan. 1959 ACC PREPARATORY PROCESS SCHEDULE FOR
RUNNING ENGRAMS, 389
Commands of and how to run Selected Persons Overt Acts, 389
Commands of and how to run Overt Act Straight Wire, 389
Commands of and how to run ARC Break Straight Wire, 389
Dating incidents with E-Meter, 389
HCO B 22 Jan. 1959 NOT-IS STRAIGHT WIRE, 390
Pcs divide into three general classes, 390
Commands of Not-Is Straight Wire, 390
Ability Issue 88 M, ca. Jan. 1959 A CAMPAIGN FOR ETHICAL AUDITING, 391
Ethical standards in America, 391
"Bring Order"-the motto of HCO, 391
What an ethical auditor does, 392
What an unethical auditor does, 392
HCO B 24 Jan. 1959 SCIENTOLOGY AXIOM 58, 393
PAB No. 153, 1 Feb. 1959 CCH, 394
Order of training processes, 394
Simple 8-C, 394
Locational Processing, 394
Locational, Body and Room, 394
Objective Show Me, 39 5
Attention by Duplication 9, Number 4, 395
Opening Procedure by Duplication, fatal to interrupt process, 396
HCO B 3 Feb. 1959 HGC CURRENT PROCEDURE, 397
Selected Persons Overts Straightwire, 397
Auditor crimes, 397
Gradual scale of processes, 397
HCO B 3 Feb. 1959 FLATTENING A PROCESS, 398
HCO B 4 Feb. 1959 OP. PRO. BY DUP., 399
Commands of and how to run Opening Procedure by Duplication, 399
PAB No. 154,15 Feb. 1959 CCH (Concluded), 400
Subjective Havingness, 400
Book Mimicry, 400
Hand Space Mimicry, 401
Trio, 401
HCO B 16 Feb. 1959 HGC PROCESSES FOR THOSE TRAINED IN ENGRAM RUNNING OR
TRAINED IN THESE PROCESSES, 402
Starting a case, 402
Present time problem by Selected Persons O/W Straight Wire, 402
Dynamic Straight Wire, 402
Past and Future Experience, 403
Engram Running, 403
Not-Is Straight Wire, 403
16 Feb. 1959 STAFF AUDITORS' CONFERENCE OF FEBRUARY 16,1959, 404
Undercutting cases, 404
Confront Scale is the scale of disintegrating reality, 404
Reality Scale and engram running, 405
Present time problem handling, 405
Commands of and how to run Selected Person Overt-Withhold, 406
How to run Dynamic Straight Wire, 407
Past and Future Experience, 408
Engram Running, 409
Past deaths of famous historical figures, 411
Commands of and how to run Not-Is Straight Wire, 412
Effects of withholds, 413
Questions and answers, 414
Overt and motivator engrams, 414
Dynamic Straight Wire, 414
Recall a time vs. Recall something, 415
Magnitudes of overt and motivator, 416
Muzzled auditing of engrams, 416
HCO B 19 Feb. 1959 AUDITOR'S CODE No. 19, 417
HCO B 24 Feb. 1959 SELECTED PERSONS OVERT WITHHOLD STRAIGHTWIRE, 417
HCO B 26 Feb. 1959 IDENTIFICATION, 418
HCO B 26 Feb. 1959 ENGRAM RUNNING ON OLD DIANETIC CASES OR
RESTARTED CASES, 419
Running incidents, 419
Running out bad auditing, 419
Ability Issue 90 M, ca. Feb. 1959 HOW TO STUDY SCIENTOLOGY, 420
Two ways man ordinarily accepts things, 420
Evaluation of data, 421
A look at the sciences, 423
How war can come about, 423
Fundamentals, 424
Learning isn't memorizing, 424
HCO B 27 Feb. 1959 HOW TO SELECT SELECTED PERSONS, 427
HCO B 28 Feb. 1959 ANALYSIS OF CASES, 428
Definitions of results, better, ability gain and intelligence gain,
428
Unfixing attention, 428
HCO B 28 Feb. 1959 ARC BREAKS WITH AUDITORS, 430
HCO B 28 Feb. 1959 CLEARING COMMANDS, 430
HCO B 1 Mar. 1959 TWO RULES FOR HAPPY LIVING, 431
Be able to experience anything, 431
Cause only those things which others are able to experience easily,
431
PAB No. 155,1 Mar. 1959 PROCESSES USED IN 21ST ACC, 433
Dynamic Straightwire, 433
Reality of terminals, 433
Choosing terminals, 434
Commands of and how to run Selected Person Overts, 434
Commands of General Overts and Not-Is Straightwire, 435
HCO B 4 Mar. 1959 HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES, 436 [CANCELLED]
Processes on gradient scale from unconscious pc to theta clear, 436
When muzzled auditing should be used, 436
HCO B 6 Mar. 1959 TRAINING DRILLS, 437
ARC break handling, 437
HCO B 6 Mar. 1959 HOW TO DO A DIAGNOSIS ON DYNAMIC
STRAIGHTWIRE, 438
HCO B 10 Mar. 1959 SUPPLEMENTAL DATA SHEET TO HCO BULLETIN OF FEB. 16, 1959
AND STAFF AUDITORS' CONFERENCE OF FEB. 16, 1959, 439
Route Theta Clear, list of processes, 439
HAS Co-Audit processes, 439
HCO B 13 Mar. 1959 MUZZLED AUDITING, 440
PAB No. 156; 15 Mar. 1959 PROCESSES USED IN 21ST ACC, 441
Straightwire processes run muzzled, 441
Muzzled auditing, 441
Overts, 442
HCO B 17 Mar. 1959 AN INSANITY QUESTIONNAIRE, 443
HCO B 17 Mar. 1959 DO IT YOURSELF THERAPY, 444
Successful way for the untrained person to make it all the way to
release, 444
Ability Issue 92 M, ca. Mar. 1959 THE SUBJECT OF CLEARING, 445
State of release, 445
Mest clearing, 446
Confrontingness Scale of Reality, 447
Theta clearing, 447
Length of time used in processing, 447
HCOB 24 Mar. 1959 HAS CO-AUDIT, 449
Magazine-majors and minors, 449
HCO B 24 Mar. 1959 MINIMUM STANDARDS, 450
Minimum inflow of students and preclears, 450
HCO B 25 Mar. 1959 HAS CO-AUDIT & COMM COURSE, 451
Communication Course, 451
HAS Co-Audit Course, 451
How to run a co-audit, 452
PAB No. 157,1 Apr. 1959 PROCESSES USED IN 21ST ACC (Concluded), 453
Engram commands, 453
ARC Break Straightwire, 453
SCS Control Process, Thinking version, 454
Valences, 454
HCO B 3 Apr. 1959 HAS CO-AUDIT AND COMM COURSE, 456
HCO B 14 Apr. 1959 LETTER FROM AUSTRALIA, 458
HCO B 15 Apr. 1959 EMOTIONAL TONE SCALE EXPANDED, 459
HCO B 17 Apr. 1959 KNOW TO MYSTERY STRAIGHT WIRE FOR
EXTREME CASES, 460
Know to Mystery Scale expanded, 460
HCO B 22 Apr. 1959 OLD AND NEW REALITY SCALE, 461
HCO B 23 Apr. 1959 DEFINITIONS, 462
Definitions of consultant, instructor and coach, 462
HCO B 3 May 1959 SOLUTION TO SOLUTIONS, 462
Problems and solutions, 462
Penalty of solving problems, 462
HCO B 4 May 1959 AN AFFINITY PROCESS, 463
HCO B 4 May 1959 HOW TO WRITE A CURRICULUM, 464
HCO B 7 May 1959 NEW PROCESS, 465
Picture of aberration, 465
Why a thetan makes his postulate fail to stick, 465
A new process: Locational Communication, 466
HCO B 8 May 1959 AN UN-DOABLE COMMAND, 467
HCO B 21 May 1959 HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES AND ACC PROCESSES AS
OF MAY 21, 1959, 468
Theta clear schedule, 468
Case remedies, 468
HAS Co-Audit allowed process, 469
HCO B 26 May 1959 MAN WHO INVENTED SCIENTOLOGY, 470
Career of L. Ron Hubbard, 470
Dianetics, the branch of Scientology which deals with mental anatomy,
470
Translations of Scientology books, 471
HCO B 5 June 1959 FORMULA 10, 472
Formula 10-an approach to OT, 472
HCO B 6 June 1959 WHEN CASES CRACK WELL ON SELECTED PERSONS
OVERTS WITHHOLD, 473
Route for staff processing, 473
HCO B 9 June 1959 NEEDED MATERIAL, 474
HPA/BScn Course lectures, 474
6th London ACC tapes tell how to run an HAS Co-Audit Course, 474
HCO B 10 June 1959 CO-AUDIT FORMULA, 475
HCO B 11 June 1959 THE DATES OF THE AUSTRALIAN ACC, 475
HCO B 22 June 1959 HOW TO "SELL SCIENTOLOGY", 476
Disseminate Scientology without telling what it is, 476
HCO B 23 June 1959 CLEAR TEST, 476
HCO B 23 June 1959 WHAT IS SCIENTOLOGY, 477
HCO PL 2 July 1959 ADD FORMULA 10, 478
Process S2-"From where could you communicate to a victim?", 478
Process S22-"Think of a place from which you could communicate to a
victim", 478
HCO B 3 July 1959 GENERAL INFORMATION, 479
Six basic process types, 479
Starting and Ending Sessions, 479
Control Processes, 479
Duplication Processes, 479
Subjective Processes, 479
Objective Processes, 480
Straight Wire, 480
Definitions of thetan, mind and body, 480
The CCH Processes-Tone 40 auditing; their commands and procedure, 480
CCH 1, Give me that hand, Tone 40, 480
CCH 2, Tone 40 8-C, 481
CCH 3, Hand Space Mimicry, 481
CCH 4, Book Mimicry, 482
Method of running CCH 1, 2, 3, 4, 482
ARC Straight Wire as a training process, 483
Terminal Assessment for Overt-Withhold Process, 484
Dynamic and Know to Mystery scouting, 484
Selected Persons scout, 484
Overt-Withhold Selected Persons Straight Wire as a training process,
485
Factual Havingness, 486
Third Rail, a special form of Factual Havingness, 486
Rudiments, 487
Mock up a picture for which you can be totally responsible [process],
487
Re-experience and Experience Process, 488
Present Time Problems, 488
ARC Break Straight Wire, 489
Not-Is Straight Wire, 489
Scale of processes taught in HCA/HPA, 489
HCO B 9 July 1959 DEFINITION OF SCIENTOLOGY-WRITTEN BY LRH FOR LEGAL WHEN
SETTING UP HASI LTD, 491
HCO B 14 July 1959 SPECIAL INFORMATION FOR FRANCHISE HOLDERS, 492
Addresses, 492
Interim franchise, 492
HCO B 17 July 1959 AFRICA OVER THE TOP, 494
HCO B 18 July 1959 TECHNICALLY SPEAKING, 494
Victims, 494
HCO B 18 July 1959 INCOME TAX REFORM, 495
HCO B 21 July 1959 HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES, 497
Case remedies, 497
HAS Co-Audit, 498
HCO B 22 July 1959 ACTUAL WORKING DEFINITION OF PSYCHOLOGY, 499
HCO B 28 July 1959 OUR GOALS, 500
Exact plan of a centre, 500
Clearing Earth, 501
HCO B 5 Aug. 1959 HGC PROCESSES, 502
Regimen to be followed, 502
HCO B 7 Aug. 1959 THE HANDLING OF COMMUNICATION PROCESSES
-SOME RAPID DATA, 503
Essentials of use of Communication Processes, 503
Generalized terminals vs. proper names, 503
Use of E-Meter, 504
Cautions regarding Communication Processes, 505
HCO B 12 Aug. 1959 A SECOND TYPE OF FRANCHISE, 506
HCO Processing Franchise, 506
Exchanging types of franchises, 506
Percentages to be sent to HCO WW, 507
Cable, don't phone, 508
Buttons we want flat on everybody in Scientology: victim, money, 508
HCO B 13 Aug. 1959 SUGGESTED HCA COURSE SCHEDULE, 509
HCO B 13 Aug. 1959 FRANCHISE HOLDERS, 512
What UK franchise holders need to do, 512
HCO B 19 Aug. 1959 HAS CO-AUDIT-FINDING TERMINALS, 513
HCO B 19 Aug. 1959 TO A ROMAN CATHOLIC, 514
Scientology demands no belief or faith and thus is not in conflict
with faith, 514
HCO B 27 Aug. 1959 GROWTH WITH COMPETENCE, 515
A central org can succeed as far as it can service, 515
Victim is central button of overt act-motivator sequence, 516
How to audit victim item, 516
Organization and victim button, 517
HCO B 3 Sept. 1959 WHY "VICTIM" WORKS AS A PROCESS, 518
Cases not to run on victim process, 519
Pcs have service facsimiles so they can be victims, 519
When is victim flat, 520
HCO B 9 Sept. 1959 A SHORT STORY BY CABLE, 521
Fast dispatch lines handle awkward situations, 521
HCO B 14 Sept. 1959 NEWS BULLETIN, 522
Saint Hill Manor, 522
Application of Scientology to the fifth dynamic, 522
HCO B 25 Sept. 1959 HAS CO-AUDIT, 524
How to run Comm Processes on assessment, 524
Universal Processes, 524
HCO B 26 Sept. 1959 DATA ON CLEARING A STAFF MEMBER AFTER SPECIFIC
TERMINALS ARE FLAT WITH OVERT WITHHOLD STRAIGHT WIRE, 525
HCO B 28 Sept. 1959 TECHNICAL NOTES ON CHILD PROCESSING, 526
Processes for different types of children, 526
HCO B 29 Sept. 1959 THE ORGANIZATION OF A PE FOUNDATION, 527
PE Course curriculum, 527
PE Foundation personnel, 528
HCO B 29 Sept. 1959 UNIVERSE PROCESSES, 529
Universe O/W, 5 29
HCO B 5 Oct. 1959 UNIVERSE PROCESSES, 530
Universe O/W, 530
Universe Comm Process, 531
HCO B 13 Oct. 1959 A USEFUL PROCESS, 532
For pcs who cannot seem to plumb an overt/motivator sequence, 532
HCO B 13 Oct. 1959 D.E.I. EXPANDED SCALE, 533
Evolution of the D.E.I. Scale, 533
Basic scale of selling, 533
Comm Processes and D.E.I. Scale, 534
HCO B 14 Oct. 1959 LONDON UP, 535
HCO B 15 Oct. 1959 MY WHEREABOUTS IN NOVEMBER, 535
HCO B 20 Oct. 1959 AN EXPERIMENTAL PROCESS, 536
Comm Recall Process, 536
Know Mystery Recall Processes, 536
Basic Affinity Process, 536
HCO B 25 Oct. 1959 PSYCHOANALYSIS GOES CAPITALISTIC, 537
HCO B 30 Oct. 1959 TO RETAIN CO-AUDIT PC'S INTEREST IN CASE, 538
HCO B 31 Oct. 1959 CREATE PROCESSES-DANGERS & ADVANTAGES, 539
What would you like to create [process], 539
What would you like to confront [process], 539
What would you like to destroy [process], 539
Ability Issue 107, ca. Nov. 1959 ON BRINGING ORDER, 541
HCO B 12 Nov. 1959 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS IN AUDITING, 543
Avoidance of double acknowledgement, 543
Misacknowledgement, 543
HCO B 18 Nov. 1959 1ST MELBOURNE ACC MATERIAL, 545
HCO B 18 Nov. 1959 CONGRATULATIONS HASI-SOUTH AFRICA, 546
HCO B 4 Dec. 1959 ALLOWED PROCESSES 1ST MELBOURNE ACC, 547
Melbourne 1, 547
Melbourne 2, 547
Melbourne 3, 547
Melbourne 4, 547
Melbourne 5, 547
HCO B 11 Dec. 1959 NEW HORIZONS IN SCIENTOLOGY, 548
Scientology organizational goals, 548
HCO B 15 Dec. 1959 HAS CO-AUDIT, 550
Process to use on HAS Co-Audit, 550
HCO B 15 Dec. 1959 URGENT CHANGE IN ALL CO-AUDIT COURSES, 551
Full responsibility, 551
PE Co-Audit process, 552
HCO B 16 Dec. 1959 RESPONSIBILITY FOR O/Ws, 552
Ability Issue 110, ca. Dec. 1959 TECHNIQUES OF CHILD PROCESSING, 553
Type of Child Processing session, 553
Short sessioning works very well with a child, 553
Assists on children, 554
Routine Child Processes, 554
Children with rough cases, 554
Instilling confidence in children, 554
Recall Processes on children, 554
HCO B 23 Dec. 1959 RESPONSIBILITY, 555
Responsibility and past lives, 555
Reason for blows, 555
HCO B 31 Dec. 1959 BLOW-OFFS, 557
The reason behind blow-offs, 557
Blowing can cause repercussions, 558
P.A.B. No. 103
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 January 1957
So we're cause again. Here is the Code of a Scientologist being used as
a pattern for the medicos in the United States.
"The Code of a Scientologist"
As a Scientologist, I pledge myself to the Code of Scientology for the
good of all:
l. To hear or speak no word of disparagement to the press, public or
preclears concerning any of my fellow Scientologists, our professional
organization or those whose names are closely connected to this
science.
2. To use the best I know of Scientology, to the best of my ability, to
better my preclears, groups and the world.
3. To refuse to accept for processing, and to refuse to accept money
from, any preclear or group I feel I cannot honestly help.
4. To punish to the fullest extent of my power anyone misusing or
degrading Scientology to harmful ends.
5. To prevent the use of Scientology in advertisements of other
products.
6. To discourage the abuse of Scientology in the press.
7. To employ Scientology to the greatest good of the greatest number of
dynamics.
8. To render good processing, sound training and good discipline to
those students or peoples entrusted to my care.
9. To refuse to impart the personal secrets of my preclears.
10. To engage in no unseemly disputes with the uninformed on the subject
of my profession."
Using it, the A.M.A. has now proposed the following code for all
medicos as given in "The Doctor's New Conscience" in Look Magazine,
December 11, 1956. You see, they aren't completely brave:
"The A.M.A.'s Proposed Principles of Medical Ethics"
These principles are intended to serve physicians, individually or
collectively, as a guide to ethical conduct. They are not laws; rather they
are standards by which a physician may determine the propriety of his own
conduct. They are intended to aid physicians in their relationship with
patients, with colleagues, with members of allied professions and with the
public, to maintain, under God, as they have through the ages, the highest
moral standards.
l. The prime objective of the medical profession is to render service to
humanity with full respect for both the dignity of man and the rights
of patients. Physicians must merit the confidence of those entrusted to
their care, rendering to each a full measure of service and devotion.
2. Physicians should strive continuously to improve their medical
knowledge and skill and should make available the benefits of their
professional attainments.
3. A physician should not base his practice on an exclusive dogma or a
sectarian system, nor should he associate voluntarily with those who
indulge in such practices,
4. The medical profession must be safeguarded against members deficient
in moral character and professional competence. Physicians should
observe all laws, uphold the dignity and honor of the profession and
accept its self-imposed disciplines. They should expose, without
hesitation, illegal or unethical conduct of fellow members of the
profession.
5. Except in emergencies, a physician may choose whom he will serve.
Having undertaken the care of a patient, the physician may not neglect
him. Unless he has been discharged, he may discontinue his services
only after having given adequate notice. He should not solicit
patients.
6. A physician should not dispose of his services under terms or
conditions which will interfere with or impair the free and complete
exercise of his independent medical judgment and skill or cause
deterioration of the quality of medical care.
7. In the practice of medicine, a physician should limit the source of
his professional income to medical services actually rendered by him to
his patient.
8. A physician should seek consultation in doubtful or difficult cases,
upon request or when it appears that the quality of medical service may
be enhanced thereby.
9. Confidence entrusted to physicians or deficiencies observed in the
disposition or character of patients, during the course of medical
attendance, should not be revealed except as required by law or unless
it becomes necessary in order to protect the health and welfare of the
individual or the community.
10. The responsibilities of the physician extend not only to the
individual but also to society and demand his cooperation and
participation in activities which have as their objective the
improvement of the health and welfare of the individual and the
community."
We are advising them to use our Number 3. You see how they recoiled
from it.
16TH AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
2 January-11 February 1957
L. Ron Hubbard gave the following lectures to students attending the
16th American ACC in Washington, D.C:
5701C02 16ACC-1 Course Outline
5701C03 16ACC-2 Reality Scale in Action
5701C05 16ACC-3 Havingness: Particles, Solids, Spaces
5701C07 16ACC-4 Learning Process: No-Game Condition
5701C08 16ACC-5 Agreements and Postulates of the 8 Dynamics
** 5701C09 16ACC-6 Obnosis
** 5701C10 16ACC-7 The Postulate of Game
5701C11 16ACC-8 Postulates of Action-Reaction
** 5701C14 16ACC-9 Control
5701C15 16ACC-10 Evil
5701C16 16ACC-11 Havingness
** 5701C17 16ACC-12 Communication, Randomities of
5701C18 16ACC-13 Auditing Techniques: Self-Denial,
Responsibility
5701C22 16ACC-14 Auditing Techniques: Order of Processes
5701C23 16ACC-15 Auditing Techniques: Scale of Processes
** 5701 C24 16ACC-16 Auditing Techniques: Altering Cases
5701C25 16ACC-17 Auditing Techniques: Specifics
5701C28 16ACC-18 Auditing Techniques: Stimulus response
5701C29 16ACC-19 Auditing Techniques: Action, Reaction
5701C30 16ACC-20 Auditing Techniques: Workable and Unworkable
5701C31 16ACC-21 Auditing Techniques: Solids
5702C01 16ACC-22 Auditing Techniques: Games Conditions
5702C04 16ACC-23 Auditing Techniques: Procedure CCH
** 5702C05 16ACC-24 Auditing Techniques: How Far South?
5702C06 16ACC-25 Demonstration
5702C07 16ACC-26 Summation
5702C08 16ACC-27 General Use of Procedure
5702C11 16ACC-28 Question and Answer Period
5702C11 16ACC-29 Final Lecture-Question and Answers
All 16th American ACC lectures are listed above for convenience. They
are also listed on the following pages in date order sequence.
P.A.B. No. 105
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
l February 1957
THE STORY OF A STATIC
Once upon a time there was a thetan, and he was a happy little thetan
and the world was a simple thing. It was all very, very simple.
And then one day somebody told him he was simple.
And ever since that time he has been trying to prove that he is not.
And that is the history of the Universe, the Human Race, the Fifth
Invaders, the Fourth Invaders, the 31/2 Invaders, the people on Mars,
Saturn, Jupiter, Arcturus, the Markab Galaxy, the Markab System, the Psi
Galaxy, Galaxy 82-
I don't care where you look-that's the story.
Only it's too simple a story, much too simple a story, because a thetan
would have to admit he was simple if he understood it.
L R H
LRH TAPE LECTURE
Washington, D.C.
1-6 February 1957
5702C01 16ACC-22 Auditing Techniques: Games Conditions
5702C04 16ACC-23 Auditing Techniques: Procedure CCH
** 5702C05 16ACC-24 Auditing Techniques: How Far South?
5702C06 16ACC-25 Demonstration
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
HCO TRAINING BULLETIN OF 6 FEBRUARY 1957
The following procedure is not for general release to the field, and is
to be released only to organizational staff. The reason it is not being
generally released to the field is that very few auditors have the skill
necessary to run these techniques. The entirety of this will be released,
somewhat modified, and much more expanded, some time in the future, and
forms the backbone of a book. Therefore, I will appreciate your courtesy in
not releasing these techniques to anyone, but keeping them in the Clinic
until the book can be written, since you will scoop me if you do not, and
the book will have that much less meaningfulness and appeal. The reason I
am releasing these at this moment is that we need them, and we have every
right to use them, but I do not wish them to be generally released, since
they are actually so powerful that an auditor who is badly schooled would
not be able to handle them at all on preclears. He is better off using that
in which he has been trained. It will take a book to get him totally
oriented on this subject.
PROCEDURE CCH
This procedure has two forms, it has the long form and the short form.
The long form is omitted here since it is not necessary in any broad number
of cases, and the short form is entirely right out through the top.
The name, "CCH", is taken from Communication-Control-Havingness. These
are the immediate exercise targets of this procedure.
The goal of this procedure is to take the preclear from as far south as
preclears can be reached, straight on through as far north as a preclear
can be pushed. Therefore, the breadth of Procedure CCH is much greater than
any other auditing procedure ever released.
This procedure is covered rather adequately in the long series of
lectures of the 1 6th ACC which specifically cover technique. This does not
mean the entirety of the 16th ACC lectures, it means that section of the
16th ACC lectures which was immediately addressed to technique. A study of
these lectures is recommended before extensive use of Procedure CCH is
engaged upon in the Clinics. Copies of these lectures are being made
available to Washington and London.
The goal of the Auditor is to discover an ability in the preclear and
improve it.
The first discoverable ability of a preclear is communication in one
form or another. This even applies to a person in a comatose state. Such a
person quite ordinarily responds to tactile if you do not expect him to
acknowledge. He is not able to acknowledge our communication to him by
tactile since he at first cannot sufficiently or adequately control the
body in order to make the reply.
HPA/HCA PROCESSES
Group 1: Communication Processes, taught in Indoctrination:
* Parts of Communication
*A. "Look at me. Who am l ?"
*B. Hand contact mimicry. Commands: "Put your hands against mine," then
"mimic and contribute to the motion of my hands." Acknowledge when
the preclear has completed the command. Then say "Put your hands in
your
*- indicates to be taught in HPA & EICA Classes.
lap." Then the auditor does the same. Repeat this process.
*C. Hand Mimicry (gradient scale of spaces). Hand mimicry is run
the same as hand contact mimicry, with the following changes in the
commands: "Put your hands up facing mine, with about one inch
distance between your hands and mine." Then, "Mimic and contribute
to the motions of my hands, while maintaining the same distance
between our hands." Acknowledge. Then, "Put your hands in your
lap." Auditor then puts his hands in his lap. When this level of
the process is flat, the auditor then puts more space between
himself and the preclear, on a gradient scale, and changes the
distance part of the command accordingly. Use a gradient scale to a
limit of 3 feet.
*D. Mirror image hand mimicry. The commands are "Put your hands up
facing mine." "Mimic my commands mirror-wise; that is, when I move
my hand back, you move your hand back on the same side of the body,
and when I move my hands forward, you move your hands forward
correspondingly." "Good. Put your hands in your lap."
E. Full body mimicry. The auditor picks two spaces in the auditing
room, marking them out with chairs or other objects, or using the
rug. One space is for the preclear, and the other for the auditor.
The auditor explains to the preclear as follows: "I am going to
step into my space and deliver a command to you which will consist
of a series of body positions. When I have finished executing this
command I will step out of the space. You are then, without any
further command on my part, to step into your space and mimic the
command I have given. When you have finished doing that, then you
step out of that space and that will be the end of that command."
The process is then repeated. If the preclear is not doing a good
job of mimicking the auditor or is thrown into inordinately long
communication lags, the process may be run with the auditor
stepping into his space and giving the command while at the same
time, the preclear steps into his space and mimics the command.
That is to say, the command is executed simultaneously by the
auditor and the preclear instead of the auditor first executing it
and then the preclear following it, with a mimic.
Group II. Location-Control Processes:
Parts of Control
A. Locational. "Locate the __." The auditor has the preclear
locate the floor, the ceiling, the walls, the furniture in the
room, and other objects and bodies.
*B. Connectedness. "Look around here and find something you
wouldn't mind making connect with you." Make sure while running
this process that the preclear is making (causing) things to
connect with him rather than he connecting with the things. If he
connects with the things, it is a no-games condition. It is
important that this be stressed in the session.
*C. 8-C Solids. "Do you see that ____over there?" "Good." "Walk
over to it." "Good." "Touch it." "Good." "Now, make it a little
more solid." "Good." "Let go of____." "Good." The process is then
repeated, with the auditor selecting the object each time.
D. S-C-S. "I am going to tell you to start the body. Then I want
you to start the body." "All right." "Start the body." If the
preclear has started the body, he acknowledges the execution of the
command. The auditor then repeats this process. Note: These
commands must be used exactly, and be duplicated by the auditor.
You should also get the preclear's agreement to do it each time.
The change portion of S-C-S is run as follows: The auditor picks
and arranges with the preclear the location of three spots in the
room. The auditor then designates these spots as Spot A, Spot B,
and Spot C, and
has the preclear stand in one of them. The command, duplicated
each time, is as follows: "I'm going to tell you to change the body
from Spot ___ to Spot___. Then you change the body from___to___.
Okay?" When the preclear indicates that he has heard this and
understood, the auditor then gives the command, "Change the body
from___to___." Spots A, B and C may be chosen by the auditor in any
order. The Stop portion of S-C-S is run as follows: "I'm going to
tell you to get the body moving in that direction." The auditor
indicates a direction across the room. "I then want you to get the
body moving, and somewhere along the line I'll tell you to stop. I
then want you to stop the body." When the preclear has stopped his
body, the auditor then acknowledges and repeats the process and
commands. As in the previous two, the auditor always duplicates the
commands and gets the agreement of the preclear to make sure that
he has started, changed and stopped the body himself, while running
the above three processes.
Group III. Duplication Processes:
A. Opening Procedure by Duplication. "Go over to the___." "Look at
it." "Pick it up." "What is its colour?" "What is its temperature?"
"What is its weight?" "Put it down in exactly the same place." The
preclear obeys each command and answers each question in turn. The
auditor then says, indicating the other object, "Go over to
the___." "Look at it." "Pick it up." "What is its colour?" "What is
its temperature?" "What is its weight?" "Put it down in exactly the
same place." The auditor using the same words, same objects, and
the same formula over and over again. This process must be run with
good ARC at all times, and with a good duplication of the commands,
and with good control.
*B. Keep it from going away. The auditor asks the preclear to
select a number of objects in the room which appear real to the
preclear. The auditor then selects two of these objects. These
objects should be of a size that is easy to handle with the hands,
and of a significance as non-restimulative as possible to the
preclear. The auditor then selects two of these objects and places
them either on a table in front of the preclear within easy reach
and with some distance between them, or else on the arms of the
preclear's chair, one object on each arm. The commands of the
process are: "Pick up the___." "Good." "Keep it from going away."
"Good." When the preclear has kept it from going away for at least
an instant and with certainty, the auditor then says, "Put it back
exactly where you found it." "Good." The auditor then says,
indicating the other object, "Pick up the___." "Good." "Keep it
from going away." "Good." "Put it back exactly where you found it."
"Good." The process is repeated.
*C. Hold it still. The commands for this process and the execution
of it are the same as the process "Keep it from going away", with
the following exceptions: the command "Hold it still" is used in
place of the command "Keep it from going away".
Group IV. Havingness Processes:
Objective Havingness
A. Terrible Trio "Look around here and find something you would be
willing to have." "Look around here and find something you would be
willing to permit to remain where it is." "Look around here and
find something you would be willing to dispense with."
B. Trio on Valences. "Look around here and find something___can't
have." Run this command until flat then run "Look around here and
find something you can have." (NOTE: should be a person, such as
mother, father, sister, etc.)
C. Objective Solids. "Look around here and find something."
"Okay." "Make it a little more solid."
Group V. Subjective Havingness:
A. Subjective Havingness. "Mock up___." "Make it a little more
solid." "Do what you like with the mock-up." 1. Confusions; 2.
Wasting havingness.
B. Straight Wire. "Tell me something you would be willing to
forget." Preclear answers, auditor acknowledges. Repeat until flat.
*C. Then and Now Solids. "Get a facsimile." "Make it a little more
solid." "Look at the environment." "Make it a little more solid."
Repeat this process.
Group VI. Thought Processes:
A. Rising Scale. This run on emotion and/or attitude charts, by
running from the lowest to the top of the respective scale. "Put
into the wall." Preclear answers, auditor acknowledges. (Example,
"Put apathy into the wall," etc.)
*B. Present-time problem. "Invent a problem of Comparable Magnitude
to ___." "How could that be a problem to you?" The blank in this
case being a terminal; best to use a single terminal with a minimum
of condition.
C. Find a spot. "Look around here and find a place you could
light." Preclear answers, auditor acknowledges. "Invent a
consequence of your having lighted." Preclear answers, auditor
acknowledges.
*D. Thoughts in Walls.
(1) "Have the front wall say to you, 'This means go to___." Preclear
supplies the blank, the blank being a location. This is run on
front, back, right, left, ceiling and floor-use same order
throughout. After one round, you alternate "Have the front wall say
to you, 'This means don't go to ___." When these
alternates are flat, run:
(2) "Have the front wall say to you, 'This means stay in ___," which
is alternated with "Have the front wall say to you, 'This means
don't stay in___"
Run pairs (1) and (2) comparatively flat-this is the only process
for terror stomach.
E. Objective Not Know. "Look around here and find something you
wouldn't mind not knowing."
L. RON HUBBARD
This Bulletin subject to
correction
LRH: rs.lnd.rd
Copyright (�)1957
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Feb 6, 1957.
5702C07 16ACC-26 Summation
5702C08 16ACC-27 General Use of Procedure
5702C11 16ACC-28 Question and Answer Period
5702C11 16ACC-29 Final Lecture-Question and Answers
P.A.B. No. 106
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 February 1957
GOOD PROCESSES
Prepared from the research papers of L. Ron Hubbard
The material in recent PABs, much of it, has come from an LRH research
paper that still contains material, not covered, on some modern
processes and general theory of primary value. In the research paper it
is given in extremely staccato fashion, as the paper was the basis for
conferences where the material could be expanded. Here is some more of
the material.
The best processes are those which fastest convert unknowing games
conditions to knowing games conditions. This does not disregard the fact
that one's goal of processing might be, at a very far reach, the static. No-
games conditions do describe the static and various harmonics of the
static. The no-games conditions list does not anywhere describe workable
processing tools. Games conditions, and games conditions only, do that.
Here are some of those fastest processes:
CONTROL. Start, Change and Stop on objects or preclear's body, emphasis on
stop. Why emphasis on stop? It has long been known in Scientology (see
Scientology 8-80) that the ability to hold points, locations, masses and
objects, including bodies, in space at one's own direction and choice is
the essence of control. Without the ability to fix locations in space there
is no self-determinism. Where one is concerned with the physical universe
he collapses if he cannot hold space.
The exact commands and procedure of control processes are contained in
recent PABs as well as in early Bulletins to be released.
The effectiveness of any processing is as great as the extreme of good
control is exercised by the auditor. A corollary to this is that how well
one lives life is measured by the extent of his good control of the things
within his actual boundaries of interest.
FIGHT THE WALL. This is a very fascinating process. The auditor makes (he
has to make him) the preclear fight the wall bodily. Since there is no
accepted social behavior in man on this subject, the way that a preclear
will DO this process varies somewhat wildly. What his running of the
process does is to bring him up to a confrontingness of walls and
environment. It does this through exercising a games condition (fighting)
and causing the preclear to exercise this games condition knowingly. It is
not designed to 7 nor does it, run out the preclear's ability to fight.
The total command is, having directed the preclear's attention to a
wall, "Fight the wall." You don't tell them how to fight it, you tell them
to fight it. The amount of
Copyright(�) 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
bruised knuckles and holes in plaster can be cut down by providing the
preclear with a mattress or other protector and it works just as well. The
purpose of the process is not damage, although preclears are known to go
into fighting walls with a peculiar enthusiasm.
This can also be run by mock-ups but not as a substitute for making the
preclear use his body. Do not make a thinkingness process of this, it is a
doingness and a confrontingness process. It can be run outdoors on trees,
etc., as well as in the auditing room.
OPPONENTS. The main thing about opponents is that there are not enough of
them. An opponent is a games condition. Have the preclear tell lies about
the subject of opponents. That is a good process. Have the preclear invent
opponents. Of these two, Invent is best, but Lie is a lower harmonic of
Invent and can be run all the way south.
When opponents become scarce to an individual they become so precious
and valuable that he will neither confront, have, nor let go of anything he
considers to be one. He will fight himself and do all sorts of things but
he will not do these things. He becomes extremely aberrated on this point
and will attempt to "discover" enemies or "find out" or some such thing.
This is a compulsive games condition, with unknownness. Havingness is
extremely poor on such an individual.
The exact commands are "Tell me a lie about an opponent," "Tell me a
lie about opponents," "Invent an opponent."
INDIVIDUALITY. A lot is said about individuality. Indeed it is a highly
important subject. Either individuality is a very bad thing and causes
human troubles, is a very good thing, or it is a games condition. The truth
is that individuality is an aberration and a games condition. It therefore,
good or bad, processes, whereas namelessness (unidentifiedness) does not.
An extreme or exaggerated view on the subject of individuality is a
havingness upset and contains unknowingness. Knowingness about identity
includes awareness of game. A good process is "Invent an individuality that
would impress people." Run it for all eight dynamics. Examples: "Invent an
individuality that would impress animals," "Invent an individuality that
would impress God."
CAN'T HAVE. An interesting little creative processing process is "Mock up a
mockup" and then "Say that bodies can't have it" or "Say that your body
can't have it." A further use of this is to say that the MEST universe
can't have it. Auditors call this "Escape Processing."
EFFECT. Lie about an effect you are having. Examples: "I'm not having any
effect from my tooth," "I'm not having any effect from that wall" or "That
wall is giving me some money." Lie about an effect you are having on (any
dynamic).
PROBLEMS. Problems must be handled in auditing. Never leave the present
time problem unhandled. This does not mean that the problem is flat when
the preclear says he now knows what to do about it or can solve it, etc.
The problem is not flat until he can tolerate it solved or not solved. If
he MUST solve it then he is not able to tolerate the problem and it is not
flat. People think that all problems or some problems MUST be solved. They
think this because they cannot tolerate or confront the problems.
Problems are processed by "Invent a problem of comparable magnitude to
(the problem)." Until preclear can have the problem.
Undercutting the above, is, having the preclear tell lies about the
problem.
Inventing problems of comparable magnitude must each time be questioned as
to "How could that be a problem to you?"
Another process related to problems is "Consequences of Solutions."
Since a problem not confronted persists and confronted does not persist,
then preclears can discover that they have been not solving problems
because they were scarce.
SOLIDS. "What are you looking at?", "Make it solid," "What are you looking
at?", etc.
VACUUMS. A vacuum is a super-cold object which, if brought into contact
with bank, drinks bank. Objects at 25�F or less have high electrical
capacitance, low resistance. This was psychiatry before Earth. Shocks,
ether, can act similarly. This is how one mechanically forgets the past. He
depends on pictures, loses pictures to a vacuum incident. Vacuums drink up
the preclear's havingness. They are just incidents and they are
brainwashing. You encounter these running solids. Opponents,
individualities, more solids, problems, undo them.
RESTIMULATION. When one violates a games condition, intends to have an
effect on something and doesn't, one often puts the effect on the body. One
thus gets "no-effect" on opponent, makes an effect on self. This is
restimulation. It is also stimulus-response.
"Effect you could have on (people, preclears, any dynamic)" remedies
this. The condition of self-auditing while auditing is the above
restimulation. The same process resolves it.
TO SPLIT VALENCES
A term that really makes a psychiatrist feel like somebody is "schizo,"
their nickname for the schizophrenic. It is an odd misnomer in that it
means split personality and the trouble with a schizo is that he needs
splitting, not that he's split. He's in another's valence, and what is
required is to remove or split the preclear out of that other's valence.
STEPS. A series of steps rather than a single process or command worked
best by test at the Hubbard Guidance Center and the London HASI Clinic.
1. Get the preclear under control with Start-Change-Stop. Lots of it.
This can't be slid over or brushed through carelessly. The total reason
for getting the preclear under good control is that he is under bad
control or he wouldn't be a preclear, even though the bad control is
his own. Though it is his own it is not knowing. The auditor's job is
to make the preclear CAUSATIVE throughout. The preclear must be CAUSE
toward all things in the session. The control by the auditor is
necessary because, left to his own devices, as he has been for aeons,
the preclear will be EFFECT of his reactive bank, pictures, circuits
and figure-figure. The one thing, of course, that the preclear is
effect of in session and not causative toward is the auditing. The
auditor pan-determines the whole thing.
2. Unjam the track with "What are you looking at? Make it solid."
Anything jamming (sticking, holding) the track (time) can be run AS A
VALENCE in the following steps. Examples could be: Mother, dog, book,
machine, town, house, gun, etc. You can readily see in this command
"Make it solid" that the preclear is being CAUSE toward the thing or
person. It is of considerable relief to the preclear.
3. Choose valence or valences, weakest universe preferred. At this point
skill comes into great demand. The OBVIOUS here would be usually the
correct valence to run. Obvious to the AUDITOR. It won't be obvious to
the preclear. For example,
the weakest universe would be to the preclear the one that gives no
trouble. He never gets bothered or upset about that person. He never
even thinks about that person or when he does it is only with the
mildest feelings. Why? Because he's "wearing the head" of that person!
He's looking FROM, not AT. If you find you have picked the wrong
valence to run, go back to ( 1 ) and choose again at (3).
4. "What would interest (universe so chosen)?" Run this flat.
5. "Invent an opponent of comparable magnitude to ." You are
getting a games condition here. Scarcity of opponents is the stickiest
condition there is in human relations. Run this until preclear does it
well and comm lag is flat.
6. "What would get the attention of ?" Here the preclear will name
or invent things that would get the attention of the universe being
run. What you know about the SERVICE FACSIMILE will apply here. Run it
out this way. "What would get the attention of ?"
7. "Look around here and find something that can't have." Answers
must be things physically observable in the auditing environment. This
must be run very, very flat. A key process.
8. "What could you protect from?" This actually could be run as
above, having the preclear look around the room and find what he could
protect____from. However, if (7) has been run flat as a pancake it can
be run as a subjective process as given.
9. "What communication could you prevent from originating?" You
will see that this gives the preclear a games condition and an
opponent. It isn't flat when the preclear is still giving answers from
the bank. He should make some.
10. Problems of Comparable Magnitude. The command is: "Invent a problem
of comparable magnitude to ." This is an important process. Note
that it has to be flattened well and that it is not flat when the
preclear says he feels better about it or will handle it. It is flat
when the preclear can HAVE the problem, does not HAVE TO solve it.
Could have it, permit it to remain, or dispense with it. Problems:
games condition. Solutions: no-game condition.
11. "Invent a game you could play with ." This light-hearted little
process is dynamite. Don't neglect it. Run it on the preclear and
you'll see what a high-level process looks like when it really bites.
(It will bite if you have properly run the preceding ten steps.)
12. "Make fight the wall." This is done, of course, with mock-ups,
until the preclear does them extremely well and with full control of
the mock-ups and comm lag is flat.
13. Run (4) to ( 12) again to check.
This procedure cleans up universes and valences. When running this,
keep the preclear at it and do not lapse into discussion or excessive two-
way comm aside from the processes themselves. Use two-way communication in
delivering the process to the preclear, not in getting the preclear to
deliver the bank to the auditor.
This is a lot of processes for one bulletin, but we can include more
detailed material on these in future PABs.
17TH AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
18 February-31 March 1957
L. Ron Hubbard gave the following lectures to students attending the
17th American ACC in Washington, D.C:
** 5702C25 17ACC-1 Opening Lecture, CCHs, the Future of
Scientology
** 5702C26 17ACC-2 ARC Triangle and Associated Scales
** 5702C27 17ACC-3 Communication and Isness
5702C27 17ACC Inflow/Outflow
** 5702C28 17ACC-4 The Parts of Man
* * 5703C01 17ACC-5 Problems: Their Handling and Running
5703C01 17ACC Problems of Comparable Magnitude
(could be same tape as above)
** 5703C04 17ACC-6 Control
** 5703C05 17ACC-7 The Scale of Techniques
5703C06 17ACC-8 Reaching the Lowest Possible Level
5703C07 17ACC-9 "Ought to Be"
** 5703C10 17ACC-10 Valences
** 5703C11 17ACC-11 Summary of Techniques
5703C11 17ACC-11A Comments and Question-and-Answer Period
5703C12 17ACC-12 Survival
5703C12 17ACC-12A Question-and-Answer Session on Lecture
** 5703C13 17ACC-13 Techniques in Practice
5703C14 17ACC-14 A Summary of an Intensive
** 5703C15 17ACC-15 Exact Control
5703C19 17ACC-16 Outline of Modern Intensive
** 5703C20 17ACC-17 Games Conditions
** 5703C21 17ACC-18 The Assist
5703C22 17ACC-19 Effect: Axiom 10
5703C25 17ACC-20 The Uses of Control
5703C26 17ACC-21 Rest Points and Confusions
** 5703C27 17ACC-22 Extroversion-Introversion, Its Relationship to
Havingness and Communication
5703C28 17ACC-23 Valences and Control
5703C29 17ACC-24 The Professional Scientologist
5703C31 17ACC-25 Techniques in Practice
All 17th American ACC lectures are listed above for convenience. They
are also listed on the following pages in date order sequence.
P.A.B. No. 107
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 March 1957
SPECIFIC FOR TERROR STOMACH
There is a specific process which goes this way. You ask the preclear
to put into the six sides of the room, the four walls, the ceiling and the
floor, in regular order, the statement to him or to some part of his body
"This means go to " and the preclear furnishes the location. He does
this with each wall, the floor and the ceiling, in rotation. Now you had
better let him have the walls, etc., first of all say it to him, then after
a while say it to his body. Now the next time round you get him to put into
the walls, etc. "This means don't go to ." Then the next time we go
around to "This means go to ," and finally we get this thing flat.
These commands are run in alternation until it seems fairly flat.
Now the reason why you ask him to supply the name of the location each
time is simply to see how his communication lag is coming along. If you
didn't ask him to add the name you would not see his comm lag. When you ask
him to originate a location this puts a little stopper on the line. Now
when we have that pair of commands fairly flat we go on into the next pair.
"This means stay in " is completed with all the six sides of the room,
and the alternation command in this case is "This means don't stay in
," and we run these alternately covering the six sides of the room each
time.
Now, of course, this is essentially the anatomy of the confusion-the
confusion basically of a person doing, or trying to do, two things at once.
So we get him to sort out the stable data. This is a technique which has
been with us for some time. It is what we call one of our specifics, and it
is a specific for a terror stomach.
Now this is something for you to have because these terror stomachs can
cause you some difficulty. For instance, one of the commonest things that
you find in prison work or in people who are under pressure from the police
in one way or another is the terror stomach. With some people just the
thought of possibly being arrested would turn one on. Now just why the
police are the commonest restimulator of the terror stomach lies, of
course, on the back track.
The stomach is guilty of the overt act of eating, it is continuously
guilty of this act and becomes quite frantic on the whole subject of being
incarcerated. This is rather funny, because the stomach is already
incarcerated and is continually incarcerating-it puts food into jail three
times a day; and so we get police putting somebody away as being the
commonest restimulator of the terror stomach. A terror stomach is simply a
confusion in a high degree of restimulation in the vicinity of the vagus
nerve. This is one of the larger nerves and it goes into agitation under
this restimulation. Now medical science has already solved this, already
knows how to take care of it: they simply cut the vagus nerve-that it
brings on a fairly early death and completely
Copyright (�) 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
disrupts the entirety of the gastric system is, of course, not considered.
It is comparable with electric shock, which, incidentally, is almost
uniformly followed by an early stroke.
Now here we have a specific and this somatic has not had any
alleviation from any other process prior to Spring, 1956. At that time some
other processes came in which are, to some degree, faster. But they have
not yet been tested on a terror stomach with any thoroughness. They are
more powerful, but they have not been thoroughly tested against this
specific somatic.
With good auditing and good communication we can, apparently at any
tone level, seem to be able to use this process successfully. This is quite
remarkable. The terror stomach flattens out and if it does recur, it will
be quite minor. But the preclear should be warned about this so that if it
does recur he can come in again to see the auditor, who can continue the
process and flatten it further.
It is a specific and for a long time I figured out the confusion of
where to go and where to stay, and figured out the disenfranchisement of
the game somewhat. Disenfranchisement brought about a condition of
confusion which was best expressed in the stomach evidently. We can handle
that today. I can tell you with some confidence that the only thing that
would interrupt your ability to handle this would, of course, be your
communication with the preclear. This would have to be pretty good before
you could use this process. To establish communication with a preclear
suffering from the terror stomach is, of course, one of the more
interesting things to do because the preclear is quite frantic. He leaps
around, goes in and out of session, etc. Nevertheless, in spite of this,
the process does level out the terror stomach which is just a bundle of
confusion.
With this process one would apparently be dealing with a no-games
condition, because something is talking to the preclear. But remember that
the preclear is making something talk to him for the first time. The walls
are always telling people something, and when walls become warnings and
when the various items of the physical universe become associated all under
the headings of warnings, then you have a terror stomach. Well the common
denominator of a warning is not conditional actually, it is a warning about
change of position. What has deteriorated in the preclear is the ability to
differentiate messages so that all messages mean "Go to , don't go
to____' stay in , and don't stay in ." The process runs out, in
essence, the bad 8-C of the universe and you just turn it into good 8-C.
When running the process, ask the preclear if he is putting the
postulate behind the wall, in the wall, just ahead of the wall, ask him how
it is going now, what is the progress of the various points, how much space
is the postulate occupying now, has he any inclination to put the postulate
into the whole building, or compulsion to do this or that, and so on. You
just go on policing it you see, but don't slow it down with too much
policing because this process is a quantity process-unlike almost any other
process we have-it's very low scale and so is quantitative, i.e. how many
times he gets it into the wall. So you want him to do as many of these
commands as possible.
Now the reason I bring up this process is to acquaint you with it and
also because it is so wonderfully illustrative of the relationship between
aberration and learning rate, a subject which I will be continuing in
another PAB.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HCO BULLETIN OF 8 MARCH 1957
COPIES TO:
Director Of Training
Indoc Instructor
Asst Indoc Instructor
HCO-LONDON
GOAL OF INDOCTRINATION COURSE
1. To give new student a reality on Scientology.
(No matter what this takes- should include a couple hours
professional auditing.)
2. The Communication formula.
3. The Positions of Auditing.
4. The Communication formula used in the positions of auditing.
Theoretical Material taught. The Codes of Scientology.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:rds jh
LRH TAPE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
1-15 March 1957
** 5703C01 17ACC-5 Problems: Their Handling and Running
5703C01 17ACC Problems of Comparable Magnitude
(could be same tape as above)
** 5703C04 17ACC-6 Control
** 5703C05 17ACC-7 The Scale of Techniques
5703C06 17ACC-8 Reaching the Lowest Possible Level
5703C07 17ACC-9 "Ought to Be"
** 5703C10 17ACC-10 Valences
** 5703C11 17ACC-11 Summary of Techniques
5703C11 17ACC-11A Comments and Question-and-Answer Period
5703C12 17ACC-12 Survival
5703C12 17ACC-12A Question-and-Answer Session on Lecture
** 5703C13 17ACC-13 Techniques in Practice
5703C14 17ACC-14 A Summary of an Intensive
** 5703C15 17ACC-15 Exact Control
P.A.B. No. 108
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 March 1957
LEARNING RATE
(Part 1 )
This is one of the more important things with which we have to do.
Scientology has always been the science of knowing how to know. With some
diffidence I tell you it is also the basic science of education. Education
happens to be just one part of a large whole. Education is seldom creative
and is, therefore, just a middle ground of activity. Getting people to know
something rather than getting people to invent something to know, you will
see are quite different. In Scientology itself, however, we engage in a
great number of educational activities and just for that reason alone you
should understand education.
Education really takes off from a series of basics which we have a good
grip on, and nobody ever knew where education took off from before. Well,
it takes off from Scientology. This is factually true: nobody ever before
had these basics. It is quite amazing. If you asked an educator about these
things-on how you taught people and so forth-he would be flabbergasted.
Some of his ideas are interesting and complicated enough to be fascinating,
but they are not sufficiently effective. In order to educate somebody you
had to know what the mind was all about, and unless you knew the nearly
total anatomy of the mind you could not hope then to do much educating, and
the educational world did not know the anatomy of the mind and so they
didn't do much educating. That is the simple background of the situation.
But the funny part of it is, that if you tell an educator some of the
basics of education he will agree with you all the time. He knew these
things all the time, he will tell you, but a little conversation will show
you that these things are not aligned properly and are tied up with all
sorts of extraneous data and that he has no idea of relative importance of
the various data, both pertinent and extraneous. He could not evaluate for
you the data you have fed him, but would be in such total agreement with
the basics that you feel that he would be rather apt to go anaten, stagger,
yawn, etc., but he would know for sure that he had met someone who could
tell him about his business.
If you know about the mind you can educate a mind. This is certain and
quite true. Now here is the coordination: You have a wall say to yourself,
"This means go to_____." What are you actually doing? You are really
running out the total significance of a wall. You are evidently doing about
half a hundred different things while doing this process. If you listed the
things which make this process work you would be likely to have a couple of
sheets of foolscap. But let us take one of them here and let us see how
walls are always teaching you something, how fire plugs are always teaching
you something, and how grass is always teaching you something, etc. The
least that a wall teaches you is that it is a wall. Now when you ask a
preclear to walk over and touch that wall as in Step A of 8-C, he finally
finds out that there is a wall there, which is the goal of the process. Now
what is this but learning that he has a wall there?
Copyright (�) 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
Now process lag and learning lag would be the same thing for these
purposes. It takes him this long to find out there is a wall. You will
understand that the wall gets more solid to the preclear and a lot of other
parts of Scientology immediately accrue that are off the subject of
learning rate, but we are just taking up this one thing. We call this thing
a learning lag. A learning lag is how long it takes the wall to get the
message through to the preclear. Well, it takes as long as the preclear is
in a high unknowing games condition. High unknown games condition is "no
effect on self and effect on other things," and yet his ability in the
universe depends upon his differentiation amongst objects. For the wall
says to him "This is a wall," but because there can be no effect on self in
a very obsessive way, the wall saying to him "This is a wall" means of
course "This is a hospital spittoon." No differentiation in perception.
This is sometimes quite evident in a sudden exteriorization because of a
loss of havingness which occurs at that time.
It is not that his MEST body is what gives him perception-this is not
true-but the havingness of the MEST body makes his perception possible. You
reduce his havingness by exteriorizing him suddenly and his perception goes
by the board and of course he goes downscale, and LOOK is way up there at
the top of the Know to Mystery Scale just below KNOW and you drop him down
the scale to NO-LOOK, and sometimes in a sudden exteriorization you may
drop him down to a delusory look. They not only don't see what is there,
they see something that is not there. Well what is this in essence but an
inability to perceive, which is an inability to learn?
Suddenly exteriorized, with havingness dropped, they look at the
ceiling and it is the same ceiling they were looking at a moment before
with their MEST body's eyes. But it is now a hospital ceiling. Well some
via is occurring between themselves and the lesson the ceiling is trying to
give them, and that lesson is "This is a ceiling." They don't perceive
that, they perceive a "better" lesson. What do we mean by a "better"
lesson? We mean a more convincing one. The hospital ceiling was a far
better lesson, it was much more convincing. It was saying "This is a
ceiling" to somebody who was so anaten and fogged out that he just could
not resist learning that lesson or differentiate, and so the hospital
ceiling kept saying to a person in this condition "This is a ceiling" until
it became all possible ceilings. The moment you reduce his havingness he
drops in tone and picks up the most dominant lessons.
As we go downscale, then, with a preclear, he can be expected to pick
up more and more dominant lessons. And what is aberration? Aberration would
simply be a pattern of convictions, and we could say for the purposes of
education that aberration is really a series of lessons that were learned
too well. For example, a fellow was raised in a tough neighborhood and was
taught that the thing to do to get on in life was to bash everybody over
the head, and he learnt this lesson very very well. But he never learnt
another lesson which was presented to him later in life that the way to get
on in life was to be able to live with the people. Therefore, we find that
what is wrong with him is a lesson learned too well-a wrong lesson. The
schoolboy who studies his lessons very often reads something which is not
in the book and learns it much better than what is in the book. This is
because we get into alteration and change of location at once. Now a wrong
location and a wrong datum are more or less the same thing. When we move
data into solids we get the most dominant thing they perceive-location.
First we have postulates and then we have located postulates. That is a
lower order of postulate, but is still higher than most people's heads.
We find out, then, that aberration consists of a number of lessons
which a person has learned too well. That would be an interesting way to
talk about it and would certainly grip the imagination of an educator. But
there is something else riding alongside of it which wipes it out as a
total explanation, and that is his willingness to learn a wrong lesson and
that is his learning lag. Now why is he willing to learn these wrong
lessons? He just is. He has decided some time or other without any
prompting that this
was the way things were. Now many people, simply by getting into the band
of agreement are way up tone scale from where they were before, but
remember people can go downscale into agreement too. So the datum is
confirmed, he generated it himself, and then it was agreed.
Now and only now do we enter the field we could call learning rate or
learning lag, or education. Just for no reason at all, he assumed, for
instance, that his mother was a bad woman. He had no reason, he just
assumed it-no prenatals in other words. One day he decided she was a beast
and went along playing the game that he was a sad little orphan, just out
of "thin air," and then one day (he had been postulating this all the time)
she blows up which she never did before and does something dreadful to him
like sending him to bed without supper, or issuing threats, etc., and this
confirms his assumed belief. Now take the reversal that he has postulated
his mother as an angel and all of a sudden she turns and becomes a
drunkard, etc. He is then always trying to convince people that she is a
good woman and yet he knows that she is a bad one. Then one day he gives up
entirely and he now has another conviction, only he didn't generate this
conviction, it was exterior to him.
Now one of the fondest things that your preclear thinks is that he
caused everything everywhere but he covers this up and advertises to one
and all, including himself, that he is not responsible for anything that
ever happened to him. Now this is quite remarkable, because it is a
complete reversal. In advertising that he is totally irresponsible he yet
really believes that he basically caused everything. Now you know from old-
time Ownership Processing that if you misown something it gets very real
and solid-so at least 50% of the things that happened to him have been from
exterior sources. If they are in restimulation they are the things that
didn't happen to him, you see, and the things that did happen to him are
misowned the other way. He is misowning both ways. He says he caused
something but this was really caused by someone else if it is in heavy
restimulation. In other words, there are other things that work in the
universe besides the preclear. He not only has to discover that he exists
but that other things exist too.
The random factors in a case lead us, then, to conclude that the
premises of education and conviction only go for a short distance. They go
up to self-generated data, and that's quite a way, but it doesn't take us
the whole distance. Therefore, handle this thing as far as it goes-handle
the premise of learning rate and lag and other material of this character
just as far as it goes. It is terribly effective as far as it goes-it is so
effective that you are likely to go completely overboard and then wonder
what happened-but what happened is that you moved out of that range into
the range of self-generated non-caused attitudes. Non-caused attitudes are
undone by communication, so we find communication vastly superior to
education. Communication will always undo education, but it has to be
terrible communication to do nothing but fix ideas.
What do we have in terms of processes here? Well, we have a lot of
processes. I am not trying to give you anything but a decent resume here of
the exact place something occupies before I tell you about it, because this
is so good you will possibly try to supplant communication with education.
You must not do that because self-generated data can supplant education.
Now where do we go, then, with this thing called education, learning rate,
learning lag and so forth? Well, let us become glib-not me, but all of us-
with regard to such a thing as industry and learning rate. We will take
that up in the next PAB.
L. RON
HUBBARD
P.A.B. No. 109
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication In Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 April 1957
LEARNING RATE
(Part 2)
To continue with how we use this factor of learning rate and learning
lag and so forth. You can interest an industrialist by telling him that it
is learning rate that is impeding his own operation. How many instructions
has he put out that have not been followed? You can say that these people
really do want to cooperate with him but that the learning rate is so poor
that these people cannot absorb the instructions. This is the stable datum-
something he will understand-a better stable datum than anyone else will
ever give him. "Labor is all bad" is the usual stable datum given to him.
You will explain to him the trouble with his executives and foremen, etc.,
the reason why his production curve is down, or his machinery busted up,
etc., is entirely because the learning rate varies from person to person.
You can remind him of the stupid child and the bright child in the same
classroom-one child doesn't learn as much as the other simply because it
takes one child too long to learn what the other child learns rapidly. But
it is learning rate; it isn't learning quantity. Now you get very technical
at this point and explain the difference between these two children is the
learning rate.
Do not go into quantity-but he will assume at once that the length of
time it takes somebody to learn something establishes then how much he
knows. That is not quite true, but it is awfully convincing. You can say to
him, "Now actually there are not thirty people, Mr. Industrialist, in the
thousands in your plant, who are really the cause of your labor
difficulties. Certainly not more than thirty. These people are against you
because they don't know you." Immediately he will say, "That is so true."
You continue, "They don't know you because their learning rate is so poor
that they have no idea what you are trying to do or what you want them to
do. They are merely in revolt and they don't know against what." This will
make sense to the industrialist. You tell him, "Now, I could pick these
people out with the greatest of ease." You could do this through the use of
Personality Analysis tests which should make it quite clear to you, and he
could check these against their service records, and you can be quite sure
that the records would agree with your analysis. He will wonder how you
could establish their learning rate so rapidly when you didn't even talk to
these people. Just use "learning rate" as a substitute conversationally for
aberration, comm lag, etc., and it translates. So we are in communication
with him even if it is a bit of a stretch. We are in communication.
I'll give you an example. A stupid judge is one who can't learn the
rights and wrongs, the in's and out's, from the witnesses, and all the
attorneys will tell you at once that this man is a stupid judge because his
decisions are incorrect. But sometimes they take a person who is simply a
stupid judge and they say he is a vicious judge, but actually you could say
his difficulty in learning is so great that he becomes emotionally
disturbed at the thought of learning and therefore exerts punishment in
revenge on the
Copyright (�) 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
people who have brought this torture upon him. His learning faculties are
so poor that it becomes painful for him to learn.
You see how you could just talk to somebody and without accusing
anybody of being insane or aberrated, etc., you could probably sell him
processing for the whole of his executive and foremen levels of his staff
to increase their learning rate. And the reason for this? So that his
postulates will stick; that is, what he can see will happen. But this is
not what you do.
At this point, you have a point of agreement and you as a Scientologist
take departure from it. You have made a point of agreement that it is
learning rate and learning lag that causes randomity on his communication
lines. You can tell him this and convince him because it is almost true,
and it is certainly true within the realm of his experience. But you, in
actually processing people, depart from it. You're not interested
exclusively in the employer's postulates sticking. You're not interested at
all in this. You are interested in giving the person determinism over data.
You're not interested in a person's learning rate really, but in his power
of choice to establish or review the importance of data. This is what you
re-establish with the person. You don't teach him, then, to get into a
state of hypnotic impulse; you teach him power of choice over data, and
only then will the data become of use to him, and then only can he become
social in his behavior.
The answer to the question is in total disagreement with the
industrialist's modus operandi. It is not in agreement at all. I have
talked to some of these boys within the last year, and it is quite
interesting that the moment I started to establish the fluidity and the
right to think for labor, the right to live, and the right to be for labor,
we were talking on different planets, and this is the secret of their
failure. If their system of money control was a successful system there
would be more of it today than there is, and it would be an increasing
system, and it is not. It is a decreasing system. They must have a short
glance at something, but you're not going to involve yourself with this
short glance. Management will buy learning rate completely. They will buy
this whole thing because they themselves cannot face communication, but
they can face learning. Communication is too high for them, and we have
tried to sell them this for several years. It is too high for them because
you are trying to make them face a Static. They will not do this, but they
will, however, face learning rate.
So what do you tell them, knowing this full well? You say you are going
to increase the learning rate of their staff members. You don't discuss
technically how you do it. You just give him wonderful examples, e.g., ask
how long it takes a person to learn to use one of his machines well. He may
say it needs an apprenticeship of five years. Then you can reply, what a
long time, obviously due to the very slow learning rate. Then ask him, how
does he know the man can really run the machine-ask him about his repair
and maintenance bill. You can tell him that certainly, he, personally,
knows about these machines, but that is why he is sitting at the top in an
administrative post. But what about these other people? How does he know
that they know?
Take the junior executive who is not very effective, doesn't get things
done. His learning rate is so poor that he doesn't understand what his
employer wants done. It could be that he is very willing to do anything for
him, but he never finds out what. Now let's have a conference with this
employee and see if this is the case. And sure enough, it always is the
case. If you're dealing with somebody who can't get things done, you are
for sure dealing with someone who cannot absorb data. And you just prove it
by getting into communication without mentioning communication. You will
talk about learning rate and learning lag. I've tried this out and found
that you can do wonders with it in ordinary conversation.
The definition of you, as a Scientologist, in such a circumstance would
be someone who decreases the learning lag of people-increases their speed
of assimilation of
data. This is how you could describe your job. You can talk about reaction
time and the vast amount of data that the environment demands of people,
etc. Take a professional football team; one of the most difficult things
here is that they have to learn new plays all the time. What if they have a
good player who cannot learn new plays and always uses the old ones? That
is where they lose their games. Well, what do we do? We speed up the
ability of learning new plays. Now you can really start to get technical.
You have some agreement here, your listener has not yet begun to suspect
that you can do something for him, but that will be a matter of just a
short time.
Learning rate is important to the truck driver. He has to learn that
there is a truck in front of him on the road before he can put his brakes
on. Now, suppose it takes him a long time to learn this-he has a wreck. So
people with low learning rates are accident prone. Your job as a
Scientologist is to make sure that people have fast reaction time by
increasing their learning rate. But do not forget that this is purely a
method of obtaining agreement and introducing your subject-it is not an end
in itself.
This occupies a fairly interesting section in Scientology, but its
accomplishment is not effected by direct drill. This is never done. Why did
it take people nine months to learn to recognize an aircraft in 1/1 25th of
a second on the aircraft recognition courses? Because it was done by drill
and the recognition officer very, very often was not so good at recognizing
planes. But increasing learning rate by drill, etc., usually only increases
familiarity and automaticity.
Learning rate governs reading time. There are many systems which speed
up your reading time, but the practice of reading or the practice of acting
simply increases the familiarity with what you are doing to a point where
you can neglect it, and that is never the goal of a Scientologist. His goal
is not to get something more automatic, his goal is to establish or re-
establish power of choice over data.
A totally fixed datum is in the past. Where would a person have to go
to recover it? In the past, of course. A person, to stay in present time,
has to have all his data in a relatively fluid condition, so the re-
establishment of the power of choice over data-to be able to accept it or
reject it at will-comes first, and the whole process of increasing learning
rate, which is a secondary thing, is the process of recovering power of
choice over data.
All education is trying to do is fix data and all Scientology is trying
to do is fix or unfix it at will. This is what a Scientologist is doing and
that is the goal of the processes used, and incidentally, they are the only
things that will increase learning rate and cut down learning lag and
increase reaction time, etc.
But the final product in the framework of the society itself is
actually coming from something else than the society believes it is coming
from. Now anybody will happily let you come in and teach or process a
person as much as you please about his job if they think this is the drill
to increase his learning rate, and so you have freedom to process people.
But what you are doing, is re-establishing his power of choice over the
data he has. He always then winds up knowing more about it, and his
learning rate depends upon that power of choice to fix or unfix data at
will, and some processes which I will be giving you in future PABs will be
aimed at doing this very precisely.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W. 1
Phone: LANgham 3601
HCO BULLETIN OF 8 APRIL 1957
GROUP AUDITlNG
Group Auditing is as effective as we can continue control over the
group. As therapeutic as the control can be bettered.
Control can be of attention, person (body) and thinkingness. Should any
of these break down, auditing value stops.
Attention is easiest-thinkingness is hardest.
Order of control factors available to the auditor, group or individual
auditor, are:
1. ATTENTION
2. PERSON
3. THINKINGNESS.
Thus the group auditor has only available to him in any group which
contains new or unclear people
1. ATTENTION
2. PERSON.
Thus we see at once that a significance process or any process aimed at
thinkingness in a new or rugged group or one which contains any rough case
must NOT BE run.
Let's audit the WHOLE group always, not just the disciplined ones. So
we must delete all thinkingness processes from group auditing-and that is
quite a trick.
Model Processes in order.
1. "Look at (indicated wall, etc)."
2. "Take your right hand and touch your head (chair, right foot,
left hand, etc)."
3. "Feel your chair," "Look at the front wall." Run one command
then the other one time each (alternating).
4. Put up two objects, right and left sides of room in view of
group. "Look at object one." "Look at object two."
5. Hand mimicry mirror image from Group Auditor.
6. Hand each of group an object. Auditor also takes one. Then
group is made to do a simple mimicked motion of his object by the
auditor. Auditor repeats his motion with the object until WHOLE
group has done it right.
7. Group standing mimicking auditor.
8. Verbal mimicry-beware of repeater techniques.
As each one of these could be itself a total of group auditing, the
length of time it
is to be run is long. You would be surprised how a group's interest stays
up. (The reason Group Auditors vary commands is they're afraid interest
will flag.)
The institution of the Assistant Group Auditor must here come into its
own. Group chairs are widely spaced so the Assistant Group Auditor can walk
through. Anyone not doing the command is manually guided into doing it (not
verbally) by the Assistant Group Auditor.
The auditor asks only "Did he do the command?" not "Did the command
have an effect upon his health?" If the former persists, the latter
follows.
The use of significance in a command puts thinkingness beyond the
auditor's control. Hence "See that wall, put it there" is wrong with the
"put it there". The pc has to THINK that. The auditor cannot be sure he did
and cannot enforce it easily.
All group auditing is done from tone 40.0.
NOTE: I have never written a book about group auditing. Now that we've
found that from control proceeds communication ability, I can.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :jt.rs.nm
Copyright (�) 1957
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[PAB 114, Croup Processing, 15 June 1957, is taken from this HCO B.]
LRH TAPE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
19-31 March 1957
5703C19 17ACC-16 Outline of Modern Intensive
** 5703C20 17ACC-17 Games Conditions
** 5703C21 17ACC-18 The Assist
5703C22 17ACC-19 Effect: Axiom 10
5703C25 17ACC-20 The Uses of Control
5703C26 17ACC-21 Rest Points and Confusions
** 5703C27 17ACC-22 Extroversion-Introversion, Its Relationship to
Havingness and Communication
5703C28 17ACC-23 Valences and Control
5703C29 17ACC-24 The Professional Scientologist
5703C31 17ACC-25 Techniques in Practice
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street, N.W., Washington 9, D.C.
HCO LONDON BULLETIN OF 9 APRIL 1957
LIST OF "PURPOSES"
as posted on Org Board
Purpose of Organization. To disseminate Scientology. To advance and
protect its membership. To hold the lines and data of Scientology clean and
clear. To educate and process people toward the goal of a civilized age on
Earth second to none. To Survive on all Dynamics.
L. Ron Hubbard. To develop and disseminate Scientology. To support and
assist Scientologists. To write better books. To act as a court of appeals
in all organizational disputes. To form and to make official policies and
orders affecting the FC.
Org Secty. To execute policies and orders. To coordinate organizational
activities. To care for legal and public concerns of the organization.
Mary Sue Hubbard. To carry on Scientology. To be certain the
organization remains solvent.
Accounting Unit. To expedite, handle and police the financial items
from the moment they enter the organizational comm lines to the moment they
depart.
HCO. To be the office of LRH. To handle and expedite the comm lines of
LRH. To prepare or handle the preparation of all manuscripts and other to-
be-published material of Scientology. To keep, use and care for LRH's
office equipment. To assist the organizations of Scientology and their
people. To set a good example of efficiency to organizations.
Advisory Council. To advise the executives of the organization as to
needed changes and policies. To act as a meeting ground of department
heads. To assemble and report the statistics of finance and action to the
Exec Dir. To advance ideas for promotion and improvement.
Staff Mtg. To gather agreement and permit staff origination upon
matters relating to personnel and duties. To report on performance of
duties. To suggest promotional, maintenance and organizational changes to
FC executives.
Technical Division: To insure good training and processing, good
service and ARC inside and outside the organization.
Administrative Division. To insure good and accurate communication
inside the organization. To handle business and administrative affairs. To
insure good working quarters and conditions for and good work from
organizational personnel.
Academy of Scientology: To train the best auditors in the world.
HGC. To do more for people's health and ability than has ever before
been possible and to give the best auditing possible. To help people.
PE Unit. To make a better worker of the worker, a better executive of
the executive, a better Homo Sapiens on all dynamics.
Dept. of Registrar. To communicate what we have to offer to those who
care to be better and to help and to respond effectively when they reply.
Secretarial Unit. To expedite the communications of the organization.
Shipping Unit. To swiftly and competently furnish the public with the
materials of Scientology.
Maintenance Unit. To maintain suitable quarters, clean and in repair,
for the organization.
Indoc Instructor. To give people a reality on Scientology and to teach
the communication formula by Dummy Auditing.
HPA Course. To create a competent auditor with a good grasp of theory
and practice of Scientology. All 5 levels of indoc.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:-.mek jh
Copyright (�) 1957
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 10 APRIL 1957
HPA/HCA COURSE CURRICULUM
TO: DIRECTOR OF TRAINING.
The HPA/HCA full Course must teach entirely-
Communication
Control
Havingness
Indoctrination HPA/HCA teaches Communication.
HPA/HCA teaches Control and Havingness.
Indoctrination teaches 1st steps (Dummy Auditing) on communication and
a reality on Scientology. Textbooks: Self Analysis and Dianetics '55!.
HPA/HCA teaches remaining 4 steps of Indoc. Textbook: Scientology. The
Fundamentals of Thought.
FIVE LEVELS OF INDOCTRINATION
1. Dummy Auditing
Communication formula learned old style.
2. 8C
Commands and walkabout with pc learned old style.
3. Hi School Indoc
Co-Auditor basis. If auditor fails to make a command stick he's
done.
4. Tone 40.0 on an object.
5. Tone 40.0 8c on a person.
Upper Hi School Indoc (Hi Hi Indoc). Co-Auditor basis. If
auditor
mentions or acknowledges anything but commands he's dead!
The Procedure taught on HPA/HCA Course is PROCEDURE CCH.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:rs.nm
11.4.57
LONDON CONGRESS ON NUCLEAR RADIATION AND HEALTH LECTURES
London, England
12-15 April 1957
The London Congress on Nuclear Radiation and Health met at the Royal
Empire Society Hall in London, Friday, April 12th, through Monday, April
15th, 1957. L. Ron Hubbard gave the following lectures covering the latest
advances in Scientology, as well as nuclear radiation and health:
** 5704C12 LCNRH-1 Control, Communication and Havingness-I
5704C12 LCNRH-2 Control, Communication and Havingness-ll
5704C12 LCNRH -3 Control Processes
5704C12 LCNRH-4 Demonstration "Dr. Ash"
5704C12 LCNRH-4A Havingness
5704C12 LCNRH-4B Flying Saucers
5704C13 LCNRH-5 Radiation and the Scientologist
5704C13 LCNRH-6 Radiation in Peace
5704C13 LCNRH-7 Radiation in War
5704C13 LCNRH-8 Group Processing: Emphasis on Control
5704C13 LCNRH-9 Group Processing: Emphasis on Control (cont.)
** 5704C14 LCNRH-10 The Reality Scale and the Effect Scale
5704C14 LCNRH-11 The Reality Scale and the Effect Scale (cont.)
5704C14 LCNRH-12 Scientology and Children
5704C14 LCNRH-15 Group Processing-"Sit in your chair, Wear a
Head, Have two feet, etc."
5704C14 LCNRH-16 On Auditing
5704C15 LCNRH-17 The Control of Hysteria
5704C15 LCNRH-18 Effective Dissemination
Note: Lectures 13 and 14 were given by speakers other than L. Ron Hubbard.
P.A.B. No. 110
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 April 1957
EDUCATION
Education-point of agreement.
The learning processes are all of them extremely interesting to the
auditor because they bring to his attention at once that the common
denominator of communication and aberration is at once "telling somebody
something." You say to somebody "hello"-you mean in essence "I am here, you
are there and I recognize it." It's the relay of an idea. Well, now,
learning itself has been, for I don't know how long, very compartmented,
it's been very carefully grooved, so that learning as we speak of it then
prior to 1956 meant what they meant in school-and that was "the inflow of
ideas."
Now when you speak to somebody out in the public about learning he
thinks you're talking about inflow of ideas, from some source or another
either from a book or a teacher. That is a very narrow look, and when I
talked to you about this before I was using learning in that definition-an
inflow of ideas.
It is not true that learning rate or the rate one will permit ideas to
inflow is the common denominator of aberration or anything else, but it
looks like it. The truth of the matter is, if you only considered inflow it
would be like considering the motivator without the overt act. Now you know
as an auditor how important it is to look at the overt act rather than the
motivator. Don't look at these inflows all the time. If you continue to
look at these inflows and nothing but these inflows you will make as many
mistakes as have been made in the past umpteen thousands of years in the
field of education; and let's not make these mistakes all over again.
Education could have been defined this way: "Education is the process
of placing data in the recalls of another." Do you see that? That's what
education thought it was doing. It thought it was placing ideas in the
recalls of another and making a recall possible by somebody else of data
related to him. Now that's not very complicated, and that is the trouble
with it: it is not complicated enough for educators. Now we deal with
simplicities and this is the first time we really find fault on the line of
simplicity-it's an idiot's definition-and that's the process that is being
carried on at this moment at Yale, Princeton, Harvard and Columbia; down
here at George Washington, at Oxford, Cambridge and the Sorbonne-any place
across the world at which they consider themselves tops in education-they
are placing ideas in the recall of others.
A few schools departed from this from time to time, almost by accident,
and usually under duress from their student bodies. Heidelberg is an
example of this. Heidelberg never considered the relay of ideas important;
it considered having been to Heidelberg important, and that was quite
different.
As long as we maintain this idea of "inflow only" we are in trouble.
Education does not happen. If education means inflowing ideas then you are
also talking about hypnotism. You see, there's no differentiation there; we
are talking about beating
Copyright (�)1957
by L. Ron Hubbard.
All Rights Reserved.
somebody up and laying in an engram. This too would be education, wouldn't
it? So we have education and aberration very, very closely associated.
In fact, education WAS aberration. Life was busy teaching somebody a
lesson and the lesson it succeeded in teaching him was not to do any more
living. And that little lesson, then, was always at the base of education
and it was done so that education itself could be considered aberration. In
other words educational systems did the lazy thing, they did the easy
thing: they simply paralleled the game of the MEST universe in teaching
somebody not to live, and living paralleled it. Why, they then thought they
were doing a good job. But let's look at education as it was done. You
taught somebody something by saying "Pigs have snouts." They're not
supposed to say "Yes," the classroom is supposed to be quiet. Later on you
put an examination in front of them and it says: "What do have?" and
they're supposed to immediately answer and write: " have snouts."
You're supposed to be able to associate this completely. So it's just a
test of recall.
Now as you know, therapeutically, recalls-and by the way, if you don't
know this try it some time: just sit and ask somebody to recall something
about some person and do nothing but that and notice that you get a decline
of case. That's an interesting thing. You had to use the whole of the ARC
formula, something really real, some time you were in communication with,
and the reverse side of it too-in other words, the entirety of the straight-
wire formula, inflow and outflow-to get away with it. But if you just asked
somebody to remember something about George, remember something else about
George, remember something else about George-if you asked him what he was
doing, he's picking up every moment he ever saw George motionless. This
erases, you see, all the rest points of George and leaves nothing but the
confusions and the halfway feeling that George is there, so we sort of move
George as a disembodied entity into present time and confirm the valence.
Now this is quite a trick, but you just knock these rest points out and
George becomes a confusion. Therefore, nothing but recall used
therapeutically and educationally would wind somebody up in rather a
confused state. He would be sort of half hypnotized, just nothing but
recalls. So if you give people data like "Pigs have snouts" and then ask
them "What has a snout?" or "What has a ?" you have given
them a stable datum and now you're taking it away from them.
You might look up some time a university record as to suicide and
nervous breakdown; such a record is honestly kept, I know. I did this once
and I had a lot of trouble. I wanted to know how many students had
committed suicide in that university and they wouldn't own up to it, but I
found out there had been quite a few and there'd been a great many nervous
breakdowns, all at examination time. They spend the whole semester giving
somebody some stable data and then at examination time they take that all
away suddenly. In other words, simply implanting the recall and then
pulling it back out again has been defined as education; but it is nothing
but a black operation-nothing but. To do this to little kids is to do away
with their initiative; therefore a time for revolution in the field of
education is definitely at hand.
Education would have to be defined much more broadly. But remember in
the old logics about action definitions. Well, you'd have to give it an
action definition; it would have to be a real definition that gave its use
and a purpose for it, to be of any kind of a game itself. The reason why
teachers go into a no-game condition is because teaching itself is not
really a game. It is putting a bunch of other people in a no-game
condition, and of course that's only part of a game. To teach a subject it
would be necessary for the person being taught to be able to receive a non-
significant, disrelated idea from another person. You see, that would be a
necessity in order to teach somebody something.
The next condition that we would have to meet would be making certain
that person could maintain his power of choice over the data given to him.
So we would
give him some data which were incorrect, and giving him these incorrect
data we would find out if he could remember them and if he could reject
them. The idea of being able to reject a datum and still remember it, to
know that it's untrue and non-factual and still be able to recall it, is of
course bettered by a further action: being able to wipe it out completely
or not even recall it; and that is a skill.
The next thing would be to feed him a datum, have him give objective
examples and active examples of this datum so that it's not then just a
string of words, and then ascertain whether or not he could still reject it
or accept it and then ask him to rephrase it, and eventually he will form
something which will to him be an agreeable stable datum, and having done
this we would then have accomplished power of choice over a datum. To get
him to remember or repeat a non-significant datum would be the longest haul
at first, and you may find people who have a terribly long haul on the
subject of incorrect data. You give him an incorrect datum and he can't
reject it, but when you have made that possible you can then give him a
datum, have him give objective examples of the datum, have him rephrase it,
give objective examples of his datum, accept it, reject it, handle it,
throw it around, and the next thing you know he has something which will
buff the entirety of confusion surrounding that subject. You have created
there something which is armor plate as far as he is concerned. He KNOWS a
datum. Now he doesn't KNOW it as recall; that's the trick, you see. This is
entirely different.
Now it's hard to describe how he knows it, because there's nothing
there to describe except the datum itself, so to write long chapters on
this new type of knowingness would be an impossibility-it's something that
is experienced, it easily goes on beyond the field of description.
All right, let's take a look then at education and find out why you
would do this that way-rather than to just place something in somebody's
recalls, to have him really know it as a datum. Why would you do this?
Would there be any sense in this at all? Well, yes, there certainly would
be. The individual would be able to USE that datum. He would be able to
evaluate its importance, he would be able to handle it and handle with it
many other things. In other words you have given him something for his
utilization.
Now I want to tell you a little difference in the field of education
itself. The stress of "teaching" in a modern school today is this: "How to
occupy the child's time." That's right-that's what they teach in modern
training schools. Great stress is put on this; you have a child just so
long, he has to be taken out of his home for that length of time, you have
to keep him occupied in school and that's just about it, and you wonder why
a child of twelve or thirteen doesn't really know how to spell, his
penmanship is poor, his reading is worse, and so on-that's because a
different thing has come into view. Now this is not the tradition of the
little red schoolhouse of song and storybook through the generations. There
was another tradition in this country, and I don't know where the tradition
I have just described came from, but this other tradition was the American
tradition and it went like this: You had to get 'em and put some shoes on
'em in a hurry and teach 'em readin', writin' and 'rithmetic as fast as you
could because they weren't going to be in school very long, and the teacher
who was put through normal school, so called, a hundred years ago was
taught that. You have got to be fast, you never know when papa's going to
take him out and put him behind the plough. Give him some education before
it happens to him. You probably will get them in the winter months when
there's not much work to do, but in the summer you're never going to get
them. Hence the summer vacation.
Of course, the child loves this idea; he doesn't have too much sympathy
with education in the most part, as it is performed; but if school really
educated him I'm afraid you'd have an entirely different attitude on the
part of the child. Now I have been very fortunate to know in my life quite
a few real geniuses-fellows that really
wrote their name fairly large in the world of literature and science-and I
consider myself very fortunate to have known them because they are so rare.
Why are they so rare? I found something peculiar about these fellows-they
were for the most part taught in peculiar schools! They were taught in some
YMCA school or they were taught by some Englishman who ran a little college
for difficult children in the street; they were all taught-it seems-in some
kind of off-breed school. Now this is peculiar, because the school existed
to a large measure to take care of people who were slopovers from the usual
educational system-there wasn't very much education involved. The fellow
would come in and he'd be interested in something and therefore they had
the master give him his head. One chap by the way, who gave us solid fuel,
rockets and assist take-offs for airplanes too heavily loaded on aircraft
carriers, and all the rest of this rocketry panorama, and who formed
Aerojet in California and so on. The late Jack Parsons, by the way, was not
a chemist the way we think of chemists. He was not taught in the field of
chemistry beyond this fact: There was a little professor who opened up a
school. Nobody could do anything with Jack so they sent him over to this
school and the professor found out he was interested in chemical
experiments and turned him loose in the laboratory and gave him a lot of
encouragement. He eventually became quite a man. It is interesting that
this completely sloppy type of education is apparently quite workable.
Here are some LEARNING PROCESSES. Try them out and see the difference
between KNOWING a datum and knowing it as a recall.
1. Learning Process No. 1:
(Flatten each part thoroughly before going to next.)
(a) Give pc 3 numbers. Have him repeat. See if he remembered.
Repeat this process.
(b) Give him incorrect datum. Have him repeat it. Discover if he
could remember it. Discover if he could reject it. Repeat this
process.
(c) Give him vital datum (concerning rudiments of auditing in the
case of a Scientologist, for example). See if he can repeat it. See
if he can rephrase it. Have him give objective examples. See if he
can reject it. Repeat this process.
2. Learning Process No. 2:
(a) Discover things Auditor and pc can agree on in vicinity.
(b) Feed pc vital data (Scientology and rudiments, for example).
Get him to give objective examples, rephrase and reject and accept.
3. Learning Process No. 3:
Have pc discover unimportant data in environment.
4. Assigning Identity:
This is a Walkabout, inside and outside.
Commands: "Look around here and find something you could have," "For
what is it used?" (or "What is it called?"), "Could you invent another
use (name) for it?"
5. Objective Forgettingness:
This is a Not-Know Process. It is another Walkabout.
Commands: "Look around here and find something it would be all right to
forget (or not-know)."
If these five processes are flattened early in the week, note the
changes, repeat, and effect further changes.
L. RON
HUBBARD
[pic]
Issue 45 [1957, ca. mid-April]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Today's Riches in Scientology
L. Ron Hubbard
Today, we have something here.
To apologize to anyone for any fumbling I may have done in a line of
research which Man has consistently muffed for the past 50,000 years is
unthinkable, since at any given moment we have had more progress than has
before been attained. This is not a light statement nor lightly made, for
today's results can vouchsafe for anyone the truth of these words.
As every Dianeticist knows, we have since the beginning had the
foremost clue to the condition of the mind and the aberrated state of
individuals or groups. The mental image picture, carrying a record of the
past which could be restimulated and thus made to react against the body
was, one might say, our entrance point into the solution of the subject of
the human mind and beingness.
Following from there, it was necessary to isolate any and all important
parts of the human mental anatomy, and to bring about an understanding of
any vagaries or wild variables which might occur.
It was important, further, to establish whether or not it was
thinkingness or mechanics which gave us the best exit route from the
involvement of life which we found beyond our control. The decision was
finally made and proved that it was the mechanics of the mental image
picture rather than the significance in the mental image picture which best
surrendered to our efforts. Handling the mechanics made it possible to
resolve the significances, and even though the significances were the
greatest difficulty from the viewpoint of a human being, it was found that
adequate handling of the mechanics eradicated the villainy of the
significances.
An astonishing number of characteristics and potential abilities were
unearthed in this course of study, and it was a difficult task which had to
be painstakingly done to isolate the most important.
It will be discovered in any other activity or line of endeavor that
the Prelogics of Dianetics are missing from that course of study. Therefore
the Prelogics themselves have given us our course and have taught us which
way to go in our courses of investigation. Thus it will be discovered that
the work of many failed to stress the greatest importance, but gave us a
rather aesthetic view of a great many facts, all of which were true but
none of which were sufficiently isolated to undo the riddle of existence.
Taking older works, one can find in them, here and there, bits of Dianetics
Copyright (�)1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
and Scientology, but a careful study of them reveals that at no point does
one of these factors have greater stress than another factor. This single
difference must be understood, otherwise our people will continue to study
and search in ancient texts, and these have in common the frailty of
failing to stress the importance of various truths, even though they give
us a great many truths, many of which we have regained today. Unless this
is clearly appreciated, then the value of Dianetics and Scientology cannot
be entirely experienced, for one is continually chasing down corridors
where all pillars are like all pillars, and all pillars in the corridor
seem equally true. It is not a fact that truths are equal; there are truths
which are greater than other truths, and the greatest of the great truths
have been isolated in Dianetics and Scientology, even though our answers
today seem extremely simple.
Today, once more, the mental image picture has taken its stand as the
foremost discovery of Dianetics and Scientology. By the handling of the
mental image picture concurrently with the handling of present time, it is
possible not only to destimulate the bank in its entirety, but also to
bring about a number of abilities by which the individual can recover data
of the past much more easily than ever before. This, everyone who has had
anything to do with Dianetics will understand, is extremely worthwhile.
We set out, in the beginning, to bring into being a state which we
called "clear." Although this seemed relatively simple in 1947, as the
years progressed it became more and more difficult. Just why this was is
not clearly understood even today, although it could be said that those
people who began to think on this subject reduced their havingness
considerably, and we had to do mostly with people who had been thinking on
this subject. Therefore, we were starting below the level of case which I
had started upon in 1947. We had not yet learned, from '47 to '56 that
significances or thinkingness was not the route. Therefore it was very easy
to use these and handle them, and, as a result, to suppress the case level
below an easy recovery point. There is no apology in this; it is simply a
liability of investigation. That many people were cleared goes without
saying, but these unfortunately became more interested in living than
processing, in the most part, since none of these had been trained before
they were processed. Thus, knowing nothing about the subject, and simply
attaining a state which they themselves did not particularly understand,
they saw no reason to continue on in our midst. Thus we did not find
ourselves surrounded by clears and we ourselves were not clear.
Clearing today, and the attainment of the state of clear, exactly as
given in Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, Chapter II, is
once more easily obtainable and is, through what we know today, extremely
simple, providing we ourselves do not have to be so complicated that we
override the goal.
Today a procedure exists which is known as Procedure CCH. This stands
for Communication, Control and Havingness. This procedure is used directly
toward the accomplishment of a technique known as "Then and Now Solids."
The auditing of this particular procedure is much more difficult and
much more exacting than any auditing which has ever been attempted. The
precision of the results is attained only by a precision of application.
Therefore, it is unfortunately rather necessary that auditors be trained,
not indifferently by someone who "knows all about the subject," but in a
regimented course of study, by which-the individual can himself attain
sufficient subjective reality upon the techniques to follow them along and
to be able to predict what is happening with the preclear. Thus the auditor
today should have training. Fortunately, the many past years have given us
techniques and technologies for training which bring us to an achievement
of our goal in training rather easily. We can, today, make a very excellent
auditor in only eight weeks. This in itself is news, and is very worthy of
comment amongst the great number of advances which
we have made. As a matter of fact, we could probably make a very good
almost anything in six or eight weeks today, since we have unearthed and
put to use the technologies of training itself.
Then and Now Solids is not attainable by many preclears on a straight
route. It is evidently necessary to carry through a very precise series of
exercises to better his abilities up to a point where he can accomplish the
technique. Then and Now Solids is not susceptible of being run,
unfortunately, by a large percentage of the cases to which it is addressed
until certain preparatory steps are accomplished. These preparatory steps
are not difficult, and are the stepping stones toward these greater
abilities. The steps themselves are apparently complete, and anyone who is
faintly conscious can be pulled forward up to an ability to do Then and Now
Solids through a series of gradients.
Then and Now Solids consists exactly of making the preclear capable not
only of contacting and handling present time, but also any segment of the
past.
Evidently we have been under a misapprehension with regard to the
character of past and future. The fact of the case is that mental image
"pictures" are, in effect, only de-solidified present times. By a sequence
of de-solidifying present time, one evidently achieves time. This is a
crude and not entirely exact explanation of the matter, but serves us in
our processing. It then behooves the individual who wishes to be clear to
achieve the ability of creating a present time out of any segment of the
past track.
The length of time required in processing today is sufficiently short
as to be accomplished in almost any case in under two or three hundred
hours. This is a much better look than it has ever had. At any given
instant of this processing, the results obtained are superior to those
which we have been led to expect by our own experience. Thus, one must
realize, when I say two or three hundred hours, that one is in actuality
saying two or three hundred hours for a new and heretofore unenvisioned
goal. Our ability to process upwards has gone so high that there is no real
comparison with what we have done in the past. Furthermore, our ability to
reach low has extended sufficiently that we are able to say with some
aplomb that we are not balked by states of case. Naturally, the insane pose
a problem to us, and always will, but our business is not with this
peculiarity of mental mix-up. One of the more heartening factors is that
insanity is found to be a highly peculiar form of composition of the mind,
and is not an immediate consequence of livingness. To undo insanity, one
today has the techniques if he also has the patience. So only insanity
itself is set aside in this estimation of two or three hundred hours, since
it is true that two or three hundred hours of processing might be found
necessary on some insane people simply to bring them up to a rational
response to the auditor.
Age also poses some limitation. Not old age, as it has in the past, for
this is not today important, but the very young preclear, up to the age of
six, seven or eight, will still be found to give the auditor difficulty.
The reason for this is the attention factor. This is not the same thing as
the attention factor in insanity, but is handled in much the same way. The
attention factor of extreme youth has been discovered to be a
disorientation factor brought about by the inability to handle the body and
the environment, and is not an immediate "natural state." A child is a
thetan in usually rather bad condition. The attention factor has to be
widened before much processing can be embarked upon, along a line leading
to clear.
We have then achieved our goals in terms of processing. It is necessary
now to apply those goals, and in order to apply them it is necessary to
learn what there is to know about auditing itself. Today, we can make
excellent auditors. We are doing so. We are making auditing training
available in any way we can.
We have never been more sincere about our goals, and we have never been
more successful in achieving them.
The race with the atomic bomb was, years ago, more or less a method of
comparing Dianetics and Scientology to the physical sciences. Today it is a
fact and an actuality. The consequences of air pollution and other matters,
consequent upon the possession by not too sane governments of weapons of
this magnitude, make it incumbent upon us to do our job here and now. It is
actually not that we wish to any vast degree to save Earth. As I have said
before, it has been saved too many times. But here we have a playing field,
we have trained auditors, we have organizations, we have the technologies,
and here we can exert a higher self-determinism than ever before. Here we
can do the job of Dianetics and Scientology. We have factors in our
immediate vicinity seeking to destroy the riches which we have assembled in
getting ourselves out of this jackpot. We probably will have to solve the
atomic puzzle on the third dynamic if we can hope for much further progress
in livingness.
Dianetics and Scientology are today more alive than ever before. We
know more, we can do more, we can achieve those things which we set out to
do.
Those of us who were basically interested in Dianetics and Scientology
for ourselves and others, today must be informed and must understand that
whatever vagaries in our career of research and investigation, whatever
organizational upsets we may have had, have never at any time been capable
of swerving us from our basic goals and our determination to make it this
time. We are making it this time. Whatever you wanted out of Dianetics and
Scientology is yours today. It is only necessary for you now to reach out
your hand in order to achieve it.
May I ask you to extend that hand?
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH TAPE LECTURE
London, England
18 April 1957
5704C18 ATE Auditors' Training Evening, CCHs
P.A.B. No. 111
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 May 1957
EYESIGHT AND GLASSES
Compiled from ACC tape material of L. Ron Hubbard
It is interesting to know that a thetan doesn't look through his
eyeballs. He has two little gold discs, one in front of each eye lens.
These are not the lenses of the eyes, but, as you might say, mocked-up
energy. They are little gold discs that are superimposed over the eye and
he looks through these. The eyeballs merely serve to locate these discs.
An eyeball isn't even a good camera. Some people, dissecting eyeballs
to find out how people looked with them, have been totally baffled since
the first time this was done because it is about the worst camera that
anybody ever had anything to do with.
What the ophthalmologist doesn't know is that the individual looks
through these little discs-the ones in front of each eye-and when things
begin to deteriorate, or when the anchor points of the body deteriorate,
they are liable to follow suit. They become distorted one way or another.
They begin to Q-and-A with the distortions of the eye themselves-the
eye reacts to light, so these little golden shields react to light. After a
while the little gold shield becomes black or corrodes in some fashion
which makes it very difficult to look through.
Of course, we don't know why he is looking through them in the first
place. When they do deteriorate the individual starts wearing glasses. The
person thinks this is necessary. The next thing he does is to make the
lenses of the glasses stronger.
He puts on a pair of glasses. This is a big shield-a big disc. This
disc also goes in front of the eyeball and he knows this and he cannot see
things unless he looks through one. The reason why glasses become very
difficult in an auditing problem is that one is not auditing glasses.
I have audited glasses, just as an experiment, for a long time.
Havingness in terms of glasses, or in terms of eyeballs, does produce some
sort of change, but havingness in terms of little golden discs produces an
awful alteration in terms of eyesight, sometimes faster than is
comfortable.
You can take this old-time effort processing and produce a change of
vision with everybody with no permanence, but a fantastic alteration of
vision can occur, making somebody very uncomfortable.
Copyright (�) 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
Have the preclear get the effort to see, followed by the effort not to see,
followed by the effort to see, one after the other. The next thing you know
is that all the little muscles in the eyes will start to Q-and-A with the
little golden lenses in front of the eyeballs, which are changing under all
this processing, and the next thing you know is that he is seeing double,
cross-eyed, or something like that.
Things will turn on with tremendous brilliance as though somebody swung
a rheostat-and he will turn it down quickly because that would mean that he
would be confronting too much. You should thus change his idea of what he
should be able to confront. If you change that idea, he will then adjust
the machinery of sight. But if you attack the machinery of sight directly,
you are just forcing him to confront and you get this phenomenon of a
person turning up his vision and turning it down again at once.
You get the person capable of being able to get beautiful scenes and
visio in the bank and then going totally black. You get a person cleared up
tonight and tomorrow morning he is a psychotic wreck. That is all under the
heading of HAVINGNESS and CONFRONTINGNESS. When you remedy havingness and
confrontingness, he will remedy the rest of it.
There is no reason why a thetan couldn't stand in the middle of the
room and look at everything just as clear and flat and hard as it ever was.
He doesn't need any mechanics. He certainly has to be able to be it, and
have it. In other words, he has to be able to occupy the middle of
something, and he has to be able to do a lot of things before he can even
see something. But all of these things adjust on straight havingness.
Havingness will change vision and special perception. That is something
nobody can argue with, but the whole problem of glasses is the problem of
confronting.
I once had a bomb go off in my face with some authority some time or
another, because I was standing in a place where I shouldn't have been
standing at all, a total miscalculation on my part. The startlement that I
could miscalculate to this degree did me in. After that I couldn't see.
Finally my eyesight turned on a bit and got way up to 3120, 4/20-that in
the Service is "what wall?" I was doing combat service and navigation and
every other thing I was supposed to do, with that kind of eyesight, clear
through until 1946. After the war was over I was still wearing black
glasses. I was trying to write books, and "what piece of paper" in "what
typewriter."
My instincts are very good and I was perceptive enough and wasn't
unwilling to confront things to such a degree that I ran into doors or did
embarrassing things, but I was rather upset because my marksmanship was way
off. I shot too many bullets into too many forbidden directions, I guess,
or something of the sort-that used to be a great hobby of mine.
So I wore glasses, contact lenses, trying to increase my vision. I
found out that vision increased only when you diminutivized the subjects
you were looking at. In other words, the more powerful the glasses become,
the smaller they make the objects you look at appear. Think that over for a
moment in terms of confrontingness and it will amuse you. Of course, the
world isn't quite as formidable if it gets that small.
A very high-powered pair of glasses reduces the size of the face you
are looking at by about half. People who are wearing glasses are very often
not aware of this. But if you put a new pair of glasses on somebody's nose
and put him in a car and tell him to drive, he does some of the most
fantastic things. In other words, confrontingness is altered by glasses. I
don't know that sight or lines or clarity of vision is altered, but
certainly confrontingness is altered by a pair of lenses.
The moment I found that out, I was vastly amused because I didn't want
things to be that small, and my eyes were simply recovering from having
been torn up, which was an interesting state of affairs. I got some
processing, ran out a lot of these things, and my eyes came back up and
flickered all over the place-they got anywhere from 15/20 to 25/20, which
means they were above normal sometimes and way below normal at other
intervals. I found one day whilst reading a report that I couldn't make out
anything. The printing was all blurry and going askew. There were ghost
letters riding above every line and I just couldn't make head or tail of
the report. I was thinking that I'd better use a monocle or a magnifying
glass. I suddenly realized that I was reading an AMA report with a total
unwillingness to confront it. I threw it aside, picked up a novel and the
print was perfect.
So I can sympathize with those who wear glasses because I have been
over the jumps. I have been all the way at the bottom of not even being
able to find the door, to almost being able to find the door, on up to
being able to find two doors.
Where is the havingness of the person located in terms of the body? A
scholar has a fixed vision point at a certain distance from his eyes. He
has had havingness in that point and then he hasn't had havingness. If you
make somebody "keep a book from going away" at that distance his eyesight
will change all over the place. Just have him "open a book and keep it from
going away," "Now leave it uncontrolled," "Now keep it from going away." He
gets headaches, eyeburn, his eyes practically bleed before you get through
because you are restoring the havingness at the exact distance where it was
fixed and lost.
You get all sorts of phenomena of this character, but it isn't really a
problem of how good are the optic nerves. Of course, you shove an icepick
through a person's eyes like the psychiatrists do-he is not going to be
able to see well because he has already got "now I am not supposed to see
with the thing."
I have an awfully hard time with blind people on this "Now I am
supposed to." I can get them to see, get them to do everything. Then they
suddenly realize that they were not supposed to be able to see-and they
shut off their sight again, but you process some more, and so on. But any
time you have a vagary in the adjustment of sight, it is a vagary in the
adjustment of havingness.
There must be something there to observe. The havingness goes by
quantity. Don't get the idea that people are afraid of seeing anything.
You're figuring right along with the type of figure-figure that has never
worked for anybody in any time or place. He is just afraid to look at
things, so we will take him out and make him confront things. If, by some
necromancy, he is able to have that thing or some part of it, then he will
be able to see it and will not be afraid of it. If we can get him to
confront, then his fears will change. People know this. But this other
thing, that people are afraid of things, that they have irrational terrors
and all that, is all pretty well resolved on just this one basis. There is
something there to confront, then there isn't anything there to confront.
This is a loss of havingness. If their havingness goes down far enough,
i.e. their idea of quantity falls far enough out of adjustment, they will
begin to detest seeing it. They won't quite like to see it. Now there can
be too much of it or too little of it. In either case the scarcity or
importance or responsibility factors alter and they get so that they cannot
confront it. They are perfectly willing to listen to a radio, but are they
willing to listen to a radio 24 hours a day? They finally say, "This is too
much, I cannot confront it," and they turn off their hearing in some
fashion.
You can actually fool your considerations to this degree. You say,
"Look at all the books I've got to write or read. Look at that-a tremendous
number of them there." You got one little book which is not going to last
you two hours. Actually, you
can have much too little to read. It is quite fascinating. The variations
in confronting are a tremendous study.
Astigmatism, a distortion of image, is only an anxiety to alter the
image. You get an astigmatic condition when a person is trying to work it
over into a substitute, if he possibly can. Here again it is a case of not
enough-he didn't have enough.
Some men's wives just disappear right in front of their faces. Just a
black statue will be standing there. That's visual occlusion, or the woman
will disappear entirely. She will have no midriff or something like that.
Only they don't tell anybody about it, for this means, of course, that they
are mad-or something wrong there with his havingness of his wife and his
willingness to confront or not to confront that girl.
There is another factor that enters in. He would actually be in love
with Martha but be married to Jane. So Jane gets blurry because he is
trying to see Martha and he will do it on an axis. He will twist all things
over.
There is another whole class of sight disabilities which are not
allowed by or listed by the bulk of ophthalmologists. These people do not
really go in for these things. They say these are bizarre effects and they
doubt that anybody really sees them, which is a fascinating way of dodging
out from presented phenomena.
A thetan with a buffer in front of him feels that he cannot receive
various wavelengths and he knows there are some dangerous ones. He thinks
they are dangerous to him and he has a tremendous number of considerations
about this.
The considerations are utterly fabulous in quantity concerning the
amount of protection one has to have, the conditions under which one can do
things. This degenerates to a point where a man can only see well when he
is wearing a certain pair of carpet slippers. It can get this far removed-I
got this from a writer once-he could only write when he was wearing a
certain pair of carpet slippers. I talked this over with him and all of a
sudden discovered that he could only see when he was wearing that pair of
carpet slippers.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 MAY 1957
To All Staff
TRAINING-WHAT IT IS TODAY
HOW WE TELL PEOPLE ABOUT IT
In London I made up a chart of training for the Comm Course (former
Indoc) and HPA/HCA.
This course is plotted exactly on eight weeks including an intensive by
a graduating student upon an incoming student.
The stable datum of all training now is:
"A student is graduated when his training level is such that he could
be entrusted with an HGC preclear."
Thus examination is rendered much easier and stable.
HPA/HCA Training requisites stress:
1. Synopses of all important Dianetic and Scientology Books and a
synopsis of tapes heard.
2. Profile student achieved when auditing an incomer.
3. Memorized Axioms.
4. Five levels of Indoc.
5. Long form CCH.
6. Good attendance record.
7. Ability to Group Audit.
8. The Codes down pat.
That is more or less it. The Chart is intensely specific.
Paramount in all our training are:
1. To get our graduating students in good shape; and
2. To make sure our incoming students are given a good week
intensive by the graduating student before the newcomer enters Comm
Course. Why? Because Comm Course can reduce havingness and we want
our new Comm Course student to learn, not agonize.
Training today can be pretty smooth.
But be alert here. We've changed type of training from emphasis on
Classroom to emphasis on Student. "Academy" means coaching.
In Public representation of Washington and London schools stress that
eight weeks of personal individual attention can make a Scientologist and a
good one and that this is why the cost is what it is. This training is the
best on Earth for living in general as well as doing Scientology. "It's
personal. It's for you. It's good. Only those who have it can Survive."
LRH:md.cden L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright (�) 1957
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
P.A.B. No. 112
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 May 1957
[pic]
Copyright (�) 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON
HCO TRAINING BULLETIN OF 17 MAY 1957
cc: Dir of Training
Dir of Processing
Comm Course Instructor
Night HCA Instructor
Org Secretary
HCO Board of Review
Registrar PE Found Instructor
Bulletin Board HCO London-for
distribution there
DEFINITIONS
A CONSULTANT is an instructor who is on duty sporadically or from time
to time but not routinely in any one place.
AN INSTRUCTOR is one who has regular classes and who is assigned to
places at specific times.
A COACH is a student who is standing in the role of "pc".
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: md.rd
5-17-57
HUBBARD CERTIFIED AUDITOR COURSE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
15-30 May 1957
L. Ron Hubbard gave the following lectures to the Hubbard Certified
Auditor Course in Washington, D.C., in May, 1957:
** 5705C15 HCA-1 Comm Course, TRs 1, 2, 3, 4
** 5705C15 HCA-2 Comm Course, TR 5
** 5705C16 HCA-3 Procedure CCH: Background
5705C16 HCA-4 Procedure CCH: CCH Steps
** 5705C30 HCA-5 Outline of a Course and Its Purpose
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
HCO TRAINING BULLETIN OF 20 MAY 1957
INTERIM PROCESS
While auditors are learning to handle CCH this learning process is
recommended.
Objective Show Me is as workable as any old-time process and is very
easy to run. Therefore, all HGC preclears until further notice in
Washington shall be run on Objective Show Me as follows.
Objective Show Me is first run as simple Locational and is run in this
way until it is flat as simple Locational:
Commands: "Show me that (object)."
The second stage is run alternately between body and room objects. The
commands are: "Show me that (object)," then "Show me your (body part),"
"Show me that (object)," "Show me your (body part)."
The third stage of Objective Show Me is run similar to Opening
Procedure by Duplication. Two objects such as a chair and a table near
together are selected and one part of the preclear's body such as the head,
the eyes, the right hand, etc, is selected. The preclear is asked to show
the auditor the table, the body part, the chair, the body part, the table,
the body part, the chair, etc.
Care should be taken in running this process not to use body parts
which will embarrass the preclear. The target of the process is actually
the engram bank and it will be found that at great long length the preclear
will come clear of facsimiles. The target of the process is not the second
dynamic and in running it any specialization toward second dynamic
aberration defeats the process thoroughly.
This process actually will produce a clear if it is carefully and
completely run.
It is not a Tone 40 process, which means that you acknowledge the
originations of the preclear.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: md.nm
May 20, 1957
This Bulletin applies to outside preclears. CCH should be used on Staff.
[pic]
Issue 47 [1957, ca. mid-May]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
The Radiation Picture
and Scientology
L. Ron Hubbard
The country has become very involved with radiation in the past year or
so and as we in Scientology have achieved a much clearer understanding of
this I think I owe you a rundown on Scientology and radiation.
At the outset let me assure you that our total interests in radiation
at this time are two only: that radiation can create hysteria, and
Scientology handles hysteria, and secondly that hysteria, because of
radiation, puts people in rather poor condition and Scientology can
rehabilitate them. We have no political or international interest in
radiation.
As you can remember, the HASI in Phoenix, Arizona, was there at the
time when a great deal of bomb testing was being done in Nevada only 250
miles away. At that time we had some vague interest in radiation, but it
was more in the direction of locating any deposits of uranium which might
have escaped notice. Being in possession of instruments which could measure
radiation, we were quite shocked to discover that the atmosphere and the
grand pianos began to count somewhat alarmingly. This was immediately after
an H-bomb had been buried under nine feet of dirt and had been exploded.
These radioactive dust particles swirled around the Southwest for quite a
while before they separated themselves out.
We were worried. We were worried because the amount of radiation was
obviously alarmingly great and I was as worried as the rest, perhaps even
more so because of my responsibility for our people in the Phoenix area. I
felt that we could not go on in the immediate vicinity of a great deal of
testing and so I came East to give a Congress and establish offices
somewhere away from that area. There were other local reasons but this
radiation reason was more or less primary.
Back East we made no further tests but we continued to be impressed. We
read about radiation in the public press, we read how the government was
saying how it was not dangerous, and we read apparently responsible
scientists on the subject saying that it was very dangerous. But because we
had seen grand pianos counting like uranium mines, we were, of course, of
the opinion that radiation was an extremely dangerous thing.
Without further examination of this subject and paying attention only
to what was printed in the public presses, we saw no reason to change our
attitude concerning
Copyright (�) 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
radiation. But some things have happened recently which have brought about
a considerable change.
I have just completed a Congress in London and was in communication
with Members of Parliament through a HASI representative on the subject of
radiation. It was clearly and cleanly stated by an authoritative Member of
the British Government that Russia was making full use of the hysteria
factors inherent in radiation in order to stop England from constructing H-
bombs and to impede her defenses in other ways. He had incontrovertible
proof that the hysteria campaign being conducted by Russia inside England
and the United States was totally an effort to impede their national
defense.
Russian campaigns you must understand are of the mental, brainwashing
type. Radiation is tailor-made to their agent provocateur tactics.
When I returned to America two things became very obvious. The first of
these was that only the press of Russia and the United States did not
report my remarks made at the Nuclear Radiation and Health Congress at the
Royal Empire Society Hall in London. Other newspapers the world around
carried the remarks as headline news. These remarks were to the effect that
the greatest danger of radiation was hysteria. At the Congress I said that
the H-bomb was not a weapon because it was far too powerful, it would not
coerce obedience but only terror. These remarks are more or less complete
in a book now being published called All About Radiation, for the British
market only.
Another thing that happened is that I remembered why I left the
Author's League of America some years ago. Its Board had begun to offer
prizes to deify minorities and it was taking other party-line data and
trying to foist it off on American writers. The Newspaper Guild, so far as
I know, is not entirely clear of this influence.
The other thing I did was to take a Geiger counter and make a test of
Washington. A little earlier this Geiger counter had been giving false
evidence because the stick used with the counter, as will happen, evidently
had some uranium stuck to it. But with the counter in good operating order
and clean, it was discovered that the background count of Washington, D.C.,
was the same as it was in 1932 when I was going to George Washington
University and studying radiation. In other words, there has apparently
been no general increase of count in London or Washington because of bomb
testing. I did more than this. I made a calculation of the amount of gamma
and cosmic rays which fall on Earth's surface daily and compared this to
the amount of test radiation waste which would be thrown into the
atmosphere yearly. The figures do not compare. The added man-made radiation
will probably never add up to your luminous dial watch.
On the whole track, radiation was dangerous for the good reason that
there was more radiation in those times that could be exploded. However,
radiation is a half-life matter and the older the universe gets the less
radiation there is available to throw at people. And a good thing, too.
While we have no doubt whatsoever of the actual dangers of a bomb
dropping on a city, we are now in a position to doubt rather thoroughly the
vaunted harm from test bombing which is being sold the populations of
Earth, evidently by the Communist propagandists.
The U.S. population is being stampeded by Russia toward leaving the
U.S. defenseless. Already this has accomplished a defective U.S. civil
defense and is gaining momentum toward a public demand for no bombs. This
is how Russia works. Russia works on the population imagination. Russia
uses any knowledge of the mind she has
to instill fear and bring about destruction. She is an unworthy purveyor of
scientific information.
Russia has already succeeded rather well in this field of seizing
control of the mind. There is no essential difference between dialectic
materialism and Wundtian psychology. Yet, Wundtian psychology is taught in
all the universities of the United States. England, being an older and more
mature government than the United States Government, has already awakened
to this and is taking active government steps to halt this matter of public
panic. England, for instance, is not buying Wundtian psychology. England is
buying Scientology in rather large amounts. But this is not yet true of the
United States. That it will come about in the future is more or less a
certain thing, but that it does not exist at the time is a fact. Only the
better IQs of the U.S. as yet buy Scientology.
We can be assured on the score of fallout-it isn't dangerous at this
time. It does not compare to the amount of "natural radiation" with which
we are being bombarded. If you went down to Florida to live you would
increase your radiation count much more than it would be increased if you
stayed well North and the government blew off ten thousand more test bombs.
In other words, just exposure to a clearer view of the sun will give you
more radiation than you could be hit with in the near future because of
test bombs. It's just a fact that there isn't enough uranium around to
actually thoroughly contaminate the atmosphere at this time. I know that
this is in controversy to my own statements on the subject-which is very
interesting. My own statements were made in the light of our earlier
experience. We had experienced test fallout in Phoenix and I had not made
further tests or calculations. In other words, I myself had been swept up
in this campaign to frighten the populace half to death.
The reaction to radiation is thus entirely, completely, and wholly
mental!
Dianazene depends for its reaction upon whole-track radiation
incidents, and x-ray and sunburn in the current life. By taking away the
engram which can react to the worry about radiation, worry about radiation
is then made non-painful.
If you add all this up you will clearly see that scare talk about
radiation is the source of radiation sickness in our present world. The
Atom Bomb is too powerful a weapon to be used for control of human beings
and is therefore not a weapon. But it does promise the population no
future, and so promising, it damps out efforts toward survival. This itself
can bring on sickness.
But we should not delude ourselves in thinking that actual radiation in
dangerous quantities is adrift in this atmosphere at this time. It is not.
All I invite you to do is to get a Scintillometer or Geiger counter and
test around.
There is probably an ionospheric flash which gives a tiny sudden shock
of radiation for the briefest instant of time-less than the amount you
would get from a simple x-ray-and this acts as a restimulator to whole-
track incidents. But it isn't true that radiation is drifting around biting
you at this time.
On the subject of strontium-90 it is interesting to note that a
sufficient intake of calcium renders a person completely immuned to any
effects of strontium-90. A child should be made to drink more milk and
probably should have his diet fortified a little bit with calcium if
anybody is truly worried about it.
This fight, then, is in the propaganda field. It is not in the field of
actual science. I am extremely surprised at some of the scientists who are
saying that radiation is dangerous. These men professionally should know
their business and they are not
expressing the true data. On the other hand, neither is the government
making actual data available. The government is seeking to convince the
public on the score of opinion. Opinion has no validity in science. If you
want to know about radiation, why, go and look for some radiation in the
atmosphere and if you cannot find more than the usual background count then
you must assume that there isn't any extra radiation in the atmosphere. I
am not saying that the scientists who have been beating the drum on the
dangers of radiation are Communist-inspired. I am not saying that these men
are Communists. I am merely saying that they are aiding and assisting a
Communist campaign.
We will not assist Commie propaganda aimed at stampeding the U.S.
public into revolt against U.S. defense. The U.S. can bargain her way out
of this. I am very hopeful that a general control of radiation the world
around will be achieved and I am sure that if it is not achieved, national
governments are dead. I am also fairly sure that there will never be such a
thing as an atomic war. I have looked this over rather carefully and I
personally don't believe that national governments will last long enough at
their present rate of non-survival activity.
Our cue is to make nothing out of radiation, if we mention it at all.
People who are worried about radiation are worried because enough talk
about it has thrown enough engrams into restimulation to make them actually
quite ill. We can do something about restimulation. But we have no business
aiding this public hysteria in any way. We are the people who take care of
hysteria and not the people who stir it up. What we are doing is a bit
bigger than one of Man's new destructive toys.
Our campaign is to sell Scientology. If we sell it well, psychiatry and
psychology will collapse. For instance, one of the most unfortunate things
that psychiatry and psychology have ever engaged upon has been this mental
health campaign of this spring. These people are not capable of
withstanding public scrutiny. Their general activities are sufficiently
harmful to their patients that if they stick their head up just a little
bit further, even people in the government will be able to see that there
is a swindle involved there. I expect within the next two or three years to
see a complete and thorough congressional investigation of "charity
rackets" and would expect to see psychiatry and psychology leading the van
in those who are being investigated. Before you begin to advertise that you
can do something, you should be able to do it. We ourselves are suffering
from a comm lag of seven years. Not for seven years were we able to train
auditors uniformly up to a level to get the maximum possible results out of
Dianetics and Scientology. We, accordingly, experienced a considerable
public kickback. Now we are making our promises good. It is possible for us
to withstand the most minute and searching scrutiny on the subject of what
we are doing and how we are doing it. The Validation Program of all
Certificates which we are now entered upon is a very worthwhile step in
this direction. We can today train an auditor. We can train him very very
well. We have the processes which make an auditor able to audit. And this
will accrue into our attaining dominance in the field of the human mind
rather easily. All psychiatry and psychology need to do is to fight us a
little harder, to advertise themselves a little more strongly, and the
public and the government will see to it that they collapse. Furthermore,
psychiatry and psychology are playing it too close to the government. And
if people begin to turn away from the government because of the
government's promise to extinguish them with an H-bomb, they will also turn
away from anybody who supported the government in the field of
brainwashing.
We have gone a little off track here with radiation, danger of; with
politics, the need to do something about; and we are not off track any
more. We are in the business of Scientology. And Scientology rises
considerably above the tinkerings of a few somewhat deranged scientists and
the bickerings of a few misanthropic men wearing political crowns for the
moment.
We have today very easily the most powerful "weapon" extant in the fourth
dynamic. That weapon is Scientology. We are not using it for evil, we are
using it for good. Therefore, we will win with it.
The answer to all this is to sell Scientology to individuals. Don't try
to sell it to groups. One doesn't easily talk to a group. One should sell
it to individuals and he should use the skills of Scientology to bring
about a better understanding on the part of individuals of themselves and
of himself.
I am not saying that the various governments might not do something
dangerous with testing. I am not saying that H-bombs are good weapons. I am
only saying we can survive it. I am only saying that we have one case-me-
who has had 502 times the "allowed" amount and is surviving nicely, thank
you, and other cases that are in like condition because of good processing.
I am saying that with good, modern auditing a Scientologist can survive it-
so why worry about it. As an organization and as individuals we're going up-
tone faster than others are going down. And Man faces many enemies more
dangerous than Radiation.
I am giving you all this in explanation of what you will now begin to
see come from the central organization and that will be Scientology-good
auditors-validation of old certificates-good processing-bona fide clears-
other things which we have waited to see all these years. We are making the
grade now rather easily. We are doing things that we never thought were
possible before. We are living up to any optimism which I ever gave out. I
knew I could do it. I am afraid that I was over-confident in some other
directions, but there is one thing that I have never done. I have never
told you other than what I believed implicitly and completely. I have been
as honest with you as I knew how to be and I have been as honest about my
shortcomings as I have been about my victories. You can count on that, you
know you can-for you always
I invite your cooperation in this new campaign of ours-a brand-new
campaign:
To sell Scientology, Sanity and Survival to the individuals alive on
Earth today. Thank you.
L. RON
HUBBARD
All ABOUT RADIATION
by
L. Ron Hubbard
Published May 1957
In April 1957 L. Ron Hubbard addressed the London Congress on Nuclear
Radiation and Health, and from these lectures came All About Radiation.
Atomic radiation is a subject which interests the minds of every
thinking man and woman of the world.
In All About Radiation, we have the sane and sober views of a medical
doctor on the physical facts and consequences of the actual atomic blast
and the diseases resulting from it.
L. Ron Hubbard, who was one of the first nuclear physicists in the
United States, has interpreted these facts and related them to human
livingness, governments and the control of populaces.
These facts when presented at the Congress on Nuclear Radiation and
Health at the Royal Empire Society Hall, London, in April 1957, so
impressed Parliamentary figures that they requested immediate transcription
of these lectures.
Here they are presented in book form. It will help to clear a great
deal of the mystery which has surrounded this problem and will give people
and their governments a basis upon which they can solve this situation.
This book clearly demonstrates the immediate effects which can be
expected from varying doses of radiation; it demonstrates means of
protection from atomic explosions; it shows the deleterious attributes of
an atomic explosion in all its aspects, from flash and blast through to the
more lasting effect of gamma radiation. I n fact, as its title states, it
is a book all about radiation.
It is a book that is written in everyday language as far as possible.
It is far from its purpose to hide facts behind a mass of scholarly
discourse. It intends to place the facts in full view in a form where they
are easily understandable by every reader.
152 pages, hardcover with dust jacket. Available from your nearest
Scientology Organization or Mission, or direct from the publishers:
Scientology Publications Organization, Jernbanegade 6, 1608 Copenhagen V,
Denmark; or Church of Scientology Publications Organization U.S., 2723 West
Temple Street, Los Angeles, California, 90026, U.S.A.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON
HCO BULLETIN OF 24 MAY 1957
STABLE DATA FOR INSTRUCTORS
1. Keep students busy at all times. Do not let them have
unassigned work while at the Academy.
2. The Director of Training is not the Director of Processing. If
after the student intensive and a week's Comm Course a student's case is
not in condition so the student can be trained, the Director of Training or
the Instructor should send the student to the Registrar and should not
attempt a patch-up by another student. When the Director of Training
constitutes himself the Director of Processing he not only denies the
organization income but most usually continues the agony of the student and
does not get training done.
3. Answer the student's questions.
4. The stability of the Director of Training and his Instructors
depends upon the apparency of their agreement with me on what should be
trained and how it should be trained. When they innovate in disagreement
with organized schedules they lower the appearance of stability and deprive
themselves usually of the cooperation of students.
5. It is not the place of the Director of Training or an
Instructor to defend the organization, LRH, or the past track of Dianetics
and Scientology. Any new subject combating vested interests develops some
randomity. Rather than defend against critical attacks by students it is
much more productive to look over the student's case with an eye to sending
him to the Registrar.
6. The Director of Training and his Instructors are there to give
service. Service is always harder to give on an individualized basis and
easier to give on a wide group basis. However, we are training individuals
and even though it is difficult, service must be given.
7. On the head of the Director of Training and his Instructors
rests any future failure the student may have in processing preclears.
Quality of training is to the level of Staff Auditor HGC.
IF A STUDENT CANNOT BE TRUSTED UPON GRADUATION
WITH AN HGC PRECLEAR, HE SHOULD NOT BE GRADUATED
OR CERTIFIED.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd
5-24-57
LRH TAPE LECTURE
30 May 1957
** 5705C30 HCA-5 Outline of a Course and Its Purpose
HCO INFORMATION BULLETIN OF 1 JUNE 1957
RIGHTS OF THE DIRECTORS OF TRAINING AND PROCESSING,
STAFF AUDITORS, AND INSTRUCTORS
REGARDING PRECLEARS AND STUDENTS
The Director of Processing may refuse a preclear already registered on
the following grounds, and only on these grounds:
1. Risk to Clinic by reason of low profile or connections.
2. Not enough weeks bought by pc (example: bought one, needs
three).
3. Non-payment of former debts to Clinic.
He may not refuse a pc on grounds of insufficient auditors or
inconvenience to staff. In case of refusal he returns pc to Registrar.
The Director of Training may refuse a student already registered on the
following grounds, and only on these grounds:
1. Flagrantly needs processing of a more expert level than student
intensive.
2. Signed up for a course for which student not qualified by
earlier training.
3. Non-payment of former debts to Academy.
He may not refuse students on grounds of insufficient instructors or
classrooms. In case of refusal he returns student to the Registrar.
A Staff Auditor may refuse to process a pc on following grounds:
1. Psychotic past history of institutional nature.
2. Marked antipathy to case.
An Instructor may refuse training in his unit to a student who:
1. Gives no evidence of having learned the basics taught in a
lower unit. (In which case he returns student to the lower unit.)
2. Flagrantly needs processing. (In which case he sends student to
Director of Training and thence to Registrar.)
3. Is chronically absent or tardy. (In which case he sends student
to Director of Training. )
4. Disobeys school regulations. (In which case he sends student to
Director of Training.)
A Director of Processing may refuse to sign out or release a preclear
he considers vitally in need of further processing. In which case he sends
preclear to Registrar.
The Director of Training may refuse to send a student to the Examiner
by reason that he will not be a credit to the corps of auditors. He is
under no compulsion to train such a student beyond the allotted training
period but may do so at his discretion.
A Staff Auditor may refuse to release a preclear from the HGC whom he
feels in vital need of further processing regardless of the opinion or
administration of the Director of Processing or the Registrar. He should
send the pc to the Registrar but may give further processing whether or not
the preclear signs up for more and despite any remonstrance of the Director
of Processing.
An Instructor may refuse to release a student to a higher class or to
Examination despite the opinion or the administration of the Director of
Training.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 JUNE 1957
EXPLANATION OF ABERRATIVE CHARACTER OF
RADIATION
As cosmic rays, gamma, x-rays, et al, apparently move through solids
without encountering resistance, they then invalidate solids. This is a
direct invalidation of the solidity of anything including a mock-up. Thus
it tends to say a thing is not there-thus that a creation has not been
made.
This then has been used as a means of discounting creativeness or of
discounting solids. For example, any child being x-rayed has been baffled
as to how "he wasn't there" when the picture was made. The rays went
straight through. This made him feel he wasn't solid-was not real.
When a body is over x-rayed it ceases to create sexually and creates on
a cellular level in a highly irresponsible way. This is cancer.
Radiation ills stem from the not-thereness of creations. Mental Image
Pictures, mock-ups, are apparently vanished.
"Making things solid" remedies all such Radiation ills easily. Show Me
objective and subjective does as well.
Radiation, then, is the proof that a solid thing is not solid. This is
an invalidation that one has created. Thus Radiation is seen to hit at all
creativeness. Its irresponsibility factor is also this-one cannot be
responsible for things which are proven not to exist.
This also tells us that time began on an invalidation of solids.
In actual proof Procedure CCH, run with this understanding and Problems
of Incomparable or Comparable Magnitude to Radiation, resolves Radiation.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: md.rd
6-4-57
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 JUNE 1957
AUDITING A 10-YEAR OLD CHILD
Herbie Parkhouse over in London sent me the following report on his
session with a 10-year old child.
"I knew her mother had been messing her up by telling her how much she
was like Mama, and how weak Mama was. So I ran a Present Time Problem on
Solid Terminals, then Give Me Your Hand-Thank You. The PTP was ok. GMYH
produced immediate change by the girl using all the normal childish ways of
trying to stop the Auditor. After about II/2 hours she went Anaten, but
good, for 1 hour and then came out of it. I carried on for l/2 hour-
everything seemed ok so we had lunch.
"After lunch I went back on to GMYH, but only just checked PTP (not
very thoroughly). Within a very short period-10 minutes-pc was Anaten. This
lasted for approximately I hour when pc rallied into present time, changed
her body position to that of a 'lady reclining in a chair'-just like Mama-
and doped off. This also lasted about I hour, then pc came up to present
time-then into enthusiasm which lasted well after I ended the session.
After tea I gave her another I hour on GMYH with no apparent change at an
enthusiasm. When I say Anaten on this case, I mean the pc was doing the
process, not even mechanically most of the time, but eyes shut and doped.
"After this she felt good. I then sent her home to her father and step-
mother-both of whom have had lots of auditing. They couldn't believe the
difference, especially after only six hours. The child is now in better
conditon than she has ever been before."
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH : md.nm
6-3-57
[pic]
Issue 48 [1957, ca. early June]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
The Hubbard
Certified Auditor Course
L. Ron Hubbard
I've mentioned several times that training in Scientology had become a
fine art and that it was in reality an evolved science in itself.
How does one go about training someone to really be a Scientologist?
Unfortunately it has taken seven years to work this out. If we'd been able
to do this originally, what a different picture it would have made !
Some auditors were "naturals." Well, we'd better take into account that
not everybody was. So the task has been-"How do you make a natural?"
Everyone who came for training had the willingness to help. All our
training people had the willingness to train. But with the how-to unsolved,
it was sometimes pretty grim. Seeing this I worked almost as hard on how-to-
train as how-to-clear.
Well, the upshot of all this is a series of skills necessary to being
an auditor that aren't processing but living skills. That's pretty much of
an achievement because it changes for the superior better the whole family!
If we can handle people, we can have groups and a successful Scientology
life. Along with teaching auditors to audit we came to teach, as a parallel
bonus, auditors to handle people.
Well, it's been a good struggle and a lot of us, me included, bear some
scars but we won, Mom.
I'm pretty proud of the Academy course now. We do our best to make
people able to do their best.
It's not really a school now. It's 576 hours of personal coaching plus
25 hours of good processing. We don't do much student co-auditing now
except when a student can audit.
Gosh, the old-time horrors of student co-auditing! How drastic can life
get!
All I want to tell you is that we've sewed it up on training and to
give you a glance over the HCA Course schedule. It's pretty darned good
because it's no longer a dream. It's real as real itself. Even our quarters
are air-conditioned and well decorated- good quarters themselves are news.
Copyright (�)1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
Here's the goals I wrote and had framed for the Communication Course room
here on the third floor, front of 1812 19th Street, N.W. It's in green on
cream to match the trees outside the balcony and the room walls.
"A Scientologist is one who controls persons, environments and
situations.
"Scientology is used on Life and its forms and products. The chief uses
of Scientology are in the fields of Education, Organization, Mental
Disability, Social Order and Religion. Scientology is the first to give
scientific meaning to these.
"A Scientologist is considered a professional if he uses Scientology in
any of these fields and has been thoroughly trained in Scientology.
Scientology means Knowing in the fullest sense of the word. A Scientologist
operates within the boundaries of the Auditor's Code and the Code of a
Scientologist.
"A Scientologist is a first cousin to the Buddhist, a distant relative
to the Taoist, a feudal enemy to the enslaving priest and a bitter foe of
the German, Viennese and Russian defamers of Man.
"The religion of the Scientologist is freedom for all things spiritual
on all dynamics which means adequate discipline and Knowledge to keep that
freedom guaranteed.
"We are the people who are ending the cycle of homo sapiens and
starting the cycle of a good earth.
"There are no barriers on our path except those we make ourselves. Our
ability belongs to all worlds everywhere."
This is the curriculum in full for the HCA Course. If some of it looks
strange, wait until next Ability when I'm sending you the Advanced Course
schedule. It includes all the processes old-timers learned long ago. We
weren't far enough South. Having gotten South, we leave all the old stuff
North as Graduate material.
So here's the HCA Course, 8 weeks long exactly, specific material and
skills to specific examination. Most of it is audited from Tone 40. The
auditing skills take the student to that auditing position. I can't detail
those here.
Thought you'd be interested.
WEEK ONE: STUDENT GETS INTENSIVE
WEEK TWO: COMMUNICATION COURSE
Monday Tr 1-Dear Alice (Tr = Training)
Tuesday Tr 2 - Acknowledgment
Wednesday Tr 3-Duplicative Question
Thursday Tr 4-Pc Origination
Friday Tr 5 - Hand Mimicry
Saturday Dianetics '55!-write synopsis before Monday
WEEK THREE: UPPER INDOCTRINATION
Monday CCH 0 -Rudiments, Goals & Present Time Problem
(CCH = Control-Communication-Havingness)
Codes
Scientology: Fundamentals of Thought
Tuesday Tr 6-8-C
Wednesday Tr 7-High School Indoc
Thursday Tr 8-Tone 40 on an Object
Friday Tr 9-Tone 40 on a Person
Saturday Axioms 1 to 10-Memorize
WEEK FOUR: BODY CONTROL PROCESSES
Monday CCH 0-Rudiments, Goals & Present Time Problem
Codes
Scientology: Fundamentals of Thought
Tuesday CCH I-Give Me Your Hand
Wednesday CCH 2-Tone 40 8-C
Thursday CCH 3-Hand Space Mimicry
Friday CCH 4-Book Mimicry
Saturday Axioms 11 to 21-Memorize
WEEK FIVE: LOCATION AND DUPLICATION PROCESSES
Monday CCH 0-Rudiments, Goals & Present Time Problem
Codes
Scientology: Fundamentals of Thought
Tuesday Tr 10-Locational Processing
Wednesday CCH 5-Location by Contact
Thursday CCH 6-Body-Room Contact
Friday CCH 7-Contact by Duplication
Saturday Axioms 22 to 33-Memorize
WEEK SIX: OBJECTIVE HAVINGNESS PROCESSES
Monday CCH 0-Rudiments, Goals & Present Time Problem
Codes
Scientology: Fundamentals of Thought
Tuesday CCH 8-Trio
Wednesday CCH 9-Tone 40 Keep it from Going Away
Thursday CCH 10-Tone 40 Hold it Still
Friday CCH 11-Tone 40 Make it a Little More Solid
Saturday Axioms 34 to 45-Memorize
WEEK SEVEN: UNIVERSE PROCESSES
Monday CCH 0-Rudiments, Goals & Present Time Problem
Codes
Scientology. Fundamentals of Thought
Tuesday Tr 11-ARC Straightwire
Wednesday CCH 12-Limited Subjective Havingness
Thursday CCH 13-Subjective Solids
Friday CCH 14-Then and Now Solids
Saturday Axioms 46 to 55-Memorize
(NOTE: Student repeats any week not passed, or returns to Communication
Course.)
WEEK EIGHT. STUDENT ADMINISTERS INTENSIVE
EXAMINATION AT END OF WEEK EIGHT
Required by Examiner.
All levels of Indoctrination passed.
All processes in Training learned.
Thorough knowledge of Axioms.
Knowledge of Logics and Prelogics.
Thorough knowledge of Codes.
Good results from student intensive.
Case Profile of student to be examined.
Completed check sheets.
Synopses of required books.
A command of Group Auditing.
A command of Group Teaching by Agreement.
A command of Assists.
______________
COURSE TEXT: Scientology. Fundamentals of Thought
READING MATERIALS: (Brief Synopsis of each required at Examination Time)
Dianetics '55!
Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health
Science of Survival
Advanced Procedure and Axioms
Creation of Human Ability
The number of class hours is about 576. The amount of processing
included is 25 hours.
The cost of the course is $750 financed, $500 cash.
The course is supervised by myself.
Enrollment is every Monday. People enrolling between now and August 1st
enter the Congress in July 1957 without charge.
The Academy Registrar should be contacted at 1812 19th Street, N.W.,
Washington 9, D.C., for enrollment.
Living costs about $65.00 a month, room and board for the two months of
training.
We are also teaching a night HCA in Washington which goes three times a
week between 7:30 p.m. and 10:00 p.m. In view of the fact that it is very
easy to get jobs in the Government it is possible for a student to come to
Washington, enroll in the night HCA and get a job in the Government to
support himself and his training. The length of the night HCA varies but is
from 6 to 8 months. Instruction in the night HCA is fully as good as day
HCA. Cost of the night HCA is the same as day HCA.
Be seeing you ....
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 8 JUNE 1957
THE TEACHING OF THE 18TH ACC
The 18th ACC in Washington, July 8 to August 16, will be taught in
three units using five instructors.
Immediately upon registration the students will be tested on Tone 40 on
an Object for placements in one of the three units. All instructors will be
used for this testing. A Check Sheet divided into three sections to match
the courses with the title of each process shall be drawn up and
mimeographed by LRH, Jr. (list of processes taken from the Student Manual).
This sheet shall carry a section for this testing and placement where the
instructor can write simply the unit number plus or minus into which the
student should be placed. When the testing is concluded the sheets will be
assembled and the class will be divided into three sections as evenly
distributed as possible. Those who are best will go into section 3, next
best will go into section 2, and the worst will go into section 1. By using
plus or minus unit, some accuracy can be obtained. The judgment of the
instructor on the student in general while doing Tone 40 on all Object as 3
short test shall also be used in determining the unit. Difficulties in
adjustment will be smoothed out by the use of plus or minus signs after the
unit number.
The three units of the course shall be composed as follows:
Communication Course
Upper Indoctrination Course
CCH Course
The curriculum of each shall be basically one week in length. In the
six weeks, each student regardless of skill will be expected to go through
each of these units twice, but not consecutively, i.e. he will go into the
next unit at the end of each week regardless of his ability.
The Communication Course shall embrace Training 0 to Training 5
inclusive. It shall begin with a half-hour description at 9:00 a.m. by the
instructor and shall thereafter be broken down into two long auditing
periods. At 4:30 p.m. a group auditing session will take place, conducted
by the instructor, one hour in length, the processes of which shall be
those which direct attention and assign intentions to the walls and objects
of the room. This Course shall be conducted by Mary Sue Hubbard.
The Upper Indoctrination Course shall consist of one week and shall
embrace training processes 6 to 9 inclusive with Training 8 (Tone 40 on an
Object) repeated Wednesday and Thursday-that is teaching 4 drills in 5
days. The Course Day shall begin with a one-hour lecture on the Rudiments
by LRH, Jr., and the remainder of the day until 4:30 p.m. is broken down
into two long auditing periods. The day will end with one hour's agreement
on definitions, beginning at 4:30 and ending at 5:30 p.m. The Course
instructor for this unit may come on duty at 10:15 a.m., after the 15-
minute break following the morning lecture by LRH, Jr. The Upper
Indoctrination Course shall be conducted by Dr. Kenneth Barrett, in
addition to his PE Course activities for the PE Foundation. (Note in all
courses, only one process should be taught per day.)
The CCH Course shall be taught in the same room for both of its
sections but shall have two sections. The CCH processes shall be divided in
half and one instructor shall teach the lower half to half the class and
the other instructor shall teach the upper half to half the class. These
shall be called "CCH A" and "CCH B". Half of the unit in any week will be
started in the "A" group and half will be started in the "B" group in any
given week, and on the repeat week the student will be reversed in groups
in the CCH Course. The CCH Course Day shall begin each day with an hour's
instruction on
the Rudiments, which hour's lecture shall be alternated between the two
instructors. This hour's lecture shall have the characteristic of questions
and answers. The remainder of the day shall be divided into four auditing
periods until 4:30 p.m., and shall conclude with an hour's group processing
by the instructors, using the HCO Bulletin on group processing. The Course
shall be conducted by Dr. George Richard Halpern and assisted by Dr. Jan
Halpern.
The Comm Course shall hereafter be referred to as Course 1, the Upper
Indoctrination Course shall be referred to as Course 2, the CCH Course
shall be referred to as Course 3, of which there are two parts, 3-A and 3-
B.
At least 3 large rooms must be procured especially for this 18th ACC
Course. They will be in use only during these six weeks. That room where
noise will be the least disturbing will be used as the Upper Indoc Room. If
4 rooms are secured, then the CCH Course shall be broken down into its
sections with Dr. Jan Halpern in charge of the "B" section.
The general plan of the course is that the students who are already
rather good shall be started highest, those who are mediumly good started
in the mid course, and those who are poorest started in the first course.
The students will simply rotate through these courses during their six
weeks. Thus, each will have done the Comm Course twice, the Upper Indoc
twice, and each part of the CCH Course once.
The goal of the course shall be to make the most successful graduates
capable of coaching toward validation field auditor certificates. Thus
these people have to be exceptionally good on the Comm Course, Upper Indoc
and CCH, both in the interests of their future instruction and in the
interests of their auditing ability. The course is arranged in this fashion
as outlined here because I know of no more efficient way to give the
information.
I will lecture evenings to the whole class, beginning at 7:30 p.m. In
these lectures I will cover the entirety of Scientology with stress on the
theory and practice of CCH. Given a large enough room to hold the class, FC
Staff will be welcomed to these lectures.
General supervision of the course shall be done by L. Ron Hubbard, Jr.
Course administration shall be done by Jan Halpern. Course examination
shall be done by L. Ron Hubbard, Jr. Final assignment of teams, changes and
transfers of students and grievances shall be handled by Dr. Dick Halpern.
L. Ron Hubbard, Jr. is responsible for arranging and mimeographing the
proper administration sheets and sending to Dick and Jan pertinent
information.
All instructors are requested to go over thoroughly the various steps
of the training drills and CCH processes and standardize all methods of
doing them as given in the text to be furnished and to meet together during
the course to iron out any references of consulting, instructing and
coaching so as to be sure to have a solid agreement on even the smallest
points to be taught. The exact methods of doing and coaching the training
drills and CCH processes will be furnished all instructors and their
attention and practice on these is solicited so as to iron out any
misunderstandings before the course begins. These methodologies are now
intensely standardized. No randomity between one unit and another should
develop during the course.
The Organization Secretary is responsible for the procurement of and
readying of suitable quarters for the teaching of the 18th ACC and
arranging to have at least one of the rooms large enough to hold the entire
class.
Schedules should be made up and posted early and this course should be
ready to be tested selected into units by noon of 8 July.
LRH:nld.nm L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HGC PROCESSING BULLETIN OF 10 JUNE 1957
For London
and Washington
WHAT TO TELL NEW HGC AUDITORS TO
PROCESS ON PRECLEARS
When a new auditor is taken on at HGC we do NOT
1. Train him while he is processing his first preclear.
2. Tell him what process to run.
3. Add to his already tense confusion of being on staff by
unstabilizing all his stable auditing data, too.
We DO this:
1. We ask him what process he has the greatest certainty on.
2. We tell him to audit the pc with that process and no other.
3. If he has certainty on several we have him select one best
suited to pc and have him use that.
Then we train up the new staff auditor by auditors' conferences and HCO
Board of Review at a leisurely pace.
STABLE DATUM:
It will be found that any auditor using a process on which he has high
reality will obtain high results with a pc using that process.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: md.rd
Copyright (c) 1957
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 JUNE 1957
REISSUED 12 MAY 1972
Remimeo
TRAINING AND CCH PROCESSES
(Originally issued as an HCO Training Bulletin
from Hubbard Communications Office, Washington, D.C.)
NOTE.. The variations and some of the most potent processes are not
included in this Training Bulletin but will appear in the Student Manual
when published in September 1957.
NUMBER: Training O
NAME: Confronting Preclear.
COMMANDS: None.
POSITION: Student and coach sit facing each other a comfortable distance
apart- about five feet.
PURPOSE: To train student to confront a preclear with auditing only or with
nothing.
TRAINING STRESS: Have student and coach sit facing each other, neither
making any conversation or effort to be interesting. Have them sit and look
at each other and say and do nothing for some hours. Student must not
speak, fidget, giggle or be embarrassed or anaten. Coach may speak only if
student goes anaten (dope off). Student is confronting the body, thetan and
bank of the preclear.
HlSTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington in March 1957, to train
students to confront preclears in the absence of social tricks or
conversation and to overcome obsessive compulsions to be "interesting".
NUMBER: Training 1
NAME: Dear Alice.
COMMANDS: A phrase (with the "he saids" omitted) is picked out of the book
"Alice in Wonderland" and read to the coach. It is repeated until the coach
is satisfied it arrived where he is.
POSITION: Student and coach are seated facing each other a comfortable
distance apart .
PURPOSE: To teach the student to send an intention from himself to a
preclear in one unit of time without vias.
TRAINING STRESS: The command goes from the book to the student and, as his
own, to the coach. It must not go from book to coach. It must sound
natural, not artificial. Diction and elocution have no part in it. Loudness
may have.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London, April 1956, to teach the
communication formula to new students.
NUMBER: Training 2
NAME: Acknowledgments.
COMMANDS: The coach reads lines from "Alice in Wonderland" omitting "he
saids" and the student thoroughly acknowledges them. The coach repeats any
line he feels was not truly acknowledged.
POSITION: Student and coach are seated facing each other a comfortable
distance apart.
PURPOSE: To teach student that an acknowledgment is a method of controlling
preclear communication and that an acknowledgment is a full stop.
TRAINING STRESS: Teach student to acknowledge exactly what was said so that
preclear knows it was heard. Ask student from time to time what was said.
Curb over and under acknowledgment. Let student do anything at first to get
acknowledgments across, then even him out. Teach him that an acknowledgment
is a stop, not beginning of a new cycle of communication or an
encouragement to the preclear to go on.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London in April 1956, to teach new
students that an acknowledgment ends a communication cycle and a period of
time, that a new command begins a new period of time.
NUMBER: Training 3
NAME: Duplicative Question.
COMMANDS: "Do fish swim?" or "Do birds fly?" Communication bridge between.
POSITION: Student and coach seated a comfortable distance apart.
PURPOSE: To teach a student to duplicate without variation an auditing
question, each time newly, in its own unit of time, not as a blur with
other questions; and to teach him how to shift from one question to another
with a communication bridge rather than an abrupt change.
TRAINING STRESS: One question and student acknowledgment of its answer in
one unit of time which is then finished. To keep student from straying into
variations of command. To insist on communication bridge when question is
changed. Even though the same question is asked, it is asked as though it
had never occurred to anyone before. To teach students that a communication
bridge consists of getting three agreements-one agreement to end this
question, second agreement to continue session in general and maintain ARC,
third agreement to begin a new question. Teach student that preclear is
part of these agreements. To teach student never to vary question or shift
question or command without a bridge.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London, April 1956, to overcome
variations and sudden changes in session.
NUMBER: Training 4
NAME: Preclear Originations.
COMMANDS: The student runs "Do fish swim?" or "Do birds fly?" on coach.
Coach answers but now and then makes startling comments from a prepared
list given by instructor. Student must handle originations to satisfaction
of coach.
POSITION: Student and coach sit facing each other a comfortable distance
apart.
PURPOSE: To teach a student not to be tongue-tied or startled or thrown off
session by originations of preclear and to maintain ARC with preclear
throughout an origination.
TRAINING STRESS: The student is taught to hear origination and do three
things: ( I ) Understand it; (2) Acknowledge it; and (3) Return preclear to
session. If the coach feels abruptness or too much time consumed or lack of
comprehension, he corrects the student into better handling.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London in April 1956, to teach
auditors to stay in session when preclear dives out.
NUMBER: Training 5
NAME: Hand Mimicry.
COMMANDS: All commands are by motions of one or two hands. The auditor
makes a simple hand motion, holding his hand or hands in the final
position. The coach bobs his head as having received it. The coach then,
mirror-wise, makes the same motion with his hand or hands. The student then
acknowledges. If the motion was not correctly done by coach the student
acknowledges doubtfully, then repeats the motion to the coach. If the coach
does it well, student thanks coach by shaking own two hands together (prize
fighter fashion). Keep motions simple. Student must always be able to
duplicate own motions.
POSITION: Student and coach are seated facing each other at a short
distance, coach's knees inside student's.
PURPOSE: To educate student that verbal commands are not entirely
necessary. To make student physically telegraph an intention. To show
student necessity of having preclear obey commands.
TRAINING STRESS: Accuracy of student repeating own commands. Teaching
student to give preclear wins. Teaching student that an intention is
different from words.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London, April 1956, from the
principles of body mimicry developed by LRH in Camden, N.J., in 1954.
The following group of processes are usually taught in Upper Indoctrination
Course:
NUMBER: Training 6
NAME: Plain 8-C.
COMMANDS: "Look at that wall." "Walk over to that wall." "With your right
hand, touch that wall." "Turn around." All with acknowledgments. Not Tone
40. (Preclear is acknowledged when he originates, no physical contact.)
POSITION: Student and coach both ambulant in a room with no center
obstacles. Student walks with coach who does process for student.
PURPOSE: To give preclear reality on environment, control in following
directions and havingness. Not all effects fully explored.
TRAINING STRESS: Precision in repetition of commands by student and
experience on a gradient scale in directing another body than own. Handling
of originations. Acknowledging execution of commands by preclear. When this
process develops somatics on a preclear it must be continued until flat.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Camden, 1953. Originally called
"Opening Procedure of 8-C", 8-C being a full auditing procedure aimed at
negative thought. The only surviving part of this is now called 8-C and
means the above process. Original intention was to place preclear within
the control of the auditor so auditing could occur. Proved so successful
became an end-all in itself. Nominated in Summary Research Project 1956 as
responsible all by itself for approximately 50% of results achieved by
auditors across the world.
NUMBER: Training 7
NAME: Hi-School Indoc.
COMMANDS: Same as 8-C but with student in physical contact with coach,
student enforcing commands by manual guiding. Coach has only three valid
statements to which student must listen: these are "Start" to begin
process, "Flunk" to call attention to student error, and "That's it" to end
session. No other remark by coach is valid on student. Coach tries in all
possible ways, verbal, covert and physical, to stop student
from running 8-C on him. If the student falters, comm lags, fumbles a
command or fails to get an execution on coach, coach says "Flunk" and they
start at beginning of command cycle in which error occurred. Coach falling
down is not allowed.
POSITION: Student and coach ambulant. Student handling coach physically.
PURPOSE: To train a student never to be stopped by a preclear. To train him
to run fine 8-C in any circumstances. To teach him to handle rebellious
people.
TRAINING STRESS: Stress is on accuracy of student performance and
persistence by student. Start gradually to toughen up resistance to
student. Don't kill him off at once.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London, 1956.
NUMBER: Training 8
NAME: Tone 40 on an Object.
COMMANDS: "Stand up." "Thank you." "Sit down on the table." "Thank you."
These are the only commands used. (If student has trouble with Training 9,
have him do Tone 40 on an Object with 8-C commands.)
POSITION: Student standing beside table holding ashtray which he manually
makes execute the commands he gives.
PURPOSE: To make student clearly achieve Tone 40 command. To clarify
intentions as different than words. To start student on road to handling
objects and preclears with postulates. To obtain obedience not wholly based
on spoken commands.
TRAINING STRESS: have student give orders for a while alone. Then begin to
nag him to get them up to Tone 40 commands. Have student silently permeate
object with command and an expectancy that it will do it. When student can
"see" his intentions going in accurately, when he wonders why object
doesn't instantly obey, when he is not stumbling through energy or
depending on his voice, the training process is flat. This process usually
takes the most time in training of any process and time on it is well
spent. Objects can be ashtrays or rag dolls.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, D.C., 1957, for the
17th ACC.
NUMBER: Training 9
NAME: Tone 40 on a Person.
COMMANDS: Same as 8-C. This is not Tone 40 8-C (CCH 12). Student runs fine,
clearcut intentions and verbal orders on a coach. Coach tries to break down
Tone 40 of the student. Coach commands that are valid are "Start" (to
begin), "Flunk" to tell student he has erred and must return to beginning
of cycle, and "That's it" to take a break or stop session for the day. No
other statement by coach in session is valid on student and is only an
effort to make student come off Tone 40 or in general be stopped.
POSITION: Student and coach ambulant. Student in manual contact with coach
as needed.
PURPOSE: To make student able to maintain Tone 40 under any stress of
auditing.
TRAINING STRESS: The exact amount of physical effort must be used by
student plus a compelling unspoken intention. No jerky struggles are
allowed since each jerk is 3 stop. Student must learn to smoothly increase
effort quickly to amount needed to make coach execute. Stress is on exact
intention, exact strength needed, exact force necessary, exact Tone 40.
Even a slight smile by student can be a flunk. Too much force can be a
flunk. Too little definitely is a flunk. Anything not Tone 40 is a flunk.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, D.C., for the 17th ACC.
The following processes are taught in the Communication-Control-Havingness
Course:
NUMBER: CCH 0
NAME: Rudiments, Goals and Present Time Problem.
COMMANDS: Establishing session beginning by calling attention to room,
auditor and the session to begin. Discussing the preclear's goals for the
session. Auditor asks for present time problem and settles it with problems
of comparable magnitude or incomparable magnitude or by Locational
Processing. In general, remarks and commands enough to bring about ARC at
session's beginning but not enough to run down havingness of the preclear.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated at a comfortable distance apart.
PURPOSE: To make known the beginning of a session to a preclear and the
auditor so that no error as to its beginning is made. To put the preclear
into a condition to be audited.
TRAINING STRESS: To begin sessions, not just let them happen. To educate
the student into the actual elements of a session and condition of
preclears. To stress the inability to audit something else when present
time problem is not flat. To demonstrate what happens when preclear doesn't
know session has begun or has no goals for it or what happens when present
time problem only half flat when other things are engaged upon. Stress that
it is done each session. Explain closure mechanism of problem with
preclear, the solution of "the liability of solutions".
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Elizabeth, N.J., 1950; Goals in
Wichita, Kansas in 1951; Present Time Problem, London, 1952; Rudiments,
Phoenix, 1955.
NUMBER: CCH 1.
NAME: * Give Me Your Hand, Tone 40.
COMMANDS: "Give me your hand." Physical action of taking hand when not
given and then replacing it in preclear's lap. And "Thank you" ending
cycle. All Tone 40 with clear intention, one command in one unit of time,
no originations of preclear acknowledged in any way verbally or physically.
May be run on right hand, left hand, both hands, each one flattened in
turn.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated, in chairs without arms, close
together. Auditor's knees both to auditor's left of preclear's knees,
outside of auditor's right thigh against outside of preclear's right thigh.
This position reversed for left hand. In both hands preclear's knees are
between auditor's knees.
PURPOSE: To demonstrate to preclear that control of preclear's body is
possible, despite revolt of circuits, and inviting preclear to directly
control it. Absolute control by auditor then passes over toward absolute
control of his own body by preclear.
TRAINING STRESS: Never stop process until a flat place is reached. To
process with good Tone 40. Auditor taught to pick up preclear's hand by
wrist with auditor's thumb nearest auditor's body, to have an exact and
invariable place to carry preclear's hand to before clasping, clasping hand
with exactly correct pressure, replacing hand (with auditor's left hand
still holding preclear's wrist) in preclear's lap. Making every command(l
and cycle separate. Maintaining Tone 40. Stress on intention from auditor
to preclear with each command. To leave an instant for preclear to do it by
own will before auditor does it. Stress Tone 40 precision. To keep
epicenters balanced. CCH I (b) should also be flattened.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in the 17th ACC, Washington, D.C.,
1957.
* The name and command for CCH 1 has since been revised to, "Give me that
hand."
NUMBER: CCH2
NAME: * Tone 40 8-C.
COMMANDS: "Look at that wall." "Thank you." "Walk over to that wall."
"Thank you." "With the right hand, touch that wall." "Thank you." "Turn
around." "Thank you." Run without acknowledging in any way any origin by
preclear, acknowledging only preclear's execution of the command. Commands
smoothly enforced physically. Tone 40, full intention.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear ambulant, auditor in physical contact with
preclear as needed.
PURPOSE: To demonstrate to preclear that his body can be directly
controlled and thus inviting him to control it. Finding present time.
Havingness. Other effects not fully explained.
TRAINING STRESS: Absolute auditor precision. No drops from Tone 40. No
flubs. Total present-time auditing. Auditor turns preclear counterclockwise
then steps always on preclear's right side. Auditor's body acts as block to
forward motion when preclear turns. Auditor gives command, gives preclear a
moment to obey, then enforces command with physical contact of exactly
correct force to get command executed. Auditor does not check preclear from
executing commands.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, D.C., 1957, for the
17th ACC.
* The name and command for CCH 2 has since been revised to, "You look at
that wall."
NUMBER: CCH 3
NAME: Book Mimicry.
COMMANDS: Auditor makes a simple or complex motion with a book. Hands book
to preclear. Preclear makes motion, duplicating auditor's mirror image-
wise. Auditor asks preclear if he is satisfied that the preclear duplicated
the motion. If preclear is and auditor is also fairly satisfied, auditor
takes book and goes to next command. If preclear says he is and auditor
fairly sure preclear isn't, auditor takes back book and repeats command and
gives book to preclear again for another try. If preclear is not sure he
duplicated any command auditor repeats it for him and gives him back the
book. Tone 40 only in motions. Verbal two-way quite free.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other a comfortable
distance apart.
PURPOSE: To bring up preclear's communication with control and duplication.
(Control + duplication = communication.)
TRAINING STRESS: Stress giving preclear wins. Stress auditor's necessity to
duplicate his own commands. Circular motions are more complex than straight
lines.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard for the 16th ACC in Washington, D.C.,
1957. Based on duplication developed by LRH in London, 1952.
NUMBER: CCH 4
NAME: Hand Space Mimicry.
COMMANDS: Auditor raises two hands, palms facing preclear's and says, "Put
your hands against mine, follow them and contribute to their motion." He
then makes a simple motion with right hand, then left. "Did you contribute
to the motion?" "Good." "Put your hands in your lap." When this is flat the
auditor does this same thing with a half inch of space between his and
preclear's palms. When this is flat auditor does it with a wider space and
so on until preclear is able to follow motions a yard away.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated, close together facing each other,
preclear's knees between auditor's.
PURPOSE: To develop reality on the auditor using the reality scale (solid
comm line). To get preclear into comm by control + duplication.
TRAINING STRESS: That auditor be gentle and accurate in his motions, giving
preclear wins. To be free in two-way comm.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, 1956, as a therapeutic
version of Dummy Hand Mimicry. Something was needed to supplant "Look at
me. Who am l?" and "Find the Auditor" part of rudiments.
NUMBER: Training 10
NAME: Locational Processing.
COMMANDS: "You notice that (indicated object)." "Thank you." Auditor
enforces command when needed by turning preclear's head toward object. Run
inside an auditing room or outside. Auditor indicates obvious objects,
naming them and pointing to them.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated side by side or facing each other or
seated or walking outside.
PURPOSE: To control attention. Since attention is being controlled by
facsimiles, an unknown control, supplanting with a known control brings
preclear up to present time. See also Pre-Logics. A highly therapeutic
process. Can be substituted for Present Time Problem to some degree in
cases that cannot run a Present Time Problem as a process.
TRAINING STRESS: That coach (or preclear) always looks in direction of
object.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Elizabeth, N.J., in June 1950, to
bring preclears into auditing room after they had been "brought up to
present time".
NUMBER: CCH 5
NAME: Location by Contact.
COMMANDS: "Touch that (indicated object)." "Thank you."
POSITION: Auditor and preclear may be seated where the preclear is very
unable, in which case they are seated at a table which has a number of
objects scattered on its surface. Or auditor and preclear may be ambulant,
with the auditor in manual contact with the preclear as is necessary to
face him toward and guide him to the indicated object.
PURPOSE: The purpose of the process is to give the preclear orientation and
havingness and to improve his perception.
TRAINING STRESS: Training stress is upon gentleness, ARC and the raising of
the preclear's certainty that he has touched the indicated object. It
should be noticed that this can be run on blind people.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard from Locational Processing in 1957.
NUMBER: CCH 6
NAME: Body-Room Contact.
COMMANDS: "Touch your (body part)." "Thank you." "Touch that (indicated
room object)." "Thank you."
POSITION: Auditor and preclear move about together as needed, the auditor
enforcing the commands by manual contact using the preclear's hands to
touch objects and touch body parts.
PURPOSE: To establish the orientation and increase the havingness of the
preclear and to give him in particular a reality on his own body.
TRAINING STRESS: Training Stress is upon using only those body parts which
are not embarrassing to the preclear as it will be found that the preclear
ordinarily has very little reality on various parts of his body. Impossible
commands should not be given to the preclear in any case.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in 1957 in Washington, D.C., as a
lower step than Body-Room Show Me.
NUMBER: CCH 7
NAME: Contact by Duplication.
COMMANDS: "Touch that table." "Thank you." "Touch your (body part)." "Thank
you." "Touch that table." "Thank you." "Touch your (same body part)."
"Thank you." "Touch that table." "Thank you." "Touch your (same body
part)." "Thank you," etc., in that order.
POSITION: Auditor may be seated. Preclear should be walking. Usually
auditor standing by to manually enforce the commands.
PURPOSE: Process is used to heighten perception, orient the preclear and
raise the preclear's havingness. Control of attention as in all these
"contact" processes naturally takes the attention units out of the bank
which itself has been controlling the preclear's attention.
TRAINING STRESS: Training stress is on precision of command and motion,
with each command in its unit of time, all commands perfectly duplicated.
Preclear to continue to run process even though he dopes off. Good ARC with
the preclear, not picking one body part which is aberrated at first but
flattening some non-aberrated body part before aberrated body part is
tackled.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in 1957 in Washington, D.C., as a
lower level process than Opening Procedure by Duplication, or Show Me by
Duplication. All contact processes have been developed out of the Pre-
Logics.
NUMBER: CCH 8
NAME: Trio.
COMMANDS: "Look around the room (environment) and tell me something you
could have." Run until flat. "Look around the room and tell me something
the body (body part) can't have." Valence form: "Look around the room and
tell me something mother (or other valence) can't have." Long form: "Look
around the room and tell me what you could have." Run flat. "Look around
the room and tell me something you would permit to remain." Run flat. "Look
around the room and tell me what you could dispense with." Dispense in long
form is sometimes run first when preclear is set on wasting.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated at a comfortable distance both facing
toward majority of the room.
PURPOSE: To remedy havingness objectively.
TRAINING STRESS: Run it smoothly without invalidative questions. One of the
most effective processes known when thinkingness can be controlled
somewhat. Run when havingness drops or for a full intensive.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London in 1955. Name derived from
the three questions of the long form. Originally called the "Terrible
Trio".
NUMBER: CCH 9
NAME: Tone 40 "Keep it from going away."
COMMANDS: "Look at that (indicated object)." "Thank you." "Walk over to
that (indicated object)." "Thank you." "Touch that (indicated object)."
"Thank you." "Keep it from going away." "Thank you." "Did you keep it from
going away?" "Thank you," and so forth.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear ambulant. Auditor assisting by manual
contact.
PURPOSE: The purpose of the process is to increase havingness of the
preclear and bring about his ability to keep things from going away, which
ability lost, accounts for the possession of psychosomatic illnesses.
TRAINING STRESS: The training stress is on precision and accuracy and
finding out that this is actually Tone 40 8-C with a thinkingness addition.
This is the first step on to the route of making things solid.
HlSTORY: Developed in 1956 in London, England, by L. Ron Hubbard.
NUMBER: CCH 10
NAME: Tone 40 "Hold it still."
COMMANDS: "Look at that (indicated object)." "Thank you." "Walk over to
that (indicated object)." "Thank you." "Touch that (indicated object)."
"Thank you." "Hold it still." "Thank you." "Did you hold it still'?" "Thank
you," etc., in that order.
PURPOSE: To improve an individual's ability to make things more solid and
to assert his ability to control his environment.
TRAINING STRESS: Same as CCH 9.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London, England, in 1956.
NUMBER: CCH 11
NAME: Tone 40 "Make it a little more solid."
COMMANDS: "Look at that (indicated object)." "Thank you." "Walk over to
that (indicated object)." "Thank you." "Touch that (indicated object)."
"Thank you." "Make it a little more solid." "Thank you." "Did you make it a
little more solid'?" ''Thank you," etc., in that order.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear ambulant.
PURPOSE: To assert control over the preclear and increase the preclear's
havingness. To increase the preclear's reality on the Pre-Logics. To
reverse the flow of solids.
TRAINING STRESS: Complete precision of performance, a stress 011 all the
CCH 9, CCH 10 and CCH 11, that they include a control of thinkingness of
the preclear and therefore should not be run with a tremendous amount of
auditor trust of the preclear and should not be run until the lower levels
of CCH are to some degree flat as they will give the preclear losses.
HISTORY: Developed in 1956 in London, England, by L. Ron Hubbard.
NUMBER: Training 11
NAME: ARC Straight Wire.
COMMANDS: "Recall something that was really real to you." "Thank you."
"Recall a time when you were in good communication with someone."' "Thank
you." "Recall a time when you really liked someone." "Thank you." The three
commands are given in that order and repeated in that order consistently.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other at a comfortable
distance.
PURPOSE: To give the student reality on the existence of a bank. This is
audited on another and is audited until the other student is in present
time. It will be found that the process discloses the cycling action of the
preclear going deeper and deeper into the past and then more and more
shallowly into the past until he is recalling something again close to
present time. This cyclic action should be studied and understood and the
reality on the pictures the preclear gets should be thoroughly understood
by the student. The fact that another has pictures should be totally real
to the student under training.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in 1951 in Wichita, Kansas. This was
once a very important process. It has been known to bring people from a
neurotic to a sane level after only a short period of application. It has
been run on a group basis with success but it should be noted that the
thinkingness of the individuals in the group would have to be well under
the control of the auditor in order to have this process broadly
beneficial. When it was discovered that this process occasionally reduced
people's havingness, the process itself was not generally run thereafter.
It is still, however, an excellent process with that proviso, a reduction
of havingness in some cases.
NUMBER: CCH 12
NAME: Limited Subjective Havingness.
COMMANDS: "What can you mock up?" "O.K. (to preclear's answer)." "Mock up
(what preclear said he could mock up)." "O.K." "Shove it in to yourself."
"O.K." When this is relatively flat, "Mock up (whatever preclear said he
could)." "O.K." "Let it remain where it is." "O.K." When this is relatively
flat enter on the third part. "Mock up (whatever the preclear said he could
mock up)." "O.K." "Throw it away." "O.K." If the preclear cannot throw the
object away at once, have him duplicate it many times and move one of them
slightly further away from him until he has at last thrown one away. If the
preclear cannot mock anything up, remedy his havingness with blackness. If
the preclear's "field" is invisibility, have him put glass objects of many
sorts and sizes on a table and one after the other "keep them from going
away". If mock-up disappears have preclear keep on trying at it because he
will eventually be able to get it back.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other.
PURPOSE: To Remedy the Havingness of the preclear's bank.
TRAINING STRESS: Not to give the preclear any losses. He must successfully
complete each step and the auditor must do things on a gradient scale until
the preclear has successfully completed each command given.
HISTORY: These and other creative processes were developed by L. Ron
Hubbard in London in the fall of 1952.
NUMBER: CCH 13
NAME: Subjective Solids.
COMMANDS: "What can you mock up?" "O.K. (to preclear's answer)." (This is
asked once every time one changes the type of mock-up.) "Mock up (whatever
the preclear said)." "O.K." "Now make it a little more solid." "O.K." "Did
you do that?" "Thank you." Various objects are mocked up and made a little
more solid. The preclear can be told to do what he pleases with these. This
is not a Tone 40 process.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated.
PURPOSE: To make it possible for the preclear to mock up subjective objects
and make them a little more solid, preparatory to running "Then and Now
Solids".
TRAINING STRESS: On knowing what the preclear is doing, how he is doing it,
where he is putting the mock-ups, so that the preclear is certainly policed
and is certainly doing the process. If the preclear neglects to do the
process, even though he receives the command and nods his assent, he is, of
course, going out of control of the auditor.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in 1956 in London.
NUMBER: CCH 14
NAME: Then and Now Solids.
COMMANDS: "Get a picture-and make it a little more solid." "Thank you."
"Look at that (auditor indicates object)-and make it a little more solid."
"Thank you." These commands are given with a tiny pause between the first
and second phrase as it will be found that the glance of the preclear at
the object tends to give him the impression that he has already made it a
little more solid before the auditor gives the command if this auditing
command is broken into two commands.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other a comfortable
distance apart.
PURPOSE: To straighten out the time track of the preclear. To clear up his
bank. To disclose his life computation. To show up the whole track. To give
preclear practice in handling time. To get rid of unwanted facsimiles. And
in general to handle in its totality the reactive mind.
TRAINING STRESS: On leading up with gradients toward any failure that the
preclear may have in making something a little more solid. In keeping the
auditor from chasing all over the bank every time the preclear has a second
picture show up or a third or a fourth or a fifth on the same command. The
auditor wants one picture and wants one thing or the picture itself to be
made a little more solid. We do not do two or three pictures and then a
room object. The preclear can get easily lost on the track unless this is
obeyed. Furthermore, it will be noted that the preclear goes out of present
time further and further and then less and less and then further and
further and then less and less and this cycle of further into the past and
then less into the past finally winds up with bringing the preclear wholly
into present time.
HISTORY: Developed from Over and Under Solids, which was developed by L.
Ron Hubbard in late 1955 and improved by him in 1956. The process more or
less completes the work begun on the reactive mind in 1947. It will be
noted that many earlier processes and effects are woven into Then and Now
Solids.
NUMBER: Training 12
NAME: Think a Thought.
COMMANDS: "Think a thought." "Thank you."
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated a comfortable distance apart.
PURPOSE: To give the student some reality on the thinkingness of other
people and demonstrate that the control of thinkingness is possible.
TRAINING STRESS: Should be on the fact that after the control of the body
has been asserted and control of attention flattened, control of
thinkingness can take place. There is really nothing wrong with the
preclear except that he cannot control his thinkingness, thus he cannot
change considerations at will because he is stopped by the bank. This is
the most permissive of such processes since the preclear cannot really help
to think a thought and we do not much care whether he thought it or the
bank thought it.
HISTORY: Developed in 1955 in Phoenix, Arizona, by L. Ron Hubbard.
NUMBER: CCH 15
NAME: Rising Scale Processing.
COMMANDS: The Chart of Attitudes is employed, the top and bottom buttons of
which are: DEAD-SURVIVE, NOBODY-EVERYBODY, DISTRUST-FAITH, LOSE-WIN, WRONG-
RIGHT, NEVER-ALWAYS, I KNOW NOT-I KNOW, STOP-CHANGE-START, NO
RESPONSIBILITY-FULLY RESPONSIBLE, STOPPED-CAUSES MOTION, FULL EFFECT-CAUSE,
IDENTIFICATION-DIFFERENTIATION, OWNS NOTHING-OWNS ALL, HALLUCINATION-TRUTH,
I AM NOT-I AM, NO-GAME-UNLIMITED GAMES. The auditing commands in this
process are "Get the idea of (bottom button)." "Do you have that idea?"
"All right." "Now change that idea as nearly as you can to (top button)."
"O.K." "How close did you come?" "Thank you." This is run many times on the
one set of buttons until the preclear has a certainty that he can maintain
the upper scale idea.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated a comfortable distance apart.
PURPOSE: To give the preclear drills in changing his mind and to
demonstrate that he can maintain higher levels of certainty and that he can
alter his considerations. And incidentally to probably change his glandular
structure to the better until they have a better performance which is of no
great importance to the process and has little to do with Scientology.
TRAINING STRESS: The training stress is on maintaining ARC with the
preclear, yet being definite about what idea the preclear is supposed to
get. The prerequisites demand that the thinkingness of the preclear be to
some degree under the control of the auditor. The auditor must not be
impatient with the preclear, but let the preclear try again and again to
get these two ideas, one a low-scale idea and change that idea into an
upper-scale idea. The preclear must be in fairly good condition with regard
to havingness or the process can fail.
HISTORY: This process was developed in the fall of 1951 by L. Ron Hubbard
in Wichita, Kansas, and is taken from Scientology 8-8008 as published in
England and as given in The Creation of Human Ability, page 129, as R2-51.
This is probably the oldest purely Scientology process in existence. It was
not entirely workable in the past because it was not understood that the
body has to be brought under the auditor's control and that the attention
has to be brought under the auditor's control before the thinkingness of
the preclear can be brought under the auditor's control. The process,
however, run on preclears who were not in too bad condition, has been
continually successful both in changing their physical beingness and
abilities, the latter being in the sphere of interest of Scientology. The
first preclear on which this and Opening Procedure by Duplication were run
was Mary Sue Hubbard.
NUMBER: GP I
NAME: Bank Processes (Engrams, Secondaries, Locks, Perceptics and Whole
Track).
NUMBER: GP 2
NAME: Subjective Havingness in Full, Repair and Remedy of Havingness,
Avalanches, Black and White, Flows.
NUMBER: GP 3
NAME: Connectedness, Association, Identification, A = A = A = A.
NUMBER: GP 4
NAME: Time Processes.
NUMBER: GP 5
NAME: Creative Processes.
NUMBER: GP6
NAME: Full Rising Scale Processes.
NUMBER: GP7
NAME: Not-Know Processes, Waterloo Station, Something you wouldn't mind
Forgetting.
NUMBER: GP8
NAME: Think a Thought, Future Mock-ups.
NUMBER: GP9
NAME: CDEI, Problems, Find Something that is Not Thinking.
NUMBER: GP10
NAME: Thought Placement, Invent a Lie, Assign an Intention, Place a
Command.
NUMBER: GP11
NAME: Exteriorization, Pre-Logics, Keep Head from Going Away, Try not to
Exteriorize.
NUMBER: GP12
NAME: Route 1.
NUMBER: GP13
NAME: Anchor Points, Structure of Body.
NUMBER: GP14
NAME: Body Lifting.
NUMBER: GP15
NAME: World Reality, Get the Idea that (object) is Thinking about Itself,
Perception of Environment, Reality Scale Processes.
NUMBER: Training13
NAME: Fishing a Cognition.
COMMANDS: This is a general ARC, answering the preclear's origin process.
When the preclear experiences a somatic, when he sighs, when he gives a
reaction to a Tone 40 process, the auditor repeats the process two or three
more times (random number) and then pausing the process asks the preclear,
"How are you doing now?" or "What is going on?" and finds out what happened
to the preclear just as though the auditor has not noticed that the
preclear had a reaction. The auditor does not point out the reaction but
merely wants a discussion in general. During this discussion he brings the
preclear up to at least a cognition that the preclear has had a somatic or
a reaction and then merely continues the process without further bridge.
This is done randomly. It is not always done every time the preclear
experiences a reaction.
POSITION: Whatever position the preclear and auditor are in as directed by
the process they are running. But usually with the auditor touching the
preclear. For example, in "Give Me Your Hand" the auditor continues to hold
the preclear's hand after he has said "Thank you" and asks the preclear how
he is doing.
TRAINING STRESS: Is that the fishing of a cognition is an art and it cannot
be taught by general command, that the auditor must not as-is the
preclear's havingness by asking him, "How are you feeling now?", that the
preclear must not be placed in possession of the knowledge that he can stop
the auditor from auditing by having a reaction or experiencing a reaction
to the processing, otherwise he will begin to experience them simply to
stop the auditor. Thus the use of Training 13 is not routine and regular
but is random. It should be stressed that this can be used while running
any and all Tone 40 processes. It should be stressed that the Tone 40 is
run as itself and that fishing a cognition is run into the process between
cycles of command and acknowledgment and command and acknowledgment. After
a thorough acknowledgment one can fish for a cognition thus pausing
momentarily in the process, get things straightened out, maintain ARC with
the preclear and then go on with the Tone 40 process. One does not enter
fishing a cognition between the command and the acknowledgment. One never
reacts to what the preclear is doing the instant that the preclear does it,
otherwise one educates the preclear to stop one. Training stress here is
that a Tone 40 process is not run on an automaton basis.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, D.C., in 1957 while
developing CCH on the following notes from LRH's notebook: "I use processes
to restimulate thought or action and when this happens I fish out a
cognition and either continue the process or bridge to the next process."
It was developed basically to keep auditors in communication with the
preclear since Tone 40 processes give some auditors, when they are studying
them, the idea that they are supposed to go out of communication with the
preclear.
L. RON
HUBBARD
Founder
LRH: ne.rd
Copyright � 1957, 1972
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[CCHs 5, 6 & 7 have been reissued for use on the HQS Course as HCO B 30
September 1971, Issue VI, amended and reissued 19 April 1974, CCHs 5, 6 &
7, Volume VII, page 408. Training 13 has been revised for use in Hubbard
Consultant Stress Analysis as BTB 25 June 1970R, Issue 11, revised and
reissued 14 August 1974, Fishing a Cognition. ]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 JUNE 1957
(NOTE: Temporary Directive Subject to Change when further
advised by Directors of Training who experience it in use.)
STUDENT INTENSIVES AND
CO-AUDITING PROCESSES
Graduating Students should run the following in student intensives on
incoming students:
CCH 0 - Rudiments, Goals, Present Time Problem
Tr 15 - Clearing the Auditor
CCH 5 - Location by Contact
CCH 6 - Body-Room Contact
CCH 7 - (if reached in 25 hrs) Contact by Duplication
Students will run dummy and coached on all but following processes
which they should run on a co-auditing basis:
Tr 6 - Plain 8c
Tr 10 - Locational Processing
CCH 5 (b) - Objective Show Me
CCH 6 (b) - Body-Room Show Me
CCH 7 (b) - Show Me Duplication
CCH 8 - Trio
Tr 11 - ARC Straightwire
CCH 7 (c) - Book and Bottle
LRH:md.nm L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 18 JUNE 1957
ALL STAFF-
Washington and London
PEOPLE'S QUESTIONS
A Congress MUST
An Organization MUST
Answer people's questions.
This is the primary public complaint-that Scientologists in the
Organization or out won't answer directly questions asked about this or
that.
Understand it, answer it, make friends.
Best,
LRH:md.jh L. RON HUBBARD
[Some copies of the above HCO B were dated 16 June 1957.]
[pic]
Issue 49 [1957, ca. late June]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
What About Validation?
L. Ron Hubbard
Almost at once we are going to have a Congress.
We are calling it the Freedom Congress because it starts July 4, 1957
and because it is all about freedom from human confusion.
But there's something we'll have to take up at this Congress beyond
Freedom, and that's Validation.
It isn't good sense that I try to handle this Validation Program
without knowing how you feel about it. And so I am asking you to help me.
Here's the situation current:
We have come to a plateau of training and technology. I do not say we
are at any peak of peaks. But we are on a very high plateau.
We can do these things:
We can accurately and predictably process a day-old baby, a person in a
coma, a catatonic schitz, a no-reality case or a person in very good shape.
Of course that's news, but it also changes several things.
We can also train well and thoroughly any person of good will in a few
weeks of arduous drill. We arrived at a plateau of results and at the same
time arrived at a plateau of training skills.
Without these skills learned in heavy training, the processing results
do not occur. Better than 50' YO of the result depends upon the skill of
the auditor.
If this is Scientology today, then it had better be Scientology
everywhere, not just here in Washington or amongst recent Academy
graduates.
Rumor has probably told you already much misinformation about levels of
Indoc and CCH. The truth is I'm just now finding time to hand-train enough
people in these two things to make them get a reality on them. You might
say the real thing wasn't released until I went to London in April and, in
the U.S., until I returned in May.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
Truth is, these things are man-killers. An auditor not well schooled in all
levels of Indoc cannot get results of any consequence with CCH (actually
CDCCtH*). No older auditor credits this until he faces it in a training
room. But an old auditor does better with older processes-those released up
to December 31, 1956. Those were pretty hot, too, remember.
The present situation, then, is as follows: We have many good auditors
who can get fine results with pre-57 processes. We have some less able
auditors who get poor results with pre-57 processes. We have a series of
training skills and processes which would permit both to get much finer,
faster results.
The past situation, beginning in 1950, was this: We had a vision of
what could be done. We saw it done by some. We were trying to learn how so
that all could do it. To learn we had to train and process. Our results
were better than Man had ever experienced before but here and there the
results did not match the hopes of some-to put it mildly. Therefore, I
considered it was up to us to better the processes and to better training
so that people could do the processes developed.
Well, I miscalculated. For certain, those processes which could tear a
case apart and make a clear fast, would also tear a homo sapiens auditor
apart. And so it has transpired. Full-scale CDCCtH tears up auditors fast.
Thus I had to recapitulate and find a new route to make a new man. That
route is loosely called Indoctrination but it isn't at full dress parade
what you've seen. It's 13 levels of skill, each one more advanced, which
wind up with a clear-acting auditor.
These levels of training make, when thoroughly administered, a
synthetic clear without proofing a person against being audited to clear
all the way.
Now in 1950 I did a lot of talking and made a lot of promises. And in
1957, seven years of study and work later, only now can they all be kept.
To reach our present plateau I had to get a lot of people trained. Every
one of those has coming to him a full realization of ability to help and
handle others.
All right. That's the project. It's big enough. Thousands of auditors
should now have everything that's been learned and developed about
auditing.
If they get that to which they're entitled, no force on Earth can stop
Scientology.
So what do we do about it?
There's the old HDA, there's the person who was trained in L.A. or
Wichita or Elizabeth. Maybe he's auditing now, maybe not. But he's entitled
to his ability to clear his fellow man. These were people of great heart,
great willingness to serve. I did all I could for them-it was always, until
1957, not enough. But a wider look bade me learn how to train and then to
speak.
I have learned. I am speaking.
Further, I am asking for help in solving this great problem. How do we
bring up to ability every auditor ever trained by a central organization?
How do we find some of these people? We're not now interested in no-
comm lists or other nonsense. The battle for knowledge is won. And unlike
in so many battles, all can share in the victory.
[* C for Control, D for Duplication, C for Communication, Ct for Control of
thought = H for Havingness, See also P.A.B. 122, "The Five Levels of
Indoctrination and Procedure CCH."]
How do we finance such a project? Do these people pay for retraining (or,
actually for training in full, not retraining)? How do we handle people
lately trained (1956) in this wise? How can we do this without invalidating
the real ability of many auditors and without upsetting too many people?
Your help is needed in assisting me to answer such questions.
They wanted to be clear. They wanted to help their fellow man. All I
know now is how to do the clearing and the training on a major scale.
I have some proposals on this. I am going to give the right to coach
other auditors to every successful graduate of the 18th ACC-with high
standards for successful graduation. To do this I'll have to work the 18th
ACC people through July and into mid-August harder than anybody has been
worked yet. But they can take it.
I can validate recent graduates partly trained on this but I don't
think it would be entirely fair.
Well, there it is. It's the Validation Program. But what is it? It's
what you and I decide it will be at the July 4th Congress.
Would you please bring your thoughts on it and your proposals to the
Congress or send them to me here.
Validation U.S. means a lot. But it can't be done at all until I know
how you feel it should be done.
1. Should it be done at all.
2. If so, how should it be done.
Could I have your help?
Best,
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH TAPE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
28 June 1957
The following are Auditors' Conferences held by L. Ron Hubbard:
5706C28 AUDC Lecture
5706C28 AUDC Question-and-Answer Period
P.A.B. No. 115
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 July 1957
THE REHABILITATION OF ABILITIES
In this PAB I want to discuss a question which many field auditors have
confronted me with-i.e. that of increasing the preclear's willingness in
practicing a musical instrument, or to keep writing, or just to regain a
lost ability.
If you take an individual and make him play a musical instrument (as
parents and schools do), his ability to play that instrument will not
improve. We would first have to consult with him as to what his ambitions
are. He would eventually at least have to agree with the fact that it is a
good thing to play an instrument.
Once in a while we find a bad boy. He cannot be put in school and has
to be sent to a military school. They are going to force him in order to
change him. Occasionally this bad boy is sent to a school which simply
thinks the best way to handle such cases is to find something in which he
is interested and to allow him to do it. Such a school once existed in
California and consecutively produced geniuses. The roster of World War
II's scientists practically marched from that particular school. They
figured that it must have been the example set by the professor, his purity
in not smoking cigars or something like that.
What actually happened was this. They took a boy with whom nobody got
any results and said, "Isn't there anything you would like to do?" The boy
said "No," and they answered, "Well, fuss around in the lab or grounds or
something and someday you may make up your mind." The boy thought this over
and decided that he wanted to be a chemist. Nobody ever sent him to a class
and told him to crack a book, and nobody ever complained very much when he
blew up something in the laboratory, and the next thing you knew the boy
was an excellent chemist. Nobody interrupted his desire to be a chemist. It
existed then, and from that point on he was not himself interrupting his
willingness to be a chemist. Educationally this is a very interesting
point.
Supposing we had only a few minutes as a coach on a football team and
we wanted to pick out the number of men who were going to be the first
squad and quickly put them in good shape so that they could win a special
game; we would only have to ask this question: "Now I want any one of you
people whose desire to be a football player stems from the age of ten to
step forward." Maybe half of the squad would step forward. Here would be
your first team.
What about the little runt that has only been the water boy? He is the
best quarterback in the world because he wanted to be a football player.
But the man who was merely qualified and who thought it was a good way to
get through school, get a scholarship, some coaching or make a couple of
dollars, or perhaps only really wanted lots of women because he knew that
women gyrated around football players, will utterly
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
pulverize the team because he is an unsupportable person. He is doing this
on a via, and he isn't really willing to be a member of a football team.
His willingness is missing.
Now let's have this ordinary team play against a team of all-stars and
they will make the all-stars look like a bunch of punks. It is too simple a
method of selection for anybody ever to have used.
You could by a series of almost straightwire questions ask a fellow who
has difficulty in playing a trumpet, "Can you recall a time when somebody
told you it was a bad thing to play a trumpet?" This limited process might
stand up for two or three questions and you might be able to key out the
lock he has against being a person who plays a trumpet and his ability to
play a trumpet goes up. Then somebody else walks up to him and tells him
something about how bad it is to be a trumpeter and he goes right back to
where he was. It is not a permanent improvement at all.
It is possible that a person who was very good on the piano in his last
life is born into a family who didn't have a piano. Why? Because he cannot
confront one. There isn't one now because he cannot have one. Now he starts
to learn something about this and he goes along fine until he thinks that
he ought to have an upright piano to practice on. This has been
restimulated a little and his parents say to him, "Oh, I don't know. That's
much too expensive. You'll have to pick something else." Somebody has
raised an objection to it.
Well, his willingness at that time is exerted in the direction of
trying to be a part of this new team called the family and this is being
subordinate, and so is his idea of playing the piano. He doesn't force the
matter but that confirms to him the scarcity of pianos. He is liable from
then on not to be able to play a note or even learn how to read music. He
is just as liable to be stopped again.
The willingness to write is systematically killed in American
universities. I have lectured on writing to Harvard university students
many times, and they have asked me how one develops style. Personally, as
far as style was concerned, all one had to do was express what he wanted to
say and that was style. It is no more complicated than this and sometimes,
just for gags, why, write in the valence of Shakespeare or other literary
figure. I have said to these students, "Style-well, I can tell you how you
would find out whether you had a style or not, or how to develop one. Just
sit down and write a hundred thousand words."
The class fainted. One hundred thousand words. Nobody could write one
hundred thousand words. From there on out that killed it. What was this all
about? We obviously had a class of writers that had been carefully trained
to be very good in every line they wrote. That isn't how you write at all.
You write! That is all you do, write for lots of people about lots of
things. These students were looking for some magic sesame and the professor
there is carefully monitoring them of quality, quality, quality, correcting
their ideas, punctuation marks, their schematics and so on, correct,
correct, correct, chop, chop, chop, for there isn't going to be a writer in
this class, you dogs. The final result of this is a complete unwillingness
to write.
It is true that a person can be quantitatively coaxed into doing
something that he apparently couldn't do before. But it is only when you
carelessly or accidentally tripped over this having, confronting,
contribute to, mechanism. Writing lies in the band of "contribute to." If
you have to write in order to have, you rather suffer for it because an art
is almost totally in Create, Contribute To, and it goes between those two
lines. And when those are fallen away from, you get fouled up.
If a person keeps writing or talking pointlessly, like making out
government forms to be sent to the State Department or Internal Revenue,
you know nobody is ever
going to read any part of them. And you could make these forever and your
willingness to do so would go by the boards eventually because there is no
communication formula involved. There is no havingness, no confrontingness,
no contributing-to-ness. People get so bad about this that they cannot fill
out reports. The Revenue down here deprives itself of billions of dollars
of revenue every year, not because people are unwilling to pay their income
tax, but because they are no longer capable of confronting a form. Then
after that the effort is not to fill out the form.
People will permit you to take things away from them if you do it
gracefully and don't upset their willingness too much. The way you make a
greedy or a selfish child is to make him, against his will, give up things
to other children. You will eventually drive him into the only-one
category. Parents usually never consult the child's willingness. They
consult his havingness, handle it and they have a spoilt child.
It is interesting to watch a child that has been around somebody who
always consulted him but didn't take very good care of him as opposed to a
child who had the best of care but who never was consulted.
A little boy is sitting on the floor playing with blocks and balls and
is having a good time. Along comes the nurse and picks him up and takes him
into the other room and changes his diapers and he screams bloody murder
the whole way. He doesn't like it. She keeps on doing this to him, placing
him around, never consulting his power of choice and he will eventually
grow up obsessed with the power of choice. He has to have his way. He
becomes very didactic. He is trying to hold down the last rungs of it, and
his ability will be correspondingly poor, particularly in the handling of
people.
Now this is quite different. You know the child is hungry or this or
that, and you know he ought to eat. The child will eat if he is kept on
some sort of routine. Supper IS at 6:00 and he will get used to eating at
6:00, the willingness never quite overwhelmed him. He finds out the food is
there at 6:00 and so he makes up his mind to eat at 6:00. You provide the
havingness and he provides the willingness. If you don't override that he
will never have any trouble about food.
Then somebody comes along and talks to him and says, "Hey, wouldn't you
like to go into the other room and change your clothes?" and the answer is
"No." I am afraid that you are making a horrible mistake if you proceed
from that point on the basis of "Well, I'll give you a piece of candy,"
persuade, seduce, coax, etc. That is psychology, the way psychologists
handle situations, and it doesn't really work.
You take one of two courses. Either you run expert 8-C with lots of two-
way communication and so on, or you just let him grow. There is no other
choice. Kids don't like to be mauled and pulled around and not consulted.
You can talk to a child and if your ARC is good with him, you can make him
do all sorts of things. He will touch the floor, his head, point you out
and find the table. He will fool around for a while and after that you can
just say do so and so and "Let's go and eat" and he will do it. He has
found out that your commands are not necessarily going to override the
totality of his willingness. So your commands are therefore not dangerous.
You have confronted him and he can confront you. Therefore you and he can
do something.
Suzie always gets a kick out of this because I am always having my
children bring me slippers, and caps and other things and they sometimes
bring me some of the most outrageous errors and I always thank them very
much, take it, and as a brand-new thought say, "Go and put these in the
closet now," and they do, very happy about it. They never get the idea it
is wrong just because they have made a mistake. It is quite amazing because
when I say to one of them, "Well, how about going to bed, huh?" the answer
is "Okay."
A child sometimes says "I want to stay up with you" and they insist on
doing so, exerting their power of choice. Just letting a child do what he
is doing and not interfering with him and not running any 8-C on him is
psychology. You might as well shoot a child as to let his circuits run away
with him. They are never going to be in communication with anybody; they
won't grow or get experience in life for they didn't change their
havingness. They didn't have to change their mind, work, exercise or do
anything. But they respond very readily to good 8-C and communication, but
it certainly takes good communication to override this-not persuasion but
good communication.
People think that persuasion works with children. It doesn't. It's
communication that does the trick. You say, "Well, it's time for you to go
to bed now," and he says, "No." Don't stay on the subject. Leave it alone
and just talk about something else, "What did you do today?" "Where?"
"How?" "Oh, did you? Is that a fact?" "Well, how about going to bed?" and
the answer will be "Okay."
One doesn't have to use force. Go into communication with the child,
and control follows this as an inevitability. Omit control from the
beginning when bringing up a child and he who looks to you for a lot of his
direction and control is gypped. He thinks you don't care about him.
However, as in the case with the playing of musical instruments,
learning of languages or the arts and abilities, consult the preclear's or
child's willingness.
To restore an ability run this technique from SLP 8:
Rehabilitation of abilities. For any ability the preclear always wanted
to have, lost and couldn't do. For example, for the speaking of Arabic:
"Mock up (Arabic objects)." "Keep it from going away." Then, "Mock up (Arab
men, women, children)." "Stop (him, her) from talking." "Start (him, her)
talking."
Should it be a particular musical instrument the preclear wants to
play, have him mock up the instrument, make it solid, keep it from going
away, stop and start it playing, and this will rehabilitate his ability-if
Procedure CCH has been run before.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 1 JULY 1957
ADDITION TO THE AUDITOR'S CODE
17. Never use Scientology to obtain personal and unusual favors or unusual
compliance from the preclear for the auditor's own personal profit.
L. RON
HUBBARD
[pic]
Issue 50 [1957, ca. early July]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Levels of Skill
L. Ron Hubbard
From the earliest days of Dianetics there have always been four grades
of auditing
FIRST of these was the Book Auditor (bless them), the people with the
verve to do or be damned with Dianetic or Scientology written material but
without formal training.
SECOND of these was the generally certified auditor-the HDA, the HCA,
who had been formally trained at one or another central organization
school. Trained over seven years, their skills were varied by the period in
which they were trained. These were the "backbone" of the subject, the
leaders of groups, the authorities in areas.
THIRD were the specially coached or trained auditors, BScn, HAA, DScn,
who by repeated training kept abreast and who had a large span of schooling
and training skill.
FOURTH were the Staff Auditors of central organizations. As could be
expected these were trained against the necessity of producing sweeping
results to uphold the repute of the Foundation or the HASI or the Founding
Church. Their skills were above and beyond certification and their degrees
were anything from HDA to BScn. They spent, and spend even today, many
hours of training in any week just to hold their own with the subject and
the repute of the "clinic."
Now something new has happened. A plateau of training and processing
skill has been reached. With Advanced Processes and the ferocity of the
Training Drills, we can divide up processes and processing to match these
four grades. We are rich in skill now, broadly so.
We have been producing excellent results for a long time. But now we
can produce results on lower level and higher level cases than ever before.
Thus a book auditor, using the below described processes, without much
training could produce fair results on average homo sapiens, patch up the
environment and live better.
Thus a generally certified auditor, without further training, using the
processes in which he was trained, could do very well on preclears.
Remember, they were and are good processes. And this is true of pre-1957
upper grade auditors. However, the processes, even so, do not go "all the
way south" or "all the way north."
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
But here enters a new grade and level, more or less equivalent to the upper
grade auditor of yesterday. This is the VALIDATED AUDITOR who has been
drilled up to the level of this plateau and could go all the way south on
cases if not, perhaps, all the way north. As I am so sure of this now, we
have stopped looking southward. That's what makes it a plateau. Such an
auditor could audit a person in a coma or a day-old baby or somebody 10
years shocked in a spin-bin. So there's a positiveness about the grade
never before possible.
It is not probable that a staff auditor rating will ever be superseded.
This level is what it is and is independent of quality of degree. Just now
central organization staff auditors are at grips with fully grasping the
fact that they can go all the way south and soon will be happy with that
and will then be trying for "all the way north." (The nearest approach
possible to absolute clear is now the research line and will someday soon
be the "clinic" auditing line.)
Hence, we get 4 levels of auditors and 4 levels of processes in
Scientology.
LEVELS OF AUDITORS LEVELS OF PROCESSES
(1) The Book Auditor. (1) Processes not requiring more skill
than that acquired by reading and home
practice.
(2) The Generally Certified Auditor. (2) Qualified for the processes in
which
HDA-HCA-BScn-HAA-DScn. they have been trained and no higher
into CCH because of absence of training
along CCH lines.
(3) The Validated Auditor. Any level of (3) Drilled in the Training Skills
of
certificate for any period but stamped 1957. Qualified for CCH in full.
by HCO Board of Review for Advanced
Processes ' 5 7 .
(4) Staff Auditor. (4) Already Validated. Pursuing pro cesses
developed from recent research
which have proven themselves for organi zational use.
Book Auditor processes would include:
Engram Running as described in the first edition, Book One, Dianetics.
The Modern Science of Mental Health.
The Fifteen Acts of Scientology, the Handbook for Preclears.
Self Analysis in its entirety.
The Processing Section of Scientology. The Fundamentals of Thought.
The various "assists" which have been listed in many publications.
The Co-Auditors Manual processes.
All the above books are easily obtained. Their age has nothing to do
with their workability on average people and they produce some startling
results not otherwise attainable by any other practice on Earth despite the
"lack of training" of the book auditor. This was the way the subjects
started and this is the way they will continue to be used.
A book auditor requires no more okay than the writings and his own raw
courage.
People feel, of late times, that book auditing is "frowned upon." Only
by medicos and head-shrinkers (a technical term for psychiatrist), not by
us. Scientologists respect the nerve of the book auditor!
My feeling today is that there isn't enough book auditing. Any book
auditor, reading backwards and half drunk can do more for a man than ten
thousand years at Mayo Brothers or Menninger's Squirrel Cage. If we had a
hundred thousand book auditors, the AMA, the APA and the American Society
of Brainwashing would fade and die.
The Generally Certified Auditor was trained in good processes and he
has always gotten results. His only stumbling block is the case all the way
south. These tend to break his heart (which is why I kept my spyglass
trained south for seven years!). Unless he runs into one of these
unsuspectingly, he's in clover.
There is no need to list his repertoire. It is tremendous. And in the
main successfully so.
The Validated Auditor, having passed through all the TRs (Training
Drills '57), not being human anymore, can run thorough-going CDCCtH.* Any
generally certified auditor can become a Validated Auditor with drills and
training.
The Staff Auditor-lord knows what he'll be doing. He'll be trying for
the Moon and OTs-a neglected subject these last 5 years because of the
southward project.
Well, there's the way it seems to fit together.
What do you think of it?
Best,
L. RON
HUBBARD
[* C for Control, D for Duplication, C for Communication, Ctfor Control of
thought = H for Havingness. See also P.A.B. 122, "The Five Levels of
Indoctrination and Procedure CCH."]
FREEDOM CONGRESS LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
4 - 7 July 1957
The Freedom Congress met at the Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C.,
on United States Independence Day, July 4, 1957. L. Ron Hubbard, assisted
by Mary Sue Hubbard and other top Scientologists, electrified the attendees
with his lectures and demonstrations of the CCHs and Training Drills.
Delegates also got two hours of potent Group Processing.
** 5707C04 FC-1 Opening Lecture-How We Have Addressed the Problem
of the Mind
* * 5707C04 FC-2 Man's Search and Scientology's Answer
** 5707C04 FC-3 Definition of Control
** 5707C05 FC-4 Basic Theory of CCHs
5707C05 FC-5 Group Processing-Acceptable Pressures
5707C05 FC-6 Group Processing-"Hold your body/the floor on earth"
** 5707C05 FC-7 Purpose and Need of Training Drills
** 5707C05 FC-8 Training Drills Demonstrated
** 5707C06 FC-9 Third Dynamic and Communication-Demo of High School
Indoc
** 5707C06 FC-10 Training Demonstration of High School Indoctrination
** 5707C06 FC-11 Explanation & Demonstration of "Tone 40" on an
Object
** 5707C06 FC-12 Levels of Skill
** 5707C06 FC-13 Explanation & Demonstration of "Tone 40" on a Person
** 5707C07 FC-14 Child Scientology [including Naming Ceremony]
** 5707C07 FC-15 CCH Steps 1 through 4: Demonstration (LRH MTS-1)
5707C07 FC-16 CCH Steps 5 through 7: plus Solids
P.A.B. No. 116
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 July 1957
SOLIDS AND CHRONIC SOMATICS
I am giving you in this PAB my latest findings in the handling of
chronic somatics. However, I would like to point out that before this
technique can be run on a given preclear, you must have him thoroughly
under control-i.e. the person, his attention and thoughts. It is a way of
running Problems of Comparable Magnitude to a chronic somatic.
Not all people can do this immediately if they cannot make things
solid. It may even be very dangerous to run, but it does handle the chronic
somatic, providing you have already run the preclear on CCH (Communication,
Control, Havingness). When you have done this you can come back again,
substituting this process for Problems of Comparable Magnitude to the
chronic somatic.
The preclear must be able to make things solid. He has got to have his
attention under your control and have his body under control. He must also
be able to make things solid objectively (i.e. "Look at the wall and make
it a little more solid") and subjectively (i.e. having the preclear make
"the mock-ups a little more solid"), which is to say that you would have to
take the preclear through Procedure CCH before this would work, but on the
next time through you could kill his chronic somatic deader than a
mackerel. You would simply omit running Problem of Comparable Magnitude to
the chronic somatic and run the intensive in this manner:
1. Present time problem.
2. Control in all its facets.
3. 8-C: "Keep it from going away."
4. 8-C: "Hold it still."
5. 8-C: "Make it a little more solid."
6. Subjective Havingness: "Make the mock-ups a little more solid."
7. Then and Now Solids.
Then go right back to wondering if he had any problems about auditing,
which is now the present time problem-if people are very low on havingness
the auditing always becomes a present time problem. Go up again into
control and make sure that
Copyright �1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
you have the preclear thoroughly under control. Run through the 7 steps
again. Only then would it be safe to run this technique.
This process joins up a phenomenon which has been around for years and
which was never known to be turned on at will. This phenomenon is: "He knew
about it all the time."
All auditors know this phenomenon. The preclear has sinusitis-it is
from Johnny punching him in the nose when he was five-and he says: "Yes,
but I knew it all the time." Well, he never knew it all the time, because
he had sinusitis. It is only after he realizes that he knew it all the time
that he gets well. That is the recovery of the game which underlies the
game he has been playing. That is the hidden game.
The most disturbing thing in the world is to have a preclear that you
have been working on cognite. He says, "Well, yes, my mother was actually a
prostitute." He never realized that before. And you say, "What do you know
about that!" and he says, "I knew it all the time." He knew it all the
time, but he couldn't identify what it was that he knew all the time.
When we talk about cognitions, we are actually looking for the master
cognition, which is "I knew it all the time." Only he didn't know it all
the time; in other words, he recovered the hidden game. It is the other
game that we have suddenly got sight of. Football made him sick, but all of
a sudden we spotted Lacrosse, or vice versa. He knew all the time that it
was Lacrosse that made him this sick, or football that made him this sick.
He knew it all the time, but only now is he well.
How do we trigger this at will?
The postulate of change is "ought to be-should be." Limited, just as
change is on any other level, but awfully effective.
The postulate which underlies havingness is "enough." Havingness is
quantitative. So you cannot run this without running the whole works
evidently. He would have to be able to mock up, hence the first pass at
this in CCH. He would have to be able to make things a little more solid,
otherwise you wouldn't be able to risk this one. But it evidently turns on
rather at will this "I knew it all the time," in other words, the hidden
game.
You run the process this way: Tell the preclear to "Mock up enough _
(whatever the chronic somatic is)" and "Make it a little more solid."
For example, take a case of obnosis-if you are not good at observing,
you will miss on this every time. This is one of the reasons why we have
more or less unconsciously been stressing obnosis. The auditor has to be
able to look at somebody-and it is not the fellow's belief that all women
are bad. He is sitting there with a chronic sore throat, complete glandular
arrest, with a club in his hands and you are trying to read his thoughts.
Out of all these things, take the one thing he is complaining about-a sore
throat.
The first thing you do is run the bad condition. Then just run the
condition, after that the terminal, and you will shift his attention and
turn off this "I knew it all the time. I knew my mother used to choke me."
Only he didn't because before that he told you, "Well, mother's a very
sweet girl, very nice to me. I don't know why I never turned out all
right."
Have him "Mock up enough sore throats" and "Make it a little more
solid." Then "Mock up enough sore throat (singular)" and "Make it a little
more solid" and "Good.
Mock up enough sore throat" and by this time he will say, "Well, yes, so
and so and so, probably." His attention shifted and this is a method of
doing it. It has shifted his attention from the badness of the condition to
the condition. "Mock up enough throat." He has a condition known as a
throat, and this oddly enough in this particular instance becomes the solid
for the terminal-enough throat. Only it will mean two different things to
the preclear and you want the preclear to duplicate your commands exactly,
which he will only do if he is thoroughly under your control.
Let us take "bad eyesight" for an example, although this is not
necessarily the process you would use. The preclear came to you to be
audited because he had shooting pains in his right kneecap. He has never
been able to work because of it, draws compensation. As a result of the
compensation he has an easy life and this is a control mechanism. If you
take this away from him against his better "judgments" the difficulty you
will have in keeping him in session thereafter is absolutely zero.
He has bad eyesight and you have him "Mock up enough bad eyesight" and
"Make it a little more solid"-a few times "Enough eyesight," a condition or
circumstance, "Make it a little more solid." "Enough eyes," and "Make them
a little more solid." There is his chronic somatic.
I have no guarantee whatsoever that this will work in all cases at all
times, because I cannot guarantee that you will have him in condition
whereby he can execute the commands when given. He must be in a condition
whereby he can execute the auditing commands, and if the auditing commands
are "mock it up," which means he has got to be able to get mock-ups-which
you can turn on with CCH-he has to be in a condition where you have some
guarantee that you can control his thoughts. You can say, "Put an emotion
in the wall." He will feel the wall mentally but he didn't do what you
said, therefore you don't have his thoughts under control.
In other words, the person's attention and thoughts must be under your
control before this works, but when you have accomplished this, this
process works with a thud.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO TRAINING BULLETIN OF 15 JULY 1957
8-C ON STUDENTS
Our first lesson in training from the 1 8th ACC is that the only error
a Scientology instructor can make is in the direction of softness.
The one unit in the 3 ACC units now going through that
1. Had a student leave,
2. Didn't gain or learn
was handled by poor 8-C on instructor's part.
Scientology training Stable Datum:
When in doubt, handle student with much stricter positive placement and
direction.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: md.rd
7-1 5-57
18TH AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
8 July-16 August 1957
The 18th American Advanced Clinical Course convened on Tuesday, July
8th, the day after the Freedom Congress ended. L. Ron Hubbard gave the
following lectures to students starting on July 15th:
** 5707C15 18ACC-1 What is Scientology?
** 5707C16 18ACC-2 CCH Related to ARC
** 5707C17 18ACC-3 Theory and Definition of Auditing
** 5707C18 18ACC-4 What Scientology is Addressed to
** 5707C19 18ACC-5 The Five Categories
** 5707C22 18ACC-6 Control
5707C23 18ACC-7 The Stability of Scientology
5707C24 18ACC-8 Auditing Styles
** 5707C25 18ACC-9 Scales (Effect Scale)
** 5707C26 18ACC-10 The Mind: Its Structure in Relation to Thetan
and MEST
5707C26 18ACC Anatomy of Problems-Coaching Athletics
The list of lectures given to the 18th ACC continues on pages 94, 95 and
103.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Washington, D.C.
All Staff
All ACC Students HCO TRAINING BULLETIN OF 17 JULY 1957
4-London (to
their training
personnel,
Assoc Secty)
LRH ACC file CHANGES IN TRAINING DRILLS
CO file
The 18th ACC, which is being conducted with a goal of refining
training, is furnishing some vital data. This will be published from time
to time and finally summarized in Training Bulletins.
Training 5, Hand Mimicry, becomes Training 5(b) Hand Mimicry.
The new Training 5 is "Sit in that Chair". It is used on Saturdays in
Washington supervised and London unsupervised.
NUMBER: Training 5.
NAME: Sit in that Chair.
COMMANDS: Sit in that Chair, comm bridged occasionally to Touch that Chair
and back to Sit in that Chair.
POSITION: Auditor and pc seated a comfortable distance apart.
PURPOSE: To give student an actual process that integrates all earlier
steps in the Communication Course (TR 0 to TR 4) as an actual process so
that he will not be faced with doing this integration on 8c while in
motion. Summates the things learned in Comm Course.
TRAINING STRESS: Process is not coached save by instructor. It is actually
run on a fellow student. The student pc is not manually forced to do
process. Only the earlier TR skills are used. Student's confidence in being
able to audit should be raised.
HISTORY: Developed by LRH for the 18th Advanced Clinical Course in
Washington, D.C., July 1957.
Training 6, 8c, remains itself but is changed as follows:
NUMBER: Training 6.
NAME: 8c.
COMMANDS: First half of session period student silently steers coach's body
around room, not even to walls, quietly starting, turning and stopping
coach's body. Second part of session commands are "Look at that wall."
"Thank you." "Walk over to that wall." "Thank you." "With your right hand
touch that wall." "Thank you." "Turn around." "Thank you." Student may
touch coach's body.
POSITION: Student and coach walking side by side. Student always on coach's
right except when turning coach.
PURPOSE: First part: To accustom student to moving another body than his
own without verbal communication. Second part: To accustom student to move
another body by and while giving auditing commands and to accustom student
to proper commands of 8c.
TRAINING STRESS: Complete, crisp precision of movement and commands.
Student as in any other TR except TR 5 is flunked only for current and
preceding TRs. Thus in this case the coach flunks student for every
hesitation or nervousness in moving body, for every flub of command, for
poor confronting, for bad communication of command, for poor
acknowledgment, for poor repetition of command, and for failing to handle
origins by coach.
HISTORY: Developed by LRH in Camden, New Jersey, for the 2nd ACC, in
October 1953 and modified for the 18th ACC, July 1957, in Washington, D.C.
LRH:md,jh
Copyright � 1957
L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[pic]
Issue 51 [1957, ca. late July]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
The Adventure of Communication
L. Ron Hubbard
The success level of a person is his communication level.
One can have only those things with which he can communicate. To have
it is necessary to communicate.
One can do only those things with which he can exchange communication.
One can be whatever he feels will assist him to carry out his ideas of
communication itself.
It has been three years since we first isolated communication as the
dominant corner of the Affinity-Reality-Communication triangle.
Now when one realizes that have and the Reality corner of the triangle
are the same and when one understands that control is possible only in the
presence of maximal Affinity, one sees in Control-Communication-Havingness
theory the working aspects of the Affinity-Reality-Communication theory.
We have always known A-R-C was true. We now know its best-working
aspects in the Control-Communication-Havingness theories of processing.
Communication continues its dominance. Affinity gives us the only
working mood of Control. Reality gives us the reward of Communication.
Thus one can BE-one can DO, one can HAVE only as well as one can
communicate.
At the intensely successful Freedom Congress, just held, a number of
Training drills were presented which have as their goal communication
betterment.
Doing these drills betters one's communication ability.
Thus these drills can be seen as an opening door to better beingness,
better doingness, better havingness.
While, as everyone recognized at the Congress, there is no substitute
for Academy training in these drills, doing them yourself at home can
result in enormous improvement.
We have found the level from which to live successfully-Tone 40.
We have found the drills and processes by which to get us there.
High Adventure requires high communication.
Could there be anything so brash as to stop us now?
Copyright �1957 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
All Rights Reserved.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 JULY 1957
STAFF AUDITORS WASHINGTON ONLY
WITHHOLDS AND COMMUNICATION
A Preview of a book to be called "The Handling of Human Problems. A
Scientology Text by L. Ron Hubbard," a paperbacked booklet.
The book explains the parts of man, ARC, and states that the ability to
communicate on 8 dynamics must be regained in order to lead a successful
Spiritual life.
The book will then give a process to rehabilitate Communication. It is
based on our old "Recall a Secret". The version is entirely straight wire.
The reason secrets cannot be dredged up in people is because they will
not tell them. This process by-passes divulgence of data and works well
without informing on oneself.
The Process.
The auditor explains to the pc that he is not looking for hidden data
to evaluate it. He is only asking the pc to look at the data.
The auditor then makes a list of valences, paying great attention to
those the pc considers "unimportant" or is very slow to divulge.
Then the auditor takes this list and runs repetitive straight wire (
1951 ) as follows:
"Think of something you might withhold from (valence)."
He repeats this question over and over until no comm lag is present. He
never says "Something else you might withhold" because auditor wants pc to
think of some of these many times.
Before selecting another valence, auditor runs a little Locational or
Trio.
He then takes next valence the same way.
The list is covered once, then the same list is covered again.
The object is speed . Cover many people.
Given time the auditor can do the same thing on all dynamics.
VARIATION
Instead of a valence, body parts may be used.
"Think of something you might withhold about your (body part)."
Leave sexual parts or obvious psychosomatic difficulties until last.
Don't begin on a withered arm. Pc can't cut it.
SUMMARY
It is amusing to realize that this process overlords all early
psychotherapies. But
they, using this effort to locate secrets, thought that divulgence and
confession were the therapeutic agents. These have no bearing on the
workability.
Further, early efforts naively thought there was one secret per case.
Actually there are billions.
It is easy to get into past lives on this. A basic secret is that one
lived before.
This can be E-Metered with great success if the auditor realizes that
the meter is only useful to find out if a valence or a dynamic is hot or
flat. Locating actual data for the auditor to know about is useless to the
process itself.
Eight or eight thousand or eight billion secrets later will discover
the pc in better communication. This is our only goal.
WARNING
The invasion of privacy-horror of-can stop the process cold if the
auditor is too nosey.
The auditor will strike a data gusher sooner or later in the pc. It is
unimportant.
The process may run down havingness. The "secret mechanism" is also
used by pc to keep body from going away. (Some address to this last with
"Keep [body part] from going away" may be needed.)
PURPOSE OF THIS RELEASE
To put HGC pcs into high communication.
To gain know-how for the above book-therefore report any changes needed
or problems met while running this.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: md. nm
7-29-57
18TH AMERICAN ACC LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
29 - 30 July 1957
5707C29 18ACC-11 Optimum 25-Hour Session
** 5707C30 18ACC-12 Death
Other lectures given to the 18th ACC will be found on pages 90, 95 and 103.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 31 JULY ] 957
(Amending HCO Bulletin of 29 July 1957)
STAFF AUDITORS WASHINGTON ONLY
More workable commands for testing:
1. "Recall something you have done or said to (valence)."
2. "Think of something you could do or say to (valence)."
LRH:md,rd L. RON HUBBARD
7-31-57
18TH AMERICAN ACC LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
31 July-9 August 1957
** 5707C31 18ACC-13 Surprise-The Anatomy of Sleep
5708C01 18ACC-14 Thinnies
** 5708C02 18ACC-15 Ability-Laughter
5708C05 18ACC-16 The Handling of l.Q. (Factors Behind)
5708C06 18ACC-17 The Scale of Withhold
** 5708C07 18ACC-18 Havingness, Endurance, Progress
** 5708C08 18ACC-19 Confronting, Necessity Level
5708C09 18ACC-20 Instructing a Course
Other lectures given to the 18th ACC will be found on pages 90, 94 and 103.
P.A.B. No. 117
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 August 1957
CONFRONTING PRESENT TIME
We all know about the unreality of processes too high for a preclear.
You ask him to do something too high for him and he, oddly enough, can do
it. He can get the idea of doing it, and he will even tell you he is doing
it. Some preclears can actually walk around and touch the walls for as long
as you want them to and it doesn't affect them. It means that a particular
preclear who is doing this has no responsibility whatsoever for walking
around and touching the walls. It doesn't affect him except that
irresponsibility is running out all the time. I don't know if there is such
a thing as a technique that is thoroughly above the preclear's ability to
run. It is only a much longer reach.
I have taken a very bad-off case and told him to mock up a scene which
everybody could see. I told him to do this over and over and over and I
turned his mock-ups on brilliantly.
I have said in a Congress "Create that wall," etc. The funny part is
that it almost killed the audience, and they didn't even spot what it was
during the congress that almost mowed them down. They thought something
else was responsible for it. They complained about two or three other
processes which, if run on individuals, would hardly affect them at all.
But they didn't complain about this one. We were making them confront the
wall, create the wall, take ownership of the wall, take ownership of the
universe, and it was so far from them that they were unaware that they
couldn't do it.
When you can imagine people walking up and down the street out here
being unaware of the fact that they are unable to confront the street, you
have got aberration really nailed. Their irresponsibility has grown to the
point of not even knowing they cannot, to the point of doing it all the
time. You process them for a while and they will just become aghast at
confronting the street. It feels all right to them for a while, and all of
a sudden they will get a somatic and flinch here, and they are not sure
that they want to touch that tree. They are actually coming upscale toward
this action. People evidently get interiorized into a universe, and then
don't ever exteriorize. It is because they find more and more in it that
they are unwilling to confront. So their awareness of its existence drops.
All blindness is an extreme unawareness.
For instance, if one were all wound up with some other person and that
other person died or disappeared, there was too much absent in present
time. But this is not factual. As a writer in the New York area, I used to
go down to the Village with some of the boys and used to have some knock-
down-drag-out arguments, discussions, personal feuds, brawlings, etc. We
were always doing something wild or weird. A crowd of us went up to Sing
Sing one time just to see how it felt to sit in an electric chair. We were
always having criminals and things electrocuted in stories. In order to
know how
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
they felt we walked through the green door. We were always doing something
like this and life looked very alive and full, and it seemed impossible to
reach through it or to it or to exhaust it in any way. Looking back after a
long time and at a long distance it seems to me very much like New York and
the Village-dull, and it is all tame and a long time ago. But that is
merely because I am not in contact with it. The same dramas still go on.
To give you an idea of short circuits, an artist, Hannes Bok's next-
door neighbor, was walking past a thrift shop and bought a painting because
she wanted the frame. When she got home she wiped off some of the dust and
found out that the painting was a submission to the New York World's Fair
in 1939. It had the artist's name on it. So Hannes Bok took a look at it
and said, "That's Ron," wrote to me to find out about this, and that was
right. She wants to give the painting to me and is sending it here.
In other words, there are all kinds of wild little actions,
randomities, short circuits and so forth going on in the world. This one
was intimately enough connected with me that I would be alerted to it. But
if I were in the scene, there would be all kinds of actions that would only
vaguely come close to this in which I would be vitally interested. Why?
They also concern ME now, because I am part of the scene. So at this
distance I am aware of New York because something intimately concerned me,
but in New York everything would concern me, so I would be intimately
interested in it.
People become rather easily convinced there isn't much in present time.
I have seen race drivers talking about their humdrum lives. It is wild. You
talk to these T.W.A. and American airline pilots. They think their life is
a little bit humdrum.
I was down at the airport the other evening to meet a couple coming in
from Ireland, and the snow was coming down thickly. A quarter of a century
ago, any wooden propellor trying to chew through that much snow would have
just been torn into splinters at once. Well, evidently a steel propellor
isn't affected. The leading edges don't gather ice any more, and a lot of
other things don't occur. I know that airplanes have been made totally
proof.
But pilots were flying through this snow on schedule and landing and
taking off and continuing airline schedules, and I could hardly see the
length of the administration building. And I imagine that if I'd gone into
the pilot's shack where they were checking in, they would have been saying,
"Aw, it's just another darned night," and they would wish they could do
something interesting.
In such a case man has disconnected himself to some degree from present
time, and therefore not much in present time affects him. (Connectedness as
a process will help to remedy this condition: "Look around here and find
something you wouldn't mind making connect with you," and see that he makes
it connect with him, and not him with the object.) You might say that there
is so much danger in present time that he must disconnect most of the
present time from himself.
As I was saying, the personal interest factor extends from New York to
Washington, D.C. when something personal occurs. Well, if you were in New
York, there would be a lot of personal things occurring-what a cab driver
said to another cab driver would become a personal matter-on a higher
dynamic. This is, by the way, the dwindling scale of the dynamics you are
looking at when you look at a distance from.
Time itself seems to strip away from us our adventures and objects and
havingness. But havingness is only an awareness of existence. Why we so
readily consent to have present time stripped away at this mad rate is
quite interesting because we are to a marked degree in control of it.
For instance, I had time shift on me the other day rather inexplicably and
startlingly and it upset me for a little while. As I was traveling through
time at the usual routine rate of speed which would be my rate of passage
through time, and I had a lot of things to get done, I accidentally
extended time on some kind of an automaticity I hadn't been aware of. I got
a lot of things done and came back and found that five minutes had passed,
and it upset me because about two-and-a-half hours should have passed.
So concept of time is something which is quite variable, it sometimes
changes on us when we skid or take our fingers off it. Our machinery which
is carefully saying "one second, one second, one second" slips over into
the old machine which we had which said "one-second-one-second-" without at
the same time impeding our motion.
Motion is not necessarily related to the abstract time, it only appears
to be. But why are people so anxious, why do people have so little time as
they go downscale? It is quite interesting, but they do have less and less
time the further downscale they go. Well, they are just that anxious to
have present time stripped away, and they are counting on this mechanism of
the universe which will take this present time away and dispose of the
walls, space, and in just a little time they hope not to be there any
longer.
Some part of them is very frantic although they appear to be very calm.
Therefore they avidly consent to this thing, and then one day they complain
(second postulate) that they haven't enough time to do anything. Therefore
they cannot do anything. Quite a fascinating enigma.
If you said "total responsibility" you would be saying to admit the
authorship of, be willing to admit the authorship of, any created thing
anywhere whether yours or another's, and "mis-responsibility" would be the
miscalling of authorship. In other words, those things which you, yourself,
had done or made, you would say, "I did or made these things." And those
things which other people had made, you would say you had made them. You
thus get this mis-responsibility.
Now total responsibility would come out of not just the assignment of
the correct authorship to everything and would be the fact, act or final
consequence of being willing to do so. Only willingness is necessary. One
has to be willing to do that and that is the state of mind you should bring
your preclear into-only willing to do that.
As far as anchor points are concerned, if a person made them and said
that he made them, all will be well, but if he said he didn't make them
when he actually made them, that would be horrible. That is a mis-
responsibility.
For instance, if you have a preclear mock up an anchor point and
actually fit it into some point in his skull, in contradistinction to the
others, he will get a headache. Why should he get a headache since the
anchor point belongs there? Because he didn't make those anchor points. Now
he makes one and he puts one in and he is assuming ownership of the others.
He didn't find the anchor point that belonged there and put it there, and
then say, "Well, I put it there but I didn't make it." If he had done that
he wouldn't have had a headache and the anchor point would be there.
A mishandling of life, however, is not as serious as the desire to
mishandle it. An anxiety to mishandle life, a willingness to mishandle it,
or an unawareness that one is unwilling to handle it properly are the
aberrative factors, not the actual mishandling of it.
Any thetan can play the game of saying, "Well, I made these body anchor
points." He did it consciously and he can play that game. But to have to
admit that from some exterior compulsion would be something else.
Take for an example you having to take charge of the mimeograph machine
which is running badly. It is not your department. You don't desire to take
it over but you have to, and the next thing you know is that you have
busted the mimeograph machine. What happened here? One sees people do this
in offices all the time. One thinks one is being forced to take a
responsibility and one is unwilling to take that responsibility, thinking
it belongs to someone else. So that correction under duress- that is to say
misownership and misresponsibility under duress-always has grave
consequences.
This works in many fields. For example, a traffic cop stops you for
speeding and comes up alongside of the wheel and says that you were
speeding, and you say, "Yes, I was speeding." He says you have been doing
65 miles an hour, and you correct him and say, "68, Officer,'' and he says,
"Well, it is pretty slippery today," and you say, "I know it." It unnerves
him. He may or may not give you a ticket, but the chances of his giving you
one are much cut down. You are not buttering him up or telling him that you
have learned better now or anything of the sort, but saying the exact facts
of the case tends to as-is them. You have knocked out his first postulate.
L. RON
HUBBARD
ACC BULLETIN
10 August 1957
CCH 18
This is CCH 18, named after the 18th ACC.
The following process is to be run by students on students in the
evening sessions of the coming week:
Commands: "Look around here and find something you would be
unwilling for that body (or psychosomatic body part) to
have."
"Look around here and find something you would be willing to have."
Interspersed with Locational-"Notice that (indicated object)."
Formal auditing.
Process may be run inside seated, or outside ambulatory.
Auditor-pc teams are to be assigned by their instructor of next week.
L. RON
HUBBARD
[pic]
Issue 52 [1957, ca. early August]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Confronting
L. Ron Hubbard
This begins a series of training processes aimed at raising the
communication level.
In subsequent issues I'll give you others, so don't fail to do this one
in the next two weeks.
This is taken from the new Student Manual.
Training 0.
Name: Confronting Preclear.
Commands. None.
Position: Student and coach sit facing each other a comfortable distance
apart-about five feet.
Purpose: To train student to confront a preclear with auditing only or with
nothing.
Training Stress: Have student and coach sit facing each other, neither
making any conversation or effort to be interesting. Have them sit and look
at each other and say and do nothing for some hours. Student must not
speak, fidget, giggle or be embarrassed or anaten. Coach may speak only if
student goes anaten (dope off). Student is confronting the body, thetan and
bank of preclear.
History: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington in March 1957 to train
students to confront preclears in the absence of social tricks or
conversation and to overcome obsessive compulsions to be "interesting."
________________
We used to say, the way out is the way through.
Now we say,
If you can't stand it, Confront it.
And that, I think you'll find, is much more satisfactory.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
Definition of a Scientology Clear
A Scientology Clear would be able to confront the physical universe,
other bodies, his own body, other minds, his own mind and other beings-
without trimmings.
The first step on this road is the drill called Training 0-Confronting.
Do it for at least 25 hours and you'll never have trouble with a
preclear.
No systems allowed. Both feet flat on the floor. No twitches, no
squirms, no talk.
If you have difficulty, feel the floor and your chair back as you sit.
That adds confronting the universe.
Confronting isn't just looking-so don't try to confront with your
eyeballs only.
Do it and may you never be the same again.
Nothing like Training 0 to raise Communication level.
L. RON
HUBBARD
P.A.B. No. 118
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 August 1957
VALIDATION COMMITTEE
The following statement and recommendations concerning U.S. Validation
of Certificates were made by the Validation Committee of the Freedom
Congress, held July 4 through 7 at the Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C.,
and accepted by the Congress and myself for the U.S.
"Scientologists play the game of life. They put life into living. Homo
sapiens lets life live him and this planet has a large lack of people who
knowingly play the game of life. The reality of the game of life can only
be communicated by those who play it. Scientologists do play the game. Our
ability as players determines how well and how swiftly we win at making
life a game for all men, and this is one of the goals of Scientology. Our
direct ability to control, to communicate and to have men, women, groups
and governments determines the degree to which we can create a game of life
and a knowledge of livingness to all men. Your ability as a Scientologist
to play and to communicate playingness and livingness will determine how
soon and how well we can win. The Validation Program can better enable you
to play and live on all dynamics, no matter how well you are doing now.
Truthfully, can you be more able? Yes! No man will ordinarily light a fire
by rubbing dry sticks together when he can use a match; the match is
obviously a better tool. The Validation Program will sharpen your old tools
and provide you with better ones. We have today in Scientology better
communication, control and havingness on ability than ever before. The
Validation Program is intended to give every professional Scientologist the
basic tools of livingness and the ability to use them. These are his by
right of his own very existence, by right of the fact that he helped build
the better bridge that Ron Hubbard asked him to help build, and by right of
the fact that he cannot help but want to play the game better once he
realizes that there really is a better level of game now in existence
through his participation in this program. Toward this end, we, the
Validation Committee, propose and recommend the following procedures
dedicating them to mankind and the creation of human ability:
"1. That there be two classifications of validation:
(a) The professional auditor of any grade coached in training
drills and CCH processes and passed by the HCO Board of Review; and
(b) Doctors of Scientology coached and trained in the use and
coaching of these skills and validated by the HCO Board of Review,
to both use CCH processes and coach others in their use subject to
approval by the HCO Board of Review.
"2. We further recommend that a travelling HCO Board of Review be
organized to sit in major cities for the purpose of validating for
the use of CCH
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
processes those professional auditors coached by Doctors of
Scientology in the field.
"3. That Notification be sent to every professional auditor in the
field that his professional certificate of whatever grade is as
valid today and as honored as it was upon the day it was issued.
"4. That Doctors of Scientology authorized to coach other
professional auditors in training drills and CCH processes take
responsibility for their areas in seeing to it that all
professional auditors (those holding professional certificates) in
their respective areas are personally contacted and the purposes of
the 1957 Validation Program are thoroughly and carefully
communicated and received.
"We of this Committee deem ourselves highly honored at having been
selected for this recommending committee. We pledge our cooperation
in this 1957 Validation Program and urge the fullest cooperation by
all auditors everywhere that we may have for the first time in
earth's recorded history true sanity and civilization for all
mankind."
Wing Angel, Chairman
Kenneth D. Barrett, Technical Adviser
Burke Belknap
J. Burton Farber
Rosina Mann
Ralph Swanson
L. RON
HUBBARD
18TH AMERICAN ACC LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
16 August 1957
5708C16 18ACC-21 The Future of Scientology
5708C16 18ACC Awards
Earlier lectures given to the 18th ACC will be found on pages 90, 94 and
95.
[pic]
Issue 53 [1957, ca. late August]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Communication
L. Ron Hubbard
Communication is life. Without it we are dead to all.
Gradually the importance of Communication has evolved since July 1950
when I first evolved the ARC triangle. The corners are Affinity, Reality
and Communication.
The triangle has many fascinating aspects. If one corner of it is
lowered, the other two are dropped as well. If one corner is raised the
other two are raised.
But the full use of this triangle, no matter how much Scientologists
refer to it, has never been established.
Let us see some ways the triangle is used.
Estimation of the quality or ability of a person is at once established
by his tone. Tone is established by his ARC. The whole of the book Science
of Survival is devoted to this.
Actually, tone is established by his Affinity and Reality. It is most
directly observed by his Communication.
One easy, quick way to ascertain a person's tone would be as follows:
What does he try to do to your ARC? If he discovers something with which
you have good ARC, does he attempt to increase or decrease your
communication with it?
The whole theory of games conditions as contained in Scientology: The
Fundamentals of Thought, when applied to A-R-C opens up volumes of
understanding. Obsessive selection of opponents is obsessive cut of
communication. In a game, one seeks to cut the communication of an
opponent. When one is in an obsessive games condition one obsessively cuts
everyone else's communication.
This can be done in two ways with the same end result. He or she
insists on communication with hurtful things so that one will know better
than to communicate (as a nation does to youth with war) or the
communication cut is direct.
Lower affinity with things and communication is cut. Raise affinity
with things and communication is improved.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
An example of this would be the contrast between the end results achieved
by (1) a parent who warns the child about things and (2) a parent who lets
the child get acquainted with things. The child handled the first way will
go awry; the child handled the second way will become the better child.
You notice I have said "warns the child about things." This could be
expressed also as "lowers the affinity of the child about reality."
One determines, then, the actual character of a person by observing his
intent concerning communication.
If a person wants Communication to be knowingly raised (and all good
Communication is knowing Communication), his intent to another is good.
There is no games condition here.
If a person wants Communication to be unknowing or lowered, his intent
to another is bad.
Communication is the clue that is always in sight. By it one sees the
true Affinity and Reality of the person.
When another tries to chop your ARC with something, it is a good thing
to decoy him into believing you have ARC with something else and see how he
handles that. He, by cutting away, seeks to make you a victim of his game.
It becomes an amusing game when you fully understand ARC. The difference
will be-you will be playing a knowing game-the other person will only be
dramatizing.
Many a budding Scientologist has been squelched by someone chopping his
ARC with Scientology when in actuality it was merely someone chopping his
ARC.
Communication is the clue. If you can handle communication in or out,
you can win.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 AUGUST 1957
GOVERNMENT PROJECT STABLE DATA
To any government official or on any government project the HASI stable
data for negotiation and discourse are as follows:
WE ARE THE EXPERTS ON HUMAN ABILITY AND ENDURANCE. WE OFFER ONLY
SERVICES. WE DISCUSS ONLY RESULTS, THE NEED OF RESULTS, THE CONSEQUENCES OF
NO RESULTS, THE SINCERITY OF THE ORGANIZATION AND ALL CONCERNED IN
OBTAINING RESULTS, AND INTERESTING RESULTS.
REASON: You cannot communicate in 25 minutes something which took 25
years to develop. Scientology really takes some time to learn. To try to
teach someone Scientology at a luncheon table or in an office is difficult,
since prejudice and mental illiteracy are barriers. Scientology, however,
using the above stable data, is easy.
We know already that in a discussion with uninformed persons, these
attempt to learn all about Scientology in 25 minutes. To stop all further
learning by them, try at once and instantly to fully educate them. To lead
them to further learning read again the stable data given above.
The importance of these data will be realized when they will be
published to all personnel on a project as a must.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:rs jh Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
P.A.B. No. 119
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 September 1957
THE BIG AUDITING PROBLEM
If you were to take a mediumly good race driver and you wanted to make
out of him a championship race driver, I'm afraid you would have to train
him from scratch. And you would have to train him with a great deal more
ardor than you would have to train just a kid that just walked in from
Kokomo with an interest in motors.
Nevertheless, if you were successful in training a mediumly good race
driver with a lot of races behind him, straight from scratch and all the
way through, you would have a championship race driver-there would be no
doubt about this whatever. Whereas the kid from Kokomo might or might not.
I will tell you at once the first and foremost factor, and that is,
auditing does require a certain amount of stamina. It takes a certain
amount of what it takes just to stay around Scientology-there is that, you
see. It takes a certain amount of-to use a technical term-"guts." You know
that. In the first place, the problem of living is complicated by the fact
that you know what the other fellow is doing, and he doesn't. You go down
to the bank and your communication is disturbed by the degree that you know
the fellow behind the teller's window is a 1.5, the like of which you've
never seen before, and he thinks he's just a good average human being doing
a job, and you count your change more carefully than you would on some
other bank teller.
Now there is a tremendous advantage in this. You don't walk around all
the time in a figure-figure wondering what's wrong with you because you
don't always get along invariably with other people uniformly well. Now you
realize that the bulk of the human race is walking around with the belief
that there is something wrong somewhere, but they don't quite know what it
is and it worries them. Now when you get up to a degree where you have some
idea of this worry, you are aware of the factors which exist, the fact that
your awareness has increased is all in your favor.
One of the great truths of Scientology is that INCREASED AWARENESS IS
THE ONLY FACTOR WHICH OFFERS ANY ROAD OUT. That is an awfully simple truth,
but you'll find out that people don't know that. They think that LESS
awareness is the road out-and that is the road down into the basement.
All right-you live in a world that is trying right now to commit
suicide on the grandest scale it has ever attempted, although I will say
that when they dug up that last cave down in the Middle East and found
seven civilizations, they did find under the shreds of the seventh
civilization green glass, which looked awfully like the green glass from an
atomic explosion out in the middle of the New Mexican desert. In other
words, tens of thousands of years ago there was evidently another atomic
blast, and perhaps everybody has been coming forward through barbarism and
so on up the line.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
It is quite amusing to notice that atomic radiation DOES reverse the
genetic line. It gives a throwback. It produces the more original forms.
So you would expect the human race at this time to be walking toward
greater and greater individual survival and less and less group survival.
And here you are with some kind of a notion of the fact that the third
dynamic exists and you are able to march out a bit on the third dynamic and
the rest of the world is retreating back to the first dynamic-probably an
inverted first.
I just had a report from our Public Relations Unit concerning the
amount of attention being paid to injured persons alongside the road and on
the street, and the report summed up that practically no attention was
being paid now to anybody who was injured. That is quite interesting,
because it has suffered, according to Public Relations, a considerable
shift in attitude during the last two months. You are quite well aware of
the fact that there might be just a tiny amount of radiation in the air
which would never really damage anybody physically at all, yet which would
restimulate people into a heavy unknowing games condition. So they would
begin to act more and more hectic and on the first dynamic. This would be
one of the first symptoms that you would discover in a society-everybody
takes out on the Only One classification. Now that is the road to death. It
doesn't matter whether or not the society at large ever is atom-bombed,
that point is not of any great interest to us. It IS of great interest to
us, however, that the effects of radiation and its presence in the society
drives people down the dynamics.
All right. So although it is pretty hard to live around Scientology
very often- somebody tells me, "You know, that is awfully restimulative
material which is in these lectures" (I've heard this said two or three
times), "Oh, I don't know, I've sat through a lot of lectures and it just
restimulated me and I'm in terrible shape now." And I've also heard
somebody in the organization look at a remark like this and laugh. They
say, "Well, the only real difference is that you're in terrible shape,
that's sure, but now you know it." And if you're in bad shape, it's better
to know it than not know it, that's for sure.
What happens to Scientology and Scientologists in a world of this
character? What happens to us? Why should we know what we know and know it
well, and so on? That's because your basic attitude toward the world at
large will have to be more and more an auditor's attitude toward a preclear
if you are going to accomplish any survival at all. To get anybody to do
anything will probably require an auditor here in the near future. I will
give you an idea of this.
In North Africa they had the Arab with the gun and whip. He could force
people to do things with a gun and a whip and he accomplished a tremendous
amount of extermination, but he certainly didn't advance that civilization
very much. In South Africa they had a bit of the whip but everybody just
gave up. The South African native is probably the one impossible person to
train in the entire world-he is probably impossible by any human standard.
I'll give you an example. A South African native is being shown how to sow
crops and he has a basket, and he's got some seed, and he's walking along
back of the harrow disc-and he is supposed to throw seed out this way: seed
out this way, seed out that way, seed out this way. A white man is riding a
little tractor that's pulling the disc and scraping the soil for the seed.
And this scene was enacted and was witnessed and was told to me with
considerable hilarity as some kind of an idea of learning rate. The white
man was sitting on the little tractor pulling the harrow, the native along
behind him, sowing the seed straight down in handfuls on the ground. The
white man got off the tractor, came back to the native, took the basket
away from him, put his hand in the basket, threw it to the right, put his
hand in the basket, threw it to the left, and gave it back to the native.
And the native waited, the white man got on the tractor, drove along, and
the native took a handful out of the
basket and threw it straight on the ground. So the white man got off the
tractor, came back, took the basket away from the native, showed the
native, throw it to the right, throw it to the left, gave it back to the
native, took his seat again on the tractor, the native followed along
behind, took handfuls and threw it straight on the ground! And this went on
for a very long time. The native never did throw any handfuls of seed to
the right and left. Never did. That is farming in South Africa.
Now did anything ever come along and change that? Yes. Man had to cease
to be Homo Sapiens and had to become Homo Scientologicus in order to
accomplish any action that was anywhere near efficient in South Africa. And
we have had some auditors in South Africa who have actually succeeded in
training natives easily and well and have successfully managed large
organizations there. That's certainly something. Now with these people it
was still possible to get something done. But what had this native done?
Was this native what we think of as primitive stock? No, we make a great
many mistakes. We say a child is in a "native state." A native is in a
"native state." People are in a barbaric condition and then they grow up
and become civilized. How do we know that this barbaric condition isn't a
retrogression from a highly civilized condition back to an Only One
category? How do we know that isn't true? How do we know that that native
didn't at one time achieve a great civilization of culture which then
collapsed on him and he went back into a state of being a barbarian?
But the point is, is this true that a native is in a clearer state, and
is it true that it requires Livingness to advance somebody in that crude
state up to a condition of ability? No, that is not true. The child, the
primitive, the native, are in retrograded states. They are worse off than
somebody who is at a civilized or thinking or analytical level.
I will give you an interesting example of this. If you can tell the
difference between a lot of little kids you run into, and psychos, I'll
give you a medal. Now the funny part of it is that little kids have
something to hope for. They have the future to grow up into. And that's
their only asset. Almost everything else is on the debit side of the
column. Here is this poor devil who has been slugged, he's just lost a
body, he's been put into a state of anxiety, here he's got another body, is
it going to get along right or isn't it? He's got the hope that it will
grow and that alone can carry him forward and color the world brightly for
him, but at the same time he is suffering from death shock. And because he
is suffering from death shock, he is coming along very timidly with his
learning. Now that is the condition a little kid is in, and when you KNOW
that a little kid is in that condition, boy! can you handle him! You don't
label him with this omnipresent overused term "insane," or "psychotic," you
don't do that. This person is having a terrible time trying to adjust
himself to his environment and control a body which is suffering from many
responses he does not understand, and he is at his wit's end. The delusions
of children and death delusions are quite similar. When a person dies and
starts to pull out of that body, he generally snaps in on himself a torrent
of facsimiles of one kind or another. He has all sorts of weird things that
go "boomp in the night" present themselves at that moment.
And very often you get a preclear who is suffering merely from the
death shock. And he is psychotic, he's crazy, he doesn't know whether he is
coming or going. Why? Because he's surrounded by things he cannot
understand-and that is the common denominator of all lack of orientation,
of all aberration. It's being surrounded by things you cannot understand.
And a child, surrounded by these things he cannot understand, therefore can
produce what we call childhood delusions. But I can't find any real
difference between these childhood delusions and the delusions being
suffered by a person about to die or a person in an asylum.
When the kid gets worried, he's worried. Now who can handle him? Mamas
and papas across the face of Earth today, particularly in America, have
just about given up.
We have a whole philosophy-we hardly dignify it with the name of Science or
even really dignify it with the name of Philosophy-which tells us that the
child must be permitted to express himself, that you let the child do
anything he pleases in any direction that he pleases and he will be all
right-now that is modern psychology at work with children, and it is not
true.
A child requires understanding and a child requires assistance in
controlling the environment around him which is already too big, too
strong, and is moving much too fast on him. He has to be set a good example
of 8-C. I am not now talking about heavy discipline. I'll show you the
shortness of discipline. How many people have told you to be a good boy or
a good girl, and when you were a good boy and a good girl, they never came
to you and said, "Thank you for being a good boy or a good girl." I almost
startled little Quentin out of his wits a couple of evenings ago. I told
him to be a good boy now and go to sleep. He was feeling upset. "Stay in
bed, now, get some rest." He was very quiet for half an hour. I went
downstairs again and noticed he was still awake, and I said, "Thank you
very much for being a good boy." He smiled, looked sort of dazed-it really
shook him. And ever since then he's been saying-he always says it with
enthusiasm, but with this he just about bursts the walls-"HELLO, DADDY!" He
is really in communication. Probably the first time it's happened to him in
seventy-six trillion years. You get the idea! Somebody did give him an
order and then did finally acknowledge that he had executed it. But there
is a common lag on the executing of such an order as "Be good," or "Go to
sleep," and there is never an auditor there to say "Thank you," never an
auditor there to say "You did it." So life is furnished with these
tremendous numbers of unfinished cycles.
If one is bad, it gets acknowledged, confirmed and pushed around, but
if he's good, it's sort of neglected. That is an interesting factor right
there. But all I am telling you is that children, South African natives,
and now the entirety of this world in which we are living, present to us an
auditing problem. We are rich in being able to understand what is happening
in our environment and we are rich also in knowing exactly how to handle
such a circumstance or condition. Nobody knew before. That is factually
true here on Earth.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 2 SEPTEMBER 1957
When a verbal direction is given to the HGC Staff Auditors concerning
the processing of preclears, such as what process is to be run, etc, the
auditor is to write out verbatim the order and have it initialed by myself
and present it to the Director of Processing immediately. The processing
directions are to be followed exactly without variation until ordered to
change.
This is the Stable Datum: If given an order by myself and it isn't
written, you are to write it out.
LRH:md.jh
Copyright �1957 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON (Issued at Washington)
HCO TRAINING BULLETIN OF 3 SEPTEMBER 1957
To: Dir Tr
All Instructors
Assoc Sec
Tech Dir
HCA/HPA COURSE PROCESSES
The following are the only processes to be run in actual student
auditing. (All Formal Auditing.) They are to be run as they appear on the
Training schedule. All other processes are to be coached.
1. RUDIMENTS in full.
2. ARC Straightwire: "Recall something that was really real to you."
"Thank you." "Recall a time when you were in good communication with
someone." "Thank you." "Recall a time when you really liked someone."
"Thank you." The 3 commands are given in that order and repeated in
that order consistently. (FOR TRAINING ONLY.)
3. Static Preparation. "Recall a moment of loss."
4. Control Trio. Commands: "Notice that (object)." "Get the idea of
having that (object)." Flatten this, then "Notice that (object)." "Get
the idea it would be all right for it to remain as it is." Flatten,
then "Notice that (object)." "Get the idea of making it disappear."
(WITH EMPHASIS ON "REMAIN".) (All with proper acknowledgments.)
5. OP BY DUP, old style-book and bottle. "Go over to the book." "Look at
it." "Pick it up." "What is its color?" "What is its temperature?"
"What is its weight?" "Put it down in exactly the same place." Then
same commands with a bottle (or ashtray, etc). (All with proper
acknowledgments.)
6. Training 5: "Seat that body in that chair" comm bridged occasionally
to "Touch that chair" and back to "Seat that body in that chair".
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO TRAINING BULLETIN OF 4 SEPTEMBER 1957
Dir Training
All HCA Instructors
All ACC Instructors
Org Sec
Pub Rel
Tech Dir
London STABLE DATA FOR INSTRUCTORS
Other operations
for info
1. Instructors must know and use the Instructor's Code to the
letter. There must be no violation of this Code permitted by the
Director of Training.
2. Grant Beingness to the students at all times. An Instructor
must be willing for a coach to "instruct" without resenting a
"valence theft".
3. Insist that coaches give the student auditors wins; have
coaches push the student auditor to a better willingness and
ability, and chop bank, not thetan.
4. Have coaches coach with precision, and have them tell the
student auditor when he has done something well. Instruct them to
tell the student auditor what he is doing right as well as what he
is doing wrong.
5. See that the coaches coach with Purpose, Reality, Intention,
and to Win.
6. Instruct coach to maintain his control when student auditor
gets in "hot water", adding more ARC to help him through it, while
at the same time banging away at the same level. Make the coach who
caused it retrieve any student who blows.
7. An Instructor's sole purpose is not to make a student blow. The
main goal of an Instructor is to make a better auditor. This then
must apply to coaches.
8. Always answer your students' questions as per the Instructor's
Code. An Instructor should not withhold communication from students
when the student needs communication.
9. Run good 8-C on students with lots of ARC. Stress good 8-C more
than ARC.
10. The most important thing an Instructor should do is to make a
good auditor out of every student. This means making good coaches.
This means wins. This means beingness.
As ye teach 'em, so shall they audit.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: md.rd Copyright � 19 57 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[pic]
Issue 54 [1957, ca. early September]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
More Confronting
L. Ron Hubbard
That which a person can confront, he can handle.
The first step of handling anything is gaining an ability to face it.
It could be said that war continues as a threat to Man because Man
cannot confront war. The idea of making war so terrible that no one will be
able to fight it is the exact reverse of fact-if one wishes to end war. The
invention of the longbow, gunpowder, heavy naval cannon, machine guns,
liquid fire, and the hydrogen bomb add only more and more certainty that
war will continue. As each new element which Man cannot confront is added
to elements he has not been able to confront so far, Man engages himself
upon a decreasing ability to handle war.
We are looking here at the basic anatomy of all problems. Problems
start with an inability to confront anything. Whether we apply this to
domestic quarrels or to insects, to garbage dumps or Picasso, one can
always trace the beginning of any existing problem to an unwillingness to
confront.
Let us take a domestic scene. The husband or the wife cannot confront
the other, cannot confront second dynamic consequences, cannot confront the
economic burdens, and so we have domestic strife. The less any of these
actually are confronted the more problem they will become.
It is a truism that one never solves anything by running away from it.
Of course, one might also say that one never solves cannonballs by baring
his breast to them. But I assure you that if nobody cared whether
cannonballs were fired or not, control of people by threat of cannonballs
would cease.
Down on skid row where flotsam and jetsam exist to keep the police
busy, we could not find one man whose basic difficulties, whose downfall
could not be traced at once to an inability to confront. A criminal once
came to me whose entire right side was paralyzed. Yet, this man made his
living by walking up to people in alleys, striking them and robbing them.
Why he struck people he could not connect with his paralyzed side and arm.
From his infancy he had been educated not to confront men. The nearest he
could come to confronting men was to strike them, and so his criminal
career.
The more the horribleness of crime is deified by television and public
press, the less the society will be able to handle crime. The more
formidable is made the juvenile delinquent, the less the society will be
able to handle the juvenile delinquent.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
In education, the more esoteric and difficult a subject is made, the less
the student will be able to handle the subject. When a subject is made too
formidable by an instructor, the more the student retreats from it. There
were, for instance, some early European mental studies which were so
complicated and so incomprehensible and which were sown with such lack of
understanding of Man that no student could possibly confront them. In
Scientology when we have a student who has been educated basically in the
idea that the mind is so formidable and so complicated that none could
confront it, or perhaps so bestial and degraded that no one would want to,
we have a student who cannot learn Scientology. He has confused Scientology
with his earlier training, and his difficulty is that he cannot be made to
confront the subject of the mind.
Man at large today is in this state with regard to the human spirit.
For centuries Man was educated to believe in demons, ghouls, and things
that went boomp in the night. There was an organization in southern Europe
which capitalized upon this terror and made demons and devils so formidable
that at length Man could not even face the fact that any of his fellows had
souls. And thus we entered an entirely materialistic age. With the
background teaching that no one can confront the "invisible," vengeful
religions sought to move forward into a foremost place of control.
Naturally, it failed to achieve its goal and irreligion became the order of
the day, thus opening the door for Communism and other idiocies. Although
it might seem true that one cannot confront the invisible, who said that a
spirit was always invisible? Rather let us say that it is impossible for
Man or anything else to confront the nonexistent and thus when nonexistent
gods are invented and are given more roles in the society, we discover Man
becomes so degraded that he cannot even confront the spirit in his fellows,
much less become moral.
Confronting as a subject in itself is intensely interesting. Indeed,
there is some evidence that mental image pictures occur only when the
individual is unable to confront the circumstances of the picture. When
this compounds and Man is unable to confront anything anywhere, he might be
considered to have pictures of everything everywhere. This is proven by a
rather interesting test made in 1947 by myself when it was discovered that
if an individual could be made to "run a lock" of something he had just
seen, run another lock on something he had just heard, and run an
additional lock on something he had just felt, he would at length be able
to handle much more serious pictures in his mind. I discovered, although I
did not entirely interpret it at the time, that an individual has no
further pictures when he can confront all pictures; thus being able to
confront everything he has done, he is no longer troubled with the things
he has done. Supporting this, it will be discovered that individuals who
progress in an ability to handle pictures eventually have no pictures at
all. This we call a Clear.
A Clear in an absolute sense would be someone who could confront
anything and everything in the past, present and future.
Unfortunately for the world of action, it will be discovered that one
who can confront everything does not have to handle anything. In support of
this is offered that Scientology process, Problems of Comparable Magnitude.
In this particular process the individual being processed is asked to
select a terminal with which he has had difficulty. In that the definition
of a terminal is a "live mass" or something that is capable of causing,
receiving or relaying communication, it will be seen that terminals are
quite ordinarily people in the problem category of anyone's bank. The
person is then asked to invent a problem of comparable magnitude to that
person. He is asked to do this many, many times. It will be found midway in
the process that he is willing to do something now about the problems he is
having with that person. But at the end of the process a new and strange
thing is found to occur. The individual no longer feels that he must do
something about the problem. Indeed, he can simply confront or regard or
view the problem with complete equanimity. Now an almost mystic quality
enters this when it is discovered that the problem in the physical universe
about which
he has been worried often ceases to exist out there. In other words, the
handling of a problem seems to be simply the increase of ability to
confront the problem and when the problem can be totally confronted it no
longer exists. This is strange and miraculous.
It is hard to believe that an individual who has a drunken husband
could cure that individual of drink simply by processing out the problem of
having a drunken husband, and yet this has occurred. I am not saying here
that all the problems of the world could be vanquished simply by running
Problems of Comparable Magnitude on a few people, but neither am I saying
that all the problems of the world could not be handled by Problems of
Comparable Magnitude on a few people, and indeed I am at this time
undertaking an experiment in this direction on the subject of the atomic
bomb. It is an oddity that the longer this experiment is continued, the
less responsive these bombs are to test firing.
Perhaps it could be said, however, that if there existed one person in
the entire universe who could confront all of the universe, the problems of
the universe for all would deintensify enormously.
Man's difficulties are a compound of his cowardices. To have
difficulties in life, all it is necessary to do is to start running away
from the business of livingness. After that, problems of unsolvable
magnitude are assured. When individuals are restrained from confronting
life they accrue a vast ability to have difficulties with it.
There are many other things about confronting which are intensely
interesting but these we will take up in a later issue.
An earlier issue of Ability carried in it a full resume of Training 0,
the name of which is Confronting. This drill, done for a great many hours,
will be found intensely efficacious in the handling of life. A wife and a
husband whose way has not been too smooth would find it extremely
interesting in terms of resolution of domestic difficulties to co-audit
with this training drill alone, each one running it upon the other for at
least 25 hours. This would have to be done, of course, on a turnabout basis
of not more than 2 hours on one and then a switch from "coach" to
"auditor."
To run Confronting in this fashion and with considerable gain, it would
be necessary to have some understanding of what a "coach" is and, in one of
these co-auditing teams, what an "auditor" is. A much fuller understanding
of this will be contained in the Student Manual The team sits in
straightbacked-preferably uncomfortably upright-chairs. The coach and
auditor sit facing each other a short distance apart. It is the task of the
coach to keep the auditor "on the ball." The "auditor's" feet must be flat
on the floor, his hands must be in his lap. His head must be erect and he
must not use any system or method but must simply confront. A twitching
muscle, a jittering finger alike would be reproached by the coach. The
coach has several terms he uses. The first of these is "Start," at which
moment the "session" begins. Every time the auditor falls from grace, does
not hold his position, slumps, goes anaten (unconscious), twitches, starts
his eyes wandering, or in any way demonstrates an incorrect position, the
coach says "Flunk" and corrects the difficulty. He then says "Start" again
and the session goes on. When the person in the role of "auditor" has been
extremely successful over a period of time the coach can say "Win" and then
again "Start." When the coach wishes to make some comments or give some
advice the coach says "That's it," straightens up this point and then again
says "Start."
In the coaching itself only these terms are employed: "Start," "Flunk,"
"Win," "That's it." Anything else the coach does or says is disregarded by
the "auditor" unless the coach has said "That's it" and has then advised on
a point and then has started again. The coach would be at liberty to do
anything he wished, short of physical violence, to make the auditor nervous
or upset him. The coach could say anything he wished between a "start" and
another command as above, and the auditor would flunk if he paid any
attention or did otherwise than simply confronted.
Ordinarily all the coach does is make sure that the auditor goes on
confronting. However, it should be understood that the drill can be
toughened up considerably. The coach can do anything to throw the auditor
off the simple business of confronting. If the auditor so much as twitches
a smile, looks embarrassed, clears his throat or in any other way falls off
from plain and ordinary confronting, it is, of course, always a "flunk."
It should be understood that drill sessions are not auditing sessions.
In a drill session the entire session is in the hands of the coach, who is
only in a vague way the "preclear" of the session. In an auditing session
the entire session is in the hands of the auditor.
There is a basic rule here. Anything which the "auditor" or "student,"
as he is called in the drills, is holding tense, is the thing with which he
is confronting. If the "auditor's" eyes begin to smart, he is confronting
with them. If his stomach begins to protrude and becomes tense he is
confronting with his stomach. If his shoulders or even the back of his head
become tense, then he is confronting with the shoulders or the back of his
head. A coach who becomes very expert in this can spot these things at once
and would in this case give a "That's it," straighten the auditor out on it
and would then start the session anew.
It is interesting that the drill does not consist of confronting with
something. The drill consists only of confronting; therefore, confronting
with is a "flunk."
Various nervous traits can be traced at once to trying to confront with
something which insists on running away. A nervous hand, for instance,
would be a hand with which the individual is trying to confront something.
The forward motion of the nervousness would be the effort to make it
confront, the backward motion of it would be its refusal to confront. Of
course, the basic error is confronting with the hand.
The world is never bright to those who cannot confront it. Everything
is a dull gray to a defeated army. The whole trick of somebody telling you
"It's all bad over there," is contained in the fact that he is trying to
keep you from confronting something and thus make you retreat from life.
Eyeglasses, nervous twitches, tensions, all of these things stem from an
unwillingness to confront. When that willingness is repaired, these
disabilities tend to disappear.
Of course, tumultuously married couples may encounter some knock-down
and drag-out moments in doing this confronting drill. However, it should be
kept in mind that it is the coach in these training drills who is bound by
the Instructor's Code and that the only harm that can result would come
about if the "auditor" were permitted to "blow" (leave) the session without
the coach, even with manhandling, getting the auditor back into the drill.
It will be found that these "blows" occur most frequently when the person
being coached, in other words the "auditor," is being given too few wins
and is being discouraged by the coach. Of course, things he does wrong
should be flunked, but it will be found that the way is paved to success
with wins; therefore, when he does it well for a period of time, the
"auditor" should be told so. Go into this drill expecting explosions and
upsets and simply refuse to give up if they occur and you will have it
whipped in short order. Go into it expecting that all will be sweetness and
light and everyone should be a little gentleman and a little lady and
disaster will loom.
Neither I nor the management are responsible for cuts, contusions,
violent words, or divorces resulting from attempts to run confrontingness
drills by husbands and wives on each other.
May you never be the same.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 9 SEPTEMBER 1957
PROCESSES TO BE RUN ON HGC PRECLEARS FROM THIS DATE
The following processes are to be run on HGC preclears from this date
until otherwise notified.
ON PRECLEARS WHO HAVE POINTS BELOW THE ZERO LINE OF APAs: Very brief
rudiments. Then CCH 1, CCH 2, CCH 3 and CCH 4. These processes are not run
on a basis where each is killed dead before the auditor goes on. Each is
run to a flat spot and then bridged to the next. It would be amazing to run
one of them more than a couple of hours except perhaps CCH 4 Book Mimicry,
but even this is only run to a mediumly flat spot. As soon as the auditor
has gone through these four processes once he goes over each one again,
possibly using now CCH I (b), Don't give me that hand, instead of Give me
that hand. It will be noted that each one of these tends to unflatten the
other three. Further a pc may get no response at all on CCH I until he has
run CCH 3 and CCH 4. Hence to grind on one only is folly of the first
order.
The object of these processes CCH 1-4 is to get the person under
control, by which is meant the body. Only when that is done can an auditor
hope to go on with success.
Once the person is under control it is quite easy to put attention
under control. This is best done by TRAINING 10 Locational Processing. It
is to be noted on a low scale case that TR 10 can be enforced. Thus the pc
does not fly out of control.
ON PRECLEARS WHO HAVE MOST POINTS ABOVE THE ZERO LINE OF AN APA: Here
again we have to hit the CCH steps but in this case we first handle
rudiments with the following thoroughness:
1. We clear help. Can the auditor help the pc. Can the pc help the
auditor. Do people ever help people. Etc. On a two way comm basis break
this down until the pc comes through any compulsive help or wasting help.
2. We clear pt problem making sure again that the pc can invent a
problem of some sort about something. We run pt problem on a terminal only,
never on a condition. Further, we run this until the pc is willing to let
the pt problem ride. We don't want him to be "willing to do something about
it". But we NEVER let this process occupy 15% of an intensive. Why? Because
havingness is the clue to problems and a person obsessively has problems
when he doesn't have havingness. If a problem takes too long to clear, the
auditor blundered by running pt problem and should come off of it at the
first logical spot and return to it AFTER he has later run havingness.
3. Goals are then cleared in full. It doesn't matter if this takes
the rest of the intensive. The questions are formally audited as follows:
"Tell me something that you're absolutely certain will be there in ---,"
"Tell me something you would really like to have in -." The times are one
minute, five minutes, one hour, one day, three days, one week, one month,
three months, six months, one year, two years, three years, ten years.
These times are not absolute, but may be changed by the auditor. But they
are close to pat as given. The auditor does not figure out for the preclear
the dates on which these times will occur. The pc's figuring out the date
is part of the process.
From here the auditor selectively shoots up APA by running old-time
Trio with all three parts. In this he knocks out "remain" and "dispense
with" as well as "have". He runs this Trio as follows. He runs many haves,
then bridges to many remains, then bridges to many, many, many dispense
withs. Then he bridges to haves, then runs many, many, many remains, and
bridges to many dispense withs. Then he bridges to many, many, many haves,
runs many remains (into which he bridges), and then bridges to many
dispense withs. He can keep this up in this order. Each one of the legs of
Trio tends to unflatten the other two legs. All three have to wind up flat.
This is run
first inside and then, if being concentrated on, outside. Goals can be run
again as above if desired for then will run differently.
If the auditor has any suspicion that he does not have the pc under
control he runs the early CCH steps briefly and accomplishes it.
If the foregoing basic things are done, then many other things can be
done. An analysis of a profile will tell us a few things about a preclear
and while we do not yet have every point on an APA taped, we do have
several.
Foremost is the point "nervous-depressed". When this is low, the pc
doesn't have any reality on anything. No stable datum. The first stable
datum the pc gets may well be achieved by the oldy ARC STRAIGHTWIRE gone
through just a few times. That's cracked plenty of people's cases. The
early CCH steps are all aimed squarely at that point. "Look at me who am
l?" also hammers at that point. When I see a before and after with no
change on nervous-depressed when it was low (always about -90) I think,
"The pc never found the auditor". Actually it's lack on any stable datum of
any kind. The auditor may be found only after the pc has gotten hold of
some very minor stable datum, "Something that's really real in the room."
"Recall a moment that is really real to you."
The second point we have even better established through test is the
CRITICAL. When this is low, the pc is on obsessive change and will LET
NOTHING REMAIN. Getting him to let just one thing remain (and to be still)
can shift this critical. Letting things remain is the key to a low
critical.
IQ is another big win for us now since we know what IQ is all about. IQ
is the ABILITY TO WlTHHOLD OR GIVE OUT A DATUM ON A SELF DETERMINED BASIS.
Incidentally we also shoot valences with WITHHOLD. It is run the same way
whether shooting valences or raising IQ. One finds the weak valence from
which the pc could withhold nothing and finally gets the pc to be able to
withhold things from that valence.
EXTERIORIZATION is accomplished by "Recall a moment of loss". When a pc
gets this flat he can then be run on old S-C-S routine (not Stop-C-S) and
he will exteriorize easily.
Psychosomatic difficulties have been vanished rather easily on
withhold. "Look around here and find something from which you could
withhold that------" skin-rash, leg, whatever.
EYESIGHT can be shifted by CONTROL TRIO with emphasis on Disappear.
THE FAILED CASE is a case in which thought can always be overpowered by
Mest. The pc's ability to make his thinkingness prevail against Mest has
failed too often and cannot change. Only Mest changes, therefore. This is
usually the below zero on the APA pc. Making him think things and do things
doesn't much change him because he is too weak in thinking to prevail
against Mest. "Look at it and tell me something about it you could handle"
or "Think a thought that would be all right for you to think", and other
approaches, done by a clever auditor, can crack this sort of thing up on an
even gone case. This is a point which occasionally needs attention,
particularly when we have a pc who is not changing on APA or IQ. If an
intensive didn't change him, he can't think against anything. The oldest
workable remedy known is "Spot something around here that isn't thinking".
After being trained in the TRs it is necessary to run a student on the
remain button of Control Trio or Trio and upon withhold processes to up his
test.
I have turned out this bulletin rapidly for use in the HGC and on
students in training. This bulletin will only be modified when necessity
becomes apparent. Nothing in this bulletin will overcome sloppy, yakkeyety,
wiggly or can't-confront auditing.
I trust you will get good results with the above.
Best,
Ron
P.A.B. No. 120
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 September 1957
CONTROL TRIO
Now thinkingness in general should not be suspected of being under
anybody's control, much less the auditor's, but it is probably more under
the auditor's control than it is under the preclear's control. When I say
to you "Do you think that thinkingness is under control?" you should be
aware of the fact that it is less under the preclear's control at any time
than under the auditor's control. That's one the boys don't get always.
They think, "Well, can I get the preclear's thinkingness under control?"
Well, you can do it better than the preclear, but that is horribly bad, and
when you get this clear you will see that you have to get the body under
control and get attention under control before you aim at thinkingness.
Therefore, a condition to running Trio is this: Is the person of the
preclear under control, is the attention of the preclear under control-
those are two conditions necessary to run Trio. Now to assume the power of
choice is also under the preclear's control-much less thinkingness-is, of
course, pretty grim. It moves Trio outrageously high. So you could say,
then, that there are two versions of Trio, and I have been fishing around
for one of them; I've been doing some work on this for the last several
weeks and I finally got this thing taped-I do mean taped.
All right. Trio would just be Trio just the way it is. But there is an
undercut in Trio; Trio could be a directive process, and it would be
prefaced by "Get the idea of having that clock," "Get the idea of having
that picture" (indicating picture on wall), "Get the idea of having that
sofa," "Get the idea of having that chair," "Get the idea of having that
table"-do you see this? Now that is highly directive, isn't it? Now that
would keep thinkingness under control in the kind of a case who was having
a rough time with it.
All right. Now let's take the second version. "Get the idea that it
would be all right for that clock to remain as it is." "Get the idea that
it would be all right for that wall to remain as it is." Got that? Just an
indicating process.
All right. Now here comes the clincher! Instead of dispense with, or
not-know, we run into actually a brand-new process. Its rationale is much
higher; it's "Get the idea of making that clock disappear." "Get the idea
of making that chair disappear." "Get the idea of making that ceiling
disappear," etc. Small objects are much easier for the preclear to make
disappear than large ones, but you haven't told him to make it disappear,
have you? You have told him to get the idea of making it disappear. They
usually interpret you literally and try like mad to make it disappear, and
it usually does for a short time.
Now this process is restimulative, too. Anyway, we've got a point, and
that is simply this: that this as a process all by itself is probably one
of the killer processes of
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
all time. I have solved this enigma: Why doesn't a preclear exteriorize
easily and stay exteriorized? And we ask this question and we ask this
accompanying question: Why does a preclear get sick when you ask him to
conceive a static? Now obviously we'd have to get somebody to conceive a
static before he could himself stay comfortably outside. What keeps a
preclear from conceiving a static? It's because he associates a static with
loss, and he says, "All right, if there is nothing there I've lost it."
Don't you see? "I've lost something if there's nothing there, therefore I'd
better not conceive a static." Conceiving a static is therefore painful.
Well, the truth of the matter is, whenever he lost anything, something
disappeared. All right.
The funny part of it is that he never noticed that he didn't lose
totally every time. He still had other objects. He lost his tie-pin-well,
heavens, he's still got his tie. He's still got the floor, the room, this
universe, space, but he never realizes this in these instances, and so
that's why we've been running this process here on "Recall a moment of
loss," just to see if we couldn't accustom someone to conceiving a static
very directly on loss, and whether or not the individual would exteriorize
just as such, on the process.
Now that was a test that was made. The test process, "Recall a moment
of loss," sandwiched in with Havingness, then, has been run with the
expected result that we would get this fellow concentrated on
exteriorization and a little more able to conceive an exteriorization,
certainly. Now final figures from this are probably not available from
testing yet; they aren't, but regardless of that, here is the rationale. An
individual cannot conceive a static if he associates a static with loss, if
loss is painful. So we have to cure him of the painfulness of loss,
consideration of, before we can exteriorize him easily.
Now how do we do this? We have to go back to automaticity. The universe
has been taking things away from him. It has become an automaticity and we
find that the universe has an automaticity known as time, and time itself
is a consecutive series of losses. All right. So we have to cure this
fellow of losses before we can get him to appreciate time, otherwise he's
so afraid of losing it that he parks himself on the track, and this is
"stuck on the track" phenomena. All right. The process which is aimed at
this, the experimental process "Recall a moment of loss," sandwiched in
with Havingness (Trio now handles it on this-"Control Trio" it had better
be called, and its third command is "Get the idea of making that (object)
disappear")-well, this gets him to take over the automaticity of all the
losses which he has experienced unwillingly, you see that. It's the
universe that's been taking the things away, and an individual, then, just
by spotting objects and getting the idea that they are going to disappear
or are disappearing, of course then does take over this automaticity of
losses, and he becomes accustomed to it after a while and he should come
out of the woods on it.
Now all of these invisible masses that preclears have around them are
actually simply symptoms of mass - loss, mass- loss. Now when an individual
has no visio, has never seen anything, couldn't see anything, the only
thing he's looking at is a stuck loss. Got the idea? He's looking at the
nothingness of something that was there. All right, you take over that
automaticity with this third command on Control Trio. Therefore, you have a
highly directional, a highly workable set of processes, and each part of
that Trio would be run relatively flat and go on to the next part, and I
would say you'd probably run it something on the order of, oh, certainly
not a hundred commands each-you'd try to stay in that order of magnitude,
and you could just run it round and round. It's "get the idea of."
Well, what would be necessary before you got to that process? It would
be necessary to get an individual's body under control, which takes the
early steps of CCH. And then put his attention under control; a great many
processes can do this. Chief amongst them has always been locational
processing, and if you were to just run
the ordinary locational processes, you would eventually get his attention
under control.
The auditor taking control of somebody's attention actually puts the
preclear into more control of attention than the preclear ordinarily is,
which is one of the freak things. People look at this and they say, "Well,
we must be running the fellow out the bottom," and we wouldn't be running
the fellow out the bottom.
Well, we leave Trio in its time-honored style and so on just as it has
always been, but we do have this low-cut Trio and it's rather a killer. You
take somebody with glasses, his eyesight will do more tricks in less time
on this third process of Control Trio. Things will go black-well, why do
things go black? Well, blackness makes things disappear, doesn't it, and
you take over the automaticity of using blackness to make things disappear.
Night grabs, the way of the universe, once in every 24 hours on earth here.
This is the one we've been looking for to turn on visio.
Now if you wanted to turn on sonic with this you'd have to go down to a
noisy part of town and just run Trio on sound, but you wouldn't dare do
this-run Control Trio on sound-you would not dare do this, of course, if
the preclear did not already have Trio on objects flat. Obviously, visio
would turn on before sonic.
There are many things that you could do with this. People who have
anaesthetized areas in their body-like they have no chest, no sensation in
their chest, etc.-do weird things with this process, this Control Trio. Got
it? I wanted to tell you particularly about this particular process because
it is a specific, and it will be found to be very useful to you. We had to
find out if one version of this would run without killing a preclear, and
that's "Recall a moment of loss." Actually, "Recall a moment of loss"
should act as a havingness process, because it as-ises all of the loss
points on the track, and it should be a havingness process all by itself,
but we didn't want to be so bold as to run it with no Havingness.
(Until I find out differently, this Control Trio and "Recall a moment
of loss" are making a bid for our chief exteriorization processes.)
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO TRAINING BULLETIN OF 24 SEPTEMBER 1957
CURRICULUM OF CCH
TO BE DONE WELL
CCH 0
CCH 1
CCH 2
CCH 3
CCH 4
A Subjective process (think)
An Objective process (spot or find)
A Straight Wire process
LRH:md.nm L. RON HUBBARD
P.A.B. No. 121
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 October 1957
RUDIMENTS AND GOALS
All you need to clear up if somebody is having too much trouble trying
to locate or isolate a problem is to clear up the semantics of a problem-
what does he mean by a problem? I got this rich one off a preclear one day
doing this quite fascinating thing. What was a problem, I finally asked,
and he told me a problem was something that could never be solved.
Whenever you run "withhold" on a valence you finish up with "can't
have" on the valence and that flattens it off better.
You will find it is quite often more advantageous to run Locational
Processing than it is to run Problems of Comparable Magnitude. A Problem of
Comparable Magnitude is all right, but it's a thinkingness process, and on
a case that is having an awful lot of trouble, it gives them hell to run
Locational Processing, but nevertheless it does run out the present time
problem, which is most fascinating.
Any one of the Rudiments are excellent processes-any one of them. Two-
way communication is something that has never been stressed much on this
side of the water-it has been taught very thoroughly on the other side. I
took up a lot of the 4th London A.C.C. on the subject of two-way comm, how
you handle two-way comm. You have to keep the reality of it very high and
you have to be willing to interrupt obsessive outflows of the preclear,
etc., and obsessive silences. Two-way comm is a very interesting way of
going about things, and it isn't just talking. It is establishing a high
level of reality. It consists of the auditor feeding experimental data to
the preclear, in order to have the preclear look it over and decide about
it one way or the other. In two-way comm, you don't let a preclear as-is
everything he knows, thinks or wants to do.
All right. Now we look over this and we discover that the Rudiments
consist, in part, of a present time problem. Now we already know that a
present time problem can be run in this wise-Locational. It can also be run
as a Problem of Comparable Magnitude. So we have a lot of processes
connected with a present time problem.
Now let's take another one of the Rudiments. Clearing the Auditor.
Actually, the crudest way known of clearing the auditor is "Who do I remind
you of?" "Tell me something you don't like about me"-these are real crude
ways of clearing the auditor. The best way of clearing the auditor we know
of is in Training 13, which is "Could I help you-how?" "Could you help me-
how?" "Could I help anybody else-how?" "Could you help anybody else-how?"
"Do other people ever help other people?" "Do women ever help women?" "Do
men ever help men?" "Do men ever help women?" "Do women ever help men?" And
you just beat it to pieces on a big long bracket. Now
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
this goes so far that it becomes a fantastic process in itself. You take
father and mother valences-they are usually quite hot. You can run this on
Help. This is usually quite necessary on a case that's going to hang up,
because the only reason the case is sitting there is to waste help. And you
can run a case on any process, no matter how excellent, on a basis of
wasting help until the case simply can't find enough ways to waste it and
he goes down tone scale. You have to understand the case is trying to waste
help. It isn't Find the Auditor in the Rudiments today, it is Clear the
Auditor. The only point on which he's cleared is Help-"Can I help you?"
"Can you help me?"
All right. Now let's take another facet of this. Goals. Actually,
Handbook for Preclears has been helping us out just to the degree that it
does do a little clarification on goals and gets the guy stirred up. The
real reason the Handbook for Preclears is used at the HGC is quite an
interesting one. It's simply to stir the case up so it'll run out.
All right, this guy's sitting there in a sleep and he's just gonna run
Locational, you know, and he's in a disoriented state anyhow: He isn't here
and he isn't home and he isn't anywhere-well, let's get him worried, let's
get him chewed up a little bit, let's get him restimulated somewhat, let's
get him interested in this. All right, these problems, then, do tend to
swim to the top; you run some relatively non-directional process, and does
it bite on? Now if you're going to run non-directional processes-that is to
say, "Give me that hand" and so on-you're going to have to have something
to run them against, and something like the Handbook for Preclears gives
you something. The guy thinks while he's going over this sort of thing, he
thinks "Oh my, blah blah, the trouble with me is I have nothing to do and I
don't want to do anything and I never will have anything to do."
But I got to thinking about goals from the usual standpoint of their
high generality with most people-"I wonder if there is anybody around who
could articulate with great conciseness what he would like to do"-and I
found on all sides that a failure to articulate was the main difficulty.
The person had a feeling he wanted to do something and this would be
wonderful, and it was all in a sensory capacity. Now if he could be made to
articulate this, why, we would really have something. And I experimented on
;t a little bit and we see that today in the Handbook for Preclears.
Now if you can get him to articulate in a session anything about the
future, you have won on the subject of goals. But it must be in the
alignment of this person's frame of reference-it must be aligned with his
life, not aligned with something we think he ought to live. So let's take a
look at clearance of goals. Goals would not be likely to run on a high
generality. In other words they are specific, personal and intimate. It's
"What do you think?" "What do you want?" "What is aligned with your life?"-
and we can't beat around the bush with this one if we're going to get any
place with it.
All right, let's take Goals as a process. You could run goals for 25
hours with the greatest of ease, and we just had a report of a terrific win
here on a preclear who was run on Locational for 25 hours, so it looks like
the Rudiments could be the session. So if somebody says, "Well, now, I ran
the Rudiments and then we got into some processing"-fascinating, you see.
Rudiments are dignified today with CCH 0 as an appellation. All right.
We discover this preclear in this terrible condition of not wanting any
auditing, not going any place, all of his goals being somebody else's
goals. Two things we can do at once are Clear the Auditor and then run
Goals. Now how would you really run Goals with two-way comm? Goals could be
run with two-way comm in this way: You ask the preclear what he is
absolutely sure would happen in the next two minutes-in the next day-three
days from now-one week from now-one month from now-and one year from now.
And we want something he'd be absolutely sure would happen.
Now we're running right there the reverse process of atomic bombs, which
say "no future"-"no future"-"no future." Well, basically, what's wrong with
anybody- why does he jam on the track? It's because of "no future." He has
been denied to a point where his loss is so great that he dare not own.
I knew a person at one time, a case that was, by the way, a psychology
major- one of the roughest cases I have ever run into. The case put on the
total appearance of being sane-it was a dramatized sanity, and yet the case
would make odd remarks like "I really think people are crazy." "Well, why
do you think people are crazy?" I would say. "Well, because people say they
can tell right from wrong, and you know there's no difference."
Fascinating! The case would make odd remarks like this from time to time.
One day the case made a remark on goals, like this: "Well, it's really best
to tell people that things can't happen to them, because otherwise they
might hope that they could, and then they'd be disappointed." Now you
disentangle that. This was all taught to this person, by the way, at the
University of California at Berkeley. The person was also taught that the
best way to preserve anybody's status quo, etc., was to drug them and so
on, I mean it was a gentle course. All right. This person was stark,
staring mad and had no future of any kind, no slightest future, brought out
by this. Five hours on just this one type of question, "Is there anything
going to happen in the remainder of this afternoon?" "Will anything happen
the rest of today?" "Is there anything going to occur any place in the
world the rest of today?" And the confident answer, with great certainty,
was "No." "No." Five hours. And finally we broke through it-"Well, you will
probably sit there for the rest of the day wrangling with me and screaming
at me the way you have been doing"-and it busted and I finally got the
person to admit that there was some slight possibility that there would be
a room here for the rest of the day. And it busted this case. It read from
total no-future up. Well, this case was an isolated case, as we've
occasionally had now and then, and this was an inspirational sort of
process that cracked through.
Well now, we see this process of Goals on the basis of futures, and a
person without futures cannot have a fancy future called a goal, and all a
goal is is a fancy future determined by the person. And if he has no future
at all determined by anybody, then he isn't going to go anywhere from that
point, and any goal he has is totally unreal.
So the best way I know of to clear up a goal is as follows: Two-way
comm "Is there anything that's going to happen in the next couple of
minutes?" We finally get this totally thrashed out till he's got some great
big certainty that there will be something a couple of minutes from now.
And then we move it up a day, and then we move it up a week-three days-and
move it up a week; and move it up a month; and move it up a year. And we
get certainties at each one of these stages and levels, regardless of on
what. Now the person knows that that is going to occur. He knows there is
going to be a future there.
Now let's have him put something in this future that he now has had
created. He's created a future, he's got certainty on it, it's up there.
All right. Now let's put some desire in the future and we get a goal. "Now
what would you like to have happen in the next couple of minutes?" or "What
would you like to do in the next couple of minutes?"-"What would you like
to do tomorrow?"-"What would you like to do in three days?"-"What would you
like to do in a week?"-"What would you like to do in a month?"-"What would
you like to do in a year?" And we will get these weird things which have no
desire in them; they are all get-rid-ofs, and if you really plowed such a
person down on it he would get down to the bottom of the ladder, which is
"Knock this body off right now." And when he says "I would like to get rid
of my fear of darkness, I would like to get over feeling bad every time my
mother screams at me"-well now, these aren't desires. These are runaways,
these are flinches-these are "let's not confront it," "let's get out of the
universe," "let's scram." And the final
result is the basic postulate "If I could just get rid of this body right
this instant I would be all right."
All right. So that thing doesn't even vaguely get flat unless there is
a real goal like "I'd like to have a stick of candy"-now that's a goal,
see, that's a goal. "Tomorrow, I'd like to walk down the street and find a
couple of bags of gold lying on the corner." You see, it has to have desire
in it. "Next week, why I'd like to go camping. I'd just love to go
camping." Then they'll always modify these things in some way or other,
"because of course I can't because I have to work and I don't have any
money and" yak, yak, yak-you got the idea? They'll modify these goals. As
long as they're modifying them they don't have a goal, because they're
making a postulate and the MEST universe is kicking the postulate in on
them.
So how do you solve this? If it's this arduous how do you solve it?
Well, run "Build a future-" two minutes (these times are only approximate),
tomorrow, three days, a week, a month, a year just build the fact that
there will be something there, that time is going to advance in those
areas. Then we build a desire into it: "Well, what would you like to have
happen?"-"What would you like to do in two minutes?", a day, three days, a
week, a month, a year? All right. Well, he didn't give you anything he
really wanted to have happen; he said, "I'd like to-if I were brave enough
I'd tell you I'd like to get rid of you and me and everything, but I'm not
brave enough so all I will say is I would like to get rid of the darkness,
that would be fine."
All right. Two-way comm consists in the main of keeping a preclear
talking, busting through their silences, knocking them into line and
manhandling them with pomp. You keep 'em talking; and therefore it is a
skill-a very high skill. But after you've built a future you build into it
something they would like to have happen in that future. All right.
So here is a modus operandi now that makes this a process: Build a
future on that span, then build something they'd like to have happen in
that future. Now build a new future, go all over the same first process
again on prediction, next couple of minutes, what he's sure is going to
happen, what he could be certain about. "What could you be certain about a
year from now?" All right, we've built a future-then you'll find out that's
a little stronger, and then we build something in that future that he'd
like to have happen. And then we build a new future-same first process
again-and then the second process of adding the desire to it, and we
finally will come out into the clear.
Now there is a way to run Goals for twenty-five hours-slug, slug, slug.
Now you can run Help for twenty-five hours, too, on just who helps who,
when, where. "Has there ever been anybody in the whole universe who ever
helped anybody in the whole universe?" is the most general form of
question. But here we have these Rudiments, then, moved out into processes,
and it's possible to just handle intensives with Rudiments.
Now we find somebody wasting help-well, he's hard to put into session.
And if you are going to help him anyway, it isn't goals that's in trouble,
it's help, and if you try to help him too much and he's wasting help, he
will eventually waste help by blowing. So it's help that has to be cleared
if goals won't. Got this? All right!
L. RON
HUBBARD
[pic]
Issue 56 [1957, ca. early October]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
_____________________________________________________________________
The Eighteenth A.C.C.
L. Ron Hubbard
Now that the 18th ACC has roared into history, there are a lot of
auditors around whose auditing skill is very wonderful.
But more important to us all there are some Scientologists around whose
ability to run groups is in the stars.
The 18th ACC people, over half a hundred of them, received gold seals
on their certificates. That means they can validate other certificates and
it means they can grant a new Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist certificate.
We are looking to the 18th ACC graduates to complete the validation
program and to get going groups and more groups.
These 1 8th people are wonderful people. They did well. I saw it and I
have said it. They're fine people.
Let us face the reality of this thing. The world confronts several
crises. Man's inhumanity to Man is gaining monuments daily. The time to
bring a chaos under control is before it is well begun. We're slightly late
as it is. Brutally, there is no other organization on Earth that can slow
these down. Factually there is no other know-how on Earth that can plumb
the problems of Man. So if we don't want all of us to be sitting amongst
the charred embers, we had better get busy.
This is no alarmist statement you know. We are the people who can
confront it. Past civilizations have vanished, you see. The Chaldean,
Babylonian, Egyptian, Chinese, Hind, Greek, Roman, European-they did
vanish. Those little beaten down peasants you see in France were once the
proud Romans. Those small brown men who sell their sisters on the streets
of Cairo were once the mighty Egyptians. And it was when those societies
looked richest that they had already started down. Like this one.
They all failed because they had no know-how about Man. They all dived
under from ignorance. Wisdom, real wisdom, could have salvaged any one of
them. Wisdom can salvage this one. Wisdom held by the many, not one wise
man.
Scientology can smooth the way. It can make intelligent leaders,
workable policies. But Scientology hasn't a chance unless we get groups
going. You and these people can do this.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
If you want men to be slaves, do nothing. Just sit.
If you want this civilization to become charred embers, do nothing.
Just sit.
An empty belly and a dead family aren't funny. Why wait until they're a
fact to do something.
You say, well what can I do. I'm just a little fellow. I'm just one of
billions. That's a lie. You have to hand the most powerful weapon yet
forged on Earth: Scientology. You can talk. You can organize. The unions
broke the back of savage management. All men in one union against ignorance
can break the back of savage "fate."
Listen: At the HGC we can selectively increase profiles or IQ. So can
other auditors. We are making tomorrow's leaders. Right now I am working
with government contacts to do this.
You can back that up. Get processed. Get trained. Get groups going. It
doesn't matter how expert you are.
We've just trained people whose advice you can ask. They're now all
over the country. That's what we did in the 1 8th ACC.
I'm going to need 5,000 auditors for the Army alone. The 18th ACC was
just a springboard to that.
Groups, groups, groups. We can run them now-solvently.
We can make the grade. We can win. How. You don't have to do the whole
job. One man at a time is as fast as anything can be made to travel. Get
one man, one woman in. Handle one. Then you'll get the others-one by one.
I trained the 1 8th ACC to Validate your certificate, or to give you
know-how. To show you how to do it. To help you with your Scientology
plans. All right, that's riches. We did a good job on these people. We hope
from them will spring a great number of fine, enthusiastic, working groups.
So here's the 1 8th ACC.
On one side we've only a world, a universe to win. On the other we've
only tomorrow's wreckage.
Let's go!
L. RON
HUBBARD
P.A.B. No. 122
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 October 1957
THE FIVE LEVELS OF INDOCTRINATION AND
PROCEDURE CCH
The first thing that we should take up is the state of Scientology at
this time, and to tell you that we are on a plateau. We are certainly on a
plateau, and it is a plateau so very much higher than man has ever walked
before that it is well worth saying it is a level that can be maintained.
If people want more results than we can get today from CCH properly used,
there will have to be a better auditor than we can make today.
The idea that "This is it" periodically has occurred in Scientology.
Right now we are justified in saying that we are on a plateau which does
not have to change.
When you can process a catatonic schiz, a five-day-old baby, you've got
it made in the world of homo sapiens. The only further adventure we might
adventure upon would be the processing of the thetan not connected with the
body, and that would be an entire field about which we know practically
nothing. But anybody who is having anything to do with bodies is well
within the reach of Procedure CCH, providing it is used by an auditor who
has been validated through the five levels of indoctrination. CCH used by
an auditor who has not been validated would be the least guaranteed thing I
can think of at the moment. I have already thrown up my hands in a few
expressive horrors when I have seen auditors who have not been through the
five levels fumble around with any Tone 40 process, and it is so grim that
even now, to you, watching it, untrained, trying to do one of these things,
it would not look like auditing.
Back in old Book One days, a fellow could sit down beside someone on a
couch and say "Go back to that engram," and it looked like auditing. It
doesn't look like auditing today. It is the difference of indoctrination
which makes the difference. The person who applies it has been successfully
checked through the five levels of Indoc. It is now the auditor plus the
process. That is one of the reasons why we knew we were on a plateau. There
wasn't something you could tell out of CCH easily to your Aunt Mame's
little girl, to fix up her fear of cats. It is interesting that such
employment does not reach any level that you yourself can consider a good
result. Somebody untrained does not achieve any great result with it, and
is liable to leave his preclear in a badly restimulated condition. We are
dealing with a package of dynamite with Procedure CCH. We have to take into
account the five levels of indoctrination successfully passed, which is
necessary to apply CCH to a preclear.
CCH is a very sloppy title, for Procedure CCH is really C for Control,
D for Duplication, C for Communication, Ct for Control of Thought =
Havingness; and that is the real name of it.
First, we get the person under control, get him into the capability of
duplicating, and then we move him up into communication more or less on a
person level. Now we
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
take the mind. The mind consists of mental image pictures, and if
duplication is addressed to the mind we get communication. The third zone
is the control of the Thetan, which brings us to Control of Thinkingness,
Ct. I will show you more graphically what these three things are:
1. Notice that you are sitting in the chair. Notice that you have
a body sitting in a chair.
2. Get a picture of a cat. Can you? Note that it is a picture.
That is the mind. It's pictures and the apparatus which handles
pictures.
3. Get a picture of a cat again. Answer this question: "What is
looking at the cat?" That is all you ever need to know about a
thetan with CCH.
As we extend out from the thetan we get the physical universe, so
actually there is a fourth thing there which undercuts the body, and that
would be the physical universe. In other words, you are in immediate and
direct contact with everything that you will be expected to study or ever
process in Scientology. Every one of these things that I have mentioned,
the physical universe, body, mind, thetan, may have a clearer appearance to
you, or some other condition connected with it, but there isn't anything
outside of this. We omit the physical universe, because it is pretty hard
to look totally at the physical universe right at this moment. But for sure
you are looking at all the body you have got. As far as this picture is
concerned, it may flop over and have many cross associations, and you could
trace this endlessly as I have. As far as thetans are concerned, the most
you will ever learn about one is your own beingness, or the observation
that something is being moved, made alive, and motivated.
This is the entire target of CCH. There isn't anything else to shoot
at. All of these things intimately, then, relate to the thetan, and we have
Control, Duplication, Communication, Control of Thinkingness, and
Havingness, that relate to a thetan. We could process in any one of these
zones. When you process any part of these four things, you really cater to
some slight degree to the other three, but you can concentrate upon any one
of these things.
CCH has in its concentration levels first the body, then the mind, and
the thetan just happens-nowhere in CCH do we intimately address a thetan.
But we can come close to addressing a thetan by addressing thinkingness.
Here is what CCH does. It makes the person more aware of a body, and he
eventually recognizes to some degree that he can control the body. Next, it
addresses the physical universe, in the locational processes of the next
facet. Actually, it addresses intimately the thetan plus the physical
universe.
How can you as an auditor overcome the obsessive mental changes which
occur? You cannot see what he is thinking. You put his body under control,
then you get him into communication, and then you can also clarify and
control to some degree his thinkingness. At thinkingness we are standing at
a borderline between the mind and the thetan.
By control and duplication we get communication. When we have
communication we can straighten up the fellow's time track and his habitat
in the final process, Then and Now Solids.
Let me be much more positive about this. The make-or-break point of any
case is this: Can he make things more solid or can't he? A person who can
make things a little more solid can also be processed on almost anything
and get along fairly well. I knew there was one point above which cases
process easily with almost any technique you use, and there was a point
below which no process seemed to have anything to do with a person. As soon
as this was isolated we had things made, for we could graduate somebody up
to a toleration of solids.
We can cross this borderline in all cases today.
But how about the fellow that we cannot communicate with at all? He has
another bug that we have to overcome, and that is the bug of obsessive
change. When you tell him to think of a cat, he has to be able to think of
a cat. When cases failed in the past, it was that the preclear never
thought what we had told him to think. He said so, but didn't do it. Here
we have this thing. If we can get him to think the thought "keep it from
going away" we can graduate him up to solids.
There are two things that you do with a person. You control his person
and you make him duplicate and communicate; you control his thinkingness.
So you use the early steps of control of a person, which are "Give me your
hand," Tone 40 8-C, Hand-Space Mimicry and Book Mimicry, over and over,
until you are absolutely sure that the fellow can think when you tell him
to. Then you go into the next stage, which is Tone 40 "Keep it from going
away," Tone 40 "Hold it still," and Tone 40 "Make it a little more solid."
What is the bank doing? He has some attention units which get stuck on
the track that are only being fixed by the bank sticking him, so we do all
these things on the body and then we do practically the same things on the
attention. After that, we have got it made, because we can graduate him to
making something a little more solid. Let's take him aside and let him get
the inside confidential story of the whole thing. Have him take a look at
his mind, and there comes the trickiest step of CCH. It only condenses
almost the entirety of what an auditor had to know that was developed in
three years.
This is the rough process and I don't make any bones about it. You can
either subjectively remedy havingness or you can't. So the way we run CCH
is to graduate a person up to making things objectively (the outside world)
or subjectively (mind) solid, and then have him straighten out the whole
track. All sorts of odd and interesting thoughts occur when we use this
thing Then and Now Solids. Above this we do have a couple more things. They
are super-developed gee-whiz processes, completely unusable on homo
sapiens. However, you start winding up, why, you go over into these
processes. I'll give you some idea of where this goes. You could turn on a
person's mental image pictures the size of that wall in three dimensions,
with total perception, in half an hour's processing. Abilities are not
perishable. The only thing which is perishable is willingness. Processing
is still a matter of choice. A person would never refuse processing or help
if he knew what it was. That which refuses processing is not the person.
After a while, it isn't that he pulls up on you and surrenders. He finally
takes an apathetic look and says, "What you are doing is not bad. I
wouldn't mind being a lot better. "
You give him a surfeit of control, until he finds out it doesn't kill
him. Maybe he can control something now. Now that is the background theory
of CCH. What I want to punch up is that if you wish to handle body
illnesses, they come under the heading of person. If you want to handle
mental actions you would do it with control of attention, and if you wish
to handle a thetan it would be through control of thinkingness.
L. RON
HUBBARD
A BASIC CHART OF PROCESS TYPES
October 29, 1957
Prerequisite understanding to this chart: Definitions of
body, bank and mind. Communication-Upper Indoc course. Text:
Scientology: Fundamentals of Thought.
_____________________________________________________________________
Type No. 1 2 3
____________________________________________________________________
a) Name Starting- Control Duplication
Ending session Processes
_____________________________________________________________________
b) Characteristic 2-way Comm Control by Mimicry by
Action Action
_____________________________________________________________________
c) Purpose To compose pc To place pc's To establish
into and release body and actions communication
him from the under auditor's
auditing session control to invite
control of them
by pc
_____________________________________________________________________
d) Action on Bank To double To better control To go into comm
control of it of it with it on pc
Auditor + determinism not
Preclear bank
determinism
_____________________________________________________________________
e) A Basic Example Is it all right with Sit in that chair Pc
makes motion;
you to start an Thank you Auditor makes
auditing session? same motion.
Auditor makes
motion; pc makes
same motion.
_____________________________________________________________________
f) Stable Datum Agreement Never let the Each command in
pc get out of its own unit of
doing what he time separate
is told from every other
command
_____________________________________________________________________
g) Phenomena Auditing is a Pc is controlled Mis-duplication
knowing and by unknown (only once)
known activity source, which shows up and
must be turned runs out before
into known insistent
sources duplication
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Type No. 4 5 6
_____________________________________________________________________
a) Name Straight-wire Objective Subjective
Processes Processes Processes
(think)
_____________________________________________________________________
b) Characteristic Remembering Spotting Thinkingness
& Forgetting & Finding
_____________________________________________________________________
c) Purpose To recontrol To orient pc in To recover auto
forgetting and present time, maticities of
remembering drop out past and thought and as-is
and relate past improve having- unwanted
to present ness thinkingness
_____________________________________________________________________
d) Action on Bank To as-is locks and To drop out past To mass as-is
engrams and havingness by significance
bring them into substituting
knowingness level present
havingness and to
reorient
_____________________________________________________________________
e) A Basic Example Recall a moment Notice that wall Think a thought
_____________________________________________________________________
f) Stable Datum Specific things, Attention of pc Body control
not generalities must be under comes before
auditor's control control of
thinking
_____________________________________________________________________
g) Phenomena Occlusions turn Old locations Thought has
from generalities (change of space) become
to specifics. Cycle drop out substitute for
aspect of recall in masses. Classes of
time (earlier, late, thought group
etc.) and source
appears
_____________________________________________________________________
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:rd Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[pic]
Issue 57 [1957, ca. late October]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Escape
L. Ron Hubbard
Well, I've been working now for a lot of years to bring Dianetics and
Scientology up to a point of supermagic.
It was easy to get them up to magic. In a world where no results, aside
from accidentals, had been the order of things, it was simple to create
magic. A cloying illness resolved, a fast heal of a broken limb, a recovery
from fixations and obsessions, it was easy to repair these. That was simple
magic.
And time and again I've told you "this is better" and it's been true
and auditing worked better.
But what were we really looking for?
We knew all of us that we were in a sort of trap called physical
universe. And although it was all right to say we'd gotten in ourselves and
that it was each man's fault, it is nevertheless true that it was a trap
complicated by innumerable traps.
It was all right to say that it was "natural" for man to kill deer. But
that wasn't making it any easier on the deer.
It was all right to recover enough data to know that dying wasn't fatal
but still men died and dying often hurts.
By no actual consent of our own we are torn from our friends and
possessions and crushed into new lives. But just because we understood it
made it no less arbitrary, no less painful. Just because we could better
understand the trap made it no less a trap.
I've heard people say, "I don't know what I ever would have done if you
hadn't come along, Ron." A11 right, why should somebody like me have to
come along if all the world is right and the universe an expression of deep
love.
We curse at man-made hells. We spot cause in villainies uncountable.
Yet, think now, what are we doing in a universe in which hells are
possible.
Sure, maybe you even asked to come here. But deep in pain and shock,
shadowed by your own forgetting, why puzzle now if this Universe is a good
place.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
You wouldn't say a lion's cage is a good place for a child. Nor would you
jeer at and accuse a child who unwittingly stumbled into a lion's cage.
What is the cage doing there in the first place for a child to fall into?
Let's be sane. We can rationalize this universe, we can explain
complaints, we can blame the inmates but is it not true that we came
unwitting into it?
What do we really want out of Dianetics and Scientology? What could I
really give you that you want?
Escape.
Is there anything wrong with escape? Is a man mad who seeks to leave a
fire that chars him, a mass that crushes him, a world that laughs at his
dreams and scolds him for his stupidity?
Escape.
Why not escape?
Why not let a few others escape. After all, we're not all only ones. We
can feel and we can cry.
Tell me why Christianity won so well. Wasn't it because of promised
escape?
Tell me why Buddhism won so sweepingly. Because it promised escape.
Well, why not escape. If the great religions of all time became great
on the promise of escape, we must assume that a lot of people want out and
that there's something wrong with in.
This universe is a breaker of bones, a defiler of deeds, a mocker of
gallantry and peace. I can say this with equanimity. I don't have to get
emotional or even personal about it.
A spirit seeks to advance, to improve. Each way is blocked. This
universe knows only how to decay.
Is there a way out?
Yes there is.
We have it in Scientology now. I have found it and charted it. I know
exactly how to open the gate.
For whom. Ah yes, that's the news. We used to say-"if your case is in
good shape" or "if you really want to." Of course you want to. But it
didn't require magic to open the gate. It required a supermagic to let our
friends go free.
For seven years or less you have believed in me. You saw enough to know
two things: (a) that I was sincere and would continue to work on it and (b)
that a progress line existed which improved.
All right. What has been done? The auditing skills have been created
which led an auditor up to this.
What has been done? In the lower steps of CCH we can rescue the people
lowest down, even the unconscious people.
I told the 18th ACC-"I am through researching south. A11 further HGC
researches will consist of going North." I went North faster than I had
thought I would. I have now taught the auditors in Washington and the
Academy instructors how to go all the way north.
All the way.
I know why you're here and the fast way out. I have taught auditing
skill to Academy students and the 18th ACC. I've taught all the way north
to the HGC auditors.
What is the way out? With no excuses, no byroads. Straight out. A11 the
way.
Without belief or faith or "right conduct" you can go all the way.
P.A.B. No. 123
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 November 1957
THE REALITY SCALE
Prepared from L. Ron Hubbard's second lecture to the 17th American A.C.C.
in Washington, D.C. on 26 February 1957
I want to talk to you about the Reality Scale and the whys and
wherefores of Hand Contact Mimicry.
For a very, very long time we had the ARC Triangle. We had Affinity and
Reality, and afterwards had Communication. A lot of people thought that
Reality was the most important corner, but evidently Communication was the
most important corner because by processing with communication we could do
some astonishing things.
Two-way communication: Pc has a problem, you make him talk about it. If
you don't go to a point where you excessively reduce his havingness, he
will have a tendency to desensitize on the problem. This is one of the
oldest therapies known: you go and tell a friend you're in trouble and you
feel better. However, in Scientology this thing took on a new burnished
radiator cap. Nobody knew before what it was in communication that made
things communicate and made it therapeutic and so forth. We isolated the
various parts of communication, and we isolated, much more importantly, the
Bill-Joe interchange of two-way communication.
Now what can you do with communication? Well, a lot of people go around
and they don't have any reality on Scientology because nothing has ever
happened to them. Their idea of what it takes to get reality on something
is-they can't examine something-the reality must have a mass. It must have
an impact, a very heavy effect.
Now remember that you can reduce havingness by communication, but
within that framework let us take somebody who has no reality on anything
happening to him. Of course he has no reality on anything happening to him!
He's in a high games condition, which means "no effect on self, total
effect on others." So you're trying to plow through his consistent
postulation that there must be no effect upon himself of any kind
whatsoever, and if you get through that barrier, then he says, "I have some
reality on this subject." If you destroy his "no effect on self," then
he'll believe you. This is totally idiotic, but that's the way it works.
Now we get this fellow. He has no reality on Scientology, but he's got
a toothache. We have him say "Hello" to the tooth, have the tooth say
"Okay" to that hello. Have the tooth say "Hello" to him, and have him say
"Okay" to the tooth. Which makes a two-way comm. Have him do this a few
times and the toothache goes-poof!
We take a heavier mass than this, like an arthritic leg. Arthritis is a
ridge illness, and therefore you go up or down from the ridge and you've
got it made. We can make
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
him get rid of his arthritis even by simply putting him in apathy about it.
You could hammer and pound him until he was sitting there very, very
quietly and unable to wiggle in any way, and he wouldn't feel his
arthritis. Well, he wouldn't feel anything else either.
You take slight little somatics, little conditions, or fears of things,
and run two-way communication on them, and you get some fabulous results.
Let's say somebody's afraid of a stove. Have him say "Hello" to the stove,
and have the stove say "Okay." Have the stove say "Hello" to him, and have
him say "Okay" to the stove. After a while he won't have any fear of
touching the stove. Oddly enough, he will receive less effect from the
stove even if hot. That is quite important. It tells you that the body does
not naturally lend itself to injury, but injury takes place only in a
highly aberrated condition. You should be able to take a body and throw it
up against the wall hard enough to crush its skull in, have it drop to the
floor, stand and walk away-providing you aren't holding in suspension the
image picture of its hitting the wall and being injured.
Now I'll give you an example of that. I want you to look at this
ashtray. Now I'm going to raise this ashtray and then I'm going to put it
back on the desk. Is that action now in existence? Where? You've got some
pictures of it, haven't you? This universe doesn't make things survive.
Only you make things survive. And this is: you are holding the engram in
restimulation, which permits it to have an effect. You're so doggone hipped
on the subject of survival that it's just marvelous to behold. That is
because a thetan cannot do anything else but survive. Naturally, anything
that's surviving he can go into good communication with.
People like to look at the Pyramids. Why? Well, the person is surviving
and evidently the Pyramids are surviving, so there is a medium of
interchange. A thetan looking at a solid is much happier if the solid is
surviving. If this solid has duration, then the thetan can have a means of
communication between himself and the solid, in spite of the fact that the
thetan can't be solid.
So people really don't have much of a tendency to look at and study and
examine very closely things of very finite survival periods-things that die
right now, things that vanish right now. But they could say, "Look. It
became nothing just like I am, and therefore I have another communication
point with it."
Sudden disappearances stay hung in the bank. That is different than
something with a finite life. Things with a very finite small life are not
very important, but solids which suddenly disappear are quite curious to a
thetan. Hence we like magic shows and such things.
Now let's add these factors up. This nothingness tends to survive only
when arrived at under that circumstance: there was something there, now
there's nothing there. So that I give you a motion of MEST and you make a
picture survive, but it's not any longer moving in MEST. MEST has very,
very finite duration, so we have to rig up all sorts of things so it'll
survive, so it'll continue.
And people like to have things continue, but after a while, when things
have not continued with them for a long time, then they get onto another
kick: they only hold on to. It was something and suddenly became nothing,
so therefore they hold on to losses. And the whole track, at length,
becomes a concatenation of losses.
Communication, oddly enough, has always attended one of these losses.
It is not true, basically, that communication as-ises or destroys or knocks
out any mass. But communication has always accompanied the vanishment or
destruction of mass, so the preclear gets these two things involved with
each other, and then he goes through an
automaticity of having mass vanish when he communicates. You must get this
clearly. The only thing that as-ises mass is as-ising mass. But
communication always accompanied this, and after a while the preclear gets
one very solid conviction: that if he talks to something, something
disappears. It's not true.
Sound is another aspect of communication which is fabulous. You
realize, the first sounds were evidently those which accompanied explosions
or destructive actions. Electronic particles traveling through space will
carry with them sound, even in the absence of air. Sound does not go
through a vacuum. Unless you have some carrier for sound it doesn't reach
you at all. Therefore, a sudden electronic explosion was usually the first
acquaintance with sound.
It's true that he had to put sound there in order for sound to be
there, but he has a number of experiences whereby something blew up (and
therefore disappeared) and sound took place. So you'll find any preclear
willing to swear that sound is disintegrative. Not all communications
contain sound, but sound is a disintegrating factor. So communications with
sound combine the destructive aspect of sound (of which the preclear's
convinced) with the as-ising aspect of communication itself (of which he is
again convinced), and between the two of them you get an awful loss of
havingness if you're not very careful. Communication, verbal, tends to as-
is (or knock out) the masses in the bank of the preclear. So we just start
right in auditing him. Now if he has a present time problem which is
terribly pressing, well, you could do something with this if you didn't
talk about the problem too much. If you ran problems of comparable
magnitude to it, you'd probably add to his havingness.
The way we got away with it with running engrams was quite peculiar.
The person was having to put the engram there to some degree in order to
run the thing. This made him capable of confronting the incident and so
brought a discharge of the fixation he had for that incident, and yet did
not rob him particularly of the incident, the mass. We were running the
significance out of the mass. It's interesting. But where a person couldn't
afford to lose anything, he couldn't even afford to lose significance, and
so we couldn't run an engram. Well communication goes much further south,
and we have a condition here whereby we see an individual drop through the
bottom just by too much yackety-yak with the auditor on the subject of his
particular phobia or bank.
This tells you, by the way, at once, one of the most condemning facts
of psychoanalysis. I started digging up all the factors utilized in
psychoanalysis, and I discovered this fantastic thing, that I couldn't find
any factor present which was therapeutic. Beyond the fact of telling a
friend your troubles, there is no therapeutic rationale behind it, because
you get the as-ising of mass. Where Freud achieved any result-let's be
generous, let's say he did achieve some results-let's find out how long it
took him to achieve them. An old lady came in from Bavaria and talked to
him for a few minutes and just ranted on and on, and all of a sudden said
that she felt better and got up and left. Freud, as far as I can discover,
never had any results from cases who went longer than a very few hours in
psychoanalysis. In other words, Freud's results were the magic results. A
person came in and said, "This is wrong, and that is wrong" and felt better
and went away. If you let the patient talk too long, he is going to go out
the bottom, and that I guarantee. They talk themselves down the tone scale.
Just take a preclear who's in bad shape and have him tell you about his
problem or something, and he drops on out the bottom doing this. You can
watch him go right on downscale. It's possibly an experiment you ought to
make to really understand this. Just make somebody tell you his trouble
over and over and over. And you will understand at once why Freud got
spectacular results in a very few hours, and why nobody's gotten any
results since in a great many hours.
Brainwashing-that's the biggest joke of this half-century, brainwashing. A
fellow will talk out enough havingness to throw himself into an introverted
condition. You've got his mind concentrated upon his bank, and now you make
him talk, and out goes the havingness. And he goes right on downscale with
great speed.
Please understand this as auditors. Know what you are looking at.
You're just looking at the vanishment of mass. And a thetan believes that
to be recognized and to be able to prove things and to be able to
demonstrate to the world that he is there and that things have happened to
him, he has to have mass.
And so we get the third corner here. Affinity is actually the
consideration of distance. Communication is an interchange of ideas. But
Reality is what it is about and what it is proved by.
Looking all around now, I would say that the weakest comer of the ARC
Triangle is "A"-Affinity. This has the least monitoring effect upon a
preclear but is the most strongly demonstrated. It is NOT a good entering
point. C and R run out A, or re-establish A. And A is very easily
monitored. C is less easily monitored by A and R. And you pull R and C
apart and you've got nothing. You have no reaction. You have no universe.
So C and R-Communication and Reality-are very, very closely associated.
And Reality has a scale. And because C is closely associated with
Reality, Reality then again (after '54) started to take a certain
prominence. Reality is a scale in its own right, and that scale begins at
the top with a Postulate. Which postulate, continuing, can make a
Consideration. You can acquire considerations by other means than
postulating; all you have to do is agree with an existing postulate or an
existing consideration, and you too can have the consideration-you didn't
have to postulate it in the first place.
It's Postulates; Continuing Postulates/Considerations-and the next step
down from there is Agreement. And here we see this vast panorama of
"everybody agreed with everything," which knits them all together in the
same time continuum. It's a postulate, a consideration, and then a couple
of guys or more have this same consideration and, having it, then we have a
specialized consideration-it is shared in common- and this we call an
"agreement": a shared consideration.
Having accomplished that, we get Solids. We get proof of the
consideration, and that takes place in spaces and solids. But Reality,
actually, is the solid aspect, whereas A is more closely associated to the
spatial aspect. Because they wish to prove it and convince one another,
they get something that can enter the phenomenon of sight, and the other
phenomena of touch, smell. Here we have spatial relationships established
and confirmed by mass.
What happens to somebody who is no longer convinced even though the
mass is there? Where would he go? The one just below that is "a Line." The
mass called a "terminal" tends to vanish, and the line between a couple of
terminals tends to take place and appear.
And then, below that we get "No Terminal, No Line." And don't mistake
that for a postulate condition. You get this person selling you a beautiful
bill of goods-because there's nothing there-that he's in a postulating
condition. He has become the total effect of his postulates, total effect
of his considerations, total effect of all masses, total effect of all
lines-and now he can't even see lines and masses. Such a person is liable
to tell you, "My thoughts affect things thousands of miles away." It's true
that an OT can affect something thousands of miles away. But he isn't an
OT, he's got lumbago. OTs don't have lumbago.
You start to process him, and what happens? The line shows up. You process
him longer, and shadowy things show up at either end of the line, and the
line starts to disappear and the terminals start to appear. And then you
process him a little bit longer and boy, do those terminals become solid!
And after he is able to make a terminal have an effect upon him so that his
confidence in this is unassailable, he can only then enter into the world
of agreement. Only then are his agreements binding and valid. Only then can
he make them or break them. Up to that time he is obsessed by any agreement
of the past track. He is the victim of all the upper scale at any point he
is on the scale. And that is true of the Tone Scale, or is true of any
other scale.
A person, you know, does not move up level by level of the Tone Scale.
He broadens up the Tone Scale. He becomes the whole scale. There is a big
difference. A person who is in good shape can postulate, consider (which is
to say, continue a postulate), agree, make masses, or make masses
disappear, or make lines between masses appear or disappear. At any point
you find him on the scale, he can do the points from there down, and you
win for him the ability again, you make him willing to have the ability
again, to do the points from there up.
The Reality Scale is very important. It tells you that communication
down below "No Line, No Terminal" is almost totally first dynamic
communication. The person actually gets convinced that if he thinks it, it
arrives in Chesapeake Bay, you see. He gets a telepathic idea of his own
thinkingness. Naturally, all terminals there are are all there too, and all
lines are there too.
Now what's the state of a case at any one of these levels? Well, it
matches up right there alongside the old Tone Scale-the Sub-Zero Scale and
the original Tone Scale in their continuum, you see, from Serenity clear on
down to Wait-Wait, not even Unconscious. This level is paralleled by this
Reality Scale. And there's also a series of communications which go down
along the whole line.
Let's take our preclear at the point where he doesn't know you're there
and doesn't know the room is there and doesn't know he's there and doesn't
know that he has a body sitting there, and he just DOESN'T KNOW, but he's
performing on some social machinery. Where is the entrance point? The first
thing that you can do with this preclear, we believe now, that would recall
to him an ability would be the recognition of the existence of a line.
Hence, your hand against the preclear's hand-that's a line. By establishing
a line he can come into cognizance of the terminal. Your arm is liable to
get awful real to him. Unless his hand and arm get real, you're not going
to find anything else gettin' real.
It doesn't mean that a person responds to Hand Contact Mimicry only
when he is in terrible shape. Anybody ought to respond to Hand Contact
Mimicry. You do Hand Contact Mimicry with most anybody who hasn't had his
hands cleared, and you're going to get some results, that's for sure.
A solid communication line is very fine, but what if you break it?
Well, you can break it so slowly that the person doesn't notice that the
hands have ceased to be lines and have become terminals. There is a little
space, an inch, between your hand and the preclear's hand, and he hasn't
noticed to any great degree. Affinity starts to take place, because we've
got some distance, but the affinity, you'll find, will be first worst and
then best with the terminals close together. Hand Contact Mimicry is the
point back to which I would drop at any time I became very suspicious that
I was auditing over the head of the preclear. I've gone way over his head,
therefore I've given him a loss, so therefore momentarily I would consider
he was in bad communication with me-and his reality on me possibly could be
graduated up to a line now.
Reality contains a level known as Havingness. In this little band of Mass
there is a scale inside the Reality Scale-the Havingness Scale. And that
has to do with the consideration of mass. It's what you do with mass. That
scale is quite an interesting scale in itself.
It starts out, probably, with Waste, or maybe with Substitute. It is so
messed up at that point of Mass that it is very hard to get preclears to
come up uniformly as to which one is the lowest one. It possibly goes this
way: Waste, Substitute, Waste, Substitute, Waste, Substitute until you get
up to the next one. Just as you find a great many false emotions jammed in
at the level of Apathy on the Affinity Scale-and I'm sure you've seen this-
so do you find this Waste and Substitute kicking around and kicking at each
other on the Havingness Scale.
"Have" is the next one up. If a person can't have something, you can
have him waste it enough, and you'll find out after a while he'll say,
"Well, I can have it."
What is the next important way-stop on this Havingness Scale? The next
one up the line is Confront-and that's awfully important. A person who
can't confront something is liable to "have to have it" as his highest
expression. And if he can't confront it and can't have it, it's a cinch
that he will waste it. And if he can't even waste it, it's a cinch he'll
substitute. And we get Freudian and other sublimations and all of that.
Sublimation-they never knew what they talked about. This is not sublimation
I'm talking about. This thing called "sublimation" is substitution. I mean,
why get sublimative about something that is easily done? If a person hates
women, it is a cinch that he probably hates "a woman" and substitutes for
her all other women. But this is not a clean statement of it for this
reason: you get identification, which is substitution, of one woman for
another-and then you get disassociation; he can't even identify any more.
Hence your lower Waste level. He's wasting now a substitute.
You'll find a preclear after a while will, on some subject,
disassociate. He says that ashtray isn't that ashtray. You get the idea? He
says, "This ashtray is a camel." Well, now, that's disassociation. He can't
recognize a thing for itself, but it must be something else, so we must
understand that as an action of Mass to lie on the lower end of the
Havingness Scale. It's just as simple as that.
Now, as we go upscale further from Confront, we run into something
which is pretty doggone high, and that's Contribute To. People, if they are
prevented from contributing to something, go downscale. Now if contributing
to something is getting rid of mass, it's somebody else is going to have
something besides yourself-and you take a person who is sitting down at
Have, or below, and you make him contribute a little bit, and he gets to be
a sick puppy. He'll just go on down into Waste and Substitute. It is a very
high manifestation. It holds true all up and down this Havingness Scale
that if an individual is prevented from helping, from contributing in some
fashion, he gets very ill. Not in auditing, but in real life.
Let's go on even higher than this, and what do we get to? We get to
Create.
So the Havingness Scale, which fits at that innocuous word "Mass" on
the Reality Scale, consists of the doingnesses with regard to Mass. And
they begin at the top with Create, go down at once into Contribute To, into
Confront, into Have, into Waste, and on down into Substitute. That all
belongs at Mass; these are all the things you do with mass.
Now probably there are a bunch of doingnesses with Agreement. Ask an
attorney. There are probably doingnesses with Postulates, and doingnesses
with Lines-ask the telephone company. And these things probably, too, form
up other scales quite similar to the Havingness Scale. And when you had all
these doingness scales paralleling the
Reality Scale, you would have this difference: the thing, which is the
Reality Scale and its aspects, which would be the doingness scale
(considerations with regard to these things in actuality would be over here
on this other scale). We mustn't confuse the thing with what you do with
it. You can have without doing. It's pretty hard, however, to do without
having, which is why Reality is so important in running on the preclear.
Now I hope you understand these two scales, and I hope you will take
them around with you on auditing and look them over a little bit and
understand what they are all about. Because we're still talking about ARC,
and as a matter of fact we'll be talking a lot about Survive, which is OLD
HAT, but it has certainly been polished up, and it certainly has a nice new
band, and it certainly fits on a lot more heads than it used to.
L. RON
HUBBARD
________________________________
HCO B 2 NOVEMBER 1957
[HCO B 2 November 1957, Intensive Processes for Use in Operation Clear and
Operation Staff Clear, was a confidential staff only issue. It was revised
on 22 February 1975 as HCO B 2 November 1957RA, An Objective Rundown, which
is in Volume VIII, page 393.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 NOVEMBER 1957
PROJECT CLEAR CHECK SHEET
___________________ __________________ _______________________
NAME OF PRECLEAR NAME OF AUDITOR DATE PROJECT STARTED
HOURS RUN PER SESSION ____________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
USE A CHECK IF PROCESS IS RUN, USE AN X IF PROCESS IS CONSIDERED FLAT.
CCH 0 CCH 1 CCH 2
CCH 3 CCH 4
Tr. 10
MOCK UP AN UNWANTED FUTURE TRIO
ARC STRAIGHTWIRE
RECALL AN UNWANTED OBJECT
RECALL A MOMENT OF LOSS
RECALL AN EXPECTED COMMUNICATION
RECALL A COMPLETED COMMUNICATION
PSYCHOSOMATIC ADDRESS. Condition _________________________________
RECALL AN UNWANTED (AFFECTED BODY PART)
RECALL A LOST (AFFECTED BODY PART)
SHORT SPOTTING
MOCK UP A CONDITION WORSE THAN (AFFECTED BODY PART)
VALENCE SPLITTERS:
Person located by E-Meter Split________
Person located by E-Meter Split________
Person located by E-Meter Split________
RISING SCALE PROCESSING
BODY ANCHOR POINTS
Note: This sheet does not replace regular report sheets in HGC but must be
included.
INFORMATION SHEET ON PROJECT CLEAR
It is expected that the processes scheduled for project clear be run
more or less in the following order.
CCH 0 at the beginning of each session. If pc falters on one or another
point, stress that point until cleared up.
CCH 1, 2, 3 and 4 to be run as follows. If 1 produces no reaction go to 2,
if 2 produces no reaction go to 3, if 3 produces an action flatten it a bit
and go to 4. If 4 produces an action or no action either flatten or go
quickly to 1, etc, until these steps have each one been unflattened and
flattened again.
Tr. 10 is used liberally as a bridge process and to start and end sessions.
If it develops a somatic, auditor should treat it as a process and flatten
it and then go right on using it. Main use is at session end.
RECALL SOMETHING REALLY REAL TO YOU is run to test recalls. It is a very
effective process in itself. In fact all the three questions of ARC
Straight Wire can be run if pc is found pretty bad on this. But it is
intended to be used simply to groove the pc and to keep a cataclysm from
occurring if the pc can't run recall processes. If he has a hard time,
flatten ARC Straight Wire. Otherwise, run for minutes only.
RECALL AN UNWANTED OBJECT and RECALL A MOMENT OF LOSS are a pair. If one is
used, then the other must be used exactly the same length of time in the
same session. They are alternate processes where one is run a half hour
then the other is run a half hour. These two are the chief processes of
Operation Clear so give them lots of concentration and time.
TRIO is run as a step between recall processes. If one session is run on
recall processes the next is run on TRIO. There is Control Trio and Trio.
It is up to the auditor which is used. But use all three commands of either
in any proportion that seems right to the auditor. Run lots of Trio even
though both recall processes are havingness processes.
RECALL AN EXPECTED COMMUNICATION and RECALL A COMPLETED COMMUNICATION are
interesting processes. Communication as-ises havingness. Thus this is a
reverse process which, by dropping the pc's level of concentration on past
persons and activities thus gives him the havingness of those areas of the
track. These processes may or may not be vital to Project Clear as they are
released ahead of long experiment and use.
RISING SCALE PROCESSING is run when the pc can change ideas. He must be up
to lots of cognitions before this is run. It is run from the Chart of
Attitudes as given in Creation of Human Ability.
ADJUSTING ANCHOR POINTS is done almost at project end. This is a delicate
auditing job and additional material will be released upon it.
SHORT SPOTTING and VALENCE SPLITTING are fitted in at the auditor's
discretion. SHORT spotting is done by indicating objects close up to pc and
making him repeatedly notice his psychosomatic area. Valence splitting may
not even be necessary if the above auditing steps are well done. Also, it
may be that psychosomatic difficulties will not need further attention than
earlier processes on this sheet.
PROBLEMS OF COMPARABLE MAGNITUDE are here done with MOCK UP SOMETHING WORSE
THAN PSYCHOSOMATIC CONDITION. UNWANTED FUTURES may also be fitted in
anywhere.
L. RON
HUBBARD
[pic]
Issue 58 [1957, ca. early November]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
We Are the Free People
L. Ron Hubbard
We are the Free People. We have grown up-grown up to Freedom, not
senility.
We are the Free People. The Scientologist has left behind the claws and
barriers of miscontrol.
We are the Free People. Grown from out the mud and jungle rot of fear,
our unchained minds can reach afar and grasp the idea of ultimate Freedom.
We are the Free People in whom the whims of "I'm supposed to" have no
rule, on whom the scientist can blunt his weighty arguments to prove we are
not Free.
Be glad, they said before we came, that you are mad, insane, for there
is genius, so they said. You cannot change. Our brand on you is fixed. Your
brain is all you are and fixed like clockwork in a robot head. So think,
they said, as we have said, to think, for thought is our own chain and your
ideas nil.
Die, they said, and live no more and become dispossessed so we can own.
Fall down, they said, and worship clay or maybe space, but of course wrath.
And sing lugubrious songs to fear or maybe international cults that
specialize in slaves.
Believe, they said, that Man is just a shiny thing well meant to die
beneath the pounding of their bombs-the mightiest God they knew.
The flesh, they said, is All and you are but a decay of yourself.
And so they barriered All men.
The witch and the pot; the test tube and the scope; the cell and the
club; the textbook and the lies-Control! Control them or we die! Beat them
or they win! Starve them or we shrink. We are afraid, afraid, afraid!-they
said in that old age we killed.
Freedom becks and we now laughing at their lies, went free.
Scientology-The Road Sign Out.
We are the Free People. We LIVE! We're Free !
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
P.A.B. No. 124
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 November 1957
COMMUNICATION AND IS-NESS
A man is as well off as he can consider himself dangerous to his
environment.
I will tell you a little short anecdote, which is quite amusing. Well,
sometime early in 1945 I flunked my overseas examination. Well, I crawled
around and felt sorry for myself, and the fact of it was that the Judo
instructor there at the hospital brought up the idea that there was a
shortage of people in the war-there was. So he kept up my training for me.
I think it was July 25th that I went down to Hollywood and three sailors
with Petty Officers' ratings accosted me on the street. They were drunk.
They were out to kill officers. And the three of them tied into me. An
unbelievable thing happened. One of them turned me around facing him while
the second one took a heavy beer bottle to bring it down on my skull. I
took the fellow who brought the beer bottle down, threw him over my head
into this fellow, who went down and hit the side of a bumper. The beer
bottle hit the pavement, broke the end off, and the other fellow reared up
where he had been sitting on the running board of a car, and I put it in
his face. That's what you are trained to do.
Overnight, the wound in my side healed-overnight. They wouldn't let me
out at all, but I could get extended leave from the hospital. I went down
to Hollywood and messed around at the studios. In the middle of all that I
managed to complete all the researches which I'd stacked up and which had
been interrupted by the war.
Steam. . . where had it come from? You get your teeth shoved in this
way and that, and you develop a tremendous amount of inflow. And then one
day you just outflow! The Chief Petty Officer in charge of the Shore Patrol
had been sitting at his desk, telling me, "Under no circumstances should
you have taken any action. You were trifling with your life." Telling me
what a good boy I ought to be. And then through the door he saw the Shore
Patrol bring these people in. Of course, they were all saturated with
blood, and they were all messed up. And he just shut up right then!
He was running the usual social dramatization-"You must protect
yourself." The society teaches you to hold in. All you have to do to
somebody is to prevent him from outflowing to make him ill. And someday he
decides to outflow. Not only the social world but the world of yourself can
act to cause you to prevent outflow. Outflow is prevented by regret, it is
prevented by all sorts of things. If one has something terrifically
valuable he protects it-which is what? Prevent an inflow! Well, when you
say prevent an inflow you might as well say prevent an outflow. If you hold
flows from coming in toward you you might as well flow them in, because
sooner or later that dike that you put up is going to burst. So you get
these confounded actions in this universe composing a picture of tremendous
inflow, not balanced at all by outflow.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
What does this all add up to? Any time that you protect and defend, you are
aiding and abetting all the structures which make up this universe. The
child who is taught to defend himself against these big, vicious
automobiles some day turns out to be one of the lousiest drivers you ever
saw, because he is taught to defend and protect. All you have to assume is
that safety is desirable to have all of the ills of Pandora's box swarm
around your head.
Just what boxing glove can hit a thetan I wouldn't know. A thetan has
to mock himself up to be reachable. You are dealing with the idea of what a
person is supposed to feel as a result of, when it comes to inflows. And
that's just an idea. If a person over-defends himself through some
exaggerated idea of pain, he will suffer the full consequences of that over-
defense, just to the degree that anybody else over-defends himself to that
degree.
So the reason for the defense or the reason for safety is variable, but
the consequences of it aren't. As long as you deal with masses, and
agreements and ideas directly concerning masses, you are all right. But
when you go back into an opinion of what it ought to be as far as the
preclear is concerned, you are of course immediately in trouble. Any
auditor who is having a rough time with preclears, not snapping them out of
the hop immediately, is paying attention to this factor, which is a
variable, which is opinion. Figure-figure, ideas, ideas, ideas.
Suppose we had no cops in the society but there was the idea around
that there were cops. We would get some of the nuttiest ideas you have ever
heard of! We would have a set of ideas about cops, different for each
person in the entire community. Why? Because there is no way to experience
cops. Cops are an idea which one cannot get into communication with;
therefore we get this great oddity-abundance and scarcity. Only it isn't
actually the possession of quantity; it is only apparently quantitative. It
is having something to go into communication with.
I'm very sure that the whole world of disease is built entirely on this
mechanism. I seriously doubt the existence of any given germ-I seriously
doubt it. It is very embarrassing to men in sailing ships and so on, very
embarrassing to these fellows, to have venereal diseases happen when they
have had no contact with women at all. And I have seen that often enough in
young boys that were as pure as the driven lily to understand completely
that we didn't have here a germ at work. We had a series of ideas at work.
Fascinating subject in view of the fact that it has ruined as many lives
down the decades and centuries as it has. When you socially enter a great
many prohibitions against communication on the second dynamic, you will get
all sorts of interesting ideas.
Aberration is caused by cut communication with the mass, and is
remedied by re-established communication with the mass. Look what they are
doing with the A-bomb. This is one of the silliest things you ever saw in
your life. They make everything about it confidential, secret, and nobody
must be let in on it.
And there is possibly no more illness to radiation than that.
The formula for creating an illness is to establish a terminal, get
everybody convinced that this terminal is there, and refuse to let them
communicate with it.
Now one of the dangerous things to do with Scientology would be to put
it under the counter. In the first place it isn't a terminal. A terminal,
however, must be maintained, and access to that terminal must be preserved.
And it mustn't be put on confidential, any part of it. Why? Because it's
already dynamite. We do anything with it that can be done with anything.
Let's not cut a line to it and let's not put it beyond reach. There would
be a certain fatality in doing that. And yet every group that has
ever learned a series of great truths has inevitably gone into secret
priesthoods concerning them, which was of course a destructive action.
It isn't jumping into ten thousand volts of current that electrocutes a
man. It's having so many times in the past disconnected from electricity
when confronted with it. Every time you disconnect you to that degree lower
your own tolerance.
Obviously the electricity flying through these poles is more real to
the individual being the line than the actual terminal of the pole. Why is
it more real to him and his body? Because it has the greatest effect on him
and his body. He can touch the pole, but he can't touch the juice. That
tells you there must be some terrific reality about the dangerousness of
this juice, and the pole is either in apathy or non-existent. Therefore you
can only teach one thing to a preclear, horribly enough, and that is-"You
can communicate with it." The communication with a mass is the only thing
we can do for him, but we have to have a mass.
We can get him to conceive of an is-ness, and we can get him to
communicate with it, and by this he will change his mind concerning its
existence. He will change his mind concerning its conditions, but most
particularly and more important to you, he will change his mind with regard
to its abundance or scarcity, and therefore its importance. It is the
scarcity or abundance of things which denotes their value or importance. A
man who has lived too long without women will consider women dangerous.
So scarcities and abundances do declare the final state of one's
reactions to anything. When something becomes very scarce it is because one
has cut communication, and that action of cutting communication is the same
action of defending or protecting self. Now as I say, you can break out of
this. You can have this tremendous resurgence. You can outflow. You can
act. And that's all there is behind one of these resurgences, by the way,
there are no other factors. Or you, as an auditor, can bring him gently and
quietly up on a gradient scale until he can again communicate with the
objects in his environment, and he again will experience the same thing he
experienced when he did this tremendous outflow. We are reaching towards
the same goals but we're saying that by communication we establish the is-
ness of existence, and by doing that, why, we make people well.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH TAPE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
26 November 1957
5711C26 LECTURE Lecture to J. Fudge and Staff
5711C26 LECTURE Lecture to Staff (cont.)
P.A.B. No. 125
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 December 1957
THE PARTS OF MAN
I am going to go over with you the parts of man. The first thing we're
going to take up is exteriorization, as the most important part of man.
It's the causation. That's the thetan. Now, the fact that you can't weigh
one is because this is the author of weighing. There is, however, a way of
experiencing this. It is a personal attitude, it is a personal view. An
individual can exteriorize and experience this phenomenon. It is very easy
to experience being a thetan, but it's not easy to experience seeing one.
So therefore people tend quite markedly to become Only Ones. Here is a
phenomenon which a person can experience himself but cannot observe in
others. There are many ways to experience the idea of somebody else
exteriorizing.
Exteriorization is the phenomenon of being in a position of space
dependent on only one's consideration, able to view from that space, bodies
and the room, as it is. That is exteriorization. Well, people who have
difficulty controlling the body from close up, I can assure you, won't get
out of their heads, because they can't control anything at a distance. If
you can't control a body from a distance you will find yourself very, very
reluctant to get out of your head. It is as simple as that. Any phenomenon
which occurs beyond the point of willingness to be out of the head or
control the body from a distance is regulated by the scarcity and abundance
of bodies and universes. And if you can't see your body, then there is a
scarcity of them. If you can't see the universe, there is a scarcity of
that. That's all there is to that.
Now, here is exteriorization: Keep your head from going away. "Take
your hands and hold on to your head and keep it from going away." I don't
know how many hours it would take with some preclears. Probably a Black 5
would have to sweat along at this for fifteen or twenty hours before he was
really there, but he would get there on that one technique. That is quite
amazing, isn't it? There are probably about five thousand other techniques.
This is the only shotgun one that I know, the one that doesn't ever fail.
It is only contingent upon one thing-being able to take hold of your head.
That is a necessary prerequisite to that technique.
All right. Now let's take the next fact about this, and we find that
vision depends upon scarcity and abundance. The ability to exteriorize
depends on the willingness to exteriorize, but the willingness to
experience is totally monitored by the amount of things available to
experience. A thetan gets quantitatively minded.
What good is a human being? The fact is, there are too many of them to
be seen. Now, how about too few? Well, on a frontier, the fewness of people
is one of the fabulous things. Man dramatizes. When he gets into an area of
too few people, he then kills the people who exist. And when he gets into
an area where there are too many
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
people, he then overlooks the people who exist. Somewhere in between this,
you will have a progressive society. And such a society was the United
States-anywhere between twenty-five and a hundred million people the United
States was in there pitching. But now that it has begun to exceed that,
people have started to disappear. They aren't. That sounds to you like a
cynical statement. If we were to have an atomic war, and cut the population
down to fifty million, you'd get another view. It is simply a statement of
scarcity and abundance.
All right. We take somebody and we can get him out of his head, but
would he just go out of his head without being gotten out of his head?
Well, yes. Scarcity and abundance will actually kick him out of his head.
Scarcity and abundance of what? Let's say that the preclear's idea of the
scarcity or abundance of rooms depends then upon his willingness to view
them. You have to put him into direct contact with the is-ness of rooms.
Now let's go a little bit further than that and look at the body. If he has
too few bodies he is certainly going to be unwilling to get out of the body
he is in. And if he has too many right where he is, he'll be trapped there
too. He won't know where he is. So remedying his havingness on the subject
of his own body is very necessary to an accurate and stable
exteriorization.
So much for exteriorization. Let's go off now into the second part,
which is the mind. By mind today we mean that structure of mental image
pictures and machinery on which the preclear is depending for his opinions
and ideas. The structure of the mind is totally composed of mental image
pictures. I'm afraid the mind doesn't produce any thoughts. The mind may be
considered to have certain phonograph records. The phonograph record, as
you know, doesn't play unless you put a needle on the platter. Well, the
thetan is the needle on the platter, and unless the record is played
directly it doesn't activate it. Any livingness, even a thetan
exteriorized, tends to utilize some sort of mental image pictures. But when
he reads all of the records in the mind as the absolute truth and fact and
conviction, when he is obeying concatenations of "I am supposed to," we
have behavior patterns; we have mental reactions; we have all of these
various things that were never studied, by the way, in psychology. I don't
know where a psychologist lives, but it's certainly not in this universe.
Now the exact workings of this mechanism depend on association and
differentiation, or identification and differentiation. Now when that part
of the mind which we call a reactive mind begins to identify everything
with everything in order to get certain pattern responses, and is able to
exert its influence upon a person far better than the thetan himself can,
we say that this person is suffering from reactive conduct. A=A=A=A.
Now Association-Differentiation are the two principles of the mind. It
is supposed to tell the difference between two or more things, and it is
supposed to tell the similarity between two or more things. Now, a mind in
good shape doesn't identify. What causes association to become
identification? Lack of objects. Lack of incidents. Lack of experience.
When you have too few things happen to you, you're liable to have all sorts
of things happen to you. In other words, if you are busy and there are lots
of incidents, there is a high probability that you will not suffer the
consequences thereof. But if you are not busy and you are idle, then you
are liable to long for those times when you were very busy. And if you are
ever worried about a mental image picture, it's because you haven't enough
to worry about.
Where all drama is tailor-made for you, you are in grave jeopardy. In a
TV screen world you are apt to be in trouble, because the TV is only a
pattern of lights and shadows which is a restimulative mechanism to shuffle
your bank around, and give you again some segment of that which you have
already experienced. It's a funny thing that people will not read about
certain periods. If you are talking to somebody who is very upset on the
subject of past lives, you should realize that he was probably just
executed up at Sing Sing in 1932 or 1933, and he just can't stand the idea.
It is only people who are borderline insanity cases who got up and screamed
about past lives. This I have kept a very careful tally on. They were
people who were terrified; people who were incapable ever of holding their
own on the subject. They couldn't have talked about it very long before a
past life would have snapped in and snapped their heads off. Those
incidents which are most scarce tend to stick hardest.
Let's look at this thing called the mind, and let's find that the mind
is a mechanism for overcoming the lack of incidents, lack of experience in
present time by storing pictures and knowingnesses of the past, which could
be made available to the present. A preclear is always losing incidents.
One of the methods of not losing them would be to simply suspend them as a
picture. Now, if you restore his ability to make these pictures solid,
you've really done something. He can have the picture then any time he
wants, in its full form. You have to change the idea of how much picture
and incident is actually necessary in order to alter the preclear's
viewpoint, and you change that with scarcity and abundance. Scarcity and
abundance naturally comes up, and is handled by Havingness.
Now, let's take up the final and remaining part of man, which is the
body.
Now, the body is a solid appendage which makes a person recognizable.
The body is a game of considerable magnitude, and very popular at this
time. It is quite old, but still very popular. The body can be monitored
and handled by mental image pictures, and it can also be monitored and
handled by thetans, fortunately. But a body is subject to these two other
things. It is actually not possible to change a body without changing the
other two things. The body is modified by the mind and the thetan, and is
actually a very low order of MEST.
Now the anchor points of the body are quite interesting, in that the
body exists as solid only within these spaces, and in the absence of some
of these anchor points the body will aberrate its shape. We know the
fastest way to change body shape is to put the thetan into a condition of
willingness to handle anchor points, and then remedy the scarcity and
abundance of anchor points, and put the actual anchor points back there and
have him put them back there. You will see the body change its shape,
health and general characteristics.
Now, mental image pictures also influence the body, and they influence
the body basically by influencing these anchor points. A facsimile
evidently imposes itself by magnetic fields and currents and other things
upon the anchor point system. It is quite interesting.
So therefore the body is handled and controlled on a mental level
through these anchor points. If you were sailing along seventy-five feet
back of your head some day, and you see some preclear come along, just
shift your range of vision enough to find that preclear's wing anchor
points; if you were to get hold of one of these wing anchor points and just
bend it off line-the person will walk in a circle. As long as you hold the
anchor point out of line the person will walk out of line.
Joints operate because of anchor point structure. The body is then held
together by electronic structure which is easily influenceable, and that
electronic structure has much more command upon the body than the MEST
around it. And the thetan goes through these very many vias of mental image
pictures and these anchor points, and thus influences the structure of the
body.
Now, to influence the mind by influencing the body is only possible by
doing something to the havingness of the thetan. Now you can influence a
thetan by influencing the body. Let's not overlook this point. But that
influence only takes place to a degree that it influences abundance and
scarcity.
In other words, as you influence his ideas of havingness of bodies, so you
influence his condition with regard to bodies, and we re-influence the
body. We find out that a body can be moved, thus influencing the thetan, or
two or three bodies can be put back, thus influencing the thetan, and we
have simply run the back flow of mass reaction on the person. And we do
that in auditing all the time. We adjust the person's havingness, his
ability to communicate with an is-ness, his ability to conceive an is-ness,
to communicate with it. This is Havingness; this is the way you run
Havingness.
There in essence we have the body.
But with the three subdivisions of a human being we have to include the
fact that he lives in the universe.
All right. These, then, are the three parts of beingness, with the
condition that one lives in the universe. And these are inter-influencing.
These parts of man, each one of them, are insistent upon experience,
incident. Man grows old, minds become complicated, thetans become wise. But
at no time does their capability, or ability in general, lessen. Only their
willingness to live increases and decreases, and that increases and
decreases in direct ratio that there is a scarcity or abundance of the
various things in which they are interested. And these scarcities and
abundances influence them and monitor their conduct, or any culture. The
cure for this is to put the person into communication with actual is-ness,
or the is-ness of any given object, and to permit him to reacquaint himself
with that. And so by auditing his life can be righted.
L. RON
HUBBARD
[pic]
Issue 60 [1957, ca. early December]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Scientology:
The Philosophy of a New Age
L. Ron Hubbard
It takes Truth to live with a swiftly changing world. Nothing less than
Truth can Survive. You cannot Survive with anything less than Truth.
We are the heralds of a New Age. Man, stuck for millennia in the rut of
status quo can at first balk and even ridicule, but, Can He Survive?
Always the old has hooted at the new. But the new grows strong and each
day's dawning sees us closer to a new World.
What will this world be? Atomic reactors giving unlimited power.
Automatic machines providing for the most of Man's animal wants. Space
flight to the Solar System. New politics, new leisure, new hates, new
loves.
But before any new era begins there is always a period of instability
and change, a period of violence, a period soiled with the death of the old
and the failed experiments of the new.
Such periods of change are violent. Many things, many men may not
Survive them.
What will it take to Survive this change? Who can Survive it and sail
onward to live in new times?
The lucky and the clear.
But who are the lucky but the clear.
Scientology for the individual is a passport to this new time.
Scientology for the group is the Survival of the State.
No old shaky basis of thought could last out the fire of the period of
change. No quivering, unstable person could Survive the duress of the times
just now to come.
One's first duty to all is to be himself clear, able to Survive, able
to lead his own destiny by the hand.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
One's next duty is to his fellows to be sure their ability can compare to
the tasks imposed by the new State of things.
The answer to these trials is contained in Scientology. And Scientology
is the answer to you.
Only a clear could think and act fast enough to live in a disaster and
to make others live. Only a clear could Survive in Space. Only a clear
could enjoy the fast pace of the game to come.
Others may die or worse, become slaves in the inevitable advance of
technology which holds in question the abilities of a man.
Hence, Project Clear. That's our goal now. We can do it. We can teach
you to get it done.
It's taken seven years to iron out the kinks. Seven years isn't long
against 73 trillion.
Today can be ours. Tomorrow can come. Let us be ready for it.
We are the prime movers in this, the new age. Forget the old. Face up
to what will come. And let the dead yesterdays bury the philosophy of
Authority and Capital Gains and Communist psychology cults. We're no longer
tied.
The eons march on. Space Opera has again come to a planet on which we
live. Always before it meant destruction.
Perhaps, this time, due to our efforts, a humanitarian world can exist.
We, the Prophets of the Morrow, know the way.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street, N.W., Washington, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN # 1 OF 3 DECEMBER 1957
CLEAR PROCEDURE
DEFINITIONS, GOALS
There are three possible goals in processing a preclear. The first of
these is Mest Clear. The second is Theta Clear. The third is Operating
Thetan.
By Mest Clear is meant a BOOK ONE CLEAR. Here we defined clear in terms
of facsimiles. This is a rather simple mechanical definition. It said in
effect that so far as human beings were concerned our preclear finally
arrived at a point where he had full color-visio-sonic, had no psychoses or
neuroses and could recall what had happened to him in this lifetime. This
is almost a baby-talk sort of clear. It pays no heed at all to
identification with a body and it has nothing to do with ability. Today, by
running Creative Processes (four years old!) we can turn on visible
facsimiles and weed out the bottom spots of operations and what not. This
is actually a rather easy goal. Somehow I've never given a real tight
procedure for achieving it even though the essence of the processes have
been around for a very long time. COMPLETING STEP SIX OF CLEAR PROCEDURE IN
FULL GIVES US A MEST CLEAR.
By Theta Clear is meant a Clear obtained by Clear Procedure as is being
delineated in this regimen. The main trouble is, amusingly, trying to reach
Mest Clear without running into Theta Clear. I personally don't believe now
that it can be done without actually shoving the pc back in his head every
time he pops out. Thus the goal of this procedure is actually THETA CLEAR.
This is what we mean then when we say "clear". We mean a Theta Clear.
By Operating Thetan we mean Theta Clear PLUS ability to operate
functionally against or with Mest and other life forms. For the first time
we have here the matter of ABILITY. An Operating Thetan is not an absolute
term. Theta Clear is a more absolute term than Operating Thetan. An
Operating Thetan is a Theta Clear (Not a mystical mystic out on an
inversion) who can also do something.
Thus we have two goals which contain no ambition to accomplish anything
and one goal which contains much ambition. Now here is another puzzle in
definitions. Which is highest, the Theta Clear or the Operating Thetan?
Well, the answer to that is not what we used to think. As DOINGNESS is not
really at the top we find that we will probably make an Operating Thetan
before we achieve Theta Clear for a Theta Clear would probably not be much
interested in operating. Therefore we see that the actual goal we are
trying to reach, no matter in which limited sense, is Operating Thetan.
Operating Thetan is then a highly variable goal. A thetan who can move
in and out of a body is actually operating somewhat but he is not really a
Theta Clear since a Theta Clear, in its highest sense, means no further
dependency upon bodies.
The goals of the auditor, therefore, do not rack up one, two, three,
Mest Clear, Theta Clear, Operating Thetan. They actually stack up on a very
gradient scale between thetan inoperative and a thetan who can operate. The
auditor is therefore seeking to reach with the pc a state wherein the pc
can function. At no time does the auditor suddenly arrive with a pc in a
startling new shiny state all of a sudden that can be called a certain
thing. In that pcs often expect this suddenly bursting "into the light" the
auditor is subjected to disappointment when he has actually achieved an
enormous gain for the pc. In other words, pcs gain on a smooth gradient
scale and do not suddenly become something.
There is only one point on the road up where something does happen and that
is exteriorization. When the pc exteriorizes for the first time he feels
there must be a cause for rejoicing and has the idea he has gotten
somewhere. Well, in fact you could achieve the same result by hitting him
over the head with a club. He would exteriorize. The point is not
exteriorizing the pc but cutting down his dependency upon a body. A pc who
exteriorizes and is not carried right on with the same process that sprang
him out of his head until it is flat will go back into his head in an hour
or a week and will be harder to dig out the next time.
In other words this point of exteriorization does happen and does mean
to the pc that he is himself. But it shouldn't mean very much to an auditor
beyond his noticing that this phase has been entered in the case. For in
truth thetans don't stay out of their bodies very long if they are not in
good shape. Thus exteriorization means less than ability to act, to live,
to be and do. The attention of the auditor should be upon the increasing
ability of the pc to handle life, not upon the distance the pc gets from
his body. Is that clear? Well, it tells us that arriving at a state of
Clear is easy if that means stable outside and that any state of betterment
on the road to Operating Thetan is an honest achievement.
Thus an auditor should at all times go toward the state of Operating
Thetan and should not be mixed up in the oddities of exteriorization for a
day.
HGC Clear Procedure goes straight toward exteriorization and achieves
it. But it also goes straight toward increasing ability to handle life. The
latter is the auditor's best goal. The auditing goal should go in the same
direction as this new definition for Operating Thetan.
An Operating Thetan can be at cause knowingly and at will over Life,
Matter, Energy, Space and Time, subjectively and objectively.
This Action Definition of Operating Thetan is the true goal of the
auditor and if followed with complete understanding will achieve the best
possible results.
In this discussion of goals and definitions, I am telling you cleanly
that the goals of Mest Clear and Theta Clear are not worth following from
the auditor's standpoint. You can let pcs think what they will about them.
The only goal worthy of the auditor's time WHATEVER THE STATE OF CASE OF
THE PC is Operating Thetan. To achieve one on any subject it is only
necessary to place the pc to some degree at willing and knowing cause point
with regard to that subject. All the steps of HGC Clear Procedure are
leveled at Operating Thetan. But you need not tell your pc that. You can
use the words RELEASE, MEST CLEAR, THETA CLEAR or any other if you like.
Just remember there is only one payoff goal and that is Operating Thetan.
MEST CLEAR: Can see facsimiles with sonic present lifetime, has no
psychoses or neuroses. Upper part of APA (in UK OCA) graph. Above 135 IQ.
THETA CLEAR: Can exist knowingly independent of bodies.
RELEASE: Average a third of a graph higher than first test, above 115
IQ.
OPERATING THETAN: Can be at Cause knowingly and at will over Life,
Matter, Energy, Space and Time, subjectively and objectively.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street, N.W., Washington, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 DECEMBER 1957
Clear Procedure as of Dec 3, 1957, is supplemented by a tape made at
Auditors' Conference of Nov 30, 1957.
This current bulletin supplements HCO Bulletin of Dec 3, 1957, which is
the Introduction. There will be a series of these, giving a bulletin to
each step. The entire series will be published in a photolitho booklet
called CLEAR PROCEDURE which will be ready for the December Congress and
which will cost $2.00 in the U.S. and 10 shillings in Great Britain. Both
booklets will be published by the HCO and will be copyrighted
internationally. The booklet published in Great Britain will be a
photolitho of the U.S. photolitho copy. The booklet may not be published in
whole or in part by anyone but the HCO.
CLEAR PROCEDURE CONTINUED
STEP ONE: PARTICIPATION IN SESSION BY THE PC.
We have long known that ARC was important. Just how important it is was
established by some tests I made in London in 1956 wherein every time the
pc showed any restlessness or other signs of loss of havingness, instead of
remedying havingness I carefully searched out any fancied break of ARC and
patched it up. The "loss of havingness" vanished. In other words loss of
ARC is even more important than loss of havingness since a repair of ARC
restores havingness. Lack of havingness is only one symptom of a lack of
communication.
There are two ways an auditor, according to long practice, can err. One
of these is to permit two-way communication to a point where the pc's
havingness is injured. The other is to chop communication to such a degree
that havingness is injured. There is a point past which communication is
bad and short of which lack of communication is bad. Here we have auditor
judgment at play. Because the pc will fidget or go downscale in tone when
his havingness drops an auditor can SEE when the pc's havingness is being
lowered. Because a pc will go anaten or start to grind into the process an
auditor can tell whether or not the pc feels his communication has been
chopped. When either happens the auditor should take action-in the first
instance by shutting off the pc's outflow and getting to work and in the
second instance by making the pc talk out any fancied communication
severance.
Participation in session by the pc is not something the auditor sees to
at the beginning of the session and then forgets for the rest of the
intensive. This step is continued throughout the intensive and is given as
much attention as any process being run at the time. The auditor's
attention is always therefore upon two things-first the continued
participation in session and second the action of the process.
Grouped under this head we would also have ways and means of getting
the pc into session in the first place. An unconscious pc used to be an
apparent road block. A downtone, antagonistic, you-can't-help-me pc was
also a rough one. These two things are countered by always carefully
starting a session and following through on standard CCH 0.
It is as important to open a session with a baby or an unconscious
person as it is with any other preclear. It doesn't matter whether the pc
is answering up or not. It is only necessary to assume that the pc would
answer if he could answer and that the mechanics of voice and gesture are
simply absent from the answer. Therefore one always carefully starts every
session, paying attention to what is happening, where it is happening, who
is there, help, goals and problems. Obviously anaten or inability to
control the body are the present time problem of the unconscious person or
the child. One can actually audit this with a plain question and simply
assume after a bit it has been answered, then give the acknowledgement and
ask another question just as
though the pc were in full vocal action. Auditors still fall for the
belief, very current, that "unconscious" people are unable to think or be
aware in any way. A thetan is seldom unconscious regardless of what the
body is doing or not doing.
PRESENT TIME PROBLEM is a highly vital point of PRECLEAR PARTICIPATION.
If a preclear is being nagged too thoroughly by a PT Problem auditing can
actually send him downhill if done without addressing the problem. A whole
intensive, even seventy-five hours can be wasted if the auditor does not
clear the PT PROBLEM.
The preclear generally doesn't know he has one which is nagging him,
for the rough PT Problems go into the apathy band and below into
forgetfulness rather rapidly. Therefore the auditor should ferret out the
PT Problem with an E-Meter. Adroit use of an E-Meter does not include
evaluating for the preclear but it certainly does include ferreting out PT
Problems. The E-Meter is also used for valences and sometimes
psychophysical difficulties. (Auditor: Use the word "psychophysical" rather
than psychosomatic and stay out of a medical field.)
THE RUNNING OF A PT PROBLEM today is the most. PT Problem, valences,
psychophysical ailments, all run beautifully with "Mock up something worse
than (terminal)" or "Invent something worse than (terminal)". To run this
it is necessary to isolate the TERMINAL most intimately connected with the
PT Problem (or the valence or psychophysical difficulty). One then CLEARS
THE COMMAND (and you always better do that with any command) and lets go.
The whole idea of WORSE THAN is the whole of the dwindling spiral.
People who are "trying to get better" and "be more perfect" and "think the
right thought" lose all control of "getting worse", "being imperfect", and
"thinking the wrong thought". All these WORSE THANs are then left on
automatic and we arrive at something less than optimum. In fact we arrive
with the dwindling spiral. We also arrive with the "point of no return". We
also arrive with the declining ability to heal or get well. And we also
arrive with old age.
After running "worse than" on the PT Problem, we proceed with other
parts of CCH 0. Clearing help will be found quite beneficial. But to get a
pc to participate who is downright ugly about it, running help is usually
only a partial solution. When these only ones get going they really snarl
on the subject of getting audited. Here CCH 1 is of benefit. No questions
asked. But this of course defeats the purpose of STEP ONE.
PARTICIPATION OF THE PC in the session is necessary in order to place
the pc somewhat at the cause point in the actual fact of auditing. This
fits the definition. You can always change a body or recover it from some
illness by auditing without much helping the pc himself. Therefore the pc,
while under auditor control, is still somewhat at cause what with comm
bridges and clearing commands, etc. But he is made to feel no bad effects
from being AT EFFECT if ample ARC is used. In other words, the pc can't be
entirely at cause in a session or he would be self-auditing, which isn't
good, but he can be salvaged from being a total effect by good ARC. When
the ARC drops out that DOES leave the pc at more or less total effect, a
thing you have probably noticed.
The things to be done in CCH 0 should be done thoroughly at intensive's
beginning and should be glanced at whenever a new session starts and should
get a bow when a new command is used. But all CCH 0 is is a collection of
mechanical aids to assist the pc's participation in the session and to
assist the auditor in ARC. Although CCH 0 must be used always, it is not a
total substitute for ARC.
The sum of CCH 0 is find the auditor, find the auditing room, find the
pc, knock out any existing PT Problem, establish goals, clear help, get
agreement on session length and get up to the first real auditing command.
CCH 0 isn't necessarily run in that order and this isn't necessarily all of
CCH 0, but if any of these are seriously scamped, the session will
somewhere get into trouble.
When the participation of the pc ceases in a session, he must be gotten
back into session by any means and then participation is re-established. A
pc is never permitted to end a session on his own choice. He seeks to end
them when his participation drops out of sight.
The trick question "What did I do wrong?" re-establishes ARC.
The problem of handling a pc who is not co-operative, who does not wish
to participate, is a highly special problem. In the first place it is the
pc's engrams that do not want to continue, in the second place it is the
engrams which are doing the talking. One ordinarily tackles this case with
a formal opening of session, brief but positive, and then sails in with CCH
0, just as though the person were unconscious, which, of course, the person
is.
Participation by an unconscious person, while covered above, requires
the additional refinement of technique. ONE MUST ALWAYS FIND SOMETHING THE
PRECLEAR CAN DO AND THEN BETTER THAT ABILITY. An unconscious person is
usually lying in bed. If not, the command must be varied to fit the
environment. But the best command is something like "You make that body lie
in that bed." A slightly upper grade process to a person sitting in a chair
is "You seat that body in that chair." In such cases a grip on the pc's
hand and the use of a slight squeeze each time the auditor acknowledges
considerably speeds the process.
There is another special case-or maybe it isn't so special. There are
many people who cannot tackle a present time problem with a process. If the
auditor sought out a PT Problem and then ran "something worse than a
related terminal" or a "problem of comparable or incomparable magnitude" he
would find the pc digging in hard, unable to handle the process. Thus some
judgment must be used in such cases. Don't run a PT Problem on somebody in
very bad shape casewise.
There is an awful lot to know about starting sessions. The bad off case
and the case in very good condition alike require special handling. For the
case just mentioned who cannot handle a PT Problem with a process, there is
always locational (TR TEN). TR TEN will run a PT Problem or anything else
if slowly. Thus many a person with a PT Problem can only participate in a
session to the extent of TR TEN, "YOU notice that (object-wall, floor,
chair, etc)." By introducing in the auditor's and pc's bodies as a couple
of the items being spotted along with everything else we eventually wind up
with "find the auditor, find the auditing room, find the pc". And we get
there without a PT Problem being in full bloom.
In running "You notice that object" there are some things that MUST be
observed. Most important of these is this one: ANY PROCESS WHICH TURNS ON A
SOMATIC MUST BE CONTINUED UNTIL IT NO LONGER TURNS ON SOMATICS. This is
true particularly of TR TEN, 8-C and TRIO. The case hangs right there until
the process is flat, whether in one day, one year or six. Another thing
which must be stressed is the inclusion of the auditor's and pc's bodies.
Because some pcs WHEN EXTERIORIZED snap back in when they see the body is
no reason to avoid it in TR TEN. Another thing is to make the pc use his
eyes to view the objects and if he doesn't turn his eyes toward them, then
it is up to the auditor to use manual direction of the head and even pry
the eyes open. No balks are ever permitted in auditing. If TR TEN is being
run at a problem, every now and then the auditor pauses and discusses the
problem again with the pc in order to keep it in restimulation until TR TEN
can run it out.
The high case is a worse problem than auditors commonly believe. In the
first place a high case can "blow" a situation out of the bank with
considerable ease and if the auditor insists on sledge-hammering it out
with a process, then pc participation blows rather than a facsimile.
High case participation can also be misunderstood in that there are a
lot of cases that think they are high which aren't. Here's how you tell a
real high case from a bogus ("I can do everything") case. A thetan in good
shape can be cause. When he looks at something in the bank it becomes the
effect. A bogus high case can think anything he wants without anything
having an effect on the bank. You want to watch this point because here is
the definition of OT thoroughly at work. Pc at Cause. A case that has
pictures and everything and is impatient to get on with it BUT DOES NOT
MARKEDLY ALTER THE BANK WITH THINKING ALONE is not a high case but an old
"wide open case" of Dianetic days.
Two-way communication AS A PROCESS is the key to all this. If you put a pc
on an E-Meter and locate a present time charge, you can, if the pc can
somewhat handle his bank, get him to two-way comm the incident flat very
quickly-in five or ten minutes at the most. This is all the process used.
It would take an actual E-Meter run to give you a full reality on this.
Here we are looking at the basic difference amongst cases. That
difference lies in the ability to knowingly CAUSE. Bodies are the same,
they all react alike. Banks differ only vaguely and only in content and
significance. Engrams are engrams and they all behave alike. There is only
ONE DIFFERENCE amongst pcs. We called this BASIC PERSONALITY in BOOK ONE.
We can be a lot more simple about it now that I have my teeth into the
subject a few more feet. The difference is DEGREE OF KNOWING CAUSABILITY.
What do we mean by CAUSE? The basic, old Scientology definition is still at
work. CAUSE-DISTANCE-EFFECT. Joe knowingly shoots Bill. Joe is at Cause,
Bill is at Effect. Mary gives John a present. Mary is at Cause, John is at
Effect. Bill says Boo to Joe. Bill is at Cause, Joe is at Effect. But when
we introduce KNOWING CAUSE and CAUSE AT WILL into this CAUSE-DISTANCE-
EFFECT idea we see we have something else added. The person at Cause is
there because he knows he is there and because he is willingly there. The
person at Cause is not at Cause because he does not dare be at Effect. He
must be able to be at Effect. If he is afraid to be at Effect, then he is
Unwilling Cause and is at Cause only because he is very afraid of being at
Effect. Education can show a person he can be at Effect without liability.
Then he can be at Cause without HAVING TO BE BECAUSE HE DOESN'T DARE BE AT
EFFECT. Auditing in its whole operation is teaching the pc this. Pc slides
from terrified effect to tolerated effect to knowing cause with regard to
any incident he contacts IF HE IS AUDITED PROPERLY. The pc who has to get
rid of all his engrams because he has to get rid of them because it's all
too horrible winds up, with good auditing, into a tolerance of the pictures
since he has learned he can tolerate them and so can swing around to Cause.
So we have this great difference in pcs. DEGREE OF KNOWING CAUSABILITY
is the extent that he is willing to be at Cause and the extent he is
willing to know he is at Cause plus the ability to cause things.
You will see this on an E-Meter in PT Problem handling. Bill has a PT
Problem. It drops a dial when first contacted. The auditor, using his
UNDERSTANDING of Scientology, two-way comms on it. The incident discharges
and no longer registers after a few minutes. Mary has a PT Problem. It
drops steeply on the E-Meter. The auditor tries to two-way comm on it. The
charge remains the same or Mary begins to disperse. She doesn't hold to the
subject. The auditor at length finds that two-way comm only serves to run
down her havingness. The charge remains on the meter dial. What is the
difference between Bill and Mary? Bill can be at knowing cause, Mary is
either obsessive cause or heavy effect. Bill can blow facsimiles. Mary
cannot. On Mary the auditor is very wise to enter upon TR TEN.
One version of TR TEN is called Short Spotting. "You notice that
(nearby object)." So long as the pc can see with his eyes the object or
feel the auditor's hand on it the process works. It is spotting right up
close. If run with mediumly near and far objects (such as the room wall) it
is very effective in getting a case going. It has given some cases their
first reality on auditing. BUT the rule still holds here about somatics.
When a somatic is turned on with a process, turn it off with that process.
See Auditor's Code 13. This is entirely true of Short Spotting. In that it
almost always turns on somatics, when you start it, you have to flatten it
and that's often lengthy.
Remember this about pc participation. A low case can't handle the bank,
therefore you keep high ARC and kid-glove him through a session. A very
high case doesn't need dynamite, therefore you retain his participation by
going as rapidly as you can. A medium, average case needs ARC, something of
dynamite, something of kid-gloves, something of two-way comm.
And IN ALL GOOD AUDITING CASES IMPROVE. Just because you start a pc low
doesn't mean he'll always stay low. Check the case often. See if his
CAUSABILITY is rising. If it isn't, he isn't improving and you better go
easier or
heavier. PROBABLY when a case doesn't improve you didn't handle a PT
Problem. THAT IS THE ONLY THING WHICH CAN KEEP A CASE FROM GAINING. So
check every session for one.
There are probably thousands of ways to gain the participation of the
pc, there are probably thousands of ways to open a session. There are
probably an infinite number of tricky things you can do. However, this
breadth of choice should not obscure the following.
1. A pc who is not participating in the session is not at Cause.
2. An auditor who isn't able to maintain ARC, who isn't able to
"Freeze" a process for a short time, even a tone 40.0 process, and re-
establish ARC, will not get results.
3. The end-all of processing is the attainment of a goal, the goal of
OT. One always processes the problems and difficulties of the pc, he does
not process the process. Processes only assist in processing the pc. They
will not do anything by themselves. Processes are a road map to the goal of
OT, they are nothing in themselves. The target is the condition, the
disabilities of the pc. How one achieves the eradication of these
difficulties is secondary to the fact of their eradication. Scientology is
a route attained after several thousand years of no attainment by Man and
the route is important and valuable and must be travelled correctly, but
the concern is the pc, not the route.
4. A new auditor can be adrift with his tools. He is uncertain as to
what he is attacking. He should have reality on engrams, locks, key-ins,
secondaries, the time track, the key buttons of Scientology such as
Communication, Control and Havingness. Given an understanding of all these
and the theory of Scientology itself he can almost pilot his way through a
case with two-way comm. But two-way comm will not work if one doesn't
understand all the above. So two-way comm is not conversation. The pc has
had a few trillion years of that and it hasn't made him well, so two-way
comm is a highly specialized thing, done with full understanding of the
thetan, bank and body. Good two-way comm means participation by the pc.
5. Scientology is a precise commodity, something like engineering. A pc
is a precise thing, part animal, part pictures and part God. We want the
ability to handle things and the God, and the less unthinking responses in
the pc, the better off he will be. Therefore a PC WHO ISN'T COGNITING
regularly is being processed beyond his ability to do and it is necessary
to drop back downscale to find something he CAN DO.
6. The golden rule of processing is to find something the preclear CAN
do and then to improve his ability to do it. At once you will have
participation. The highest ability one pc had was to get drunk: a
resolution of his case was entered upon by having him invent ways to get
drunk.
7. The attention span of children and psychos is not necessarily a
factor since it is only the phenomena of dispersal against mental blocks,
keying in of incidents. The auditor can pay attention to it or not as he
likes. Short, regular sessions on people with limited attention span get
more gain per week than a steady grind since the participation is
maintained.
8. The auditor remains at Cause in all sessions without forbidding the
pc to be at Cause. See the rules in DIANETICS: THE ORIGINAL THESIS.
L. RON
HUBBARD
[Further material can be found in Scientology: Clear Procedure-Issue One on
page 172. The above HCO B was reissued on 29 September 1970.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street N.W., Washington D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 7 DECEMBER 1957
HGC PROCEDURE
The following is laid down as an entirety of processing to be done in
the HGC in London. No other processes or variations are allowed.
GOAL: Operating Thetan.
DEFINITION: An Operating Thetan is one who can be knowingly at Cause
over Life, Matter, Energy, Space and Time.
CCH 0 in brief, find auditor, find pc, find auditing room, clear help
and goals. BUT IN THE MAIN HANDLE THE PT PROBLEM IF IT EXISTS. IF IT
DOESN'T EXIST do CCH 0 briefly and quickly and get on with the session.
It will be noted that giving pc's attention to auditing room or
environment can turn on a somatic after three or four commands. After one
command of "Have you got an auditing room," this becomes a process called
LOCATIONAL. If Locational turns on a somatic it must be run until somatic
is flat. Therefore the auditor has no business attempting Locational or
getting the pc involved unless he intends to do something about it.
PRESENT TIME PROBLEM
The pc is put on an E-Meter before PT Problem is discussed. When the E-
Meter has been adjusted (one third of a dial surge when pc squeezes cans)
the auditor asks if the pc has a present time problem. After a little
discussion of this, the needle may surge. If it does the auditor locates
the PT Problem's most intimate terminal and runs (with the pc still holding
the cans) "Invent something worse than (indicated terminal)" until the
problem flattens out on the dial. The auditor can ask for and run another
PT Problem or even three or four but always flattening down the surge of
the needle. IF THE PC IS 50% below the center line of the APA it is not
safe to run "Invent". Instead, without scouting around Invent but knowing
the graph in the first place, simply two way comms the problem and runs
Locational until the problem flattens out on the needle. The auditor does
not begin with Invent and then change his mind and run Locational. It is an
either or. The auditor starts with "Invent" or he starts with Locational
and whichever he does he does not change. IF LOCATIONAL TURNS ON A SOMATIC
IT MUST BE RUN UNTIL LOCATIONAL NO LONGER TURNS ON SOMATICS .
Once the PT Problem is flat the auditor puts away the E-Meter.
S-C-S STEPS
S-C-S begins with 8c of any kind. If 8c turns on a somatic it runs
until it no longer turns on somatics. 8c is run formal or tone 40.
Start is then run as per 1956.
Change is then run as per 1956.
Stop is then run as per 1956.
If each of these is flattened in turn it does not mean that S-C-S is
flat. It means
only that Start is probably unflattened. Thus one again runs Start after
Stop, runs Change after Start, Stop after Change until none of the three
unflatten the others.
More 8c can be run. There is no error in liberally running 8c which is,
after all, a more complicated Locational of a Short Spotting sort.
SPOTTING STEPS
Spotting itself is a broad process. Locational is only one of many
spotting processes. Spotting spots in the past, in space, in the present,
Short Spotting (Locational done up close) are all effective.
SPOTTING DEPENDS FOR ITS WORKABILITY ON THE DISLIKE OF A THETAN OF
BEING LOCATED. IT RUNS BEST, of course, WITH THE THETAN AT CAUSE DOING THE
SPOTTING.
Connectedness is the basic process on ASSOCIATION of Theta with Mest.
All forms and kinds of association including being caught in traps are
prone to become identifications as in Dianetics. Connectedness puts the
thetan at cause in making the Mest (or people when run outside) connect
with him. The command is "Get the idea of making (indicated object) connect
with you." The auditor points. The worse off a person is the less reality
they have on far objects.
Havingness is a complicated Connectedness. Also a permissive one. Thus
Trio is above Connectedness and may be used when Connectedness is flat.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
P.A.B. No. 126
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 December 1957
PROBLEMS: HANDLING AND RUNNING
Easily the most important process in Scientology is Problems of
Comparable Magnitude. It has no peers. We don't care how low a process
runs, or how high it runs. But nowhere in Scientology do we have a process
which runs as high and low as Problems of Comparable Magnitude.
Now that idea of span should be clearly understood by you. There are
processes which undoubtedly run lower or higher-of this we are certain. But
no other process runs both so low and so high. The only thing necessary in
a "problem of comparable magnitude" is for the terminal selected to be real
to the preclear. Now that is a necessary condition for the running of it.
"Problems of comparable magnitude" become real only if the terminal or
terminals selected become real. That is the first condition. Where this
process breaks down, it is actually not being run, since Problems of
Comparable Magnitude by definition is a process which brings the preclear
to invent situations of similar importance to a given situation, and the
given situation must be composed of one or more terminals.
Now what do we mean by "terminal"? It would be any fixed mass utilized
in a communication system. Thus, you see, a man would be a terminal, but a
post could also be a terminal. Thus, a head could be a terminal, but so
could a hat. But between the two, we get a hat as questionable. It is
questionable to the degree that it has less mass, and is easily shed.
Somewhere along the line there is a border between a terminal and a
condition. Now, we have to know what a condition is.
A condition is a circumstance regarding a mass or terminal. When you
are asking for "problems of comparable magnitude," if you run them on
conditions you are calling for a circumstance or a problem comparable to a
circumstance, which doesn't have any fixed position and never did have any
fixed position and never did operate in any communication system, so you
are describing a description-and there is nothing into which the preclear
can get his teeth.
First we must conceive, then, a difference between a condition and a
terminal. That is quite important for you to conceive. If you can't
conceive the difference between a condition and terminal, why, you're in
for it; this technique will forever be beyond your grasp-and that is a very
easy thing to conceive, however.
The light is on. Now, "on" is a circumstance regarding the light. So
you wouldn't run a "problem of comparable magnitude to 'on,' " but you
would run a "problem of comparable magnitude to the light." Do you see
that? It sounds idiotic, but a lot of people miss this one. Let's take this
now, and see that there are masses, and all masses are only relatively
fixed. Masses are masses, and they are not, by the way, particles.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
Masses are something that are shed from a thetan by mock-up, and particles
are something that are shed from masses. You don't run particles. So what
we mean as a terminal has a relatively fixed, identifiable, isolatable
location in space.
Now just why you don't run particles, just why you don't run "problems
of comparable magnitude" to words, just why you don't run "problems of
comparable magnitude" to conditions of one kind or another, that is best
demonstrated by your running it some time-and that's a happy adventure for
the auditor, not the preclear. To make a real, sure-fire test, why, you
should run something like this: a problem of comparable magnitude to fancy
words. Now that is indefinite enough and up in the air enough .... You
would shoot the bottom out from your preclear fast enough.
The auditor to run this successfully must choose first and foremost a
terminal as his target-not a condition. The next thing is to choose the
right terminal.
Now you must understand the procedure of running this technique. Now
you wonder why I'm stressing this. The most fabulous thing-this technique
can go off the rails faster in auditing than any other technique I know
anything about. Now one of the things that is most remarkable about it is
that auditors do not accept from the preclear-problems. In other words, an
auditor who is obsessively solving problems would have an awful time
running this technique, because he has to accept from the preclear a
problem every time the preclear answers the question. The way to run it is
this: it actually requires about three answers. You said, "Give me a
problem of comparable magnitude to your mother," and the preclear said,
"The Atlantic Ocean." Now if the auditor said, "Well, how could that be a
problem to you?" you would get this oddity. The preclear would say, "Well,
the Atlantic Ocean overflowing its banks." Now, an auditor who can't stand
problems would accept this one as a problem-but it is a condition. The
first thing the preclear gave was what he conceived to be a comparable
terminal, then he gave a condition. And only on another repetition of "How
could that be a problem to you?" would it come home to him. But there was a
problem involved with it-"How could that be a problem to you?" So the
auditing commands are: "Give me a problem of comparable magnitude to (a
terminal)," "How could that be a problem to you?" and if necessary "How
could that be a problem to you?" and as many times as necessary to get the
preclear to finally dredge out the problem.
Unless the preclear can get that idea of a problem, the technique is
unworkable. The semantics of the thing may throw him. Therefore the command
could be cleared with some profit. The word that is liable to throw the
command is "problem," not "comparable magnitude," and because those are
polysyllabic you are liable to believe that on some preclears "comparable
magnitude" is where they will hang up, and this is not where they hang up.
The auditing of it must include another thing, and that is a feeling on
the part of the preclear himself figuring on it. This is evidently a
necessary part of the running. We say, "A problem of comparable magnitude
to your mother." The preclear says, "The Atlantic Ocean." We say, "How
could that be a problem to you?" The preclear says, "Oh, its overflowing
its banks." And you say, "All right, how could that be a problem to you?"
He says, "Oh, I could figure out some way to keep it from going over its
banks." If you're not sure yet, because you wouldn't be sure with that one,
you say, "But how could that be a problem to you?" or-alternative command
here-"Can you get yourself figuring how to do that?" He'll get that-that's
what you want. He's got to get an idea of himself figuring it out. You want
that included in the anatomy of the running of it.
Now, an alternative command to all this is "incomparable magnitude," as
I have just mentioned. When you tackle something so huge, so formidable
that it would mean
a couple of hours' comm lag on the part of your preclear-you see, he's just
this moment been informed that he is going to be electrocuted at dawn-you
want to desensitize him and blow him out of his head and leave them a dead
body, which would be a good joke-something on this order, you see. You
realize that this problem could be huge. His fixation is unbelievably
great. It goes from horizon to horizon, down to the very center of the
earth, and fills the entire universe on the other side. And that's how big
this problem is. Now this technique of incomparable magnitude enters in at
the bottom on problems. If a person can't get a datum of comparable
magnitude, why, what do you suppose that you should do? Get a problem of
incomparable magnitude. You cannot evaluate on a single datum except by
postulate. Of course, you yourself should be in a condition whereby you
simply say "That is important" or "That isn't important" and that could
then be the evaluation of any single datum. But you would no longer be
human. You are aware of the fact, by the way, that you cannot be human and
be right-that is not possible. I have mentioned that before.
Now here we have, then, a necessity to have evaluation by others.
Evaluation from other people. Now get this idea of the only-oneness of
problems or situations. When a person is no longer pronouncing the
evaluation of things in some grand and kingly style, when he has
surrendered this in order to have a more intricate and involved game, he
then needs two data. It requires a certain amount of experience of evil to
experience good. And we get some people who are around telling us how bad
it all is, who have experienced a great deal of kindness. This is a great
oddity. You should look it over. All you have to do is to restimulate the
early goodness to slip into the consequences of the later evil. Supposing
somebody was just being filthy mean, and we compliment him on his good
heart, his love of his fellow men-and we'll watch him chuck his cookies.
He's liable to fold right up in front of you. You could restimulate such a
thing into being until it collapsed and was no longer a button.
We understand things when we are no longer evaluating by postulate, but
when we are being polite and evaluating by proof, by demonstration, we no
longer are able to accept an "only-one" thing. This is a bad thing because
a thetan is to a marked degree an "only-one" creature, and it restimulates
his own beingness. When he falls into the lower harmonics of his own
beingness, he comes to grief. All you've got to do is exaggerate being a
thetan in any one of its facets and you're in trouble. But now it doesn't
say that you cannot attain these things. I said the lower harmonics. How
does he get to the lower harmonics? By fixation. By fixations on various
incidents, and certainly on things which exist as "only-one." There is
nothing else like it, so you can never look away if you want to look at
such a thing, you have to look at it. And this becomes very bad . . . very,
very bad.
As a matter of fact it becomes very amusing when you have problems of
comparable magnitude, because a person is using when he runs this his
desire for evaluation, but he's putting evaluation on a cause basis, and
you are running off the highest logics in logic straight out of the bank.
So a person doesn't have to have beautiful sunshine in the streets in order
to have a beautiful day. Do you understand that? A person to a marked
degree ceases to be dependent upon his environment to give him pleasure or
pain.
If you stand around and wait for something else to decide it is
something or other, you are in bad trouble. Now children do this-do this to
such a marked degree that they don't even know how much pain is painful
until they ask Momma or ask Poppa. A child is dependent on exterior
evaluation, and I've seen a child go so far as not to eat ice cream. Why?
"Ice cream's bad. I don't like ice cream." I said, "What?" I was pretty
fast on my feet as an auditor and I said, "Who told you that?" "Oh ...."
"Well, who told you that?" I said. "Ice cream's good." A horrible thing to
do. I ran out the other person's magic spell and ran my own in. Kids
straightwire rather fast. You can straighten out almost anything with a
child if you straightwire them.
Thus we look over the situation and find out that an individual is made to
suffer by life to a degree that he is made to by life. Thus his evaluation
of life from himself as cause point, as an ability, is necessary to his
recovery. We find this under Problems of Comparable Magnitude. We could go
off and discuss the whole subject of logic, you realize, the second we say
comparable magnitude. I'm going to point your attention to the Prelogics,
by the way. I'm going to ask you to read those.
The only reason Problems of Comparable Magnitude works so well and
easily is that the individual puts certain things on automatic, which is to
say he will not take certain responsibilities for one side of a dichotomy.
He abandons all responsibility for evil. It's an interesting state of
affairs, because he becomes incapable of handling evil, and then goes on
this one-two basis of stimulus-response, and in his next life he's going to
be totally evil. He didn't take any responsibility for it, and it's going
to eat him up. You take enough responsibility for a lion, you'll dine on
him-every time.
There is an interesting experiment that you can perform yourself-I
advise that you should perform this to have an understanding of
responsibility and automaticity, because automaticity and responsibility
are nowhere more necessary to understand than in Problems of Comparable
Magnitude-and that is this: "Get the idea of the effort it took to make
that wall." Get the idea of anything in the line of effort and feel almost
at once the overwhelming irresponsibility concerning it. It could be an
irresponsibility so great it could make you practically ill.
If you wanted to be real mean to a preclear, not improve him
particularly, you could just ask him, "Give me an idea of the effort
necessary to make your case." He would be sitting right there in a total
irresponsibility for his case. His case is there, he's not responsible for
it. Now how do you recover his responsibility for anything? He has to be
able to handle it. Now you could put something on automatic, but usually
when you do you will sooner or later get into an irresponsibility for it,
because that's what automatic is. So we put something on automatic. Well,
if we put problems on automatic, then we ourselves become a problem
eventually without our consent. In other words we put problems on
automatic, then we ourselves become solution. And when we ourselves are in
nothing but solution, the whole world around us is nothing but problem and
we're obsessively solution and all the problems are automatic, we wind down
faster than any other method I know. We'll wind up being a problem, that's
all. The whole Service Facsimile can be summed up by just this one word-
solution. A Service Facsimile is a solution. That's all. If you took over
this automaticity of problems the individual then could recover from his
Service Facsimile. But remember that you had better run terminals, not
conditions.
What I have just been talking to you about solves in toto all of that
which we were going over in 1952 concerning Service Facsimiles-and that is
quite a mouthful. If you do it this way, if you know how to do it, if you
can look over this whole thing and see quickly how it is done and why it is
done, and get it set and settled so you know what's going on with the
preclear, then you'll be able to handle chronic somatics directly. You will
be able to handle any dynamic directly.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street, N.W., Washington, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 16 DECEMBER 1957
PRESENT TIME PROBLEM
The handling of a present time problem is relatively simple but
requires a certain deftness on an E-Meter.
DEFINITION: A present time problem is one which has its elements in the
material universe in present time, which is going on NOW, and which would
demand the preclear's attention to such an extent that he would feel he had
better be doing something about it rather than be audited.
EXAMPLE: Auditor locates girl friend as pt problem of pc. He runs
problem with "invent something worse", considers it flat, never looks at it
again in intensive. Girl friend calls up pc every night, invalidates him,
finally makes him so sick she carts him off in triumph to a hospital.
BLUNDER: Auditor tried to clear pt problem for the whole intensive, not at
the beginning of each session. BLUNDER: Auditor in this case went backtrack
to a dead wife to clean up charge.
A pt problem is cleaned up as itself only. One doesn't backtrack to get
why the pc has such a problem when doing CCH 0.
A pt problem is checked at the beginning of every session-and if there
is a break at noon, is cleaned up also at the beginning of the afternoon
session.
A pt problem doesn't always bop on the meter at the first question. The
auditor has to spend a little time asking around and making sure. Then he
audits it on if it falls under above definition of pt problem.
THINGS TO AUDIT PT PROBLEM WITH: A very bad off case: TR Ten and if it
turns on a somatic, flatten TR TEN "YOU notice that object." An average
case: Isolate the terminal most closely associated with the problem and run
"Invent something worse than (terminal)" and then flatten it off with
"Invent a problem of comparable magnitude to (terminal)." Also can be run
"Spot where (terminal) is now. Okay. Spot where you are now. Okay." A very
easy case: Two way comm about the problem and terminals, getting pc to
cognite, until the charge is gone.
Where the PT PROBLEM is pain in some member of the body, the auditor
can run "Recall an unwanted (member that hurts)." And when that has been
run for a few cycles from present to past, "Recall a lost (member that
hurts)." (Always run lost and unwanted in the same session and for the same
length of time.) Short spotting will also relieve a pain but is rough on
the pc unless wholly flattened and run along with medium and long spotting.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
23 Hancock Street, Joubert Park, Johannesburg
HCO BULLETIN OF 18 DECEMBER 1957
PSYCHOSIS, NEUROSIS AND PSYCHIATRISTS
An auditor who does not understand the true character of neurosis and
psychosis is likely to find himself trying to understand neurotics and
psychotics and psychiatrists and to the degree of that un-understanding
could become the effect of these.
If we examine the definition for operating thetan we find his highest
capability is knowing and willing cause. This should tell us at once that
the definition of neurosis and psychosis would be unknowing and unwilling
effect, and this is the actual definition of either.
Neurosis and psychosis are different only in degree of singleness of
effect. A neurotic is the subject of one or more unknown causes to which he
is the unwilling effect-but he can still function to some degree, which is
to say he can still be cause in other lines. A psychotic is the complete
subject of one or more unknown causes to which he is the unwilling effect
and any effort on his part to be cause is interfered with by the things to
which he is the effect; in other words, a psychotic's outflow is cut to
zero by the inflow.
Now let us examine the potential number of neuroses and psychoses in
the light of the above definitions. How many aspects are there to a life
unit, which is to say, a thetan? Perhaps the number is infinite but at
least we can say the number of aspects is very large. There are no
additional aspects in this or any other universe. In other words when you
examine the aspects or abilities of a basic life unit you have examined all
the aspects or abilities there are in a universe. There aren't any left
over. Even if you include gods in every universe you will see that you have
not escaped the potentialities of life units.
All the aspects and abilities there are are the aspects and abilities
of a thetan. The only thing that can be done with these aspects or
abilities is included, at least in this universe, in the formula of cause
and effect. Take one ability and add to it the idea of cause and effect of
the more simple variety CAUSE, DISTANCE, EFFECT, fix it so it can never be
flowed against by anything else and we have a source of neuroses. Now take
a being at the effect point of this flow. If this being is the effect point
of a flow he can never flow back against, we have here what we could
carelessly call a neurosis. But there is no other qualification for this
neurosis than that it be unwillingly received and unknown. Therefore a
known "stuck flow" at a person which he is not unwilling to receive does
not cause a neurosis. Now as we make this "stuck flow" unwillingly
received, then unknown, and make it so that it bars out all back flows of
whatever kind on any subject then we have psychosis.
As there are no other aspects than those of a thetan, we see at once
that all neuroses and psychoses are EXAGGERATED, CONCENTRATED ABILITIES.
The recipient, still trying to be cause, transfers himself to a false cause
point. We call this dramatization. He seeks to do only the ability and no
other. We have then a psychosis. As he can do no other thing, because he is
really unwilling and unknowing EFFECT seeking to be CAUSE by DRAMATIZING
the EFFECT, he loses all the abilities but this one ability. This makes a
peculiar and lopsided personality. People object to it partially because it
is false cause and partially because it denies society all the other social
abilities of the person. The psychotic himself is insufficiently willing or
knowing about it to object to it.
Thus we have the standard Scientology method of eradicating one of
those
psychoses or neuroses. Actually we don't even use these words or admit them
as any kind of irreparable state. We are not in such a business. We say we
must find something the preclear can do and then improve it. Let us say
that we find something the preclear can do knowingly and willingly and have
the preclear do it to improve it. All you have to do is get him to reach
toward the source of the CAUSE of his condition. The lowest level cause of
any difficulty is MEST, therefore the objective processes of Trio,
locational, 8c, etc, work uniformly well since anybody here is to some
degree the unwilling and unknowing effect of this universe.
Now where does the psychiatrist come into this? And why is he a bad
fellow to have around in the society? Well in the first place, he is
cognizant only of insanities. As every insanity is only an exaggerated and
concentrated ability the psychiatrist can see in every ability an insanity.
There are no other aspects or abilities than those of a thetan. Any one
of these can pressure, as detailed above, into an insanity. A psychiatrist
or any other person totally associated with insanity then sees all
abilities as a parade of insanities. Only where abilities are several and
performed socially, not anti-socially, do we have sanity. The psychiatrist
never, or rarely, inspects the sphere of sanity. To him, all things then,
add up to madness, since every madness is compounded of abilities
(disarranged as above).
Let us see a good example of this. "A" is a fine statesman. He plays
polo, has a satisfied wife, collects old cars, can do a good job of work as
a carpenter, a fisherman and an ice skater. He reads detective stories and
plays good poker. He is working on a plan privately to disentangle the
Middle East and assist France. One day he is at his club and he is joined
by "B". "B" is a political dilettante. He spends most of his money on maps
and treatises about the Middle East. He cannot ride, sing or work and his
family life is in ruins. He is obviously a neurotic at best. His ideas are
disassociated, impractical but loud. Everyone at the club except "B" knows
"B" is a poor risk.
"A", the sane, versatile man, hears "B", the neurotic, sounding off
about the Middle East and saving France and how only "B" could accomplish
this. "A", knowing "B's" character, BEGINS TO WONDER IF HE IS CRAZY BECAUSE
HE IS INTERESTED IN THE MIDDLE EAST. In such a way, and in any line, the
psychotic or neurotic is a sort of mockery of the sane ability.
Now, as an authority on man and insanity (but not an authority on
sanity as is a Scientologist) the psychiatrist, studying insane people runs
across "B". He classifies "B" as a save-the-world type and notes that "B"
is fixated on France and the Middle East. Shortly thereafter the
psychiatrist is called upon to render a decision about "A". He looks in his
book, finds "A" is trying to do something about France and the Middle East
and, of course classifies "A" as insane.
Another case. George loves Norma. Norma is at first very impressed.
George works hard, likes to hike, has some property he is fixing up at week-
ends. Now along comes Oswald. Oswald says he loves Norma. Oswald says he is
mad about Norma. This is, of course, the case. Oswald has big ideas but no
job, wouldn't walk out of the building if it was on fire, gets rid of every
piece of real or personal property that comes his way. George knows Oswald
is "nutty". Oswald loves Norma. George begins to think he, George, must be
crazy to love Norma because Oswald does.
As an authority on twisted and insane love, but not an authority on
love, the psychiatrist examining Oswald finds he loves Norma's type of
girl. Later, examining George, the psychiatrist finds that George is crazy
because he loves the type of girl Norma is. Well, that's an exaggeration
but you see where it goes. The psychiatrist, having noted that love was
pretty well flung about in the insane wards, leaps to the conclusion that
all love is insane because it is so common in the wards and founds in a
flash of inspiration psychoanalysis which says all insanity derives from
love.
We are held to mockery in all our loves and dreams by the neurotic and
psychotic who specialize in mishandling these dreams and loves. And so the
world goes mad.
It is not safe to have experts on insanity who are not also experts on
sanity. Such persons as those who know only the insane eventually judge
that everything man can do is insane and that all men are mad and then we
get a society devoted entirely to the support of asylums until it is at
last only an asylum itself.
The auditor should understand the mechanism behind neurosis and
psychosis. He should draw it out for himself on a graph, showing cause and
effect. He should understand that mechanism because it is the ONLY THING
THERE IS TO UNDERSTAND about neurotics and psychotics, for all else they do
is gibberish and un-understandable.
If he truly understands this mechanism in all its phases then neurosis
and psychosis can never make him an effect point and he can audit them with
ease when he has to step out of character that far.
If the Scientologist thoroughly understands that the downfall of
psychiatry which is now occurring came about because the psychiatrist never
understood sanity then we won't have any future specialists in insanity
beyond these data.
Society has long suspected versatility and the man of many skills. We
should have realized there was something right with him.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[PAB 144, Psychosis, Neurosis and Psychiatrists, 15 September 1958, is
taken from this HCO B.]
Scientology: Clear Procedure
Issue One
December 1957
L. Ron Hubbard
GOAL:
To obtain the state of clear in individuals.
DEFINITION OF A CLEAR:
A thetan who can knowingly be at cause over Life, Matter, Energy, Space
and Time, subjective and objective.
This is a working definition. Self-determinism and knowledge that he
himself can be at cause point are then primary targets.
Minimum Requisite for Auditor in Using These Techniques:
A Validated Hubbard Professional Auditor Certificate.
INTRODUCTION
I have been at work for seven years to produce a series of techniques
which any well trained auditor can use to clear people. We now have them.
I am truly sorry that this took seven years. Actually, it took more
than twenty-five.
Under other "systems of research" it could not have been done. It was
financed at first by my writings and expeditions. Some 15,000,000 words of
fact and fiction articles ranging from political articles to westerns were
consumed in a large part by this research-but it was free to act if not
free from sweat.
No bullying dictator wanted it for his mass slaveries as happened to
poor misguided Pavlov. No big corporation wanted it for a better Madison
Avenue approach to advertising-another kind of slavery. No big RESEARCH
FOUNDATION like Ford was there to interject their "America First"
philosophy. These had not paid for it; therefore they didn't own it. The
work stayed free. Thus it prospered. It did not wither in support of some
aberrated "cause." It bloomed.
But the violence of protecting this work while continuing it took a
toll nevertheless. Special interests believed it must be evil if they did
not own it. Between 1950 and 1956, 2,000,000 traceable dollars were spent
to halt this work. Newspaper articles, radio ads (as in Seattle from the
University of Washington), bribed "patrons," financed "patients" all cost
money. You hear the repercussions of this campaign even today.
Money could not stop this work by then. It was too late. If anything
had been wrong with our organizations, my character, our intentions or
abilities the whole advance would have crumbled. But we had no Achilles'
heels. We carried on. All that has survived of this attack by the two APAs,
the AMA and several universities is a clutter of rumors concerning your
sanity and mine-and rumors no longer financed will some day die.
And so the work has emerged free of taint and misguided slants. It is
itself. It does what it says it does. It contains no adroit curves to make
one open to better believing some "ism." That makes it singular today in a
world gone mad with nationalism. Buddhism, when it came to the millions,
was no longer free of slant and prejudice. Taoism itself became a national
jingoism far from any work of Lao-Tze. Even Christianity had its "pitch."
And if these great works became curved, with all the personal force of
their creators, how is it that our little triumph here can still be found
in a clear state?
Well, no diamonds and palaces have been accepted from rajahs, no
gratuitous printing of results has been the gift of warlords, no testament
had to be written 300 years after the fact.
For this we can thank Johann Gutenberg, and the invention of magnetic
tape.
Therefore, although we have no such stature as the Great Philosophies,
I charge you with this-look to source writings, not to interpretations.
Look to the original work, not offshoots.
If I have fought for a quarter of a century, most of it alone, to keep
this work from serving to uphold the enslavers of Man, to keep it free from
some destructive "pitch" or slant, then you certainly can carry that motif
a little further.
I'll not always be here on guard. The stars twinkle in the Milky Way
and the wind sighs for songs across the empty fields of a planet a Galaxy
away.
You won't always be here.
But before you go, whisper this to your sons and their sons-"The work
was free. Keep it so."
SUMMARY
STEP ONE: Establish participation in session of pc. Do not here or
anywhere else neglect this factor. Maintain always ARC. Pc must to some
degree be at cause with regard to session if only by wanting it or some
result of it, or to escape some elsewhere consequence. This step is CCH 0
but it is run only to establish the thetan to some degree at cause with
regard to the whole session. This must be improved throughout the
intensive. Applies even to dead pcs.
STEP TWO: Establish obedience of some part of the auditing room to the
pc. Here he must begin at some level of knowingness. He must KNOW that he
himself, when ordered to do so, can gain some compliance on the part of the
auditing room. This includes his own body. Thus we get "You seat that body
in that chair. Thank you." "You make that body continue to lie in that bed.
Thank you." We also get CCH 1. And we get a very important but neglected
process run with two objects wherein the pc himself is ordered to keep one
then the other from going away (alternately), hold it still, make it more
solid, all with two objects. Stress is on YOU do it.
STEP THREE: Establish control of pc's body by pc. Here we have CCH 2,
but we also have an even more important series of processes, S-C-S in all
their ramifications on the body. Here is pc at cause with regard to body.
It is expected that lots of S-C-S will be run on pcs.
STEP FOUR: Make pc even more conscious of auditor and place him
somewhat at cause with ARC. The mechanical steps of this are CCH 3 and CCH
4 but these steps are only valid if they heighten ARC and make the pc
decide HE did it.
STEP FIVE: Establish pc as cause over Mest by establishing pc's ideas as
cause over Mest. Here, running these, we again emphasize YOU DO IT. The
basic process of this is CONNECTEDNESS with the PC doing the connecting.
Control Trio, Trio, Look around here and tell me what part of the
environment you would be willing to be responsible for. You look, You
connect, You make ....... Alter the old commands to put pc at cause point
in doing these.
STEP SIX: Establish pc's control over Mest subjective. Creative
Processes, Recall Unwanted and Lost Objects. Then and Now Solids. First
step on this in some cases is conquering black ''field'' and invisible
"field." This is done by a repair of havingness over black masses and then
invisible masses, run even if pc goes unconscious. When field is cleared
up, start on a gradient scale of mock-ups and get pc able to mock things
up. Then run "Keep it from going away" until flat on mock-ups. Then run
"Hold it still" on mock-ups. Then run "Make it more solid" on mock-ups. All
this until pc really has fine, solid mock-ups. Typical command, "Mock up a
and keep it from going away. Thank you." RULE: A PC'S FACSIMILES ARE
NOT STORED, THEY ARE MADE IN THE INSTANT AND UNMADE BY THE PC, therefore
remedy of mock-ups AND THEIR PERSISTENCE is actually a direct route to
clear and winds up with no obsessive mock-up making (which we call a bank).
A valuable side process here: "Decide to make a mock-up. Decide that will
ruin the game. Decide not to do it." Also this one, "Decide to make a mock-
up everyone can see. Decide that would ruin the game. Decide not to do it."
A TOTAL REMEDY OF MOCK-UPS WOULD MAKE A BOOK ONE CLEAR.
STEP SEVEN: Establish pc's control over his "bank." "Mock up a
facsimile and (keep it from going away, and when that is flat, hold it
still, and when that is flat, make it a little more solid)." Run this
alternately with "Mock up that wall (keep it from going away, hold it
still, make it a little more solid)." Run the "Keep it from going away" on
a facsimile one command, then the wall one command, until flat, then shift
to "Hold it still" same way, then shift to "Make it more solid," same way.
STEP EIGHT: Make some Time.
AUDITING TRUTHS:
ARC breaks must all be repaired thoroughly. ARC Must Be Maintained.
There is no real liability to a pc in this universe except one:
becoming total subject of Mest.
Life versus Life, no liability. Life via Mest versus Life, some
liability. Life versus Mest, total liability.
A pc must be kept at Cause as much as possible.
An Intensive in Brief for Practical Use
Begin by carefully easing the pc into session with CCH 0 but don't talk
too much or permit him to talk too much as you will as-is his havingness.
Establish control of a room object with "You make that chair sit on the
floor."
Get wheeling with S-C-S and run it up to Stop-C-S.
Run Connectedness inside the auditing room and then outside with "You
make that connect with you." or "You look around here and tell me
something you could have." Or, "You look around here and tell me something
you could be responsible for."
Run an engram or do Then and Now Solids and put pc at cause with regard to
facsimiles.
If you have any time left, do it all over again.
DEFINITIONS, GOALS
There are three possible goals in processing a preclear. The first of
these is Mest Clear. The second is Theta Clear. The third is Operating
Thetan.
By Mest Clear is meant a BOOK ONE CLEAR. Here we defined clear in terms
of facsimiles. This is a rather simple mechanical definition. It said in
effect that so far as human beings were concerned our preclear finally
arrived at a point where he had full color-visio-sonic, had no psychoses or
neuroses and could recall what had happened to him in this lifetime. This
is almost a baby-talk sort of clear. It pays no heed at all to
identification with a body and it has nothing to do with ability. Today, by
running Creative Processes (four years old!) we can turn on visible
facsimiles and weed out the bottom spots of operations and what not. This
is actually a rather easy goal. Somehow I've never given a real tight
procedure for achieving it even though the essence of the processes has
been around for a very long time. COMPLETING STEP SIX OF CLEAR PROCEDURE IN
FULL GIVES US A MEST CLEAR.
By Theta Clear is meant a Clear obtained by Clear Procedure as is being
delineated in this regimen. The main trouble is, amusingly, trying to reach
Mest Clear without running into Theta Clear. I personally don't believe now
that it can be done without actually shoving the pc back in his head every
time he pops out. Thus the goal of this procedure is actually THETA CLEAR.
This is what we mean then when we say "clear." We mean a Theta Clear.
By Operating Thetan we mean Theta Clear PLUS ability to operate
functionally against or with Mest and other life forms. For the first time
we have here the matter of ABILITY. An Operating Thetan is not an absolute
term. Theta Clear is a more absolute term than Operating Thetan. An
Operating Thetan is a Theta Clear (not a mystical mystic out on an
inversion) who can also do something.
Thus we have two goals which contain no ambition to accomplish anything
and one goal which contains much ambition. Now here is another puzzle in
definitions. Which is highest, the Theta Clear or the Operating Thetan?
Well, the answer to that is not what we used to think. As DOINGNESS is not
really at the top we find that we will probably make an Operating Thetan
before we achieve Theta Clear for a Theta Clear would probably not be much
interested in operating. Therefore, we see the actual goal we are trying to
reach, no matter in which limited sense, is Operating Thetan.
Operating Thetan is then a highly variable goal. A thetan who can move
in and out of a body is actually operating somewhat but he is not really a
Theta Clear since a Theta Clear, in its highest sense, means no further
dependency upon bodies.
The goals of the auditor, therefore, do not rack up one, two, three,
Mest Clear, Theta Clear, Operating Thetan. They actually stack up on a very
gradient scale between thetan inoperative and a thetan who can operate. The
auditor is therefore seeking to reach with the pc a state wherein the pc
can function. At no time does the auditor suddenly arrive with a pc in a
startling new shiny state all of a sudden that can be called a certain
thing. In that pcs often expect this suddenly bursting "into the light" the
auditor is subject to disappointment when he has actually achieved an
enormous gain for the pc. In other words, pcs gain on a smooth gradient
scale and do not suddenly become something.
There is only one point on the road up where something does happen and that
is exteriorization. When the pc exteriorizes for the first time he feels
there must be a cause for rejoicing and has the idea he has gotten
somewhere. Well, in fact you could achieve the same result by hitting him
over the head with a club. He would exteriorize. The point is not
exteriorizing the pc but cutting down his dependency upon a body. A pc who
exteriorizes and is not carried right on with the same process that sprang
him out of his head until it is flat will go back into his head in an hour
or a week and will be harder to dig out the next time.
In other words, this point of exteriorization does happen and does mean
to the pc that he is himself. But it shouldn't mean very much to an auditor
beyond his noticing that this phase has been entered in the case. For in
truth thetans don't stay out of their bodies very long if they are not in
good shape. Thus exteriorization means less than ability to act, to live,
to be and do. The attention of the auditor should be upon the increasing
ability of the pc to handle life, not upon the distance the pc gets from
his body. Is that clear? Well, it tells us that arriving at a state of
Clear is easy if that means stable outside and that any state of betterment
on the road to Operating Thetan is an honest achievement.
Thus an auditor should at all times go toward the state of Operating
Thetan and should not be mixed up in the oddities of exteriorization for a
day.
HGC Clear Procedure goes straight toward exteriorization and achieves
it. But it also goes straight toward increasing ability to handle life. The
latter is the auditor's best goal. The auditing goal should go in the same
direction as this new definition for Operating Thetan.
An Operating Thetan can be at cause knowingly and at will over Life,
Matter, Energy, Space and Time, subjectively and objectively.
This Action Definition of Operating Thetan is the true goal of the
auditor and if followed with complete understanding will achieve the best
possible results.
In this discussion of goals and definitions, I am telling you cleanly
that the goals of Mest Clear and Theta Clear are not worth following from
the auditor's standpoint. You can let pcs think what they will about them.
The only goal worthy of the auditor's time WHATEVER THE STATE OF CASE OF
THE PC is Operating Thetan. To achieve one on any subject it is only
necessary to place the pc to some degree at willing and knowing cause point
with regard to that subject. All the steps of HGC Clear Procedure are
leveled at Operating Thetan. But you need not tell your pc that. You can
use the words RELEASE, MEST CLEAR, THETA CLEAR or any other if you like.
Just remember there is only one payoff goal and that is Operating Thetan.
MEST CLEAR: Can see facsimiles with sonic present lifetime, has no
psychoses or neuroses. Upper part of APA (in UK OCA) graph. Above 13 5 IQ.
THETA CLEAR: Can exist knowingly independent of bodies.
RELEASE: Average a third of a graph higher than first test, above 115
IQ.
OPERATING THETAN: Can be at Cause knowingly and at will over Life,
Matter, Energy, Space and Time, subjectively and objectively.
STEP ONE
Participation in Session by the Pc
We have long known that ARC was important. Just how important it is was
established by some tests I made in London in 1956 wherein every time the
pc showed
any restlessness or other signs of loss of havingness, instead of remedying
havingness I carefully searched out any fancied break of ARC and patched it
up. The "loss of havingness" vanished. In other words, loss of ARC is even
more important than loss of havingness since a repair of ARC restores
havingness. Lack of havingness is only one symptom of a lack of
communication.
There are two ways an auditor, according to long practice, can err. One
of these is to permit two-way communication to a point where the pc's
havingness is injured. The other is to chop communication to such a degree
that havingness is injured. There is a point past which communication is
bad and short of which lack of communication is bad. Here we have auditor
judgment at play. Because the pc will fidget or go downscale in tone when
his havingness drops, an auditor can SEE when the pc's havingness is being
lowered. Because a pc will go anaten or start to grind into the process an
auditor can tell whether or not the pc feels his communication has been
chopped. When either happens the auditor should take action-in the first
instance by shutting off the pc's outflow and getting to work and in the
second instance by making the pc talk out any fancied communication
severance.
Participation in session by the pc is not something the auditor sees to
at the beginning of the session and then forgets for the rest of the
intensive. This step is continued throughout the intensive and is given as
much attention as any process being run at the time. The auditor's
attention is always therefore upon two things-first the continued
participation in session and second the action of the process.
Grouped under this head we would also have ways and means of getting
the pc into session in the first place. An unconscious pc used to be an
apparent roadblock. A downtone, antagonistic, you-can't-help-me pc was also
a rough one. These two things are countered by always carefully starting a
session and following through on standard CCH 0.
It is as important to open a session with a baby or an unconscious
person as it is with any other preclear. It doesn't matter whether the pc
is answering up or not. It is only necessary to assume that the pc would
answer if he could answer and that the mechanics of voice and gesture are
simply absent from the answer. Therefore one always carefully starts every
session, paying attention to what is happening, where it is happening, who
is there, help, goals and problems. Obviously anaten or inability to
control the body are the present time problem of the unconscious person or
the child. One can actually audit this with a plain question and simply
assume after a bit it has been answered, then give the acknowledgment and
ask another question just as though the pc were in full vocal action.
Auditors still fall for the belief, very current, that "unconscious" people
are unable to think or be aware in any way. A thetan is seldom unconscious
regardless of what the body is doing or not doing.
PRESENT TIME PROBLEM is a highly vital point of PRECLEAR PARTICIPATION.
If a preclear is being nagged too thoroughly by a PT problem auditing can
actually send him downhill if done without addressing the problem. A whole
intensive, even seventy-five hours can be wasted if the auditor does not
clear the PT PROBLEM.
The preclear generally doesn't know he has one which is nagging him,
for the rough PT problems go into the apathy band and below into
forgetfulness rather rapidly. Therefore the auditor should ferret out the
PT problem with an E-Meter. Adroit use of an E-Meter does not include
evaluating for the preclear but it certainly does include ferreting out PT
problems. The E-Meter is also used for valences and sometimes
psychophysical difficulties. (Auditor: Use the word "psychophysical" rather
than psychosomatic and stay out of a medical field.)
THE RUNNING OF A PT PROBLEM today is the most. PT problem, valences,
psychophysical ailments, all run beautifully with "Mock up something worse
than
(terminal)" or "Invent something worse than (terminal)." To run this it is
necessary to isolate the TERMINAL most intimately connected with the PT
problem (or the valence or psychophysical difficulty). One then CLEARS THE
COMMAND (and you always better do that with any command) and lets go.
The whole idea of WORSE THAN is the whole of the dwindling spiral.
People who are "trying to get better" and "be more perfect" and "think the
right thought" lose all control of "getting worse," "being imperfect" and
"thinking the wrong thought." All these WORSE THANS are then left on
automatic and we arrive at something less than optimum. In fact we arrive
with the dwindling spiral. We also arrive with the "point of no return." We
also arrive with the declining ability to heal or get well. And we also
arrive with old age.
After running "worse than" on the PT problem, we proceed with other
parts of CCH 0. Clearing help will be found quite beneficial. But to get a
pc to participate who is downright ugly about it, running help is usually
only a partial solution. When these only ones get going they really snarl
on the subject of getting audited. Here CCH 1 is of benefit. No questions
asked. But this, of course, defeats the purpose of STEP ONE.
PARTICIPATION OF THE PC in the session is necessary in order to place
the pc somewhat at the cause point in the actual fact of auditing. This
fits the definition. You can always change a body or recover it from some
illness by auditing without much helping the pc himself. Therefore, the pc,
while under auditor control, is still somewhat at cause, what with comm
bridges and clearing commands, etc., but he is made to feel no bad effects
from being AT EFFECT if ample ARC is used. In other words, the pc can't be
entirely at cause in a session or he would be self-auditing, which isn't
good, but he can be salvaged from being a total effect by good ARC. When
the ARC drops out that DOES leave the pc at more or less total effect, a
thing you have probably noticed.
The things to be done in CCH 0 should be done thoroughly at intensive's
beginning and should be glanced at whenever a new session starts and should
get a bow when a new command is used. But all CCH 0 is is a collection of
mechanical aids to assist the pc's participation in the session and to
assist the auditor in ARC. Although CCH 0 must be used always, it is not a
total substitute for ARC.
The sum of CCH 0 is find the auditor, find the auditing room, find the
pc, knock out any existing PT problem, establish goals, clear help, get
agreement on session length and get up to the first real auditing command.
CCH 0 isn't necessarily run in that order and this isn't necessarily all of
CCH 0, but if any of these are seriously scamped, the session will
somewhere get into trouble.
When the participation of the pc ceases in a session, he must be gotten
back into session by any means and then participation is re-established. A
pc is never permitted to end a session on his own choice. He seeks to end
them when his participation drops out of sight.
The trick question "What did I do wrong?" re-establishes ARC.
The problem of handling a pc who is not cooperative, who does not wish
to participate, is a highly special problem. In the first place it is the
pc's engrams that do not want to continue, in the second place it is the
engrams which are doing the talking. One ordinarily tackles this case with
a formal opening of session, brief but positive, and then sails in with CCH
0, just as though the person were unconscious, which, of course, the person
is.
Participation by an unconscious person, while covered above, requires
the additional refinement of technique. ONE MUST ALWAYS FIND SOMETHING THE
PRECLEAR CAN DO AND THEN BETTER THAT ABILITY. An unconscious person is
usually lying in bed. If not the command must be varied to fit the
environment. But the best command is something like "You make that body lie
in that bed." A slightly upper grade process to a person sitting in a chair
is "You seat that body in that chair." In such cases a grip on the pc's
hand and the use of a slight squeeze each time the auditor acknowledges
considerably speeds the process.
There is another special case-or maybe it isn't so special. There are
many people who cannot tackle a present time problem with a process. If the
auditor sought out a PT problem and then ran "something worse than a
related terminal" or a "problem of comparable or incomparable magnitude" he
would find the pc digging in hard, unable to handle the process. Thus some
judgment must be used in such cases. Don't run a PT problem on somebody in
very bad shape casewise.
There is an awful lot to know about starting sessions. The bad-off case
and the case in very good condition alike require special handling. For the
case just mentioned who cannot handle a PT problem with a process, there is
always locational (TR TEN). TR TEN will run a PT problem or anything else
if slowly. Thus many a person with a PT problem can only participate in a
session to the extent of TR TEN, "YOU notice that object (wall, floor,
chair, etc.)." By introducing in the auditor's and pc's bodies as a couple
of the items being spotted along with everything else we eventually wind up
with "find the auditor, find the auditing room, find the pc." And we get
there without a PT problem being in full bloom.
In running "You notice that object" there are some things that MUST be
observed. Most important of these is this one: ANY PROCESS WHICH TURNS ON A
SOMATIC MUST BE CONTINUED UNTIL IT NO LONGER TURNS ON SOMATICS. This is
true particularly of TR TEN, 8-C and TRIO. The case hangs right there until
the process is flat, whether in one day, one year or six. Another thing
which must be stressed is the inclusion of the auditor's and pc's bodies.
Because some pcs WHEN EXTERIORIZED snap back in when they see the body is
no reason to avoid it in TR TEN. Another thing is to make the pc use his
eyes to view the objects and if he doesn't turn his eyes toward them, then
it is up to the auditor to use manual direction of the head and even pry
the eyes open. No balks are ever permitted in auditing. If TR TEN is being
run at a problem, every now and then the auditor pauses and discusses the
problem again with the pc in order to keep it in restimulation until TR TEN
can run it out.
The high case is a worse problem than auditors commonly believe. In the
first place a high case can "blow" a situation out of the bank with
considerable ease and if the auditor insists on sledge-hammering it out
with a process, then pc participation blows rather than a facsimile.
High case participation can also be misunderstood in that there are a
lot of cases that think they are high which aren't. Here's how you tell a
real high case from a bogus ("I can do everything") case. A thetan in good
shape can be cause. When he looks at something in the bank it becomes the
effect. A bogus high case can think anything he wants without anything
having an effect on the bank. You want to watch this point because here is
the definition of OT thoroughly at work. Pc at Cause. A case that has
pictures and everything and is impatient to get on with it BUT DOES NOT
MARKEDLY ALTER THE BANK WITH THINKING ALONE is not a high case but an old
"wide open case" of Dianetic days.
Two-way communication AS A PROCESS is the key to all this. If you put a
pc on an E-Meter and locate a present time charge, you can, if the pc can
somewhat handle his bank, get him to two-way comm the incident flat very
quickly-in five or ten minutes at the most. This is all the process used.
It would take an actual E-Meter run to give you a full reality on this.
Here we are looking at the basic differences amongst cases. That difference
lies in the ability to knowingly CAUSE. Bodies are the same, they all react
alike. Banks differ only vaguely and only in content and significance.
Engrams are engrams and they all behave alike. There is only ONE DIFFERENCE
amongst pcs. We called this BASIC PERSONALITY in BOOK ONE. We can be a lot
more simple about it now that I have my teeth into the subject a few more
feet. The difference is DEGREE OF KNOWING CAUSABILITY. What do we mean by
CAUSE? The basic, old Scientology definition is still at work. CAUSE-
DISTANCE-EFFECT. Joe knowingly shoots Bill. Joe is at Cause. Bill is at
Effect. Mary gives John a present. Mary is at Cause, John is at Effect.
Bill says Boo to Joe. Bill is at Cause, Joe is at Effect. But when we
introduce KNOWING CAUSE and CAUSE AT WILL into this CAUSE-DISTANCE-EFFECT
idea we see we have something else added. The person at Cause is there
because he knows he is there and because he is willingly there. The person
at Cause is not at Cause because he does not dare be at Effect. He must be
able to be at Effect. If he is afraid to be at Effect, then he is Unwilling
Cause and is at Cause only because he is very afraid of being at Effect.
Education can show a person he can be at effect without liability. Then he
can be at Cause without HAVING TO BE BECAUSE HE DOESN'T DARE BE AT EFFECT.
Auditing in its whole operation is teaching the pc this. Pc slides from
terrified effect to tolerated effect to knowing cause with regard to any
incident he contacts IF HE IS AUDITED PROPERLY. The pc who has to get rid
of all his engrams because he has to get rid of them because it's all too
horrible winds up, with good auditing, into a tolerance of the pictures
since he has learned he can tolerate them and so can swing around to Cause.
So we have this great difference in pcs. DEGREE OF KNOWING CAUSABILITY
is the extent that he is willing to be at Cause and the extent he is
willing to know he is at Cause plus the ability to cause things.
You will see this on an E-Meter in PT problem handling. Bill has a PT
problem. It drops a dial when first contacted. The auditor, using his
UNDERSTANDING of Scientology, two-way comms on it. The incident discharges
and no longer registers after a few minutes. Mary has a PT problem. It
drops steeply on the E-Meter. The auditor tries to two-way comm on it. The
charge remains the same or Mary begins to disperse. She doesn't hold to the
subject. The auditor at length finds that two-way comm only serves to run
down her havingness. The charge remains on the meter dial. What is the
difference between Bill and Mary? Bill can be at knowing cause, Mary is
either obsessive cause or heavy effect. Bill can blow facsimiles. Mary
cannot. On Mary the auditor is very wise to enter upon TR TEN.
One version of TR TEN is called Short Spotting. "You notice that
(nearby object)." So long as the pc can see with his eyes the object or
feel the auditor's hand on it, the process works. It is spotting right up
close. If run with mediumly near and far objects (such as the room wall) it
is very effective in getting a case going. It has given some cases their
first reality on auditing. BUT the rule still holds here about somatics.
When a somatic is turned on with a process, turn it off with that process.
See Auditor's Code 13. This is entirely true of Short Spotting. In that it
almost always turns on somatics, when you start it, you have to flatten it
and that's often lengthy.
Remember this about pc participation. A low case can't handle the bank,
therefore you keep high ARC and kid-glove him through a session. A very
high case doesn't need dynamite, therefore you retain his participation by
going as rapidly as you can. A medium, average case needs ARC, something of
dynamite, something of kid gloves, something of two-way comm.
And IN ALL GOOD AUDITING, CASES IMPROVE. Just because you start a pc
low doesn't mean he'll always stay low. Check the case often. See if his
CAUSABILITY is
rising. If it isn't, he isn't improving and you better go easier or
heavier. PROBABLY when a case doesn't improve you didn't handle a PT
problem. THAT IS THE ONLY THING WHICH CAN KEEP A CASE FROM GAINING. So
check every session for one.
There are probably thousands of ways to gain the participation of the
pc, there are probably thousands of ways to open a session. There are
probably an infinite number of tricky things you can do. However, this
breadth of choice should not obscure the following:
1. A pc who is not participating in the session is not at Cause.
2. An auditor who isn't able to maintain ARC, who isn't able to
"freeze" a process for a short time, even a Tone 40.0 process, and re-
establish ARC, will not get results.
3. The end-all of processing is the attainment of a goal, the goal
of OT. One always processes the problems and difficulties of the pc, he
does not process the process. Processes only assist in processing the pc.
They will not do anything by themselves. Processes are a road map to the
goal of OT, they are nothing in themselves. The target is the condition,
the disabilities of the pc. How one achieves the eradication of these
difficulties is secondary to the fact of their eradication. Scientology is
a route attained after several thousand years of no attainment by Man and
the route is important and valuable and must be traveled correctly, but the
concern is the pc, not the route.
4. A new auditor can be adrift with his tools. He is uncertain as
to what he is attacking. He should have reality on engrams, locks, key-ins,
secondaries, the time track, the key buttons of Scientology such as
Communication, Control and Havingness. Given an understanding of all these
and the theory of Scientology itself he can almost pilot his way through a
case with two-way comm. But two-way comm will not work if one doesn't
understand all the above. So two-way comm is not conversation. The pc has
had a few trillion years of that and it hasn't made him well, so two-way
comm is a highly specialized thing, done with full understanding of the
thetan, bank and body. Good two-way comm means participation by the pc.
5. Scientology is a precise commodity, something like engineering.
A pc is a precise thing, part animal, part pictures and part God. We want
the ability to handle things and the God, and the less unthinking responses
in the pc the better off he will be. Therefore a PC WHO ISN'T COGNITING
regularly is being processed beyond his ability to do and it is necessary
to drop back downscale to find something he CAN DO.
6. The golden rule of processing is to find something the preclear
CAN do and then to improve his ability to do it. At once you will have
participation. The highest ability one pc had was to get drunk: a
resolution of his case was entered upon by having him invent ways to get
drunk.
7. The attention span of children and psychos is not necessarily a
factor since it is only the phenomena of dispersal against mental blocks,
keying in of incidents. The auditor can pay attention to it or not as he
likes. Short, regular sessions on people with limited attention span get
more gain per week than a steady grind since the participation is
maintained.
8. The auditor remains at Cause in all sessions without forbidding
the pc to be at Cause. See the rules in Dianetics: The Original Thesis.
STEP TWO
Placing the Preclear at Cause
Establish obedience of some part of the auditing room to the pc. Here
he must begin at some level of knowingness. He must know that he himself,
when ordered to do so, can gain some compliance on the part of the auditing
room. This includes his own body.
The basic rule of auditing is to start with something the preclear can
do and then get him to do it better. This is the basic difference between a
high level and a low level process. This is also the difference between a
process which is real to the preclear and a process which is unreal to the
preclear. A preclear "can do" a process without doing it at all. Actually
the body and bank are obeying the auditor. Now here we had in Dianetics one
of the more interesting phenomena of an auditor being able to make a
preclear physically well without the preclear once finding out about it.
This was a source of great grief and upset to auditors. They could not see
how this could possibly be. The man priorly could not walk, apparently, and
after auditing he could walk, and yet he did not attribute to Dianetics or
to the auditor any of this renewed ability.
The auditor could monitor the preclear's bank and body, shift around
the engrams, as-is them and do various things with them without the
preclear finding out about it. All of this was so far above the preclear's
ability to do that it was totally unreal to him.
We also get the phenomenon of an individual doing a great many spotting
processes and feeling better but not being able to understand what this has
to do with sanity or insanity. In the first place, the individual could not
himself spot. The auditor more or less did the spotting for him. The
preclear then never connected it in any way with his own capabilities.
A test an auditor should make to ascertain the sense of this is as
follows: "Look around here and tell me something you could do." The
preclear will get many odd and peculiar sensations as he fishes around and
finally decides that he could do some minor thing. This is not really a
good process but it is a good test process for an auditor. This preclear
who has been walking and talking and working and going around the world and
apparently behaving in a fairly sane and rational fashion actually could do
none of these things. He was supported entirely by his "machinery," by the
social responsibilities which were demonstrated toward him, by his
education, by the basic agreement of what goes on in the world. He was
walking around in a dream and life felt to him much like a dream. Now the
auditor starts to audit him on the basis that this individual is capable.
Well now the individual himself is the thetan and whereas the bank might
have been capable (and would have broken down some day), the thetan himself
was not. He was going along for the ride.
We often see this phenomenon in the third dynamic. It could be said
that a government is the aggregate irresponsibility of a people. They are
not taking responsibility for the course of justice or protection of the
state from foreign aggression, and they shove all this responsibility over
on to a government and they themselves are quite irresponsible for it.
After a while the government doesn't look to the people at all to furnish
any responsibility. The government takes all the initiative, and we
eventually wind up with some sort of a dictatorship. The people then no
longer count; they are slaves; they are totally irresponsible.
In a similar wise, a thetan can be totally irresponsible for everything
that goes on in relationship to his workaday world, and we see people
dramatizing this on every hand. Wherever a thetan refuses to take
responsibility and is participating in action, he is being "unreal." This
is the unreality of a situation. Let us say you were part of a
crowd which was surging downtown to Third Street and you yourself wanted to
go uptown to Tenth Street. The crowd swept you along toward Third Street
and after a while things would become pretty unreal. That is because you
were being carried in a direction opposite to your basic intent. Thus your
own intention is overwhelmed. This intention overwhelmed becomes what we
know as unreality.
It is very easy for an auditor to overwhelm the preclear's intention.
The preclear is actually going to Tenth Street, the auditor is trying to
push him to Third Street. We get the most remarkable subdivision of this in
Survive and Succumb. The auditor is going on the basis that the preclear
wants to Survive and the preclear is going on the basis that he wants to
Succumb. The auditor is then thrusting him in an opposite direction. Hence
it is really necessary to clear Goals in an auditing session. There must be
some goal which the preclear considers obtainable. The goal of just being
able to sit there for the next two or three hours is a goal. You would be
surprised to find that in some preclears this is a tremendously high goal.
But even a preclear's goals can be unreal to him. They are the social
goals. Actually, the preclear privately thinks he'd like to get rid of
every man, woman and child on Earth and the goal he gives you is to save
everyone.
Now the question actually confronts us-what can the preclear really do?
Of course, in a case of tremendous doubt, you could run the above process-
"Look around here and find something you could do." But there are certain
things that an auditor can take for granted which undercut any other thing.
The body is sitting in the chair. The preclear can be brought up to a
realization that he can make the body sit in the chair. And thus we get the
first really worthwhile process on a preclear who is conscious, and that
process is "You seat that body in that chair. Thank you." And in the case
of somebody who is Lying in bed, even unconscious, we get this basic
process: "You make that body continue to lie in that bed. Thank you."
All we are asking anybody to do when we ask for these two processes is
to take responsibility for what is actually occurring in the first place.
We raise his responsibility level in other words, and thus raise his
doingness level. A preclear who does not come through eventually with a
cognition that he can make the body sit in the chair of course isn't worth
bothering with, in that his doingness level is even below this. This
preclear ought to be lying in a bed. He must consider himself completely
helpless and completely ill. Thus if we ran "You seat that body in that
chair. Thank you," for several hours without any realization on the part of
the preclear that he could do this and without turning on any somatics or
without getting any effect at all, we would consider that we had overshot
this. Actually it shouldn't take several hours to find this out. We would
go back to the basic position of Dianetic auditing. This preclear probably
thinks of himself as being dead or probably thinks of himself as being very
ill or thinks of himself as being totally unconscious. Thus we would run
him as an unconscious person. Putting him down on a couch we would run "You
make that body continue to lie in that bed. Thank you."
Also, on a much higher level we get CCH 1.
"You give me that hand" is actually the old cat process where we got
the cat to reach for the auditor, plus an obedience process. The preclear
after a while should decide that he can do this. Sometimes we run CCH 1,
then CCH 2, CCH 3, and then CCH 4 and going back discover that CCH 1 is now
unflat and the preclear is unable to perform this action which he
previously could perform. Now what has happened here is we have broadened
the scope of the preclear's responsibility. His bank at first was perfectly
capable of giving that hand but once we have invited further responsibility
and gotten him to find the auditor as in CCH 3 and CCH 4, we discover that
the preclear himself is now trying to do it and in trying to do it is
having difficulties but he wins through with this difficulty and eventually
comes out much better.
Unless these particular goals and theories behind these processes are
understood they very often do not work at all in the CCH bands. Thus CCH 1
to 4, while tremendously successful when run by a very excellent auditor
understanding his job, may not be successful in the hands of somebody who
is simply going through some mechanical motions.
Basically we are trying to get the preclear to do something and know
that he himself can do it. Thus we are improving his ability. On this
fundamental we can go forward and establish many processes, all of which
are fundamental doingness or obedience processes. We can do such a process
as "You make that chair sit on the floor." This process at first seems a
little incredible to the preclear, but after a while he gets the idea that
he can do it, then this unflattens and he gets the idea that it's gravity
that's doing it and therefore he can't do it, and he goes through various
cognitions of one sort or another simply about having a chair, which is
already sitting there, sit there. Unless we can cross this particular stage
of a case and get the preclear up to an idea that he does have some sort of
an ability of some kind, we might as well do nothing else about the case at
all. Therefore this Step Two is quite important and actually is the basic
entrance into auditing.
STEP THREE
Establish Control of Pc's Body by Pc
Although we could continue onward with the CCHs simply rotating them
from CCH 1 through to 4 and back to 1 and to 4, and back to 1 and to 4
again and again and again and win, there is a faster way of going about
this which has been known to us for a very long time. This way starts
really with 8-C.
It does not matter particularly which brand of 8-C is run. We have had
now three or four varieties of 8-C. The first one was rather permissive and
indirect and did not demand very much compliance and possibly had its own
place in the firmament since use of it has resolved a very, very great many
cases. The first command of this is "Do you see that wall?" Then "Walk over
to it." Then "Touch it." And that was all there was to the process. Later 8-
Cs, particularly Tone 40 8-Cs, were highly precise, very directive and had
a great deal of control stress to them. It does not matter particularly
which 8-C is used so long as the auditor feels that it is biting. If the
particular 8-C he is using isn't biting, maybe he needs a more permissive
one, maybe he needs a more exacting control one.
There are a great many factors surrounding the control of the pc's body
by a pc. Most pcs feel their body if tampered with in any way would fly out
of control and flip-flop all over the floor, would suddenly freeze or would
get ill, and they have anxieties about their bodies and the control of
their bodies which must be solved, otherwise we don't get very far. Control
of bodies can actually be assisted by old-time flip-flopping.
Flip-flopping was a process by which the preclear's excess motion was
taken off. The creative processes of earlier times did not require of the
preclear any great cognition of what was going on. Thus flip-flopping could
be used at a very early stage of case. We would say, "Mock up a man and
make him flip-flop" and then make him insist that the body flip-flop even
further and even more wildly until he himself knew that he was making the
body flip-flop. We would do this with a woman's body and would eventually
take the motion off the case that was inhibiting the preclear from
controlling the body. This is actually a motionectomy. It is really a case
of the auditor controlling the bank and body of the preclear. When we did
not do this we found that in running 8-C and in doing some other processes
the preclear all of a sudden would convulse and start to fly apart. These
fly-aparts were simply the flip-flop manifestation of bodies.
It is extremely interesting that a preclear exteriorizing from his own body
which is out of control, flip-flopping, writhing, convulsing and going into
epileptiform seizures was at a distance from a flip-flopping body. One day
while in his own body he causes some other body to go out of control, he
shoots somebody or hits somebody, and has this person go into a flip-flop.
He himself gets restimulated and he feels that his body in the future is
liable to go out of control at any time. If you draw a little picture of
this you will see that a thetan exteriorized from his own body and a thetan
in his body knocking about some other body is, to the thetan, the same
point of view. In other words, if you make somebody's body flip-flop, your
own body may flip-flop. It looks the same to a thetan.
Some guarantee or security of body control is therefore necessary.
There is a very fine set of processes which have been used for more
than a year at this writing and which produced excellent results. These we
call the S-C-S processes.
After running 8-C (and if it turned on somatics remember to flatten the
process entirely, even though it takes 50 hours, before going on to another
process), we go into these control processes grouped under S-C-S. There
have been several varieties of process, all entirely in the control bracket
but with different severities of control. The commands of S-C-S processes
are almost all the same except that some are made more severe than others.
The first of these processes is the Start process. This is very simple.
We have a preclear out in the middle of the room standing up while we stand
up alongside of him touching him, and we explain to him (and we explain
this every command) that when we say "Start" we want him to start his body
in that direction, and we point out some direction.
Then we take our hands off of him and we say "Start." We do not say
Stop, Halt, or anything else, but after he has moved forward we then say,
"Did you start your body?" And he says he guesses he did or he did, and we
then-and only then- acknowledge. We do this many times until the process
apparently has no charge on it or is flat. We then go into the next of this
series, which is Change.
To run Change the auditor marks four points out on the floor. These
points can be imaginary or they can be actually chalk-marked on the floor.
One of these points we label "A," one "B," one "C," and one "D." We explain
the meanings of these symbols to the preclear and we give him this auditing
command: "Now when I ask you to change the body, I want you to change the
body's position from A to B. Do you understand that?" The preclear says he
does, and the auditor, stepping back from the preclear, says "Change." The
preclear then changes the body's position. Similarly in using the various
points and combinations of the points A, B, C and D, the auditor drills the
preclear on Change until that particular process seems to be flat.
The auditor then goes to Stop. The auditor takes the preclear by the
arm and explains (explains every time) that when he says "Stop," he wants
the preclear to stop the body. The actual wording of the auditor is "Now I
want you to get the body moving in that direction and when I say Stop, I
want you to stop the body. Do you understand?" When the preclear says that
he does, the auditor lets go of him, lets him move down the room a distance
(never the same distance twice) and says "Stop." When the preclear has
stopped the auditor says "Did you stop the body?" And the preclear says
"yes," or "maybe" and the auditor then acknowledges. The auditor does this
many times until the preclear understands that he himself can stop the body
or he has regained an ability, or the process appears to be flat and has no
charge on it.
These three steps done in that order are then repeated. And it will be
discovered that once Stop has been flattened, Start is now unflattened and
can be flattened all
over again by running it anew. Similarly, Change will be found to be unflat
and again Stop will be found to be unflat. Thus, one runs Start and one
runs Change and then one runs Stop, in that order, over and over and over
again until all three appear to be flat.
A variation of this particular process has been called Stop Supreme.
Stop Supreme is a heavy emphasis on Stop and it will be found that after
the three processes of Start, Change and Stop are flat, one can move rather
easily into Stop Supreme and concentrate heavily upon it. In other words,
one runs Start, Change and Stop, Start, Change and Stop, Start, Change and
Stop until they are relatively flat. He should not then suppose that the
whole of S-C-S is flat since he still has Stop Supreme in all of its
variations.
The idea behind Stop Supreme is that Stop, or motionlessness, is
probably the most thetan ability a thetan has. Thus the rehabilitation of
this particular ability is worth while and does produce considerable
results. But don't be surprised if the preclear falls apart in the process
of doing it.
The commands of Stop Supreme are roughly these. Every time one runs one
of these S-C-S processes he, of course, explains the thing in full at the
beginning of every command. He does not let any explanation hang over from
the last time the command was executed. It will be found that the preclear
cannot hold in his mind these explanations. Therefore, it has to be all
explained anew every time. Thus we say to the preclear in Stop Supreme,
"Now I want you to get your body moving down the room when I so indicate
and when I say Stop, I want you to stop your body absolutely still." Then
the auditor gives the preclear a slight shove and the preclear moves the
body down the room, and the auditor says "Stop," and the preclear tries to
stop his body absolutely still in that instant. It will be found that
faster and faster responses are achieved by the preclear and he can
actually stop the body in more and more peculiar positions. The auditor
then says, "Did you stop your body absolutely still?" The preclear answers
this and then the auditor acknowledges. There are even more severe versions
of this, but they are left to the imagination of the auditor.
These S-C-S processes produced the greatest control changes that have
been produced with any control process. They were consistently used with
great success by a great many auditors. This is not really true of CCH 1,
2, 3 and 4. CCH 1, 2, 3 and 4 depend in a very large measure not only upon
the excellence of the auditor but upon how the auditor himself is feeling
while he is running them. And we can get an auditor who is not feeling up
to par that day not doing well with CCH 1, 2, 3 and 4. This difficulty was
never encountered with the S-C-S processes and therefore the S-C-S
processes are to be recommended.
An apparent drop of havingness is occasionally experienced by the
preclear as he does these processes. This is because of compulsive
exteriorization. If a preclear is about to fly out of his head he'll fly
out of his head on S-C-S. If he does fly out of his head on S-C-S, or any
other process, you, of course, continue the process. You do not suddenly
change and do some other process. Once upon a time we felt at liberty to
change because of the severity of the change, but we have learned in long
experience that one never changes the process just because somebody
compulsively exteriorizes. S-C-S is probably more susceptible to compulsive
exteriorization than any other single process, and as it is run preclears
fly into their heads and out of them at a great rate and eventually get to
a state quite ordinarily where they can move into the head or out of the
head at will.
The reason the preclear is holding on to the body is ( 1 ) fear of loss
of control and (2) havingness. If the havingness of the preclear is low, he
is apt to close in tight to the body because this gives him more havingness
and if the preclear fears that the body is
going to go out of control he will also move in closer to the body. Thus we
get interiorization as no more complicated than fear of loss of control and
drops in havingness.
When a loss of havingness is experienced, a preclear will agitate or go
anaten and tend to be upset in general. Actually, any loss of havingness in
an auditing session can be repaired by an excellent auditor by repair of
the ARC of the session. One uses the trick "What did I do wrong?" and two-
way comm in general to patch up state of affairs. Loss of havingness is
first manifested on loss of havingness of the session or loss of goals
rather than on actual loss of mass.
In running S-C-S, however, the preclear flying in and out of his head
will experience various changes of havingness which are quite upsetting.
The very best handling of this situation is to restore the ARC of the
session in every way possible. It is actually not allowed to stop S-C-S and
go into Trio.
Concentration upon the body is one of the frailties of S-C-S and we
have long since discovered that those preclears who had difficulty in
exteriorization would very often re-interiorize the moment they glanced at
the body. Well, keeping a body there and looking at it are apparently two
different things entirely. Thus if a preclear can't put his attention upon
the body without bad things happening, we should run a process which
prevents the preclear from being upset simply because he is concentrating
upon his body, and S-C-S certainly does this and does it well.
Don't be surprised in running S-C-S if the preclear suddenly flies to
pieces, goes into flip-flopping, has to be picked up off the floor and put
over on the couch and left aghast, but do be very surprised at yourself if
you fail to get the preclear back up on his feet and into session again at
once. This is no time for you to be changing processes simply because a
preclear collapses. Now if this did happen, that the preclear went entirely
out of session while running S-C-S and you could not get him in any way to
do any more of the S-C-S and get it flat, then you had better start the
entire intensive all over again and go right back to the beginning and
carry on from the beginning and bring him right straight on through to S-C-
S. You would do this rapidly, of course, but you would nevertheless have no
other choice. It would not be good enough to change processes simply
because the preclear found himself incapable of running this body control
process of S-C-S.
It has been noticed that S-C-S can be run very sloppily by some
auditors who do not have very much experience with it. The only way to err
is in the direction of imprecision and bad ARC. It is perfectly easy to be
very precise with high ARC. ARC does not mean non-confronting.
One of the elementary processes which can be used after S-C-S and which
is a very fine process and will have to be done at some time, is the Keep
it from going away- Hold it still-Make it more solid series on two objects.
To do this particular process one takes two disrelated objects, that is
to say he doesn't take two ashtrays or two bottles. He could take one
object made out of wood, one made out of glass, both of them with different
purposes. But these are usually picked up as non-significant objects and
the auditor asks the preclear to place the two of them to the right and to
the left of the preclear and asks the preclear to pick up one of them and
keep it from going away and put it back in exactly the same place, pick up
the other one and keep it from going away, put it back in exactly the same
place, and keeps up this drill between these two objects. Actually,
preclears who are having a very hard time require more than two objects,
even as many as six or seven. In this event the auditor places the preclear
at a table and scatters several objects around and picks them up at random.
The duplicative feature of the process can be toughened up as the
process is continued, but on some preclears it will be found to be very
arduous to start out basically with two. When the preclear can successfully
keep the two objects from going away, knowing very well that he kept them
from going away-which the auditor asks him every time, "Did you keep it
from going away?"-the hold-it-still phase is run in exactly the same way,
and when this seems to be flat on the two objects we get into "Make it more
solid." One of the principal dividing lines between a psychotic state and a
sane state is the ability to make things solid. It will be found that
people who are having a very bad time indeed have the whole world in a very
thin look-straight through-it state. Only when they themselves can be at
Cause in keeping things from going away and making things hold still and
making things more solid will it be found that they have a solidity in the
environment.
There would be another process which we could run at this particular
stage and that is old-time Book and Bottle, which is also one of the
deadlier exteriorization processes.
Old-time Book and Bottle was run in this wise. The auditor placed a
book on one table or chair and a bottle on the other table or chair and he
directed the individual to first one and then the other, always with a very
duplicative command. Probably the first version of Book and Bottle was the
best. It should be understood that Book and Bottle is an absolute necessity
and must be run at some time or another upon a Scientology auditor, but it
is not necessarily something which must be run on somebody who is simply
trying to attain a state of Clear. Thus a mention of it is introduced at
this time.
STEP FOUR
Find the Auditor
Make pc even more conscious of auditor and place him somewhat at Cause
with ARC.
There are probably a thousand inventive ways that this could be done
but it is time when one has been butchering the pc this long for the pc to
regain some of his self-respect with regard to the auditing session. One
could do this with almost any auditing command which made the pc look at
the auditor. Such a question as "Is there anything I am doing that you
could do?" carried forward to its logical conclusion would find the pc
regaining some of his Cause with regard to the session. Simple locational
spotting, however, is probably the best process here. One directs the pc's
attention with "You notice that (object)" all about the room and at first
only occasionally includes the pc's body and the auditor's body in the
spotting. Then the auditor, using the same process, concentrates less and
less upon the room and more and more upon the auditor and the pc. It will
be found that the pc will eventually find the auditor with his attention so
directed.
It will be seen then that S-C-S directed the pc's attention very
strongly to the auditing of his own body and it will be seen that we have
not yet started to get the pc's attention out into the environment.
But here we have two very pat processes which are CCH 3 and CCH 4.
These are extremely simple processes but require a considerable amount of
care in their use. Any validated auditor knows how to run these two
processes. CCH 3 is Hand Space Mimicry and CCH 4 is Book Mimicry. Both of
these processes simply invite the pc to find the auditor more thoroughly.
The earliest process along the line was "Look at me, Who am I?", and it
has very far from been disallowed, so that in lack of anything else simply
this process could be picked up and used at this stage. Now here we get the
preclear to identify or to say
who the auditor is and you will find that many preclears go through a
considerable number of convulsions in trying to establish who the auditor
is.
There is no particularly recommended step for this. It depends in a
large measure on what state the pc is in when he arrives at this point. But
it is necessary for the pc to become somewhat causative with regard to the
session at this stage, whether by spotting, CCH 3 and CCH 4, or by old-time
"Look at me, Who am I?" They all more or less accomplish the same thing.
CCH 3 and 4 accomplish the location of the auditor very mechanically
according to the Reality Scale. Spotting has the additional advantage of
taking a pc's attention very thoroughly under control, and "Look at me, Who
am I?" invites the pc to use his identification and thinking capacities. If
an auditor wanted to be totally sure, he would use all of them.
STEP FIVE
Pc Versus Mest
Establish pc as cause over Mest by establishing pc's ideas as cause
over Mest.
There are several varieties of spotting processes. The most basic of
these is the most basic process to association and this is Connectedness.
This process is run directively with the following command: "You get the
idea of making that (object) connect with you. Did you? Thank you."
The reason Connectedness works is because it is the basic process on
association. The most aberrative thing on any case is association with
Mest. This does not mean that the individual is not creating the Mest, it
does not mean that he has no relationship with Mest, but it does mean that
Theta and Mest interconnected too strongly are the components of a trap.
Theta is mixed up with Mest, Mest is mixed up with Theta. They are two
different things actually, and it is not true that all thought derives from
Mest, nor is it true that all Mest derives from thought. A thetan can
create Mest by simply creating Mest, not by telling it to be created, but
simply by putting it there. This is the isness of Mest. Now when he
connects his thoughts with the actual mass he gets into trouble and we get
association, we get compulsive thinking, we get identification and the old
A = A = A of Dianetic days.
Thus you will see at once that Connectedness in any form is a very
excellent process to run. But note carefully that we have him get the idea
of making the object connect with him. We never command the preclear to get
the other idea of connecting with the object. This is a no-games condition.
This is what is wrong with the preclear.
Now there are a large variety of processes which stem out of this
process of basic association. These are Control Trio, Trio and
Responsibility. But all of these things are basically connectedness
processes.
The only thing that ever went wrong with connectedness processes was
the unreality factor. The auditor would tell the preclear to get the idea
of making that wall connect with him, when as a matter of fact the preclear
couldn't have gotten much of any kind of an idea of making anything connect
with him.
Thus it is mandatory for an auditor to start out a preclear on some
level of reality and some two-way comm should precede this connectedness
process, such as "Do you think there is anything anywhere that you could
get to connect with you?" Once this is cleared up, it will be found that
only those things very close in could be real to the preclear on this line
of connectedness. Thus the auditor is given no great power of choice in
this matter in the first runnings of the process. He will have to run
things which are relatively close in to the preclear, then proceed to
things which are middle distance and then things which are further from the
preclear.
A great deal of good common sense is needed here, and a great deal of two-
way comm is necessary to get some idea of whether or not the preclear
thought it was real.
Thus the earliest commands of Connectedness should probably be the
preclear's nose and the auditor's hand; the arm of the preclear's chair and
the button on the auditor's shirt; the button on the preclear's shirt and
his own left hand, et cetera. Further, the auditor is only asking him to
get the idea of making the thing connect with him, not to make the thing
connect with him, otherwise he will have the preclear being yanked all over
the room.
Control Trio, Trio and Responsibility are actually only complications
on top of Connectedness, but they themselves have their own particular
peculiar virtues, and a preclear who can actually run straight, old-time
Trio, "Look around here and find something you could have," can get a very
long way on that process all by itself.
Control Trio is actually a three-stage process on a heavy spotting
control. It runs in this fashion. "Get the idea that you can have that
(object)." And when this is relatively flat, "Get the idea of making that
(object) remain where it is," (or continue where it is) and "Get the idea
of making that (object) disappear." This is actually a very fine process
and undercuts (runs on a lower case than) Trio itself.
Old-time Trio is extremely good, however, and is not to be underrated
in any way. You can run a whole three-week intensive on this if the
preclear can do it. The commands are: "Look around here and find something
you could have." And when that is somewhat flat, "Look around here and find
something you would permit to remain," and then "Look around here and find
something you would permit to disappear." These are run in relationship to
each other. In other words, all three of them are run in the same session.
Sometimes a preclear will run the third command two hundred and fifty times
before he can get either of the other two commands with any reality at all.
Responsibility is another process just like Trio and actually has its
three commands, too. "Look around here and find something you could be
responsible for." "Look around here and find something you don't have to be
responsible for." "Look around here and find something you would permit
somebody else to be responsible for."
The emphasis here is "You look," "You connect," "You make" in any of
these processes, and the "You" should be entered into the old commands to
make the thing as causative as possible.
Although we cover this rather briefly, this is probably the most
effective section of Clear Procedure. The whole trick is to get the
preclear to actually do it. It does no good for a preclear to run these
processes with no reality. It does no good for a preclear to run these
processes with no ARC between himself and the auditor. But it does a lot of
good to get these processes run.
Basically TR TEN, "You notice that (object)," is a fundamental process
on connectedness. It will be discovered that unless the preclear is
actually able to look at a few things he will not be able to get an idea
about them, too. Furthermore, it will be discovered that there is a process
called Short Spotting, wherein the auditor has the preclear spot things
that are very close to him. The only thing wrong with Short Spotting is
that the auditor must give the preclear things to spot which the preclear
can actually see with his eyes. If the preclear cannot see these things
with his eyes there is not much use in having him spot them as it will run
down his havingness and add to an uncertainty.
Havingness of an objective variety, namely Trio, is one of the greatest
processes ever invented. Do not lose sight of this fact. The process can do
things that no other
process can do. There may be some factors kicking around in Havingness
which are not entirely understood and which are not entirely connected with
Connectedness. However, it has been found that Connectedness will put a
preclear in a condition where he can eventually run Havingness. Therefore,
Connectedness undercuts and possibly even overpasses Havingness in general.
This process of Connectedness can also be run outside. It can be run on
people. It can be run on a certain type of object. It can be used to
familiarize a pilot with his airplane and a driver with his car. It can be
used to increase ARC between the preclear and the world around him by
letting him run it in a heavily populated area or upon a busy street and
using bodies. Here we have one of the more interesting processes to run in
terms of cognition, because it undoes so much basic association. If your
preclear is not cogniting while running Connectedness you can be very sure
of the fact that somewhere along the line you have not given him a reality
and you should flatten it off gracefully and start the intensive all over
again.
STEP SIX
Creative Processing
Read and understand Scientology 8-8008 and "Electropsychometric
Auditing," and use an E-Meter throughout the auditing.
The first step on this in some cases is conquering black "field" and
invisible "field." This is done by a repair of havingness over black masses
and then invisible masses, run even if the pc goes unconscious. This means
that you continue to audit him even if he goes unconscious and you use the
same command and pay no attention to his unconsciousness. You continue just
as though he were wide awake. When field is cleared up, start on a gradient
scale of mock-ups and get pc able to mock things up. Then run "Keep it from
going away" until flat on mock-ups. Then run "Hold it still" on mock-ups.
Then run "Make it more solid" on mock-ups. All this until pc really has
fine, solid mock-ups. Typical command, "Mock up a and keep it from
going away. Thank you." RULE: A PC'S FACSIMILES ARE NOT STORED, THEY ARE
MADE IN THE INSTANT AND UNMADE BY THE PC, therefore remedy of mock-ups AND
THEIR PERSISTENCE, is actually a direct route to clear and winds up with no
obsessive mock-up making (which we call a bank). A valuable side process
here: "Decide to make a mock-up. Decide that will ruin the game. Decide not
to do it." Also this one: "Decide to make a mock-up everyone can see.
Decide that would ruin the game. Decide not to do it." A TOTAL REMEDY OF
MOCK-UPS WOULD MAKE A BOOK ONE CLEAR.
STEP SEVEN
(Optional)
Establish the preclear's control over his "bank." "Mock up a facsimile
and (keep it from going away, and when that is flat, hold it still, and
when that is flat, make it a little more solid)." Run this alternately with
"Mock up that wall (keep it from going away, hold it still, make it a
little more solid)." Run the "Keep it from going away" on a facsimile one
command, then the wall one command, until flat, then shift to "Hold it
still" same way, then shift to "Make it more solid," same way.
STEP EIGHT
Make Some Time
See Dianetics '55!, Chapter XV.
AN INTENSIVE IN BRIEF FOR PRACTICAL USE
GOAL: Operating Thetan.
DEFINITION: An Operating Thetan is one who can be knowingly at cause
over Life, Matter, Energy, Space and Time.
CCH 0 in brief, find the auditor, find pc, find auditing room, clear
help and goals. BUT IN THE MAIN HANDLE THE PT PROBLEM IF IT EXISTS. IF IT
DOESN'T EXIST do CCH 0 briefly and quickly and get on with the session.
It will be noted that giving pc's attention to auditing room or
environment can turn on a somatic after three or four commands. After one
command of "Have you got an auditing room?" this becomes a process called
LOCATIONAL. If Locational turns on a somatic it must be run until somatic
is flat. Therefore, the auditor has no business attempting Locational or
getting the pc involved unless he intends to do something about it.
Present Time Problem
The preclear is put on an E-Meter before PT problem is discussed. When
the E-Meter has been adjusted (one-third of a dial surge when pc squeezes
cans), the auditor asks if the pc has a present time problem. After a
little discussion of this, the needle may surge. If it does, the auditor
locates the PT problem's most intimate terminal and runs (with the pc still
holding the cans) "Invent something worse than (indicated terminal)" until
the problem flattens out on the dial. The auditor can ask for and run
another PT problem or even three or four, but always flattening down the
surge of the needle. IF THE PC IS 50% below the center line of the APA, it
is not safe to run "Invent." Instead, without scouting around "Invent," but
knowing the graph in the first place, simply two-way comm the problem and
run Locational until the problem flattens out on the needle. The auditor
does not begin with "Invent" and then change his mind and run Locational.
It is an "either-or." The auditor starts with "Invent" or he starts with
Locational and whichever he does he does not change. IF LOCATIONAL TURNS ON
A SOMATIC IT MUST BE RUN UNTIL LOCATIONAL NO LONGER TURNS ON SOMATICS.
Once the PT problem is flat the auditor puts away the E-Meter.
S-C-S Steps
S-C-S begins with 8-C of any kind. If 8-C turns on a somatic, the
auditor runs it until it no longer turns on somatics. 8-C is run formal or
Tone 40.
Start is then run as per 1956.
Change is then run as per 1956.
Stop is then run as per 1956.
If each of these is flattened in turn, it does not mean that S-C-S is
flat. It means only that Start is probably unflattened. Thus one again runs
Start after Stop, runs Change after Start, Stop after Change until none of
the three unflatten the others.
More 8-C can be run. There is no error in liberally running 8-C, which
is, after all, a more complicated Locational of a Short Spotting sort.
Spotting Steps
Spotting itself is a broad process. Locational is only one of many
spotting processes. Spotting spots in the past, in space, in the present,
Short Spotting (Locational done up close) are all effective.
SPOTTING DEPENDS FOR ITS WORKABILITY ON THE DISLIKE OF A THETAN OF
BEING LOCATED. IT RUNS BEST, of course, WITH THE THETAN AT CAUSE DOING THE
SPOTTING.
Connectedness is the basic process on ASSOCIATION of Theta with Mest.
All forms and kinds of association, including being caught in traps, are
prone to become identifications as in Dianetics. Connectedness puts the
thetan at cause in making the Mest (or people when run outside) connect
with him. The command is "Get the idea of making (indicated object) connect
with you." The auditor points. The worse off a person is, the less reality
he has on far objects.
Havingness is a complicated Connectedness. Also a permissive one. Thus
Trio is above Connectedness and may be used when Connectedness is flat.
[The above is the complete text of Scientology: Clear Procedure-Issue One
which has been available as a small paperback booklet and is referred to as
a book or booklet in various issues.]
ABILITY CONGRESS LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
29-31 December 1957
The Ability Congress, held at the Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C.,
December 29-31, 1957, was a record breaker for winter Congresses. The 300
attendees all seemed delighted with the lectures and seminars. The Congress
opened on a note of comedy when L. Ron Hubbard "launched" a Fftnik which
rose to the top of the stage and exploded into a shower of ping-pong balls.
Immediately afterward, a round sphere circled the stage, emitting sputnik-
like beeps.
Getting into the swing of it, the program continued with a complete
rundown on the history of organizations, showing that a steady increase in
volume shows Scientology to be of greater scope than Dianetics ever was at
its highest peak. Mr. Hubbard gave a full description of the state of Clear
and gave full details of the techniques necessary for producing Clears.
There was no group processing this Congress; the audience did it themselves
with co-auditing.
-Ability 64
5712C29 AC-1 Experience-Randomity and Change of Pace
5712C29 AC-2 The Clear-Defined
5712C29 AC-3 Clear Procedure
5712C30 AC-4 Cause and Effect-Education, Unknowing and
Unwilling Effect
** 5712C30 AC-5 Creating a Third Dynamic
5712C30 AC-6 Upper Route to Operating Thetan
571 2C31 AC-7 Responsibility ( How to Create a Third Dynamic)
5712C31 AC-8 The NAAP (The National Academy of American
Psychology)
5712C31 AC-9 Creative Processing Steps
CONTROL AND THE MECHANICS OF S.C.S.
Published
December 1957
by
L. Ron Hubbard
Control and the Mechanics of S.C.S., although just a small thin
booklet, contains vital data on the anatomy of control.
In 1956 LRH evolved processes for use in the processing of the
personnel of a large London company so that they would get uniform results
and would not be telling one another different processes during work. These
were among the first packages to be "used on anybody" and are detailed in
Control and the Mechanics of S.C.S.
The ARC triangle is our next to oldest property in Scientology (the
oldest is the bank, the engram and the mental image picture), and in this
booklet LRH relates ARC to Control, Havingness and Communication.
"Follow ARC down scale as per the Hubbard Chart of Human Evaluation in
Science of Survival and as you go down you will find an area below the
bottom line of the chart. That has to do with mass In other words, to wrap
up this whole subject the only responses still extant at the bottom of the
Chart can still be phrased in terms of control, havingness and
communication."
L. Ron Hubbard-Control and the Mechanics of S.C.S.
24 pages, soft-cover, two codes. Available from your nearest
Scientology Organization or Mission, or direct from the publishers:
Scientology Publications Organization, Jernbanegade 6, 1608 Copenhagen V,
Denmark; or Church of Scientology Publications Organization U.S., 2723 West
Temple Street, Los Angeles, California, 90026, U.S.A.
P.A.B. No. 127
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 January 1958
THE THREAT TO HAVINGNESS
Prepared from the research material of L. Ron Hubbard
The first step to processing a preclear is to find out if he has a
present time problem and to handle it adequately enough to proceed with
auditing. Often we have a preclear who comes to us basically just to get
more able and as we process him we find that we are making no particular
progress with this case. He seems to be doing everything just as we expect
it to be done with no apparent gain.
The reason for this occurrence is the fact that the preclear is not
doing the process in present time and has a present time problem that is
interfering, of which he did not tell us. The fact about the matter is that
the preclear himself does not really know, is not cognizant of the fact
that he has a present time problem and is consequently a very "south" case.
I have found that a preclear who isn't processing real fast on
Procedure CCH isn't doing the process because he has something which
"threatens his havingness." Since processing and havingness go hand in hand
it isn't surprising that the preclear will make sure that he doesn't change
since he cannot afford to expend more havingness in cognitions.
So this threat to his havingness is his present time problem of which
he may or may not be aware and if you as an auditor didn't handle it at the
beginning of the session, it is certain that the preclear is not
consciously aware that he has such a problem or is deliberately Lying to
you for reason of shame, embarrassment-or that ARC is not fully present.
This threat to havingness is that which most prevents the preclear from
having things. It is that which stands in his way to having and is thus a
problem to him which he hasn't under control.
What the auditor has to do is to find this problem for the preclear and
then to handle it properly. This case is so low on problems that he doesn't
even recognize that he has one and his level of problems has to be
increased otherwise he will create a problem out of auditing which is what
happens when he doesn't change. Auditing itself then becomes a problem to
the preclear.
One handles this matter simply by going into good two-way communication
with the preclear. (One-way communication as-ises havingness, two-way
doesn't and actually raises the tone of the preclear.)
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
One asks him if there is something that "worries him," "presents a
difficulty which he would like to handle or which is making life a bit
troublesome," or if he is about to "lose" anything (a pending court case,
wife, business deal, etc.) or "if there is anything that he would like to
change as it produces some pressure on him" and so forth. But the important
question here is: "What most prevents you from having things?"
The moment anything arises, go straight ahead and ask him pointed but
not evaluating questions about it so that he can define it into a more
definite form. Ask him to tell you about it again, how it worries him,
exactly what it is that has this effect until he can articulate it clearly
and precisely. One can even play stupid so as to make him more lucid until
one actually finds the terminal if it is a condition that is worrying him-
for we handle terminals and masses only, and not conditions or effects.
After this one can state the problem to the preclear in practically his
own words, asking him to listen carefully and correct one if one hasn't
repeated it accurately and then ask him to tell one if "it is a problem to
him" and if he recognizes it as such. It is surprising that the preclear
will look quite pleased to have this problem and will naturally want to
hold on to it in spite of his protestations that he wouldn't if you
questioned him further about it. It would thus be wrong to suggest to him
that it should be "solved" or taken away from him, for a problem is a game
and a threat to havingness does and can reveal the hidden game the preclear
is compulsively playing. Taking that problem would be robbing him of a game
and the preclear would react violently or by not changing, since he thinks
you are going to keep on taking all his games from him.
One thus tells the preclear that since he now has a problem it would be
better if he had more problems which would be directly under his own
control. One then handles this threat to his havingness by taking the
terminal to the problem and running "Invent a problem of
comparable/incomparable magnitude to (the terminal)."
The new problems he invents (if it is done with reality, and it is the
auditor's job to see that he does so) will not be aberrative since he has
created both the intention and counter-intention that constitutes the
problem and is therefore pan-determined in relation to these problems which
he then can control. These problems will serve to move his fixed attention
from the problem which he doesn't have under control and the auditor can
then proceed with Procedure CCH.
There is, however, a note of warning here. The two-way communication
must remain "two-way" and also, this process can come dangerously near
evaluation which must not occur. It therefore needs clever auditing to have
the preclear discover this problem without breaking the Auditor's Code. The
auditor can ask "pointed" questions which will reveal it more easily, and
even re-state the problem in clearer and concise language, but he must not
evaluate under any circumstance.
This type of case, by the way, is a low toned case and needs a great
amount of good control, and the first four steps of CCH must be thoroughly
flattened before any attention and thinkingness processes are used.
It can be seen from the above that it is important at all times to look
out for the things that threaten the preclear's havingness and to handle
them with problems of comparable/incomparable magnitude so that auditing
doesn't have to become a present time problem to you and the preclear.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
11 JANUARY 1958
HGC PROCEDURE
1. CCH 0 with PT Problem on E-Meter.
2. S-C-S and Connectedness to get pc under control only.
1 and 2 not "therapeutic" steps.
3. Step 6 Clear Procedure Connectedness used to extrovert pc now and
then.
3 is the therapeutic step.
Run Intensive with 1 and 2 occupying no more than 1/5 of 25 hrs.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:bt.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 JANUARY 1958
HGC RUNNING OF PCS
Use CCH 0 with PT Problem, S-C-S and Connectedness to get pc under
auditor control and no longer.
Then use Step 6 of Clear Procedure as soon as possible and until end of
intensive. Some Objective Havingness can be run if necessary.
Repair havingness on invisible and black objects in fields which are
invisible or black. The test is "Shut your eyes-what are you looking at?"
They'll tell you and you establish whether field is invisible or black.
Then use the above. Otherwise (if mock-ups are clear) don't use it.
What can you mock up easily? Pc says, "An apple." Do so. (Note meter.)
(If reaction on meter choose something else.)
The command then is "In front of that body, you mock up an apple
(pause) and keep it from going away. Did you keep it from going away?" Pc
says he did. "Thank you." The next command is "Behind that body, etc." The
next is "Above that body, etc." The next is "Below that body, etc." The
next is "To the right of that body, etc." The next is "To the left of that
body, etc." Then one begins the series again with "In front of that body,
etc." This is continued until E-Meter no longer registers a surge when pc
does it. Now pick a larger object. Test it for surge on the meter. If meter
surges, don't use it, pick another, etc. Now go through same series. One
runs this on at least 6 objects each one larger until he goes on to next,
Hold it still.
Keep it from going away, when flat on many objects, is followed by the
same command substituting "Hold it still." This is done before, behind,
above, below, to the right, to the left, the same way around and around.
When Hold it still is flat one goes to "Make it a little more solid," same
command otherwise as before.
If this all flattens, start all over again now with more significant
objects. Read Step 6 Clear Procedure.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:bt.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
P.A.B. No. 128
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 January 1958
THE FACTORS BEHIND THE HANDLING OF IQ
Edited from L. Ron Hubbard's 16th lecture to the 18th American ACC
in Washington, D.C., on S August 1957
This past week has been an eventful one in research. It has culminated
a four-year search for the factors which lay behind what is called IQ, or
Intelligence Quotient. We have been taking tests here for many years and
these tests were mainly used to establish change in preclears. We care
nothing about the significance of the test. We do care, however, that these
tests mirror change.
Someone may say that a test taken twice will, of course, get a better
answer than one taken once. This is not true, since everybody in the MEST
universe is on a "mustn't happen again" and we automatically figure that a
test taken twice would get a worse grade the second time. We have two
different tests marked A and B which are supposed to give identical
results. I have been waiting for the people who devised this test
originally to say, "Well, you can throw the results in any direction you
want to with these tests." But we have given a considerable amount of
testing to many, many people and we do find that a test will hold constant
on a given person in the absence of processing. If a person is not
processed the variability in the profile and IQ is very slight. Somebody
who is not getting any results from any treatment or processing will
register the same, test after test which is quite unusual.
Testing is a very old subject. It is not newly developed in modern
times. One of the first examples of testing that we find is in the early
Chaldean times. Testing of all kinds, sorts and descriptions as to honesty,
intent, reliability, ability and so forth, have been with Man almost as
long as he has been on Earth. In modern times these tests have been more
standardized and reduced to writing.
Here, for example, is a test I heard about, from the 18th Century down
in Georgia. It was a guilt test. Somebody had stolen something, so they
would have all the negroes on the plantation line up and put a rooster
underneath a big black kettle. This was a witch rooster or something of the
sort. And they would say, "The man who stole it, when he touches the black
kettle will make the rooster crow." All the negroes on the plantation would
go by the kettle and then the overseer merely had to go by and look at
their hands. The negro who didn't have any soot on his hands was, of
course, guilty.
All tests, however, have had an end goal, and they of modern times are
more or less as covert as this rooster under the black kettle.
Modern tests were originally devised in the total belief that Man could
not be changed. From year to year people would get changes of one kind or
another from childhood on, which would demonstrate the year's IQ which
might be higher or lower
Copyright �1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
than another year's IQ. They maintained that people advanced in IQ because
of age, yet at the same time said that IQ could not change, would never
change and could not be influenced by any particular factor.
I am rather astounded to discover that when a person is happy and takes
the test, and when this same person is unhappy and takes the test, he
practically gets the same curve on his personality profile with the same
IQ. It does have a constancy. It was this constancy and an inability to
understand the mind prior to 1950 which made people say that it was not
possible to change Man or his IQ. A stupid man was stupid and a bright man
bright and that was it.
People knew, however, that personality and IQ were not the same thing
and were distinct from one another. So there are tests to measure
personality and tests to measure intelligence. One of the ways one would
observe this would be to take three or four men who had more or less an
equal personality. The result of testing would show that they had more or
less similar personalities but that their IQs differed. Or one could take
men of the same IQ and test them, only to find that their personalities
were completely different from each other.
I have known this ever since 1950 when the first testing was done. We
either changed their personality or changed their IQ. Very often with a
very successful case we changed and improved both. This created a mystery
and we wondered why it was that when we ran an intensive on Joe his IQ
changed and when we ran the same intensive on Bill his personality changed
but not his IQ. In view of the fact that all of our processes were mixed to
a large degree, including such things as havingness, 8-C, thinkingness and
significance processes, and in view of the fact that auditors were
different from one another, we had a sufficient number of factors in each
one of these test representations to make it impossible to sort out. I
could not sort it out.
Then I started on a project with the HGC auditors last week and wound
up with the answer to this problem when I had no intention of doing so at
all. It was just accidental that I found the answer.
Here is what happened. We wanted a process that we could write up in a
book and send to ministers so that they could counsel easily and well,
since the minister is doing a tremendous amount of personal counseling. If
he could just sit down, according to these rules as he read them and get
some sort of a result we would have been very happy. We called this project
"Process July."
We knew one thing about Process July: It was slanted in the direction
of getting people to unburden their souls. We wanted to get the overt act-
motivator sequence off the case. So we would have the minister write down
the names of everybody the person knew and then pick out the most likely
candidates and ask just one question about each one of those until we got
this person straightened out. It would have been a straight wire question
on a present time basis, such as "Tell me something you could do or say to
valence."
We do know that an overt act-motivator sequence is a reach-withdraw
situation, therefore we had to test "withhold" since we obviously had this
withhold situation to consider. (Now earlier processes already indicated
this, and particularly "Recall a secret." Don't confuse this with withhold
because they are not the same process at all. We merely wanted the person
to open up and talk to the auditor when we were recalling secrets and if we
did anything with it, it was totally accidental. But we did learn here
about withhold.)
So the first question the minister would ask would be, "Think of
something you could withhold from ." Now one of the discoveries that led to
this question is
that divulgence and confessions had nothing to do with raising anybody's IQ
or improving his case. It wasn't the fact that he confessed it or divulged
it but the fact that he erased it.
We started running this "withhold" command for a couple of days and
then went over to "What could you say or do to ," varied that question
around for a couple of days and returned to "Think of something you could
withhold from (valence)," and found that the latter was the question that
was producing the results.
Withhold is a games condition on communication and is a partner to the
process, "Mock up somebody denying communication." People are in an
obsessive games condition which they have to play, although they are not
aware of it, and on the subject of communication they are naturally going
to be withholding obsessively.
We tested this process carefully and found minimal personality changes,
but found that the IQs of the preclears changed remarkably. An old lady's
IQ went up from 84 to 105 and everybody knew that her brains were
atrophied. It was an "impossible" jump for a person of her age. Another
person quite advanced in years, between 70 and 80 years old, got an IQ
raise from 109 to 133. An invalid's IQ went up from 98 to 121 and a
student's from 101 to 126. There was an IQ change on every case on which
this process was run.
The theory behind it seems to be this: The individual gets his mind so
involved with the problems of some game with some valence or person that
his computers are all tied up on that particular subject. When you restore
self-determinism on this level you free the individual's ability to think.
An obsessive games condition is to withhold communication from somebody.
When we take that off automatic and put it under the control of the
preclear so that he is doing it, all of the involved mechanisms start
working out.
That is why psychotherapy never worked. You have never seen before and
after tests, whether IQ or personality, on a Freudian analysis. It is the
ability to withhold communication which advances IQ and makes a person feel
better, not the ability to divulge it. We've been told all our lives that
all we had to do was go to somebody and confess. If we were to confess to
our mothers and fathers that we did those dirty, nasty little things we
would feel so much better. It isn't true. You probably only felt better to
the end of getting your pants spanked. This is an enforced communication
and as an enforced communication would break through a games condition, in
which a person found himself. It would demand that one communicate with the
enemy and would depress one accordingly. Obviously, then, it is not true
that divulging or confessing did anything for anybody, because the only
improvement he got would be if he regained the ability to withhold that
information without being upset about withholding it. The only disturbing
element in secrets is the guilt which accompanies them.
For example: You took your old man's car and it got a wobbly wheel. You
put it back in the garage and he came out the next day and looked at it and
said, "I wonder how that happened?" You stood there innocently, saying
nothing. But you felt guilt. At length you felt as though you were going
out of communication with him when these incidents piled up too high.
Psychotherapy's whole answer to this is that you had to throw yourself at
your father's chest and confess all whereupon all would be well. It
wouldn't have done a thing for you. What the bent wheel did was to overcome
your ability to withhold communication by making you feel you ought to
communicate. It interrupted your self-determinism on the subject of
communication.
This is the reach and withdraw mechanism, of must reach, can't reach,
must withdraw, can't withdraw and these are the two pairs which create the
sensation of insanity. As an example, you must run away from the bogey man
that's chasing you
through the treacle. He is coming like a mad express train and there you
are stuck. That is a nightmare. You must withdraw and cannot withdraw. The
glee of insanity is only composed of this. People in asylums are stuck in
this so they must withdraw and can't withdraw, must reach and cannot reach.
All of the past psychotherapies are aimed at getting a person to
outflow, and what do we find here? We find that intelligence increases and
neurotic personality traits get better when we run withhold communication
from valences. It is a fantastic reversal. We found this to be the case:
that people from whom one felt that one could not withhold anything were
the most aberrative valences on the case. We thus have a new definition for
aberrative valences, namely the "cannot withhold from" valence, who is the
most aberrative valence on the case. As you run it the preclear will say,
"Well," unreality, unreality, "I don't seem to be able to withhold anything
from Aunt Grace at all." Ask a criminal what he could withhold from jail
and he will find that he cannot withhold anything from jail. He will see
facsimiles and other electronic phenomena sweeping towards some spot he
considers jail since he is unable to withhold anything from jail.
We are looking at the basic anatomy of the track and the basic process
by which one would run a track. You could be sitting in the middle of the
trap and just dream it up for a while and say, "How did I get in here? I
don't know." The only way anybody could keep you in a trap would be to give
you the idea that you had to surrender to the trap and the way to undo this
would simply be to think of something you could withhold from the trap-or
track.
The other side takes care of itself. I don't know how a thetan can keep
from communicating with everything unless he feels he should withhold
everything from everything. Remember, you are not trying to erase a lot of
things. It is the regaining of the ability to withhold that you are working
toward. It is a certainty process, the preclear selectively withholding
things from canvas, typewriter or aberrative valence with certainty,
because an individual has been in a games condition with the canvas,
typewriter, drill press or the valence. It has absorbed all of his ideas
and thinkingness and everything else, and they are all stuck and bunched up
on the track. He is trying to think, "How can I communicate?" since
communication is composed of selective withholding.
One thus gets this kind of activity. One has individuals in a games
condition with their highest common denominator of a games condition, and
that action is communicate, and they are trying to withhold communication
from their opponents. Wherever they have considered an opponent to exist
they have withheld communication from the opponent. Having decided to
withhold communication from the opponent they now decide to communicate
with the opponent because they have to, and you get a denial of self which
is, of course, the basic aberrative pattern. We take this circumstance,
look it over and discover that the individual has been made to break his
own postulate-"I am withholding it"-because he considered this person an
opponent and then he said, "I have to talk."
When you can no longer withhold from a valence you become it, and we
have the basic mechanism of valence closure, because what is the one thing
that you don't withhold from something you have become? Yourself. So here
is a gradient scale of withholding.
One would run "withhold" this way: You would take an inventory of
valences, their professions and habitats. A habitat is a place where the
preclear has lived and couldn't pay rent. In other words, the old
homestead, his childhood home. There are a number of tricks by which one
can isolate these valences without asking the direct question on the basis
of comm lag or the fact that he didn't mention at all in five people the
two most aberrative people or valences on the case.
One would then establish a session with thoroughness and with questioning
find out if there was a present time valence with which the person was very
deeply involved and run that out with Problems of Comparable Magnitude. One
would then move into the session and sandwich valences with Locational
Processing. The command here is: "Think of something you could withhold
from (valence)," not "Recall something." The preclear would say, "Oh, yes,
I can think of lots of things." Now beware of an automaticity. He might
strike a games condition on an automaticity that says, "I can withhold
something from (valence)." That has to be flattened. Get to the point where
he can withhold rather ordinary and routine things at his own discretion
one at a time and that would be the ability to withhold regained, the only
thing you are interested in.
When the preclear finally decides that he can withhold things from the
valence, go into Locational Processing to orient your preclear in present
time, and to command his attention. Then run the next aberrative valence.
This one should be a little more difficult than the last one and so on to
the next valence which should be stiffer than the last.
One should then pick up the preclear's professional tools and run these
on a similar gradient scale-the easier ones first and gradiently to the
difficult ones-until he can withhold anything from his childhood home.
Flatten CCH 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4 fairly well before you embark on this and
then use ample Locational Processing for the remainder of the intensive and
Lord knows what his IQ will be if you went for broke to this degree.
But remember that the process will not do anything unless you have some
goals as to where the process is going, and the goal is to restore the
preclear's ability to withhold. This will bring the preclear out of all
traps and is quite evidently IQ, and it changes valences only to the degree
that it totally snaps the preclear out of that valence.
I hope this information is as valuable to you as it has proven itself
to me and the HGC auditors who assisted me with this project.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 18 JANUARY 1958
CONTROL
The reason the auditor is having trouble getting off Control and onto
Step 6 is that the auditor expects a technique to take control of pc.
Auditing depends on the auditor taking control of the pc. When this is
learned we'll not have 20 hrs devoted to Control processes and 5 to Step 6.
We will have 5 hrs to Control and 20 hrs to Step 6.
Control consists of the pc being aware of who and what is controlling
him. So Find the Auditor is therefore part of Control.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:bt.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
19TH AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
6 January-14 February 1958
"There were 35 students in the 19th ACC. During this course 15 of these
students attained the state of Clear.
"The 19th Advanced Clinical Course began January 6, 1958 and ended
February 14, 1958. The first two weeks of the course were devoted to a
course in communication and indoctrination in order to smooth out the
student auditing. The remaining four weeks were devoted to co-auditing. In
each week half the class audited the other half, which means that each
student, in the four auditing weeks gave two weeks and received two weeks
of auditing (72 hours each).
"More students would have been Clear in the course if I had earlier
developed a special method of reducing 'fields' (the plack curtains some
people have). A development I released toward the end of the fifth week on
this took care of the problem but several members of the course were not
again audited."
L. Ron Hubbard-Ability 68
** 5801C20 19ACC-1 The Four Universes
5801C20 19ACC The E-Meter (possibly same tape as 5801C24)
5801C21 19ACC-2 Intensive Procedures
5801C21 19ACC-2A Question-and-Answer Period
The list of lectures given to the 19th ACC continues in date order
sequence on pages 206, 207, 216, 219 and 220.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 21 JANUARY AD 8
For use of 19th ACC, Staff Clearing & HGC
MEST CLEAR PROCEDURE
1. CCH 0: Get PC into communication on the following points:
1) presence of auditor; 2) presence of auditing room; 3) presence of
PC; 4) starting of session and when it will end; 5) PC's goals; 6)
possibility of help; 7) present time problem-if no blip, or only slight
blip on meter, skip it. If needle action severe, use "What part of that
problem could you be responsible for?" Run to nul on meter. Use no
other process for PTP.
NOTE: Use no Locational Processing at all during intensive.
2. S-C-S: (See Clear Procedure for commands [page 185] .)
NOTES: In all commands, use "that body" or "the body", not "your".
Run until no step unflattens the other steps.
Be certain to duplicate the full command exactly each time.
Acknowledgement is a Tone 40 "Thank you".
3. Control Connectedness: Command: "You get the idea of making that
(object selected at random by auditor with auditor indicating the
object) connect with you."
4. Clean-up of field: Command: "You mock up a (terminal in the same
condition as PC's field) and shove it into the body," i.e., black field-
black mass, invisible field-invisible mass, speckled field-speckled
mass.
NOTES: ABSOLUTELY NO HECKLING ABOUT CERTAINTY THAT HE MOCKED IT UP.
Use patience, persistence, understanding, and kid gloves.
5. Creative Processing: Command: "In front of that body you mock up a
(nul object, located on meter) and keep it from going away. Did you?
Thank you." (Tone 40 ack.)
NOTES: The "Did you?" refers only to whether he kept it from going
away, not to whether he mocked it up.
Change the location of the mock-up on each successive command by
commanding, "Behind that body ... ," "Above that body ... ," "Below
that body ... ," "To that body's right ... ," "To that body's left ..."
When the first object has been run from nul to nul, locate a somewhat
larger nul object with the meter. Run it nul to nul on the same
command. You will then go on to a 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th object, each
larger than the last, and each run nul to nul on "Keep it from going
away".
When all 6 objects have been flattened on "Keep it from going away",
run each one again in the original order on "Hold it still". When this
is flat, run the same 6 objects with "Make it a little more solid".
NOTES: If a mock-up disappears or flies out of control, don't red
herring after it. Just have him mock up the same item again.
If PC becomes extremely introverted during session of Creative
Processing, Connectedness may be used to end session. If PC should
remain introverted for entire day, go back to Connectedness.
If needle consistently out of pace with supposed command execution, PC
has lost auditor, is out of control. Re-establish auditor, or go to
bottom again.
If auditor can locate invisible nul object or particle, running it will
reduce body's susceptibility to germs.
6. Creative Processing: repeat 5 with 6 different objects.
7. Creative Processing: ditto
LRH:-.rd L. RON
HUBBARD
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 21 JANUARY 1958
ACCs
HPA/HCA
An ACC is a special activity.
It may modify HCA/HPA but not necessarily.
What is good in an ACC is generally taught in HPA/HCA sometime.
HPA/HCA is a tougher course by far and must prepare a student for all
eventualities.
Thus HCA/HPA must cover all types of processing and theory.
Clearing a student is not in the province of HCA/HPA. Teaching how to
clear is the emphasis. If they get clear it's incidental.
They're all auditors in HCA/HPA.
L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
5801C22 19ACC-3 The Bank Out of Control and Its Stabilization
5801C23 19ACC-4 Clearing Fields
5801C23 19ACC-4A Question-and-Answer Period plus Comments
5801C24 19ACC-5 E-Meter Identification and Association
5801C24 19ACC-5A Question-and-Answer Period: Step 6, Clearing
Children
5801C27 19ACC-6 Clear Procedure l: What It Is You Clear,
Something and Nothing
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN #2 OF 25 JANUARY AD 8
REVIEWING WEEK'S PROFILES
In clearing pcs it is necessary for the auditor to cause something.
Abandon any idea of running significant objects ever. Always run non-
significant objects.
Free the needle before you run Step 6 when needle is stuck. Two-way
Comm and Str Wire will do it.
Totally clear up a field before running Step 6. A field is cleared by
running repair of havingness on a terminal like the field. Don't go running
pcs on 6 who "think they see a mock-up" or who "have an 'idea' one is
there".
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :-.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
19TH AMERICAN ACC LECTURES (cont.)
Washington, D.C.
27-31 January 1958
** 5801C28 19ACC-7 Clear Procedure ll: Man the Animal and Man the
God
** 5801C28 19ACC-7A Clear Procedure ll: Q & A, Handling the PT
Problem
** 5801C29 19ACC-8 Clear Procedure lll: One Clear Procedure, Q &
A Period
5801C30 19ACC-9 Clear Procedure IV: Test for Clears
5801C30 1 9ACC-9A Clear Procedure IV: Q & A, Space
** 5801C31 19ACC-10 Clear Procedure V: Importance of Theory Behind
Clearing Procedure
5801C31 19ACC-10A Clear Procedure V: Q & A Period
Other lectures given to the 19th ACC are listed on pages 204, 206,
216, 219 and 220.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 26 JANUARY AD 8
FUTURE PLANS
Well, here we begin!
A well schooled auditor can take any volunteering PC and get him under
control and run Step 6 of Clear Procedure and we have a Book One Clear.
Future of Research is Operating Thetan and the situation on Earth.
To consolidate this I am doing the following:
1. I am completing the 19th ACC.
2. I will groom up the DC operation until mid-February.
3. In mid-February I am going to London for 3 weeks to get London
going on Clearing (because it communicates easily to rest of
world). This for sure consolidates SA, NZ and Aust, which Man may
need.
4. Returning to DC end of 1st week in March.
5. I will write our next "Book One" bringing us up to date and
giving us a book for the book stores that advertises as the
solution to Bohdi, the clear everybody's wanted for 2500 years.
6. That done I'll be in DC in late April.
7. The book will be published in June by Vantage Press. It will
also be published in UK and France through Vantage contacts.
A pamphlet about Bodhi will be written at once for reply to ads in
mystic magazines which announces the goal of 2500 years has been reached.
It will be printed like a $1 or 5s book.
Here's what Scientology Organizations should do:
1. Put announcements at once in all mystic magazines announcing
state attainable. Steves has the ad copy.
2. Get pamphlet on clears published as soon as I complete it.
3. Get whole staff cleared by Co-audit and HGC where necessary. (I
want all staff everywhere clear by June: easy to do and the results
are startling.)
4. Get groomed up for the summer rush and see to it that it is a
rush.
Well, in AD 8 we've got a kick-off for a much more rapid game. The
scope of that game will be apparent to everyone when you start getting
clear and making clears.
My game in research is not at end by a long way. For instance in
research for OT actions I wrote 15 things the US Govt should do five weeks
ago. It has now done 6 of them. When they've done all 15 I know we're
sailing (for the 6 may have been my telepathy or coincidence).
And organization know-how and expansion is a long way from ended. Map a
comm center for the nearest ten stars for instance. We'll be on deck to
welcome the space ships when they get them!
Here's our program then. REACH 'EM. CLEAR 'EM.
And my actions are all geared to making that adequately possible.
I think we'll all get the notion shortly that we're making it!
Best,
L. RON
HUBBARD
[Some copies of the above HCO B, issued from London, were dated 28 January
1958.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 1 FEBRUARY 1958
CLEARING OF FIELDS
Definition:
A field is any thing interposing between pc (thetan) and something he
wishes to see, whether Mest or mock-up.
Fields are black, grey, purple, any substance, or invisible.
To run Step 6 of Clear Procedure it is necessary to clear up "field".
RULES OF FIELDS
We take a Thetan's ability to see for granted.
His willingness to see may be poor but we increase it by increasing his
confidence, decreasing his fear of objects.
Fear of seeing is fear of mass.
A pc can keep himself from seeing by destroying all mass. This is one
way mock-ups fail to appear. He has an automaticity which destroys them
before they visibly appear. Short duration mock-ups are similarly caused.
A pc that can't see is reacting from a failure (or failures) of having
tried to destroy something. He then tries to destroy mock-ups. Failing this
he tries to destroy self. This is a scale of survival.
Persistence of mock-ups is therefore dependent upon a pc's willingness
to let one survive.
One of the phenomena most in the road of clearing is called a
''field''. It is a self-protective or destructive device.
For our purposes, however, the question of a field is simple. Common
example, pc was held in a dark room. The room kept him from going away. It
is an incident. The blackness he always sees is the blackness of the room
which kept him from going away. This incident or many like it piled up is a
"field". It is only necessary to have him mock up black rooms, shove them
into his body and keep them from going away (pc is cause here where the
room was cause before) and the field will change. This is a rule: In any
field, a PC was effect in an incident where he was being kept from going
away. To clear that field, it is only necessary to have him create the
incident, shove it into the body and have pc keep it from going away.
The main rule of fields is that pc must be made to reverse cause on the
field from field at cause to pc at cause. As all fields are incidents, and
as a pc is the one who mocks up these incidents, all fields can be cleared
by attaining knowing cause.
Another rule is that a pc will confront anything to the degree that he
is made familiar with it. Merely making him find and recognize fields will
rid him of them. Merely making him confront objects will rid him of fields.
TESTING FOR FIELDS
Basic Method of Testing for a Field.
Aud: "Close your eyes." "What do you see?"
PC: "Nothing."
Aud: "Look at the room." (Pc eyes still closed) "What do you see?"
PC: "Nothing."
Aud: "Then something must be between you and room. What is it?"
etc. until pc sees field or eyelids or room.
Now repeat the same with a simple mock-up shape. (Egg, ball-bearing, or
sugar cube.) Have him mock it up, look at it. If he can't see it, ask
what's between him and it. Keep this up until he sees field.
You can also test for partial fields in areas.
CLEARING FIELDS
Basic Methods of Clearing a Field:
A. A "field" is one or more incidents.
Identify and Locate the incident making a field.
Have pc mock up the incident, shove it into the body and keep it from
going away.
B. Mock up a terminal same shade as the field and keep it from going
away.
C. Mock up a terminal same shade as field and shove it into body.
D. Run "Destroy a mock-up in front of that body. Did you? Thanks."
" " " " behind " " " " " "
" " " " below " " " " " "
" " " " to the right of " " " " "
" " " " to the left of " " " " "
" " " " above " " " " "
" " " " below " " " " "
E. Take pc outside as in Waterloo Station and have him "Get the idea of
destroying that (indicated body or object)."
F. Move pc on time track.
AUTOMATICITY OF FORM SOLUTION
A pc must know he is creating what he is creating. He is creating any
mental pictures he sees. But he must know that he is creating.
Automaticity of form keeps him from believing he is making facsimiles.
He has buried the ability to form complex objects. He "mocks up a man". The
mock-up is his. The form is an automaticity. Therefore he feels the mock-up
isn't his.
Simplicity of form will conquer this and regain a knowingness of
mocking up. An entire clearing, including the handling of fields could be
accomplished on a pc by having him do a gradient scale of forms in mock-
ups, always using only mock-ups he is confident are his own and recovering
his ability to destroy these mock-ups.
What is clearing but regaining awareness that one is himself mocking up
all his facsimiles and regaining confidence he can destroy them as well as
create them.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
P.A.B. No. 129
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 February 1958
CONFRONTING
I want to speak to you about a phenomenon having to do with "enough"
and "not enough." This adds up to meaning "insatiable." The thetan is
insatiable as far as "enough" is concerned.
Just what is enough? That limit has never been agreed upon. For
instance, the governments of populations have long since exceeded "enough"
with internal revenues. But the fact of the matter is that if you object to
taxes it is probably because there are not enough taxes.
I was fascinated to study (and I examined several hundred governments
to discover what made them persevere) what people considered a good
government to be. There are certain requisites to a good government. People
seem to buy governments of tremendous duress; and govemments which are very
sweet and polite and constructive are all lost. But governments which call
in leading citizens, incarcerate them and tear off their toenails with
pincers seem to be very well liked on the track. They persevere, not
because the police and governments do a good job, but probably only because
they can't be confronted.
Justinian, the first great Christian emperor, used to call in the
foremost citizens or members of government that had happened to make his
wife a little mad and throw them into the nearest dungeon, torture them to
death and sell their wives off to the Arabs for slaves. The leading general
of this emperor was actually one of the great generals of all time. But
every time he won a victory, Justinian would issue some kind of cross
mandate depriving the victory of all significance. At the end Belisarius
was rewarded by having his eyes put out.
The more people Justinian illegally taxed, burned and tortured, the
happier everybody seemed about the whole thing. There was no smell of
revolt. But the same people, just a few years before Justinian and just a
short while afterwards, had perfectly good emperors with equitable taxes,
just courts, and these emperors lasted only a short period before the
populace was in revolt all over the place.
Well, what causes this? The answer is: enough government. The populace
had an
idea of how much government there ought to be and if you didn't give
them that much government, they exploded. But they would have exploded to a
much higher level if somebody could have caught them. But nobody ever did
and as they came up on the upbound they just got a new tyrant who pushed
them down harder.
The only reason I am talking about government is that I want you to see
a preclear. Take somebody's wife. He is mean to her and as long as he
continues to be
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
mean she doesn't explode. One day he decides to be kinder and she explodes.
Here is a husband. He hardly puts his foot in the door and she jerks his
pay envelope out of his hand, counts it very rapidly, tells him his supper
is on the table-and it is cold mutton ! We get a tremendous amount of
duress and then one day she is feeling poorly and doesn't furnish this much
duress and he explodes. What does this prove? Unless one applies a
tremendous duress and bad 8-C people explode.
A preclear explodes under a mediumly mild 8-C which has regularity
rather than a tremendous number of surprises. He has never been given
orders he can follow before and all his effort to be orderly goes into
restimulation. His efforts to be orderly were manifest at those times when
disorder was in his vicinity. You start to handle him well and the disorder
to his view goes into automatic and he blows up. This restimulates his
efforts to keep a chaotic duress which he first used a long time ago to
have an orderly duress against such chaos. You actually start running out
the tremendous duress which he has had to apply to keep chaos from
exploding. When that runs out you get an explosion of the chaos he has been
holding down. You run out, by command, the duress which he has applied to
chaotic times of his lives. As a consequence you get an explosion. It looks
as though this individual thrives on nothing but chaos, but that is not
true. He doesn't want it and he doesn't want anything to do with it. A
short period of application of very good 8-C that is positive and won't let
him get away with a thing, will run this out.
An individual will apparently sit around in a sort of mucky apathy and
be abused for years without anything happening because the abuse he is
getting is sort of running out former chaotic periods of his life. It is in
restimulation. It convinces him that he cannot handle the wife and that
there is nothing one can do about government.
A person who is subjected to a chaotic duress year after year is not
getting any place, but, and this seems to be the criteria by which this is
judged, he did not revolt.
There is nothing confused about the auditor in a Tone 40 session. If
you want a fast blow that will run this all out, you must be very didactic,
positive and totally unconfused. He will pull out tricks like origins, then
sly tricks and then somatics. None of them interrupt positive control. You
just continue to run out all the times when he has tried to control things
and has had them blow up in his face.
It is very interesting to watch a child move up into his teens. His
parents have been giving him 8-C, family style-did you wash your face, why
don't you get a glass of milk, no there isn't any milk, go to bed, no don't
go to bed, no get up, go to bed, no don't stand up. When he gets into the
teens all of a sudden his parents aren't applying very much duress on him
and he revolts. It is not really a feeling, sentient, knowing revolt at
all. It is a restimulation of his own effort to take care of the chaos
which happened to him years ago. So actually bad control breeds periods of
chaos which will someday explode.
The actual appearances that come out of this are quite fascinating. One
of them is that the individual needs a lot of dramas. You might say, "Well
if the thetan can stand up to that much drama he must like it." He does not
like it but it is at least something to do. And that is his misconception
of what is worth confronting.
For example, a man had a nice art collection, lived an orderly
existence, was an interesting conversationalist and lived in his Maryland
village. He never had a caller. One day he died and the whole environment
went to his funeral. Obviously a funeral is worth confronting but a live
being isn't. Just add this up to what we used to have to say about
Acceptance Level. Now we have Confronting Level.
Another man hardly had anybody to talk to him in the office. He did a
good job, and there wasn't anybody who ever talked to him particularly. One
day he got sick and
everybody in the office came to see him clear down at the hospital. If he
had got sick from leprosy they all would have come in the first five
minutes.
An individual has a concept of what is worth confronting, and all of
the chaos which he has been handed has got him so confused that he doesn't
understand that things don't have to be horrible, terrible, miserable or
dramatic in order to be confronted. He falls this way straight away from
confronting the universe around him, and he confronts only the horribleness
and nastiness and so on.
Lately the Book Review tells us that a book called Andersonville by
McKinley Cantor is supposed to be and is advertised as the greatest Civil
War novel ever written. I took a look at it. It isn't about the Civil War
at all. It is about a prison camp erected in Georgia by Southerners in
which they incarcerated damn Yankees. Every nasty foul condition of
humanity is delineated, painfully and unartfully at exceeding length. This
low tone level is something that is worth confronting.
Have you watched TV lately, some of the 1.5ing and high toned TV actors
acting at 1.5? That is evidently worth confronting. If you could just
figure out what a lot of people consider to be worth confronting and then
give it to them you would probably come up with much greater popularity
than anything else. The same thing goes for the circus and screen.
Hollywood got the idea and I imagine laid a tremendous multibillion dollar
egg with their Vista Vision and Wide Screen. They are getting actors bigger
and bigger and bigger and bigger screens, and finally you sit down and
begin to feel like an ant crawling on one of the actor's knees.
There is another side of the manifestation. We have the anxiety to be
confronted. We get these two things in conflict with each other, and those
two things in their adjustment make the drama of life.
Where do we find preclears stuck? They are stuck in drama, and one gets
the idea that that is something worth confronting. They go off on a
gradient scale to things nobody could possibly confront and which they
never did confront and then go anaten.
First he starts facing these things which are, he considers, worth
confronting, and if he considers enormous drama the only thing worth
confronting then he easily falls into enormous chaos. When he goes over
into enormous chaos he gets caught up in the fact that nobody could
possibly confront the thing, but he is already stuck on an earlier
postulate that there was nothing worth confronting and so he gets no
havingness in the physical universe.
People run such tricks on other people's havingness. They tell him
nothing around here is worth looking at. "This is a dull town." (I think
America invented the small town just to convince people there was nothing
worth confronting.) These small communities, with their small minds, work
one way or the other on making nothing out of things that a child was
willing to confront. So they bred, as the child grew older, a contempt for
anything in his vicinity, and he started looking for things that were worth
confronting.
Here is a sample process which could go: "Mock up something that isn't
worth confronting. Make it a little more solid. Thank you." The person gets
streets in his immediate vicinity. He gets havingness and the only things
that he could ever get havingness from. Yet his total idea is that none of
this is worth confronting and he never sees it. Thus you get your standard
homo sapiens, vacant eyed, walking down the street.
As an example: On a lovely cool day people were riding and walking down
the street. One lady pushed a little boy in a cart and they were all going
along vacant eyed.
All of a sudden the woman pulled the tongue of the little cart up and
catapulted the little boy out onto the pavement with a crash. Instantly
traffic jammed up. The kid wasn't even hurt, he just cried a little, but
all the cars stopped and their passengers popeyed onto this terrifying
scene. People stopped walking and crowded around the spectacle. That was
worth confronting. The ingredients of blood-curdling drama were added. But
when the little boy wasn't hurt and he shut up, looks of disappointment
were on all faces and the crowd dispersed quietly to the vacancy of other
blocks.
Another process on this line: "Mock up something that nobody can
confront," and we discover the favorite games of psychos. Not a productive
process at all. By the way, when you get something that nobody could
confront you get black minds with ridges, shooting stars and space opera
flying around them that they could not make head or tail of.
If you said, "Invent something to confront. Mock it up and make it a
little more solid," you would probably get the best process that can be
worked out of this morass. The individual would gradually change his mind
concerning things there were to be confronted. There are no such things as
can't be confronted at all. There are only things which are difficult to
confront.
"Mock up something you've got to confront" and you get the standard run
of the mill, homo sapiens nonsense such as alarm fires, funerals, etc. We
also get work. Work is considered to be about the last thing that anybody
should ever be expected to confront. The Anglo-American view is to put a
tremendous amount of kick in the pants on this thing called work. The way
you work out work as something that is impossible for anybody to confront
is to discourage a child when you see him perform any work. You say, "Oh,
get out of my way. It's too much trouble to show you. You're in my road."
And by the time he is six or seven he's thoroughly educated that he will
not be permitted to work. And then the laws of state keep him from getting
jobs and earning money so that he can escape from the tremendous dependency
of family. Further up in his teens they realize the police have a vested
interest in crime and they have here a good quality juvenile delinquent.
Then he is not permitted to work either. We get him in his early twenties
and insist he get married and then we show him that he's got to work. Here
you've got one of these super duress got-to-confronts. No wonder people get
tired, because every time you put them into a "got to confront" you run
them into all the emergencies.
What is an emergency? It is something that requires a necessity level.
What is a necessity level? It is a heightened willingness-a sudden
heightened willingness which untaps a tremendous amount of ability and you
get these tremendous feats. Now this cycle of super energy and application
winding up with super tiredness gets applied to the work-a-day world of
turning a lathe or driving a truck or keeping a set of books. He's got to
get the work done and he finally goes into total exhaustion. This is
because he has no orientation on what's worth while confronting. This adds
up to the fact that Man goes into an emergency level of activity when he
has got to confront and his whole lifetime is one long activity at an
emergency height. This tells us the reason for the hectic anxiety to get
the work done. The human body has its limitations and cannot stand that
since it is built on a number of "now I am supposed to's" and every time
you have the problem handled you go out in the middle of the Sahara Desert
and "now I am supposed to have a drink of water" keys in and you haven't
got it licked at all.
"Mock up something you have got to confront" brings to the guy the
tools of his trade. Run it a bit further and you'll get women if it is a
man, and vice versa. It is a "got to confront."
You can ask what the solution of confrontingness in the preclear would
mean in terms of exteriorization. Things that are impossible to confront,
that are not worth
confronting, each play their role in exteriorization. A person who is dead
in the head knows that he couldn't possibly confront a skull of a body, but
he has got to confront one.
I would say that it would take a lot of preparation with the early
steps of CCH before one started soaring into those rarefied realms of
confrontingness. There is one process called Locational Processing which
works out a tremendous amount of confrontingness and controls attention at
the same time. It is run Tone 40, with great accuracy and precision by the
auditor, who then controls the preclear's attention which was previously
controlled by facsimiles. And a steady control like that runs out the
preclear's attempts to control. Locational Processing happens to make the
thetan make the body confront the wall. This is an objective
confrontingness process. As a subjective one, "Invent something to
confront. Mock it up and make it a little more solid," is very good, and
they are at present the two standard confrontingness processes in
Scientology.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street, N.W., Washington 9, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 FEBRUARY AD 8
FREE CLEARING PROJECT
It is vital to have cleared auditors.
The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, International shall offer to
its professional membership only, the facilities, technique, quarters and
schedules adequate to effect clearing.
Anyone reporting to Washington who is an HDA or HCA in good standing
with the HASI will be assigned co-auditing facilities. The auditing
quarters, technique tapes, scheduling and supervision will be made
available without cost. The only expense incurred by the participant would
be transportation to, food and living quarters in, Washington.
Clearing on this project would be done on a co-auditing basis with
staff supervision. Estimated time is from 3 to 5 weeks. No guarantee of
result is made since it is conditional upon participation.
This project is open until the end of April 1958 only.
Charters and franchises will hereafter be given to clears only
according to recent board resolution.
This is not an ACC and in no way parallels an ACC.
Only professional auditors-Hubbard Dianetic Auditors and Hubbard
Certified Auditors-in good standing are eligible. Reinstatement is
attainable on payment of one year's dues of $15 for those whose membership
is not current.
The HASI reserves the right to refuse to enroll persons in the project
or to terminate participation of any person with or without cause.
We need thousands of cleared auditors for current projects.
Report to the Registrar FC any Monday.
Copyright � 1958 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
5802C03 19ACC-11 Clear Procedure Vl
** 5802C04 19ACC-12 How to Find a Preclear, Responsibility and
Help
Clear Procedure Vl I
** 5802C05 19ACC-13 Clear Procedure Vlll: The Basic Approach to
Clearing,
Finding the Auditor
5802C05 19ACC-13A Clear Procedure Vlll: Q & A Period
Other lectures given to the 19th ACC are listed on pages 204; 206, 207,
219 and 220.
[pic]
Issue 66 [1958, ca. early February]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
The Attainment of "Clears"
L. Ron Hubbard
A CLEAR. A person at willing and knowing cause over his own life, his
body and his surroundings and without a reactive or subconscious mind.
I have been receiving congratulations the last few weeks for having
developed techniques which make it possible for auditors other than myself
to clear people.
It has taken more than eight years to cross this bridge. I made the
first Clears in 1947-49. Then I wrote a book about it-Dianetics: The Modern
Science of Mental Health. I honestly thought people could clear people with
that book. But all it really did was make people able to heal people, not
clear them.
People got better when audited by others. They did not get clear except
in rare cases.
So the past eight years has been occupied in the making of a bridge so
that others could clear others. Now it appears it has been done.
First I had to find out what I was doing. Then I had to find language
to describe it. Then it was necessary to develop a discipline which could
do it.
Well, apparently we've won. It has taken eight years. But it is done.
We are making "Book I" Clears in the Hubbard Guidance Center. We are making
them in ACCs. We are making the grade in staff co-auditing.
For much more than 2,500 years, Man has dreamed of this goal. When
Gautama Siddhartha (623 B.C.) rose in the East as a Buddha, he could bring
about the state of Bodhi in a man. Nearly all of his teachings concerned
the attainment of this goal. The state of Bodhi is evidently our "Clear."
(It is accidental that the goals compare.) But from this action of a few
reaching "Bodhi," more than half the civilized world was changed.
It was forecast at that time that some day in the West someone would
make it possible for this to occur in one lifetime and for many. Regardless
of the prophecy, it is evident that we are now able to bring about a state
higher and more acceptable than Man has believed possible. And it is very
important that many people can accomplish the state in others.
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
Further, it is now possible to train a person to create the state in others
with a few months of work at the Academy. And it is possible to bring about
the state of Clear in from 30 to 275 hours of professional auditing at the
Hubbard Guidance Center.
So an eight-year bridge-building program draws to a close and I find
myself engaged in communicating the data and researching toward an even
higher state, one not even embraced by earlier literature-"Operating
Thetan."
The staff attitude here concerning Clears is interesting. Only within
the last few weeks has the staff as a whole become aware of some of the
magnitude of all this. It required about five Clears around the
organization headquarters, one after the other, for people to wake up to
what has happened. And then more days to realize that these Clears had been
brought about by auditors not yet clear. And finally more days to realize
that Clears were being made by somebody other than myself. And finally,
that:
1. At the Academy we teach all the skills necessary to clear
people.
2. At the Hubbard Guidance Center, staff auditors are using only
techniques to clear people.
In other words, the staff woke up to find that they were doing it and
that they now were doing nothing else.
In the 19th Advanced Clinical Course, clearing began to occur with
routine student auditing.
And in the broad field of the public an awareness of this seems to be
coming about. We have some advertisements running in magazines that simply
invite people to come in and get clear and people we've never heard of
before are arriving with no preamble and signing up and sitting down to get
cleared-just like that.
What an enormous amount of data has been covered in 25 years! I've
combed into almost anything and everything for the answers. The answers
were not as simple as one would expect. But they were simple enough to get
the job done.
An old-time Dianeticist came in during the 19th ACC, looked at the
students and what was happening and was the first to put it in words-
"Thanks for making it so others can do it."
Well, that's what's happened.
The practical aspects of this are apparent in such things as a new
Board of Trustees order to the effect that charters in the future would be
given only to Clears, by an order to worldwide staff to be clear in six
months, by a co-auditing clearing project for professional auditors here in
D.C., at no cost.
You could say that we've been marking time as an organization waiting
for this day. The day has arrived. We need mark time no longer. In the
teeth of a worsening world, we've made it, no matter what happens on Earth.
Quod erat demonstrandum.
It can be done for you.
Best,
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 FEBRUARY 1958
HGC CLEAR PROCEDURE OUTLINE
CCH Ob-HELP IN FULL
STARTING SESSION
After clearing any pt problem with "What part of that problem could you
be responsible for?" run CCH 0 for help. If any difficulty whatever is
experienced or if pc has field, run CCH Ob in full.
This is formally audited. Each command is cleared with pc word for
word. And a bridge is used for every change. Run until E-Meter is flat or
field vanishes or both. This is a 9-way bracket.
How could you help yourself? How could you help me? How could I help
you? How could I help myself? How could you help another person? How could
I help another person? How could another person help you? How could another
person help me? How could another person help another person?
This, I think pretty well does away with any difficulty with fields.
Note: There went the only randomity in clearing. I nailed this in the 19th
ACC where only 7 cases in 36 were not progressing. All these had fields.
All these had difficulty with help. Incidentally, a black field is in
reality a betrayal. A betrayal is help turned to destruction. The dichotomy
of destroy is destroy-help. When help fails destruction occurs, or so goes
the most basic consideration behind living. There are many ramifications of
this.
LRH:-.rd
Copyright � 1958 L RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
** 5802C06 19ACC-14 CCH-0, SCS, Connectedness
** 5802C07 19ACC-15 Help-How to Get Started
** 5802C07 19ACC-15A Q & A Period and Group Processing
** 5802C10 19ACC-16 Conduct of Clear
** 5802C10 19ACC-16A Q & A Period: Help, Clearing a Command
** 5802C10 19ACC-17 The Key Processes of Clearing
5802C11 19ACC-17A Q & A Period
** 5802C12 19ACC-18 Havingness, Anaten, Flows-in Relation to
Clearing
** 5802C12 19ACC-18A Q & A Period: Postulates, Flows, Valences
Other lectures given to the 19th ACC are listed on pages 204, 206, 207,
216 and 220.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 FEBRUARY 1958
(corrected)
RULES GOVERNING THE RUNNING
OF CCH Ob "HELP"
When pc has a pt problem, run pt problem as prescribed in HGC Proc of
Feb 6. Then use the following.
Thoroughly clear command word for word and every time auditor uses a
bridge.
Always bridge no matter how brief number of commands is.
Run on E-Meter on help until needle is loose, not nul.
Help follows laws of flows not terminals. See Scientology 8-80 for
flows. Anaten ensues when one direction of command is run too long.
E-Meter needle that is stuck will run to loose if proper flow direction
is selected. If a command is run too long needle will go past a loose state
and into a new stick. Reversing command frees needle.
Help also frees valences.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[In the original issue of this HCO B, the first paragraph read, "When pc
has a pt problem, select most intimate terminals on these and run problems
of comparable magnitude and/or help in brackets, a few commands each
bracket." l
19TH AMERICAN ACC LECTURES (cont.) Washington, D.C.
13- 14 February 1958
** 5802C13 19ACC-19 Other Processes-the Help Button
5802C13 19ACC- 1 9A Q & A Period
** 5802C14 19ACC-20 Responsibility for Mock-ups
** 5802C14 19ACC-20A Q & A Period: Present Time Problem
5802C14 19ACC-20B Q & A Period: Present Time Problem (cont.)
Earlier lectures given to the 19th ACC are listed on pages 204, 206,
207, 216 and 219.
[pic]
Issue 67 [1958, ca. mid-February]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Man's Contest with the Machine Age
L. Ron Hubbard
The humanities, until now, have been defeated by the raging chatter and
disinfected order of the Machine Age.
Man as a creation has been overwhelmed by his own creations, the drill
press, the typewriter, the superbomb and the moon-carrying missiles.
Bewildered, he knows the octanes in his fuel, the calories in his stomach
and the wavelength of Radio Rome, but he does not know his own thoughts,
his intentions, the source of his fears or the reason for the decay of his
discipline. He can fire a bomb half around the world and yet like a hand
closing in a death throe, the boundaries of his empire draw inward. From
his chromium-banded car he gazes out at throngs of his fellows going where
they do not know or why.
The Anglo-American peoples have launched upon the world a technology
bound by perfection to win against and across all other cultures, but they
have not launched with it a technology of the mind or a code of behavior
adequate to guarantee the conquest.
Borrowing from a Russian, already a slave to the Anglo-American machine
age, all they know or use of insanity, the authors of our industrial age
have found boundaries and limits to their own conquest in "human
humiliation." Human inability has placed a ceiling on the height Man can go
into space, upon the amount of technology that can be absorbed by a savage
race and, less romantically but far more practically, upon the efficiency
of a business office.
Man is in trouble. He has invented himself into a dead end. The more
efficient his machinery, the clumsier become his mind and behavior.
It is our business to match the forward advance of the machine sciences
with a comparable advance in the humanities. We have done so in
Scientology.
With Scientology we can restore the freedom of the individual, the
discipline of the group, the pride of accomplishment and the understanding
necessary to use the Machine Age before it itself uses Man entirely.
We recover here our miracle and ability to do and to live or we perish
in the howl of an upsurging wave of savages or of a down-coming bomb.
We did not civilize the native. We overwhelmed and equipped him for
revolt. We did not advance our clerks and executives as we advanced their
equipment and their duties.
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
We have the only workable new civilization and technology since Rome fell.
We have not given it the philosophy and know-how that will permit it to
win.
In the midst of everything material we need, we live in a vacuum of
pride and courage and so we can fail.
Scientology adds to the Anglo-American potential that philosophy of
humanness necessary to our winning. Without it our peoples will continue to
crumble and break before the savageness of the machine and its remorseless
toll of our hope, our courage and our will to do. We can still win-with an
adequate philosophy to know and to do.
We have it in Scientology.
A Clear is above all this.
P.A.B. No. 130
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 February 19 5 8
"DEATH"
Edited from L. Ron Hubbard's 12th lecture to the 18th American
Advanced Clinical Course in Washington, D.C., on 30 July 1957
The whole subject of death has been one of the more mysterious subjects
to Man and it has only been in Scientology itself, and not in Dianetics,
that the mechanisms of death have been thoroughly understood. When I say
thoroughly understood I mean, of course, only the mechanisms.
We know a great deal about death and we are actually the first people
on this planet that do. This is one of the larger wins of Scientology.
It is very easy to forget about death because that is what death is, a
forgettingness. However, we do have a considerable amount of information on
this subject and you are entitled to that information.
Man is composed of a body, a mind and what we refer to as the thetan.
Exteriorization processes give a person a considerable subjective reality
on the idea that he himself is a being that is independent of a mind or a
body and that there actually is a separateness between them. One doesn't
even have to be carried along to a point of where one exteriorizes in
processing in order to get a reality on this.
This subject has been fully covered by me since 1952, when I defined
the thetan as in Axiom 1 and devised techniques to separate any preclear
from his body. This was the first scientific evidence that Man has had on
the subject of the human spirit. Man thought he had a human spirit. That is
totally incorrect. Man is a human spirit which is enwrapped, more or less,
in a mind, which is in a body-and that is Man, Homo sapiens. He is a spirit
and his usual residence is in his head and he looks at pictures and his
body carries him around.
When we look at the fact that Man is a spirit which has a mind and a
body, and when we describe Man in that fashion, then it becomes extremely
simple to understand what his difficulties would be. His difficulties would
be basically with his body or with his mind and we can understand that
there obviously would be difficulties with him as a spiritual being. He has
to think that he can get into a trap, has to get the idea that he can be in
danger before he can get into danger. In other words, the thetan has to
give permission to be trapped before he can be trapped, and is therefore
easily untrapped. The moment he is untrapped he gives birth to all sorts of
interesting phenomena which we know as the exteriorization phenomena, all
of which are quite easily demonstrated. I actually constructed a meter once
that could measure and prove a thetan to have an electrical field around
him-independent of energy ridges, bodies and such combinations as that.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
What happens to Man when he dies? Basically all that happens is that a
separation occurs between the thetan and the body. However, he takes old
facsimiles, energy phenomena and bric-a-brac that he feels he cannot do
without, with him, and attaches this to the next body he picks up. He does
not build a body in this lazy time of manufactured items and Frigidaires
and so on. He picks one up off the genetic line, and the genetic line is a
series of mocked-up automaticities which produce according to a certain
blueprint from the earliest times of life on this planet through until now.
Everybody-people even in biology know that there is a definite succession
of steps that life takes today, as they announce in their theory of natural
selection and evolution. We understand it rather thoroughly that something
goes through these steps.
There is the cycle of action in Scientology which is Create, Survive
(persist), Destroy. At the shoulder of the curve an individual is mostly
interested in surviving, early on the curve he is interested in creating,
and at the end of the curve he is interested in the disposition of the
remains.
When we apply this cycle of action to the various parts I described, we
get a death of the body, a partial death of the mind and a forgettingness
on the part of the spiritual being, which is in itself, again, a type of
death. Actually bodies stay around for quite a while after death since it
takes some time for them to decompose-certain parts before other parts-and
the cells in the cuticle and hair evidently live longest.
The first thing one learns about death is that it is not anything of
which to be very frightened. If you are frightened of losing your
pocketbook, your money, your memory, boy or girl friend, well, that's how
frightened you ought to be of dying because it's all the same order of
magnitude.
Here we strike the first observable phenomenon when we find out that
the mind, in spite of mechanisms which seek to decay and wipe it out, does
maintain and preserve mental-image pictures of earlier experiences. With
the proper technology and an understanding of this, one can be again in
possession of the mental-image pictures of earlier existences in order to
understand what was going on. In view of the fact that we have not restored
remembrance to the being, the mental-image pictures usually just continue
to be pictures. We send somebody into a past life and he looks at a mental
image picture and you might as well have sent him to the art gallery. He
himself has no connection with this because the mental-image picture may be
the mind's or the body's. (The body carries around mental-image pictures
and the thetan does the same and these two combine to form the mind.)
The mind, then, is a bridge between the spirit and the body, and the
mental-image pictures formed by a thetan added to and confused with the
mental-image pictures formed by the body is usually how a thetan stays in a
head. He confuses the two and therefore demonstration of past existences by
running somebody "back down on the time track" and having him look at a
picture is not very convincing. He has always had some unreality about it,
has no recognition of having ever been anything else before.
The restoration of memory to one of these beings is of great interest
to us, since all that is really wrong with him is that things have happened
to him which he knows all about but won't let himself in on. Therefore the
restoration of memory is done as a matter of course in almost any
processing, and in view of the fact that it is part of any processing, it
is impossible today to process somebody, well and expertly, without having
him sooner or later get some sort of a recall on a past existence with some
small reality.
An individual's own will has a great deal to do with this. One should
not look for outside sources as to why his memory is shut off. Just as he
must grant permission to be trapped, so must he grant permission to be made
to remember. He is more or less
convinced that a memory would cause him to re-experience the pain he
already feels has been too much for him. He is very reluctant to face up
again to this mechanism, and facing death, he almost always goes into a bit
of amnesia.
The fact that one has lived before is so restrained that it itself is
the reason why it is forgotten. The unpopularity of it in other ages and
this one brought about a forgetter mechanism which causes an occlusion on
the subject of death. The fact that one cannot talk about it is enough, all
by itself, to continue to cause the forgetter mechanism.
A way to plot this would be to ask somebody, as an auditing question:
"To whom can you tell the fact that you have been dead?" It works something
like this: "Tell me the one person in the world who does not believe that
you are insane." It has a fantastically cataclysmic effect upon a person.
He sort of believes he is going wog and spinning and so forth, and when you
ask him that question you have broken the agreement chain.
You could ask a similar question, "Tell me one person in the world who
believes you live more than once," and you would get a similar reaction.
I have plumbed into this subject very deeply with lie detectors and E-
Meters, checking up with grown-ups and children from all walks of life. You
can, with the aid of one of these meters, put a person in such an incident.
There is a peculiar behavior of the needle. It is a little hunt of the
needle, and it just hunts back and forth over a small area quite
frantically. It indicates that a person is still sitting in one of these
exteriorization incidents.
We know a great deal about havingness and that if a person suddenly ran
out of havingness he would die and we would expect so much loss of his
possessions and so forth to wipe him out. It doesn't wipe him out. This is
what ordinarily occurs. He backs out at the moment of death with full
memory. At that moment he knows who he is, where he has been, and so forth.
You'd expect a total occlusion but it does not occur at this point. It is
not true that a thetan in excellent condition gets some distance from the
body and then doesn't care about it any more. That is simply a phenomenon
of havingness. When we first found that, we thought this was always the
case, but we were striking at thetans ordinarily low on the tone scale.
Those who forget about it immediately and do not care have actually gone
into the sub-zero tone scale. In support of this you can pick up on the
track times when a fellow backed out of his head and was mad and just
kicked the stuffing out of the person who killed him.
At a certain level a person who had to "have" tremendously would get
just so far from a body and say, "Well, I don't care. I've had a very
unhappy time during that life and I'm awfully glad, I don't care." But that
person was so little alive when he was alive that his aliveness after he
has died is also negligible. A person a little higher up when somebody
knocks off his body, would have an interesting reaction to this. "I'll show
them they can't put me out of the game," and he'll dive halfway across the
country, see a maternity hospital and grab the body of a baby. Somebody
higher than this would not have been in contact with bodies in the first
place.
We get a very fascinating exteriorization here because it is totally
cognizant. The person knows who he is and usually has very good perception.
He knows where his friends are and for somebody to come around and point
out this fantastic spiritual phenomena that somebody has appeared to them
after he had died several thousand miles away is something like being
terribly surprised because a waitress came to the table in a restaurant. If
a person is killed with sudden violence and he is very surprised about the
whole thing, he is sufficiently upset and unphilosophical about it that he
is liable to go around and see his next of kin and the rest of his friends
in an awful frenzied
hurry, trying to reassure himself that he hasn't gone to purgatory.
("Purgatory and hell" is a total myth, an invention just to make people
very unhappy, and is a vicious lie.)
He has suffered the loss of mass. That is just about the frame of mind
the thetan is usually in when he finds his body dead. If he is below 2.0 on
the tone scale his major thought is to get another body. This he can do by
finding a young child that he could bring back to life. Thetans are very
good at this. But the ordinary entrance is some time around what we call
the "assumption," and the assumption occurs within a few minutes after
birth in most cases. That is the usual procedure, but the thetan can hang
around for some time.
They'll hang around people. They'll see somebody who is pregnant and
they will follow them down the street. They'll hang around the entrance to
an accident ward and find somebody-some body-that is all banged up and pick
up this body and pretend to be somebody else's husband or something of the
sort.
It isn't necessarily true that all of this is taped, measured. I am
telling you what is standard about this behavior and what is not. It is a
case of how fast you can pick up a body before somebody else gets it. So
there is a certain anxiety connected with this. Thetans often say very
interesting prayers at the moment they pick up a body. They dedicate
themselves to its continued growing and they are so pleased with the whole
thing that they dedicate themselves to the family and go through all kinds
of odd rituals of one kind or another. The odd part of it is, they don't
shut their memory off until they pick up another, a new body, and the shut-
off of memory actually occurs with the pick-up of the new body.
There is a phenomena series known as the "between-lives" series, and
people have some sort of a thing mocked up whereby somebody goes back
through a between-lives area. This can be plotted, it is not unusual, but
it is certainly not a constant. Until thirteen or fourteen hundred the
between-lives area operations weren't thriving at all. Then they started to
pick it up more and more. They had to knock witchcraft totally out of
Europe before the between-lives area clubs started thriving. They had to
knock out any idea about demons and spirits. In other words, they had to
make one feel guilty for hanging around and admiring the trees with no body
to look through.
They succeeded in doing this. You can make a little child sick by just
talking to him about this sort of thing, by mentioning ghosts and spirits
and how bad they are and how fearful they are. He gets upset because (1)
you are restimulating times when he exteriorized and (2) you are
invalidating him and throwing him down tone like mad. He is a ghost, a
spirit, a demon. He is all these bad things they have mocked up.
In view of the fact that two exteriorizations take place, it could get
very complicated as one looked at it because the GE exteriorizes. I don't
know much about that except that there is something that mocks up bodies
that we call the genetic entity and it skips from life to life. In other
words, even a body doesn't live only once. It is so obvious once you look
at it that if a body lived only once it would never have learned how. The
intricacy of a body, itself, is something that is developed over a long
period of time.
When you realize that you have the capability of endowing things with
life then we don't even know that the genetic entity is alive. It might
just be machinery or computation of one kind or another that goes on and
that you continue to endow with life to some degree until you separate from
it.
Another interesting phenomenon about death is that a thetan will stay
around a body until it is disposed of properly. You can take an E-Meter and
any preclear, and
you can find times when he has been left out on a cliff and nobody even put
a lid on the coffin, and there it was exposed to the wind and rain and he
will stay around there until that body is totally dust. Bodies left out in
the open decompose. Bodies buried in the ground go to pieces in a hurry.
The rate of decay of a body is not really a point in question except that a
thetan will try to accelerate it if the body isn't cared for. A thetan
doesn't much care concerning the actual disposition of the body as long as
it isn't given any more indignity than it suffered in the lifetime. He is
apt to be very upset about indignities rendered to a dead body. Even while
he is "in a body, alive," when the body is apparently alive and he is
taking one around, he gets upset, if he is in any shape at all, about
bodies being abused and mistreated. Much lower on the scale he is still
upset about indignities to dead bodies and dead things.
He associates the body with his own identity to the degree that every
time an indignity is rendered to the body he thinks it is to some degree
being rendered to him; therefore he hangs around a body until it is
properly disposed of. When people make wills in which they declare a
certain disposition of the body, it is a very wise thing to do, if you want
him to live a happy life elsewhere, to carry out those wishes, because that
is his idea of what proper care is.
The Egyptians had the idea of living forever and so they wanted their
bodies to live forever, but don't think that a thetan hung around just
because his body had been mummified. As far as he was concerned he was on
some other genetic line and he would not particularly be upset about his
body if it had been hauled out of a tomb and been put up in the
Metropolitan Museum. He already would have been too far away from it to
worry about it. One very worrisome case was that of a thetan whose skull
was used by a carnival who put a motor in the jaws to make them keep on
opening, and the thetan just couldn't take it. I actually had to unwrap a
preclear from that particular skull. He still had a finger on it even
though he had another body. People actually become curators of museums just
to keep a finger on a body they might have once had.
Mary Sue is the sweetest tempered girl you ever saw. We went into the
British Museum, saw a whole bunch of jewels lying there and she went
completely 1.5. She just got so mad that even I couldn't talk her out of
it. Finally I took her home, put her on an E-Meter and her total conviction
was they were still safe in a tomb someplace.
Every once in a while some fellow will go into some area and go
completely berserk and not know quite what is wrong with him. Well, he
probably got killed there or something of that nature.
The subject of death is never a very serious one to a Scientologist
beyond the fact that he feels kind of sorry for himself sometimes. There
was somebody of such terrific elan, who made him real happy and this person
was thoughtless enough to dispose of the mock-up and go out of
communication and the Scientologist feels unhappy about it, for it is a
thoughtless thing for a friend to do. This, by the way, is a very early
concept of death. You now more or less progress back to death as it was
regarded very early on this particular track in this universe. People
didn't regard it very seriously.
Death is in itself a technical subject. You can, with considerable
confidence, reassure some husband whose wife is dying or has just died that
she got out all right and she is going someplace else to pick up a mock-up.
If you got there while the person could still talk, still communicate with
you MEST-wise, in the last moments they usually have something spotted,
something planned.
Now, sometimes a thetan gets so furious that he gets hallucinatory. He
goes around killing all his enemies in all directions and they don't even
exist. Motto: Have your reality in good condition before you die. There are
many processes which
exteriorize people and give them high reality on this. Amongst those
processes the key process that produces the phenomena without any great
shock is old Stop, Change and Start-it produces exteriorization rather
easily.
Thetans do not become body cells, walls and can get out of any trap
they are in, but sometimes it is better to be in a trap than nowhere, and
that is true of most people.
A thetan very often carries with him a theta body, which he mocked up
on the past track and which is a number of facsimiles of old bodies he has
misowned and is carrying along with him as control mechanisms which he uses
to control the body he is using. He eventually develops quite a heavy,
thick, automatic-control theta body. They are quite interesting. Many have
electronic claws and all sorts of things. Usually the theta body structure
has an electronic beam that goes down each of the fingers and he opens and
closes his hand with beams. This is going off into structure, but he
sometimes pulls out this theta body complete and simply takes it along.
Losing your pocketbook, some treasured possession or your body are all
alike, and because of the forgetter mechanism a great mystery is made out
of this. But that is death-phenomena of. And I hope sometime or another you
may have no use for this whatsoever.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street, N.W., Washington 9, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 1 MARCH 1958
Distribution:
All Staff
Bulletin Board
Field Offices
HCO London
PROCESSES
When running Problems of Comparable (or incomparable) Magnitude, use
the following three parts. Do not omit any part:
1. "Invent a problem of comparable (or incomparable) magnitude to
(terminal)."
2. "How could that be a problem to you?"
3. "Can you conceive yourself figuring on that?"
Note: Question 2 may be omitted only if the preclear tells you how it
could be a problem to him while answering the first part.
------------------
CONNECTEDNESS: Insertion of the word "You" in the command:
"Get the idea of you making that (indicated object) connect with you."
Best,
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
P.A.B. No. 131
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. Ron Hubbard
Via Hubbard Communications Office
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 March 1958
THE SCALE OF WITHHOLD
Edited from L. Ron Hubbard's 17th lecture to the 18th American
Advanced Clinical Course in Washington, D.C., on 6 August 1957
CCH 9, Tone 40 "Keep it from going away" is a withhold process. We know
it to have a considerable workability. The road to solids, toleration of
solids, lies through withhold. Only we never had a straight wire version on
this before or anything that clipped it directly and immediately, but we
have it here with Tone 40 "Keep it from going away."
CCH 9 proves that we are dealing with the automaticity which goes as
follows: everything that comes along is used by a thetan to keep things
from going away. He gets a cannonball in the stomach and says, "Ah, that
moment of impact kept the body from going away. So I'll make a picture of
the impact"-hence the necessity for pictures-"and have it keep the body
from going away from here on out."
That is why people hang on to impact engrams. It is fear of loss-fear
that they will lose a body. They do other things. They fill the atmosphere
around the body with machinery so that other thetans will be afraid to come
into it and take it over, take it away.
"Keeping things from going away" is a basic mechanism which guards
against loss. As you know the mind runs on a gradient scale from thought
through effort to solids. Actually the mind is already graphed on the tone
scale. That is the gradient scale of approach between something that is
nothing and total solids at the other end. It isn't that the person himself
becomes a total solid, but his approach to solids is on a gradient scale
through less solids and misemotions and plain emotions and energies, like
aesthetics, to just thought.
When an individual gets hold of something like a cannonball in the
stomach, he says, "That certainly got there in a hurry. That I can directly
handle because it handled me so well." He keeps things from going away. He
guards against loss with impacts. He also does other things with impacts.
He uses them as control mechanisms. It would not be put beyond a thetan to
take a cannonball engram on the right to move his body to the left and vice
versa. It is handy and requires no effort. He just puts a slight thought
into the line and says, "Move to the right." The cannonball goes into
restimulation and he moves over to the right. This could be a good system.
He uses these "keep-it-from-going-aways" as control. In other words, he
lets the body be shoved around by things and he keeps those things there
and thus he can control the body rather easily-but he deteriorates at the
same time.
Copyright � 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
An individual can also very easily take a cannonball engram and hang it on
somebody else's head to make him bow. Very often you start to audit a
preclear and you find out that you are auditing a stomach out of his right
arm or a head off his left foot. This is the interchange of facsimiles, and
thetans do use facsimiles on others.
Way back on the track there is a thing called the Engram Police. It is
quite amusing to get a thetan into some kind of condition where he can be
policed-to be confined for thirty days in the space opera trap.
Facsimiles have a use and then they have the lovely attraction of also
being mass. A fellow who keeps money for its own sake is the type of person
who would keep facsimiles for their own sake.
You, as an auditor, start to look for the significance of why this
preclear has this thing stuck in front of his face and you may find that he
is merely keeping it for its own sake.
Facsimiles either keep you where you are or the body where it is. They
are control mechanisms. Sometimes a thetan will get a series of engrams all
hooked together-shoulder with an arrow, stomach with a crossbow through it,
leg with a spear in it and a few slinging stones that are back of the left
eye. That is a nice combination and moves the body rapidly. You start to
shift the engram a little and the body jumps, and you move this at somebody
else and he jumps as well.
The service facsimile is a series of facsimiles which you call a
facsimile, which can be applied to the control of others very nicely. But
after the individual has been on the track for a few billion years using
one of these combinations, he sooner or later flops.
If an individual is to have anything to do with facsimiles, he is going
to be somewhere between solids and thought. By gradient scales of
concatenation and by lots of postulates about association, which gets into
identification, finally this scale can become relatively solid. He can
think a thought and turn on the solid at the other end of the scale.
We look this over and we see that the movement and the motionlessness
of people can easily be handled by facsimile patterns.
Throwing things away or dispensing with them is much inferior to
holding on to them. I near killed some preclears trying to find this out.
Which side of the reach-and withdraw mechanism is the one which can be
audited? I have found that the "reach" one is good and high toned-not games
condition activity. That is communication. Unless you have an opponent
situation you would certainly run "reach."
In view of the fact that everybody has some games condition on almost
everything we can run withdraw, and withdraw is the side we can run rather
endlessly. (By withdraw we mean "withdraw something from" because this
builds up and increases havingness.) "Withdraw it from" or "Hold to
yourself" the object holds good anywhere up to a couple of hundred hours of
processing. Man will communicate outward to the degree that he can hold
inward and the monitoring thing is the "hold inward."
Every time a psycho comes into the foundation we find that they cannot
separate anything from them. I used to try to process them on getting them
to throw away a single scrap of paper and with very good results. That is
an extreme case of hold, hold in to self and withdraw it from others. You
will find out that as a person heads on down the scale it gets that bad-but
what complicates it is that it has inversions, and right above this "clutch
it to the chest this tight" would be an inversion of "throw it away."
Which one solved it-the "throw it away" or the "clutch"? People cannot
throw away ad infinitum. They run out of havingness. We are really only
concerned with a person's holdingness to himself. That gives us an engram
bank, puts the bank in restimulation and upsets things endlessly.
Now, "hold it in" solves both "hold it in" and "throw it away." An
individual's communication is raised by holding things in. Here is a
nothing that couldn't duplicate any mass busy holding mass in to himself.
He comes to harm because of it. His abilities go to pieces and his
penalties and that sort of thing all accumulate on him. Everything a thetan
has done wrong he carries around in little pictures to remind himself how
guilty he is. It is probably the result of a number of considerations
peculiar only to this universe.
We have to increase a thetan's ability to hold. When this ability to
hold is emphatically good and he himself can do it, he will abandon all
these cannonballs in the stomach. In other words, he abandons all this
lower scale automaticity of having things held for him.
Holding on to, when it becomes automatic, goes out and beyond one's
power of choice, which automatically can start by power of choice, but
after that it has to violate it all the way to be automatic. One doesn't
stop an automaticity. An automaticity, when and if it stops, wears out.
If we have everything holding on to things for us, such as gravity,
body holding on to you, and all kinds of things holding on for us, we
eventually get to a frame of mind where we feel we are being totally cared
for. But at the same time we don't dare reject anything because it might be
some of our hold-on-to mechanism and a thetan doesn't reject.
For a thetan to re-acquire the ability to hold on to things, is not
necessarily the same as a thetan having to destroy all automaticities.
Automaticities, quite incidentally, fold up when the thetan starts to re-
acquire the powers and abilities contained in an automaticity. We do not
take over automaticities to destroy automaticities. We take over
automaticities only to rehabilitate the ability of a thetan. We just take
them over because they are robbing the thetan of his ability to perform.
(The inflow principle of the universe is being used to hold on to things
rather than the thetan's ability to hold on to them.)
Power is contained in the ability to maintain a position in space.* If
you can't maintain a position in space you will never have any power. If
everything is holding things in to you, they will eventually start moving
you around and the moment this happens you no longer have power. An
individual's ability to withhold, his ability to hold and his ability to
keep something from going away, are part and parcel of his ability to
maintain his own position, situation or location.
Some people start confronting and immediately fly out of their heads.
Eventually they get so that they can sit there and confront and hold their
position. This is a necessary point in confronting. You have to be able to
hold the position in the face of something. Higher than this, or lower down
since it goes either way, we realize that to keep something from going away
is a sort of confrontingness. Keeping things from going away is an ability
which gradually cultivates the ability of the thetan to remain where he is.
If you can keep a wall from going away, the ability to hold still in
general is regained. One then is able to confront things and can then
recognize solids. First you
* Refer to Scientology 8-80 by L. Ron Hubbard.
have to acquire this ability to keep things from going away, then finally
discover that you yourself can be stationary-which gives you the idea of
confronting-and as soon as you are willing to confront then you can make
things more solid. And that is why these three processes, CCH 9, 10 and 11,
are run in this manner.
The solids and the solidity that you are willing to confront have an
awful lot to do with your ability to hold still or hold things still, and
your ability to hold things still has a lot to do with your ability to keep
things from going away.
But here is a basic ability in the keeping of a secret-being able to
withhold things from others. We have a whole span of keeping things from
going away, all of which simply begin with the withheld thought, which is
what a secret is, and it scales on further to a withheld object.
When an individual has regained his ability to keep certain things from
going away, he could then start in on the basis of holding things still,
but he will never hold himself still for the excellent reason that he isn't
there to be held still. He can only suppose he is in a place. And this
depends upon his ability to hold other things still.
Now, "Keep it from going away" solves both outflow and inflow. "Hold it
still" solves motion and no motion. We have motion and no motion and you
really don't solve motion with motion. You solve motion with "hold
stillness. " And the ability to confront and confound solids solves alike
something and nothing. To be able to confront a solid, then, makes a person
capable of confronting no-thing.
Here we have six items and their gradient scale. The first two of these
items are a pair called "reach" and "withdraw," or "throw it away" and
"hold it to you." And that bracket is solved only by running "Keep it from
going away." The next one up is "motion" and "no motion"-action and
stillness-and those are solved by running "Hold it still." The last
bracket, we have somebody who is terribly fascinated with vaporous
"nothingness." To solve nothingness we run solids. The person will graduate
rather rapidly up to being able to confront nothing if we run solids. But
we don't run nothings-conceiving statics. We run solids and what we do is
pick him out of those places where he is totally convinced of solids and
you walk him back to the world of thought. The gradient scale goes from
nothing through emotions, through effort and facsimiles into solids, and
you get him back up to where he can handle it on the effort band and up
above into thought.
These processes can be run by formal auditing and are not necessarily
Tone 40. If you have a very figure-figure case you better run it formal. It
will run more easily for you. But first flatten CCH 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4 and
then run this combination of processes and win like mad.
L. RON
HUBBARD
P.A.B. No. 132
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 March 1958
REPORT ON TWO CASES THAT HAVE RECEIVED
PSYCHIATRIC AND EURO-RUSSIAN THERAPY
FROM THE GOVERNMENT
Recently two cases came to the attention of the HGC which had received
former mental "therapy" of the Euro-Russian variety.
One of these, a 32-year-old shipworker, had been four years in prison
for having committed a crime of violence.
The other was a 46-year-old man who had received a dishonorable
discharge from the Army.
Both cases were picked up at random from the general run of workers.
It was found that both had received mental "treatment." The first had
been given considerable attention in prison from "clinical psychologists."
The second had had "psychiatric interviews" in the Army.
Neither case had been in any way improved. Both had been antagonized.
The first committed a "grand theft" after release from prison and was in no
sense a safe factor in society. The other case, even though court-martialed
and discharged for drunkenness, was still getting drunk and losing jobs.
These two cases had one thing in common-they had been made contemptuous
of mental treatments. They had to be forced into session due to their
former experiences.
Both were improved by processing and could have been completed as
cases. As soon as this was established they were let go as this was all
that we cared to discover.
We can assume that Euro-Russian mental treatment is a liability in that
it destroys any faintest hope of recovery. We can also notice that money
spent by the prison and the Army was wasted.
It is noticeable that neither the prison nor the Army paid any
attention to public safety in these cases. Two men were released in a
worsened state and permitted to victimize the public. Thus all measures
taken were apparently detrimental to public well-being.
We can further notice that our task in Scientology is being made harder
by the presence and practice of Euro-Russian psychotherapy and the handling
of criminals in government areas.
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
A time has come for a reform of these matters.
The correction of prison and Army systems of punishment and the
introduction of mental methods which do not make cases less approachable
are both needful.
In a national disaster the presence of a large number of criminals and
insane in our midst, unreformed and loosed upon us, could well mean the
fact that gives us defeat.
The time to start is now, not when a man brings chaos to the whole
public.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 22 MARCH 1958
(revised)
CLEARING REALITY
A new rule.
In the absence or unreality of a terminal the significance in a process
will not function.
In other words, the significance of help will not function on a tooth
unless the pc is given a reality on the terminal of a tooth.
On a nervous-dispersed case, there is no real gain in running
significance until hellos and okays are run on something.
Command "You say hello to that body." "Have the body say okay to that
hello." "Have the body say hello to you." "You say okay to that hello."
When pc has misemotion off the interchange, then run help in brackets
on the same terminal.
Establish the reality of a terminal before you try to clear it with
significance.
A pc in extreme pain can be audited if one clears reality on the
hurting terminal and then runs brackets in help on that terminal. Note:
Extreme control must be used in attempting this.
The above applies to objective terminals. Subjective might or might not
work.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH :-.cden
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[pic]
Issue 70 [1958, ca. late March]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Does Clearing Cancel the Need for Training?
L. Ron Hubbard
To answer the important question "Does Clearing cancel training?" all
you need to do as an auditor is clear someone without training him and then
say to him, "All right. Go out and clear people."
You'll get a blank stare.
Why?
Because Auditing skill is a discipline in living and a know-how of the
parts of life which is in itself something new in the universe. Even OTs
don't have auditing skill since there have never been any auditors behind
them.
There is such a thing as learning. There are such things as data.
The fact is, that a cleared Zulu is a cleared Zulu. A cleared
advertising man is a cleared advertising man. A cleared Zulu is not a
cleared advertising man.
Now a Zulu uncleared has scant chance of becoming an advertising man.
But a cleared Zulu would probably be able to become one rapidly. And
there's the difference.
Being clear gives one the potential of being and makes the being rather
easy, and fun. Further, being cleared makes it possible to continue to be
something. There's nothing wrong with being clear. A person ought to be.
The state is so valuable several hundreds of millions of people in the past
2,500 years have concentrated on nothing else.
But how about getting clear and staying clear forever? The auditor
alone with his data well learned could manage that.
Remember, you were clear once-trillions of years ago. Why didn't you
stay that way? Because the traps were well designed and you had no anatomy
of traps.
Well, Scientology does have the anatomy of the traps, the Axioms, the
discipline and know-how necessary to handle and control the laws of the
universe. Scientology is the data necessary to live.
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
If everyone were now to concentrate only on how to get clear and forget all
about how to stay clear, we'd be back in the soup in a century.
Oddly enough, the best time to study auditing is when you're aberrated-
when the thing looks impossible, when you can achieve subjective reality on
the grimness of it.
The best things a person can do are to (1) get trained and (2) get
cleared. Auditors will always be senior to clears. Always. That became very
obvious in the 19th ACC. People who weren't clear created clears.
If a person gets cleared first, he can, of course, learn very rapidly
how to be a good Scientologist. If he is to be a very good being he will be
both a good auditor and a clear. That combination cannot be beaten.
If we had only clears and no auditors we'd have another slump ahead.
Scientology is not in the experience of anyone's back track. It is itself.
It is the one thing senior to life because it handles all factors of life.
Scientology could not have happened earlier because there was not enough
livingness to study. We have arrived near bottom.
There are people getting cleared now all over the world. Just remember
that you share the agreement of the society in which you live. You'll have
to be able to audit to skillfully handle aberrated persons. And it will
take a lot of auditors to have a cleared society.
Right now it's all right to keep your eye on that first dynamic and get
clear. You should. But when, suddenly, you find you've achieved clear,
remember when I tell you this one thing:
There are eight dynamics.
You cannot stay clear unless you solve things by the equation of the
optimum solution: The greatest good for the greatest number of dynamics.
Failing to so solve things dug you in to where you were in the first place.
Scientology got you out.
Stay out by knowing Scientology well.
I look forward to seeing your bright, smiling face, clear or not, in
the Academy or an ACC, or both, in D.C., or London, New Zealand, Australia,
South Africa. A Clear world to be, needs you as a good and skilled
Scientologist.
And that's how you're going to help me.
Okay?
L. RON
HUBBARD
P.S. When I solve a case I always ask the pc for one unnamed favor. I've
never called these favors in. The favor I tell you now for the first time:
Whatever else you are, be a good Scientologist and help me clear these
Earth people.
P.A.B. No. 133
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 April 1958
PROCEDURE CCH
Compiled from the Research Writings and Taped Lectures of L. Ron Hubbard
(The following series of PABs are devoted to an elucidation of
Procedure CCH and should by no means be taken as a complete exposition
of that procedure. This course of information will be fully covered in
the newly completed but as yet unpublished basic handbook for all
auditors: "The Student Manual" by L. Ron Hubbard, which is the most
comprehensive book ever issued from the pen of LRH on auditing
procedure and all that a Scientologist should know about how to audit
and practice.
Further, the numbers of the CCHs don't necessarily agree with "The
Student Manual" except from CCH0 to 5, since these PABs are based on a
workable procedure called Procedure CCH [Long Form], given by LRH to
the HGC staff auditors here in Washington, D.C., in 1957.)
CCH ZERO:
CCH 0 is firstly establishing the Rudiments of the session, discussing
the goals of the preclear for the intensive-also established at the
beginning of each separate session-handling the present time problem and
clearing the auditor for the preclear. The latter has become very important
in modern auditing.
One establishes the session by calling the preclear's attention to the
room, the auditing environment, to let him know that he has arrived for a
session. This can be done by light "Locational Processing." At this point
one doesn't have to belabor the Rudiments.
Following this there is a discussion of the preclear's goals for the
session and intensive and making sure that these goals are not wild or
completely outside the preclear's reality. He may, for instance, want to be
an Operating Thetan while hiding in mystery and he will thus not achieve
that goal unless he has full reality on it. In other words, the auditor
makes sure that the goals which the preclear has set for himself are goals
which the preclear can work towards and attain without much difficulty.
The auditor then defines for himself-but does not inform the preclear
of-his own goals and intentions for this session so that he does not grope
blindly with techniques without knowing which way and why he is guiding the
preclear. Often auditors work in the dark without setting goals for
themselves toward which to guide the preclear. Best of all is when the
auditor can align the preclear's and his own goals for the intensive.
After this the auditor must inquire if the preclear has any pressing
present time problem which needs immediate attention. It is fairly safe to
say that every preclear on
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
earth today has a present time problem. The more the preclear has the
easier they can be handled. If the problem is not pressing and will not
interfere with the processing, then the auditor can continue further.
Should there be a scarcity of problems the preclear will hold on to and
dramatize that problem and the situation has to be remedied either with
Problems of Comparable or Incomparable Magnitude or by Locational
Processing.
A lot here depends upon auditor judgment of the case (and it is, of
course, best to have preclears tested at the London or Washington Academies
to aid the auditor), but should the preclear be too low to handle the
present time problem, the auditor should only run Locational Processing to
bring the preclear up to present time. Preclears who are very low toned do
not even vaguely have their thinkingness under control, and to run
"problems" would be a waste of time.
Since many preclears do not know much about their condition or what
they are working towards, LRH has found a very good way to clear this
matter. This process is a Rudiment called "Clear the Auditor" and known as
"Help." It is surprising, after running this process for an hour or so, to
find that many preclears do not believe that they can be helped by anybody
and are unclear as to what the auditor can do for them.
This is the best way of clearing the auditor and making the fact that
they can be helped to help themselves clear to them.
The commands for this process are as follows:
"Could I help you?" "How?"
"Could you help me?" "How?"
"Can I help anybody else?" "Who?" "How?"
"Could you help anybody else?" "Who?" "How?"
"Do other people ever help other people?" "How?"
"Do men ever help women?" "How?"
and the auditor just does this on a big, long bracket.
Of course, it is necessary to see that the preclear does not give
machine answers and that he is fairly sure that this can be done. Two-way
communication here is important and a lot of it could be used.
This process becomes a fantastic way of dealing with the preclear and
is valuable in many ways. For example, you can take Father and Mother
valences which are usually aberrative and run them on Help in brackets.
Running Help is necessary on a case that is hung up, because the only
reason he is sitting there is to "waste" help. You can run such a case on
any process, no matter how excellent, on a basis of "wasting help" until
the case simply cannot find enough ways to waste help and he goes down the
tone scale.
One has to understand that the case which isn't changing is trying to
waste help. It isn't a case of "finding the auditor" in the Rudiments
nowadays, but of "clearing the auditor." The only point on which he can be
cleared is "Help"-"Can I help you?" or "Can you help me?" and asking "How?"
each time to keep the command real to the preclear and applicable. No
conditional answers are accepted and the preclear has to find real answers.
The whole purpose of CCH 0 to quote from "The Student Manual," is "to
make known the beginning of a session to a preclear and the auditor so that
no error as to its beginning is made; to put the preclear in a condition to
be audited. "
CCH 1:
CCH 1 is known as "Give Me That Hand," and is one of the most effective
entrances to cases yet devised. Apart from having great beneficial effects
it is also used as a Rudiment. For example, soon the preclear finds that
there is a mass sitting in front of him (the body of the auditor) and that
he is occupying a mass in the chair-and thus the environment takes on a
more real shape.
To illustrate this better, here is a brief description from an LRH
lecture to the Washington, D.C., HGC staff auditors: "Most preclears are
completely unaware of their own body or that of the auditor. GMTH brings
the preclear back onto the Scale of Reality, which runs this way (from the
top of scale down):
Postulates, Agreements, Solids (masses, terminals), Communication Lines
But No Terminals, which dwindles into Confused And Complex Communication
Lines, and eventually into No Lines-and you've got mystery.
"Applying the Scale of Reality to GMTH, you have a preclear who is in
mystery. You take his hand often enough with an acknowledgment ('Thank
you') at the execution of the command and he slowly, through some dope-off,
becomes aware of a solid line of communication-your arm grasping his hand
to his arm-and that becomes more solid until he goes through the
complexities and confusions of communication lines and gets them straight
enough to recognize a solid terminal sitting in front of him (the auditor's
body sitting there, a mass, a terminal). He thus gets into communication
with a solid terminal. As he comes upscale he does not have to use solid
comm lines to communicate but can do so by agreements (symbols, words) and
higher upscale just by postulate.
"As Opening Procedure by Duplication demonstrated the accuracy of the
Know to Mystery Scale, so Give Me That Hand proves the accuracy of the Sub-
Zero Tone Scale and the Reality Scale. Preclears will go into dope-off and
a state of confusion, engrams will fly off as the complexities and
confusions of comm lines fade into where his and your hands will become
real to him. He will most likely recognize you as the first real terminal
he has ever had."
This is a Tone 40 process.
Tone 40 has been defined as "Giving a command and just knowing that it
will be executed despite any contrary appearances. " (This is not the 18th
ACC definition.) In other words, Tone 40 is positive postulating.
"The Student Manual" has the following to say about the procedure and
the running of this unique process: "Physical action of taking hand when
not given and then replacing it in the preclear's lap and 'Thank you'
ending the cycle. It is Tone 40, with clear intention, one command in one
unit of time, no originations of preclear acknowledged in any way, verbally
or physically." However, one can freeze the process after a cycle of action
has been completed if one is sure that something is occurring which needs
further "fishing" for a cognition.
This is the first step to the control of the preclear's body, which is
the basic element of Control-C-H (CCH). We first have to bring the
preclear's body under your and then his control before we can attempt to
bring his attention or thinkingness under control. And processing follows
that basic pattern all the time-control of body, attention and
thinkingness.
This is a very precise process, being Tone 40, and Tone 40 demands accurate
precision into which one has to be trained to be efficient. Further
information will be found in "The Student Manual," which will be published
shortly, or in the Validation Courses run in Washington, London or by Gold
Seal Certificate holders.
As a last note on this process, there is a negative side to this if
your preclear is "withholding" communication from you and it simply runs in
smooth Tone 40 as follows: "Don't give me that hand." "Thank you."
The preclear will get frantic after a while and want to give you his
hand. By telling him to withhold his hand, and acknowledging it so that he
receives the acknowledgment, you are telling him to do what he has been
doing all his life and consequently ruin that mechanism which has been
"withholding" all the while, when you take over the automaticity.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 2 APRIL 1958
ARC IN COMM COURSE
There are two types of Auditing. Both include control. They are called
"Formal Auditing" and "Tone 40 Auditing".
The first is control by ARC. The second is control by direct Tone 40
command.
The first, Control by ARC, is taught in Comm Course. The second,
Control by Tone 40, is taught in Upper Indoc.
The two are never mixed in teaching. Tone 40 is never taught in a Comm
Course and is not even permitted. ARC is not taught in Upper Indoc.
The most widespread weakness in auditors prior to this date is an
inability to use step one of Clear Procedure (Participation by the pc).
This is only good ARC in the Training Drills of Comm Course. Auditors are
now too prone to let CCH Ob Help do the work. Auditors fail to make the pc
feel they are interested in the pc when they handle him with poor ARC.
We care nothing about ARC in Upper Indoc. We want command, we want Tone
40. We do not even handle pc origins in Upper Indoc.
Students must understand that there are two types of auditing. They
should realize that Tone 40 is for the unconscious, the psycho, the non-
communicative, the electric shock case pc. The student should realize that
ARC formal auditing is not chatty or yap-yap, but it is itself. It has
warmth, humanity, understanding and interest in it.
Academy Dir of Tr, Comm Course and Upper Indoc Instructors should keep
this in their hats as needful technical data, since we must turn out
auditors capable of handling pcs with ARC.
LRH
LRH:bt.cden
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 8 APRIL 1958
AUDITING THE PC ON CLEAR PROCEDURE
We must not lose sight of the fact that only TWO processes clear a pc.
All others only support these TWO and make it possible to run these two.
These processes are:
1. Help, CCH Ob
2. Step 6, Mock-ups. Keep it from going away, Hold it still, Make
it more solid.
First in auditing we have to get pc to sit there and be willing to be
audited. We have for this many processes. Best is TR 5 "You make that body
sit in that chair" "Thank you".
Next we are continually confronted with keeping pc in session. This is
done with good ARC. No process can supplant good auditor ARC. Pc must know
auditor is interested in him. This does not mean auditor does not control
pc or let him gabble but it does mean that pc and auditor have ARC.
The next condition which must be met is the eradication of present time
problems. This is done by "What part of that problem could you be
responsible for?"
Psychosomatics may come under head of a p.t. problem. One runs hellos
and okays on the terminal to improve reality on it. "Say hello to that
(body part)-have it say okay to you. Have it say hello to you. You say okay
to it." One can also run "What part of that (body part) can you be
responsible for?" One can also have pc mock up "unknown (body part)". One
can also clear help on that body part. As a psychosomatic is a
concentration of attention it fulfills the condition of a p.t. problem
which is "any worry that keeps a pc out of session, which worry must exist
in present time in the real universe". One can run all of these on a
resistant psychosomatic.
One should clear help on objects and terminals connected with the pc's
job.
One should clear help on the terminals of the various dynamics.
With an E-Meter needle nul and free on help, one can go to Step 6. This
doesn't mean that one should not later return to help. It may be Step 6
must be approached with S-C-S and Connectedness. The needle will tell. A
heavily stuck needle is worse than a wildly surging one. Connectedness
clears stuck needles.
Step 6 can be run just as in the book "Clear Procedure." [See page
172.] If it is too tough for pc, run help and responsibility on pictures.
Then complete Step 6 with great thoroughness.
Rising Scale Processing Modern Version is very good. However, even
though it works low scale, it is in reality an OT process, not a clear
process. Rising Scale can be run on any consideration. The basic is "Get
the idea it is impossible to reach anything". "Now Postulate that you can
reach everything." There is no fancier version. There are other buttons
besides reach. The basic command is get the idea negative. Postulate the
positive.
This is clearing. It works as well as one directly approaches the task of
clearing with the above.
But clearing cannot happen in the presence of
1. A present time problem not flat.
2. Poor auditor-pc ARC.
3. Putting the pc at the effect end of life in or out of session
during an intensive.
4. Detouring into contributory processes in the belief they will
clear rather than set up a case. And
5. Leaving untouched zones of irresponsibility and zones of
refused help.
I wish you good luck in clearing.
Best,
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :bt.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[PAB 142, Auditing the Pc on Clear Procedure, 15 August 1958, is taken from
this HCO B.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 8 APRIL AD 8
Issue II
A PAIR OF PROCESSES
Now and then I overhaul some old process once in use and see what can
be done to make it work.
Op Pro by Dup and Forgetting are a pair that recently showed up as
having a possible specific value-i.e. to create a specific effect upon a
specific difficulty.
Evidently Admiration and Critical are a dichotomy. Maxine Kozak
suggests that Duplication is Admiration. From this I looked over Critical
on the APA (OCA) profile and saw that the low critical might be influenced
by Op Pro by Dup. A test should be made of this.
The other process is less nebulous in action. The specific for a bad
memory is Forgetting run in Brackets. You will ordinarily find an
automaticity of forgetting when you ask "Recall something you wouldn't mind
other people forgetting." This is a "bad memory". Nothing like a good
conscience to retain a good memory.
The commands of Forgetting would be a 6-way bracket.
Recall (or think of) something you wouldn't mind
1. Forgetting yourself
2. Another person forgetting
3. Forgetting about another
4. Another forgetting about you
5. Other people forgetting
6. Another person forgetting about another person.
Each command is cleared. The commands are run in sequence rather than
repetition.
This is a low scale process. Goes lower than "Not know" but graduates
into it.
This is a basic on unknowns and fields of whatever kind.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:bt.cden
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 APRIL 1958
CCH 88-ENFORCED NOTHINGNESS
When the following command is relatively flat on an auditor or
instructor he may run it on HGC pcs and teach it as part of curriculum to
students. But it must be somewhat flat on auditors and instructors before
use or taught publicly.
The command is a repetitive command. It is used with some 2-way comm to
punch cognitions.
The name of the process is Enforced Nothingness. Number CCH 88.
The command is: "Mock up some people who made you want to make nothing
of things."
This increases havingness all the way.
The person the auditor wants mocked up will be invisible to the pc and
pc should keep on trying to mock the person up, eyes open, until he can do
so.
I developed this process to vanquish fields and thus speed clearing. It
belongs anywhere prior to Step 6 of Clear Procedure.
In Creative Processing we knew good results were achieved when we used
a gradient scale to get the pc to improve an ability to mock up someone.
The above command gives the reason this was necessary.
Considerable relief and calmness follows a run on this process.
High critical is cured by this process.
Failure to help is the basis of the collapse of a desire to make
nothing of things and the process therefore ranks in importance near to
help.
A subjective reality on the process is necessary for skilled use.
The process can in a pinch be self-audited by reading the command off
sheet. The process is unlimited.
I think I have discovered in Enforced Nothingness a direct route to
bringing any pc who is under some control up to the ability to conceive a
static. And therefore the key to all exteriorization, havingness and
perception.
The process cures colds, tiredness and psychosomatics.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
P.A.B. No. 134
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 April 1958
PROCEDURE CCH CONTINUED
Compiled from the Research Writings and Taped Lectures of L. Ron Hubbard
CCH 2:
CCH 2 is Tone 40 8-C, which has the following commands: "With that
body's eyes look at that wall." "Thank you." "Walk that body over to that
wall." "Thank you." "With that right hand touch that wall." "Thank you."
"Turn that body around." "Thank you."
One doesn't acknowledge any of the preclear's originations and can only
"freeze" the command after a cycle of action has been completed. As with
all Tone 40 processes this is a precision process and needs validation
training for execution on an optimum level.
The intention or goal of this process is to bring the preclear's body
further under control and to insure that he does "precisely" what you tell
him to do, and it is a basic step for getting his thinkingness under your
command as well. By showing the preclear you can control his body, you are
actually inviting him to control it and to take some responsibility for it.
Don't be surprised if the preclear exteriorizes quickly on this
technique. By taking control of the body, he will go in and out of it and
eventually feel that the best way to handle it is from a few feet behind
his head. As an auditor one must beware of not-ising this phenomenon and
should communicate about it when one "freezes" the session and make sure
that the preclear understands this and that it is to be expected.
This is an ambulatory process and the auditor should be next to or with
his preclear at all times during the running of this technique.
Don't avoid this process or not administer enough, since 8-C, Tone 40
or otherwise, has been a stable processing datum for over three years and
will continue to remain as such for a considerable period of time.
CCH 3:
This is the process that produces some of those fantastic IQ changes,
for it deals directly with the preclear's learning rate and his ability to
duplicate communications. Bringing up his non-language factor in the IQ has
the effect of bringing the preclear into a better control of his
environment and into handling the people and objects in his immediate
surroundings.
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
Its purpose, according to "The Student Manual," is "to bring up preclear's
communication with control and duplication. (Control + Duplication =
Communication.)"
Book Mimicry, as this process is called, is run in the following
manner: Auditor tells the preclear that he is going to make a motion with
the book and that he wants the preclear to duplicate the auditor's motion
mirror-image-wise. He hands the book to the preclear and then waits for the
preclear to execute that motion. He acknowledges the execution of that
command and then asks the preclear if he "is satisfied that he duplicated
that command." If the preclear says he is satisfied, and the auditor is
sure he did not do it satisfactorily, the auditor does the same command
until the preclear and the auditor are both satisfied.
There is a gradient scale of simplicities and complexities here. One
first starts with fairly simple commands, graduating into complexities. LRH
found that straight lines and angles are simplicities, whereas circles and
arcs are complexities. Preclears who like complexities will be able to do
the difficult ones with great ease while finding the simple motions
burdensome. One keeps on doing both until the preclear can do each with
relative ease.
In order to do this process properly the preclear has to be in present
time, and that will unstick him from the rest points on the track, and it
has been noted by many auditors that engrams and valences turn on, also a
lot of dope-off and anaten which must naturally be run flat.
For the preclear who is in manic motion, small, very slow movements
will cause a panic and should be done until he can tolerate the no-motion
with ease and vice versa.
One must be sure, however, to remember the commands one has given in
case the preclear cannot execute them and one has to do it again. Also, we
are interested in giving our preclears only wins and one should work
closely within that framework. Give the preclear only the commands, on a
gradient scale towards difficulties, that he can execute. It does not mean
that one cannot make it complex, but one mustn't give impossible commands
and so confuse and invalidate the certainty that he can duplicate a
communication between himself and another terminal.
This is not a Tone 40 process, but the auditor does not talk until the
motion he has made is executed unless the preclear has as-ised the command
before he started the motion or finds himself unable to complete it.
Since engrams do appear and odd sensations and somatics turn on,
communicate with the preclear about them, but remember the intention of the
process and do not go chasing after facsimiles.
CCH 4:
CCH 4 is "Hand Space Mimicry" and the purpose of this process as per
"The Student Manual" is "to develop reality on the auditor using the
reality scale (solid comm line) and to get the preclear into communication
by control + duplication. "
It is run as follows: Auditor and preclear sit straight opposite each
other. The auditor then raises his two hands with his palms facing the
preclear and says, "Put those hands against mine, follow them and
contribute to their motion." He then makes a simple motion with his right
and then left hand and asks the preclear, "Did you contribute to the
motion?" "Good." "Put those hands in your lap." After this has been run
flat, increase the space between the palms of the auditor's and preclear's
hands by half an inch. When this is flat gradiently increase the space
between the auditor's and preclear's palms until the preclear can follow
the motion yards away.
There is a lot of two-way communication during the running of this process,
and the auditor must allow the communication which is born from the
duplication and control to come forth without restraining the preclear's
desires to do so.
The distance factor here (affinity in the communication formula) will
affect various preclears in different ways, and it is of interest that the
preclear will communicate a lot about love and the second dynamic to the
auditor which can then be viewed. There seems to be a certain distance
factor here for each preclear, and once the auditor moves out of it
suddenly without that gradient increase in space the preclear will go out
of communication with the auditor, and the process should therefore be kept
to small increases only.
The strained feeling in the preclear's (and sometimes auditor's) wrists
is not a tiredness as one may suppose, but will disappear as he gets into
communication with the auditor. He will go through a lot of anaten and dope-
off, but should come out very bright and in present time and in much better
shape than when the session started. HE will be able to communicate and
recognize your body as a solid terminal opposite his and will really find
the auditor during the process if he has not done so already. His reality
level will increase to the point where he can communicate by agreement only
and know that he is doing so (see the last PAB on the Scale of Reality).
This is not a Tone 40 process and should not be run as such.
CCH 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4 are the essential basics to the running of every
case, and where these are neglected (where control in these facets has been
neglected) there will only be failure. It is therefore remunerative in the
long run to really flatten each process.
The workability of these processes is astonishing and is a delight in
the hands of a Validated Auditor who has been coached on them himself. If
ever processes demanded that one knows HOW to run them, these do, for the
untrained auditor might just confuse both himself and the preclear if he
doesn't know what to expect and how to handle that which is sure to arise
from such processes as CCH.
One can run these processes over and over again. Run 0, 1, 2 and either
3 or 4, then back to CCH I-right hand, through the other steps, left hand,
through the other steps, both hands, and up again, or instead of using
"Give me that hand" the auditor can run "Don't give me that hand"-right,
left and "those hands," and so forth.
Somewhere along the line one of these processes is going to bite and
then each and every one of them will do the same. If nothing happens it
means that there is a threat to the preclear's havingness and that the
present time problem should be cleared while "help" is run again, after
which one of the four CCHs should open up the preclear's bank.
As an example, here is a case history from one of the Washington HGC
staff auditors: Preclear, a business man, age 48, who had numerous pressing
present time problems in the home environment. His profile proved that he
was totally unable to handle his numerous present time problems as his
ability to communicate was on the very low minus side. What's more, his
profile showed that he should really be a three-week preclear but was
accepted on the understanding that since he couldn't possibly afford more
time, he would be given this week as an exception to the rule since he came
a very long way (the HGC doesn't accept for processing a 25-hour case who
really needs 75 hours).
LRH looked at this profile and suggested quite calmly to the auditor
that CCH steps 0 to 5 should do it.
The preclear was out of communication. He did not volunteer any
information and seemed to get nothing out of the first 71/2 hours when the
first 5 steps were
covered. (His present time problems were handled by Locational Processing.)
Since this preclear was withholding information the auditor ran him on
"Don't give me that hand," which started biting slightly, a few minor
somatics shot through various areas of his body and facsimiles darted in
and out of his field, but the preclear still felt that this meant nothing.
(His critical level was high and he was making nothing out of the
auditing.) But when the auditor arrived at Hand Space Mimicry, the preclear
burst open for he couldn't tolerate the close contact with the auditor and
volunteered information about a second dynamic restimulation which blew the
aberration out of the way and opened the Case.
After that the preclear exteriorized with full visio and sonic when run
on Tone 40 8-C, felt that he could control both his body and his
environment much more ably and with greater certainty as to what he was
doing.
Further up the line on Control Trio and Trio, the preclear ran each one
of the six commands flat in approximately half an hour, with cognitions
ranging from the first to eighth dynamic, each intimately related to his
own life and livingness, and the preclear is a clear.
This preclear still has his present time problems at home, but feels
much more confident about handling them and the auditor reports that he is
moving heaven and earth to return for the outstanding two weeks.
This might not have been possible on older technologies since the
factor of control wasn't so neatly and exactly organized by LRH as it is
now, but the fact remains, much against some people's better wishes, that
one has to be coached into knowing through experience to fully comprehend
the power of Procedure CCH.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 APRIL 1958
To: All Training Activities
VITAL TRAINING DATA FOR TRAINING HATS AND REGISTRAR
Students in the Academy are auditors. They are not preclears. Emphasis
is on auditors, not pcs.
The goal of the Academy is to produce auditors of such quality that we
would be willing to hire them in the HGC. We don't graduate those we
wouldn't.
Training staff can refuse a student at any time on grounds of
inadequate financial arrangements. In which event the student applicant is
returned to Registrar.
The Academy is not a clinic and concerns about cases belong to the HGC
and are so referred.
LRH
LRH :bt.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[pic]
Issue 72 [1958, ca. late April]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
How We Work on the Third Dynamic
L. Ron Hubbard
It is obvious that a barbarian society, leaving all to chance,
believing in luck and irresponsibility, needs direction.
If it cannot receive that direction from its elected leaders, it is
soon drowned in confusion.
This is particularly true of barbarian societies. By barbarian, we
mean, of course, "lacking in social graces." A nation may have huge
machines, projectiles of great violence and stoves that do all the cooking
and yet be a complete barbarism socially.
The activities of a barbarism one against another are punishment,
revilement, contest for first dynamic supremacy with no thought of the
rights of others.
The barbarism solves political problems with brutality, crime with
punishment and social ills with degradation.
It is fairly obvious then that the United States of America-and the
Western world-is a barbarism, wearing nylon shirts instead of bearskins,
lip rouge rather than tattoo tabu marks, but subscribing to the Code of
Hammurabi just the same.
The social code used identifies the barbarism and an "eye for an eye"
is little better than law for the sake of sadism, mere animalism.
You can know a barbarism by its witch doctors, its concept of the other
man's mind. In this society the mental witch doctor, comfortably
enfranchised by the A.P.A., believes sincerely Man is an animal without
soul or hope and, following Pavlov and other Russian teachings, that Man
works only for reward like "any other dog."
These are the brands of barbarism. Hate is deified above love, a
deterrent to an action is better than a communication, the delusion is more
palatable than the truth.
If we place the govemment on our chart of human evaluation, we find a
craven psychotic. What would you think of the sanity of a man who sits in
his house all day every day loading guns for fear of some mythical enemy?
What would you think of a person who used violence against the weak, the
helpless, women and children? What would you think of someone who solved
all his problems with threats of violence? You'd be right. Such a person
would be insane. Just add up the characteristics of a government today,
apply them as if done by an individual and make up your mind. Governments
are insane. It is a big thought and one necessary to digest if you are not
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
going to go around all your life snarling impotently against "government
stupidity." The insane aren't always stupid but they are certainly insane.
Of course you could define government as "that body created by the
aggregate irresponsibility of a people." The insane are irresponsible. That
is why they are insane. If you lump all the irresponsibility in a nation
into one body you would then have an insane body. Thus the government
temper.
Now it is a fact that help and destroy are opposite ends of the same
string. When a person can no longer help he seeks to destroy. Destroy is
the same as help to a psychiatrist. Total identification. But more of this
elsewhere. It is enough here to demonstrate that if you try to help an
insane body it responds by seeking to destroy you. This is nothing to be
afraid of since the ability to direct in an insane body is very poor. Thus
the blows usually go awry. One sees it in government when the police arrest
and question the man who was attacked by a thug. The police forget the thug
and arrest the innocent.
Now all this comes about only when you have a barbarism, where the
social training of each person is so poor as to amount to a collective
insanity.
To cure a barbarism one must make men socially grow up. And that is
done with individuals. One works with individual people, not with groups.
We in Scientology have done a "power of growing up," me and you both.
We are strong in that we have the ability to make other people "grow up."
Our target is the individual if we wish to increase the group level of
responsibility.
To properly hit the target each of us needs to be (I) a good example in
our own case and (2) well trained and secure in our Scientology skills.
All we really have to do to win is to get clear and clear others, the
while keeping on with the routine demands of life.
As startling as clearing is today, as impressive as it is to learn
Scientology well at the Academy, yet these things can be done rather
easily.
Clear is now no esoteric goal. It can be reached in a few weeks of
highly skilled auditing.
Getting to be an excellent auditor is a must if one merely wishes to
live. But one dynamic isn't enough. It takes all the dynamics to make a
freedom. Therefore to be clear is not enough. To be a cleared auditor and
to handle and audit people is a must if we wish to be totally free.
Face it. We live in a barbarism. The shiny cars are driven by degraded
men. You won't be free unless they are.
It has taken me ten hard years to make clearing everyone an
accomplished fact. That I could do it was not enough. That you could do it
was part of the major plan.
My purpose is to bring a barbarism out of the mud it thinks conceived
it and to form here on Earth a civilization based on human understanding,
not violence.
That's a big purpose. A broad field. A star-high goal.
But I think it's your purpose, too.
Best,
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF I MAY 1958
Post: HASI London
Admin Board, D.C.
SIGNS OF SUCCESS
Whenever we're really winning the squirrels start to scream. You can
tell if somebody is a squirrel. They howl or make trouble only when we're
winning.
Spectacular success can quadruple the number of complaints. Tell the
complainees: "Come in, get clear." Otherwise skip it.
To understand a squirrel, consider the reaction of somebody who could
not run the fifth leg of help "How could another person help another
person". The thought of this drives some people spinny. That's a squirrel.
They can't view other people helping others without going berserk.
There's nothing personal in having squirrels. Even heroes can have
lice.
Best,
LRH
LRH:bt.rd
P.A.B. No. 135
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 May 1958
PROCEDURE CCH CONTINUED
Compiled from the Research Writings and Taped Lectures of L. Ron Hubbard
CCH 5:
This is Tone 40 Locational Processing, and the purpose of this process
is to bring the preclear's attention under control and unfix it from the
facsimiles which usually control his attention. It is also a most valuable
process to run when the preclear's communication is too poor to run the
present time problems with Problems of Comparable/Incomparable Magnitude.
It brings the preclear from the problem in which he is interiorized
into a recognition of the environment, which gives him havingness, and he
can consequently unfix his attention from the problem. It brings him into
present time-the 6th dynamic-and he can have mass again.
Since this is a Tone 40 process the auditor does not acknowledge idle
chatter from the preclear, but should HE say something, the process may be
frozen after a few more commands have been executed and the auditor can
discuss or "fish" the cognition. The auditor must point to and clearly
indicate the object which he wants the preclear to see and must make sure
that his "thank you" stops the preclear from getting stuck on the object at
which he looks.
The commands are "With that body's eyes notice that (indicated object,
wall, etc.)." When the preclear has done so the auditor says "Thank you"
with such intention as to stop the cycle of action completely and to start
a new command in present time. If the acknowledgment really reached the
preclear he will immediately look away from the object at which he was
looking and look at you, smile and seem pleased. Incidentally, the auditor
points to both that body and that object.
While using this process in CCH 0, the handling of the present time
problem, it can be used as either ordinary or Tone 40 Locational.
CCH 6:
To bring the preclear's attention further and fully under control of
the auditor, Opening Procedure by Duplication 1957, with the following
commands, is used: (Auditor takes a book and bottle, placing them some
distance apart on tables so that the preclear doesn't have to bend.) "With
that body's eyes look at that book." "Thank you." "Walk that body over to
that book." "Thank you." (Auditor each time with the commands points to
"that body" and "that book.") "With that hand pick up that book." "Thank
you." "Put that book down in exactly the same place." "Thank you."
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
"Turn that body round." "Thank you." "With that body's eyes look at that
bottle," etc.
It is a Tone 40 process and should be run precisely, making sure that
the preclear does not anticipate or distort the command. Duplication +
Control = Communication is a formula which is well worth remembering during
the running of all Tone 40 processes. This does not mean that if the
preclear seems to be communicating, he is, for a lot of his machinery will
go into restimulation during this process and one must be able to
differentiate between the preclear's originations and those of his bank.
This, being one of the most arduous processes in Scientology, should be
run in one session until flat; otherwise the preclear will be hung up at
the point where the process was ended and it will unnecessarily retard the
progress which Procedure CCH brings about.
These two processes, when well run, will bring the preclear's attention
under the direction of the auditor. Since duplication will straighten out
all the vias and twists the preclear might have in receiving the exact
intention of the command which originated from the auditor, the auditor may
then proceed to bring the preclear's thinkingness under his control with
CCH 7: Tone 40 8-C-"Keep it from going away,"
CCH 8: Tone 40 8-C-"Hold it still," and
CCH 9: Tone 40 8-C-"Make it a little more solid,"
which should be run as a combo [combination of processes] one after the
other until each one is flat.
As with most processes, make sure that the command is cleared before
embarked upon, and then after a while, if the preclear doesn't cognite or
have any facsimiles, find out "how" and "what" he is doing, for there might
still be a possibility that due to semantic difficulties he misunderstood
the command and is really running another.
"Keep it from going away" and "Hold it still," apart from the
fundamental value in cognitions, are to exercise the preclear's ability to
control facsimiles-to keep them from going away and to hold them still when
he later is going to run Then and Now Solids, which demands just that.
Preclears who have been involved in Eastern teachings will cognite during
running "Hold it still" and find out a lot about "serenity" and the eighth
dynamic. All the things which the preclear has been keeping from going away
will come to view. These are good exteriorizing processes. Refer to earlier
PABs for further information regarding these processes.
"Make it a little more solid" is the first exercise in making MEST and
facsimiles a little more solid and must be done before the preclear can
progress to Then and Now Solids. His abilities to keep things from going
away, hold them still and make them a little more solid must be thoroughly
checked and rechecked, and the auditor must be sure in his own mind that
the preclear has acquired these abilities.
Making things a little more solid is just what it says. The preclear
does not have to make things very massive, but he should be aware of an
increase in the mass, weight and density of the structure of that which he
is making more solid. This process will increase his reality on the
Prelogics and reverse the flow of solids. It will remedy the preclear's
havingness and push him further up the Scale of Reality.
The commands for the three Tone 40 8-Cs are: "With that body's eyes
look at that (indicated object)." "Thank you." "Walk that body over to that
(indicated object)." "With those hands touch that (indicated object)."
"Thank you." "Keep it from going away." "Hold it still." "Make it a little
more solid." Run each one flat individually.
Since these are Tone 40 processes, precision of execution of commands is
closely observed by the auditor.
"These processes include a control of thinkingness of the preclear and
therefore should be run with a tremendous amount of auditor trust of the
preclear and should not be run until the lower levels of CCH are to some
degree flat, as they will give the preclear losses. "-LRH from "The Student
Manual."
CCH 12 and CCH 13:
CCH 12 is known as "Limited Subjective Havingness." The commands for
this set of processes are: "What can you mock up?" Preclear answers and the
auditor says, "O.K." to the preclear's answer and then tells him: "Mock up
(whatever the preclear said he could mock up)." "O.K." "Shove it into
yourself." Run this flat then proceed in the same way except for then
having the preclear "Let it remain where it is." When this is flat enter on
the third part, which is "Throw it away."
Have the preclear shove the mock-ups into "himself" and not the body.
Remember it is "have" for the thetan and "can't have" for the body. It is
important here to remedy the havingness of the preclear's bank before going
on to Then and Now Solids.
Should the preclear's field be black, then run the following process
until it clears up: Remedy the field with blackness. Have him mock it up,
let it remain and throw it away. This preclear is holding on to blackness
since he does not have enough blackness. This is remedying the havingness
with blackness of which he has a scarcity.
If the preclear's field is invisibility, put glass objects of all sorts
and sizes on a table next to him and one after another have him "Keep it
from going away" until his field returns.
As with all other processes in Scientology we are only interested in
giving our preclears wins, and it is therefore necessary to see that he
completes each step successfully before continuing with the next process.
Should none of these processes do what is required, CCH has not been
properly applied and steps 0 to 5 should be run once more and the auditor
can then run Control Trio, which is being spoken about in a later PAB.
CCH 13 is "Subjective Solids" and the first exercise to make things
solid subjectively. The commands for this process are: "What can you mock
up?" (which is asked every time one changes the type of mock-ups). "O.K."
"Mock up (whatever the preclear said he could mock up)." "O.K." "Now make
it a little more solid." When this is done the auditor checks with "Did you
do it?" for preclears often say they have when they didn't execute the
command.
Start this on a gradient scale. As long as he makes only a few atoms of
the mock-up a little more solid the auditor should be satisfied. The
preclear here will break through Effort on the Know to Mystery Scale and as
he proceeds use less and less effort until he just postulates the solidity.
It is most important to ask the preclear what he is doing, how he is
doing it to insure that he IS doing it properly.
Smoothness of auditing is essential. One does not desire to break ARC
with the preclear, but a certain amount of policing is necessary and this
is a "certainty" process. It is important that the preclear find the
process "real," otherwise he is not under control and will not be able to
do Then and Now Solids, to which all these other processes lead.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street, N.W., Washington 9, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 2 MAY 1958
BEINGNESS AGAIN
The best solution to valences is beingness processing.
Help on valences is excellent, even phenomenal and should not be
ignored.
Problems of Comparable Magnitude to a selected person cannot be
ignored.
But an understanding of valences gives us a new look at processes.
In the first place a valence is a beingness. Bad, crazy or superb, a
valence is still a beingness.
A thetan has a basic personality. But if this is too thoroughly
invalidated, a thetan assumes some invented valence. And if this is
invalidated he then eventually completes the DEI Scale on Beingness.
The things wrong with a thetan are the lower harmonics of the
characteristics of a thetan. You could say carelessly that the only thing
wrong with a person is himself. Let us say more accurately that the only
thing wrong with a person is his abandonment of self and the assumption of
other selves. Because there is a self, the assumption of selves is
possible.
We find that the APA or OCA is a picture of a self What self is another
matter. All selves other than true self are less honest and ethical since
the thetan has a poorer opinion of others than he does of himself in the
basic state.
To change an APA or OCA it is necessary to shift selves.
It is fascinating that theft of objects is really an effort to steal a
self. Objects represent selves to others. Thieves and what they steal
cannot be understood by the logic of their material needs. They steal
tokens of selves and hope to assume thereby another self. It is sometimes
not amusing to me to be missing my lecture notes or a book from my shelf.
This is covert theft of beingness. People sometimes get anxious to be me-I
know not why. They wind up stealing my things. The theft is irrational. The
articles were not later cherished and all were put away or thrown away when
the beingness did not materialize. Perhaps it is bad taste to mention this
from my personal viewpoint but from where else should I look? And it has
all happened to you, too. The senselessness of the items selected probably
puzzled you when they were stolen. But they were identified with you. You
couldn't be stolen, so you lost your wife, your husband or your little
trinket, "meaningless" perhaps to anyone but you.
A person has to discover he can't be you before he steals your things
without credit. When he discovers he still isn't you, he damns you to all.
He finally cannot be you, so he wastes you. And thus the DEI Scale of
beingness is completed.
One answer to this is never be a desirable you. And never get famous. A
far better answer is to understand it, for by understanding alone you can
prevent it.
Thus, the major tears of the world are based on beingness. Insanity,
heartbreak, bitter lives all stem from the same source.
There is also an acceptance level of beingness, based on a viewpoint of
an already alloyed beingness. Some people can only have the beingness of
the criminal or the insane. Thus there is yet another door to cracking
cases, another latchstring to the problem of Man.
There is also the problem of acceptable beingness, probably more
important than acceptance level. What Beingness is acceptable to various
people in the pc's life?
There is also such a thing as taking on another's unwanted beingness to
help him or her. Such as taking a psychosomatic.
We have had many beingness processes. Like we did at first with help,
we missed a point. The preclear does not know what "help" means. And he
does not know what beingness means. He is below cognition level on them.
All help or beingness actions he undertakes are reactive, not analytical.
To overcome this, one enters the case of the pc at the Inhibit end of
the DEI Scale. He has the pc waste the item in brackets. He asks the pc to
waste help, to waste the help of another, to have another waste help for
himself and so on.
Thus it is with beingness. Have the pc waste it.
Man tears his idols apart trying to get a bit of desirable beingness.
Every thetan wants to heal at sight; so they crucified Christ. And sold
pieces of the cross.
A pc who assumes the aches of another wishes to be that other. He is
short on beingness. He accepts it obsessively.
Wearing Empress Eugenie's hats is understandable. What woman wouldn't
be an empress? But wearing the crooked back of the Hunchback of Notre Dame
isn't quite so comprehensible-if you don't know Scientology.
One follows knowing assumptions of beingness with unknowing
assumptions. The thief knows not why he steals. The bishop knows little of
why he cherishes the bit of the True Cross.
And none of them know, so invalidated has it become, that each has a
basic beingness, complete. And that beingness is important to you. It is
the best beingness there is. And it is important to me, how important can
only be viewed through these eyes that see the magnitude of the job. Why
should anyone steal when he can have the best there is for the asking? And
why steal from me and thee for we alone in all Man's history can give him
the priceless gift of himself.
Just as the thief knows not why he steals, so does the archbishop fail
to know why he dons a robe.
To abandon life is to waste all beingness. There is the preclear who
sits at succumb.
Try it on a pc. You'll be surprised.
This is one of the OT steps on which I am working for the 20th ACC.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[pic]
Issue 73 [1958, ca. early May]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Assists in Scientology
L. Ron Hubbard
DEFINITION: AN ASSIST: An action undertaken by a minister to assist the
spirit to confront physical, difficulties which can then be cared for with
medical methodology by a medical doctor as needful.
An assist is not normally done in a formal auditing session. The way
the term has been used is a very simple processing activity to relieve an
immediate troublesome difficulty.
An assist is much more specifically and definitely anything which is
done to alleviate a present-time discomfort. It is differentiated from
auditing at large by defining auditing as an activity directed toward the
rehabilitation of the entire individual.
The first moments of every formal session are an assist. Before you
undertake further auditing you usually perform an assist. If you are a very
clever auditor you do it by scouting what has happened between sessions, or
if the person has a present time problem, for the handling of a present
time problem in an auditing session is really not auditing because it is
addressed to a surface difficulty.
You handle the difficulty which is uppermost and foremost in the
preclear's mind. A preclear may say, "Well, my wife and I had a fight last
night. She threatened to commit suicide, and now she has a violent
headache."
The wrong way to look at what he is saying is to think that it is her
headache that is causing the trouble in the session and that you cannot
cure her headache as she isn't present. The actual trouble in the session
is his concern about her headache. So you run Problems of Comparable
Magnitude to relieve his mind to a point where he is quite comfortable and
you can get on with the auditing. And that is actually what an assist is.
Since you really do not have the preclear under good control, nor well
orientated in the environment, you have to answer this technical question:
When does an auditing session begin?
The answer to that question is: An auditing session begins when you
have a preclear, and when he knows he has an auditing environment and an
auditor. There is auditing which is done on a relatively loose basis, which
might be out in the street, in the kitchen, or anywhere. An assist could
happen almost anywhere. But at the
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
beginning of the session, no matter how formally this session is
constituted, you are running an assist.
You have an auditing room. You have a preclear, and you are the
auditor. You know all these things, but the preclear doesn't. As far as he
is concerned, there isn't a formal session taking place. Don't call it a
formal session. Call it an assist. Tell the preclear that it is an assist
and that you are not intending anything very strenuous. In rendering an
assist you should tell the preclear that "this is just an assist" to try
and ease the pain in his hand a little, after which you are going to stop.
The handling of an assist as an auditor is different than the handling
of a formal session since the factor of control is notably slackened,
sometimes almost completely missing.
One of the factors in assists is that an assist has as a large part of
its anatomy, "trying to help." Just remember that you are only trying to
help and don't get your heart broken by the fact that the fellow's broken
spine doesn't heal instantly.
Another factor is that an assist is differentiated and defined as
addressing the game someone knows he is playing.
What techniques would comprise an assist? Anything that would help. And
what are these? One of the easiest ones to render is Locational Processing.
You tell the person, "Look at that chair. Look at that ceiling. Look at
that floor. Look at that hand" (the auditor pointing to the objects), when
he has an injured hand and the pain will diminish. This is a very easy
assist.
For example, a person has a bad shoulder. You touch his hand of the
same arm and say, "Close your eyes and look at my fingers.'' Make sure that
he keeps his eyes closed. You then touch him on the elbow and say, "Look at
my fingers." Do this anywhere on his body. Just touch him and say, "Look at
my fingers.'' This is a communication process which eases his attention
over from a concentration upon the injury to something else which is quite
near the injury and thus doesn't result in too much of a shock. It reduces
havingness but it is positive and gets positive results. It can be done by
an untrained person.
You can teach this assist to anybody. You say, "If somebody has a
bruise, injury, a burn, a cut, the way to handle this is to tell the person
to close his eyes, and then you touch the area near and distant from the
vicinity of the injured area, asking them, with their eyes closed, to look
at your fingers. You contact them this way many times. They will experience
sudden pains in the area, and you will discover that the 'psychic trauma'
has been discharged."
You will find that people do not have any upset about physical contact.
Most people think that this is the thing to do.
Say you wanted to render an assist on somebody who had a very
indefinite difficulty. That is the hardest one to render an assist on. The
person has a pain but he cannot say where. He doesn't know what has
happened to him. He just feels bad. Use Locational Processing as such. You
will find out that this process will work when other processes fail.
An assist carries with it a certain responsibility. If you give an
assist casually to somebody out in the public and do not shove a
professional calling card in his pocket, you are making an error. The
reason for this is that he will not know from whom and where help came.
Therefore, an auditor walking around without a pack of cards is doing a
foolish thing. An auditor goes through life and he casts his shadow upon
many
people and they have really no cognizance of what has happened at all if he
is rendering an assist. He says, "Do this, do that"-maybe he wins, or maybe
he loses because this is the type of session least calculated to procure
orderly results. But in the main these people have been helped. They don't
know really by what, except some word that the auditor kept saying. They
don't even know that he is an auditor. They don't know anything about it at
all. Show a person where he can obtain further assistance, and by whom the
assistance was given.
Be yourself. Be positive. Be professional and definite. Have a card and
make sure the card is easily enough understood. Don't ask them for
permission. Just do it. No reason to wander around and give them funny
notions. If you are going to help some stranger out, help him out. Don't
explain to him or any bystander, otherwise you are likely to stand there
explaining, waiting for somebody's permission. Don't bother with that. You
act as though you are the one in charge and you will be in charge. And this
is part and parcel of the knowledge of how to do an assist. You have got to
be the person in charge. This has to be so good, as far as you are
concerned, that you overcome the informality of the session to a very
marked degree. If you do it extremely well, the assist will amount to
auditing.
Say, for example, there is a big accident and a crowd of people are
pressing around. The police are trying to push the people back. Well, push
the people back and then push the policeman back. Say, "Officer, keep these
people at a distance." Then you lean over the victim and snap him back to
rights. If you are enough THERE, everybody else will realize that you are
the ONE that is THERE. Therefore, such things as panic, worry, wonder,
upset, looking dreamily into the far distance, wondering what is wrong or
what should be done, are no part of your make-up if you are rendering an
assist. Cool, calm and collected should be the keynote of your attitude.
Realize that to take control of any given situation it is only necessary to
be there more than anybody else. There is no necromancy involved. Just BE
there. The others aren't. And if you are there enough, then somebody else
will pull himself out of it and go on living.
Understand that an auditor when rendering an assist must make up with
presence what he lacks in surroundings and agreements. It all comes under
the heading of willingness to be there and willingness to control people.
One of the ways of convincing people of beingness and of being there is
to exercise control-positive, undeniable Tone 40 exercise of control. Start
to control the situation with high enough ARC, enough presence and
factuality-there won't be anybody present that won't step back and let you
control the situation. You are entitled to it in the first place because of
senior "know-how." The control of body attention or thought comprises the
majority of your knowledge. The majority in Scientology simply points in
this direction. The observable thing is control of attention, objects and
thoughts. When you have good confidence of being able to handle these, and
when you positively know how to do these, then you can make sure that
everybody else knows you can do this, and you make them realize this by
doing it. You have all of these things available in rendering an assist.
You might never think of a riot as being a situation which necessitated
an assist, or an assist as applicable to a riot, but a riot is simply a
psychosomatic momentary injury or traumatic condition on the third dynamic.
Could you settle a riot? Well, if you can settle a riot, you can certainly
settle one person who is in a riot. The antithesis of any pain, disturbance
or tumult is order. The thing which controls tumult is order; and,
conversely, the thing which controls order is tumult. You need only bring
order into a confused situation and bring confusion into an orderly
situation to control everything in the field of motion, action and objects.
This is a fantastic simplicity and one which takes some grasping.
Conceive as order, merely a fixed position, idea and attitude. A policeman
knows what he is
supposed to do. Maybe he will put on a tourniquet or maybe he won't. Keep
the people away and stop everything is his idea of how it should be. Now
you can aid or abet the order he is creating, or cancel the order by
creating a confusion which he cannot handle. Of the two, the first is the
best in that situation. You aid and abet and cap the order he is creating.
If you were to accuse him of having a confused accident scene, which is by
now not at all confused, and ask him to straighten it out, you would
channel his attention in the direction it is already gone, and so you
control his attention.
Remember, those people are still moving a little bit; they are still
breathing. There is still a tiny bit of motion going on. If you were to ask
him something on the order of "Can't we have it a little quieter and more
orderly here?" he would at once perceive that there was far too much
confusion and motion, and he would simply come under your direction because
you have simply channeled his attention in the direction it was already
going. Therefore, you have taken control.
If you ever want to overset a fixed order, create a confusion. If you
want to overset a confusion, create a fixed order. Pick out of the scene
those beings in the scene whose attention is channeled in the direction you
want attention to go, and you aid and abet that attention which already
exists. Or, where you have too many fixed positions and fixed ideas to
overcome, you simply take those turbulent individuals in the scene who are
creating the confusion against those fixed ideas and channels and you make
their confusion much more confused, at the same time yourself imposing
another order in another direction.
The mechanics of taking over any confused scene are simply the
mechanics of trying to get a preclear to see through the morass of cross-
purposes, commands, ideas and environments in which he has lived. And
whether that applies to the third dynamic or otherwise, the laws are still
there and it tells you then that the imposition of order on a preclear
comes foremost in an assist.
In an assist you always count on the fact that the thetan himself
would, if he could, do the right thing. If you work on that postulate you
will never be wrong. Get the idea that it is something else trying to do
the wrong thing. The keynote of a thetan is order.
Where you are giving an assist to one person, you put things in the
environment into an orderly state as the first step, unless you are trying
to stop a pumping artery- but here you would use First Aid. You should
understand that First Aid always precedes an assist. You should look the
situation over from the standpoint of how much First Aid is required. Maybe
you will find somebody with a temperature of 106 degrees. It may very well
be that he needs to lie down and be covered up, and though antibiotics are
much overrated, he might be better off with a shot of one of these than
with an assist at that time.
Auditing will not shut off a pumping artery, but a tourniquet will. If
you are going into the zone of accidents, you are going to be in the
vicinity of a great deal of destruction and chaos, and you are very foolish
not to have your Red Cross First Aid Certificate. You may often have to
find some method of controlling, handling and directing personnel who get
in your way before you can render an assist. You might just as well realize
that an assist requires that you control the entire environment and
personnel associated with the assist if necessary.
An assist is auditing on several dynamics. It is, therefore, much
harder to do than auditing in a formal room as it requires presence. You
must bring yourself to face the fact that you have to give enough presence
and enough control to enough dynamics to bring the environment into a
compliance with your postulate. If you postulate that
somebody is going to pick up his bed and walk, then you have to be willing
to move and be capable of moving around the people who are going to watch
him pick up his bed and walk.
A good example of an assist would be when somebody is washing dishes in
the kitchen. There is a horrendous crash and the person comes down all over
the sink, hits the floor and as she is going down, she grabs the butcher
knife as it falls. You go in and say, "Well, let me fix that up." One of
the first things you would have to do is to wind some bandage around the
hand to stop the bleeding. Part of the First Aid would be to pick up the
dishes and put them back on the sink, sweep the pieces together into a more
orderly semblance. This is the first symptom of control. She becomes
introverted into the cut to the point that she wouldn't particularly notice
what you were doing. But you relieve the anxiety that all her blood is
pouring out; your first attention to the case is attention to the
environment.
Next you would make her sit down. To remove her from the scene of the
accident is not as desirable as auditing her there. That is directly
contrary, perhaps, to what you believe, but it is true. That is why you
bring a little order into the environment. You position her and then you
are ready for techniques. It is quite remarkable for you have manifested
order in a much wider sphere than a cut hand in order to bring about a
healing of the cut hand. If you understand that your responsibility always
extends much wider than the immediate zone of commotion, you never miss. If
you bring order to the wider environment you also bring it to the narrower
environment. If you bring it into the narrow environment, you also bring it
to the wider environment. It is a gradient scale of how much order you can
bring.
In processing, you have to control or direct attention, objects,
person, or thoughts of the injured person. If you are really good on the
subject of assists, you will direct an additional thing: his knowingness.
You can control a man's knowingness rather easily, but it is hard to see
it. About the first thing that you can observe about somebody is his
person. You are trying to straighten it out. Don't think that, even though
you have this person sitting down, you have straightened it out, because it
is still messed up. But there is something that you can straighten out
easily-and that is his attention. If you could heighten his attention and
his knowingness at the same time, you would really be in wonderful
circumstances. You always shift and direct his attention, hence Locational
Processing. If he was a Scientologist, with his case in pretty good shape,
you could run Trio with considerable success by directing his attention.
But you wouldn't run Trio with the command "Look around the room and find
something you could have, " You should say, " You look at that chair." "Now
decide you can have it. " That is a very low order of the Terrible Trio.
You could run the injury out in this fashion: "Look at that chair. "
"Decide the injury cannot have it." This is directed attention, positively
controlled. There is no permissiveness connected with this in any way
whatsoever.
Because he is injured you are not going to move his person around. You
have got his attention. Don't try to shift his thoughts around at first
because they are dispersed and chaotic. This leaves you his attention only.
The above assist is quite satisfactory, but a later development in the
line of assists which included the significance of "Keep it from going
away, " is much more powerful. In one case a bruise, turned utterly black,
and covering this person's entire hip, passed away in 45 minutes of good
auditing by "Keeping the right hip from going away, " and then "Keeping the
left hip from going away. "
If you run the right eye, you run the left eye as well. If you run one
thing, you run another. If you run his head, run his knees as well. The
master of all these
is the direction of attention. "Keep it from going away" is tremendously
workable.
You don't run "Keep it from going away" first, because you are
partially controlling his thoughts and this is not possible in the early
stages of an assist. If someone is in terrible condition and he is really
writhing around, and you want to render an assist, you don't wait until he
stops writhing. He is liable to stop writhing dead. What you do with him is
to direct his attention. You tell him, "Shut your eyes and look at my
fingers. " You press your fingers hard enough so that he can't help but put
his attention on them.
If you want it to come out with no bruise, then you would get him to a
point where you can control his thoughts, which are chaotic enough. Have
him "keep the left ankle from going away, the right ankle from going away,"
etc. If the process doesn't seem to be flattening, direct his attention
somewhere else because he is not keeping it from going away. In this wise
you can always have a successful assist, because assists all come under the
heading of control. The beingness of the person and his presence makes the
control possible. So part of control is always presence, identity, person,
the one who takes charge and has things under control. When you are able to
control his attention, his body and thoughts, then he will be in session
and you are no longer doing an assist.
Assists dominantly require that you direct the attention of the
preclear and dispose his person one way or the other and eventually take
over control of his thoughts on the subject. But by the time you have all
these three in line, you are no longer doing an assist.
So what you really do is do an assist up to the time the person can
handle the incident or pain, put him in a more favorable environment and
give him auditing. So the assist is what you do on the street, and auditing
is what you do in the auditing room when he comes to you after your assist
has been successful.
AN ASSIST IS NOT A SUBSTITUTE FOR MEDICAL ATTENTION AND DOES NOT
ATTEMPT TO CURE INJURIES REQUIRING MEDICAL AID. FIRST, CALL THE DOCTOR.
THEN ASSIST THE PERSON AS YOU CAN.
L RON HUBBARD
[The above was edited and issued under the same title in Ability 154,
October 1963, which was further edited and issued as HCO B 21 October 1971,
Volume VII, page 415.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 9 MAY 1958
WHO SHOULD TAKE WHICH CLASS
The Director of Training should never instruct the advanced Academy
class, because of the amount of administrative work he has to do. Director
of Training preferably teaches Comm Course.
The Academy Senior Instructor should handle the advanced class and do
no administrative work. His job is making sure the student is an auditor at
course end.
The Academy Administrator should be the Upper Indoc Instructor.
LRH:bt.rd L. RON HUBBARD
P.A.B. No. 136
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 May 1958
PROCEDURE CCH CONTINUED
Compiled from the Research Writings and Taped Lectures of L. Ron Hubbard
THEN AND NOW SOLIDS:
CCHs 0 to 13 are steps in exercising the preclear's ability to be able
to do CCH 14 which is Then and Now Solids. They are a gradient scale of
exercises to eliminate all his wrong conceptions and to clear out of the
way those considerations which aberrated him into having that unknown,
hidden and compulsive game of which he was at the mercy.
The preclear must be in control of his body and environment. He must be
able to keep things from going away (especially mock-ups and facsimiles),
hold them still and, most important of all, make them a little more solid.
We say "more solid" for it invalidates the present solidity of whatever the
preclear mocked up or touched if we say "make it solid."
The process is run in the following manner with these commands: "Get a
picture-and make it a little more solid." "Thank you." "Look at that
(auditor indicates object)-and make it a little more solid." "Thank you."
"The commands are given with a tiny pause between the first and second
phrase, as it will be found that the glance of the preclear at the object
tends to give him the impression that he has already made it a little more
solid before the auditor gives the command if this auditing command is
broken into two commands. " ("The Student Manual" by L. Ron Hubbard.)
The command says get a "picture" and the auditor must explain to the
preclear, if he doesn't already know, the difference between facsimiles,
dub-ins and mock-ups. We must make sure that he gets a picture (facsimile).
This process combines subjectivity and objectivity (introversion and
extroversion) in the preclear's universe and the MEST universe. It handles
time. He will have to go into the past in order to get the picture and then
come up into the present by making a specific indicated object a little
more solid. Its whole goal is to straighten out the preclear's time track,
to clear up his reactive bank and disclose his Service Facsimile and Life
Computation (and even whole track computations which make him act in a
certain manner life after life). It will enable the preclear to handle time
and get rid of all the unwanted facsimiles, for by viewing them and making
these a little more solid
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
he will get the restimulative facsimiles under his control. He will then be
able to handle in its totality the whole reactive mind.
To impress its importance, here is a direct quotation from "The Student
Manual": "HISTORY: Developed from Over and Under Solids, which was
developed by L. Ron Hubbard in late 1955 and improved by him in 1956. The
process more or less completes the work begun on the reactive mind in 1947.
It will be noted that many earlier processes and effects are woven into
Then and Now Solids. "
The auditor running this process must be capable of handling any
emotional situation, however startling and unexpected it might be, with
great smoothness and ease. Facsimiles will stand out unexpectedly; the
preclear will get sudden somatics and past life enemies will be there in
front of his body in metrocolor and three dimensions. He will run up and
down that tone scale, dramatize anger or pain to such a degree that the
auditor who has not been run on High School Indoc or Hi Hi Indoc might get
the scare of his life and take off, leaving the preclear in a spin.
Then and Now Solids demonstrates in its application all that is written
in Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health and A History of Man. It
takes into account the basic theory and elements of both Scientology and
Dianetics, and only the expert can handle this process well.
Nowhere along the line is the auditor allowed to move from the commands
of the process, since it is Tone 40. It does not mean that the auditor must
not communicate with the preclear. Indeed, it is most necessary at times,
but he must keep the original intention of the process in mind at all times
and gently but firmly steer the preclear back on to the route he is
leading. The process MUST be run EXACTLY as given.
It is not advised that any book auditor or beginner use this process,
for the session will most certainly go out of control if Tone 40 and the
TRAININGS (see "The Student Manual")* are not clearly understood and
applied.
This process acts quickly if it is real to the preclear. If these
facsimiles do not sometimes stand out with alarming clarity he is not
running the process. It should not be run for hours and hours without a
break. One can always run it to a flat point and then return to the
beginning of Procedure CCH and flatten each command, which by now will take
a comparatively short period.
It is not necessary for the preclear to tell the auditor each time what
the facsimile was that he found, but it is advisable that the auditor check
now and again to see that the preclear is doing it properly. It should be
run non-specifically.
The auditor will notice that the preclear will go further and further
into the past and then come up nearer and nearer to present time and
eventually, after many of the cycles are completed, come wholly into
present time.
There are a few developments from Then and Now Solids which can be used
on valences, for example. If the preclear has trouble with mother, have him
"Get a picture of mother-and make it a little more solid." Then have him
"Notice (an indicated object or wall)-and make it a little more solid." (It
must remain THEN and NOW solids alternately throughout the whole session.)
Should the auditor suspect that the preclear is stuck in a past life or
has recurring facsimiles of past lives during processing, have him get the
pictures, make them a little more solid and then make something in present
time a little more solid. It will blow. The same procedure applies for any
troubles the preclear has regarding men, women, children or other parts of
the dynamics.
[* See HCO B 11 June 1957, Training and CCH Processes. "The Student Manual"
is unavailable.]
LRH told an HGC auditor to clear the valences with Then and Now Solids,
then the preclear's own body, and after that to return to general non-
specific Then and Now.
CCH 14 is the fastest and most effective process in Scientology if the
earlier steps are well accomplished, but it stirs up so much motion and
emotion that the auditor better be fully trained before he attempts to run
it on an innocent preclear.
PROCEDURE CCH (LONG FORM)
The CCH numbers in the preceding PABs and on this chart do not
necessarily coincide with that of "The Student Manual" by L. Ron Hubbard,
but is a procedure which LRH gave HGC staff auditors. The numbers by which
they are known will be published in "The Student Manual" or may be obtained
from the central organizations.
CCH 0a. Rudiments.
0b. Goals.
0c. Present Time Problems.
0d. Help.
CONTROL OF 1. "Give me that hand"
PERSON (Body) (right, left and both hands).
1a. "Don't give me that hand"
(right, left and both hands).
2. Tone 40 8-C.
3. Book Mimicry.
4. Hand Space Mimicry.
CONTROL OF MIND 5. Tone 40 Locational Processing.
(Attention)
6. Opening Procedure by Duplication
1957.
CONTROL OF 7. Tone 40 8-C-"Keep it from
THINKINGNESS going away."
8. Tone 40 8-C-"Hold it still."
9. Tone 40 8-C-"Make it a little more
solid."
CONTROL OF 10. S-C-S on an object. (Covered
PERSON in previous PABs.)
11. S-C-S on a person. (Ditto.)
CONTROL OF 12. Control Trio.
MIND
13. Trio
CONTROL OF 14. Limited Subjective Havingness.
THINKINGNESS
15. THEN and NOW Solids.
Creative Processing (as in
Scientology 8-8008).
Route One (as in The Creation
of Human Ability).
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 22 MAY 1958
ENEMIES OF THE PC
List the enemies of the pc. Then run help on them.
Entrance, run things pc doesn't have to do to them.
A PT Prob doesn't free on help is under-pinned by a similar earlier
problem.
LRH
LRH :bt.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[pic]
Issue 74 [1958, ca. mid-May]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Scientology and the Reactive Mind
L. Ron Hubbard
You may have wondered why we have said so little in Scientology about
the reactive mind.
That it hasn't been mentioned lately doesn't mean everyone changed his
ideas and decided it didn't exist.
In Dianetics the reactive mind was that thinkingness which went on
without analytical inspection. The reactive mind was described fully and
accurately in Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health.
The whole of Freudian Analysis concerns itself with treating the
reactive mind. Freud called it the Unconscious, amongst other things.
The whole of German (and U.S.) psychology concerns itself with
examining the reactive mind.
Only Dianetics laid bare the full anatomy of the reactive mind. That
anatomy is concerned with mental image pictures ordinarily unseen by the
person which nevertheless dictate his illnesses and responses.
The primary characteristic of the reactive mind is response to a
situation without analytical inspection. People react without volition.
They do strange things when confronted with stimuli. Offer a man a cup of
coffee. He twitches. He doesn't know why he did. Wink at a girl and she
gets an earache. She doesn't know why she did. This is the reactive mind at
work. Think of going for a drive-get tired. Decide to study-get a stomach
ache. These are reactive mind actions. And the pity of it is the man didn't
know it was the cup of coffee that made him twitch. The girl didn't know it
was the wink which gave her an earache. Because it is an illogical
connection. But that is the stock-in-trade of the reactive mind-everything
equals everything.
If you really want to know more about this strange mind you should
study Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health thoroughly. It's
enough here to say it still exists and still accounts for all one's
"unaccountable" actions.
Scientology went upstairs from Dianetics into the area of the spirit.
But that didn't mean that all we knew was forgotten. Far from it.
In Scientology we find the source of creation, of good, of evil. We
also find the source of the reactive mind.
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
The spirit is the source of all. You are a spirit. These are the basic
lessons of Scientology.
These are heady lessons. They are not easily learned. Man would rather
be approached slowly than leapt upon. He shudders away from truth when
truth seeks to pinpoint him as the responsible party.
In Scientology we have found that a person can be so far below apathy
that he doesn't know what he is doing. And so he can have a reactive mind.
Clearing in Dianetics consisted of getting rid of the reactive mind by
erasing it and learning to handle it. That's a long task.
Clearing in Scientology consists of discovering the source of the
reactive mind itself and making it vanish. That's a short, fast task.
The basic difference between Dianetics and Scientology is this:
Dianetics attacked the reactive mind on a materialistic level. Scientology,
amongst other things, attacks the reactive mind on a spiritual level.
Scientology works faster, better and more stably than Dianetics ever did.
In clearing, the reactive mind vanishes. That is not the primary
Scientology target in clearing but it is a worthwhile one.
Freud's Unconscious is conquered territory. The German psychologist's
"mind" is conquered territory.
Conquest comes in Clearing. And fast Clearing is done by Scientology.
There are many real proofs of this. A reactive mind can be seen on a
lie detector or any skin galvanometer. When it is gone, these machines do
not react on the person. And there are other proofs as substantial.
That Scientology has whipped the reactive mind is brand-new news. That
the ills of Man can be healed only by an address to the spirit is news.
That no materialistic means, no medicines, no treatments by matter
permanently heal or cure anything is a demonstrable fact.
In Dianetics it was a large forward step well meriting its acclaim to
identify the anatomy of the Freudian subconscious.
In Scientology it is a large forward step again to find that the
reactive mind vanishes before the strong spirit.
And it is another great step now to know that any material means or
defense can come to nothing in the end:
The spirit is the source of all creation. You are a spirit.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
(Issued at Washington)
HCO BULLETIN OF 24 MAY 1958
All Staff
Field Offices
A COMMENT ON BEINGNESS PROCESSING
I recently received the following from an HGC auditor:
"Dear Ron,
"I am writing to congratulate you on the development of the Beingness
processes outlined in HCO Bulletin of May 2, AD 8. ***
"These are wonderful processes and I thank you for them.
"Not as a report, but purely as clinical data I want you to know what
happened in seven and a half hours of using them.
"Nine major valences came off the case, including the weak one and the
strong one. All the important ones stripped off clean. Plus the fact that
the service facsimile keyed out. This person is not a clear, yet, but is a
brand new person."
*** HCO BULLETIN OF 2 MAY 1958
Beingness Again
The best solution to valences is beingness processing.
Help on valences is excellent, even phenomenal and should not be
ignored.
Problems of Comparable Magnitude to a selected person cannot be
ignored.
But an understanding of valences gives us a new look at processes.
In the first place a valence is a beingness. Bad, crazy or superb, a
valence is still a beingness.
A thetan has a basic personality. But if this is too thoroughly
invalidated, a thetan assumes some invented valence. And if this is
invalidated he then eventually completes the DEI Scale on Beingness.
The things wrong with a thetan are the lower harmonics of the
characteristics of a thetan. You could say carelessly that the only thing
wrong with a person is himself. Let us say more accurately that the only
thing wrong with a person is his abandonment of self and the assumption of
other selves. Because there is a self, the assumption of selves is
possible.
We find that the APA or OCA is a picture of a self What self is another
matter. All selves other than true self are less honest and ethical since
the thetan has a poorer opinion of others than he does of himself in the
basic state.
To change an APA or OCA it is necessary to shift selves.
It is fascinating that theft of objects is really an effort to steal a
self. Objects represent selves to others. Thieves and what they steal
cannot be understood by the logic of their material needs. They steal
tokens of selves and hope to assume thereby another self. It is sometimes
not amusing to me to be missing my lecture notes or a book from my shelf.
This is covert theft of beingness. People sometimes get anxious to be me-I
know not why. They wind up stealing my things. The theft is irrational. The
articles were not later cherished and all were put away or thrown away when
the beingness did not materialize. Perhaps it is bad taste to mention this
from my personal viewpoint but from where else should I look? And it has
all happened to you, too. The
senselessness of the items selected probably puzzled you when they were
stolen. But they were identified with you. You couldn't be stolen, so you
lost your wife, your husband or your little trinket, "meaningless" perhaps
to anyone but you.
A person has to discover he can't be you before he steals your things
without credit. When he discovers he still isn't you, he damns you to all.
He finally cannot be you, so he wastes you. And thus the DEI Scale of
beingness is completed.
One answer to this is never be a desirable you. And never get famous. A
far better answer is to understand it, for by understanding alone you can
prevent it.
Thus, the major tears of the world are based on beingness. Insanity,
heartbreak, bitter lives all stem from the same source.
There is also an acceptance level of beingness, based on a viewpoint of
an already alloyed beingness. Some people can only have the beingness of
the criminal or the insane. Thus there is yet another door to cracking
cases, another latchstring to the problem of Man.
There is also the problem of acceptable beingness, probably more
important than acceptance level. What Beingness is acceptable to various
people in the pc's life?
There is also such a thing as taking on another's unwanted beingness to
help him or her. Such as taking a psychosomatic.
We have had many beingness processes. Like we did at first with help,
we missed a point. The preclear does not know what "help" means. And he
does not know what beingness means. He is below cognition level on them.
All help or beingness actions he undertakes are reactive, not analytical.
To overcome this, one enters the case of the pc at the Inhibit end of
the DEI Scale. He has the pc waste the item in brackets. He asks the pc to
waste help, to waste the help of another, to have another waste help for
himself and so on.
Thus it is with beingness. Have the pc waste it.
Man tears his idols apart trying to get a bit of desirable beingness.
Every thetan wants to heal at sight; so they crucified Christ. And sold
pieces of the cross.
A pc who assumes the aches of another wishes to be that other. He is
short on beingness. He accepts it obsessively.
Wearing Empress Eugenie's hats is understandable. What woman wouldn't
be an empress? But wearing the crooked back of the Hunchback of Notre Dame
isn't quite so comprehensible-if you don't know Scientology.
One follows knowing assumptions of beingness with unknowing
assumptions. The thief knows not why he steals. The bishop knows little of
why he cherishes the bit of the True Cross.
And none of them know, so invalidated has it become, that each has a
basic beingness, complete. And that beingness is important to you. It is
the best beingness there is. And it is important to me, how important can
only be viewed through these eyes that see the magnitude of the job. Why
should anyone steal when he can have the best there is for the asking? And
why steal from me and thee for we alone in all Man's history can give him
the priceless gift of himself.
Just as the thief knows not why he steals, so does the archbishop fail
to know why he dons a robe.
To abandon life is to waste all beingness. There is the preclear who
sits at succumb.
Try it on a pc. You'll be surprised.
This is one of the OT steps on which I am working for the 20th ACC.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:rs.ms rd Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 MAY 1958
SPECIAL BULLETIN
STANDARD CLEAR PROCEDURE
AND
AN EXPERIMENTAL ROAD:
CLEARING BY VALENCES
There have been many roads to clear.
The first was the most simple in description but the most difficult to
audit. I never succeeded in teaching it to anyone. All one did was renew
the pc's confidence in being able to face sonic, visio, tactile, etc, in
the bank by gradient scale and at long last he would be able to confront a
bank wholly. When that happened he didn't have a reactive bank. He was
clear. It required a very gentle touch. That was the way I made all the
early clears in 1947 to 1949. Then I had to explain it all to the
"scientists" and the fact of clear was lost in the mire of the roadway for
some years. I've been accused of wanting it that way to tell the sheep from
the goats. The point remains that this route was the first successful
route. We did not know how much there was to a bank or its anatomy. We had
to know the worst before the sun came up again. It came up in December of
1957 with my development of "help" and Step 6. Suddenly we were making
clears. Making them out of both high and low profile cases, out of occluded
cases and wide open cases.
Clearing is now an accomplished fact for any well-trained validated
auditor using a central organization E-Meter.
The further in miles from the central organization the attempt to clear
is tried, the more difficulty is being experienced. First the word goes out
that clearing is being done, then the how-to-do-it. By the time it gets to
Alaska or the Bronx or some distant place, the auditor is uncertain as to
the right way and even the fact of clearing. He tries it (or thinks he
does) (his version anyway) and laying an egg or two, gives up or thinks it
isn't real.
For such an auditor an HAA clearing course is indicated. (1) He'll
learn right and (2) he'll see some clears around and begin to understand
what one is. And he'll know there is at least one valid road to clear that
he can take and do.
Therefore we do not really need right now more roads to clear and
certainly we need no roads to OT while the path to clear is still a thin
blazed trail. Good Heavens, what's happened is wonderful enough-and nobody
far away has any reality on that yet. However I am still on the job looking
for (1) Alternate clear roads and (2) Roads to OT.
Standard Clearing Procedure, the procedure that is making clears in
skilled hands, is a very set SCP indeed. It alone has made all clears to
date by persons other than myself.
SCP is aided here and there by other techniques used to cross a block
or two faster. But all older techniques only assist the steps of SCP (and
sometimes impede
SCP). Of course there are some people who would rather walk in the swamp
alongside the causeway just built-that's up to them. If they know there's a
causeway and still walk in a swamp it's power of choice. If they haven't
seen the big causeway beside them and walk in the swamp, that's stupidity.
Standard Clearing Procedure works as follows:
Requisite for auditor-Validated certificate.
Tools: A quiet room and clearing E-Meter from D.C. or London (not some
tin quivering together on the hopes of some tinker nor yet an old Model T E-
Meter made in California).
Publications: Clear Procedure available from the HCO. [See page 172.]
First Action: Start session CCH 0.
Second Action: Search out by meter a p.t. problem and run it by finding
"What part of it pc can be responsible for" as a repetitive command, formal
auditing.
Third Action: CCH 0 b. Clear help in brackets with a meter, running
meter toward a freer needle. Don't over-run a leg of the bracket and get
the pc stuck or anaten.
Fourth Action: Run Step 6 of the book Clear Procedure and run it flat.
Fifth Action: Reclear help.
Sixth Action: Step 6 until flat, flat, flat and needle free.
That's SCP. It is assisted by SCS and Connectedness on some pcs.
SCP is an accomplished fact only if the auditor has good training and
validation. He doesn't have to be clear. But he has to be accurate. The HAA-
BScn course teaches Validation and Clearing. HCA-HPA teach the basics of
Scientology-you have to know those first.
Thus an experimental road to Clear is today a luxury. But you know me-
I'm always cutting corners.
So here is an alternate, still in theoretical stage, which promises to
be the 3rd successful road. However it requires even greater auditing skill
and understanding than SCP but may be faster for lower cases.
It is called "Clearing By Valences".
Its theory is simple. One can assume that a thetan has all the
attributes of clear in his basic personality (see Book I, Dianetics: The
Modern Science of Mental Health for a discussion of Basic Personality). The
action of clearing gives a person back to himself. Therefore the bulldozing
of rubble from the basic personality would give us a clear.
I have known for some time that an APA or OCA profile was a picture of
a valence or of valences-artificial overlays. I have also known that there
is a basic personality. When you clear someone you don't get a ghost or a
god-you get a distinct personality. Men are not equal even if the highest
courts in the U.S. so insist. And neither are clears. It is Commie-
psychiatric thinking that each is equal to the next like grains of mush.
You can generalize by saying clears are good and able. But some are gooder
than others and some are distinctly differently able. So people are
different.
But valences (borrowed, artificial personalities) overlay the real self
and weaken it. Valences are the sum of overwhelmings of the pc. Whenever he
lost he got one.
His basic personality was invalidated so he sought new ones. These were
invalidated so he sought even newer ones. Like standing between two mirrors
facing each other we achieve the multiple pc. But where is the clear? We
find him when we scoop away the thousands of others he is being.
The first straight wire run at Elizabeth, N.J., in 1950 succeeded when
it knocked off a sick valence. Well we can knock them off wholesale today-
with skilled auditing.
The clue is the Curiosity-Desire-Enforce-Inhibit Scale run on valences.
That which the pc erases with difficulty is misowned by him. Therefore
it is a valence. In the presence of valences he cannot change his mind
easily when he misowns the consideration. Therefore all fixed, harmful
ideas or aberrations stem from valences.
The process on this would be "Tell me how you could waste a (male)
(female) (other) valence." This would have to be cleared as a command
thoroughly and often. That's the skill.
An auditor can ask a pc about an aberration and spot a valence
possibility. And then run it by waste, etc.
People usually have to waste before they can have. A person who can
have a valence isn't subject to it.
This type of command is rounded off with "What part of that valence
could you be responsible for?"
The general rules of auditing must be observed. The basics of
Scientology must be understood. And great skill and understanding are
required of the auditor.
"Tell me how you could waste father's valence" ". . . a fat valence" ".
. . a defeated valence" etc. The list is enormous.
Well there it is in the rough. When it's made some clears it will be an
alternate probably and have a highly polished form like SCP. Right now it
is used as an assist to SCP on a difficult case as per the next HCO B.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :-jh
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[PAB 138, Standard Clear Procedure and An Experimental Road: Clearing by
Valences, 15 June 1958, is taken from this HCO B.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 MAY 1958
SPECIAL BULLETIN No. 2
AN EXAMPLE OF CLEARING BY VALENCES
An Experimental Process
Experimental Case C by V No. 2.
Auditor: LRH Pc-Experimental Case. Nervous, restless, heavy somatics.
I started session by attempting to clear a p.t. problem. First he had
to clear the command. The pc, very restless, defined a problem as
"Something that can't be solved." "You can keep trying but of course you
can't solve it."
I tried in vain to get pc to as-is that computation. It would not
change.
I was faced by this: One cannot audit successfully up against a p.t.
problem. If one tries to do so without clearing the problem the whole case
hangs fire. Every unchanged profile or case after auditing is unchanged
because the auditor left a present time problem partly or wholly unflat and
in restimulation. A pc whose definition of a problem is "something that
can't be solved" and who yet has a p.t. problem could not be audited
successfully unless the computation altered.
Trying "What is a problem?" as a repetitive question for half an hour
only made the pc nervous, restless and tearful. Obviously the consideration
would not change. Therefore, obviously, the consideration was mis-owned. It
was a valence, another person the pc was being with complete tenacity and
total error. Process abandoned. Decided to strip the valence off.
A discussion of what was a valence finally bore fruit. Pc understood
term as meaning a mental package of ideas and considerations really
belonging to another person and unknowingly borrowed by pc.
Started in to run a process to at once give greater reality on valences
and to hit at the computation.
If pc would fight help so hard then the valence had four considerations
that were known to me. (1) It couldn't be assisted; (2) It considered a
problem as "something that could not be solved"; (3) It was steeped in
defeatism; and (4) The pc thought of the valence as self.
Just to ease into valences I ran a process as follows "Can you get an
idea of somebody that cannot be helped?" Pc could. "Describe the person."
Pc did, thus getting a detached idea of a personality in the mind. "Now
what would you say that person's definition of a problem would be?"
The first dozen people so imagined all had definitions of problems
identical with pc's own. But then there began to be a change in the
definition.
Possibly this process would have gotten further but pc was looking
brighter and a flat place was reached and I was really trying to clear by
valences.
Therefore I bridged, started in on valences directly. I called the
valence in which pc was stuck "that valence" (pc thought of it as self). I
used the repetitive command "Tell me how you could waste that valence". Now
and then I asked where it was. Pc didn't know sometimes, sometimes did. (At
first it was just back of pc's eyes and was pc's thinkingness.)
Terrible somatics cut in after fifteen minutes, all chronic with pc.
I went right on with process for some time (over one hour) when pc
suddenly began to cognite on problems. The somatics had ceased entirely
fifteen minutes before.
As a process can be left when (a) an ability is regained, or (b) three
responses are given with equal comm lag or (c) pc truly cognites in line
with process, I could then leave it and bridge.
I bridged over to "What part of that valence could you be responsible
for?" for twelve minutes to round process off and keep pc from making "that
valence" an enemy if any bit of it remained and to check out somatics. Pc
felt very dazed for a moment or two (typical of a separating somatic) but
came out of it very bright. Process flat.
Bridged into earlier commands for a few commands each to flatten them
and bridged out to begin clearing of session.
Pc could not now consider any of the five initial problems listed as
problems now . . . they all seemed simple and routine parts of life.
Ended session.
Time of auditing 2 1/2 hours approximately including one short break.
Goal of session was to clear up problems on the subject of problems.
Goal was attained.
Added bonuses-Loss of main thinkingness circuit, loss of chronic
somatic and service facsimile, increase of potential, new zest to continue
on to clear.
Pc heretofore desiring little auditing, hard to control in session,
reactive toward help offered by others. All changed.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:bt.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[PAB 139, An Example of Clearing by Valences, 1 July 1958, is taken from
this HCO B.]
P.A.B. No. 137
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 June 1958
SOME MORE CCH PROCESSES
Compiled from L. Ron Hubbard's Research Writings and Taped Lectures to the
18th American Advanced Clinical Course
CONTROL TRIO:
After one has run CCH 0 to 5 and has brought the preclear's body and
attention under control, there are various ways of handling the case from
there on. Here is a series of processes which undercuts Trio and is called
"Control Trio."
The commands for Control Trio are:
1. "Notice that (auditor indicates object) and get me idea of having
it."
2. "Notice mat (auditor indicates object) and get the idea of permitting
it to continue."
3. "Notice that (auditor indicates object) and get me idea of making it
disappear."
The processes should be run in that order and each one must be run flat
before the next one is attempted. It is very necessary to clear the command
before embarking upon the process. Preclears simply understand that
"having" means that they must possess something, carry it with them
wherever they go-without just leaving the mountain, chair or whatever it
is, in its own space-time continuum. He gets it confused with ownership and
so forth.
In Fundamentals of Thought there is an excellent definition of
havingness: "The essential definition of having is to be able to touch or
permeate or to direct the disposition of:"
During the running of the first command the preclear will come up with
cognitions regarding the necessity of having or not having things, its
goodness or badness, and will in general run out his earlier training
regarding this point. It will change his conceptions which earlier
religions may have implanted, such as it is "bad to have," and run out the
compulsions of "must, must not, got to, can't have," etc.
Find out what the preclear is doing and how he is doing this, for he
should get havingness from this process and his tone should rise
considerably. A change should take place within a very short period,
otherwise (a) his body and attention are not under control or (b) he
doesn't understand the command and is running a different process than that
which you intended.
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
There should be no qualifications or conditions such as "If I had the money
I could buy that object and then have it," or "I don't like it and thus
don't want it," or "What shall I do with it once I have got it?" It is just
the ability to have without other considerations of goodness, badness,
ownership or beauty going with it, and the auditor and preclear should
clear such conceptions through good but non-evaluating two-way
communication.
The second part of this trio brings the preclear's sense of active
participation of creativity and responsibility out, for he must grant that
particular object sufficient life and beingness to allow it to "continue
within its own space and time." Preclears come up with the considerations
that they have either tried to not-is objects and/or people or "withheld"
something from them or tried to push them out of their environments because
they didn't like them or agree with them. This is an interesting process to
put their ideas about what they should have around them back into proper
perspective. They will find that there is no harm in permitting the sixth
dynamic to continue in present time right where it is.
The third part of the trio is the most effective and more will be said
about it in a following PAB. It is a very good exteriorizing process and
the preclear will come up with many cognitions on his own and the rest of
the dynamics. Here the idea is just to "get the idea of making the object
disappear" instead of to dispense with it or not-know or not-is it.
This cycle can be run over and over again until it is flat, within a
few minutes after the command has again given the preclear some gains.
After this, Trio (old-time Terrible Trio) can then be run with great
advantage on a case who couldn't do it before. Control Trio, which
undercuts Trio, will bring out its reality level.
GOALS:
With every preclear it is most necessary to establish goals that are
REAL for the PRECLEAR. You want him to have some goals which are HIS and
not what grandma, father or schoolteacher desires for him. Preclears who
have no real goals are working on other people's determinism and we have to
(a) establish the certainty of a future for the preclear, and (b) get him
to put things in that future that he WANTS, so that he can have a future.
There is a gradient scale of processes which will establish goals which
are REAL to the preclear by casual two-way communication, using the
following questions:
1. "What are you absolutely sure will happen in the next two
minutes?" one hour, three days, one week, three months, one year,
etc.
Complete certainty on each time span is necessary before the auditor
continues to the next time span. This is done by two-way communication, and
the auditor must all the time be sure that the preclear is certain that
these things are going to happen in the next two minutes (or whatever the
time span is) to ensure that the process really bites.
2. "Tell me something that you would like to do in the next two
minutes," one hour, etc., is the next process that would put
doingness and more time into that future.
On some preclears the following questions may be realer and bite
faster. This is putting the accent on have instead of do, since we work
from the bottom up on the Be, Do, Have triangle. They are:
3. "Tell me something you are sure will be there in two
minutes, etc.," and
4. "Tell me something you would like to have in two minutes, etc."
The last two processes really undercut the above and are thus lower
level processes and it is advisable to run them on preclears whose ability
to communicate and reality level are low.
Watch out for the preclear attaching all sorts of conditions to his
answers. Also work towards positive goals of "things" and not conditions
such as "I want to get rid of my fears and somatics." The latter type of
preclear is working towards nothing rather than towards something. (A more
positive goal of something would be "I want a stick of candy or a glass of
water.") Check for certainty at all times, for certainty strengthens
reality and the reality of a future for the preclear is most essential if
auditing is to succeed all the way.
LOSSES:
Why doesn't a preclear exteriorize easily and stay exteriorized? And
"Why does he get sick when one asks him to conceive a static?" is the
accompanying question. The answer to this is "Losses." The preclear
associates a static with loss, and he says, "All right, if there is nothing
there I've lost it."
Conceiving a static is therefore painful, and whenever he lost anything
something disappeared. An individual cannot conceive a static if he
associates static with a loss-if it is painful. So we have to cure him of
the painfulness of loss, consideration of, before we can exteriorize him
easily.
We do this by going back to automaticity. The universe has been taking
things away from the preclear. It has become an automaticity known as
"time." Time itself is a consecutive series of losses. So we have to cure
this preclear of losses before we can get him to appreciate time, otherwise
he would be so afraid of losing it that he'd park himself on the track, and
this is the "stuck on the track" phenomenon.
This is done with the process "Recall a moment of loss," sandwiched
with havingness (Control Trio, Trio or Locational Processing). This gets
the preclear to take over the automaticity of all of the losses which he
has experienced unwillingly.
When an individual has no visio, has never seen anything, couldn't see
anything, the only thing that he is looking at is a "stuck" loss.
Recall a Moment of Loss and Goals are a lower harmonic of running Then
and Now Solids and are at the moment making a bid for our chief
exteriorization processes. Recall a Moment of Loss should be run with two-
way communication, but not too much outflow of the preclear. Communication
must at all times remain two-way. Ask the preclear "when" this happened now
and again, unless, of course, he told you when he recalled the loss.
Control Trio, Goals and Recall a Moment of Loss are a combination of
processes and should be run as a combination to secure the best gain for
the preclear.
A Scientologist is one who controls persons, environments and situations.
Scientology means knowing in the fullest sense of the word.
Scientology is used on Life and its forms and products.
A Scientologist operates within the boundaries of the Auditor's Code
and the Code of a Scientologist.
The chief uses of Scientology are in the fields of education,
organization, mental disability and religion. Scientology is the first to
give scientific meaning to these.
A Scientologist is considered a professional if he uses Scientology in
any of these fields and has been thoroughly trained in Scientology.
A Scientologist is a first cousin of the Buddhist, a distant relative
to the Taoist, a feudal enemy to the enslaving priest and a bitter foe of
the German, Viennese and Russian defamers of Man.
The religion of the Scientologist is freedom for all things spiritual
on all dynamics which means adequate discipline and knowledge to keep that
freedom guaranteed.
We are the people who are ending the cycle of homo sapiens and starting
the cycle of a good earth.
There is no barrier on our path except those we make ourselves.
Our ability belongs to all worlds everywhere.
[pic]
[pic]
Issue 76 [1958, ca. early June]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
"Offbeat" Processing
L. Ron Hubbard
Experimental auditing has its place. Indeed, we got where we are
because of experimental processes. Every process was once experimental.
BUT when you want results you had better use standard techniques and
procedures. After all, I have sweated through their testing for years and
we now KNOW what will ease or clear a preclear.
Most clearing "failures" are caused by use of non-standard techniques
and procedures. Also, such failures can be caused by ignorance. An auditor
thinks he is using standard material. He isn't sufficiently trained to
know.
Such an auditor who has had failure, should take a leaf from New
Zealand. Frank Turnbull wasn't getting the results he wanted way "down
under." So he grabbed a plane and came halfway around the world for a two-
day briefing. Frank was right. They weren't using techniques properly-and
their old-style E-Meters weren't even working and they didn't know it.
Now if a smart, clever auditor like Turnbull can doubt his command of
the subject, I am sure other auditors would experience no disgrace in
following through and getting squared around. For clearing is easy if you
know how.
Such stories as an auditor who "clears his pcs each week" are more
tragic than funny. And rather costly to luckless pcs.
Some auditors don't understand "What is a Clear" and get confused with
their own cases-but that doesn't mean a Clear doesn't have a precise
definition, an exact and distinct beingness-and very worthwhile, as any
clear can assure you.
Perhaps the saddest case of experimental auditing to come to my
attention was the case of a young man whose wife was depressed. She was
making such difficulty in the family that he could not work. He had had
training as an auditor but felt he could not help her. He had no money for
auditing from a professional.
I reviewed the case and asked him why he did not at least try to help
her, and recommended he use standard auditing and procedures. This he did
with adequate results and his efforts succeeded very well so that he was
able to resume his work, his wife sharing his responsibilities.
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
And then it seemed to him that he might go a bit further faster. That is
the usual stumbling block-anxiety to do it all at once.
But preclears cannot do it all at once and the thoroughly experimental
approach he used, born out of his own basic lack of reality, was not
successful. He "audited" his wife downward into a condition almost as low
as she had been in before, thus canceling over two-thirds of his gain.
Now none denies his right to undo what he had done to help her, but his
intention was to help her swiftly and spectacularly. Had he read his PABs
he would have found as of three years ago a mention of his "discovery" as
an unworkable approach, in defiance of the principles which make
Scientology function.
Once more he had to quit his job and his wife has lost confidence in
his willingness to assist her.
Fortunately, another auditor has now volunteered to assist-and he will
use standard, proven, tested techniques and procedures.
You see, there is a thing called Scientology. It has axioms. It has
principles. It has the goal of empowering a thetan to overcome his own
problems. This standard Scientology we don't change every day. The
uninformed, not knowing that a standard exists see in each new release a
new subject. So they say, "Why don't I experiment on my pcs?" And they
experiment with the standard background, not with a further reach of old,
tried, principles.
Without a guiding central organization Scientology would fall into an
anarchy of opinions in a week for there are too many who can go through the
motions of auditing who do not know their basics. They think a new thing,
Scientology, is an experimental thing. It is not. The basics are inflexible
and have been for years.
We know now just exactly what clears people. And we know exactly what a
clear is. And we know exactly how to train and process. These are hard won
riches. Don't waste them and your time, too.
This is the way out! Are some people so fond of the trap they avoid the
flaming beacons which show the entrance? Or are they afraid to set Man
free?
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 JUNE 1958
RUNNING VALENCES
1. Never leave one half flat. Stupidity is then in restimulation.
2. Always run a specific valence.
3. Past track valences are preferable to run over present life valences.
4. Thetan valences are preferable over body valences.
5. "Invent a (valence)" is a milder form, less effective but often more
real to PC than "Waste a (valence)." Commands for Invented valences:
"Invent a (specific valence)." "Think of a problem that valence could
have." "Thank you."
Commands for Wasting Valence: "Tell me (Think of) a way to waste a
(specific valence)."
"Does that really waste it?" (occasional use) "Thank you."
Types of valences that can be run: Formula-Invent and/or Waste valences
on eight dynamics from 8 to 1.
Goals for Clearing by Valences: Uncover basic personality. BP is, of
course capable of all attributes of clear. OT is an educated BP.
Wind up all valences you have run with "What part of that could you be
responsible for?" which puts him back at cause (since he elected as cause
any valence you ran).
Clearing by Valences is probably the 3rd step (with Help and Step 6) of
Clearing. C by V doesn't neglect or supplant Help or Step 6.
Always pick bad or contra-survival valences. Never run pro-survival.
Differentiation is on this basic:
A contra-survival valence physically injured pc.
A pro-survival valence never did.
Pcs pick out for their randomity stuck flows on help.
E-Meters don't register well on valences. They stick and several
valences mentioned will only stick more. A valence sticks. It must be freed
up on meter.
8th and 7th Dynamic area of valences produce wildest results.
Chief characteristic of formula 8 to 1 is to produce judgement.
LRH
LRH :-.cden
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 14 JUNE 1958
STANDARDIZATION OF CLEAR PROCEDURE
FOR GUIDANCE AND USE OF THE HGCs
(a) Stress 4 pts of error.
(b) Run Help, Step VI.
(c) Standardize Valences.
(d) Eliminate Wasting Help.
(a) 4 pts of Error
1. Profile, IQ unchanged = PT Problem left in restim, or not located at
all. Cure = Understand, Locate and Flatten PT Probs.
2. Profile dropped = Auditor code break, real or imagined, unrepaired by
auditor. Cure = Repair any code breaks with 2-way comm & Help.
3. Unstable Gain = Too many processes or processes not flattened. Cure =
Increase confidence on auditor's part. Get him off of a total effect
need.
4. Auditors unable to produce good results = Introduction of new
processes which auditors then use without sufficient reality. Cure =
Use only processes on which auditor personally has a reality.
(b) Clear Procedure
Clear Procedure consists of Help in Brackets on any terminals and Step
VI. There are no other certain processes at this time.
(c) Standardize Valences
Valence splitting is most reliably done by running Help in Brackets on
the valence.
There are two valence processes now under test which seem to be better
than others. They are still experimental.
Experimental (a)
Invent a being who could not be helped.
What problem could that being have? Ack.
Experimental (b)
Invent an unconscious being (person).
What problem could that being (person) pose? Ack.
All other tested valence processes have so far failed.
(d) Waste Help
This process violates rule of terminals, "Run terminals, not
conditions".
LRH:bt.rd L. RON
HUBBARD
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[pic]
Issue 77 [1958, ca. late June]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Learning How to "Clear"
L. Ron Hubbard
In December of 1957 the first Clear was made by another than myself.
This was the gain. This was the fruit of the years.
Now we can have many clears. We can have thousands of clears. And if we
can have that, we can have a civilization.
So this was the bottleneck-other auditors couldn't really clear people.
And this bottleneck is splintered to diamond bits.
Other people can clear others. And so we're on our way.
However, it wasn't so much the technique that counted-it was knowing
how to apply it-knowing fundamentals, knowing procedures.
THERE IS A KNOW-HOW IN AUDITING TO CLEAR.
It won't be picked up out of books. It won't be taught by word of
mouth. It will be taught where Scientology teaching itself was evolved-the
Academy.
The procedure of teaching to clear is as much part of clearing as the
techniques of clearing. We must face that fact. And there's no real text on
it because the text would be too long.
There are very few people who know this teaching procedure. But
brighter than that, there is at least one place where the combined know-how
can accomplish the fact-and that place is Washington, D.C.
So now that we've got clearing and clear people, we also have a course,
enrolling every Monday, that teaches clearing and only teaches clearing.
That course is the Academy course leading to the grade of HUBBARD
CLEARING SCIENTOLOGIST.
This is the old BScn Course and replaces the grade of Hubbard Advanced
Auditor, which certificate while still valid, will not be issued again at
this time.
The Hubbard Clearing Scientologist Course is five weeks in length. It
is taught by L. Ron Hubbard, Jr. It is taught only at the Academy of
Scientology. It will continue to be taught.
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard All Rights Reserved.
The prerequisites of the course are Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist and
Hubbard Certified Auditor certificates.
The cost is $285.00 unless taken consecutively with an HCA Course where
there is a discount.
The grade of Hubbard Clearing Scientologist will be the only validation
stamp grade below the ACC Course.
We have found that an aspiring auditor does better in school if he
first has a Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist Course, preferably under a
validated field auditor, of which there are many. However, this course is
taught at the Academy as well. This is a two-week course at the Academy.
We have found that an auditor goes nowhere if he does not know his
basic Scientology and the fundamental activities and procedures of an
auditor. These are taught in the Hubbard Certified Auditor Course. How to
analyze problems, handle preclears, apply Scientology to life, give
assists, do spiritual healing, handle the mind and a multitude of skills
are all basic in this HCA Course. It is the Key Scientology course.
It lasts eight weeks and contains 575 hours of personalized
instruction. This is the course that really makes a Scientologist. It is a
requisite to the Clearing Course.
The Hubbard Certified Auditor Course is constructed as a wholly
practical course, more on the order of a laboratory than a lecture series,
in which every important aspect of livingness is taken up part by part and
demonstrated with simplicity and clarity. Until such a thing has been done
with a person, his attempt to clear others would meet with failure. But,
even more importantly, successful living would be questionable without a
modern HCA Course.
The new Hubbard Clearing Scientologist Course follows a long tradition.
Called the BScn Course and later the HAA Course, it has always taught
clearing in one form or another. Earlier courses stressed exteriorization
and other routes. Dr. L. Ron Hubbard, Jr. and Dr. Richard F. Steves have
been the principal instructors in the past. The length and schedules have
not been varied greatly from its earliest beginnings. The only things new
about it are the title of the certificate and the actual, precise, welded
in-place, embedded-in-concrete stable data and procedures surrounding the
new fact of clearing.
People who complete this course will be able to clear people and that's
all there is to it. The possibility of clearing somebody without such a
course is, on the average, not very probable since clearing is a new
reality. That doesn't mean people shouldn't try. A person attempting to
clear will do more for a preclear than he's been able to do before, but to
really reach the ultimate fact of clear with a pc would be quite a feat
indeed without the auditor being specially trained.
We want people who can routinely clear people-and fast. We want no
false prophets who, unable to really clear, degrade the definition or
results of Clear. We want clearing auditors. We've made them in the HGC, I
made them in the ACC, so we can make them in a five-week course-if they are
good HCAs already.
The public will buy Clearing from an auditor. Even the dullest seem to
understand what you mean when you describe "Clear." So an auditor selling
clearing had better be sure he can. And we can make him sure-not only of
the fact of clear but his own ability to clear.
In an Advanced Clinical Course after 1958 I am going to teach only
Operating Thetan technology. The goals of an Advanced Clinical Course are
to clear the
students who aren't and teach all the students how to audit toward
Operating Thetan.
Thus, as you can see, the ladder of courses we have developed have
evolved into their natural places following the natural evolution of people
and can stay that way. To develop this ladder we had to have technology
about teaching and developed what we needed over these eight years. And we
had to have the actual facts toward which to train. And so we obtain the
following courses and goals, all of them logical and practical:
1. Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist. -Two weeks of day training.
Teaches people how to communicate and handle people. Field or
Academy trained.
2. Hubbard Certified Auditor. -Eight weeks of day training.
Teaches people the practical parts of life and the fundamentals of
handling it, as well as the procedures of auditing. Taught by
Academy only.
3. Hubbard Clearing Scientologist. - Five weeks of day training.
Teaches auditors to clear people. Taught by Academy only.
4. Hubbard Graduate Scientologist. -(Advanced Clinical Course-
ACC.) Six weeks of night and day training. Teaches auditors how to
audit toward Operating Thetan. Taught by LRH only.
Those are the grades which have evolved. We see no reason to change the
arrangement or the certificates for the next thousand years. There will be
other special courses, of course, but these are the basics.
You might ask why all these certificates beginning with the word
"Hubbard"- auditors in 1950 and again in 1954 voted it that way,
overthrowing my plea to take it easy, and so that's the way it is. They
want it that way. Doctor of Scientology still exists, too, you know.
I am very happy to make this announcement of courses. I haven't liked
the changing around, either. But any Hubbard Dianetic Auditor can have a
Hubbard Certified Auditor certificate just by writing in and paying the
small cost of preparation and any HDA or Hubbard Advanced Auditor
certificate is still valid.
What a long, hard struggle it has been to stabilize the know-how and
goals of training. We've done it just in time. Not too far off we'll need
to hire a thousand auditors at high pay to take care of something special.
So we haven't missed by much. Preference will be given, of course, to
Hubbard Clearing Scientologists-and the training, no matter how many we
hire, will have to continue to be at the auditor's expense-as is true of
every staff auditor we have. We, the auditors, built all this ourselves out
of our own pockets and so we own it. That won't change.
A hundred thousand clears would change for the better all the
civilizations of Earth.
Say-do you know we're already doing it?
The Scientologist is today's Cause point in an embattled world. We'll
win.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 30 JUNE 1958
(Revision of HCO Bulletin of 28 May 1958)
PROCEDURE FOR CERTIFYING CLEARS
This Applies WORLD-WIDE
All Offices and Auditors
Clears are tested by several departments. In only one department does
all this data assemble. And only that one unit can pronounce a clear
"Clear".
Testing department gives test. Testing should not tell pc anything
which would lead pc to think he has been passed for clear.
Dir of Pr gives an E-Meter test and review of written tests but cannot
finally inform pc he is clear. The most he can say is that it seems so, but
final declaration of clear is reserved to the HCO Board of Review.
When all papers and data are assembled at HCO Board of Review, this
unit then reviews the entire picture. HCO Bd of Review can call for a
retest at its own discretion after a lapse of time.
HCO Bd of Review then submits all tests to LRH for a final review. Only
after LRH certifies a person as "Clear" can a clear bracelet be issued.
THIS APPLIES WORLD-WIDE. ALL TESTS FROM ALL OFFICIAL SCIENTOLOGY
OFFICES.
The issuance of the bracelet by HCO Bd of Review is the first time the
recipient is informed finally that he is clear.
This Bulletin is retroactive to the first person cleared by modern
Scientology.
LRH:md.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright � l 9 58
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[This revision changes the fifth, sixth and seventh paragraphs which in the
28 May 1958 issue read:
"Only when HCO Bd of Review is completely satisfied does it then issue
a clear bracelet.
"The issuance of the bracelet is the first time the recipient is
informed finally that he is clear.
"HCO Bd of Review should refer cases about which it can't decide to LRH
for personal review."]
LRH TAPE LECTURE
27 June 1958
** 5806C27 AUDC-18 Processing and Clearing
CLEARING CONGRESS LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
4-6 July 1958
"The Clearing Congress was held at the Shoreham Hotel in Washington,
D.C., July 4, 5 and 6, 1958.
"It began with the presentation by L. Ron Hubbard of fifteen clear
bracelets to some of the Clears attending. From this beginning he went on
to cover, in nine fact-packed hours of lecture, the entire subject of
Scientology and Clearing. Six of the lectures are available in color film.
All of the data needful for a complete understanding of the subject was
outlined and the data necessary to production of Clears was given in
full."
-Ability 79
5807C04 CC-1 The Fact of Clearing; also available as color film
** 5807C04 CC-2 The Factors of Clearing (Four Elements); also
available as color film
5807C04 CC-3 The Freedoms of Clear; also available as color film
5807C05 CC-4 Evaluation of Importance, Things to Know in
Clearing,
Prerequisites to Auditing; also available as color film
** 5807C05 CC-5 Clear Procedure, Part l: CCH-0, Help; also available
as color film
** 5807C05 CC-6 Clear Procedure, Part ll: Creativeness; also
available as color film
5807C06 CC-7 The Magic Button
5807C06 CC-8 The Goal of Auditing
** 5807C06 CC-9 Violence
5807C06 CC-10 Juvenile
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 7 JULY 1958
CONTENTS AND COVERAGE OF HCA/HPA COURSE
Training Activities Please Comply
Required knowledge of an auditor:
Knowledge gives Results.
The Auditor's Code
Code of a Scientologist
The TRs
The Axioms
The following Scales must be well known:
ARC Triangle (Emotional Scale)
Know to Mystery
Effect Scale
Processes he must know before he runs clear processes:
ARC Straight Wire
Havingness Subjective
Trio
8-C
Thinkingness Processes
Assists
Running Engrams & Secondaries
Handling of PT Problems
Problems of Comparable Magnitude
Opening Procedure by Duplication, earliest style
LRH:bt.jh L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 9 JULY 1958
STAFF CLEARING
The Director of Processing is in charge of Staff Clearing.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:bt.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 12 JULY 1958
STANDARDIZATION OF CLEAR PROCESSES
FOR GUIDANCE AND USE OF THE HGCs
(a) Stress 4 pts of error.
(b) Run Help, Step VI.
(c) Standardize Valences.
(d) Eliminate Wasting Help.
(a) 4 pts of Error
1. Profile, IQ unchanged = PT Problem left in restim, or not
located at all. Cure = Understand, Locate and Flatten PT Probs.
2. Profile dropped = Auditor code break, real or imagined,
unrepaired by auditor. Cure = Repair any code breaks with 2-way
comm & Help.
3. Unstable Gain = Too many processes or processes not flattened.
Cure = Increase confidence on auditor's part. Get him off of a
total effect need.
4. Auditors unable to produce good results = Introduction of new
processes which auditors then use without sufficient reality. Cure
= Use only processes on which auditor personally has a reality.
(b) Clear Procedure
Clear Procedure consists of Help in Brackets on any terminals and Step
VI. There are no other certain processes at this time.
Supplemental Processes: CCH 0-1-2-34, S-C-S, Connectedness.
(c) Standardize Valences
Valence splitting is most reliably done by running Help in Brackets on
the valence.
There are two valence processes now under test which seem to be better
than others. They are still experimental.
All other tested valence processes have so far failed.
(d) Waste Help
This process violates rule of terminals, "Run terminals, not
conditions".
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: -.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
20TH AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
7 July-15 August 1958
Immediately after the Clearing Congress, L. Ron Hubbard conducted the
20th American ACC in Washington, D.C.
** 5807C14 20ACC-1 Opening Lecture
** 5807C15 20ACC-2 ACC Procedure Outlined, E-Meter TRs
5807C15 20ACC-2A Question-and-Answer Period
** 5807C16 20ACC-3 Course Procedure Outlined: How to Clear a
Command,
Simplicity, CCH-0
5807C16 20ACC-3A Question-and-Answer Period
** 5807C17 20ACC-4 Beginning and Ending Session-Gaining Pc's
Contribution to the Session
5807C17 20ACC-4A Question-and-Answer Period
** 5807C18 20ACC-5 ACC Training Procedure: CCH-0, Problems and
Goals
** 5807C18 20ACC-5A Question-and-Answer Period
5807C21 20ACC-6 The Key Words (Buttons) of Scientology
Clearing
5807C21 20ACC-6A Question-and-Answer Period
5807C22 20ACC-7 The Rock
5807C22 20ACC-7A The Rock (cont.), Question-and-Answer Period
** 5807C23 20ACC-8 Special Effects Cases-Anatomy
5807C23 20ACC-8A Question-and-Answer Period
5807C24 20ACC-9 Anatomy of Needles-Diagnostic Procedure
** 5807C24 20ACC-9A Question-and-Answer Period
5807C25 20ACC-10 The Rock
** 5807C25 20ACC-10A Question-and-Answer Period: Clearing the
Command
The list of lectures given to the 20th ACC continues in date order
sequence on pages 298-300 and 302.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 14 JULY 1958
Not for general use.
HGC Auditors may find
of interest.
20TH ACC TRAINING PROCEDURE
The first day on auditing the student checks out as many other students
for clear as possible with Clear Check Out Sheets and E-Meter. Text:
Ability and HCO Bulletins. Purpose: To learn to check out clears. The way
to learn clear check-out is to check out many non-clears.
How to clear a command. Clear each word once only so that the word
means something to pc. Only repeat if the pc says he doesn't understand.
Never ask twice "What does Help mean to you?" Clearing a command is not a
repetitive process. There is no other right way to clear a command in any
case. Clear the command for all sides of a bracket before running one.
All auditing and check-outs are actual. There is no student coaching
except on TRs.
1. CCH 0 with emphasis on goals and PT Problem. Done thoroughly at start
of every session.
2. ARC Straight Wire using following type command only-"Recall a time
when you communicated with something." Run as a complete 9 way bracket
one command each side. Use communicate only. Run until needle of meter
is relatively free. Pay attention to cyclic aspect of answers. Purpose:
To loosen up bank and screens and to teach student use of a bracket and
give him practice. This permits student to ease into a rather strict
and exacting auditing activity without an instruction to him from an
instructor upsetting preclear as it would if Help were being used
instead. Avoid beefy processes where correction, supervision and
general instruction are involved. Auditor requires no verbal answer
from pc, only a head nod, but checks now and then as to when the
communication being recalled took place.
3. Start-C-S oldest version. Emphasis on start and stop. Run change when
the start or stop seem flat and only to unflatten them. Purpose:
Smoothness of auditor control; accomplishment by pc of really
controlling body. You start that body, etc is emphasized.
4. Connectedness, control version. Sole command: "You get the idea of
making that (object) connect with you." No other side of bracket.
Purpose: Havingness, unsticking needle, directing pc's attention.
4b. Student should scout pc's track looking for the "rock", spot it or
something like it in minimal time, stick it good and free with
Connectedness. Purpose: Giving student and pc confidence that some
sticky business can be plowed into and gotten out of readily by use of
Connectedness.
5. Help. 5 or 9 way bracket in general to groove pc in. "How could ....
help you?" On a sticky item run one side of bracket after another,
never repeat any one side twice.
Use whole track type commands, never localized this lifetime.
5a. Run "auditors" and "preclears" as subjects for Help. 5 way bracket.
First run auditors, then pcs, then auditors, then pcs, etc. Purpose:
Clean up all past auditing.
5b. Isolate whole track "rock" and run 5 or 9 way bracket on it.
This is an adroit matter. It requires that one know the pc and audit
this particular pc. It doesn't mean forcing one's own "rock" on the pc.
It requires judgment and a knowledge of valences. It may be necessary
to unburden the "rock" with several items before it appears. Free the
needle on the "rock". Command must be phrased to include whole track
version of pc's rock. Purpose: To locate largest reality of pc and to
hit squarely on what he is always mocking up obsessively.
5c. Scout Help with a general bracket to see if it is freer.
6. Step 6 as in Clear Procedure. Use simple forms.
Repeat 5, 5a, 5b, 5c and Step 6 alternately until clear.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:bt.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 15 JULY AD 8
CARRYING ON
Members from Australian and South African HASIs are here attending the
Congress and 20th ACC. They are working hard and learning fast.
In the meanwhile the Australian and SA staffs are carrying on short-
handed and doing a very fine job of it.
I know how hard it is to cover additional posts for two months. And I
wish to thank those staffs for carrying on.
Best,
LRH
LRH:bt nm
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 JULY 1958
All Staff
ACC Instructors
and students
Field Offices
COMMAND SHEET FOR HGC
CLEAR PROCEDURE
ON ALL COMMANDS: BEFORE AUDITOR GIVES THEM, HE MAKES CERTAIN HE HAS
PC'S ATTENTION ON HIM AGAIN AND OFF LAST QUESTION.
CCH 0-Starting Session:
"Is it all right with you if we begin the session now?" "The session is
started."
GOALS: "What goal might you have for this session?"
(Be certain to end session with "Have we gained anything of your goal
at the session's beginning?")
PT PROBLEM: (Caution: Problem itself, not just its terminals, must
exist in pt.) "Do you have anything worrying you so much that you will have
a difficult time keeping your attention on auditing?"
(If pc has)
"Describe the problem to me."
(Pc does.)
"Does that problem exist in present time now?"
(If pc thinks it does): "What part of that problem could you be
responsible for?"-or, "Invent a problem of comparable magnitude to that
problem." (Repetitive questions.) (No further descriptive name is allowed
auditor in this command.)
Auditor frequently asks, "Describe that problem to me now."-"Does that
problem now exist in present time?"
--------------
ARC Break: "Have I done something you feel is wrong in this session?"
"Describe it to me."
Plenty of acknowledgement to pc, no further apology and certainly no
explanation. Object is to get pc's attention on auditor in present time,
not earlier in session. Goal of TR 2, of goals, PT Problem and auditing is
to get pc's attention into present time, so don't stack commands on the
track or park pc somewhere in session or leave him in an out-of-session
problem.
--------------
S-C-S: (Note: All formal auditing, except for final acknowledgement of
cycle, which is Tone 40.) Commands:
START: "I am going to tell you to start. And when I tell you to start,
you start the body in that direction. Do you understand that?" "Good."
"Start." "Did you start that body?" "Thank you."
STOP: "I am going to tell you to get the body moving in that direction.
Somewhere along the line I will tell you to stop. Then you stop the body.
Do you understand that?" "Good." "Get the body moving." "Stop." "Did you
stop the body?" "Thank you."
CHANGE: "Do you see that spot?" "Good. We will call that Spot A. Now you
stand here. O.K." (Auditor indicates another spot.) "Now do you see that
other spot?" "Good. We'll call that Spot B. All right, now when I tell you
to change the body's position, YOU move it from Spot A to Spot B. All
right?" "Good. Change the body's position." "Did you change the body's
position?" "Thank you." "Do you see that spot?" "Well, we'll call that Spot
C. Now when I tell you to change the body's position, YOU move the body
from Spot B to Spot C. Do you understand that?" "Fine." "Change the body's
position." "Did you change the body's position?" "Thank you, "
(NOTE: Change is run only to unflatten START and STOP, when both are
flat.)
CONNECTEDNESS: Use: Only to unstick pc on meter when meter can't be
read well or when auditor desires to clear an object wrongly chosen as rock
in order to look for another.
(a) "You get the idea of making that (object) connect with you."
(Auditor points.)
(b) (If pc isn't looking at object with Mest body's eyes, use
following:) "Look at that (object)." "You get the idea of making
that object connect with you."
(c) (On blind humans:) "Feel that (object)." "You get the idea of
making that object connect with you."
--------------
HELP:
1. SCOUTING. This is a 2-way comm activity.
(a) "How do you feel about .. ?" Vary any object that sticks by
asking
about specialized form. If a specialized form frees, go back
to object that
stuck. Gradually sort object that consistently sticks from
objects that stick
by association with it only.
(b) If pc reads high on Tone Arm, gets inconsistent lie reaction,
use following: "What have you had to be responsible for?"
To be sure pc is reacting, turn Sensitivity knob very high.
Guide him carefully around his life until he gets on a sticky point.
Then sort it out, attempting to get parts of it to clear up. Do not let pc
linger on matters which do not stick.
Responsibility sorts the matter out. His realization (cognition) of
various zones is what does him good.
This is not necessarily a repetitive command. It can be varied with
"What part of that (discovered area or item) have you had to be responsible
for?"
Large area of current lifetime can be freed up and with clues from what
he has stuck on repeatedly and using what would not free, return to a
standard scout as above.
By using part (b) a pc can be brought down on the Tone Arm and can be
made to react more normally on meter.
2. Running Help in general: USE generalized items, not specific people
or objects (don't pin pc in current life).
General Help bracket: 9-way:
"How could you help yourself?"
"How could you help me?"
"How could I help you?"
"How could I help myself?"
"How could you help another person?"
"How could I help another person?"
"How could another person help you?"
"How could another person help me?"
"How could another person help another person?"
Running Help on an item:
"How could you help a .........?"
"How could a ...........help you?"
"How could another person help a .........?"
"How could a ...........help another person?"
"How could a ...........help itself?"
"How could you help yourself?"
"How could I help you?"
"How could you help me?"
Run in sequence as above. Do not give same command twice.
--------------
CLEARING COMMANDS: Clear each word and the full phrase once each with
the following:
"What is the usual definition of the English (or other language) word
.........?"
Do not ask for definitions over and over as a repetitive command. If
pc's definition is poor, clear command every few commands.
Clear only each different word in a bracket. Don't clear each line in a
bracket.
--------------
STEP SIX:
Select simple non-significant objects. Run:
"In front of that body you mock up a .............and keep it from
going away." "Did you?" "Thank you."
Then use all directions from the body-"Behind that body...," "To the
left of that body . . . ," "To the right of that body . . . ," "Above that
body . . . ," "Below that body ...."
Run 6 objects each on six sides of the body on "Keep it from going
away," then proceed to "In front of that body you mock up a .....and hold
it still." Same procedure, then "In front of that body you mock up
a........and make it a little more solid." (There is no acknowledgement by
auditor after pc mocks it up and keeps it from going away, etc, or the "Did
you?"-there is acknowledgement only after full command is executed.
Otherwise acks will thin pc's mock-ups.)
Note: The objects should be simple at first, leading on up to
complexity. But at first, keep them simple and non-significant.
LRH:md.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[The above section on Clearing Commands has been excerpted as HCO B 28
February 1959, Clearing Commands, page 430. ]
** 5807C28 20ACC-11 ACC Command Sheet, Goals of
Auditing
5807C29 20ACC-12 ACC Command Sheet (cont.)
** 5807C30 20ACC-13 ACC Command Sheet (cont.)
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 JULY 1958
Distribution
All staff
Field Offices
THE ROCK
The Rock is a Reach-Withdraw mechanism and the phenomenon of a stuck
needle is the ridge so created.
--------------
The Rock is: That which a person has used to reach people or things
with and is determined in value by its creativeness or destructiveness. It
is simply the reach and withdraw mechanism which makes a ridge and this
causes the stuck of the needle.
The Rock is AN OBJECT-it is NOT a significance. And you determine a
scout by what the pc shies away from as well as what he sticks on-and a
theta bop always winds up in a stuck needle if pursued in a scout.
CYCLE OF THE ROCK (object) A person (I) failed to communicate himself;
(2) started using something to communicate with; (3) put the last item on
automatic and it created for him; (4) it failed.
The Rock itself, when first located, will be a solution to many earlier
cycles as described above. And so, a Rock is peeled off cycle by cycle as
above.
The rule is to find the last cycle that is real enough to the pc to
stick a needle and this is true of locating and running any lock of the
Rock.
Be careful during a scout not to choose an object which makes the
needle rise slowly, as this is an addition to the Rock which is being done
gratuitously by the pc. (This factor is an indicator but it must not be
run.) The Rock stick does not rise-it just sticks.
LRH:-.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
20TH AMERICAN ACC LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
31 July-5 August 1958
5807C31 20ACC-14 Running the Case and the Rock
5808C01 20ACC-15 Case Analysis-Rock Hunting
5808C01 20ACC-15A Case Analysis-Rock Hunting (cont.)
5808C04 20ACC-16 Case Analysis (cont.)
** 5808C05 20ACC-17 ARC
Other lectures from the 20th ACC will be found listed on pages 293,
298, 300 and 302.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 5 AUGUST AD 8
Issue 2 Revised
The basic locating question of the Rock (primary aberrative object) is:
"What is a People Pleaser?"
It can also be run just like this: "How could you help a People
Pleaser?" as an item bracket.
Do not "kid around with" or invalidate this Rock.
The new item bracket is as follows. It has been designed to preserve A-
R-C and to be used in this exact order one command at a time:
The Rock Bracket:
How could a ................help itself?
How could you help a ................?
How could a .................help you?
How could I help a ..................?
How could a ..................help me?
How could another person help a .................?
How could a .................... help another person?
How could others help a .....................?
How could a ...................help others?
How could you help yourself?
How could I help myself?
How could you help me?
How could I help you?
Command words but not as a whole phrase are cleared often (every three
brackets) and the pc is asked for his opinion only of the word "help" and
the item. His answer is not challenged.
Only ARC breaks can hide Rock again after found-clear them well. CLEAR
ALSO environmental ARC breaks on the Rock between sessions.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:b.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
5808C06 20ACC- 18 The Rock, Its Anatomy
5808C07 20ACC-19 The Most Basic Rock of All Rocks
** 5808C07 20ACC-19A Question-and-Answer Period
5808C08 20ACC-19B Question-and-Answer Period (cont.)
** 5808C08 20ACC-20 Auditor Interest
** 5808C08 20ACC-20A Requisites and Fundamentals of a Session
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 10 AUGUST AD 8
ACC AUXILIARY PROCEDURE
For Optional Use
THIS IS A ROUGH DRAFT
1. Start Session.
2. Clear auditor with pc-"Who should I be to audit you?"
"What is it all right for me to do?"
"Look at me. Who am I?"
3. Get pc into session.
Establish goals for session.
"What question shouldn't I ask you?" Handle resultant answers with
Straightwire as indicated.
"Do you have anything worrying you so much that you will have a
difficult time keeping your attention on auditing?"
Handle pt problem by Responsibility or Problems of Comparable
Magnitude. "Invent a problem of comparable magnitude to that problem."
"Describe that problem to me." "Does that problem exist in present time
now?"
Run two-way bracket on Help. "How could you help me?" "How could I help
you?" Flatten for the session. (Every time you audit somebody this should
be touched on and flattened so that it will stay flat at least for that
session. To flatten it for all time or for all sessions would be
impossible.)
Check for ARC breaks. If they exist, take them up two-way comm, and
also re-flatten above two-way bracket on Help.
WHEN AUDITOR AND PC ARE CLEARED FOR SESSION, ONLY THEN BEGIN ON CASE.
THIS IS TRUE OF ALL SESSIONS AND ALL CASES. KEEP PC IN SESSION WITH ABOVE
STEPS, USED WHENEVER PC WANDERS OFF IN SESSION. OF COURSE, DO NOT INTERRUPT
UNFLATTENED PROCESS TOO SUDDENLY TO GET PC BACK INTO SESSION. ALWAYS USE
COMM BRIDGES WHENEVER YOU CHANGE THE COURSE OF THE SESSION.
CLEAR ALL COMMANDS. ASK FOR OPINION OF KEY WORDS BUT NOT IN SUCH A WAY
AS TO MAKE THIS ASKING A PROCESS. THE PC'S IDEA OF WHAT THE KEY WORDS ARE
IS THE PC'S IDEA, AND A REPETITIVE ASKING FOR OPINION IS NOT A PROCESS BUT
AN INVALIDATION.
4. Where pc's idea of the following words is obviously impossible to
make any process move, do the following on the words CHANGE, PROBLEM, HELP,
CREATE, RESPONSIBILITY, PLEASED. A mis-definition on these words can keep a
whole case from moving. It is not necessarily true that clearing these
words clears a person. To reorient these words run the following process:
"Invent a person" (and when pc has, do not acknowledge, but add:) "Tell me
his idea of (key word)." This is a repetitive question.
5. Clear up psychosomatics as feasible with "What sort of a (limb,
organ, body) would please people?" "Tell me a person that that would
please." This is actually one command with two questions which are used
repetitively until psychosomatic or illness is markedly alleviated. This is
done to give pc confidence in the auditor and certainty that something can
happen in processing. It will only work if the first four steps are
complete and in good working order.
6. Clear up desires about new or different states of mind with "What
sort of a mind (personality as needful with those who cannot understand
what a mind is) would please people?" "Tell me a person that that would
please." This is actually one auditing command with two questions. There is
no acknowledgment after the first question, only after the second. This is
used repetitively.
7. Isolate basic Rock by any method. Run Rock Help bracket on it.
Or, boost out with "What sort of a (Rock as found) would please people?
Tell me a person that that would please." See above for running directions.
8. Run general Help and Step 6 as given, first one then the other until
case is clean, taking up any of above as needful to keep auditor and pc
cleared and in session.
If you do these things with any case you should wind up with a clear.
The length of time it takes depends upon the auditor's skill in getting the
auditing done and is much less modified by "severity of case".
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
20TH AMERICAN ACC LECTURE
Washington, D.C.
15 August 1958
5808C15 20ACC-21 Summary of 20th ACC
Other lectures from the 20th ACC will be found listed on pages 293,
298, 299 and 300.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 20 AUGUST 1958
PRESENT TIME PROBLEM-RUNNING OF
Auditors are occasionally unsuccessful in running present time
problems, life computations and service facsimiles because they themselves
are not alert to the definition of a problem.
A problem is two-terminaled. A single terminal cannot make a problem.
The basic problem is Postulate-Counter Postulate. Therefore, when the
preclear says his wife is a present time problem and the auditor runs "A
problem of comparable magnitude to a wife", he is not running a problem at
all. He is running a condition. For this to be a problem the wife would
have to include another terminal.
An auditor should make the preclear define the problem accurately as a
problem, not as a condition or situation. The problem of "my wife's desire
for another man" is a problem. The problem of "my husband's fooling around
with machinery" is a problem.
Wherever a PT problem arises it is up to the auditor to locate an
actual problem and get the preclear to describe it. He then runs "Invent a
problem of comparable magnitude to that problem." Thereafter frequently he
says, "Describe that problem to me" and makes sure each time he does that
the problem is described as a problem, not a single terminal or a
condition. When running a PT problem he also asks, "Does that seem to be a
problem to you now?"
Failure to get the preclear to define the problem as a problem will
result in a failure to relieve the PT problem and the auditor and the
preclear may proceed into the session believing implicitly that they have
run the PT problem when, as a matter of fact, they have not even touched it
but have in actuality run the conditions of a single terminal.
Probably the biggest holdup in all intensives is this fact of mis-
definition of problems.
And in passing it may be remarked that given Clear Procedure the
biggest delay on clearing is the failure of the auditor to run PT problems
and ARC breaks. It might also be said that the preclear only protests
violently about ARC breaks under one of the two following conditions: (I)
the auditing is actually very bad and (2) the PT problem has not been run.
As a rough rule of thumb it could be said that given well-intentioned
auditing, a preclear only protests about ARC breaks when a PT problem has
not been isolated and run. The problems connected with "being audited",
"being a preclear", "the auditor", have been rather uniformly overlooked by
auditors, and cases which tend to hang up in processing are usually hung up
on these.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: md.cden
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 20 AUGUST 1958
OUT OF SESSIONNESS
The mechanisms used by the preclear in living to keep his attention off
the Rock are: to get involved with many present time problems, and ARC
Breaks.
We used to believe that a thetan had to have problems. This is not
true. A thetan thinks he needs problems to keep his attention exteriorized
from the Rock chain and when the Rock is not run out he will continue to
dream up problems in present time to keep his attention enforcedly fixed
elsewhere than the Rock chain. A thetan will also dream up ARC Breaks to
exteriorize his attention from a present time problem.
The common denominator of all locks on the Rock is ARC Breaks.
Therefore, in running the Rock, expert auditing is necessary since in this
case as in no other, the preclear will dream up ARC Breaks. When his
attention flicks back to the Rock when he is between sessions, he will get
himself involved in present time problems and ARC Breaks obsessively to
keep his attention from going back on to the Rock chain.
Thus, we have the answer to the fact that a session will not progress
unless the present time problem is run and alleviated and we also have the
answer to the ARC Break difficulties. If the preclear is unsuccessful in
keeping his attention off the Rock by a present time problem, he will then
dramatize the Rock chain, which is another combination of motives which
explains preclear behavior.
The moral of this story is to run out pt problems and to patch up all
ARC Breaks or you will not find and run any Rocks.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
AXIOMS & LOGICS
by L. Ron Hubbard
Published
August 1958
This soft-cover booklet contains The Logics and The Axioms of
Dianetics, which first appeared in Advanced Procedure and Axioms in
November, 1951, The Prelogics (also known as The Q's) as given in the
Philadelphia Doctorate Course in December, 1952, and The Axioms of
Scientology of 1954, published in The Creation of Human Ability in April,
1955, plus later additions.
It should be borne in mind that these actually form epistemology, the
science of knowledge. They cannot but embrace various fields and sciences.
They are listed in this booklet without further elucidation but will be
found to be self-explanatory for the most part. Adequate phenomena exist to
demonstrate the self-evidence of definitions, postulates, logics, and
axioms.
The logics are separate from the axioms only in that from the system of
thinking so evaluated, the axioms themselves flow. The word logics is used
here to mean postulates pertaining to the organizational structure of
alignment.
This compilation was published in August 1958 in Ability magazine,
number 80, from Washington, D.C. It was also printed as Certainty magazine,
volume 5, number 21, in October 1958 from London.
40 pages, soft-cover. Also available in French. Available from your
nearest Scientology Organization or Mission, or direct from the publishers:
Scientology Publications Organization, Jernbanegade 6, 1608 Copenhagen V,
Denmark; or Church of Scientology Publications Organization U.S., 2723 West
Temple Street, Los Angeles, California, 90026, U.S.A.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 AUGUST 1958
CHANGE AUDITOR'S CODE
6. Do not process a preclear who is improperly fed or who has not
received enough rest.
16. Maintain two-way communication with the preclear.
17. Never use Scientology to obtain personal and unusual favors or
unusual compliance from the preclear for the auditor's own personal
profit.
18. Estimate the current case of your preclear with reality and do not
process another imagined case.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:b.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 SEPTEMBER 1958
HCA COURSE EXAMINATION
The cost for an individual challenging the HCA Course Examination is
$25 for tests and interview and $15 for exam and cert. Exam alone can be
given.
They must:
1. Pass HCA written exam 100% given by Academy Administrator.
(If this is flunked, no further exam is given. It is always
flunked.) (This is an opinion.)
If they passed written, then they have to:
2. Read well on IQ, APA, Tone Scale and Aptitude Tests.
3. Be passed by Comm Course Instructor on Comm Course TRs.
4. Be passed by Indoctrination Instructor on Indoc TRs.
5. Be passed by CCH Instructor on CCH Processes.
6. Be passed by Director of Training and be passed by
Technical Director.
LRH:b.rd L. RON HUBBARD
** 5809C01 AUDC-20 How to Run Present Time Problems
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 12 SEPTEMBER 1958
Staff Auditor Hats
POST CASE ANALYSIS ROUTINE
When pc has been taken to the Director of Processing or case analyst
(third party enters auditing picture in any way) the auditor must then
RE-ESTABLISH THE AUDITOR with
1. Two-way comm on analyst person.
2. "Who would I have to be to audit you successfully?"
3. "What am I doing?"
This is to avoid pc transferring to case analyst as auditor and then
not coming back to session.
This is also done when pc has coffee shop auditing between sessions.
LRH:bjh LRH
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 12 SEPTEMBER 1958
Issue II
HAVINGNESS-NEW COMMANDS
The value of havingness has not diminished. However, it needed new
commands. I have now developed these. They are remarkably more effective
than Trio.
FACTUAL HAVINGNESS
"Look around here and find something you have."
When this can be left-
"Look around here and find something that you would continue."
When this can be left-
"Look around here and find something you would permit to vanish."
Then return to first again.
The order may be reversed. Some cases may run 250 of the third before
finding one of the first or second.
LRH:b:jh LRH
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 15 SEPTEMBER 1958
MORE ON TRAINING DRILL TWO
Avoidance of Double Acknowledgement is vital if you ever hope to keep
pc in session.
Double Acknowledgement occurs when pc answers up, the auditor then
acknowledges, and the pc then finishes his answer, leaving the auditor with
another acknowledgement to do (and also leaving the auditor with no
session).
Wrong:
Command: "What could you say to your father?"
PC: "I could say, 'Hello'."
Auditor: "FINE."
PC: ". . . 'Father, how are you?' I could say that."
Auditor: (weakly) "Good. What could you say to your father?"
PC: "I could say, 'Are you feeling well?' "
Auditor: (desperate by now) "GOOD ! "
PC: ". . . 'enough to go fishing?' "
Auditor: "Well, okay all right. Now ...."
A pc is not always sure he has answered the question so he often
changes his mind. If the auditor gives him Tone 40 or any ack at all in
between a pc's reply the auditor is wrong.
You just don't "encourage" a pc with a lot of agreement okays and yes
in the midst of answers. The pc answers, the pc is sure he has answered and
the auditor then acknowledges. After all, it's the pc that must be
satisfied.
There are many ways to mis-acknowledge a pc. But any mis-
acknowledgement is only and always a failure to end the cycle of a command-
auditor asks, pc replies and knows he has answered, auditor acknowledges.
Pc knows auditor has acknowledged. That is a full auditing command cycle.
Don't forget it and expect a process to work, it won't. The roughest spot
in most students is TR 2, not so much how to acknowledge but when.
An auditor running into this with a pc should handle it this way.
Auditor: "What could you say to your father?"
PC: "I could say, 'Are you feeling well?' "
Auditor: "Did that answer the question?"
PC: "Well, no. I could say, 'Are you feeling well enough to go
fishing?'"
Auditor: "Did that answer the question?"
PC: "Yes, I guess it did. He always liked fishing and sympathy."
Auditor: (sure pc is through) "Good! What could you say to your
father?"
And there's the way of it. If the pc is not sure he has answered and
that the auditor has accepted the answer, the pc will get no benefit from
the auditing. And that's how important that is.
You can always spot a bad auditor. He does two things: he talks too
much to the pc and he stops the pc from properly answering.
Add all the above to all training of students.
LRH: md.rd
copyright �1958 L. RON
HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[PAB 145, More on Training Drill Two, 1 October 1958, is taken from this
HCO B.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 SEPTEMBER 1958
VITAL TRAINING DATA
(This Bulletin Changes the Character of Training)
No instructor can train a student unless he follows the Instructor's
Code. This code is learned by heart by an instructor, not read.
Wherever we are making poor auditors, we have confused the role of the
Academy with that of the HGC. The HGC processes, the Academy trains only.
Tell every student, tell every class of students, tell every instructor
many times,
THERE ARE ONLY AUDITORS AT THE ACADEMY. THERE ARE NO CASES.
Every time you as an instructor get interested in the student's case,
you make him put up his engrams for your inspection. Every time you get
interested in his auditing skill only, you make him put up auditing skill
for your interest.
From this date:
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES MAY AN ACADEMY TAKE UP THE PERSONAL OR CASE
PROBLEMS OF A STUDENT.
We've got 2,500,000,000 preclears. We can somehow control ourselves
long enough to make a few auditors.
They are made by direct, blunt instruction, the tougher the better.
They are unmade by a lot of super saccharine sympathy about their poor,
hopeless little cases.
So let's go, training units. No more clinics where there should be
schools. You'll have nothing but cases forever if you don't make some
auditors!
The week's intensive formerly offered with courses is turned over
herewith to HGCs. No further clinics as such may be run by Academies.
Auditing may occur in Academies but there may not be preclear conferences,
general or private, about the students' own cases. This works a hardship on
HGCs to some degree but HGCs occasionally are victimized by having to train
late students who were not trained but only processed through to HCA/HPA.
Thus an HGC has an interest in training quality.
Hereinafter all processing for keeps will be done in the HGC and all
training will be done in the Academy.
There is a standard toward which a student is trained. It includes two
disciplines. Formal Auditing and Tone 40 Auditing. Formal is taught in Comm
Course, Tone 40 in Upper Indoc. Students must know their codes and must
know how to follow them-no evaluation, no invalidation.
All of Dianetics, the Anatomy branch of Scientology must be taught.
The six simple types of processing are taught.
The axioms are taught.
Anatomy of the mind is taught, not just a lot of figure-figure theory.
The student gets there by finding he can confront in a preclear locks,
secondaries, engrams, chains, time track, circuits, machinery, valences,
the parts of livingness.
Manifestations of phenomena are taught, overt-act motivator sequences,
problems, computations, cognitions, comm lags, introversion, extroversion,
exteriorization, A-R-C.
Scales are taught-ARC Scale, Effect Scale. The Academies must now
undertake 3 separate courses and adhere to each.
If an instructor won't confront students he starts a big theory course
that avoids all anatomy, takes up the personal problems of the students,
excuses every failure to teach by saying it was student case. If case gets
in the road send the student to the HGC to pay for auditing or not. If
theory gets in the road of training auditors, teach anatomy only.
Let's go on this.
I am instructing all HCO Boards of Review to examine completely on the
above outlined items only and to flunk hard any student who doesn't know
his subject. We care little for the synopses and the paper work. We want
auditors who know their business, not a lot of squirrels.
A pc gets well in direct ratio to his ability to confront the anatomy
of life, the anatomy of mind and the physical universe.
How do you suppose you'll ever get any auditing done if the student
can't confront, via a pc yet, life, the anatomy of the mind and the
physical universe. It's easier for a student to confront than a preclear to
confront.
I've got a big idea for training: to wit: Let's deliver the goods!
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street, N.W., Washington 9, D.C.
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 15 OCTOBER AD 8
ACC CLEAR PROCEDURE
The Goal of the Auditor: to help the preclear re-establish confidence
in his ability to confront Thetans, Thought, Time, Life, Energy, Matter and
Space.
The theory of auditing: the preclear has lost confidence in his ability
to face existence and its parts and has difficulty in participation. He is
trapped in many of those things he has failed to confront or has been
prevented from confronting or has prevented others from confronting or
didn't exist.
By gradient scales his confidence in confronting Thought, Time, Life,
Energy, Matter and Space is improved. The rule is, "Find something the
preclear can confront and improve that ability." This normally begins with
some part of an auditor. In less able cases, it begins with a thought of
the auditor's or the preclear's.
Auditing is not erasure. Erasure dramatizes lost things to confront.
Where an auditor can be confronted and makes corny errors, the preclear
stops being able to confront-hence the graph goes down on ARC breaks only.
Therefore, the stress on smooth auditing.
A present time problem makes it hard for the preclear to confront the
session. Therefore the stress on handling present time problems.
Auditing has as its sole liability confronting on a via-it may look to
the auditor that he is using the pc (preclear) to confront things and this
can be restimulative if the auditor doesn't know what he is doing. If the
auditor is actively preventing the pc from confronting anything or has as
his goal never permitting the pc to confront, there's trouble to hand.
-------------------
ARC, in auditing, is:
A = the ability to be in or at a distance from something.
R = the ability to co-exist with something.
C = the ability to transmit thought between two or more points.
Thus we see that the minimum of two anything is needed for the
conditions of ARC to occur.
In actuality the thetan incurs no liability in confronting or not
confronting, being in or not being in things and thus a total confronting
or total non-confronting are attainable goals. The thetan believes things
about confronting or necessities to confront or not to confront and so
becomes aberrated (not straight-lined). To confront, knowing is necessary.
Unknown confronting or not confronting, when uncovered, gives us the
phenomenon of "cognition"-and that is the definition of it.
Auditing is that process which restores confidence in confronting and
undoes necessity to confront Thought, Time, Life, Energy, Matter and Space.
Theory of Auditing
It should be realized that an optimum Clear Procedure should take a
preclear from the lowest possible levels up to clear. Earlier procedures
(1957-1958) did not attempt to address every case but were content to
handle about 50% of the preclears. The remainder had to have special
address just as cases. Therefore, auditors adopted the idea that on one
hand there was Clear Procedure and on the other hand low level procedure-
they did not place one above the other in a gradient scale to clear. This
particular Clear Procedure does that.
In use it should be realized that different cases require different
emphasis. An easy case would not demand a tedious command clearing,
suspicious probing to break non-existent occlusions or emphasis on the
lower steps. Indeed, these lower steps could be skipped up to CCH 0.
It is all a matter of judgment, how long and hard to run which. Two
errors are potential: both rest on accurate case estimation. The commonest
is to overestimate the level of the case. And not uncommon, to audit a high
level case with very low level processes. The answer is to audit the case
one is auditing, not some other case or one's own case.
Since estimation and auditor-sensitivity are subject to variety and
error one cannot cleanly estimate the length of time required to clear
anyone. Only approximations are possible and these are varied by possible
environmental difficulties of the preclear during auditing: i.e., daily
present time problems of crushing magnitude.
We are not today in the area of thousands of hours, however. We are in
the area of hundreds of hours in any case, sane or insane. I cite an
example: a woman suffering from a postpartum psychosis was audited 600
hours on CCH 1, 2, 3, 4 before she turned sane long enough for the auditor
to snap off the case the valence of her dying brother, at which moment she
turned stably sane. Only then could she have been audited on less
fundamental steps. However, auditors are not concerned with the insane but
often address relatively unconscious people. This example is cited as the
most extreme time in auditing we have on record with modern technique.
I would not be surprised that, with all variables introduced, some case
required 800 hours to clear. On a jigsaw puzzle test such a case would have
failed to have fitted a single piece in the first 30 seconds, by our
present method of estimation.
There are several means of establishing an idea of length of time in
processing from present state to clear. The minimum in any case would be
three weeks (75 hours); the probable maximum would be 1,000 hours. Between
these extremes, we have most people. The peak of the cure would probably be
around 250 hours, as estimated by older clearing methods.
Anxieties to attain faster push-button clearing defeat most research.
These speed methods violate the reality of the preclear and too thoroughly
evaluate for him. In all cases of clearing it is only the reality of the
preclear which milestones the gains. That reality requires a certain speed
of advance. While being audited, also, a preclear is living, and his
surroundings require his attention. Man is somewhat cautious. He must
adjust himself within his own ideas of security. The auditor always knows
what is wrong with the preclear long before the preclear finds out. One
must permit the preclear to find out! That discovery is only assisted,
never blackjacked into being (see Psychiatry: The Greatest Flub of the
Russian Civilization, by Tom Esterbrook). The patient is part of the
therapy-a lesson the Russ school never learned.
Therefore, Clear Procedure starts where it should, CCH 1.
In running the CCHs, a set procedure is followed not only with the
single process but with the series. One will discover that only one of the
series of CCH 1, 2, 3, 4 bites the first time through. It is useless to run
very long on the ones that don't bite. Example: An auditor does CCH 1 for
an hour-no bite. He does CCH 2 for an hour or
so-no bite. He does CCH 3 and it bites He does it for a few hours and CCH 3
levels off a bit. Now he returns to CCH 1 and finds it bites. He flattens
it a bit, does CCH 2 for an hour, CCH 3 for a couple of hours and when he
starts CCH 4, now this one bites! He flattens it in a few hours, goes back
to CCH 1, etc.
The processes CCH 1, 2, 3, 4 are all of a piece. They are done in
series fashion, not as individual items.
CCH 1, 2, 3, 4
Number: CCH 1
Name: Give me that hand, Tone 40.
Commands: "Give me that hand." Physical action of taking hand when not
given and then replacing it in preclear's lap. And "Thank you," ending
cycle. All Tone 40 with clear intention, one command in one unit of time,
no originations of preclear acknowledged in any way verbally or physically.
May be run on right hand, left hand, both hands, each one flattened in
turn.
Position: Auditor and preclear seated in chairs without arms, close
together. Auditor's knees both to auditor's left of preclear's knees,
outside of auditor's right thigh against outside of preclear's right thigh.
This position reversed for left hand. In both hands preclear's knees are
between auditor's knees.
Purpose: To demonstrate to preclear that control of preclear's body is
possible, despite revolt of circuits, and inviting preclear to directly
control it. Absolute control by auditor then passes over toward absolute
control of his own body by preclear.
Training Stress: Never stop process until a flat place is reached. To
process with good Tone 40. Auditor taught to pick up preclear's hand by
wrist with auditor's thumb nearest auditor's body, to have an exact and
invariable place to carry preclear's hand to before clasping, clasping hand
with exactly correct pressure, replacing hand (with auditor's left hand
still holding preclear's wrist) in preclear's lap. Making every command and
cycle separate. Maintaining Tone 40. Stress on intention from auditor to
preclear with each command. To leave an instant for preclear to do it by
own will before auditor does it. Stress Tone 40 precision. To keep
epicenters balanced. CCH l(b) should also be flattened.
History: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in the 17th ACC, Washington, D.C.,
1 957.
Number: CCH 2
Name: Tone 40 8-C.
Commands: "Look at that wall." "Thank you."
"Walk over to that wall." "Thank you."
"With the right hand, touch that wall." "Thank you."
"Turn around." "Thank you."
Run without acknowledging in any way any origination by preclear,
acknowledging only preclear's execution of the command. Commands smoothly
enforced physically. Tone 40, full intention.
Position: Auditor and preclear ambulant, auditor in physical contact
with preclear as needed.
Purpose: To demonstrate to preclear that his body can be directly
controlled and thus inviting him to control it. Finding present time.
Havingness. Other effects not fully explained.
Training Stress: Absolute auditor precision. No drops from Tone 40. No
flubs. Total present time auditing. Auditor turns preclear
counterclockwise, then steps always on preclear's right side. Auditor's
body acts as block to forward motion when preclear turns. Auditor gives
command, gives preclear a moment to obey, then enforces command with
physical contact of exactly correct force to get command executed. Auditor
does not check preclear from executing commands.
History: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, D.C., in 1957 for
the 17th ACC.
Number: CCH 3
Name: Hand Space Mimicry.
Commands: Auditor raises two hands, palms facing preclear, and says,
"Put your hands against mine, follow them and contribute to their motion."
He then makes a simple motion with right hand, then left. "Did you
contribute to the motion?" "Good." "Put your hands in your lap." When this
is flat the auditor does this same thing with a half inch of space between
his and the preclear's palms. When this is flat auditor does it with a
wider space and so on until preclear is able to follow motions a yard away.
Position: Auditor and preclear seated, close together facing each
other, preclear's knees between auditor's.
Purpose: To develop reality on the auditor, using the reality scale
(solid communication line). To get preclear into communication by control +
duplication.
Training Stress: That auditor be gentle and accurate in his motions,
giving preclear wins. To be free in two-way communication.
History: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard, in Washington, D.C., in 1956, as
a therapeutic version of Dummy Hand Mimicry. Something was needed to
supplant "Look at me. Who am I?" and "Find the auditor" part of rudiments.
Number: CCH 4
Name: Book Mimicry.
Commands: Auditor makes a simple or complex motion with a book. Hands
book to preclear. Preclear makes motion duplicating auditor's mirror-image-
wise. Auditor asks preclear if he is satisfied that the preclear duplicated
the motion. If preclear is and auditor is also fairly satisfied, auditor
takes back the book and goes to next command. If preclear says he is and
auditor is fairly sure preclear isn't, auditor takes back book and repeats
command and gives book to preclear again for another try. If preclear is
not sure he duplicated any command, auditor repeats it for him and gives
him back the book. Tone 40 only in motions. Verbal two-way quite free.
Position: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other a comfortable
distance apart.
Purpose. To bring up preclear's communication with control and
duplication. (Control + duplication = communication.)
Training Stress: Stress giving preclear wins. Stress auditor's
necessity to duplicate his own commands. Circular motions are more complex
than straight lines.
History: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard for the 16th ACC in Washington,
D.C., 1957. Based on duplication developed by LRH in London, 1952.
CCH 0
(1) Start Session by saying "Start of Session". Don't discuss things
and then start session and startle preclear, who thought he was in session
all the time. To do this throws pc out of session. Also, you can't end a
session that was never started.
(2)(a) Establish Auditor. Clear auditor with pc. Discuss any successful
auditing in the past, even successful doctoring. Shake pc loose from heavy
ARC with past practitioners, not by running down practitioners, but getting
pc to realize he has been helped. Develop this into process, "Who should I
be to help you successfully?" Get it flat, then run "What am I doing?"
(2)(b) Establish Preclear. Put preclear more in session with goals-
"What would you like to accomplish through Scientology?" "What would you
like to accomplish in this session?" The foregoing two we care little
about. We now hit this hard: "What are you willing to have happen in this
session?" We get a final clear answer to this even if it takes an hour of
two-way comm. Then we establish, "What are you absolutely certain will
happen in (finite period of time such as ten minutes or one hour)?"
(2)(c) Establish problems, if any. Run "Is there any place you would
like to be more than here?" When this is threshed out, "Is there any place
you should
be rather than here?" This may bring any present time problem to view. If
it does, audit it with "What part of that problem could you be responsible
for?" If pc is too agitated to run this or if two-way comm cuts his
havingness badly, run Factual Havingness: "Look around here and find
something you have." When this can be left, "Look around here and find
something that you would continue." When this can be left, "Look around
here and find something you would permit to vanish." Then return to first
again. (The order may be reversed. Some cases may run 250 of the third
before finding one of the first or second.) Factual Havingness can resolve
present time problems, which are always and only threats of loss.
If preclear seems hard to audit, is in propitiation, does obsessive
agreement, has hypnotic eyelid flutter, or in general seems unnatural about
talking or not talking, you can put pc into session and get present time
problem most rapidly by spending real time on this: "What question
shouldn't I ask you?" and sort it out on a meter, with two-way comm, then
ask question again, etc., until pc is really talking to the auditor. The
goal of present time problems or problems is to get pc in session. The goal
of this, "What question shouldn't I ask you?" is not to learn the pc's
secrets but to get pc to talk freely to auditor. Accomplishing this one
thing on a hitherto non-advancing pc is a great thing and will make the pc
advance faster than anything else. Get the pc to talk to you honestly.
Then take up present time problems directly: "Do you have a present
time problem?" Preclear says he does but needle on meter doesn't move. Ask
question a few more times-"Is there anything worrying you?" you can say for
variation. If needle still doesn't drop, forget it. IF NEEDLE DROPS pursue
it and run only the problem that drops. Don't run problems that don't drop!
Keep your eyes on the meter while handling pc with present time problems,
expand what falls, not something else. Pc can't confront his problems,
therefore the drop vanishes easily, comes back and drops again. This can
fool an auditor badly if he doesn't watch his meter and take up to run and
discuss only the drop. (Note: If the meter is "Stage Four" [idle swing, not
clear but pc can't affect meter, which only swings up, sticks, falls and so
forth on same pattern-a Stage Four needle has a stick in the top of its
oscillation, a clear needle doesn't] or if it is too stuck to show a fall
on a problem, play safe, run Factual Havingness or Connectedness.)
This exact way to run a present time problem can make a full intensive.
Command (when problem located): "Describe that problem to me now." Make
sure pc does. ACCEPT ANY VERSION PC GIVES YOU, BUT ONLY FOLLOW THROUGH ON A
VERSION THAT DROPS ON METER. If the version drops, run the following for
two or five commands, "What part of that problem could you be responsible
for?" Then whether drop on meter vanishes or not, say, "Describe that
problem to me now." If the described problem did not drop, buy it but don't
run it, say again, "Describe that problem to me now." If you can handle
this type of problem-handling, if you got pc to really talk to you, you can
practically clear a case on this since it gets out of case the succumb
postulates that war against betterment. This is the scale of succumb
problems from the bottom up: How to go unconscious; How to feel nothing;
How to go insane; How to escape; How to die; How to get shed of
responsibilities so one can die; How not to care; How to endure; How to get
better; How to Live; How to live better. There are inner levels. The basic
problem is a "whether" (all problems are "whether" or "how"): Whether to
Survive or Succumb. Decisions to do either are, if obsessive, the stable
data in the center of the major confusions. When a pc is sitting there in
heavy succumb postulates his goals and the auditor's goals are on opposite
vectors. Therefore, preclears who don't get better aren't trying to get
better no matter how much they say they are. Hence a whole case can run on
this provided some havingness is also run from time to time.
In brief, this is where running a present time problem well gets to.
Remember, a problem is not a condition or a terminal. It is a "how" or
"whether". It is a doingness, not a person. "My wife" is no answer to a
present time problem question. "How to live with my wife" is a problem.
"Whether or not to live
with my wife" is a problem. "My wife's illness" is not a problem. "How to
cure my wife's illness" is a problem.
Sometimes a pc will come right down on an old stable decision about the
problem and say, "It isn't a problem to me now." The auditor must not buy
this. He wants to know "Why?" until pc is off the old solution and can go
on describing problems.
How to be audited. How to stay in session. Whether the auditor has pc's
interest at heart. Such present time problems are very much in order to ask
about.
To completely flatten any problem it is necessary to run not
"responsible for" but "Invent a problem of comparable magnitude to that
problem." This is run in the same way as above, but is given more commands
for each version handed out by the pc. This is the problem command if you
want it flat forever. Don't lose this process or command from your
repertoire.
(2)(d) Getting Auditor and Pc established. Take up any ARC breaks with
pc or any breaks between pc and past auditors. Always clear away ARC
breaks. Don't dodge them as an auditor.
Explaining why the break occurred is an Auditor's Code violation-
Evaluation.
Saying that the ARC break didn't occur or was the pc's fault is an
Auditor's Code violation-Invalidation.
When an auditor fails to take responsibility for the ARC break he loses
the responsibility of running the session-which, of course, causes a
session to cease to exist.
The relative destructive value of an ARC break is greater than the
failure.
ALWAYS HANDLE CCH 0 in every session well except when giving not a
session but an Assist only.
TR 11
TR 11. ARC Straight Wire. That process best calculated to orient pc in
his past is ARC Straight Wire.
Commands: "Recall something that was really real to you." "Thank you."
"Recall a time when you were in good communication with someone." "Thank
you." "Recall a time when you really liked someone." "Thank you." The three
commands are given in that order and repeated in that order consistently.
Position: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other at a
comfortable distance.
Purpose: To give the student reality on the existence of a bank. This
is audited on another student and is audited until the other student is in
present time. It will be found that the process discloses the cycling
action of the preclear going deeper and deeper into the past and then more
and more shallowly into the past until he is recalling something again
close to present time. This cyclic action should be studied and understood
and the reality on the pictures the preclear gets should be thoroughly
understood by the student. The fact that another has pictures should be
totally real to the student under training.
History: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in 1951 in Wichita, Kansas. This
was once a very important process. It has been known to bring people from a
neurotic to a sane level after only a short period of application. It has
been run on a group basis with success but it should be noted that the
thinkingness of the individuals in the group would have to be well under
the control of the auditor in order to have this process broadly
beneficial. When it was discovered that this process occasionally reduces
people's havingness, the process itself was not generally run thereafter.
It is still, however, an excellent process with that proviso, a reduction
of havingness in some cases.
Many cases have achieved their first step upward with the process. It is a
process which, known, gives the pc the comfortable feeling that he at least
has stopped getting worse and that there is something that permits him to
hold his own.
In the 20th ACC Lectures I described how all entheta receives its
charge from theta. ARC in the bank makes ARC breaks possible. A re-
orientation of ARC can be more important than one realizes. The way to blow
ARC breaks can be more ARC. Even a psychotic may rise up to merely neurotic
on ARC Straight Wire.
The cyclic aspect of ARC Straight Wire must receive attention.
You don't want to know what when he recalls something, you want to know
when. Ask, "When was that?" frequently and you will see pc slide into past
and then return to present time as a regular cycle. Don't end the process
while pc is still in past. Don't finish the process with a comm bridge that
leaves him in the past. Just warn him that the process will soon end, and
stop it when pc's recall was of a near present time thing.
You get lots of past lives in view this way. Buy them.
-----------------------
Lasting and easily obtained results were gained in 1956 by using just
two processes. With the 1958 Theory of Auditing (above) it is easy to see
why. These are basically confrontingness processes. They were S-C-S and
Connectedness.
I developed these two for use in combination for a standardization of
processing for a whole firm that was having its employees processed in
London in 1956. The results were so good that Mary Sue Hubbard, while
Director of Processing London, used the same regimen on all preclears with
uniformly astonishing results.
The exact regimen used in that period was as follows: simple S-C-S on
objects with pc and auditor seated at a table. Then S-C-S on the body. Then
"Keep it from going away" and "Hold it still" on two small objects with pc
seated, using first one object then the other and always touching them with
his hands at command. Finally, subjectively, on facsimiles, "Keep it from
going away," and "Hold it still." Throughout, Connectedness was used to
bolster havingness as needed with the command, "You make that (indicated
object) connect with you."
The regimen as given here was superseded because auditors,
unsupervised, tended to complicate the processes and not until a short time
ago did we learn that the best answer to an auditor's desire for "more
information" was a repetition of what he was told the first time. He didn't
understand the original and so wanted a new one. Further, in supervised
processing, there has been a frailty in that the auditor sometimes
reported, "I did what you said and it didn't work." An unwary supervisor
then gives him a new process to do. A wary one says in reply to the above,
"What didn't work?" and usually discovers that the supervisor's directions
were neither remembered nor run. This set of factors has accounted for many
abandonments of SOPs (standard operating procedures) which were in
actuality working like mad, only the people they were given to never used
them, only said they did, and fed bad data back. It is the role of a
supervisor to get the process he gave out run, not another version of it.
CCH 3(c)
The rationale behind S-C-S was simple: it placed the pc in the
auditor's control. And it placed the pc's body under his own control. But
there is more to S-C-S than this since it is also a confrontingness
process.
CCH 3(c)
Name: S-C-S on a person. (Start, change and stop on a person.)
Commands: There are three sets of commands, each one of which is run
until it is relatively flat. The commands are as follows: "Now we are going
to start the body.
When I say start, you start that body in this (indicated) direction. All
right, Start." The commands for "Change" are as follows (indicating four
positions on the floor one after the other): "This we are going to call
Spot A. This we are going to call Spot B. This we are going to call Spot C
and this we are going to call Spot D. Do you have that? All right, when I
say Change, I want you to change the position of that body from A to B. All
right, Change." (The same applies for the other positions.) The commands
for "Stop" are as follows: "Now I want you to get that body moving in
(indicated) direction, and when I say Stop, I want you to stop that body.
All right, move that body. Stop." Each one of the commands is followed with
the question, "Did you start that body?" "Did you change the position of
that body?" "Did you stop that body?"
Position: Auditor and preclear ambulant. Auditor accompanies preclear
as he walks and occasionally touches him and turns him around manually as
needed to assist the preclear.
Purpose: To give the preclear good control of his body and to
exteriorize him.
Training Stress: Stress is on precision of the motion and command.
History: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in 1955 as an exteriorization
process. First discovered in 1952 was the fact that a person, which is to
say a thetan, stays as close to an object as he has confidence in his
controlling of it.
GP-3
Connectedness. The basic form of any havingness process is
Connectedness. After one flattens S-C-S, one then runs Connectedness on the
preclear.
Commands.
(a) "You get the idea of making that (object) connect with you."
(Auditor points. )
(b) If pc isn't looking at object with Mest body's eyes, use following:
"Look at that (object)." "You get the idea of making that object connect
with you."
(c) On blind humans: "Feel that (object)." "You get the idea of making
that object connect with you."
------------------------
There is a new version of havingness called Factual Havingness. It is
used in conjunction with any subjective process such as those subjective
processes which follow.
Factual Havingness Commands.
"Look around here and find something you have."
"Look around here and find something that you would continue."
"Look around here and find something you would permit to vanish."
--------------------------
Confrontingness
The earliest clearing process, made more workable by repetitive
commands and a broad understanding achieved in the ensuing 11 years, is
made part of the most modern (1958) procedure.
I was clearing people in 1947 by getting them to look at locks,
secondaries, engrams, circuits and the physical universe. I cleared a lot
of people in about 100 hours each. All I did was renew their confidence in
being able to "look at" their pictures. I turned on sonic, tactile, the
works, with renewing confidence, lessening fear.
Three years later, Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health was
written. Its processes are slanted toward teaching people to audit and are
the result of people not doing and saying they did. Dianetics: The Modern
Science of Mental Health
processes are good. They are the best training processes re banks there
are. They train an auditor better than they clear a pc.
We now return to earliest clearing with what we now call
Confrontingness. See "Theory of Auditing" above.
In general, we persuade the pc to confront things at his own gradient
scale of willingness.
We find an ability to confront and we improve it.
Body Confrontingness
This is close to a specific for a chronic somatic.
Auditor: "What part of that body can you confront?"
Pc: "Elbow."
Auditor: "What part of that elbow can you confront best?"
Pc: "The wrist."
Auditor: "Thank you."
This is the whole cycle of the command. The auditor does not correct
the pc when "part of" becomes some other part of the body.
Subjective Confrontingness
General version:
"What mental view can you confront?" "What part of it can you confront
best?" "Thank you."
The above wording allows for dark fields and other phenomena and runs
easily on an occluded case.
For a person who has pictures and sensations, a more specific form
using "pictures", as well as "emotions", "feelings", "sounds", "thoughts",
etc., can be used.
There can be and will be many versions of confrontingness given.
Suffice here that the above work well and can form an entirety of clearing.
They are a refinement, a simplification of the first version of clearing
and should work as well today.
Participation
We must not overlook the factor of participation in life. Participation
in session is necessary for processing to work. It is achieved by bettering
the factor "Confronting".
Auditing toward the goal of total non-confront is eventually to achieve
total non-participation. This is highly undesirable.
Destruction as an impulse has as its goal the removal of the need to
confront. When one can confront he does not need to destroy. Unwillingness
to confront is the source of most "have to be processed". One is asking the
auditor to destroy "all these horrible things". Obsessive confronting is
almost as bad. "Can't confront it so I'll prove I can by confronting it
forever-and I'll keep on creating it to prove I can confront it." The
mechanics of the bank can be worked out on such a basis.
Participation is only possible when one can also confront. Gradient
scale of confronting can lead to participation without being overwhelmed.
Survival
All processes since the earliest endeavors in this search have aligned
on "Survive". Continuance in Factual Havingness expresses this factor. The
postulate to Survive is invalidative of the fact that a thetan cannot do
otherwise. The whole key to brainwashing and punishment is that they make a
thetan postulate survival which is "continuous confronting". This is
handled by various versions of confronting.
Creating
A reactive bank comes from obsessive creating. A thetan's answer to
being threatened or struck is to create. His basic training is all aligned
along creating something. This factor is used in various ways in
processing, usually inherent in a process.
Help
Probably the first thing that will have to be taken up in some cases is
the subject of Help. To this degree Help is part of CCH 0 in establishing
an auditor-preclear relationship. People who do not volunteer to be audited
at all will require help orientation as the first step. Five hours on Help
with such a person, using a two-way bracket, is often well spent. But such
a bracket must be exceptionally well audited, without ARC breaks, to begin
an intensive or to repair ARC breaks.
Aside from the above, Help is of vast importance.
The first burning question, when we approach Help as a process, is,
"What condition would you have to be in to get help?" This is usually the
condition the pc is in. The repetitive command for this is, "Mock up (or
invent) somebody in such a condition that they would receive help."
HELP ON THE ROCK
The "Rock" is the thing the preclear uses to reach people. It is an
object far back on the track. It is confrontingness on a via.
The E-Meter is used to locate a stuck object. This is a "lock on the
rock". (The stuck can be freed by using Connectedness on the room, always.)
Help Bracket on the Rock
Use in this exact order, one command at a time:
How could a _______ help itself?
How could you help a _______ ?
How could a _______ help you?
How could I help a _______?
How could a help me?
How could another person help a _______?
How could a _______ help another person?
How could others help a _______?
How could a _______ help others?
How could you help yourself?
How could I help myself?
How could you help me?
How could I help you?
The command words, but not as a whole phrase, are cleared often (every
3 brackets) and the pc is asked for his opinion only of the word "help" and
the item. His answer is not challenged.
General Help Bracket
How could you help yourself?
How could you help me?
How could I help you?
How could I help myself?
How could you help another person?
How could I help another person?
How could another person help you?
How could another person help me?
How could another person help another person?
-------------------------
Responsibility
The basic clearing process using responsibility is, "You make a picture
for which you can be wholly responsible."
This, flattened, can make a clear.
It uses the fact that a person is making his whole bank anyway and it
persuades him to realize it.
Some version of responsibility is required to end all clearing.
Assignment of responsibility is at the bottom of the search for
phenomena and magic to clear people.
--------------------------
Answers
Everyone who does not change in processing is being an answer. He "has
it made".
Therefore, there is an opposite side to problems. That is answers.
"Mock up a problem for which you are (or your condition is) the
answer."
Origins (Originations)
The original version was: "What origin of yours has been mishandled?"
"Recall a time when you were pleased with that person."
A shorter version is, "What origin of yours has been handled properly?"
Any creation is an origin in a communication line, for the purposes of
auditing. Hence the importance of origins.
THE BUTTONS
There are certain buttons which depress clearing if the pc has
erroneous definitions for them. These are:
CHANGE, PROBLEM, HELP, PLEASED, CREATE, RESPONSIBILITY, CONFRONT.
Various processes redefine them in action. This is such a process:
"Invent a person who likes (the button)."
STEP 6
A cleared person is no longer in confusion about Help or who makes the
mock-ups. "Help and Step 6" were the early 1958 clues to clear. These are
still used as tests and even when their running is brief, they must be run.
Caution: It is almost fatal to run Step 6 if the rock is not out.
How to Run Step 6:
Select simple nonsignificant objects. Run: "In front of that body you
mock up a _______ and keep it from going away." "Did you?" "Thank you."
Then use all directions from the body-"Behind that body . . . ," "To
the left of that body . . . ," "To the right of that body . . . ," "Above
that body . . . ," "Below that body ...."
Run 6 objects each on 6 sides of the body on "Keep it from going away,"
then proceed to "In front of that body you mock up a and hold it
still." Same procedure, then "In front of that body you mock up a and
make it a little more solid." (There is no acknowledgment by auditor after
pc mocks it up and keeps it from going away, etc., or the "Did you?"-there
is acknowledgment only after full command is executed. Otherwise
acknowledgments will thin the pc's mock-ups.)
Note: The objects should be simple at first, leading on up to
complexity. But at first, keep them simple and nonsignificant.
Read and understand Scientology 8-8008, and use an E-Meter throughout.
A valuable side process here: "Decide to make a mock-up. Decide that
will ruin the game. Decide not to do it." Also this one: "Decide to make a
mock-up everyone can see. Decide that would ruin the game. Decide not to do
it."
* * *
In the above there are several roads to Clear. But there are also
several levels of case to be cleared. Experience tells one what to run.
Auditing skill alone gets the experience across.
The original 1947 processes were defeated in the hands of others by
lack of auditing drills and skill.
Help and Step 6 do not work on low level cases to make clears of
everyone-hence the CCHs.
By doing all of the above on every case you would certainly have clears
in all cases. As your experience increases you can begin to omit steps.
You will finally be able to adjust the processes to the exact cases you
do.
Get the preclear in session, run something. You'll win.
LRH:-.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[The above was made available as a booklet called ACC Clear Procedure and
is referred to as such in various issues. ]
P.A.B. No. 146
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 October 1958
PROCEDURE CCH
(This lecture is a final summing up of the previous CCH PABs
[interrupted at PAB No. 138] and should be read after those have been
digested. It was given by L. Ron Hubbard to the HGC staff auditors in
Washington, D.C. on 23 August 1957.
Thinkingness in general should not be suspected to be under anybody's
control. It is probably more under the auditor's control than it is under
the preclear's.
When I say or ask "Is the preclear's thinkingness under control?" I
want you to understand that it is less under the preclear's control at any
time than under the auditor's. The auditor can certainly control the
preclear's thinkingness better than the preclear can. But before you can do
this you must first get the preclear's body and attention under control.
A condition to running Trio is: Is the person and attention under your
control? To assume that the power of choice is also under the preclear's
control-much less his thinkingness-is, of course, completely wrong.
This condition then moves Trio way up on the present scale of
processes. In order to give the preclear some havingness after CCH 0 to 5
has been flattened, I have developed an undercut to Trio.
Trio is a directive process and should be prefaced by "Get the idea of
having that clock." "Get the idea of having that picture (indicated picture
on the wall)," etc. That's highly directive and would keep thinkingness of
a rough case under control.
The second version is: "Get the idea that it is all right to permit
that (indicated object) to continue." It is also just an indicating
process.
The third section of this trio is the clincher: "Get the idea of making
that (indicated object) disappear." One runs "disappear" instead of
"dispense with" or "not-know."
Small objects are much easier for the preclear to make disappear than
large ones. You have not told him to make it disappear but only to "get the
idea of making it disappear." Preclears usually literally interpret you and
try like mad to make it disappear-and it usually does for a short time.
I have solved the enigma of exteriorization. Why doesn't a preclear
exteriorize easily and stay exteriorized? We ask the accompanying question:
Why does a preclear get sick when one asks him to conceive a static?
Obviously we would have to get
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
somebody to conceive a static before he could himself stay comfortably
outside his body's head.
The answer to this problem is contained in the process "Recall a moment
of loss." Loss prevents the preclear from conceiving a static. He
associates a static with loss. He says, "All right, if there is nothing
there I've lost it," or "I've lost something there, therefore I'd better
not conceive a static."
Conceiving a static is therefore painful. The truth of the matter is
whenever he lost anything, something disappeared. All right. The funny part
of it is that he never noticed that he didn't lose totally every time. He
still had other objects. He lost his tie pin, but he still has his tie.
He's still got the floor, the room, this universe, space, etc., but he
never realizes this in these instances and that is why we run this process
"Recall a moment of loss" to accustom somebody to conceiving a static very
directly on loss and to get him to exteriorize.
An individual cannot conceive a static if he associates static with
loss-if the loss is painful. So we have to cure him of the painfulness of
loss, consideration of, before we can exteriorize him easily.
We do this by going back to automaticity. The universe has been taking
things away from him. It has become an automaticity, and we find that the
universe has an automaticity known as time and time itself is a consecutive
series of losses. So we have to cure the preclear of losses before we can
get him to appreciate time, otherwise he would be so afraid of losing it
that he'd stick himself on the track and we get the "stuck on the track"
phenomenon.
The process "Recall a moment of loss" aimed at this, but the third
command of Control Trio (as this series of processes had better be called),
"Get the idea of making that (indicated object) disappear," handles it very
well. This gets the preclear to take over the automaticity of all of the
losses which he has unwillingly experienced.
The universe has been taking the things away from him, and just
spotting objects and getting the idea that they are going to disappear or
are disappearing takes over the automaticity of losses, and he becomes
accustomed to it after a while.
All of the invisible masses that preclears have around them are
actually simply symptoms of mass-loss, mass-loss. When an individual has no
visio the only thing that he is looking at is a "stuck" loss. He is looking
at the nothingness of something that was there.
So one takes over that automaticity with the third command of Control
Trio and one therefore has a very highly directional, workable set of
processes.
Each part of that Trio would be run relatively flat and go on to the
next part, and I would say that one would run each part certainly not a
hundred commands each and the auditor should endeavor to stay in that order
of magnitude and just run it round and round.
Take somebody with glasses, for example. His eyesight will do more
tricks in less time on this third command of Control Trio than one can
imagine. Things will go black. Well, why do things go black? Blackness
makes things disappear and one takes over the automaticity of blackness to
make things disappear. Night grabs, the way of the universe, once in every
24 hours on earth here. This is the process we have been looking for to
turn on visio.
If you want to turn on sonic with this you would have to go down to a
noisy part of town and just run Trio on sound, but you wouldn't dare run
Control Trio on sound if the preclear did not already have it flat on
objects. Visio turns on before sonic.
There are many things one could do with this process. People who have
anaesthetized areas in their body-like they have no chest, etc.-do weird
things during this process.
I wanted to tell you particularly about this particular process because
it is a specific and will be found to be very useful to you. We had to find
out if one version of this would run without killing a preclear and that is
"Recall a moment of loss." Actually "Recall a moment of loss" should act as
a havingness process because it as-ises all of the lost points on the track
and it should be a havingness process all by itself; but we didn't want to
be so bold as to run it with no havingness.
(Until I find out differently, this Control Trio and "Recall a moment
of loss" are making a bid for our chief exteriorization processes.)
Now here is a process which is based on our old "Recall a secret." The
version is entirely straight wire. The auditor explains to the preclear
that he is not looking for hidden data to evaluate it. He is only asking
the preclear to look at the data. He then makes a list of valences, paying
great attention to those the preclear considers "unimportant" or is very
slow to divulge. Then the auditor takes this list and runs repetitive
straight wire ( 1951 ) as follows: "Think of something you might withhold
from (valence)."
The auditor repeats this question over and over until no communication
lag is present. He never says "something else you might withhold from
valence" because the auditor wants the preclear to think of some of these
many times.
Before selecting another valence the auditor runs a little Locational
or Trio. He then takes the next valence the same way. The list is covered
once and then the same list is covered again. The object is speed. Cover
many people. Given time the auditor can do the same thing on all dynamics.
There is a variation. Instead of a valence, body parts may be used.
"Think of something you might withhold from that (body part)." Leave sexual
parts or obvious psychosomatic difficulties until last. Don't begin on a
withered arm, for example.
It is amusing to realize that this process overlords all early
psychotherapies, but they, using this effort to locate secrets, thought
that divulgence and confession were the therapeutic agents. These have no
bearing on workability. Further, early efforts naively thought there was
one secret per case. Actually there are billions. It is easy to get into
past lives on this. A basic secret is that one lived before.
Whenever you run "withhold" on a valence you finish up with "can't
have" on the valence and "have" for the preclear. It flattens off better
that way.
You will often find that it is more advantageous to run Locational
Processing than Problems of Comparable or Incomparable Magnitude at times.
A Problem of Comparable Magnitude is all right, but it is a thinkingness
process and on a case that is having an awful lot of trouble with it, it
gives them hell to run Locational Processing, but nevertheless it does run
out the present time problem, which is most fascinating.
Any one of the Rudiments is an excellent process. Two-Way Communication
is great and does not as-is havingness. You have to keep the reality of two-
way comm very high, though, and be willing to interrupt obsessive outflows
and silences of the preclear. It is establishing a high level of reality.
It consists of the auditor feeding experimental data to the preclear to
have him look it over and decide about it one way or the other. You don't
let the preclear in Two-Way Comm as-is everything he knows, thinks, or
wants to do.
The latest addition to the Rudiments is "Clearing the Auditor."
Actually the crudest way known of clearing the auditor is "Who do I remind
you of?" "Tell me
something you like about me." The best way of clearing the auditor we know
of is in Training 15, which is "Could I help you?" "How?" "Could you help
me?" "How?" "Could I help anybody else?" "How?" "Could you help anybody
else?" "How?" "Do other people ever help other people?" "Do women ever help
women?" "Do men ever help men?" "Do men ever help women?" etc. You beat it
to pieces on a big long bracket.
This goes so far that it becomes a fantastic process in itself. You
take father and mother valences and they are usually quite hot. You can run
this on "Help." This is usually quite necessary on a case that is going to
hang up because the only reason he is sitting there is to waste help.
One has to understand that this case is trying to waste help, and it
isn't a matter of "Find the Auditor" in the Rudiments today, but "Clear the
Auditor" and the only point on which he is cleared is "Help"-"Can I help
you? Can you help me?"
We use Handbook for Preclears to give the preclear some homework at the
Hubbard Guidance Centers and it has been helping out just to the degree
that it does some clarification on goals and gets the preclear stirred up.
It simply stirs up the case so that it will run out.
I was running over a phrenological questionnaire, and it said people
are never permitted to do anything they want to do and this is the best
goal of discipline. I got this tangled out in one way or the other. I got
thinking about it from the standpoint- this was about 20 years ago-of "I
wonder if there is anybody around that could articulate with great
conciseness what he would like to do?" And I have found on all hands a
failure to articulate was the main difficulty. A person had the feeling
that he wanted to do something and that it would be wonderful, but it was
all in a sensory capacity. If he could have been made to articulate this it
would really have been something. And I experimented on it a little bit and
we see that today in the Handbook for Preclears.
If you can get a person to articulate in a session anything about the
future you have won the subject of goals. But it must be in the alignment
of this person's frame of reference. It must be aligned with his life-not
aligned with something we think he ought to live.
So let's take a look at the clearance of goals. Goals would not be
likely to run on a high generality. In other words, they are specific,
personal and intimate. It is "What do you think? What do you want? What is
aligned to your life?"
Let's look at Goals as a process. One could run Goals for 25 hours with
the greatest of ease. One could run the Present Time Problem for 25 hours,
and we just had a report of a terrific win here on a preclear who was run
on Locational for 25 hours. So it looks as though the Rudiments could be
the session.
We discover a preclear in the terrible condition of not wanting any
auditing, not going any place and all of his goals being somebody else's
goals. Two things can be done immediately: Clear the auditor and then run
Goals.
Goals could be run with two-way comm in this manner. You ask the
preclear what he is absolutely sure would happen in the next couple of
minutes, the next hour, a day from now, a week from now, one month from now
and one year from now. We want something that the preclear is absolutely
sure would happen.
We are running right there the reverse process of atomic bombs which
say "no future-no future-no future." That is basically what is wrong with a
person. Why does he get jammed on the track? It is because of "no future."
He had been denied to a point where his loss was so great that he dared not
own.
I had a case, by the way, which was one of the roughest cases I have ever
run into. He put on the total appearance of being sane-dramatized sanity-
and yet the case would make odd remarks like "I really think people are
crazy." "Well, why do you think people are crazy?" I would say. "Well,
because people say they can tell right from wrong and you know there's no
difference." It was fascinating. He would make odd remarks like this from
time to time.
One day he made a remark on goals: "Well, it's really best to tell
people that things cannot happen to them because otherwise they might hope
they could and then they would be disappointed."
This person was stark, staring mad and had no future of any kind. Five
hours just this one question, "Is there anything going to happen in the
remainder of this afternoon?" "Will anything happen the rest of today?" "Is
there anything going to occur any place in the world the rest of today?"
was run on him and his confident answer, with great certainty was, "No. No.
No."
Finally we broke through it and I finally got the person to admit that
there was some slight possibility that there would be a room here for the
rest of the day. That busted the case. It read from total no-future up.
This case was an isolated one as we have had occasionally. Now and then
an inspirational sort of process cracked them through. Well, now we see
this process of Goals on the basis of futures and a person without futures
cannot have a fancy future called a goal and all a goal is is a fancy
future determined by the person. If he has no future at all determined by
anybody, then he isn't going to go anywhere from that point and any goal he
has is totally unreal.
The best way that I know of to clear up a goal is as follows (with two-
way comm): "Is there anything that is going to happen in the next couple of
minutes?" We get this thrashed out until he has got some great big
certainty that there will be something a couple of minutes from now. Then
we gradiently move it up and we get certainties at each one of these stages
and levels-regardless of on what.
The person knows there is going to be a future there. Now let's have
him put something in this future he has now created. He has created a
future and has certainty on it. Now let's put some desire in the future and
we get a goal.
"Now what would you like to have happen in the next couple of minutes?"
or "What would you like to do in the next couple of minutes, tomorrow, next
week, etc?" We will get weird things which have no desire in them; they
will all be get-rid-of's, and if you finally plowed him down on it he would
get down to the bottom of the ladder, which is "Knock this body off right
now." And when he says, "I would like to get over my fear of darkness, I
would like to get over feeling bad every time my mother screams at me,"
these aren't desires. These are run-aways, flinches. These are "Let's not
confront it," "Let's get out of the universe; let's scram," and the final
result is the basic postulate, "If I could just get rid of this body right
this instant I would be all right."
So that process doesn't even vaguely get flat unless there is a real
goal like "I'd like to have a stick of candy." That is a goal, a real goal.
Preclears will modify their goals in some way or another: "Of course, I
can't because I have to work and I don't have any money," and "yak, yak,
yak." They are modified goals, and as long as they modify them they don't
have a goal because they are making a postulate and the MEST universe is
kicking the postulate in on them. So we do this on a gradient scale of time
so that goals become real to them.
L. RON
HUBBARD
[pic]
Issue 83 [ 1958, ca. mid-October]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
New HCA Course
You Can Begin at Home
L. Ron Hubbard
A wonderful new course has been instituted in the Academy of
Scientology. It is not just a correspondence course nor really an extension
course, it is a real HCA Course. In fact, it becomes the course leading to
certification as Hubbard Certified Auditor.
For exactly five dollars you can enroll in the Academy of Scientology
of Washington, D.C., and begin your studies at once at home. In fact, from
here on out all of the work you will do will be required to get your
certificate anyway.
Now that all the basic problems of training auditors have been resolved
and now that clearing is a real fact and attainable, it becomes our problem
to communicate this skill to Scientologists at large and to all those in
the world who would help their fellow man.
This new course is probably the biggest single undertaking of worldwide
Scientology that has ever been attempted.
Here is what I have found out. I have found out that a Scientologist in
his training must approximate the route of the actual research and
discovery. Otherwise, he is not able to clear people easily since he lacks
fundamental understandings which became commonplace many years ago. There
might be an easy road to clearing, and, indeed, an excellent auditor well
trained can pilot that road, but there is certainly no easy road to
training.
After a careful survey of a very large number of students I have come
to the conclusion that the only barrier to clearing everyone in the world
or, probably with more reality, one's immediate associates is the quality
of training received by the auditor.
If an auditor understands Scientology from its earliest beginnings up
to the present and if he takes modern Clear Procedure and uses it with that
understanding, he has no difficulty in clearing people, no matter how
''difficult the case." On the other hand, given the simplest, fastest, and
easiest rendition of Clear Procedure as now used in the Hubbard Guidance
Center, and yet not given thorough background in training, an auditor will
be unable to clear people.
How to make auditors rapidly has been our greatest problem. We cannot
expect people to support themselves for years, as in college days when
somebody else footed
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
the bill, in order to achieve skills which make him superior to any mental
practitioner in any time and period, without investing some time and effort
in the study.
As far as we can determine it takes about three years to make a
thoroughly excellent auditor. To expect somebody to spend three years at
the Academy in person is too much. The doors would be slammed shut on all
but a few and we would probably cost ourselves some of our best future
auditors.
On the other end of the extremes, to expect somebody to study the
subject for only a few weeks and then achieve remarkable results with it is
almost an impossible thing to ask. That some people have done it, that some
people even have simply read a book and gone out and achieved excellent
results does not mean that it is generally feasible and, indeed, it is not
even desirable, since these quick studies will sooner or later run into
material which, though well covered in research is not yet known to them
and they go astray into phenomena and waste a year or two or six trying to
wander back out of a labyrinth that was in actuality very well charted some
years before.
Between these two extremes there has to be a compromise. But the
compromise must work and it must find a person at the end of a period of
study totally competent to clear people, otherwise the study itself would
have no purpose whatever. Accordingly, following the pattern of some of the
greatest educational institutions, we have hit upon a combination of home
study and classwork for each of the three principal grades of skill and
practice.
My records indicate that it takes approximately a year from the moment
of enrollment in the Academy through the classwork and the homework and the
book synopses and the final award of the grade of Hubbard Certified
Auditor. If this is a fact in actual practice, then why do we not make it a
reality? We have done so.
It takes now a year to become a Hubbard Certified Auditor. No
certificate may be awarded earlier than one year from the date of actual
enrollment in an HCA Course, either extension or at the Academy.
Further records, though less complete, demonstrate that it takes about
a year from time of enrollment to complete all of the studies required for
Hubbard Clearing Scientologist (the old Bachelor of Scientology Course).
Therefore, no HCS certificate may be awarded any earlier than one year from
the date of enrollment at the Academy.
It has been demonstrated over a long period of time that it takes
approximately a year for an Advanced Clinical Course student to complete
his classwork, his cases and his thesis. Therefore, no certificate at the
grade of Hubbard Graduate Scientologist may be issued earlier than one year
from the moment of enrollment.
What does this mean in general to our standards and standing? It means
that any student of Scientology will have spent more actual study in the
field of the spirit and human behavior than any other practitioner in the
world today.
Instead of carrying on with the unreality that we are the briefest
trained people, we can step over to the reality that we are the most
thoroughly trained people.
And this is all done without expenditure of any more class time than
before by the new combination Extension Course and classroom study program.
It takes about a year for an auditor starting from scratch to become
familiar enough with his tools to alleviate chronic somatics, to bring
about some degree of
serenity and to handle the accidents of life in a preclear, and to handle
many types of preclears. By this I mean the achievement of actual tangible
results. He knows what he is doing and can approach anguish and accident
with confidence. Here, though we deal in the realm of the thetan, we have
more command of the anatomy of the mind than any other practitioner or
priest ever had in any period of Man's history. To achieve this in a year
is quite remarkable. But that it does take a year is factual.
It takes a further year's study to get up to a point where one can
approach a case with some confidence with the end goal of clearing that
case. People who attempt this under that period of training are liable to
be bitterly disappointed and this disappointment will do us more harm, as
we have already found, than all of the mad-doggings of vested interest and
the orthodox organizations. After all, isn't it worth two years of study to
be able to do this for one's fellow man?
But even an auditor who has studied for two years will find cases which
balk him and he requires a finishing course to get his own case in shape
and to attain the ability to confront any case and do something for it.
Thus the goals of our three years of study. Now I know that America has
to do everything in a minute, but, after all, if one spent 76 trillion
years getting that way he can certainly spend three years getting back on
the track again.
The problem of finance has balked many people from taking courses but
in this program it is possible to achieve the highest rank and skill as an
auditor for only a few hundred dollars a year.
THE PLAN
The way the plan works is not complicated. Special lessons have been
prepared. The applicant enrolls in the Academy at a cost of only $5.00. He
pays for the few texts he will need, and, indeed, many people may already
have them. He is at once sent his lessons to begin his training. By
devoting only a few hours a week he can keep his lessons flowing in to the
Academy where they will be studied and returned to him in order to coach
his schoolings.
It would assist anyone taking this Extension Course and Academy
classwork to have first an HAS Course (Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist)
from any local auditor qualified to give one. This certificate, HAS, is
not, however, a prerequisite to the Academy Extension Course or further
work, but would simply benefit the student a great deal. Or, you can come
to the Academy for this course which would then be credited toward HCA as
well as HAS.
If his finances are too cramped to permit him his full 8 weeks of study
in one year, he can do some of it in one year and some of it in the next
and so stretch out his course of study to suit his pocketbook.
The student pays nothing for his training beyond his $5.00 enrollment
fee until he actually presents himself at an Academy for his Communication
Course and his Upper Indoctrination Course. There he pays only for the
classwork he receives which averages about $1.00 per hour of personal
coaching.
He can do this as well for the grade of Hubbard Clearing Scientologist
in the following year, except that the length of time in actual classwork
at the Academy would be only 5 weeks.
The following year he would have only 6 weeks of actual class training
and that would be received in the attendance of an ACC.
Further, by extending his studies over a period of time and by paying in
small sums every week he could have his course paid for, so far as
classwork is concerned, well in advance of actually taking it.
There are many ways this study and endeavor can be brought to fruition
but he should attain these positive results. At the end of his first year
of combined home study of 44 weeks and his Academy class study of 8 weeks
he should be able to relieve many misemotional conditions and correct the
course of many anxiety- and painwracked lives. At the end of the second
year he should be able to clear at least half of the people he attempts to
audit. At the end of the third year he should be able to clear any case he
meets and should himself by this time be clear.
"Correspondence courses" are supposed to have various frailties. We
have studied these frailties, too, and we find that companies giving
correspondence courses very often, and perhaps purposely, make some lessons
much more difficult than others and so stop the progress of a student by
imposing a noncomprehension on the line. We have taken care of this by an
evenness of study and a gradient scale of approach. "Correspondence
courses" have an additional liability of not imposing classroom discipline.
This we have cared for in a reply system, and if you do not get your lesson
in, believe me you will hear from the Extension Course Director at the
Academy. "Correspondence courses" also fail by their loneliness, and I have
taken care of this by making very sure that much of the latter half of the
course is devoted to getting the student into circulation and actually and
actively observing humanity.
So this is not a "correspondence course." It is actual study just as
though you were at the Academy. There is no reason to go on being mystified
about what life is all about or what Dianetics and Scientology are all
about when a ready pilot is now to hand. There is no reason to sit back and
worry and fret because one doesn't have the immediate cash to rush to the
Academy and study the subject.
Furthermore, this is an excellent way to complete work where some
classroom training has already been begun in Dianetics or Scientology, and
it is a very fine way to review the subject up to date and get wheeling
with modern clearing.
THE GOAL
Without a broadly informed population who are capable of understanding
motives and aberrations no sane government of Earth is possible. Without a
great many clears no real effective leadership is possible for Man.
The joke is on all of us, to say nothing of Man at large. The singular
truth of the matter is that when he deserts this life he doesn't quit. He
has to come back here again and do it all over. You might not believe this
but you can learn it subjectively fast enough if you are in the hands of
any good auditor. Truth will out, no matter how final everyone has
pretended death might be. Death is very far from a permanent state. This is
probably much easier to prove with much less strain on the brain than some
of the fundamental laws of physics.
If we don't do something about this now, we'll have to come back at a
less optimum time without adequately organized data and organizations and
somehow muck through once more. Personally I don't believe we could in the
next few hundred thousand years and I believe this is a rare opportunity to
break the chain and start walking upward into the sunlight.
We aren't any cult that believes some outrageous nonsense about demons
and devils and we aren't any get-rich-quick scheme and might even succeed
better if we were. We are dedicated and sincere in getting the job done and
we are the first people
to appear on Earth since its first solidification out of nebulous vaporings
who can get the job done and who know what we are doing. The very truth
that we know, its simplicity and ease of grasp, the very honesty with which
we approach our task are probably the largest barriers we have to overcome.
Man has been defrauded so often, persuaded so wrongly and has returned to
the same old rut so inevitably and in such a defeated frame of mind that he
is not able to grasp easily the firm and friendly hand which is being
reached toward him.
It will take more people, more auditors, better understanding on all
our parts to get this task anywhere near done.
The most immediate answer is the Extension Course of the Academy of
Scientology. It is the answer to those who studied a little, thought there
was some truth there but because of lacking skill and complete study missed
it. It is a chance for those who, low on finance, yet wish to become
skilled auditors. It is the chance for those who did some studying and did
not do it well enough. It's a good chance, and it isn't much of a gamble.
Will you ever find a better offer than this Extension Course and enrollment
in the Academy of Scientology?
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH TAPE LECTURE
London, England
17 October 1958
L. Ron Hubbard arrived in London on October 17, 1958, to give the
London Clearing Congress starting the next day, followed by the 5th London
ACC. On arrival he gave a talk to staff.
5810C17 LECTURE Talk to Staff on Arrival in England
LONDON CLEARING CONGRESS LECTURES
London, England
18-20 October 1958
** 5810C18 LCC-1 Story of Dianetics and Scientology
** 5810C18 LCC-2 The Skills of Clearing
** 5810C18 LCC-3 Confronting
** 5810C20 LCC-4 The Rock
** 5810C20 LCC-5 Confusion and Order
5810C20 LCC-6 The Clearing Technique of 1947
** 5810C20 LCC-7 The Future of Scientology and the Western
Civilization
5TH LONDON ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
London, England
21 October-29 November 1958
The 5th London ACC started on 21 October 1958, immediately following
the London Clearing Congress, and ran through to 29 November 1958.
Case histories of this ACC, which was the first to use Scientology
engram running, are given in the book Have You Lived Before This Life?
L. Ron Hubbard gave the following lectures to course students in the
period 27 October to 18 November 1958:
** 5810C27 5LACC-1 Clearing and What It Generally Means to Man
** 5810C28 5LACC-2 Compartmentation of 4 Universes
** 5810C29 5LACC-3 Types of Pictures
5810C30 5LACC-4 Mental Image Pictures, Engrams
5810C31 5LACC-5 Engrams (cont.)
5811C03 5LACC-6 The Detection of Engrams
5811C04 5LACC-7 The Detection of Engrams with an E-Meter
5811C05 5LACC-8 Detection of Engrams lll, "Finding Truth with
an
Electronic Gimmick"
5811C06 5LACC-9 Difficulties Encountered in Search for Engrams
** 5811C07 5LACC-1 0 Detection of Circuits and Machinery
** 5811C10 5LACC-11 Auditing: Its Skills
** 5811C11 5LACC-12 The Skill of an Auditor, Part I
** 5811C12 5LACC-13 The Skill of an Auditor, Part ll
5811C13 5LACC-14 The Attitude of an Auditor
5811C14 5LACC-15 What an Auditor is Supposed to Do with an
Engram
** 5811C17 5LACC-16 The Effect of the Environment on an Engram
5811C18 5LACC-17 How to Audit an Engram, Use of an E-Meter
5811C ... 5LACC-18 How to Start and Run a Session
5811C ... 5LACC-19 Attitude and Approach to Auditing
5811C ... 5LACC-20 Summary, "Seeing the Monster"
5811C ... 5LACC-21 Final Lecture
All 5th London ACC lectures are listed above for convenience. They are
also listed on the following pages in date order sequence.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 25 OCTOBER 1958
1 ea staff member
Field Offices (info)
HCO D.C.
ABBREVIATIONS
Since Director of Processing and Director of Procurement have same
abbreviation (D of P or Dir of Pro) use:
D of P for Director of Processing and
Dir of Procu for Director of Procurement.
Best,
LRH:rs.rd L. RON HUBBARD
[Some copies of the above HCO B were dated 5 October 1958.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 27 OCTOBER 1958
1 ea. stf member
Field Offices
Washington
HOW TO READ PROFILES ON OCA: COMPARING
CURRENT WEEK PROFILE WITH WK BEFORE
Drop on Critical-havingness drop.
Whole line (or majority of points) drops-ARC breaks with auditor.
Line doesn't change (same as before)-p.t. problem not touched by
auditor.
Rough auditing-reduction of havingness.
Drop in Responsibility from former week-Auditor evaluation.
Drop in Composed-loss of auditor. Poor CCH 0 in Find the Auditor.
Drop in Comm Level-double acknowledgement by auditor, putting pc off
before finished.
Drop in Appreciative-lowered reality level.
Nervous is toughest point to raise on a graph. It is done by finding
the auditor. This is a primary point to watch in low profiles. Did preclear
find auditor. CCH 3 and CCH 4 are the indicated processes for these low
ones. They were designed to find the auditor.
LRH:rs.rd L. RON HUBBARD
P.A.B. No. 147
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
l November 1958
COMMUNICATION COURSE
I want to welcome you to the Communication Course. It seems that a
Communication Course is necessary as the first step to an auditor. And if
an auditor doesn't successfully pass the Communication Course, then to the
end of any curve he has as an auditor, there will be something wrong with
his auditing.
It is very odd that one of the highest levels of indoctrination, Tone
40 on an Object, is most often unsuccessfully approached by a student at
the HPA or HCA level when he has flunked the one I am going to talk about
right now, which is a newcomer's first look inside the Academy at
communication. And that is Dear Alice, part A.
It would have amused you the other day to have found a former Director
of Training of an organization being sent back by the HCO Board of Review
coach in his coaching to Dear Alice so that he could get good enough to
pass Tone 40 on an Object. But it was absolutely necessary that this
happen, because he had for some reason or another, being an old-timer and
having been in it for a long time, never hit Dear Alice. It had been
omitted from his training. In spite of all the auditing he had done and all
the experience he had had, at the end of this time we find him sitting up
in the coaching room, good as gold, perfectly comprehensible, doing Dear
Alice, part A-a man who has probably audited two or three thousand hours'
worth. But everywhere he had difficulty with a preclear, that difficulty
stemmed from an inability to do Dear Alice, part A, which is in effect to
deliver an auditing command in a unit of time as a completed cycle of
action-he delivered an auditing command.
Well now you have to get up to step 2 and even step 3 before you can
call it a full cycle of action. But as far as the auditor is concerned in
Dear Alice, part A, only, his job is done when he has delivered an auditing
command to a preclear. He didn't deliver it over the hills and far away or
to the window; he delivered it to a being and he delivered it from where he
was to where the preclear was-and it's so easy.
Anyone to whom this was described briefly, insufficiently, out in the
street would, flunking it at the same time, tell you, "Of course I can
communicate to people! Well, yes! There's nothing to it. I'm a salesman,
you know. I run the Atomic Energy Omission. I'm a big man! Of course I
communicate to anyone." We look in that man's vicinity and nobody's heard
anything he's said since the days of Noah's Ark. He never said it to
anybody in the first place. He sort of throws things out, you know, and he
just hopes they land. Well, that's what passes for communication, and it
isn't by a long ways-he throws out a statement of some sort or another and
he thinks he's communicating with somebody.
It's a great oddity, but I must confess to you at this moment that the
third dynamic is simply an agreement. It is an agreement which people have
agreed to and
Copyright �1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
therefore it has an existence and we certainly cannot live in this world
without it, but it's a violation of the communication formula. A violation
of it. The only thing that you can talk to in the final analysis is a
living being, and all third dynamics are composed of individual dynamics.
And you can summate them and you can say this is a third dynamic, and that
is the agreement on which we go, and it is quite factual and they are quite
actual unless we stress them with the communication formula-so that you
don't talk to all preclears, you talk to a preclear.
There was a fellow by the name of Franklin Delano Roosevelt that never
talked to the nation-he never talked to the nation-he talked to an
individual citizen. And therefore he communicated.
There was another fellow who spoke the most beautiful English I have
ever heard, almost incomprehensibly parsed. Perfect. Would have passed any
Oxford English Professor's most critical look, and that was Herbert Hoover.
And I don't think Herbert Hoover ever said hello to a dog. I don't think in
his whole life he ever said anything to anybody anywhere. And when this man
uttered pronunciamentos they pronounced nothing to anybody anywhere. And
therefore he couldn't lead a nation out of a depression. He couldn't lead
anything for an excellent reason. He had no concept in the final analysis
of talking to an individual, of getting his communication to land right
there.
Now this is a touchy point that I open up. You say, "Well, how about
you, Ron? You talk to an awful lot of people." Well, that's the whole
secret of Scientology-I don't talk to an awful lot of people-I talk to you.
I haven't any concept of a large multitude that reads my books or listens
to my lectures. I can get a multiple concept of talking to a great many at
the same time by talking to every one of them individually. Therefore I
perhaps add a little conceit to the line, but I do communicate.
Therefore someone wanting to know how to speak to a crowd would first
begin with Dear Alice, part A. So it is very, very far from an unimportant
step. It is not just the entrance step that you have to get through to get
your Communication Course over so you can really learn something. That is
not what it is. It is the first door that opens and that door opens when it
opens, and it opens when you can communicate a statement from you to a
person. We won't worry about a preclear, because really the person in dummy
auditing who is sitting there as preclear is really a coach, you know. But
you've got to get something across from you to that person. And it has to
be from you to that person-it has to be a communication. And when you can
do that, well, you're all set.
I once told somebody that if he had a very difficult student-not you-
but if he had a very very difficult student, the thing to do with this
difficult student would be to put him through seven weeks of dummy auditing
and then teach him in the last week to remedy havingness and turn him loose
with a certificate and it would be a safe investment. We would be perfectly
safe in doing that. But to give him one week when he needed two or three on
dummy auditing and then try to cram him full of data and hope that the
processes would carry him through somehow didn't make an auditor, it made a
liability-both to himself and to preclears.
So this first step is not just an easy one-it is the toughest step
you'll perform in Scientology and that's why it's right at the beginning.
It's to say something to somebody with the full confidence that they will
receive it. And that's quite a trick.
All right. How exactly is this done? We give a person a book. The book
is Alice in Wonderland. Why Alice in Wonderland? Well, that's just because
it is. No further significance. We give him this book and he is supposed to
find any sentence in that book that he cares to find. (These people who
just want to read the book consecutively
to the preclear are not doing dummy auditing. They again are not in
communication with the preclear.) He is supposed to find a line. Now he
doesn't put "Alice said" or "The Queen said" or something like that on the
line. He just puts the statement itself, you see. "Why do they run so
fast?" Well the book says, " 'Why do they run so fast?' the Queen asked."
Well we don't use "the Queen asked." We just say, "Why do they run so
fast?"
All right, he picks that up out of the book. Why out of a book? Why not
out of his head? Oh, remember. Remember something-in using the English
language, you are not using your own ideas, you did not invent the words.
You only helped invent the words that compose the English language. You are
already using somebody else's ideas. Now there is nothing wrong with your
composing these into new ideas of your own, but remember you are already
using somebody else's ideas when you're speaking English.
All right. Now let's get it a little bit further. We are given a set
pat process. Oh I know I dreamed it up, I found it one way or the other,
but an awful lot of auditors worked with this. It's had a lot of looking
at, and it's become phrased in a certain way, and that certain way might
very well be taken by you out of the textbook and given to the preclear,
and it won't ever work if you do. "Do fishes swim?" is not a therapeutic
procedure-it's not. The repetition of it can be very good for an auditor,
but it's not a therapeutic procedure. But the statement "Do fishes swim?"
is not yours really, at the beginning, is it? You got it from the
instructor or off of a book, and then you used it. Well when does it become
yours? Well, any idea is yours that you make yours. We won't go along with
dialectic materialism and say that no ideas are new, because that's not
true. There can be new ideas. But if you get an idea from someone else, it
is not still their idea. It's your idea. There is nothing wrong with mis-
owning ideas, there's no mass in them to get you confused.
You take an idea out of a book, it becomes your idea, and then as your
idea you relay it to the preclear. And that is all there is to it. It is
coached this way. It is not from the book to the preclear. It is from the
book to the auditor, and then the auditor, making it his own idea,
expresses that idea to the preclear in such a way that it arrives at the
preclear. So it's from the auditor to the preclear. But we give him the
book as the third via because most of the material he is going to handle in
communication is from a source outside himself. You've just got to get used
to the idea that there is nothing wrong with using another person's ideas.
I always know what someone's state of learning is in Scientology when
they speak of Scientology as "your" ideas. They say, "I've been reading
your ideas." I know at once this person can't communicate. It's a great
oddity. It's quite wonderful. Because they reveal at once that they cannot
take this first basic step of taking an idea and then communicating it to
someone else. They are standing back looking at the world in some large
sense and they are not any part of it, because they can't own any of the
world's ideas. If they can't own any of the world's ideas, then they won't
own any of the world, because the easiest thing to own is an idea. No mass
to impede it.
So, we coach just exactly in this way. We want the person to find a
phrase in Alice in Wonderland and then, taking that as his own idea,
communicate it directly to the preclear and he can say it over and over,
the same phrase if he wishes, in any way he wishes to say it, until the
preclear (who is really a coach) tells him that he thinks it has arrived.
Now sometimes the preclear, the first day, feels just a little bit
strange about these communication lines, too, and sometimes has his entire
criticism based upon the erudition, the pronunciation, the way the auditor
holds his little finger while he announces the phrase-this has nothing to
do with it. It is the intention that
communicates, not the words. And when you have the intention to communicate
to the preclear, and that intention goes across, it will arrive. If you
broadcast that intention, no matter if you're saying it in Chinese, if
you're a Scientologist, it will arrive.
One of the steps of the much higher indoctrination level, Tone 40 8-C,
consists entirely and completely of saying things in funny voice tones
while one is communicating an intention-using very odd voice tones; well,
this is not part of Dear Alice. The voice tones are unimportant;
pronunciation is unimportant. It's whether or not the person could take
that idea out of that book, own it, and then communicate it. And the
intention must communicate. And it must be communicated in one unit of
time. That is to say, it isn't repeated from the last time it was repeated.
It is new, fresh, communicated in present time. The fifty-fifth command of
"Do fishes swim?" is the fifty-fifth, not the first repeated. So we have
one unit of time, one command, and the intention. And when we have those
things relayed across, then he can find another phrase and communicate
that. And that is the way we do that, and I hope you find it helps
communication.
L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 NOVEMBER 1958
FOR WIDE PUBLICATION
AMERICAN COLLEGE OF PERSONNEL EFFICIENCY,
DUBLIN
Having paid B. Green of Dublin the final owing item in the American
College of Personnel Efficiency, Dublin, this establishment and its
personnel cease to be in any way connected with the Admin or info lines of
HASI London, Founding Church D.C., or HCOs.
This entire establishment reverts to status of field auditor.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH: ph jh
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
5811C03 5LACC-6 The Detection of Engrams
5811C04 5LACC-7 The Detection of Engrams with an E-Meter
581 1 C05 5LACC-8 Detection of Engrams l l l, " Finding Truth
with an
Electronic Gimmick"
5811C06 5LACC-9 Difficulties Encountered in Search for Engrams
** 5811C07 5LACC-10 Detection of Circuits and Machinery
** 5811C10 5LACC-11 Auditing: Its Skills
** 5811C11 5LACC-12 The Skill of an Auditor, Part I
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
1 ea stf member hat
Dir Procu hat HCO BULLETIN OF 7 NOVEMBER 1958
Assoc Sec hat
Accounts London hat
Treasurer
Field Offices info
Washington HCO
HPA COURSES FOR STAFF
Any PERMANENT staff member may enroll in the week-end HPA Course on the
following terms:
�10 down payment. 1070 deducted from salary until balance is paid.
Staff member to remain with organization until amount is paid in full-or
whole remaining balance becomes due and payable at once on departure from
staff.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mp.rd Executive
Director
[The text of HCO B 27 October 1958, HPA Courses for Staff, was the same as
the above, except that it did not have the word, "PERMANENT" in the first
paragraph.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 NOVEMBER 1958
1 ea staff member
Field Offices
Washington
ACC SCHEDULE
21st ACC USA
Course starts Monday Jan 5th, 1959 Course ends Saturday Feb 1 4th, 1959
6th London ACC UK
Course starts Monday May 4th, 1959 Course ends Saturday June 13th, 1959
1st Melbourne ACC Australia
Course starts Monday Sept 7th, 1959 Course ends Saturday Oct 17th, 1959
All above ACCs will be conducted by L. Ron Hubbard personally and
instructed by Nibs Hubbard, Jan Halpern and Dick Halpern.
LRH:mp L. RON
HUBBARD
** 5811C12 5LACC-13 The Skill of an Auditor, Part ll
5811C13 5LACC-14 The Attitude of an Auditor
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 NOVEMBER 1958
1 each Staff Member
Field Offices
Washington
TRAINING INSTRUCTORS, HCO SEC
TR 9 (b) and TR 9 (c)
HCO was asked for a TR number for "Handling ARC Breaks and Opening and
Closing a Session".
TR 16 is assigned to "Handling ARC Breaks". Below are TR 9 (b) and TR 9
(c) as contained in the unpublished Student Manual.
Number: Training 9 (b)
Name: Starting the Session
Command: No formalized command except that auditor must make sure that the
pc is cognizant of the fact that a session has started.
Position: Auditor and pc seated a comfortable distance apart.
Purpose: To make known the beginning of a session so that no mistake as
to its beginning is made. To differentiate between an assist
(erasing a surface difficulty) and formalized auditing. To let both
auditor and pc know that a session has started.
Training Stress: To bring about the purpose of this rudiment. To begin
sessions, not just let them happen an-l when pc goes out of session
to re-establish and start the session again. To demonstrate that if
a pc doesn't realize that a session has started, he doesn't get
audited and change consequently does not take place.
History: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London, England, in 1955.
Number: Training 9 (c)
Name: Ending the Session
Commands: A gradient scale of two-way communication to "End of Session"
first giving the pc adequate warning that the session is going to
end shortly.
Position: Auditor and pc seated a comfortable distance apart.
Purpose: To make known the end of a session and prevent pc from being
either stuck in a session or self-auditing. To end the cycle of
action of being audited.
Training Stress: To teach the student the importance of ending the session,
of completing the cycle of auditing to the degree that the pc is
cognizant of this. To illustrate that pc will be left stuck on the
time track if this isn't done or done too abruptly. To do this
gradiently, warning the pc beforehand that it is going to end. To
teach auditor not to end session where pc has somatic, dope-off or
any restimulation brought about by use of a technique.
History: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard as parts of the Rudiments of
Auditing in London, England, in 1955.
LRH:mp.rd L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 17 NOVEMBER 1958
Full Distribution
CLEAR BRACELETS
No clear bracelets will be issued until person has been tested for
engrams as per E-Meter techniques of 5th London ACC which will be made
available shortly.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:mp.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 25 NOVEMBER 1958
Full Distribution
STEP 6
All persons who were run on Step 6 before they had help and engrams
flat must be run in such a way as to knock out the auditing.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:rt.rd
LRH TAPE LECTURES
London, England
14-18 November 1958
5811C14 5LACC-15 What an Auditor is Supposed to Do with an
Engram
** 5811C17 5LACC-16 The Effect of the Environment on an Engram
5811C18 5LACC-17 How to Audit an Engram, Use of an E-Meter
5811C ... 5LACC-18 How to Start and Run a Session
5811C ... 5LACC-19 Attitude and Approach to Auditing
5811C ... 5LACC-20 Summary, "Seeing the Monster"
5811C ... 5LACC-21 Final Lecture
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO TECHNICAL POLICY LETTER OF 25 NOVEMBER 1958
ACADEMY TRAINING BULLETIN
All Area
Offices
TECHNIQUES TO BE USED ON HGC PRECLEARS
Effective Dec. 1, 1958 in all Area Offices
The following techniques are the only techniques to be used on HGC
preclears, effective Dec. 1, and continuing. These produce clears in the
hands of most auditors.
Deviations by Director of Processing or staff auditors are violations
of the Code of a Scientologist under No. 2 and Auditor's Code under No. 3.
Where needed:
CCH 1
CCH 2
CCH 3
CCH 4
On all other Pcs:
1. Rudiments (not CCH 0) Establish: Auditor, pc, room, session to
start.
2. Start-Change-Stop on a person or object.
3. Factual Havingness.
4. What can you confront? (Repetitive Command)
5. You make a mock-up for which you can be wholly responsible.
6. General Help. Help on the Rock.
7. Step 6 of Clear Procedure.
Exception: Only where staff auditor has been trained in an ACC given to
running engrams only (1st such ACC was 5th London October-November 1958)
may the staff auditor run engrams or use CCH 0. Early Dianetic auditors are
not, repeat not, included in this exception. It is a matter of judgment
here that in event of question about engram running the auditors not
specially trained in 1958 or later to do so will make more clears by the
above than by "running engrams". The running of engrams by Scientology,
rather than Dianetics, is splendid and speeds clearing but only where
specially trained. There is too much new data about it for assimilation
short of an engram running ACC. 20th ACC graduates are not qualified to run
engrams.
LRH:-.rd L. RON HUBBARD
CERTAINTY
Vol. 5, No. 22 [1958, ca. late November]
The Official Publication of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
in the
British Isles
Violence
L. Ron Hubbard
Man's answer in his more barbaric stage was always VIOLENCE.
If you weren't obeyed, use VIOLENCE!
If you were balked, use VIOLENCE!
If they wouldn't bow or scrape or wouldn't lick the boots, then
VIOLENCE was the answer, fit for one and all and, in particular, YOU.
But where did all this violence get Man? Where did rows of trenches men
for four years filled with uncounted dead get Man? Just where the A-bomb
and the H-bomb and the Z-bomb will get him.
Back to barbarianism ! Let's blow it all up ! Let's splatter Earth and
all her pleasant ways to atoms and to shreds. VIOLENCE! Ah, that's the
answer, isn't it? The very thing to do to little kids. Blow them up! That
stops their weeping. Kill them all. They only die but once. But do they? Do
they now?
What a foul trick fate waits to play upon the Men of Violence. They
blow it all up. They spatter their homes and kids and fishing poles from
here to Kingdom Come. They blow it all up and blow themselves out of their
heads.
And they aren't dead ! They're still alive and only the body is dead
and nothing is solved. And, oh my, isn't it messed up !
No priest was there, no Gabriel with a cornet solo to play them into
Pearly Gates. Not even the wasted coals of hell exist to greet them.
They blasted everything in sight and the other men blew back and they
all blew out of their silly heads and charred derbies and caps and homburgs
and what did they see?
They saw a world they'd ruined all out of political cause and glee.
They saw bodies where their kids had been and bones where their hat had
been and embers where their lives had been. And all nicely radioactive now.
And nothing with which to rebuild the world. Nothing. No order. Just chaos.
No bodies. Just fish. No grass, just radiation.
A planet as bald as a burned egg. And that's their win. And they've
earned the right to build it back with nothing to work with and no people
to talk to and no fishing pole, no books, no blueprint.
The joke's on them. They did live. They did come back. There wasn't
either death or heaven and it's all to do again.
Too bad the rest of us are being asked to come along too. Otherwise it
would be such a good cruel joke on these MEN OF VIOLENCE.
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
[pic]
Issue 85 [1958, ca. late November]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
The Theory of Training
in Scientology
L. Ron Hubbard
The third dynamic called education, when engaged upon the installation
of false or imagined premises, can be quite aberrative. The only right we
have to train in Scientology is that we are training people in things which
they already know. The principles and axioms of Scientology are
considerations which have been agreed upon and out of which stem this
universe and livingness. To train a person in these trains him only to
handle this universe and livingness, therefore Scientology training is
nonaberrative. On the contrary, thorough training in Scientology is in
itself, if a slow one, a road to Clear.
The very fact that we are training people in things which they already
know brings us to a liability, however. As we train we restimulate
considerations already undertaken in some distant past by the student. As
many of these were assumed to remedy ills and evils he imagined he had (the
restimulation of earlier postulates he has made-which are the postulates
which become the axioms and other materials in Scientology), the student
may experience somatics and confusions which he would not experience in
ordinary scholastic pursuits. Even though this is all for the better a
student sometimes conceives himself to be under duress, either in student
auditing sessions or from an instructor, which is not actually present.
There are three ways in which this single liability is overcome.
First, we train a student thoroughly until the somatic or confusion is
discharged. We do not give up training in something simply because he finds
it confusing or painful. Just as in an auditing session we would continue
to run the process to discharge the somatic which the same process turned
on, so in training we continue to train in the area which has been
restimulated.
Second, we train vigorously and emphatically so that there will be no
confusion in the student's mind as to the source of the training, and
Third, we consider a student always as an auditor, never as a preclear.
We are not at all interested in the student as a case. We are interested in
the student only as a Scientologist. The moment he joins a course of
training, he is considered from that moment on an auditor. When he is being
audited he is, of course, for that time a preclear, but only by assignment.
That he does experience case gains is entirely incidental to training. It
is a maxim of Scientology instructors that if a mirror held to a
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
student's lips shows the mist of breath, the student is in shape to audit a
preclear. There is no compromise with this state of mind. Only an
instructor who intended actual harm to students would use sympathy for a
student concerning his case. Therefore, Scientology Academies are looked
upon as "tough schools." Just the fact of living through a course of
training merits the designation Scientologist.
The goal of training from the viewpoint of the Director of Training of
the Academy is to bring the student up to a level where he could be safely
entrusted with a Hubbard Guidance Center preclear. This does not mean that
the student will be so entrusted, but before the Director of Training and
the Examiner and the Board of Review pass the student as graduated, they
have to be sure to their own complete satisfaction that they would have no
qualm entrusting a difficult case to this student. This training goal
insures an orientation point and standard of excellence. The instructors,
the Director of Training, the Examiner and the HCO Board of Review know
what I demand of a staff auditor.
Thoroughness of training is achieved on a gradient scale. It might
frighten a student to look across the training chart and realize what he
must be able to perform, but it should not if he realizes that he is
climbing a stairway of rather easy steps. The steps are each one of them
easy and their gradient has been planned and experienced carefully.
Therefore, no student is ever passed to the next step of these many steps
before the instructor is entirely certain that he has mastered the last
step.
For example, on this gradient scale a student who has thoroughly
learned Dummy Auditing Step A ("Dear Alice"), will have very little trouble
graduating up to the top of the step, "Tone 40 on an Object." While it
would be a mistake to demand in Dummy Auditing Step A, the excellence
necessary to pass "Tone 40 on an Object," it is nevertheless true that
those people who had difficulty with "Tone 40 on an Object" need a review
of Dummy Auditing Step A.
Therefore, an instructor is always niggardly with his signature at the
end of each step. To permit a student to climb too swiftly would be to
condemn him to a confusion in some later area of training.
Training in Scientology contains no thought for explaining to some
student how Scientology fits into some other frame of reference. By
straightly teaching him Scientology he will come at last to see that it
does not fit into any other frame of reference but other things fit into
its frame of reference.
A great many things in Scientology have been said before. Indeed,
everything in Scientology has been directly and actively postulated by the
person being trained at some point in the past. It would be odd indeed if
these points then did not echo or harmonic or crop up in other teachings
elsewhere. It should be understood by the student that all things proceed
from postulates and that these postulates go from simplicities to
complexities. Therefore, it would be surprising if Tibetan Lamaism did not
contain some of the data of Scientology. By working entirely with the data
which is simplest and earliest one does the odd thing with Scientology of
taking a new, freshly born science and undercutting any older philosophy.
If Scientology is not found to do this in some field of human experience
then it simply means we will have to do some more studying. But before we
in the development of Scientology do more studying we should be very sure
that we know enough Scientology to apply it to this apparently random
field.
Scientology contains several logics which are very important to
training. These are actually the logics of education. Calling your
attention to one of these, it will be seen that the evaluation of the
importance of a datum is often more important than the datum itself. The
datum found in Scientology may also be found in other philosophic
works. But hold on for a moment. Did the other philosophic work give an
evaluation of the importance of the datum or did it give dozens of other
data as having equal rank? This point is mentioned here because it is often
overlooked by students. Scientology, for instance, has some abrupt, sharp
things to say about Time. Indeed, Time could be said to be the single
source of human aberration. The hunger for a number of incidents to occur
simultaneously will in itself cause people to jam their time tracks. These
people, of course, are not aware of the amount of incident and as a result
jam many adventures into present time with a consequent disability of
differentiation.
Now it will be seen that in many philosophies Time is covered
exhaustively. Time is given many definitions. Time is given chapters and
volumes but nowhere in these chapters and volumes does the philosopher
place his finger squarely upon the two or three important data which are
most important about Time. He ranks these data with all of the other data
and so loses them in an ocean of drops of water, all the drops looking the
same as all the other drops. Thus, truth becomes submerged in an ocean of
outflow. Scientology is more parsimonious. It is more incisive, it is more
thoroughly evaluated. The two or three data in Scientology which concern
Time are the data from which all other data about Time flow.
Thus, when a student is taught a datum from Scientology, he is taught
it with the understanding that it will clarify many other later and more
complicated data. Thus, he is taught the simple datum thoroughly. Thus, he
is taught fundamentals far more thoroughly than he believes necessary. The
work in the development of Scientology has been the culling of truth from
an ocean of fact and finding that the truth has a tiny group of data
possessed of the overwhelming power of changing all other facts in this
universe and in livingness.
This is the power of Scientology: that it, by stressing single, simple
truths, eliminates oceans of mere data. Thus in training we concentrate
solidly and continually upon these small truths and we are impatient with
excursions until we have established these fundamentals as fundamentals
with our students.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 26 NOVEMBER 1958
All Staff FCNY and HASI-Calif offices
HCO London
ACCs
The first ACC after the 21st is tentatively scheduled for July 1960.
JULY 1960, in Washington, D.C.
We have new methods engram-running. No staff auditor will be permitted
to run engrams unless he has attended the 5th London ACC or onward. All
others use older, slower, clearing methods.
ACCs in the year and a half will be held in England, Australia and
Africa. The 21st ACC in the USA is the last chance to hear about short
clearing by the new engram running for one and a half years.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: md.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
LONDON
HCO BULLETIN OF 1 DECEMBER 1958
FULL DISTRIBUTION
PERMITTED TO AUDIT ENGRAMS BY SCIENTOLOGY PROCESSES ARE:
Cornelia Alford George Edwards Herbie Parkhouse Peter Davies
Jessie Gray Madge Stevens Nicol Paterson Carl Jensen
Marianne Christie Ray Thacker Noel West Lance Harrison
Pam Kemp Viviane Madsen John Fudge JimPaterson
Jean Gill Paul Meyer Jim Pembry Charis Mostart
James Dimmock Marcus Tooley Jack Campbell Sylvia Ferree
Eve Harrison James Madsen Leon Bosworth Cyril Vosper
Alan Burton Alix Stansfield Bill Dicks Fred Postowka
Jenny Parkhouse Lensworth Small Harry Dorfman Cyril Sweetland
Joe Tole Joe Cromie Quentin Kelly Barry Fairburn
The remaining enrollees of the 5th London ACC are invited to use HCO
Bulletin of Nov 25, 1958 (Effective Dec 1, 1958) allowable to HGC auditors
until they have had further training in the running of engrams or had their
own cases straightened.
The processes outlined in the above mentioned bulletin are:
Where needed:
CCH 1, CCH 2, CCH 3, CCH 4
On all other pcs:
1. Rudiments (not CCH 0) Establish: Auditor, pc, room, session to
start.
2. Start-Change-Stop on a person or object.
3. Factual Havingness.
4. What can you confront? (Repetitive Command)
5. You make a mock-up for which you can be wholly responsible.
6. General Help. Help on the Rock.
7. Step 6 of Clear Procedure.
This bulletin was done by profile gains and IQ gains on pcs audited on
the 5th London ACC and is an arbitrary differentiation and is not
necessarily the class grades of the student.
This bulletin is of interest in that it lists the first ACC graduates
from any ACC who are permitted to run engrams by Scientology processes by
reason of training in an ACC.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mp.rd
P.A.B. No. 149
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 December 1958
DUMMY AUDITING
Step Two: Acknowledgment
Compiled from the Research Material and Taped Lectures of L. Ron Hubbard
Dummy Auditing, Step Two, Acknowledgment, is the second part of the
communication cycle. Now the actual fact is when you have gotten a thought
over to a preclear it is customary to prove it. The whole stress of
acknowledgment is entirely and completely upon making sure that the
preclear receives the auditor's acknowledgment. That is the entire stress.
Now why all this stress on acknowledgment? Well, acknowledgment is a
control factor-I'll just let you in on a secret right here at the
beginning. If you acknowledge a preclear well, you will have the preclear
under much better control. Now, why? The formula of control is Start,
Change and Stop. And that's just it-an acknowledgment is Stop. If you said
to him "Keep going" or "Keep talking," you would not be acknowledging him.
The perfect acknowledgment communicates only this: I have heard your
communication. That's all there is to it-I have heard what you said. It
signalizes that the preclear's (or person's, since Scientology applies to
life, not just to an auditing room) communication to you has been received.
But when you use it as an auditor you use it also as a control factor. And
it says this: Your communication has been received-and that is all there is
to it, and that is the end of that cycle of action, thank you. That's what
it says, and you have to put that whole intention into a "Yes" or an "Okay"
or anything else you use. It isn't the word, it's the intention that ends
it. Your communication has been received and I have now decided to stop
that cycle of communication and your communication is therefore under my
control. Those things which you stop, very crudely, are things which you
control. You have to be able to stop things if you control them. If you
cannot control a preclear's communication line you can't control the
preclear.
I'll give you an example of this. Let's say we're auditing Mrs.
Gotrocks, the wife of the executive manager of Fleabite Dustpowder or
something, and she is bored (the only thing wrong with her), and she's
crazy (that's the only other thing wrong with her), and she never had
anything to do, and she's just been Lying around, and she has ailments. She
comes into the auditing room and she starts to talk to you. She says, "Oh,
I've been to this specialist and that specialist and it cost this much
money and that much money and I've been here and I've been there and what's
really wrong with me and what you really should take up is so and so rah
rah rah ...." It's none of your business. The longer you let such a person
talk, the less havingness they have. You can watch them go straight down
the ARC tone scale if you keep on letting them talk. Obsessive
communication-obsessive outflow. And the first major use that you will
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
make of this, the first time you really understand what this acknowledgment
is all about, is when somebody starts this on you and starts talking,
talking, talking, talking, and you want to get a session started, and you
get the intention real good and you say to them, "Good." And they stop
talking. Your intention was such that they knew that you had received their
communication. And if you can do this very well, if you can get that
acknowledgment just right and if it does exactly what it is supposed to do,
very often the person will look at you fixedly and say, "You know, I don't
think anybody has ever heard me before."
Why is this person talking obsessively? They are trying to make up in
quantity what they lack in audience. There's nobody listening to them. They
are not talking to anyone. And you all of a sudden come up with an
acknowledgment and say, "Hey! I heard you. I heard that. You have
communicated to me, and that's it, now." And they say, "Wow. I don't think
I've ever talked to anybody before." It's quite amazing. I have seen an
auditor on an obsessive outflow case get down in front of the preclear, fix
him with an eye, move his finger back and forth just in front of the
preclear's nose and say, "Good; I heard that," and have the preclear all of
a sudden say, "Ooooh. Geeeeee. You are there, aren't you!" So a good
acknowledgment can actually wind up the entire goal of the process and find
the auditor-that's how important it is.
Now, that is a specialized use, stopping a compulsive outflow. Its
general use is putting a period to the communication cycle. It ends the
moment of time in which you gave the command you learned how to give, we
hope, in Dear Alice, part A. You said something, the preclear heard it, and
we understood then that the preclear had heard it, and we said, "Good." Now
the exact way Dear Alice, part B (which is Dummy Auditing, Step Two), is
done is this. The coach-or a person acting as a preclear-takes Alice in
Wonderland and reads random phrases out of it. And, reading the phrase in
any old way, we don't care how (we're not disciplining the preclear, you
know; we never do that, we merely control them within an inch of their
lives), in this particular case this person says something out of Alice in
Wonderland and the auditor has to say, "Good," "Fine," "Okay," "I heard
that," anything-in such a way as actually to convince the person who is
sitting there acting as the preclear that he has heard it.
Now there is a specific way to do this. That is to intend that the
communication cycle ends at that point and to end it there. Anything that
you do to make that come about is, of course, legitimate, unless it utterly
destroys ARC. But it finishes a cycle of communication. So what could the
auditor in this case do? You see, there sits the auditor, no book; there
sits the preclear with a book; and the preclear is reading, "And the Mad
Hatter dipped his watch into the teapot," and the auditor says, "Good." But
that ends that, you see. Now, in view of the fact that the preclear is
reading a continued story which goes on sentence after sentence after
sentence, the auditor will have a tendency to treat this as "in passing,"
and that is not an acknowledgment. The auditor could say, "Well, read some
more." That's not an acknowledgment-it didn't stop it, did it? "Continue,
go ahead"-no, that's not an acknowledgment at all. An acknowledgment says,
"Stop"-"Whoa"-"Air brakes"-"Period"-"End"-"Heard you"-"You've communicated"-
"That's the end of that moment of time"-"Final cycle"-"That's it"-"You've
had it." You get that?
So the auditor has to say "Good," "Fine," "Okay," in such a way as to
receive the communication in the preclear's eyes. The preclear has to know
that the auditor has received the communication, and that's the only point
on which they are coached- at first.
Then we could start to bear down and say, as an instructor, "Well, did
you acknowledge that preclear's communication? Did you?" And the auditor
says, "Well, uhh...." "Did you do a perfect acknowledgment?" "Well-
certainly." And the answer to that would be "No." The preclear is still
reading, still got the book in
his hands, still going on with it, still sitting in the chair, and he's
still not in this universe.
What is this all about? What are we actually trying to do? Well, we're
not trying to reach the ultimate in an acknowledgment because that would be
the end of the universe. If somebody could say "Yes," "Good," or "Okay"
with enough intention behind it, all communications of this universe from
the moment of its beginning would then be acknowledged, totally. (Except
that this would violate the communication formula because they weren't all
addressed to him, although lots of people think they were.) But what does
the auditor actually feel called upon to do? Well, he feels called upon to
put a period to that cycle of communication. It actually started, you see,
with the auditor's phrase to the preclear, then the preclear signified with
some kind of wince or grunt or something that it had been heard, and then
the auditor says, "Well, that's the end of that. Good. Fine. That finished
that." You see?
But an acknowledgment ends the cycle of the communication which you
read about in Dianetics 1955, and that is the Bill-Joe cycle. "Good," says
the auditor. This is fantastic. If you got good enough at this, a traffic
cop would drive up and say something to you and you would acknowledge the
fact that he had spoken and he would simply get back on his bike or go back
to the station house and turn in his badge and retire. You see, that would
be the end of that. That would be it. As a matter of fact, it actually
staggers people to have an acknowledgment come to them-it staggers them,
really to get it through. People who are having a hard time, particularly.
It's a good thing, and it's very therapeutic for a person to know that he
has been acknowledged. I know that you will be around in the local stores,
maybe stopping a pedestrian on the street and suddenly looking at him and
saying, "Good"-acknowledging him. And you will have some fantastic things
occur if you do. An acknowledgment is a very, very powerful sixteen-inch
gun in the communication formula; and you shouldn't use it sparingly, you
should use it to end cycles of communication. I hope you learn to do that
very, very well.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 DECEMBER 1958
HOW TO RUN AN ENGRAM
Brief Summary for HGC Use
First-only graduates of ACCs including the 5th London October 1958, and
after are qualified to run engrams by Scientology processes. This does not
include Dianetic processing of engrams which can be done by anyone but is
not allowed in HGCs. Reason: Scientology processing of engrams is too
strong for most untrained personnel and better results are obtained by HGC
wholly repetitive processes. Stable Data: The HGC has the responsibility of
using only the processes which obtain the highest results. A Director of
Processing must bring about only the use of the best processes.
For wholly repetitive command clearing processes, see other bulletins.
Engram running with Scientology processes in unschooled hands does not
bring about bettered cases by actual test. This is evidently due to the
roughness of the auditing and failures to handle ARC breaks. ACC trained
personnel therefore, are the only ones qualified or permitted to run
engrams in an HGC.
Locating the Engram
Finding the engram necessary to resolve the case is done by an E-Meter
and finger snaps. The E-Meter is the final check. If an E-Meter is stuck on
the pc or Stage Four (rises, sticks, falls in a repetitive cycle and reacts
on nothing else) CCH processes may be used or preferably, the 3 commands of
Factual Havingness (8 of vanish, 2 of continue, to one of have).
The experience necessary to resolve the case is the engram asked for.
It is run back in time and located exactly in time. The falls of the needle
are the equivalent of a "yes" answer to the auditor's question. Only the
time is isolated, not the content. The time may turn out to be a span of
years. The incident may be even a century in length.
In a rough case some current lifetime "lock" may be the incident. In a
very rough (unreality) case, the "engram" necessary to resolve the case may
be the moment the pc walked into the room.
In a majority of cases however the "engram necessary to resolve the
case" is a past death, complete with its accompanying overt act. Its place
in time is the concern of the auditor. Questions such as "Greater than five
hundred years?" "Less than five hundred years?" narrow the time down
precisely. Several incidents may be located in passing.
Run that incident which has the steepest fall. Don't run the earliest
necessarily. In case of doubt as to which of two falls most pick a later
incident (closer to p.t.) as it will actually be easier for the pc to
confront it.
With this incident selected, don't then change it or let the pc change
it. Don't start to run one incident and then change to another ever. What
you pick, flatten. To change is to pretty well lose the whole case. We
aren't interested here in the significance of what running it does for the
case.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :gn.cden
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 7 DECEMBER 1958
TRAINING DRILL CHANGE
TR 5N will now replace TR 5 as a Comm Course drill and will occupy the
5th day of the Comm Course.
TR 5N is ARC Break handling.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:gn.rd
P.A.B. No. 150
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 December 1958
DUMMY AUDITING
Step Three: Duplication
Compiled from the Research Material and Taped Lectures of L. Ron Hubbard
This interesting, interesting dummy auditing step has a villainous and
vicious goal. It makes somebody duplicate. 'Way back in 1950 we found out
that auditors, in order to be interesting, would vary their pattern; and
every time the pattern was varied, every time the auditing command changed,
the preclear received a little jolt. There was an upset because of it. A
long time ago we would have considered it fairly legitimate for an auditor,
using the auditing command "Do fishes swim," to say, "By the way, do finny
creatures wiggle in the water?"-and next time to say, "Say! does the funny
tribe bathe?"-and the next time to say, "What brands of fishes are there
that progress from point A to point B in liquid habitats?" That possibly
would have been legitimate then, but we don't do that today. We do a
horrible thing. The auditor says, "Do fishes swim?" And, just to vary it,
he then says, "Do fishes swim?" And, just for good wild variation, he then
says, "Do fishes swim?"
This is where we learn why we were so insistent on one command in one
moment of time back in Dear Alice, part A, because we don't repeat the
first "Do fishes swim" another thousand times. No auditing command should
ever depend for any of its meaning on any other auditing command ever
uttered. Each one exists, theoretically and purely, in its own moment of
time and is uttered itself in present time with its own intention.
Now this is quite important. Do you know that the basic auditing
process of CCH does not work unless each command is in a separate unit of
time? If you run it this way, "Give me your hand-thank you; give me your
hand-thank you; give me your hand-thank you," it's not very therapeutic and
nothing happens to the preclear. Why? Well, we've got a machine which is
simply repeating the first "Give me your hand" over and over again. We're
not saying it-there's no intention there. Do you know that if you told
somebody to give you his hand with enough intention behind it his body
would respond without any via through the thetan? The body doesn't obey the
words, the body obeys the intention to extend a hand. Therefore, when you
are asked to express an auditing command with the same words over and over
and over, each time you must express it in present time as itself with its
intention. It isn't just a long duplication of it. Just duplicating
something over and over and over is sometimes so trying that people wonder
how auditors ever arrive at all. Nobody could sit in a chair and say each
time with a new intention, "Do fishes swim," for seventy-five hours. It's
beyond human possibility, according to some people. But the trick is that
if it's always uttered in present time it could be said for a thousand and
seventy-five hours. It's only
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
when it's repeated-only when the first command is repeated over and over
and when no new intention arrives-that it becomes very arduous. Only when
it goes on to a machine does it become almost impossible to do.
Communication is reached by control plus duplication. At first you find
that to make each utterance of the command different in its own unit of
time you use different voice inflections. But as you come up the line on
this you find out that you actually can pattern the same tone and each time
have it entirely new. It would be very, very incorrect to teach this, to
have the auditor each time duplicate his own voice tones as they were the
last time, because that is making an auditing command depend on the last
auditing command. We couldn't care less; and, after a while, you couldn't
care less, either, what voice tone you're uttering, but each intention is
new and fresh. The intention is to ask and get an answer to this question,
"Do fishes swim?" and, each time you utter it, it is uttered newly and in
its own area of time. That's really the only stress there is. One command
per unit of time. Each command separate, and each command containing the
words, quite incidentally, "Do fishes swim?"
Here we learn a great deal about the duplicative factors of
communication. We find out that, in having to duplicate, we think we
actually lose some of the communication at first. It's utterly idiotic-how
could you possibly maintain ARC and therefore, of course, interest, asking
a person over and over again this silly question, "Do fishes swim?" Who
could do this? Well, interest in communication has everything to do with
the intention to be interesting and very little to do with text.
Furthermore, it is not the auditor's job to be interesting. Being
interesting is a part of the communication formula, but to an auditor the
least possible part, as far as the preclear is concerned. He's not there to
interest and intrigue the preclear. Right away, people think they are.
Place two people in chairs facing each other and each one of these two
people feels the compulsion to be interesting to the other. That's not
auditing, that's being interesting, that's being social and so on. So if a
person had any difficulty doing Step Three, Do Fishes Swim, the instructor
would be perfectly in order if he simply told the person to sit in that
chair and told some other student who wasn't doing too well, or just some
other student, to sit in the other chair, and told them just to sit there
and look at each other without saying a thing or being embarrassed or
anything else. Interesting drill, if you think of it. We do have variation,
and therefore interest, in the first and second dummy auditing steps; but
now we reach this one and it is utterly devoid of interest. We're saying
the same thing over and over and over and over. And if a person can't do
this he probably has a compulsion to vary, to alter-is, to be interesting,
and he wouldn't find it easy just to sit in a chair and face another human
being and not say a word and not do a thing but just sit there and look at
the other human being. And if I were coaching someone that had difficulty
in repetition of steps, I would do that for an hour or two that day.
All right. It is absolutely necessary that an auditor be able to
duplicate. But answer me this: Is a person who is saying something in
present time each time really duplicating the last moment of time? He
really isn't, is he? And so this duplication that we do in Scientology
means only the ability apparently to duplicate while being in present time.
The greatest motto of experience and the life we have lived is this: I
won 't ever do that again. This is the one thing your mama wanted you to
promise. If you did nothing else, if you lived a completely sinful life,
why, mama still wanted you to learn by experience; which is to say that
when you did something wrong, or did something, you weren't ever to do it
again. She hoped perhaps you would eat enough candy to make you so sick
that you wouldn't "wolf' candy again; that you would eat enough ice cream
so that ice cream would make you so green that you wouldn't make a pig of
yourself over ice cream again; that you would become so embarrassed and
lose so many friends that you would not do that evil thing again, whatever
it was you did; and thus
learn by experience never to do it again. And this is experience talking.
One thing you must understand-that experience teaches you-is never to do
anything the second time. This doesn't necessarily mean that all experience
is painful, but people who are having a hard time tend to believe that it
is; and when they begin to depend upon experience and stand by this lesson
of never doing it again, they can no longer duplicate. And what do you know-
they can't communicate. Also, their bank jams. All sorts of interesting
things occur. All moments become one moment. One moment becomes all
moments. Identification occurs all over the place. And just the action of
repeating something like "Do fishes swim?" as an auditor, with a full
intention, has a tendency to unjam the time track.
You should know that this is what this step is up against. It is
violating all of that hard-won experience that you have accumulated in the
last seventy-six trillion years-if you believe an E-Meter, you're seventy-
six trillion years old. And all that hard-won experience, all that
wonderful, wonderful lot of mess that you got into, added up completely to
Never do it again. And so you've been taught not to live, which is what
happens when you get experience. And when you can duplicate an auditing
command over and over again, you will find out that auditing does not
become a painful experience. A person who can do this well, by the way,
never gets restimulated. Why should he-he's not in the moment of time in
which the restimulation took place.
There is a more basic step to this particular one, by the way. This is
to pat the wall five times and then distinguish one of the pats from the
rest. An instructor can do that on a student with some profit. Pretty soon
the student can tell all five pats apart, and when the student can tell
them all apart, even though they sounded all the same, he can also
duplicate an auditing command in present time all the way. I've broken
cases with that one.
LRH TAPE LECTURE
Washington, D.C.
16 December 1958
The following "Washington Staff Talk" given by L. Ron Hubbard is
complemented by a further one given 2 February 1959.
** 5812C16 WST-1 PR&R-1: Promotion and Registration
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
D of T HCO BULLETIN OF 16 DECEMBER 1958
Acad Admin
Ext Course Dir
Acad Insts
D of P EXTENSION COURSE CURRICULUM
Processing Admin
HCO Bd of Review
ACC Worldwide Inst
The Extension Course for HCA/HPA is outlined as follows.
Section A-1 tablet
Lessons 1 A to 20A, eight questions each lesson. Dianetics: The Modern
Science of Mental Health, entire book covered in 160 questions.
Section B-1 tablet
Lessons 1B to 20B, eight questions each lesson. Science of Survival,
entire book covered in 160 questions.
Section C-1 tablet
Lessons 1C to 20C, eight questions each lesson. Advanced Procedure and
Axioms, entire book covered in 160 questions.
Section D-1 tablet
Lessons 1D to 20D, eight questions each lesson. Scientology: The
Fundamentals of Thought entire book covered in 160 questions.
The Extension Course for HCS/BScn is outlined as follows:
Section E-1 tablet
Lessons 1E to 20E, eight questions each lesson. The Hubbard
Electrometer and Electropsychometric Auditing, entire subject covered in
160 questions, theory and practice.
Section F-1 tablet
Lessons 1F to 20F, eight questions each lesson. Scientology: 8-8008,
entire book covered in 160 questions.
Section G-1 tablet
Lessons 1G to 20G, eight questions each lesson. The Creation of Human
Ability, entire book covered in 160 questions.
Section H-1 tablet
Lessons 1H to 20H, eight questions each lesson. Various Clear
Procedures from various texts, entire subject covered in 160 questions.
The Extension Course for DScn/HGS is outlined as follows:
Section J-I tablet
Lessons 1J to 20J, eight questions per lesson. All TR Drills, entire
subject covered in 160 questions (text not yet published).
Section K-1 tablet
Lessons 1K to 20K, eight questions per lesson, Track Scouting (text not
yet published). Entire subject covered in 160 questions.
Section L-1 tablet
Lessons 1L to 20L, eight questions per lesson, Scientology
Organizations, entire subject covered in 160 questions.
Section M-1 tablet
Not outlined.
The following activities are responsible for submitting questions to be
made into printed lessons:
Section A - Academy DC
Section B - Academy London
Section C - HCO Bd of Review DC
Section D - HCO Bd of Review London
Section E - HGC Washington DC
Section F - HGC London
Section G - Academy London
Section H - HCO Washington DC
Section J - ACC Worldwide Instructor
Section K - ACC Worldwide Instructor
When you have completed your section, please send the questions
complete to HCO for forwarding to me.
This is the fastest way I know to get the Extension Course completed. I
have only its format and a DMSMH outline at this moment. Would you do this
for me?
HOW TO WRITE AN EXTENSION COURSE SECTION
An Extension Course Section consists of a textbook and a series of
lessons done on a glued-top tablet, one sheet per lesson, eight questions
or exercises per lesson. The questions are consecutively numbered from 1 to
160 with the identifying letter on each number. Example: Section B, third
question, is 3B. The name of the textbook, but not its page numbers, is
carried on every lesson page, not each question.
We only want the questions for the section, not the printed complete
product.
The questions concern only vital definitions needed for a knowledge of
the subject and examples of the use and meaning.
To do a course, use the following:
Make a list of all vital definitions used in the text specified on the
subject. These should number around eighty so pare or expand the list until
it is composed of eighty vital words or phrases or objects.
Use the definition for odd numbered questions.
Demand an explanation, an example, a discovery from real life, a
consequence, etc, of the definition as the following even-numbered
question.
The Extension Course should give the taker a passing knowledge of
Dianetics and Scientology terminology, phenomena and parts. This is its
goal and purpose. The reasoning or examples in a text are considered
secondary, for the purposes of the course, to precision definitions.
The Extension Course Student should finish the course with the feeling
he is dealing with a precision science, composed of identifiable parts.
Example (not necessary to use):
Question 5A: What is a reactive mind?
Question 6A: Give something out of your own experience that would
illustrate a reactive mind at work.
The main tasks imposed here are ( 1 ) To summarize the important
definitions and parts of Dianetics and Scientology from a text and (2) Ask
interestingly for an application to life.
Now you see why I want your swift help in writing it. It would take one
person months. Your contribution, as assigned in this bulletin, will speed
it up by months.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:md.rd
Distribution:
Not to be stencilled in London (their copies being sent direct from DC).
Info copies going to Melbourne, SA, and all field offices, via HCOs; 3
copies-1 for HCO, 1 to D of T, 1 to D of P.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 17 DECEMBER 1958
1 to each
Staff Member
Dollar Field Offices
HCO London for stencilling and dist
BASIC POSTULATE OF OVERT ACT-MOTIVATOR SEQUENCE
The inability to restrain dramatization of past experience only occurs
when one has decided he can do nothing about such an experience. Thereafter
he is the effect of all similar pictures.
Test: Pick up a moment in the past when you decided you could do
nothing about a certain thing-then examine later experience on same
subject.
This is the make-break point of reactivity.
This is the bridge between cause point and effect point on any given
subject.
"I have to do something about it-I can do nothing about it" are the
basic postulates of the overt act-motivator sequence. Straight Wire against
an E-Meter on times one felt one could do nothing about it works to resolve
very difficult cases.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: md.cden
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 17 DECEMBER 1958
Issue II
1 to each
Staff Member
Dollar Field Offices
HCO London for release
AUDITING ARC BREAKS ON REGISTRAR
AND ASSISTANT REGISTRAR
I have found it desirable to run TR 5N (ARC Breaks) fully on both
Registrar and Assistant Registrar in new comm line.
A good auditor who can handle 2-way comm is needed.
The commands are, "What has anyone done wrong to you?" and "What have
you done wrong to people?", and other ARC Break questions.
Getting the overts of the pc is important.
It is necessary to remove, in this special case, ARC Breaks between
Registrar and Assistant Registrar with-
1. Students
2. Instructors
3. Auditors
4. Preclears
5. Field Auditors
6. The Central Org
7. Groups
8. Customers
9. Salesmen
10. LRH
Get out what each of the above did to the Registrar or Assistant
Registrar and what the Registrar and Assistant Registrar have done to or
thought about doing to each of the above.
This will make it possible for them to (1) live in their operating
climate and (2) write warmer, more forward "invasion of privacy" letters.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:md.cden
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 20 DECEMBER 1958
(An article for any Scientology Magazine authorized by a Central
Organization)
PROCESSING A NEW MOTHER
The handling of a woman during and after pregnancy has a specific
successful drill which should be generally known. This is not an attempt to
give all the known data concerning pregnancy, delivery and child care. I
will someday summarize all these. At this time I wish to give you only the
processes and general use.
First, a woman should not be processed on engrams after the early
months. Therefore a pregnant woman should be processed toward clear early
and well. In other words she should be gotten into good shape soon in the
pregnancy. Old Expanded Gita on babies, husbands, wives, bodies is
definitely indicated.
After the sixth month only havingness and general Scientology processes
can be run without injuring the baby-no engrams.
Next, the delivery itself should carry as little anaesthetic as
possible, be as calm and no-talk as possible and the baby should not be
bathed or chilled but should be wrapped somewhat tightly in a warm blanket,
very soft, and then left alone for a day or so.
At once after delivery the woman should have simple havingness run-
"Look around here and find something you have"-preferably by the husband.
One hour of this at once, one more hour same day, two hours following day,
all havingness and havingness only should be run.
After two days run the following:
"Invent something worse than-a delivery" (flatten it), ". . . a baby"
(flatten it), ". . . a doctor" (flatten it), ". . . a nurse" (flatten it),
". . . a delivery room" (flatten it), ". . . a mother" (flatten it), ". . .
a husband" (flatten it), ". . . an abdomen" (flatten it), ". . . a womb"
(flatten it).
This should be done in next many days following the delivery. This and
more factual havingness (all 3 commands) should straighten up the mother.
It would be well if the six buttons and inventing were cleared away in
early pregnancy so the post pregnancy processes will run easily. She
shouldn't face a new processing idea in the first few days after delivery,
so if the processes are early prepared, all will be well.
On the baby, perhaps the best thing is no processing for three days.
Then talk to the baby, tell the newcomer he or she is welcome, then make
friends. Various things can be done-touch assist is best. Even the birth
engram can be run but that's a little adventurous in a lot of cases.
The most to know about the baby is not to tire him or her unduly for a
week or two, feed a protein formula if mother not breast feeding. This
formula is most like human milk. I picked it up in Roman days and have used
it since-15 ounces of barley water, 10 ounces of homogenized milk, 3 ounces
Karo syrup (this can be multiplied by any number according to the number of
bottles desired but the ratio remains the same). Evaporated or condensed
milk and heavy sugar make fat not bone. Protein is the thing that heals and
makes strong growth. Modern hospital formulas and patent mixes for babies
are not just bad, they are criminal.
Then the next important thing for a baby is to know he or she is winning.
Don't expect him or her to do more than a baby can do. Grant beingness to a
baby.
"You make that body lie in that cradle" is wonderful on babies up to
six months.
Let the child see Mama and Daddy both at least once a day. Never
quarrel or argue in front of a baby or a child-it destroys security.
Always treat mama and baby with courtesy and respect and they'll
thrive. After all, they have done something. They're keeping the human race
going.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: gn.rd
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 22 DECEMBER 1958
To all staff
US Field Offices
HCO London for
comparable dist.
NEW HGC PROCESS
A New Straight Wire
(This can be used in any official Scientology Magazine)
There is a new process allowed in HGC. It is-
ARC Break Straight Wire
This process belongs after S-C-S and Factual Havingness and before What
Can You Confront.
ARC Break Straight Wire is a form of TR 5 ARC Break. Its processing
number, however, is CCH-50.
Any and all rules governing Straight Wire apply, including-
(a) The pc cycles into past and back to pt. Therefore, ask and pin
point when.
(b) Stop the process only with the pc near pt. Put in a bridge,
therefore, without specified number of "more times". Wrong: "I am
going to ask this question three more times and end the process."
Right: "I am going to ask this question until your answers are
close to present time and then end it if that's all right with
you." Then check when on each reply, get pc into present time and
say, "Are you near present time? All right, this is the end of the
process."
The Command to a Scientologist is, "Recall an ARC Break." This is for
an unlimited type process. "Recall an ARC Break between us", or ". . . in
an auditing session" or ". .. with your mother" to limit process to this
life. The first form is preferred. The second form is used on a sticky
valence that has been isolated.
The unlimited version rapidly dives for whole track and into engrams.
This is all right. But don't stop and change the process. Just continue to
run "Recall an ARC Break" when the pc gets into heavy weather.
Be very careful with this process to keep the Auditor's Code.
Otherwise, 50% of the time is spent getting rid of ARC Breaks in the
session itself-and with this process these are heavy. (However, two
auditors co-auditing who are a bit clumsy can use this process better than
other processes and it and Factual Havingness should be the total activity
of an auditor who is having trouble with a pc who is having trouble with
ARC Breaks.)
The pc, in diving for whole track, gets into and out of heavy
incidents. So long as he answers the question, fine. Don't let him fail to
answer every question.
Reality on the whole track leaps up with this process. This is the
first process that accomplishes this easily.
In running it, remember that the overt act is as important as the
motivator (see A History of Man, Chap. 9). The reason A gets mad at B is as
often because A has done something to B as it is because B has done
something to A.
Here is a fine, smooth process that is a one-shot Clear, and can be used by
auditors not ACC-trained to run engrams.
ARC Break Straight Wire is very useful in husband-wife co-auditing
teams and, with Factual Havingness, is the only process that should be used
in a co-auditing relationship that is already intimate to a point of easily
gathering ARC Breaks.
From two standpoints the process is the best we have ever had-
(a) It handles touchy pcs well, and
(b) It is the first to open up whole track in general with as great
a reality or greater than the R on present life.
From two other viewpoints the process is vulnerable:
(a) It requires strict observance of the Auditor's Code if you
don't want to waste 50% to 75% of the auditing time.
(b) It runs the pc into heavy incidents and the process must be
continued until pc is again in pt-making an uncertainty in session
timing.
However, the shortcomings are far outweighed by the value of ARC Break
Straight Wire.
There is one "bug" in the process. The non-Scientologist does not
readily grasp the command-and there is no substitute for a quick question.
ARC Break means, "The assignment of responsibility for a sudden drop in
Affinity, Reality or Communication." Thee and me have a "feel" for this.
Substitute commands are many, none as good. "Recall something you have
done to a person"-"Recall something that has been done to you" is fair but
misses by a mile.
History: This process is, in genus, very old. I introduced its
rudiments at the June 1952 first Congress in Phoenix, Arizona. ARC is even
older and goes to July of 1950. The present version in a narrower form was
first used by Mary Sue Hubbard in 1958.
The valuable lesson this gives us is that Mary or Joe or Pete may be
mad at us because Mary or Joe or Pete did something to us. We may or may
not have done anything to Mary or Joe or Pete to make them mad at us. In
other words, the pc who comes back into session furious with the auditor,
may have committed an overt act against the auditor out of session and not
prompted by an action of the auditor. The wife may be mad at the husband
because of something she did to the husband. She talked about him behind
his back (prompted by some old engram about husbands) and, now having
committed this overt act, she becomes furious with the husband. Etc. Etc.
The person mad at Scientology may only be motivated by having done
something to Scientology. Etc. Etc. A whole new view of human behaviour
opens when you see this point. Therefore, caution the pc to "pick up his
overt acts against things, too" while he's running it, if he's only getting
overt acts against him.
The only reason the process won't work is that the pc isn't doing it,
but only pretending to, or he doesn't understand it.
But all in all, we've a wonderful weapon here to straighten out a lot
of lives. Use it with wild abandon and get the results in. It's good.
LRH :md.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[pic]
Issue 86 M [ 1958, ca. late December]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Something Has Happened!!!
L. Ron Hubbard
The single largest technical gain in eight years has just occurred.
Anyone can be cleared by engram running.
A new style of auditing has had to be developed to handle the explosive
power of the new Scientology methods of handling Dianetic engrams.
Shades of Book One! Whoever would have thought that engram running
could be improved as much as it has been improved in the past three months.
To make engram running possible, twelve new TRs have had to be
developed.
There are now three styles of auditing: Tone 40, Formal and Engram
Auditing. The first two are quite adequate to clear fifty percent of cases.
It takes a new approach to get enough locks off the rocks of the remaining
fifty percent to get them clear too.
I've been busy, busy, busy. I had the largest ACC ever held in the
world during October and November. And I had the luck in research to put us
on a new plateau of stable clearing.
I asked the ACC Instructors, "What shall we do about America?" They
were just about knocked to pieces training the British to handle the double-
dynamite of modern engrams. But they said, "Somehow we've got to get in
everybody we can to the January '59 ACC in Washington. We've got to get
this data out."
So we're doing it in a Congress on the 3rd and 4th of January in D.C.,
and the 21st American ACC following.
Look, it's no promotion talk. It just can't be said hard enough. We've
made it! We've shot through the last barrier. We've got it and a new
society made.
We've worked hard. We're willing to work harder. But we need help. I
want to drop some coal on the fire and get the show on the road. I need
people who can do this. I can show a lot of people at a Congress and can
show specialists in an ACC. I need staff and I need action.
ACCs are my own course. I don't care what arrangements are made to pay
for it. But this one has been on wait for eight years and now it can get
going.
I can't give another U.S. Congress and ACC for some time. There's only
the 21st American ACC. And only the Success Congress.
Will I see you there?
Copyright � 1958 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 26 DECEMBER 1958
B.SCN/HCS COURSE
Any fully enfranchised area office may teach a B.Scn/HCS Course if the
course is specifically allowed in writing by myself via HCO Worldwide in
London.
The standard B.Scn/HCS Course is in actuality the 20th ACC. It is
expected that the instructor of a B.Scn/HCS Course will have taken the
18th, 19th or 20th ACC.
The tapes to be used are the 20th ACC tapes. These are available from
Washington.
The texts are Scientology Clear Procedure Issue One and ACC Clear
Procedure as published in booklet form.
Extension Courses E, F, G & H are also required but may be done after
regular schooling. It is preferred that Section E (the E-Meter) be done
before the course.
No Comm Course or Upper Indoc or TRs are given in the B.Scn/HCS Course.
If these have not been had by the applicant he must take them in the
regular Academy Comm Course and Upper Indoc-these weeks to be added to the
time in course.
The B.Scn/HCS Course is five weeks in length. If Comm Course and Upper
Indoc have not been covered by the student, the course becomes seven weeks
in length.
The same schedule, the same tapes as the 20th ACC are employed.
However, the exact times of day may be altered to fit an area.
Those areas granted the right to teach a B.Scn Course at this time are
HASI London and HASI Melbourne. That area permitted to teach an HCS Course
at this time is Washington, D.C.
The examination for this course will be based chiefly on the ACC Clear
Procedure Booklet.
HCO Washington, HCO London and HCO Melbourne are the only centers now
examining for B.Scn/HCS. These may be assisted by other areas.
When regularized by establishment of an area HCO, Johannesburg,
Auckland and Los Angeles may receive B.Scn/HCS rights to train.
It is recommended the B.Scn/HCS Course start every five weeks instead
of every Monday as in HCA and the schedule be pre-published for six months,
and that people who have not had Comm Course and Upper Indoc be warned to
start two weeks earlier in all literature.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 27 DECEMBER 1958
Full Distribution
THE FIRST FIRST DYNAMIC PROCESS
All processing to date has been in the main third dynamic processing.
For the first time I have worked out a purely first dynamic process. It
is used by the Auditor on a pc with lots of attention to ARC Breaks,
havingness and, of course, smooth skill.
The process is "Invent something worse than you."
Theoretically this is a "one shot clear" process. It directly changes
the being that is making the bank-the thetan.
It does not hope for a change of the person via a change of the bank.
The HGC and any validated Auditor can use this with great profit.
2 cautions: Do not permit a pc to escape "invent". Do not let him do
something else (such as see how he is to find if something is "worse
than").
The process does not work unless "Invent Something" is workable.
Therefore, to run it, one makes sure first that the pc knows he can invent
something.
The process does not work if the pc also does something else. Ask the
pc "What are you doing exactly" now and then and make the pc do only the
process.
Patch up any ARC Breaks with "What have I done wrong". And follow that
with "What have you done to me" to get both motivator and overts in the
session.
This is a wonderful process-simple to run and do, with good results-if
it is done right. It is easier to run than ARC Break Straight Wire.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:gn.cden
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 DECEMBER 1958
To all staff
General Dist.
For use in any official magazine
For use in any HGC
SHORT SESSIONING
One of the simplest ways to get a case moving is a technique known as
"Short Sessioning" which I developed for the 20th ACC.
The 20th was the last ACC to teach clearing without engram running and
as such had several lagging cases. I studied one of these carefully against
the basic auditing rule, "Find something the pc can do and then improve his
ability to do it."
The case under study defied all known processes. It was "unreality,
unreality, unreality", and "ARC Break, ARC Break, ARC Break".
ARC Straight Wire old style was also unreal. Imagine that!
However, even when all else was lost, I still had the idea that this pc
could be run on something and finally had a long blue spark-the pc would
start and end sessions.
Probably this was the sole ability, Scientology-wise, of this pc. So I
made the auditor start and end ten-minute sessions. And it worked. It
worked even though the auditor never really cognited on the value of it! I
had to heavy-8c the auditor a bit to keep the auditor from "running
something". Short sessioning was evidently not something to do. Only a
process was something
Anyway, everybody won. The pc got brighter, the auditor got a win and
we got a new technique. That's the way with Scientology, everybody wins-
even the people who claim I'm too enthusiastic for their point five.
The exact way to do "short sessioning" is as follows.
One uses old rudiments if he isn't comfortable with CCH 0. Or he uses
CCH 0 as given in ACC Clear Procedure. [See page 311.] It doesn't matter
much which since he is depending on starting and ending sessions rather
than "running something". Therefore, the auditor should use that with which
he is the most comfortable.
The auditor gets the pc's agreement to start a very short session and
says, "Start."
Then he clears up some small thing like an ARC Break in the session or
a pt problem without really getting into anything hot. (Finds auditor and
pc.)
The auditor then does something objective with the auditing room such
as "How does this room differ from an ideal environment?"
Probably by this time the ten minutes are up, so the auditor tapers it
off and bridges to session end. "Is it all right with you if we end this
session shortly?" "Is there anything you'd like to say before we do?" "All
right. End of session."
The auditor makes the pc get up and take a break for a few minutes.
Then he gets the pc back and does it all over again more or less as above.
The idea is not to try to get benefit from a process but to get the pc less
and less nervous about doing something. The pc will begin and end sessions.
Anything between is pure gravy if it works but the in-between may not work
at all. It does not matter. Starting and ending sessions is what is wanted
for the pc.
Short sessioning works for many reasons. It injects time into the
picture, for one thing. It breaks up habits on the cycle of action. It gets
the pc used to the auditor. You could think of many more reasons but
basically whatever the reasons, it works.
Try it on that case that ARC Breaks on you all the time. Try it on the
pc that has it all unreal-unreal-unreal. You'll be amazed at what short
sessioning, smoothly run and without crude auditor flubs, can do for almost
any case, not just bad ones.
Several difficult cases have improved markedly with this alone. Simple,
isn't it? Well, most good things are.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:mgjh
Copyright � 1958
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 31 DECEMBER 1958
ACC CLEAR PROCEDURE CHANGE
Omit "What part of that can you confront best?" from ACC Clear
Procedure commands. It attracts pc's attention too deeply into engrams
encountered.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:gn.rd
LRH TAPE LECTURE
Washington, D.C.
29 December 1958
** 5812C29 LECTURE HCO Area Sec Hat
P.A.B. No. 151
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
35/37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 January 1959
DUMMY AUDITING
Step Four: Handling Originations
Compiled from the Research Material and Tape Lectures of L. Ron Hubbard
The fourth thing an auditor has to do (in that order) is to handle an
origin from the preclear. It is actually true that when you are handling
Tone 40 processes, you do not handle the preclear's originations. But if
you will look on the HCA/HPA chart you will find that these Tone 40
processes are in the minority amongst processes, and in all processes not
Tone 40 a preclear's originations are handled-remember that. Don't let
anybody talk you out of it. If you are handling Tone 40, which is just
pure, positive postulating, you, of course, are not worried about anybody's
opinion, origin, condition, or anything else-you simply want him to do
certain things, and he finds out that his beingness can be controlled and
therefore that he can control it.
What do we mean by an origin of the preclear? He volunteers something
all on his own; and do you know that is a very good index of case-whether
the person volunteers anything on his own? An old-time auditor used this as
a case index. He said, "This fellow isn't getting any better. He hasn't
offered up anything yet." You see, he didn't originate-he didn't originate
a communication. Do you know that that is the hardest thing to get an
organization to do: to originate a communication?
You actually could- work in the direction of getting a preclear to
originate a communication, in spite of the fact that you just previously
were running him on Tone 40 processes. He originated the communication that
his arms and legs felt like they were just going to fall off, and you said,
"Give me your hand-thank you." Preclear says, "My head's coming off now! I
know it's going to fall on the floor!" Auditor: "Give me your hand-thank
you." Good Tone 40. But on control of person, the first two processes are
Tone 40, but Book Mimicry and the next process up the line from it, Hand
Space Mimicry, are not Tone 40, and originations by the preclear are not
only handled but encouraged.
So remember that we have not lost out of the galaxy of processes the
fact that the preclear is as well as he can originate a communication. That
means he can stand at Cause on the communication formula. And that is a
desirable point for him to reach. You see, in controlling people we are
really only showing them that they can be controlled, that it is possible
for their possessions to be controlled. And then they eventually decide
that these are controllable and that people are controllable and that
things are controllable and their bodies are controllable, and they say,
"Wonderful! Look, I'll try!" And before that they didn't even try.
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
So we are controlling a person's possessions or body only until this person
then himself decides to take a hand in it, too. And then he finds out that
control is possible. But most people don't originate. Circuits originate,
computers originate, compulsive outflows originate. And when you first
start to use Tone 40 on a person you will apparently see originations-but
they are not originations, they are restimulations being dramatized. There
is a big difference between a restimulation being dramatized and an
origination. It's whether or not the thetan said it. Did he say it, or was
it just a circuit starting up? Well, you can start up circuits and actually
throw them into being and you will see that these are not originations.
But when an origination appears in anything but a Tone 40 process, you
handle it. And you must handle it well and conclusively. There are
preclears who have had astonishing things happen to them, who have tried to
communicate them to the auditor, who have failed to do so and have then
sunk into apathy and just gone right on out of session because their
communication origination was not handled properly by the auditor. There
are instances of this, and many of them. Tone 40 processes do not
particularly violate this. An understanding of what they are takes place
rather rapidly with the preclear and he doesn't expect you to. But if he
has graduated into being a human being and he's getting up there and he
originates something and you answer it, now he's liable to say the most
astonishing things to you. And if you don't handle them he's liable to drop
into apathy about the whole thing.
So you must handle them well because they're always unexpected. I would
say that unexpectedness actually should be part of the definition of an
origination, because they are quite often completely off the subject, they
take you completely by surprise, they are apparently not at all what you
expected him to say. The fellow says, "Huh! I'm eight feet back of my
head!" Well, what do you do? In the old days, we might have gone right onto
Route One, but we don't today-we handle the origination. (By the way, this
used to be an old technical phrase, "He Q-and-A'd." In other words, he did
what the preclear did. Any time the preclear changed, the auditor changed.
That is the deadliest crime in auditing. The preclear changes because he is
being processed and the auditor changes the process. Q-and-A-the preclear
changed, the auditor changed. Well, that isn't what you do.) He says, "You
know, the whole back of my head feels like it's on fire." Once upon a time
we might have handled this. We might have gone right in there and said,
"Oh, that's very good." We had finally gotten a somatic on this fellow and
we would have handled it in some fashion or other and questioned him about
it and audited it, and so on. But we found out that this stuck people on
the time track. Therefore, we do not do that any more. So what do we do
when he says, "The back of my head is on fire!"-do we ignore it? Well, if
we are running Tone 40 processes, we ignore it. But if we are auditing any
other process, of which there are many in CCH, we handle the origin. And an
auditor who has not been trained to do this will often find himself very
embarrassed.
But how about in the walk-away world-the world that is ambulant and
moving around and spinning quietly, or noisily, as the case may be? Do you
ever have to handle an origin in it? Well, I dare say that every argument
you have ever got into was because you did not handle an origin. Every time
you have ever got into trouble with anybody, you can trace it back along
the line you didn't handle. If a person walks in and says, "Whee! I've just
passed with the highest mark in the whole school," and you say, "I'm
awfully hungry, shouldn't we go out and eat?"-you'll find yourself in a
fight. He feels ignored. He originated a communication to have you prove to
him that he was there and he was solid. Most little kiddies get frantic
about their parents when their parents don't handle their originations
properly. Handling an origination merely tells the person, "All right, I
heard it, you're there." You might say it is a form of acknowledgment, but
it's not; it is the communication formula in reverse. But the auditor is
still in control if he handles the origin-otherwise, the communication
formula goes out of his control and he is at effect point, no longer at
cause point. An auditor continues at cause point.
So let's look this over. The handling of an origin has a great deal of use
and, until recently, it was the least pat step in Scientology. How did you
handle an origin? And we finally found out. I finally had a cognition
myself. I tried for a long time to communicate this to people and they
still blundered on it occasionally. And I finally found out something that
did seem to communicate.
There are three steps in handling an origin. Here is the setup: The
preclear is sitting in the chair and the auditor is sitting across from the
preclear, and the auditor is saying, "Do fishes swim?" or "Do birds fly?"
and the preclear says, "Yes." Here is the factor, now, entering: "Do fishes
swim?" The preclear doesn't answer Do fishes swim, the preclear says, "You
know-your dress is on fire," or "I'm eight feet back of my head," or "Is it
true that all cats weigh 1.8 kilograms?" You see, wog, wog-where did this
come from? Well, although it is usually circuitry or something like that at
work when it's that far off beam, it is, nevertheless, an origin. How do
you handle it? Well, you don't want the preclear to go out of session, and
he would if you handled it wrongly, so (I) you answer it; (2) you maintain
ARC (you don't spend any time at it, but you just maintain ARC); and (3)
you get the preclear back on the process. One, two, three. And if you spend
too much time in (2), you'll be doing wrong.
What is an origin? All right, he says, "I'm eight feet back of my
head." It's an origin; what are you supposed to do with it? Well, you're
supposed to answer it. In this particular case, you would say to him
something in the order of, "You are?" (You mean something like, "I've heard
the communication-it's made an effect on me.") Now, in maintaining ARC you
can skimp that second one if you handle the third one expertly enough. The
least important one is the second one, but the most deadly thing you can do
is utterly to neglect the second one of maintaining ARC. That's deadly. But
you can skip it if you really punch it into the third one, which is to say,
get him back into session. So he says, "I'm eight feet back of my head,"
and you say, "YOU ARE???" (What he said really hit, you know.) He's kind of
wog-wog about this-he's not sure what this is all about. You say, "You
are?" and the fellow says, "Yes."
"Well!" you say. "What did I say that made that happen?"
"Oh, you said 'Do birds fly,' and I thought of myself as a bird and I
guess that's the way it is, but I am eight feet back of my head."
"Well, that's pretty routine," you say-reassure him, maintain the ARC.
"Now, what was that auditing question?"
"Oh, you asked me 'Do birds fly?' "
And you say, "That's right. Do birds fly?"
Back in session, you see.
You can't do this: You can't put it into a can and put a label on it
and say This is how you do it always, because it's always something
peculiar; but you can say these three steps are followed.
I will give you another example. You say, "Do birds fly?" and he says,
"I have a blinding headache."
"You do?" you say. "Is it bothering you (that's the ARC) too much to
carry on with the session (and you've reached number three at once)?"
"Oh no-it's pretty bad though."
"Well, let's go on with this, shall we?" you say. "Maybe it'll do something
with it (maintaining ARC)."
He says, "Well, all right," and you're right back onto it again: "Do
birds fly?"
One of the trickiest of these is "What in my question reminded you of
that?" The fellow says, "Well, so and so," and he explains it to you and
you say, "Well, good. Do birds fly?" and you're right back in session
again.
Three parts, and-that is the important thing-you have to learn how to
handle these things.
At the same time that we are doing this, we can get much more
complicated, particularly toward the end of the session, by just trying out
a communication bridge. A communication bridge from "Do birds fly" to "Do
fishes swim" and from "Do fishes swim" back to "Do birds fly." A
communication bridge is a very easy thing. It simply closes off the process
you were running, maintains ARC, and opens up the new process on which you
are about to embark. If you could look at it as two V's, the points facing
each other, with a line between the bottoms of the two V's, you would see
that one process, which you have been running, is closed on down to
nothing, easily, by gradients. You say, "How about running this just three
or four more times, and then we'll quit-okay?" We give him warning, you
see, that we're closing the process off, and we do run it three or four
more times. Then we say, "How are you doing?" (We never ask people, by the
way, "How do you feel?"-this as-ises havingness.) We say, "How are you
doing?" and he says, "Oh, not too badly," and so on. "Well, did anything
happen there while we were running 'Do fishes swim?' " And he says, "I
don't know. I got a little bit of reality-I felt like a fish for a couple
of moments there." Auditor says, "How do you feel about that?" and so on.
"Is it okay? Are you doing all right now?" The preclear says, "Not too
badly." You say, "Well, let's go over onto 'Do birds fly?' It's an
interesting process and it just goes like this-I ask you, 'Do birds fly'
and you answer me. How about running that?" and he says, "Well all right,
okay." You establish agreement again and away we go. Actually, it is three
contracts in a row. The first contract is: to stop the process we are
running; the next contract is: we are in an auditing session, binding this
as a continuing auditing session; and the third contract is simply: we have
a new process we would like to run, and I want your signature on this
dotted line that you will run it. That actually is a communication bridge.
The reason we do this is so a preclear will not be startled by change, for
if we change too rapidly in a session we stick the preclear in the session
every time. We give him some warning; and that is what a communication
bridge is for.
The handling of origins, however, is most important. Learn how to
handle origins, and you'll never be taken by surprise by a preclear. You'll
be right in there pitching, and the session will keep on. I have seen an
auditor sit with his mouth open for twenty or thirty seconds after some
preclear said something fantastic. He just didn't know what to make of it.
Well, you answer it, you maintain ARC, and you get him back in session.
1950 SUCCESS CONGRESS LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
3-4 January 1959
On January 3 and 4, 1959, the "1950 Success Congress" was held in
Washington, D.C. In Ability 86-M, which served as the Congress Program, Ron
had this to say about it:
"The single largest technical gain in eight years has just occurred.
"Anyone can be cleared by engram running.
"A new style of auditing has had to be developed to handle the
explosive power of the new Scientology methods of handling Dianetic
engrams.
"Shades of Book One! Whoever would have thought that engram running
could be improved as much as it has been improved in the past three months.
"To make engram running possible, twelve new TRs have had to be
developed.
"There are now three styles of auditing: Tone 40, Formal and Engram
Auditing. The first two are quite adequate to clear fifty percent of cases.
It takes a new approach to get enough locks off the rocks of the remaining
fifty percent to get them clear too.
"I've been busy, busy, busy. I had the largest ACC ever held in the
world during October and November. And I had the luck in research to put us
on a new plateau of stable clearing.
"I asked the ACC Instructors, 'What shall we do about America?' They
were just about knocked to pieces training the British to handle the double-
dynamite of modern engrams But they said, 'Somehow we've got to get in
everybody we can to the January '59 ACC in Washington. We've got to get
this data out.'
"So we're doing it in a Congress on the 3rd and 4th of January in D.C.,
and the 21st American ACC following."
L. Ron
Hubbard
** 5901C03 SC-1 The Future of Scientology
5901C03 SC-2 Engrams and Clearing
** 5901C03 SC-3 Preliminary to Engram Running
5901C04 SC-4 Engram Running
** 5901C04 SC-5 Overt Act-Motivator Sequence
** 5901C04 SC-6 Leadership
21ST AMERICAN ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
5 January-13 February 1959
On 5 January 1959, L. Ron Hubbard started the 21st American Advanced
Clinical Course which was attended by approximately 108 auditors. He also
supervised a new Special Hubbard Clearing Scientologist Course, which had
as its lectures tapes of the 20th American ACC, together with the booklet
ACC Clear Procedure (HCO B 15 October 1958, which had evolved from Clear
Procedure, Issue 1). The ACC was a six week course, and the HCS was a five
week course. Beginning Monday, 26 January 1959, he gave a series of ten
lectures to the students of the 21st ACC and the HCS Course, as well as the
HGC staff auditors in Washington, D.C. These lectures are listed in
chronological sequence on pages 380, 383, 386, 388, 390, 393, 396 and 399.
5901C05 21ACC The Basics of Scientology
[pic]
Issue 87 [1959, ca. early January]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
What Are Clears?
L. Ron Hubbard
There are three known grades of Clear.
The first is the Book One Clear. This is called Mest Clear. An adequate
description of this is to be found in Book One.
The second is a Theta Clear. This has been known for years but has only
recently been obtained through engram running as taught in the 5th London
and 21st American ACCs and is done in the Processing Department of the
Central Organization.
The third is called OT or Operating Thetan and is a rather esoteric
level, hard to reach, hard to describe in full.
Any confusion about the state of clear is a confusion of these three
terms: Mest Clear, Theta Clear and OT.
An uninformed public thinks a Mest Clear should act like an OT with
magical attributes. It is not enough that the general auditor can now
approximate a Book One Clear. The public, striving for unattainable
attributes, wants an OT who eats buildings. The two states if on the same
scale are not the same states.
A Mest Clear knows he has reached the bottom rung of the ladder on his
way up. He also knows the rest of humanity uncleared is below this state
but that they don't know that they are.
A Mest Clear still thinks of himself more or less as a body and is more
or less subject to one. All engrams are effectually keyed out without being
examined. For practical purposes they are erased. He has excellent recalls.
They may or may not be eidetic. Book One Clears are a bit below the Mest
Clear standard of today.
If the person making the picture required in eidetic recall makes the
picture, he has to know first what is in it. So why make a picture. A
picture is memory on a via. So the argument about eidetic recall is a
rather dull one at best.
It is not my purpose, thank God, to prove I was right. It is my purpose
to blaze a trail into zones and heights Man has not known before. I can
tell you only what is as I know it now. And I know that eidetic tests of
recall do not prove a Mest Clear. Only freedom from keyed-in engrams proves
a Mest Clear.
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
Theta Clear is another thing-much higher than a Book One or Mest Clear.
This is a real triumph and I'm proud of it. The fact of a real Theta Clear
is only a few months old.
A Theta Clear has no obsessive engrams whatever. They aren't. But he
can put back at will his reactive bank or any engram in it and blow it off
again at a glance. Now that is news. A Theta Clear does not have to depend
on the body line for his "survival." He does not have engrams of any kind
unless he creates them. He does not have to be in a head. And the state can
be obtained in at least 80% of all cases in about 350 hours of auditing or
more depending on the auditor's skill. Only the Processing Department of
the Central Organization or the graduates of the 5th London ACC or the 21st
American ACC are doing this one.
Mest Clear, however, is a way station on the road to Theta Clear or OT
so it doesn't much matter what auditor starts you on the way-your HAS co-
auditor, a professional HCA, an HCS or BScn or a new ACC graduate. You'll
win with them all toward the same goal. Lately I even developed a co-
auditing formula that reaches near Mest Clear.
OT, of course, remains theoretical and is reached through lower clear
states.
So here we go. We built a bridge. And built it better than we hoped.
It's time to start if you've been hanging back. The best way to see this
elephant* is from inside!
Clearing is wonderful conversational material. It is a better
experience.
L. RON
HUBBARD
The 1959 HCA Course Becomes
a Clearing Course
L. Ron Hubbard
Three subjects, not one, have been in development in Dianetics and
Scientology for these many years.
First and foremost of course is Scientology itself. Second is
Organizational knowhow. Third is How to Train Auditors.
These last two technologies did not exist in 1950, which accounts for
our inability to make every gain we needed to make. Only in the past three
years have we grown larger than we ever were in '50. Organizational know-
how permits us to grow. Training know-how permits us to get results
generally.
Today the student in the new 1959 Academy can be taught at Hubbard
Certified Auditor Level to Clear somebody. That is news. And with this
issue we announce that the HCA Course will teach clearing to Mest Clear.
With a newly grooved Communication Course, with an even stiffer Upper
Indoc
[* " 'Seeing the elephant'-an old U.S. Army saying to new recruits going
into action for the first time. In Scientology, we have this analogy: when
the student auditor has seen the WHY of aberration, objectively and
subjectively, we say 'he's seen the elephant'-he'll never again doubt the
fact of an engram or the awesome implications of what he, the auditor, is
able to confront and do with a preclear. He is now, in short, operational."-
Ability 103]
Course and with Theory and Practice aimed only at Clearing we are giving
the best we have to the first professional level of the HCA Course.
As the HCA student, as well as other people, studies the Extension
Course, much class time is saved for practical application of auditing.
The enrolling student may arrive any Monday. He is placed at once in a
Communication Course. This teaches him the basic drills of auditing. After
a week he moves to the Upper Indoctrination Course which teaches the basic
drills of handling people. The student is then graduated to Theory and
Practice and "gets in" his first professional level auditing.
At the end of eight weeks he has studied and should know how to do the
basic processes of Tone 40 auditing:
CCH 1, Give Me That Hand
CCH 2, 8-C
CCH 3, Hand Space Mimicry
CCH 4, Book Mimicry
He has also studied and knows how to do the basic processes of Mest
Clearing by formal auditing:
Rudiments of Auditing Factual Havingness
What Can You Confront? Total Responsibility
Help
Step 6
These are the clearing processes for Mest Clear. He is also taught
other skills and processes needed in general auditing.
At course end he is examined for his practical ability in auditing by
the HCO Board of Review in the Academy area and, due to the precision of
Academy training, is generally passed.
Training in engram running and other items was attempted in late 1958
but has
been relegated to higher training levels. The HCA must know how to
clear people now and all dross has been dropped.
I reorganized the Academy in early 1959 after several tests and trials
and can promise you now that the training is more skillful and precise than
it has ever been. All
the instructors are old-time auditors. They know their business. I
taught most of them myself and can vouch for it.
It's time for all those who aren't to get themselves trained and get
about the business of clearing people.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 JANUARY 1959
FIELD ACTIVITIES
To: All Scientologists
For Scientology to go well in any area, it is only necessary for the
trained auditor in that area to follow the following steps:
1. Get good results on every pc processed individually.
2. Operate a group and do PE and Group Processing.
3. Keep the group recruited.
It is not necessary that a field auditor has great sums of money to
finance his activity. All successful Scientology activities have financed
themselves. In extreme, an auditor with no pcs to keep him going can get a
job and run a group evenings until the income of the group activity makes
the job unnecessary.
The keynote of handling any area is to bring order. Every time you put
some order into a pc or a group, or society, a little confusion blows off.
Ignore the confusion. It is transitory. Order is not. It stays. Therefore
the more order (not necessarily the more activity) you put into things the
more continuance you have. This is new data, extremely important and should
be carefully gone over again and again and applied. It is data that brings
big wins in a society, a group or a pc. Bring a little order.
Get the pc to see that he can bring order into his affairs. Ask him
bluntly, "What order could you bring into your life?" And his case will
start resolving. The highest ability of a thetan is to Bring Order.
Therefore, orderly processing brings results, disorderly processing does
not. All an ARC break is is a disorder.
What order, then, can a trained auditor bring into his area? Into his
own life? Into his pc's? Into his group? That is the question worth
answering.
The confusion that flies off when the order is entered in seems so
important to many auditors that they Q and A with it. They stop pursuing
order and start pursuing confusion. Never change from order to disorder
just because confusion blows off. Let the confusion go. If you want it all
gone, just put more order into it. That's why CCH works when properly used.
An auditor who just starts a group blows some disorder out of a
society. The disorder flies into view. Ignore it. Just put some more well-
run, exactly scheduled group there. More disorder discharges. Order put in
too suddenly always discharges disorder too fast. That's an explosion. You
don't want that. Leave explosions to the government (its highest level of
entering order is to blow everything up).
Here's a program. Get hold of all the people you have processed in the
area you are in. Give them an interview. In it, ask each one, "What order
are you trying to bring into your life?" "What part of your life?" Tell
them that's what Scientology is trying to help them do. You'll have more
pcs. Weld them into a group. Give them some group processing Tone 40. Bring
order into their lives.
Take responsibility for every pc's whole life. Take responsibility for all
the reactive banks in your area. Clear them up by bringing more order.
Money cannot flow back to you on disorderly lines.
AUDITOR CONFIDENCE
Every field auditor has had some loses. These cut down his confidence.
He should rebuild his confidence. He should rebuild his confidence as his
first step. He failed where he failed to bring order into lives. Therefore,
he had better now discipline himself to use one simple process and use it
right and without change until he has won with it. Don't change the process
because it blows off disorder. To the devil with the disorder-put the order
in regardless of how much disorder it blows off.
KEY REHABILITATION PROCESS
1. Start session.
2. Find out if the pc has an auditor.
3. Find out if the pc has an auditing room.
4. Ask pc (goals), "What part of your life would you like to bring
some order into?" Two-way comm on it for no more than five minutes.
Get into session then.
5. For one hour at the beginning of each session every session run
"Look around here and find something you have." Only that command.
If pc originates, understand and acknowledge. DON'T DO ANYTHING
ELSE ABOUT IT.
6. For remainder of session run "Recall something you have done."
When he says he has, acknowledge only.
Session after session run nothing else but this. And you'll bring order
to a pc, believe me. And he'll have great case changes and he'll be moving
forward toward clear.
This process will give you wins unless you do something else to vary
it.
The only people it doesn't work well on are nearly unconscious. On
these only CCH 1, 2, 3 and 4 work. If the process doesn't bite at all, use
CCH 1, 2, 3 and 4. But don't worry, it will bite-if you keep your mouth
shut and don't flub.
Now you want some wins. Don't talk to the pc much during a session. Use
TR 4 whenever he talks. Keep him reassured, happy, comfortable and don't
let him out of session until you end it. And you'll win. If you lose, it's
because you got fancy or chopped the pc up.
Factual Havingness will ease off p.t. problems and ARC breaks. That's
why you use it for an hour always.
If a process regimen comes along that's simpler or better than the
above I'll let you know right away. Until then, this is the very best you
can do.
GROUP RECRUITING
Groups fall apart on sloppy scheduling. They need one night a week at
the minimum. Always the same night, same hours. That's order. Always a one
hour lecture and one hour group processing Tone 40. We have new phonograph
records of lectures for you. They're cheap. Buy them.
When you have a group processed a while get people into an HAS Course.
Teach them TRs 0 to 9 and then let them co-audit on exactly the above
regimen.
By permitting co-auditing, the trained auditor actually gets more pcs.
Charge for co-auditing consultations. Keep them at it.
We're taking the lid off. The country is full of people. They should be
in groups and co-auditing. In that way we'll bring enough order to the
country to make even it survive.
By the way, HCO Washington, D.C., will issue a Hubbard Apprentice
Scientologist certificate to anybody you guarantee has passed TRs 0 to 9
without charge to you. We trust you to make sure they're good.
In recruiting a group, keep explaining Scientology as something that
helps people bring order into their lives. You'd be amazed how little order
they believe they can inject. Call on new people. Run an ad for your group:
"Tired of Being Human?
Scientology Group Clears People," or "Does Life Seem Disorderly? Join
the Scientology Group and begin to win for a change."
We need action. In an all but leaderless world, somebody has to make
some people. Let's begin.
LRH:-jh L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 JANUARY 1959
Full Distribution
CHANGE OF HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 DECEMBER 1958
Step 6 is deleted from HCA/HPA Curriculum and added to HCS/BScn
section. No E-Meter is used or taught in HCA/HPA courses. Comm lag is
taught instead.
LRH:gnjh
Copyright � 1959 L. RON
HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[HCO PL 15 Dec. 1958, Academy Training Curriculum & Examination, is in OEC
Vol. 4, page 274.]
5901C06 21ACC Compartmentization of Universes
5901C07 21ACC Types of Pictures
5901C08 21ACC Engrams
5901C09 21ACC Engrams; the Rock Engram
See page 374 for data on the 21st ACC lectures.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON
HCO BULLETIN OF 10 JANUARY 1959
(Supersedes all Earlier Directives for HGC Processes)
HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES
The Director of Processing of an HGC is the person who indicates the
processes to be used by auditors on pcs.
The following plan is furnished for the information and guidance of the
D of P and HGC auditors.
LOW PCS
All pcs who lie markedly below the center line of an APA/OCA graph
should be run on CCH 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Not all auditors, even when they know these, can get results with them.
Therefore, use an auditor who does get results with the CCHs.
MEDIUM PCS
Pcs who lie on either side of the center line respond easily to Fac
Havingness and benefit well from it.
Fac Hav with all three commands (as per ACC Clear Procedure) should be
run solely and only with good case gain.
Flatten each command on such a case about an hour at a time in
rotation.
If no comm lag develops, run 8 vanish, 2 continue, 1 have in that order
until case changes for the better. Then run an hour each on each of the
three in rotation.
These can also be run on "Recall something you have done".
HIGH PCS
Pcs who lie mostly or entirely above the center line can be run on
"Recall something you have done".
However, if you have auditors trained to run engrams, by all means
start this pc on engrams at once and run according to 5th London or 21st
American procedure.
OTHER PROCESSES FOR ALL
Any help process runs on almost any pc except the very low pc.
Therefore, particularly to get sessions started, "help on auditor and pc"
is valuable.
ARC Break Straight Wire works well on medium level pcs, but only an
auditor who is expert with an E-Meter and in locating in time incidents can
be trusted with it.
GENERAL NOTES
HGC auditors have to be checked out on CCH 0 before being permitted to
run it. The process is a great invitation to spend half an intensive
talking. Fac Hav or TR 10 also run problems and should be used if auditor
doesn't check out on CCH 0.
Auditors must not be permitted to use TR 13, fishing a cognition. Use TR 4
instead or the ACC TR accepting pc's answers. (TR 4 and the ACC TR are
quite similar.)
Use TR 5N handling ARC Breaks only when auditor is checked out on it
and handles it well.
The most trouble you get in an HGC is same as field. Auditors won't use
TR 4. They always have to do something about what pc volunteers. After a
while pc gets afraid of volunteering data and goes out of session.
In general auditors talk too much. Cut it down unless auditor really
knows when to talk. Auditors who are always dragging pc's attention to
auditor are a liability in an HGC. On a new auditor in HGC you can ask
"What process has gotten you best results?" And whatever he says, you'll
win better, until he's grooved in, by letting him run it. Otherwise, give
him Fac Hav and no comments to pc and you will get a fair showing.
RESULT RETARDERS
ARC Breaks mostly retard results. The less talk, from auditor, the less
breaks. Good TR 4 avoids them.
PT Problem stalls cases. Handle it with good CCH 0 as per ACC Clear
Procedure, or, if auditor not checked out-with Fac Hav, or in extreme low
cases TR 10.
CLEARING PROCEDURES
It is fruitless to embark on straight clearing until the case is up.
So, all the above applies to clearing.
When case is well up, after using the above processes, use Confront and
Help as per ACC Clear Procedure, or, better, run engrams.
SUMMARY
To get gains, use processes gauged to case, handle PT Problems and
prevent ARC Breaks by checking auditor comments.
To clear, run engrams and make Theta Clears where you can.
If not all your auditors can run engrams, have lower cases set up by
them and when in shape, pass to an engram running auditor to finish off.
If you have no engram running auditor, clear by this bulletin plus ACC
Clear Procedure.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH :-.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[See HCO B 4 March 1959, HGC Allowed Processes, which supersedes all
earlier HGC allowed processes. ]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
1812 19th Street N.W., Washington, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 JANUARY 1959
To all Staff
HCO London
An amusingly effective process.
"Invent a problem for which (pc's worry or malady) is the answer."
Examples-bad leg, old age, wrinkles, bad heart, obsession about sex, pt
illness, inability to work, etc.
LRH:rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
D of T
Acad Admin
ExtCourseDir HCO BULLETIN OF 12 JANUARY 1959
Acad Insts
D of P
Processing Admin
HCO Bd of Renew
ACC World Wide Inst
HCO
TONE OF VOICE-ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Mood can be expressed by an acknowledgement. Evaluation can also be
accomplished by acknowledgement, depending on the tone of voice with which
it is uttered.
There is nothing bad about expressing mood by acknowledgement, except
when the acknowledgement expresses criticalness, ridicule, or humor.
LRH:-jh L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
5901C12 21ACC The Detection of Engrams
5901C13 21ACC Detection of Engrams with an E-Meter
5901C14 21ACC Detection of Engrams (3rd part); Finding Truth
with an E-Meter
See page 374 for data on the 21st ACC lectures.
P.A.B. No. 152
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 January 1959
THE FIVE LEVELS OF INDOCTRINATION
Compiled from the Research Material and Taped Lectures of L. Ron Hubbard
I am now going to give you the five levels of Indoctrination very
rapidly. We already have the five dummy processes which form the first
level-the five dummy auditing processes.
The second one up the line is 8-C-plain 8-C. It is given without stress
on control or anything of the sort. You don't touch or handle the person.
It is an old process done this way. The auditing commands of 8-C in this
particular instance have suffered change recently because no auditing
command must depend upon any other auditing command or it won't be in
present time. So each auditing command depends upon itself, and the
commands of 8-C are: "Look at that wall. Thank you." "Walk over to that
wall. Thank you." "With your right hand touch that wall. Thank you." "Turn
around. Thank you." There is no "let go" there or other direction.
If we have not directed him to do something and he does it, if the way
he does something is a little different from what we expected, we really
have no basis for objection; and the training stress is only this: to get a
person to walk another body than his own around the room. There is nothing
to this. It is NOT High School Indoctrination. At this level he must be
able to duplicate the command, and it is run to a point where a person does
not make a mistake on the commands and stops feeling nervous about walking
a person's body around. That is the training stress.
Now we move up to the next level of Indoctrination, which might look
like 8-C at the first glance, but is not. This is High School
Indoctrination. The commands of High School Indoctrination are the same as
those for plain 8-C, but this is entirely and completely a training process
and it is only run for this reason: to keep an auditor from being stopped
by a preclear by devious and diverse statements and actions. The "preclear"
(we can't really call him a preclear at all, for he is actually the coach)
runs on this "auditor" anything he can think of to stop him, and the
auditor must at no time permit himself even to be halted or falter in any
way. He must be able to continue a clear, free-flowing 8-C on this person
who is getting down on the floor and barking like a dog. He mustn't be
permitted to go down on the floor. You let a man get below the level of
your shoulders and he is going to get down on the floor-that's for sure.
You have to catch him before that. He is going to try not to walk across
the room. He is going to try and run across the room. He is going to try
and do anything. You told him to walk: walking fast is allowable but
running is definitely not allowable. The training stress is entirely upon
getting an auditor to persevere against any trick mechanism anybody could
think of or react to, or any circuitry or dramatization in 8-C. It is total
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
auditor persistence. We don't ask the auditor to do it smoothly-we only ask
him to do it constantly and consistently.
That is High School Indoctrination, one of the great steps of
Scientology. If we had had this a few years ago, it would have made the
world of difference in several cases I can think of. A fellow would sit
down in the middle of the floor and he wouldn't do anything. We depended
totally on our voices, and these people weren't in communication.
The coach in this case has a role to play. He is the preclear. He has
two signals, one "flunk" and the other "that's it," which are effective.
Anything else he says does not count. Of course, he says "Start" and they
go on with it, but when the coach (who is the final judge) considers that
the auditor has blundered, has been stopped, and has waited too long, then
the coach says "Flunk."
What happens when the coach says "Flunk"? They go back to the beginning
of the nearest cycle of action of 8-C. They do not take it from where they
were, but go back to the beginning. They leave that cycle incomplete. The
auditor in this case is not permitted to override a flunk. When the coach
says "That's it," he means "We are through. We are going to take a
breather. What I say now counts." And that ends it. It doesn't begin again
until the coach says "Start."
This is 8-C done on a very heavy body contact: the coach being lugged
around and doing anything he can think of to stop this fellow. It is
interesting what will stop some auditors. If you understand your business
as a coach, you will understand that it is the soft ones and the unexpected
ones that count. It isn't the heavy ones, it isn't the preclear just lying
down on the floor and refusing to budge and exerting every muscle and
having to be dragged from there on. This is perfectly allowable, but it
isn't the one that catches the auditor. It is the subtle unexpected actions
that "flunk" an auditor.
High School Indoctrination is a marvelous training process. Several
hours should be spent on this and one shouldn't run it just with one coach
but with two or three others as well, because everybody develops his own
abreactive pattern. It is a wonderful opportunity to abreact your
insanities. An auditor will very swiftly learn how to stop one preclear,
but take two or three more, swapping teams around, and he eventually gets a
smooth look at the whole thing. There isn't such a thing as being too tiny
to handle too big a preclear.
The next level of Indoctrination is Tone 40 on an Object. (Actually all
these are groups and a number of techniques of indoctrination could be
evolved from each one of these. I am simply giving you those that have to
be passed.) In this Tone 40 on an Object you can have a number of commands
and variations of one kind or another, but the one we use is this: You take
an object-a small doll, ashtray, Coke bottle-and the auditor tells it to
"Sit down in that chair" or "Sit on the table" and thanks it. Then he tells
it to "Stand up," and thanks it. "Sit down on the chair" or "Sit on the
table"- then the auditor moves it with his own hands. He does all this
while the coach is just standing there heckling him, and he has to do it so
that his intention is so good that he gets perpetually surprised that the
thing, the object, didn't sit down in the chair or sit on the table, or
didn't stand up. The furthermost extremity of this would be that the object
would do so without any further contact with the auditor than his
intention. That point may be reachable-I must tell you that.
A person does this until his tone in giving the commands is Tone 40.
There are many little drills that come into this. One is to make him put
the intention into it and squeak and not say a word at the same time, but
put the intention into it and alter his voice all over the place until he
finds out that his intention doesn't have anything to do with his voice or
tone. He will eventually discover what Tone 40 is. Tone 40 is a
positive postulate with no counter-thought-expected, anticipated, or
anything else; that is, total control. Actually, today we use the word
"control" very loosely. What we really mean is "positive postulation"; what
the world means by control is, if he doesn't do it, shoot him. Not Tone 40,
but Tone .4.
In order to get Tone 40 on a Person going, you can continue Tone 40 on
an Object; but whether this belongs to Tone 40 on a Person or belongs to
the last end of Tone 40 on an Object doesn't much matter. It is not a
separate level, but it is a separate command. You give the 8-C commands to
an object and lug it around for a little while-i.e., having the object move
over and touch the wall, etc.-but that is only getting the person used to
these commands in that tone. That is the only reason there is for it. We
don't use the 8-C commands to get his drill in because he is going to get
heckled.
What does the coach do on Tone 40 on an Object? At first he is really
helpful and tries to get the auditor to get the intention in there until he
can put the intention in without speaking. When the fellow is getting too
good the coach must remember that this Tone 40 on a Person is going to be
up against somebody with counter-thought, counter-effort and counter-action
of one kind or another and the coach furnishes it. He doesn't do it loudly
or obstreperously, but he does furnish it. "Is that Tone 40? Are you
absolutely sure that was Tone 40? What do you mean by Tone 40?" etc.-this
is when the coach isn't being helpful. The coach is supposed to furnish
randomity as a substitute for the randomity of the environment. The person
can do this in spite of the fact that something or somebody is resisting
him, heckling him and messing him up. You could go much further with this.
As I say, one can go much further with each one of the five levels of
Indoctrination, but I don't advise it.
On Tone 40 on a Person, we do 8-C at Tone 40 and that is a total,
accurate estimation of effort, with no halts or jagged motions-that is,
smooth. Your estimation of effort must be absolutely perfect; your
estimation of intention must also be perfect-which is sometimes rather hard
on a coach because somebody can get so good that a coach's body starts to
walk around and obey the commands rather easily and you find almost all
coaches on Tone 40 on a Person are much more docile than on High School
Indoc. They really want to be rougher but the technique is rather
overweighing this, is too strong.
Those are the five levels of Indoctrination and they are only doing
this: placing an auditor into a frame of mind and an ability where his
postulates can be positive and his command is no longer diffident, where he
can control and handle somebody, where he can assume the attitude that is
necessary to an auditor. And a person is all through with these when the
instructor is sure that the auditor in training can do this.
[Continued in PAB 153, page 394]
21ST AMERICAN ACC LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
15-16 January 1959
5901C15 21ACC More on Detection of Engrams
5901C16 21ACC Detection of Circuits and Machinery, and the
Observation of Special Types of Engrams
See page 374 for data on the 21st ACC lectures.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 19 JANUARY 1959
NEW HCA/HPA COURSE
This is the new course outline and time schedule for the HCA/HPA
Course. All students will be enrolled in the Extension Course.
Communications Course
Course Outline:
MONDAY TR 0
TUESDAY TR 1
WEDNESDAY TR 2 and TR 3
THURSDAY TR 4
FRIDAY TR 5N
SATURDAY Auditing Session
Time Schedule (Monday through Friday):
9:00- 9:30 Lecture by Instructor
9:30- 9:45 LRH Comm Course Tape (if available,
if not, explanatory lecture on TR by
Instructor)
9:45-10:00 Break
10:00- 1:00 Session "A"
1:00- 2:00 Lunch
2:00- 5:00 Session "B"
5:00- 5:30 Testing and Review (optional)
by Instructor
Time Schedule (Saturday):
9:00-12:00 Auditing Session
Upper Indoctrination Course
Course Outline:
MONDAY TR 6
TUESDAY TR 7
WEDNESDAY TR 8
THURSDAY TR 8
FRIDAY TR 9
SATURDAY Auditing Session
Time Schedule (Monday through Friday):
9:00- 9:30 Lecture by Instructor
9:30- 9:45 Break
9:45-12:00 Session "A"
12:00- 1:00 Lunch
1:00- 3:45 Session "B"
3:45- 4:00 Break
4:00- 5:00 Tape Lecture
5:00- 5:30 Q and A period
Time Schedule (Saturday):
9:00-12:00 Auditing Session
Theory and Practice
Course
Course Outline: (Week "A")
MONDAY Tone 40 CCH I
TUESDAY Tone 40 CCH 2
WEDNESDAY Tone 40 CCH 3
THURSDAY Tone 40 CCH 4
FRIDAY Op Pro by Dup (old style)
SATURDAY Auditing Session
Course Outline: (Week "B")
MONDAY Straight Wire Processes
TUESDAY S-C-S
WEDNESDAY Factual Havingness
THURSDAY 1) "What can you confront?"
2) "Make a picture for which you
can be wholly responsible."
FRIDAY Help (all brackets)
SATURDAY Auditing Session
Time Schedule for both Week "A " and Week "B " (Monday through Friday):
9:00- 9:30 Lecture by Instructor
9:30- 9:45 Break
9:45-12:00 Session "A"
12:00- 1:00 Lunch
1:00- 3:45 Session "B"
3:45- 4:00 Break
4:00- 5:00 Tape Lecture
5:00- 5:30 Q and A period
Time Schedule for Saturday (Weeks "A " and "B "):
9:00-12:00 Auditing Session
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
21ST AMERICAN ACC LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
19-21 January 1959
5901C19 21ACC Auditing Skills
5901C20 21ACC Skill of an Auditor
5901C21 21ACC Skills of an Auditor
See page 374 for data on the 21 Ts ACC lectures.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 20 JANUARY 1959
ACC PREPARATORY PROCESS SCHEDULE FOR
RUNNING ENGRAMS
RECOMMENDED FOR NEW AUDITORS IN HGCs
SELECTED PERSONS OVERT ACTS
The student is started in the following fashion: "Find a person you
feel you have failed to help." By two-way comm, not repetitive. Several
persons may be located. Select one that is real to the pc (not wholly
unreal) and run the following process:
"Recall something you have done to (selected person)." This is a
repetitive command. The auditing is done "muzzled". The auditor is not
permitted to say ANYTHING to pc except the command and to acknowledge that
command's answer, once the process is started. If the pc originates the
auditor is permitted to nod only. If pc seems to have lost the command, or
originates, the auditor nods and says, "I'll repeat the auditing command"
and does so. No discussions, or rudiments beyond START and END OF SESSION
are employed.
When several persons so selected in the pc's life are apparently flat,
the process may be considered flat. Some reality should have been gained by
both auditor and pc.
OVERT ACT STRAIGHT WIRE
When several selected persons pc "could not help" have been run with
the above, the auditor broadens the process to the command, "Recall
something you have done to somebody". This is also run "muzzled". When pc
originates, the auditor does not speak, he only nods his reply. When the
preclear seems to be without a command, the auditor repeats it as above. No
further two-way comm is allowed.
ARC BREAK STRAIGHT WIRE
When the pc shows signs of being easy with the above process, the
process used becomes ARC BREAK STRAIGHT WIRE run in the following fashion.
For the first time, E-Meters are employed. The sole use of the E-Meter is
to locate incident in time, BC-AD dates to be used only, "Is it greater
than. . .?" "Is it less than. . .?" "Is it such and such a date?" A
forbidden question is "How many years ago" as this is the sole criteria
used in between-life implants where they say things are "Thousands of years
ago. . .trillions of years ago. . .etc."
The question "When?" is the only thing the auditor solves and only when
needed, and he tells the pc about the drop he gets.
The command is "Recall an ARC break". The pc does. The auditor says
"When?" Any time statement by the pc is accepted except "I don't know". If
pc says this, the auditor resolves it with the E-Meter to the best of his
ability, tells the pc the date or character of drops, and then continues
the process. Any other origin by pc is met with a nod only. The auditor may
make no comments.
This process goes very easily into whole track. If a whole track
incident is located in time it de-intensifies or goes back on the track. By
locating the incident in time the pc is not made to plow through an engram
with this command only, which is poor stuff. Therefore, no departure is
allowed from the above regimen and no two-way comm is permitted beyond
locating the incident in time. The process will be found to open up a track
into greater and greater reality.
As ARC Break Straight Wire will give pc 3D spots on the track it can be
followed by "What can you confront?" or regular engram running.
LRH:-.rd L. RON HUBBARD
[HCO B 18 Jan. 59, A CC Preparatory Processes for Running Engrams, is
basically same as above. ]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 22 JANUARY 1959
Full distribution
NOT-IS STRAIGHT WIRE
Those persons on whom a process works once and those who have either
dub-in or occlusion, process easily, if dramatically, on Not-Is Straight
Wire. (See Axioms 11D, 18 and 22.)
Pcs divide into three general classes:
1. Those who have 3D pictures and good time sense.
2. Those who are occluded with black, colored or invisible fields
and poor time sense.
3. Those who dub-in and have no time sense.
The scale of deterioration of a case is as above. First there are 3D
copies of the real universe, then there is the action of not-ising these
pictures (while they're still there) and finally, while not-ising,
substituting false pictures.
This process is aimed at case types 2 and 3 above. (ARC Break Straight
Wire also handles type 2 but not so well as type 3.)
Types 2 and 3 press into invisibility pictures by making them
"unimportant". This is the clue word to unreality, stupidity, occlusion and
dub-in. (See the Logics.)
The cycle which occurs is that the person gets overwhelmed with other
people's declared importance. They counter by not-ising the importance of
others. The reverse cycle of others reducing the pc's own importances is
not run in Not-Is Straight Wire as it reduces havingness.
The commands of Not-Is Straight Wire are only these and no other:
"Recall a time you implied something was unimportant." Pc does. "When?"
Pc says or auditor assists him by pegging it on an E-Meter.
This is run for about an hour. Then a second command only is run.
"Recall a time when somebody else thought something was important' Pc
does. "When?" Pc says or auditor assists him by locating on E-Meter.
Acknowledgement is used. TR 4 is reduced to a nod.
An hour of one is followed by an hour of the other.
There's dynamite in this process. It is good, clean and unlimited. But
don't chicken on it and pull out and don't quit because the pc gets
uncomfortable.
Here may be the QED for all occlusion and dub-in cases.
LRH:gn.rd L. RON HUBBARD
5901C22 21ACC Attitude of an Auditor
5901C23 21ACC What Auditor Is Supposed to Do with an Engram
[pic]
Issue 88 M [1959, ca. late January]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
A Campaign for Ethical Auditing
L. Ron Hubbard
General ethical standards in America are at their low-low ebb.
When we see what the peers of "healing" do to make a dishonest dollar,
when we see "mental healing" relegated to mental torture and destruction we
find at the same time that the local and the national governments enforce
the vicious practitioners, the antibiotic quack and the electric shock
witch doctor.
If Scientology is to make any progress whatever its own ethical
standards must be without reproach. Why Q and A with a caved-in society?
One of my "hats" is ethical standards.
HCO is Hubbard Communications Office. It is the office that helps me
wear my hats. Therefore one of the three principal hats of HCO is Ethical
Standards, the keeping of the codes. The other two are Technology and
Awards.
There are many HCO offices throughout the world. But nowhere do they
have the problems of magnitude in the field of ethics that they have in
America.
Succumbing to the general low tone of the society, there are persons
about who:
1. Do not care to have the actual skill necessary to get results;
2. Do not scruple in their promises to pcs and
3. Work against the best interests of the Central Organization and
other auditors.
Heretofore I have been relatively unaided in this problem. I have tried
many ways to solve it. All failed in America. These solutions worked
elsewhere but not in America. Fortunately HCO has come of age. I am getting
help.
An HCO Secretary is a well-trained Scientologist. After that she is my
own secretary in the area. She has a motto "Bring Order"-the motto of HCO.
HCO staff are dedicated Scientologists, the best, carefully selected.
Today any unethical practitioner in Scientology is beginning to feel
uneasy. And rightly. HCO (to say nothing of Central Organizations) is
breathing down his neck.
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
Today ethical auditors, doing their jobs and well, are feeling easier. HCO
is backing up their activity and making them secure in their gains by, for
instance, keeping roving auditors out of ethical areas and the squirrels
gasping their last.
An ethical auditor does the following:
1. He helps the good repute of Scientology.
2. He keeps dissemination up with a healthy part of his income.
3. He gets results when he processes somebody.
4. He charges standard fees, no cut-rate.
5. He stands in well with his fellow auditors.
6. He makes no wild promises to pcs he can't back up.
7. He never tells a pc the pc is now clear.
8. He uses standard processes.
9. He keeps his own case improving toward clear on higher levels.
An unethical auditor is earmarked by the following:
1. He lives on the good repute of Scientology but downgrades it.
2. He profits by the dissemination of others or the Central
Organization and pockets what he should contribute as "profit."
3. He processes people without caring about results, only profit.
4. He cut-rates his processing or grossly overcharges.
5. He is despised by other auditors.
6. He makes any promise he has to to get a pc to buy processing.
7. He tells pcs they are clear no matter what they think.
8. He uses any process that happens to occur to him and avoids
standard proven processes.
9. He shuns personal auditing on himself.
And there you have what's holding us back.
When the New Year of Year Nine came, I made a resolution. I had the
administrative machinery set up, the needful comm lines. And I resolved to
"Take steps to take full responsibility for field auditors in America."
I don't care whether this resolution is popular or unpopular. It's got
to be done. Here's how it is: I tell people about recent results and about
clears. Some creep, already in bad with me, yet finds ways of ''profiting''
by "cashing in." Trouble is, these couldn't audit out a sore finger on a
clear. What do they know about my goals or ethics. Yet they use the name
and rake in cash-and spoil areas with their stupid blundering. They fail to
help cases. They are parasitic upon the dissemination done by others. They
take money that should go into sound future and waste it.
HCO is vitally interested in this campaign. The HCO goal is "Get the
field auditor to get results in America, and get the show on the road."
And HCO can spend thousands to do it.
Any area that is being victimized by an unethical auditor will soon feel
the influence of HCO. We mean business. And America has been asking for it
hard.
Scientology is the greatest movement on Earth today, the only honest
movement with real hope for Man's future. It must not be stalled by the
prevailing low of American ethics.
It is shameful that I can only guarantee Scientology results in America
where HCO or myself can directly supervise the processing. This must
change. A professional auditor's certificate must continue to mean honesty,
results and adherence to the codes.
This is no sudden campaign that will be forgotten. There are HCO
offices all over the world, more than in America. I'm winning. HCO is
winning. It's about time the field won too. For Scientology is winning a
new life for Man the world around.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON
HCO BULLETIN OF 24 JANUARY 1959
Full Distr.
Scientology Axiom 58:
Intelligence and judgment are measured by the ability to evaluate relative
importances.
Corollary:
The ability to evaluate importances and unimportances is the highest
faculty of logic.
Corollary: Identification is a monotone assignment of importance.
Corollary:
Identification is the inability to evaluate differences in time, location,
form, composition or importance.
LRH:grl.rd L. RON HUBBARD
5901C26 21ACC The Effect of the Environment on an Engram
** 5901C26 21ACC-S1 How a Process Works
5901C27 21ACC How to Audit an Engram
** 5901C27 21ACC-S2 What Doesn't Make an Auditor
5901C28 21ACC How to Start and Run the Session
** 5901C28 21ACC-S3 The Establishment of "R"
5901C29 21ACC Attitude and Approach of the Auditor
** 5901C29 21ACC-S4 Muzzled Auditing
5901C30 21ACC Plan of Clearing
** 5901C30 21ACC-S5 The Grouper
See page 374 for data on the 21 Ts ACC lectures.
P.A.B. No. 153
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 February 1959
C. C. H.
(Continued from P.A.B. No. 152 of 15 January 1959
on "The Five Levels of Indoctrination")
Compiled from the Research Material and Taped Lectures of L. Ron
Hubbard
WE GO NOW INTO CCH. CCH could not even vaguely be attempted without the
five levels of Indoctrination having been run. Nevertheless, early in the
HPA or HCA Course you will discover that an individual hasn't yet had Tone
40, so, although CCH starts with Tone 40, the training continuity of CCH
does not. Training starts with dummy auditing in the Communication Course
and then goes to the second level of Indoctrination, which is simple 8-C,
and they coincide at that point. The order of learning these processes is
therefore different from the order in which they are given to a pc. You
don't have to remember the order of learning, but you do have to remember
the order of giving them to a pc. However, I am going to give them to you
in the order of training.
We have simple 8-C (which I have already given you) at the second
level. The commands of simple 8-C are very simple and they do not depend on
any other command. In simple 8-C the commands are: "Look at that wall.
Thank you." "Walk over to that wall. Thank you." "With your right hand
touch that wall. Thank you." "Turn around. Thank you."
The second process we deal with in training is Locational Processing,
and this, as you can see at once, is a command of attention process. The
commands are: "Notice that . Thank you." This is very simple
Locational Processing and, by the way, an interestingly therapeutic
process. The training stress is simply this: the direction of attention
must not be disturbed by other mechanisms of attention direction. The
auditor must do this smoothly. We are trying to get the auditor to get the
preclear's attention to go smoothly to the object indicated. What we have
here is one person handling another person's attention-this is quite
unusual, and must be done very smoothly. We don't care how well the
commands are getting across, beyond, of course, that they should get across
as well as a person learned to get across a command in dummy auditing. The
auditor picks out objects and says, "Notice that ." He normally
points, and the preclear merely turns his head. There are no cautions to be
used with this except that, if the preclear gets very restimulated, flatten
it.
The third is called Locational, Body and Room, and here we have the
first example of extraversion-introversion. The commands are: "Look at
that____.Thank you. Look at your (foot, hand or knee). Thank you." There is
an alternative set of commands on this: "Notice the chair. Notice your hand
Notice the
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
wall. Notice the floor." They actually have a difference. A person who is
pretty dead in his head had better be told to "notice," because the strain
and stress which will come on him through trying to get out of his body and
"look" at his head is so great he will start pulling ridges to pieces. So,
of the two, the safest is "Notice." The other will exteriorize somebody.
They are two different sets of commands, two different objects. "Look at
that wall, look at your hand," etc., is liable to find a person out there
five feet outside his head. But if a person would not normally exteriorize
by his build, bank behavior, etc., you would use "Notice." In training we
use "Notice," but we must remember that the process works fabulously well
with "Look."
That's an extraversion-introversion process. We have the sequence of it
as "Look in on yourself. Look at yourself. Look at the environment. Look at
yourself. Look at the environment"-alternating it. This is what is known as
an alternate command. It is necessary to call your attention to that bit of
terminology because in "Give me your hand" Tone 40, we run it on the right
hand and we run it on the left hand, but it is not an alternate. We don't
say, "Give me your right hand. Give me your left hand."
The next one of these is Objective Show Me. Here the preclear does a
little demonstrating. The reason this is put in here is because it is one
of the more miraculous therapeutic processes. It is the reason why a
person's bank is invisible to other people. It is the reason why people
have secrets, they pull banks in on themselves, and the reason why they
don't dare show it to anybody else. The commands are: "Show me that .
Thank you." The auditor points to the object he wishes to be shown. Only
when that is running fairly well will you run it on an extrovert-introvert
basis, and the next series of commands on it could be "Show me that . Show
me your ." (I.e., "Show me that table. Show me your foot. Show me that
ceiling. Show me your hand.") This, by the way, opens the door to mock-ups
and facsimiles anybody could see. If there is some method of achieving
that, this is the process to do it. A person overcomes his unwillingness to
show things, and he realizes that he is not still on Arcturus and you are
not the space police from Saturn. He is being made unwilling by life to
show anybody anything.
Actually, I would omit this process under training. I wouldn't show a
person how to do this early in his training. I would let him find this one
up the track somewhere. That is why I have not given it out in training
earlier. But you must know that it exists because it is a very important
process and has to be handled very delicately-that is why at this level of
training it isn't used.
Instead, we use a mild one called Attention by Duplication 9, Number 4.
This is a very old process, but we don't run it in the old manner. We place
a book in one location and a bottle in another location (never more than
five feet apart), and we say, "Look at that book. Walk over to that book.
Pick up that book. Put the book down in exactly the same place." The same
goes for the bottle. You could add a "Turn around" in there, but you have
then graduated this to Tone 40 Book and Bottle.
Tone 40 Book and Bottle is not Opening Procedure by Duplication. You
have to be ready to assume total control of the preclear to run Tone 40
Book and Bottle. The commands are the same, except that you never
acknowledge anything but the execution of the auditing commands. Then we
would only have to add the command "Turn around." He is really not supposed
to do anything else we have not told him to do. (In training we use Opening
Procedure by Duplication and later on will have to show somebody what we
mean by Tone 40 Book and Bottle.) The training stress on this is precision.
The auditor must not make any mistakes or omissions on this command. It is
one of the most arduous processes to run known to man. If an auditor adds
into it the randomity of getting his commands mixed up, he can practically
finish a preclear. It is one of the number one exteriorization processes.
If Opening Procedure by Duplication 1957 will exteriorize somebody (and it
will), Tone 40 Book and Bottle is likely to send
him on his way. You have no latitude for mistakes here. The training stress
is the exact duplication of the commands. One of the cautions that must be
observed in running this is that it is not left unflattened and mustn't be
faltered if it begins to run. If the process is biting it must not be
stopped simply because there is a class schedule involved. If you were
unfortunate enough to begin Opening Procedure by Duplication 1957 at 3 p.m.
and it was running on the preclear, you have no choice if it is still
running at 2 a.m. in the morning-Auditor's Code or not, you are still going
to be there running it. I couldn't possibly tell you that emphatically
enough. We remember this from way back when. The most fatal thing that can
happen is to be interrupted during this process, which may never bite
again. And if it isn't flattened, it is liable to leave somebody hung right
there. It is a major auditing error to start Opening Procedure by
Duplication 1957 and not flatten it. When you start that one, don't have
any other dates. Most of these processes under training sooner or later
will be left unflattened on somebody, but that one must never be.
[Continued in PAB 154, page 400]
LRH TAPE LECTURES
Washington, D.C. 2 February 1959
** 5902C02 21ACC-S6 Axiom 10
** 5902C02 WST-2 PR&R-2: "R" Factor Talk to Registrar
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 FEBRUARY 1959
HGC CURRENT PROCEDURE
SELECTED PERSONS OVERTS STRAIGHTWIRE
If you want an undercut on Selected Persons Overts Straightwire, run
people close to present time and if you want to undercut it further,
downscale its command to: "Think of something you have done to ...." The
preclear does not have to talk to run this process. He can just think of
something.
Additional note: ARC Break Straightwire cannot be run on a case that is
motivator hungry. Overt acts must be owned up to thoroughly on the lower
processes before you can get ARC Break Straightwire to run properly. Bad
auditing is much easier to do with ARC Break Straightwire than the other
two processes. Bad auditing is the limitation of ARC Break Straightwire. It
gives the auditor much more chance to make mistakes than either Selected
Persons Overts or Not-Is Straightwire.
The two biggest single auditor crimes are:
1. Rough and choppy auditing.
2. Overestimating the level of case.
When either of these two crimes is committed you get reduced profile
readings. If a profile reduces, the answer is in either one or two above.
The remedy for rough auditing is muzzled auditing. This gives the
auditor wins, thus improving his judgement and gives the preclear wins.
Muzzled auditing is best run on:
1. Selected Person Overts Straightwire
2. General Overts Straightwire
3. Not-Is Straightwire.
ARC Break Straightwire belongs between General Overts Straightwire and
Not-Is Straightwire in the scale of things, but is generally omitted
because it requires smooth auditing; however, it produces the best results
if case reality is up to it.
GRADUAL SCALE OF PROCESSES
The lowest is:
1. Selected Person Overts Straightwire: "Recall a time you did
something to
2. General Overts Straightwire: "Recall a time you did something
to somebody."
3. ARC Break Straightwire: "Recall an ARC Break." "When?"
4. Not-Is Straightwire: "Recall a time you implied something
was unimportant" alternated with "Recall a time somebody thought
something was important. "
5. Factual Havingness:
"Look around here and find something you would permit to vanish."
"Look around here and find something you would continue."
"Look around here and find something you have."
The results to be achieved by the above scale compare favourably to the
CCHs and are faster.
When part of the profile gain lags on the OCA or APA, the person is
found to have a dropped havingness, thus Factual Havingness (Third Rail-run
8-2-1) can be combined with the above, using the third command, VANISH,
first. In any event, the fifth process in the above order is "Third Rail"
(run 8-2-1 ) of Factual Havingness.
I would like to see this run extensively by HGCs. I would like to see
this gradient scale run in full after every engram is flat, and before
starting a new engram.
This will keep auditors from being fooled by dub-in. Dub-in can occur
in a different lifetime, even when it was not present in the lifetime just
run. Dub-in is a continuous characteristic of a person in a single lifetime
and may not be present in the ensuing lifetime.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 FEBRUARY 1959
FLATTENING A PROCESS
A process is flat when:
1. There is the same lag from the moment the command is given
until the time the preclear answers the command at least 3 times
in a row.
2. A cognition occurs.
3. An ability is regained.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 FEBRUARY 1959
Originally issued from London
OP. PRO. BY DUP.
Use two objects-a book and a bottle.
Have the pc look them over and handle them to his satisfaction. Then
have him place them at some walking distance apart in the room, on a couple
of tables or similar locations.
The commands:
"Look at that book."
"Walk over to it."
"Pick it up."
"What is its colour?"
"What is its temperature?"
"What is its weight?"
"Put it down in exactly the same place."
Repeat with the bottle.
Do not vary the commands in any way. Use Tone 40. "Thank you"
acknowledgment. The basic commands should never be departed from, and
never, never trick the preclear by using the book again when you knew he
was just about to start toward the bottle. The purpose of the process is
duplication. Good control should be used.
Accept the pc's answers whether they are logical, silly, imaginative,
dull or unlawful. In starting the process you can discuss with him what you
are about to do and make sure you have got the rudiments established. Run
the process until the comm lags are flat.
This process is an HPA/HCA requisite.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mc.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
** 5902C04 21ACC-S7 Diagnosis of an Uncracked Case
5902C05 21ACC Scout on Dynamics
** 5902C06 21ACC-S8 Setting Up Co-auditing Groups, Processes Used
in
21st ACC
** 5902C13 21ACC-S9 Summary of Data, Part I
** 5902C13 21ACC-S10 Summary of Data, Part ll
See page 374 for data on the 21st ACC lectures.
P.A.B. No. 154
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 February 1959
C. C. H. (Concluded)
Compiled from the Research Material and Taped Lectures of L. Ron Hubbard
The next process in training order is Subjective Havingness. One way to
run this is to ask the preclear what he can mock up. Then have him mock up
what he can, and shove it into his body. That is the most elementary way of
running this. Remedy of Havingness and Havingness in general are the most
therapeutic levels of processing when they work. You run CCH so the fellow
can have, and here you are directly doing it. Quite important. You can
always get a black case to mock things up and you can always get somebody
to throw something away. This is not even a problem today.
The way you crack up a black case is to have him mock up something in
the blackness and push it in until the blackness cracks up. He will go
anaten; but because he goes unconscious is no reason to stop auditing him.
There is a way to crack up the "invisible" case, who cannot see mock-
ups (they have no field and do not see anything when they close their eyes;
everything is invisible, they have no facsimiles, no mock-ups). The most
spectacular crack-up of an invisible case was occasioned by putting a
number of glass objects on a table and, one after the other, just
repetitively round and round, the preclear was asked to "Keep each one from
going away"; and, when he succeeded in doing this for a few rounds, he no
longer had an invisible field. That invisible field of his had been
impervious to all other attacks by auditors for five years or longer.
The next one is Book Mimicry, its commands being totally motion. All
the processes up to this moment (we have mentioned Book and Bottle Tone 40,
but it is not taught or run at this level of training) are simply
communicative. We could talk to the preclear. This is also true of Book
Mimicry and Hand Space Mimicry. Don't get this mixed up because your first
process in CCH is Tone 40 "Give me your hand" and this is followed by Tone
40 8-C and then followed by Book Mimicry and then followed by Hand Space
Mimicry; you are liable to believe that Book Mimicry and Hand Space Mimicry
are Tone 40. They are not. They are just common, ordinary, run-of-the-mill
routine-be a good fellow, pick up the ARC, remember your dummy auditing
sort of processes. You can talk to the preclear. It is necessary that you
do so.
Book Mimicry is run this way: You sit facing the preclear, rather close
together, your knees a few inches from his knees. You take in your hands a
book-not another object-and you make a motion with this book, preferably
not the most complicated motion in the world and preferably not the
simplest motion.
And remember, you, the auditor, have to be able to remember any motion
that you make with that book so that you can do it again. So it is
sometimes necessary for an instructor to make somebody take the book and
wave it around in certain patterns
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
and make him wave it around again before he lets him run this on anybody.
Just check him out so that he can wave the book the same way twice,
because, if he can't, he can't run this process.
You make the motion with the book and give the book to the preclear,
and he, with a mirror image, takes the book and makes as near as he can the
same motion with it. If you are not satisfied with it, you take the book
back and make the same motion that you made before with the book newly and
in present time and give him the book once more and he makes the same
motion back. You do the motion until you and he, but particularly he, are
satisfied that a duplication has occurred. The auditing commands of this
process aren't commands-they are patter. There is comment. There is talk.
And one of the lines that undoubtedly should be part of your patter should
be, "Well, did you do it?" "Are you satisfied?" If he isn't, you do it
again and ask him again. It is the preclear that has to be satisfied that a
duplication took place, not the auditor. It is completely different from
dummy auditing. Remember, we are not dummy auditing now, we are auditing
for keeps. You can talk all you want to, acknowledge what he says, but
don't you dare let that looseness in conversation interfere with the
tremendous precision of the motions of the process itself. In other words,
the motions are the commands, and these must not be interfered with by the
speech, but the speech can, and should, take place.
Number seven is Hand Space Mimicry, and again it is the motion that is
the command. The training stress on Hand Space Mimicry is to do good,
useful hand space mimicry. The auditor sits in the same position as in the
last process, and puts one or two palms up against the preclear's hands and
he says, "I am going to make a motion with my hands and I want you to
contribute to that motion"; and we make some simple little motion to which
he contributes. We do this for a while until it is more or less flat or we
can leave it for the moment. Then we bring the auditor's and preclear's
hands half an inch apart, and we do the same thing, and we say the same
thing. You may lead him out to four or five feet away by these tiny
gradients, another inch at a time, without his ever becoming aware of the
fact that you have left him, and he is definitely aware of his auditor.
This is modern "Look at me, who am I?" It finds the auditor. The Scale of
Reality is employed here, and this is why it is done. (Scale of Reality: At
the bottom there is nothing; above that there is a communication line, the
line becomes more solid, then above that terminals begin to materialize
lightly and the line becomes less solid, then above that you have the
terminals and you don't have any lines, and above that the terminals are
there mostly by agreement; above that there is agreement, and above
agreement there is consideration, individual consideration, and above that
there is postulate. That is the Scale of Reality.) You will see this Scale
of Reality take place, for what are these hands against these hands but
communication lines to the preclear? So we play it in this fashion. We
begin to break it down and we become less a line and more a terminal.
Next one is Trio, a famous old process which is included here because
it is too good to miss. The commands of Trio were originally "Look around
the room and find something you could have." A very non-control sort of
process, but that's the Trio. It has an opposite: "Look around the room and
find something that your body cannot have." It is "have" for the preclear,
"have not" for any other object, person, being, valence, or anything else
than the preclear. You do numbers of things with the Trio. You have to know
the Trio because it is a fast patch-up for almost any process there is
except Op. Pro. by Duplication 1957. (The only thing that patches up Op.
Pro. by Duplication 1957 is Op. Pro. by Duplication 1957. Tone 40 Opening
Procedure by Duplication will run out Opening Procedure by Duplication
1957, and any Tone 40 process will run itself out. There is no dead-end
street there.)
Trio will run out almost anything in the entire bank if it is biting at
all. If a person can have anything, or if he can get the idea of "something
can't have," it will run anything out. It is slow and reliable, and an
auditor must always have it.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 16 FEBRUARY 1959
HGC PROCESSES FOR THOSE TRAINED IN ENGRAM RUNNING
OR TRAINED IN THESE PROCESSES
STARTING A CASE: BEGIN EVERY SESSION AS FOLLOWS WITH THESE RUDIMENTS.
USE RUDIMENTS. FIND THE AUDITOR, FIND THE PC, FIND THE AUDITING ROOM.
ESTABLISH A GOAL FOR THE SESSION. ASK FOR PRESENT TIME PROBLEM.
PRESENT TIME PROBLEM:
If PTP exists then run it as follows and in no other way. Do not yak
around about it. Just ask if there is one, see if one registers on the
meter. On the PT PROBLEM THAT REGISTERS ON THE METER (not some other one)
do the following.
Ask for and write down all the persons connected with this problem.
That problem includes the preclear. On each of these persons, one after the
other, beginning with the one most real to the pc, run this:
"Think of something you have done to (selected person)." "Think of
something you have withheld from (selected person)."
These commands are run one after the other until the selected person
chosen is somewhat flat. (Pc begins to repeat things he has recalled
before.)
Do this to each person involved in the problem.
PT PROBLEMS WERE CUT OUT OF HGC BECAUSE AUDITORS BURNED UP HALF AN
INTENSIVE ON THEM. A PT PROBLEM NEVER REQUIRES MORE THAN A COUPLE OF HOURS
TO FLATTEN. NO "WHEN" IS USED WITH PT PROBLEM BY SELECTED PERSONS.
USE RUDIMENTS AND CHECK PT PROBLEM EACH SESSION AND HANDLE AS ABOVE.
DYNAMIC STRAIGHT WIRE:
Do a survey, one time on the pc, not every session, to discover any
errors in their dynamics. This is done with an E-Meter. On pcs not familiar
with Sci. terms use the following words: Self, sex, family, children,
groups, mankind, the animal kingdom, birds, beasts, fish, vegetables,
trees, growing things, matter, energy, space, time, spirits, souls, gods,
God. Assess with this question only, "Tell me something that would
represent (each of the above, one after the other)." When one changes the
pattern of the needle action or when it is definitely balmy, write it down.
When list is completed, take those items written down and run:
"Think of something you have done to (selected terminal you wrote
down)."
"Think of something you have withheld from (selected terminal, same
one)."
Run these questions on each, one after the other, until pc seems flat.
IF NO DAFFY TERMINALS ARE FOUND ON SURVEY, SURVEY IT ALL AGAIN. IF NONE ARE
FOUND THIS SECOND TIME, SKIP THIS PROCESS.
DO THIS ONLY ONCE PER AUDITOR PER PC.
PAST AND FUTURE EXPERIENCE:
This process goes rapidly into engrams but can be continued even if
engrams are contacted.
Run these two questions one after the other, one time per each.
"What part of your life would you be willing to re-experience?"
"What part of the future would you be willing to experience?"
KEEP AN ACCURATE RECORD OF ANY ENGRAMS CONTACTED. WHEN ENGRAMS PERSIST
IN THE PC'S VIEW, CAREFULLY SPOT THEM IN TIME FOR HIM.
ENGRAM RUNNING:
Find the engram necessary to resolve the case. ONCE YOU HAVE CHOSEN IT
AND HAVE BEGUN TO RUN IT, BE SURE YOU HAVE THE MOTIVATOR AND THE OVERT AND
THEN DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DO NOT DEPART FROM THAT INCIDENT TO RUN ANOTHER
THAT "DROPS BETTER" OR COMES UP. IN OTHER WORDS ONCE YOU HAVE FOUND AN
INCIDENT STAY ON IT UNTIL IT IS FLAT.
NOT-IS STRAIGHT WIRE:
When you have flattened an engram thoroughly with all five commands
gone over twice, run Not-Is Straight Wire between incidents. In other
words, flatten an engram, then run Not-Is Straight Wire, get that a bit
flat and locate and run the next incident.
Selected Person Overt Withhold, and General Overt and Withhold can be
run on a pc only if they are biting. This is also true of Not-Is Straight
Wire.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Supplemented by HCO B 27 February 1959, How to Select Selected Persons,
page 427, and HCO B 10 March 1959, Supplemental Data Sheet to HCO Bulletin
of February 16, 1959 and Staff Auditors' Conference of February 16, 1959,
page 439. This bulletin was discussed by Ron at the Staff Auditors'
Conference of February 16, 1959, see the following page.]
LRH TAPE LECTURE
Washington, D.C.
16 February 1959
A transcript of this Staff Auditor Conference appears on the following
page.
5902C16 SAC Staff Auditors' Conference
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
STAFF AUDITORS' CONFERENCE OF FEBRUARY 16, 1959
REGARDING HCO BULLETIN OF FEBRUARY 16, 1959:
HGC PROCESSES FOR THOSE TRAINED IN ENGRAM RUNNING
OR TRAINED IN THESE PROCESSES
Nearly everyone here has been trained in these exact processes and, if
anyone here hasn't been trained in these processes, then everything on this
Bulletin applies except Engram Running. The whole bulletin applies except
Engram Running.
There will be a staff Theta Clearing Course, and those auditors who are
on staff who have not been trained by an ACC in Engram Running will have an
opportunity to get that training; and not too many months will go by before
they are up to this, too. So this will apply at that time. Maybe it will
have shifted slightly by that time, but I don't think very much.
Now what you are looking at here is the aggregate know-how that was
gained and assembled on the 21st American ACC.
UNDERCUTTING CASES:
Now the undercuts of cases became a vital necessity. This whole ACC was
devoted to the R factor plus Engram Running. It was discovered that the
thing that keeps individuals from running engrams adequately was their R
factor, and when their R factor was very poor they could not run an engram
adequately. Now the funny part of it is that an engram can be contacted and
run and, if done persistently and well without ARC breaks, can run the
following Scale of Confront. Here is the Scale of Confront, just to refresh
your minds:
DUB-IN: Lowest scale. This scale could possibly invert, and down
below that you might have a black dub-in. Once you had run
blackness, you would find a dub-in case. But the scale we are
mostly interested in, because that is the one we most commonly
see, begins at the bottom with dub-in, runs up, turns
BLACK. Runs through blackness, turns
INVISIBLE. Runs from invisible to
ELSEWHERE-a desire to be elsewhere. The way they solve things is
elsewhereness. Runs up from elsewhereness to
ABILITY TO CONFRONT. Runs from confront to
EXPERIENCE or PARTICIPATE. And only then are you up to
BEINGNESS.
Now this is the Confront Scale, and it is the scale of disintegrating
Reality. It is how a person handles terminals or a situation. A person
handles terminals and situations above all this by not having to
participate, by not having to confront, finding no necessity to do anything
about it unless he chooses so on his own determination; and if he did so,
could do so with no personal liability. He could experience or not as the
case may be. Now you'll find a lower harmonic on this in some philosophic
level of somebody saying, "Yap, yap, well, I could, or I couldn't, and
that's my choice," etc, well, he hasn't got any power of choice. He's just
using this as the final escape mechanism-a philosophic escape mechanism.
If I said "bottom"-the bottom mechanism-it would be the one most
commonly contacted. But you are apt to get a mechanism which is
philosophic, which is simply a figure-figure mechanism about a situation,
and the individual feels that if he could just figure it out he would be
all right. In other words, this is a thought-thinkingness figure-figure,
and he not-ises by figure-figure. Such a case, not-ising by figure-figure,
will turn into a dub-in case as soon as you start curing his figure-figure;
would turn into a black case; would turn into an invisible case; would turn
into a confront case; would turn into an experience case. Which is quite
interesting.
Now it is true that an engram could be found, started, and, if the
auditor were good and held the individual right on the time period and had
the time period well spotted, and had the overt and motivator, no matter
how crazy they seemed or sounded, contacted, he could theoretically, just
by running that engram, run a person through the totality of this Reality
Scale. See? So there's another approach here. You get a guy who is figure-
figure, find the engram necessary to resolve the case. First he figure-
figures about it, and he'll run it, and run it just with the auditing
commands-the five auditing commands to run an engram-he figure-figures
about it, then after a while he dubs-in about it, then after a while it all
goes black; and then after a while it eases into an invisibility-it's just
not there-somatics are, and discomfort and other things are, but it's not
there-and its not-thereness suddenly turns into little flicks-little flicks
of confront. And boy, he goes elsewhere. It just starts to turn on and he
gets it for the least little Flick and he goes elsewhere. And then pretty
soon he can confront the thing; then pretty soon he can participate-he can
run it in valence, squarely in valence, right in its moment of time, at
which time it becomes pretty damn real. And then he goes to being able to
put it there or not put it there, and its importance-unimportance factor
flattens out so that it's neither important nor unimportant. And that
engram is licked.
Theoretically, this could happen. That is actually the way I run
engrams. But you will find in auditing in the HGC that the public expects
of you a different thing than is expected of you by students. And that's
why I wanted to talk to you for a few minutes. They expect a different
thing. They expect you to be interested in their case. And that is quite
amusing-because it's your job to get them interested in their case. But
they want you to be interested in their case. A11 right, any case is
interesting, so that's a pretty easy one. But you can get so interested in
their case that you do a lot of talking to them and burn up an awful lot of
auditing time. So there is some point where your interest becomes an
indulgence, and on the happier side of that, where the pc is pleased you're
interested in his case, and that's enough. Then you get him interested in
his case.
All right. Now, we have for a long time not used PT problems. I'll tell
you why very bluntly. It was not unusual for an auditor to burn up twelve
and a half hours on a PT problem. It was not unusual. He did this with two
motives: one just yak, letting the pc go on and on, poor control, not
controlling the pc's comm outflow, letting the pc get into non-essentials.
And the other side of it: he was trying to run the whole case with the PT
problem. Well, wonderful-you can run a whole case with a PT problem-but
why? Since it's slow freight. That's a very slow way to go about it. So we
take a PT problem now and handle the session in this fashion:
We establish the rudiments every time we establish a session. Find the
auditor, find the pc, find the auditing room, establish a goal for the
session. Do that rapidly. We don't care what goal it is, so long as he has
some kind of a goal. And then we ask for a PT problem. And we take an E-
Meter (up to that time we didn't care whether the pc was handling the cans
or not) but we take an E-Meter, and we have this PT problem appear on the E-
Meter, or we don't run it. Got it? And we run the PT problem that appears
on the E-Meter. So we get him to state this problem, and we don't care how
he states the problem, because all we want to know is "Did it drop?" That
tells you at once you won't run a PT problem on a stage-4 needle. Didn't
drop-see, that's all within the requirements-it didn't drop, so skip it. It
isn't going to be real to the pc anyhow. You'll have to do something else
with this case. He's probably got thousands of problems; probably all of
life is a problem. Probably every time he walks in a room he installs an
engram. You know, the furniture's there-that's an engram. Get the idea? So
why worry about a problem?
But if you got a PT problem that drops, you should remove yourself at
that moment from all temptation. As soon as the problem drops, and as soon
as he states that it is a problem to him and is worrying him in present
time, you take the cans away from him and put the thing aside. Just lay the
E-Meter aside. You're not interested in an E-Meter from there on. The
reason why is because you'll increase the drop, you'll
increase more drop and more drop as you ask him about it. You're already
running it. And the problem is going to change. You have seen this
phenomenon. You're not interested in a problem changing. The fact of your
laying aside the E-Meter will rather convince him that you have found it
and that's it. And you only want to know this: the personnel associated
with that problem. You don't want to know more about the problem. You just
want to know the personnel associated with that problem. His wife, his
mother, and his wife's boy friend, or something of that sort. And that's
the personnel associated with the problem. You just check that off.
Now, I'm going to ask you to take a notebook and a ball-point into the
auditing room, because you've got two or three things to do here that
require a list. I want you to get accustomed to establishing a list and
then flattening it, not trying to run the case all over new again every
time the case changes. That's one of the ways to waste time. You run one
terminal, and of course the case changes, the problems change, everything
changes on the case. If you re-assessed it at this time to find a new
terminal, you'd for sure find new terminals. Well, the devil with it. Let's
just flatten what we contact, and when we're contacting and scouting and
using cans and the E-Meter, just write down what we find. Then put the E-
Meter aside and run what we've found until we get rid of all of that. Now
you're going to do something new-give him back the E-Meter cans. Got the
idea?
Pcs don't much like to hold onto these E-Meter cans forever.
Furthermore, they become restive, and they want to scratch their heads, and
they want to do this, and they want to rassle around, and most pcs you get
are slightly nervous in this direction. Why should you worry about it?
Because the E-Meter is only going to give you a certain amount of the
information that is quite valid. Now, you're going to write down the
personnel connected with this PT problem. You're going to take SELECTED
PERSON OVERT-WITHHOLD on each one of these people. And the commands for
this are right here:
"Think of something you have done to ( )," and
"Think of something you have withheld from ( )."
And you are going to run one of those commands and the next command,
and then the next command-first command again, then the second command,
first command, second command. In that way, you'll never lay an egg on an
unbalanced flow. No flow will unbalance on you. They'll always stay there
more or less stable. The case won't suddenly turn black when it's not
supposed to turn black, and so forth. You won't ever over-run a flow and
the pc will never get upset.
Now, let's look at this again. You have written down "wife", "his
mother", and "his wife's boy friend". Which one do you run first? You have
to ask this question to establish that terminal: "Which one of these things
do you think is the most real to you?" The individual says, "Oh, Mother, of
course." Who cares? That's what he says. All right, so that's the first one
you take. Then you take the two remaining ones: "Which one is most real?"
That's the one you knock out. That leaves you one more person. Knock that
one out.
Now, there is something that is not stated here. I just typed this up
rapidly for you-I didn't have a backing sheet, so there are typographicals
because I couldn't even see what I was typing. This has a criterion, and it
is an old criterion of all PT problems-it is, they are PT problems. By
definition, a PT problem must exist right now in the physical universe. By
definition. So therefore, the personnel involved in a PT problem must exist
right now in the physical universe. He will tell you halfway through the
run, that "It was actually my mother who influenced me this way"-ah skip
it. That's not a PT personnel in that problem. His mother isn't really part
of, let us say-it was her mother that was part of the PT problem. In other
words, the people have to be actually associated with the problem and
existing at this time in this pc's life influencing that problem, for this
to be a PT problem. So therefore, we don't dive in any direction to pick up
any new personnel we don't care about.
We get this problem flat. It is only flat if it answers this question:
"Now, what do you have to do about that problem now?" And the pc says,
"Nothing." It's flat. For
our purposes, it's flat. The only reason we're running it is we're trying
to get rid of the obsession he has to jump out of the auditing room and go
do something about this problem. If he doesn't have to do anything about
it, it's flat. But if he says, "Oh, it's flat, because I could go and talk
to my wife's boy friend now, and I could handle him." No. Start right back
over from the beginning-the first person you wrote down-and run that person
again for a short time-next person for a short time-next person for a short
time-on these exact auditing questions. "Now, what do you have to do about
the problem?" He'll tell you, "Well, I don't have to do anything about it
just now." That's enough. You consider that flat. Got it?
All right. This will keep you out of all kinds of trouble. And it will
keep the pc from being all hung up in trying to go elsewhere in an auditing
session. So much for that.
This is done at the beginning of every session. That first section
there-it says, "STARTING A CASE: AND BEGIN EVERY SESSION". Well, you not
only start each intensive with this, but you start every session with this,
and you do the same thing.
If it takes you two hours to flatten the PT problem, I will think
something is hung up. This is a rapid one. This is not a slow one. If it
takes a couple of hours, well, something's really haywire here. He didn't
say the problem, or he didn't do something, or he's holding something back.
But notice we have said, "Think of something you have done to" and "Think
of something you have withheld from". This will also get the pc talking to
you, because it gets rid of the withhold. Got that? All right. So much for
that.
Now, DYNAMIC STRAIGHT WIRE you were taught in the 21st American, but
the commands for the general public were not given to you. And they are
given to you here on this sheet, this HCO Bulletin. Now, the only thing you
are looking for is a represented substitute. In other words, you're looking
for substitutes. You ask him for a substitute for himself, and you ask him
for a substitute on the basis of "Tell me something that would represent
yourself." And he says, "Represent myself? Oh, that's very, very easy-a
tree." Get your ball-point busy at that point and put down "tree". Got it?
Now, if he even says "toothbrush", get your ball-point busy. The proper
answer, of course, is "Myself". It's just as simple as that. But the more a
case is daffy on this line, the more attention you're going to pay to it.
So you just run this whole assessment right straight on through: Self, sex,
family, children, groups, mankind, the animal kingdom, birds, beasts, fish,
vegetables, trees, growing things, matter, energy, space, time, spirits,
souls, gods, God. Just one question. Each time you say this you just take
one of those: "Tell me something that would represent, for instance,
souls." The individual says, "Running water." Get the ball-point busy.
Write it down. When you have got this whole list assessed, take the list
you have written and run:
"Think of something you have done to (a toothbrush)."
"Think of something you have withheld from (a toothbrush)."
You'll be amazed, but they have actually done something to a
toothbrush, and they have actually withheld something from a toothbrush.
This is pretty terrific. Quite amazing. But you are only looking for
daffiness on this, and a sensible answer you don't pay much attention to.
You say, "Tell me something that would represent trees." And the fellow
says, "Leaves." Now, there's a matter of judgment involved here. What if he
said, "Shadows"? Well, I don't know. That's a matter of judgment. Try to
run it or not try to run it, as the case may be. If it looks daffy to you,
run it. You're the judge. Got the idea?
Now don't let it look daffy to you when you say, "Tell me something
that would represent spirits," and he says, "Souls." When you say "souls",
he says "spirits". That's not daffy.
But how about this guy that gives you the perfect representation all
the way down the line like a little wound-up doll? You already, in looking
him over, find out he has a sticky needle, he's registering at 6 on your E-
Meter when you first put the cans in his hands, and he gives you all the
answers perfectly. That case is giving you an
intellectual response which has nothing to do with any reality under the
sun, moon or stars. Something he read in a book and a machine is rattling
it off. So you do the assessment again. The second time you go through
you're liable to trip him on something. Got the idea? So, if you get a
perfect assessment, run it again. I actually don't care how many times you
run it, but you're apt to be wasting time, because by two-way comm and
definition alone you may not get anywhere with a very badly machined case.
Nevertheless, a couple of times through, he should trip somewhere. Machine
case generally does.
The rule governing Dynamic Straight Wire is: That which doesn't fall
out by two-way comm just on assessment. He says it, and then it looks funny
to him, and he laughs, and he thinks this is for the birds, and he says,
"Oh, no, that wouldn't be one-actually, a substitute for a tree would be a
leaf, or a small tree," or something like this. That's fine. Nothing wrong
with letting him correct himself, because you are actually auditing him
just by asking him the question. People, when they straighten out things in
their own categories, very often recover very, very easily.
All right. Let's take up this next one here. That's an easy way to run
Dynamic Straight Wire, isn't it, huh? I would ask you to do this, however,
in view of the fact that you are doing a professional job of auditing for
the public mainly, and that is, I'd ask you to memorize that list-rather
than hold a bulletin in your hand and read it.
Now, the next thing we're going to run into here is PAST AND FUTURE
EXPERIENCE. This is a bid for two things: One, the lowest level case there
is-because experience, to him, is a dub-in, usually. Or it's a figure-
figure, or it's something, so it compares to the Reality Scale. His
definition of experience compares with the Reality Scale.
His definition of experience is a direct index to the Reality Scale, by
the way. What does experience mean? He'll say, "Experience-that's very
easy. To consider." There you've got your figure-figure level. "What does
experience mean?" Well, "To write about it or make something out of it-
experience is that thing which you use to manufacture the future." He's
dub. "Now, what is an experience?" "Well, experience is that which you try
not to have." That's probably black or invisible. Or, "It's the thing you
forget," would be blackness. "Experience is something you try to forget"-
invisibility level. "Experience is something you have to cope with."
Obsessive confront. "Experience is-ah-well, experience-that's pretty hard
to define-experience. I guess it's to go through something." You're getting
a fairly sane response-to go through something. To have an actual
adventure, something of this sort. You're getting a fairly sane reaction to
experience.
So don't think that Past and Future Experience is pegging up at the
highest level of the Reality Scale. It isn't. This process was found, in
the 21st American, to be the undercut process. This was the lowest undercut
process. And this is a killer, and it is very trying to an auditor. A very
trying process, because it offers so many wonderful temptations. And that's
what's wrong with this process.
Now, you run these two questions, one after the other, with no
assessment, no E-Meter, nothing. You just put the E-Meter down after you've
done the Dynamic Straight Wire thing, because on Dynamic Straight Wire,
when you said, "Children," the needle was going on a gradual shift over
here, and a little theta bop now and then. You said, "Children," and it
fell a dial, or all of a sudden started doing a big theta bop in the
middle. When you got off of children, it settled down to the other pattern.
That told you that you had something to be run on the subject of children.
That he will also, at the same time, give you a daffy reading, he will tell
you some daffy terminal to represent-so you needed the E-Meter there. But
you don't need the E-Meter on Past and Future Experience, not even vaguely.
You can just put the E-Meter aside and turn it off, and just run these two
commands. Just clear them with the pc very bluntly. Say, "We're going to
run something about experience. Now, we're going to see how you get along
with this little process, and here are the commands of it: What part of
your life would you be willing to re-experience? And the other command is:
What part of the future would you be willing to experience? Now, here's the
first command: What part of your life would you be willing to re-
experience?"
The answer actually called for is a time, isn't it? And this is a time
process. But there are very few preclears that will find this out for a
very long period. They won't give you anything but super-significances and
ball-up, and the pc who is real bad off will give you a type of experience.
You accept all these things. You say, "What part of your life would you be
willing to re-experience?" He says, "Well, eating cake." That's an answer?
That's an answer. And that's followed with this: "What part of the future
would you be willing to experience?" He says, "Well, more cake." That's an
answer. So you just accept any answer that he gives you on the line. It
gradually will boil down to a time answer. And it will gradually go back-
track. The longer you run it, the more track you're going to cover, the
more future you're going to cover. And there will be periods when the
individual is absolutely sure that he is totally predicting the future. He
gets into implants, let us say, that tell him what the future is all about.
He's stuck 8000 years ago, but he's telling you about the future. All kinds
of odd phenomena show up. But engrams come up and slap you in the teeth,
one right after the other.
You run this for a while, and the individual says, "OOOh, well, you
know I really wouldn't be willing-well, I would be willing-I don't know-I
would-oohh, well-I really don't know-dental operation there, I was a young
boy-I don't know if I'd like to re-experience that-I guess I could re-
experience sitting in the-no, no, no. I could re-experience-I could re-
experience the next day after it." You say, "That's fine," and just mark it
down with the ball-point: "Dental experience as a child." That one he can't
confront. Now, you're never going to run it as an engram, but you're going
to have some tag of it as an engram. See, it may show you something.
As you go along and he runs into hot experiences, real, real hot
experiences one right after the other, it is about time you put the E-Meter
back in his paws. Get the idea? You don't have to start it with the E-
Meter, but if he starts running into hot experiences, or if he gets into an
engram and he can't seem to get out of the thing, the thing to do is not
run the engram but give him an E-Meter and spot it in time for him. Get it
spotted in time. If he's running into them hot and heavy, one right after
the other, just leave him with the E-Meter. But if there is only one you
have to spot in time, and then in a little while he doesn't seem to be
running any more, take the cans away from him again and put the E-Meter
aside. But if he starts running into one that obsessively sticks with him,
don't let him flounder in the thing for an hour. Don't let him wallow in
this one. Because he will just wallow in it, and this is no process-this is
not a good process to run an engram with. So you let him out, OK? And the
way you let him out is to locate it in time with an E-Meter. And you go on
running the process. Now, as I say, it offers enormous temptations to the
auditor-beautiful temptations to run the things contacted. As you sit this
out, you actually are going to change the characteristic of the engram you
will ultimately run on the case. But you keep listing engrams that he runs
into. Keep listing engrams that he runs into, well knowing that he will
favor motivators. For every one of those motivators there is an overt. Now
an engram that he consistently and persistently keeps hitting and hitting
and hitting, you are going to find in that engram probably the engram you
will run, eventually. But not until he is in PT, out of the engram, it
seems to have dropped out, and so forth, and he seems to be all smooth on
this thing, are you going to reach for that one again. You are going to
flatten the process and then go to the engram.
Here we go. ENGRAM RUNNING. Of course, that is run all the way through
with an E-Meter. Give him the cans and start out on this engram that you
more or less found with Past and Future Experience.
Now, this is going to undercut cases, and I don't care how long you run
it. I don't care if you run it for two weeks, because this is a very
productive process. But if you are going to run it over that period of
time, it isn't noted here, but some THIRD RAIL had better be brought in
here some place. And he'd better be shifted up finally until havingness.
And you put in PAST AND FUTURE EXPERIENCE, right after that line, "COMBINE
WITH THIRD RAIL IF RUN MORE THAN 8 HOURS". If you run it eight hours, this
guy's havingness is going to start dropping on him, and you are going to
run into difficulties. You could get into difficulties. All right.
ENGRAM RUNNING. Well, Engram Running, when the case has been prepared this
way, becomes very simple. A case will start running like a little
typewriter, if you have got this Past and Future Experience pretty flat.
Once you have picked an engram, make sure you get its motivator not
only its overt. If you have got an overt, get the motivator. If you have
got the motivator, get the overt. And only when you have got that have you
got an incident. Now, an engram that is having one side of the overt or
motivator run will get sticky. You have got to find the other side, and you
have got to get both of these things in date. Normally, this will start
showing up on Past and Future Experience. Well, we are going to run this
engram with an E-Meter, we are going to consider that we have an incident
when we have got both a motivator and an overt that fit together. And if
the thing is just awful sticky, and dubby, and shockingly poor, and a lot
of other things, you just started running it too fast, that is all.
We have got several things you can do at this state of the case, and so
forth. Probably the best of them is go back to running Past and Future
Experience. You didn't flatten it.
Now, here is this Engram Running. If you notice here, it says you run
all the commands that run an engram twice. Run them all twice. That's
because "Find something unimportant in that incident" is going to stir up
stuff that newly has to be confronted.
Once you have chosen an engram and you have begun to run it, you have
had it. That's it. That's the engram you are going to run. So it has to be
chosen with considerable care. Listen to me now: If you re-assess the case
after you have started an engram, you will get almost any other incident
that is hot to drop more than the engram you started, because most of the
charge is already dissipated. So if you keep re-assessing a case, thinking
another engram would be better to run for the case, you are of course
always going to find another engram. You will never find the one you
started to run again dropping with as much velocity. You see? That's
something you have to keep in mind. If you are going to run an engram,
that's the engram you are going to run. It's got to have its overt or
motivator; suppose you are running the overt side of it, you have got to
have the motivator side of it. So you really haven't got an incident until
you have got both of these things located. And once you have started to run
that, you have had it. Because it will discharge its charge and won't
register on a meter any more the way some other incident will.
You can get a case just stirred all up and run all backwards and upside
down, and that's the biggest mistake an auditor can make. I have given you
the reason for the mistake-because now almost anything will drop better
than the one you partially flattened.
If in doubt, run the engram you were running. If you are not getting
rapid recovery, go back to the first engram you ran and considered flat and
run it again. Sometimes, it will only take you fifteen minutes to run all
five commands. You do it very fast. But very often something happened that
it re-charged in some fashion. Very peculiar.
If you leave about a third of an engram missing and unflat, the whole
engram has a tendency to charge up again. It is kind of funny. But you have
got to flatten the engram you contacted.
Now the rule of the Last Largest Object is the only one I want you to
pay any attention to in questioning the pc. Pc apparently is getting out of
it. Change your auditing command. You are running, "What part of that
incident can you confront?" He says, "Well, I don't know, it's pretty
unreal to me, I don't know whether this happened or not." What was the last
largest object? If he said anything that was offbeat and showed an
unwillingness to run any more of the engram, you want to find out at once
what was the last largest object that you contacted in there. And he says,
"A house." You are going to shift your auditing command now to: "What part
of that house can you confront?" And you are going to run that simply until
he is back in the
incident, and then you are going to go off on to "What part of that
incident can you confront?" Doesn't require any vast bridge. You just tell
him you are going to shift.
In that way, using that rule, you can actually pick up an engram where
he was running as Abraham Lincoln, and in the engram he was shot in Ford's
Theatre-you know-and the date is obviously correct. Dropped and everything.
And then he runs John Wilkes Booth-no, he wasn't Lincoln, he was John
Wilkes Booth. And so help me God, you may find that he was the Secret
Service Agent who had a couple of drinks that night and wasn't watching.
You don't care whether he runs it dub or not. Don't give up because he's
running it wrong, because it'll come out right.
There was a joke on us in the 21st American. We had our paws on Bowie.
He was Jim Bowie. And of course everybody doubted this, because it is a
famous historical figure. And they tried to do everything under the sun to
shake him out of this engram, and they finally went back to running it, and
it was the one that flattened out. The trouble was, he had dub on it, which
made Bowie die the wrong kind of a death under wrong circumstances. But as
he ran it, the more he ran it, the more he ran it, the more right the
circumstances got. And it finally all came out in the wash. He did run the
death of Jim Bowie.
Historical figures, however, are usually the yo-yo point used. The guy
went out of his own body at the death; there was some current historical
figure; he said, "That is the identity necessary to resolve this incident.
That identity could handle it. So I will just be Catherine the Great." And
he goes and runs Catherine the Great. The only mistake is to let him escape
out of the time period. Maybe he did yo-yo right into the palace, maybe he
did go right through her skull. But the right engram will shake out,
because the Reality Scale is run by running an engram.
Theoretically, you could clear a person just by running one engram well
enough. So never get off onto quantitative engrams. An engram is merely
something for him to get used to confronting, and creating, and mocking up,
and so forth. It's just a playing field you are using. The significance,
the amount of change he gets in his life, none of these things have
anything to do with it at all. It is just how well he can handle a mental
image picture, and you have chosen a honey for him to handle. That is about
all it amounts to. And when he finds out he can handle this thing from A to
Izzard and beginning to end, and he can do it well, then the next engram to
resolve the case will run quite rapidly. And you will run on down and
finally run his basic, earliest shift of identity, which is the rock. And
formerly he said, "There is a beautiful, clear sphere-that's the rock. And
that's all the rock." Oh, heck. When you get several engrams run and get
the rock as one of the engrams, you find out this beautiful, clear sphere
was something he customarily clamped around thetans as a trap, and they
sometimes clamped it around him, and there were raiding parties, and there
was all kinds of personnel and there is drama and there is strain, and
there is scenery and everything else. When you contacted the rock first and
ran the rock first, he was insufficiently able to contact things. The date
when he was mocking up this thing, he was so capable of mocking up that
later on this poor, little, weak ole thetan, years and years and centuries
and so forth afterwards going back to mock up this rock-uh-uh- it's too
beefy. That's too much engram for him to confront first off.
So you choose the engrams-it doesn't much matter what you choose. You
will find that every sexual incident you contact is a bounce from a death.
A little rule for you. So don't let me catch anybody in the HGC running
prenatals, birth, conception, because that is a bounce. Those are all tied
in with the death, and the death is the engram which is necessary to
resolve the case. So you keep running Past and Future Experience until you
get them down to that-OK? Leave the second dynamic incidents severely
alone.
Now it can be that he died, and he died is followed by a conception
sequence, and he goes back to the old body to see if it is still decently
buried-you know-and then he can't find the person that he thought he was
going to be, get the next body from, and he gets all confused. And mess-ups
of this character can occur. But keep him on the incident. Is this part of
the text? When you finish a death and go through the exteriorization
sequence, right at the end of it there is a conception or a
prenatal or a birth. They quite ordinarily bounce into it, and you don't
want it. You want nothing to do with it. So you stop him when you have got
all of the exteriorization run.
There is a lot to know about engrams. You have been taught all this,
but I am just showing you what you can do to win in the HGC with Engram
Running. This would be a good, clean job then.
Every time you run an engram, now is the time to use some Not-Is
Straight Wire, with its ordinary commands which you know. They are:
"Recall something that you implied was unimportant." "Recall something
somebody else thought was important."
Don't ever let a pc run it in reverse, because it discharges havingness
in about five commands. That is real rough the other way, too.
All right. Now there we have a rundown that will get engrams run, that
will get ordinary, run-of-the-mill cases squared around, and that will get
a lot done. But what about people who were not through the American 21st?
And during that period of time up until they start in with a Theta Clearing
Course, to run actual engrams on pcs, how about these people? Well, you
have Selected Person Overts, with the "withhold" command added, and you
will have a new bulletin out on these things, and so forth. We want that
auditing to be relatively muzzled. It will win and everything will go along
just dandy. But if you have got some case (and this is more for D.O.P.s
than anything else)-if you have got some case that was awfully hard to
start, very low random profile, you'd better turn it over to a graduate of
the 21st American. And if you have got some case that, after he ran along
for a while and was getting up to a point where he'd just run engrams
beautifully, and the whole track's opening up, everything is going along
just dandy, and it is certain that the engram necessary to resolve the case
is just waiting, give him an auditor that can run it.
In other words, you can run an HGC this way: You can get some auditors
that set pcs up to run engrams. You got the idea? And then you can have
some auditors that run engrams. This is not any real violation of the
Auditor's Code, because that will still give him the best processes and the
best treatment for the pc that can be given.
Now there is no reason why, particularly after a staff Theta Clearing
Course, that everybody can't run a regimen of this sort. But running it in
the HGC, with all the profiles being submitted to me and all the Case
Analysis Reports-the Case Analysis Reports now are more vital than
profiles, because R changed on a case does not necessarily change the
profile at all. You should know about that. You can change the R of the
case without changing the profile. The person answered the same questions,
only he answered them with Reality. This is quite remarkable. We need a
brand new test. That test is in development right at this moment. It is a
confront test, and that test will be coming up, but there is no reason to
rush it, particularly. Let's just do it by Case Analysis.
I will get out a Bulletin that will take care of auditors who were not
trained to run engrams, what they will run. But you already have data and
material on this, and it is just as before, what you have been running.
Now, to start a case out with NOT-IS STRAIGHT WIRE is adventurous.
That's an adventurous thing to do. That's a rough thing to do. We learned a
great many things in the 21st American ACC. Learned a great many things,
and that was one of them. Selected Persons Overt-Withhold is very, very
superior in undercutting cases to Selected Persons Overts. The only main
change we have got is that we run Selected Person Overt-Withhold commands,
just as it is given here in PT problem. That is a wonderful thing to do
with a case, as long as the terminal is real to the pc. And there is no
real reason that running a Scientologist, who knows what the command is,
why ARC Break Straight Wire cannot be run on a person by an auditor who has
not been through an Engram Running Course. That's a beautiful process.
I want to tell you something else. Can I tell you something here? A lot of
research was done in the 21st American ACC, and students didn't see me as
much as they thought they should, I suppose, but I was around. And I never
saw so many flips and changes and vagaries in my life as I saw in that
particular unit. The reports which I got were very-very helpful to me-very,
very helpful to Scientology at large. There was a great deal done in that
course. I spent about three weeks of the course-did very rapid research
just in catching up with some of these undercuts. Because, let me assure
you, the R factor in most of the cases you approach is so low that it poses
a problem of running greater than we had ever imagined. Therefore, these
are the processes that we are handing out.
Now, these are a Not-Is type of process. Dynamic Straight Wire runs a
straight identification, but the rest of these things are Not-Is types of
processes. To cure somebody from not-ising. When a person can confront
something, he no longer has to not-is it.
But there was a funny command came up along the line, that I don't
fully understand yet, but it takes care of a theta body. Now this is part
of the research that was never given to the 21st American. And this is a
peculiar darned thing. You can write it down on the back of this Bulletin,
if you want to.
It is:
"Recall a time when you thought something bad was unimportant."
And that is just about the wildest thing you ever saw. Now that runs
all by itself but can be combined with:
"Recall a time somebody else thought something bad was important."
And you will run all the newspapers off the case. The second command
there is really not essential, but you just run this first command
repetitively, and if it seems to run down or something bad happens, flip
over to the other command. But you will as-is a theta body.
This is the doggondest thing you ever saw. It is a perfectly wild
pitch. I was just adding up all possible combinations and working in all
possible directions, and this one fell out of the hamper, and it doesn't
integrate too well with the rest of your data. But this is the goofy one.
Now, something else came up in the 21st American that I should tell you
in the HGC, and that is: After nine years, we have found out WHY. We had
nine years of HOW, and now in the ninth year we find out why. Why people
are aberrated. Why they are sick. Why they act the way they do. Why
individuation takes place. And that is all wrapped up with WITHHOLD. I had
withhold earlier, but didn't shake it all out of the hamper, because I
didn't have the overts to go with it. We find out that an individual gets
sick by having the overt impulse to make somebody else sick and then
withholds it, because it is less social to give people illnesses. So he
gets them himself. This is Freudian transference, it is a whole number of
things. So when you run these overts, run the withhold with it and the case
will start finding out why.
The theta body thing, and the masses and ridges, why, they run out when
you ask a person to recall a time when he thought something bad was
unimportant, or recall-well, that is the best command-recall a time when he
thought something bad was unimportant. When you run this, you evidently run
the center pin of the withhold. But you will get his tolerance. And this is
the first straight ethical process, evidently, we have. It raises a
person's ethics. It as-ises a theta body. It takes demon bodies and things
like that off cases. I tested it two or three times here, just monkeying
around with this thing, and it is one of the wilder ones. This is a wild
pitch, that particular process.
So you could say that when a field doesn't immediately disintegrate,
when you can't get an individual easily in the engram, when the field stays
persistently black or something like that, you have got another string to
your bow, and I don't care if you
use it. But if you do use it, know this: It runs as an automaticity on such
a demon case. He runs br-r-r-r-t-the last two thousand years he has been
not-ising and saying it was unimportant that something was bad. And he will
start coming up with, "Well, I should do something-no, I shouldn't do
something-well, what is this? I should do something about it. I shouldn't
do something about it. I have been very neglectful, but that really isn't
bad. Not really. Somebody dying from the bullet wound I gave 'em-that
really isn't bad. But-" And he is stuck right with the consideration on all
of his overts-consequences of overts. They all must be unimportant. And it
reduces his ethical level. But I have now seen two demon bodies
disintegrate just with that one command just disintegrate-and this is the
first time we ever had something that would disintegrate the astral body.
So we find out at once that the astral body was an aberration. It isn't a
necessary thing to make a thetan stick in the head at all.
All right. Now I wanted to give you this rundown, because today you
were having a little bit of a rough time doing a transition from student to
pro auditor, and I wanted to talk to you, even though it burned up some of
your valuable time and mine. And ask you to sic semper transit, huh?
Now are there any questions? Yes, Jean.
Q. I have two questions. In running of the engram, do you ignore what
they were running in the ACC, or do you just go back and run them? My
preclear has had several engrams started.
A. Now, if we look over this carefully, we see in running an incident:
Find the engram necessary to resolve the case. Once you have chosen it and
have begun to run it, be sure you have the motivator and the overt and then
do not, do not, do not, do not, depart from that incident to run another
that "drops better" or comes up. Now look here. The engrams that were run
on them in the course are no longer going to fall. And an engram is not
going to show on an E-Meter. And if there were several engrams run on
somebody in the course, and the first one wasn't flattened, then whoever
audited them ought to be hit in the head with a sledge-hammer. There's only
one or two cases that got by with this, that I have checked up on so far,
and it is about the most serious blunder that could be made. Now, what you
do in a case that's had an engram already started is get a lie reaction
check-that's all you want-of some sort or another, concerning this
particular thing. You can put him on the E-Meter and ask him if it was run,
and so forth, and ask him which one was the first one run. You could
possibly get an occlusion, but usually the pc will tell you. There's no
particular reason to doubt the pc. Get the first one, and get that one
flat, and then you have no choice but to pick up the next one and flatten
that one.
This applies without regard to how many auditors were on the case. This
also, you will find out, will sometimes apply to somebody who had an engram
audited in 1950. The only trouble with a 1950 engram is that it is probably
an operation in the current lifetime, or a prenatal in the current
lifetime, and it was the wrong engram necessary to resolve the case, and
you won't get very far running the thing. And we have no data at this time,
whether it's best to pick that one up and run it or not. But I would say
for sure that an engram that should have been run to resolve the case, such
as a past death, if that was ever entered in all of those years, including
1950-it may no longer drop on the E-Meter, because some of its charge is
gone. That is the engram necessary to resolve the case.
Yes, got another one?
Q. Yes. The Dynamic Straight Wire-do you keep running this until you
have picked up all the daffy terminals, then go through it several times
and get the daffy ones each time?
A. If you get a daffy one, if you get several daffy ones, you take
those you got on the first run and run them. Don't bother to go through
again, because it will have straightened out. Enough will have straightened
out to admit progress of the case. But if you don't get any daffy ones
through once, then run it again. Any other questions? Dale.
Dale: I just had a comment on that. One 1950 engram, in which the auditor
blew session because it was whole track, was the engram necessary to
resolve the case and finally showed up. The guy had been black since 1950.
A. Good. Picked it up and flattened it. Well, that's a good job. That
tells you that a black case, then, doesn't necessarily require five or six
weeks of preparation before you run an engram. You pick up an engram as
early as you can on a case and charge through. But it doesn't get you
around starting a case. You have always got to start a case or start a
session. Yes?
Q. On this re-experience process, do I run it until I get 3-D pictures,
and track?
A. Yes. Oh, 3-D pictures and back in PT. Back in PT. I'll give you an
example of one of these. Here's the pc. He is sitting in a terror charge,
in a total black freeze, at 1500 AD. One second later, everything went to
hell. One second before, everything had gone to hell. And he's sitting in
this split second, at a rest point. Got it? Well, now, what do you think
happens when you start asking him about future and past, alternately? He'll
move right off that rest point, won't he? So this is an explosive, doggoned
process. Now, I say you run it until he gets to PT. Some time or other you
might find it impossible to get him to PT on the process. You just might.
But the experience that has been had with it so far is that it does
eventually move him to PT. Now is the time to take him back, at the
auditor's discretion, and have him run that incident in which he was stuck.
By the way, "What part of PT are you willing to experience?" has on
several cases exposed the engram necessary to resolve the case. It is the
engram he's sitting in, and it is the one necessary to resolve the case.
Yes?
Q. If you leave a process very unflat one afternoon, and come back in
the morning and start questioning the guy, and you pick up first of all
present time problems. Now supposing that process is the basic of his
present time problem of the morning. Are he and you the terminals, the
preclear and auditor the two terminals?
A. Yes.
Q. Do you run it that way?
A. Oh, well, if he got a lot of ARC breaks, it would be a good thing to
run it this way. That would clean up all the ARC breaks, wouldn't it?
Now I am going to give you that again on ARC breaks. This is the
hottest one to run ARC breaks on. Just pick up the auditor and pick up the
pc, as the two people involved in the present time problem. I am glad you
brought that up, Joe.
This idea of throwing him back into session after you have ended a
session the day before is another point of judgment. Just how do you
smoothly get him into it? Usually he has piled up something on top of the
engram. There is a process here, which is not really a very good process,
but which kicks them out, and it was not given in this ACC. That is
Problems of Comparable Magnitude to that Engram, or that Incident. It will
actually de-intensify an engram. You should have that as a little panacea.
That is an interesting one to wind up an intensive on. About noon of
the last day you all of a sudden realize, "Boy, this man isn't going to
make it." And you could run a problem of comparable magnitude to that
engram and get it keyed out. However, you are better than that, and you
will have had it flat by the last day of the last intensive he has, that's
for sure. Any other questions? Don?
Q. Is "recall something" preferred over "recall a time"? I have heard
"Recall a time you did something to somebody," and also "Recall something
you did to somebody," which is slightly different.
A. "Recall a time" is always a superior process, unless the individual
is consistently not recalling a time, at which time he is not obeying the
auditing command. So you should say, "Recall something you have done to" to
somebody who can't spot something on a time track.
Q. What's the difference there?
A. You are running really two processes with "Recall a time you did
something," and you are running only one process, "Recall something you
have done."
Q. Can he continue to do that without recalling a time?
A. Yeah. Definitely. Anything else?
"Recall a time," all by itself-you just sit down and say to a pc,
"Recall a time. Thank you. Recall a time. Thank you." Some interesting
things would happen to a case. Time, you see, is the single aberration.
Joe?
Q. In running an engram, when you are tagging the engram for the first
time, is it possible to peg, say, a 2-ton motivator and a one-pound overt,
and that's the incident?
A. Yes. Because until they get some of the overt flat, the motivator
will come off. The right one to run there, by the way, is the overt. You
get that overt damn real, and all of a sudden you'll find the 20-tons have
departed down to about 1 0-tons on the motivator. Now they'll run on
comparable lines. Yes.
Q. Couldn't you have, say, a 20-ton motivator, as he was saying, and
twenty one-ton overts tied to the same motivator, rather than one large
overt?
A. You could. You could. Nevertheless, you'll find somebody getting all
loused up on this, and best remedy is just to play what overt you find
against what motivator you find as the incident. And just keep playing them
one against the other, back and forth, back and forth, and eventually the
thing will come out right.
There are many remedies, and one is Selected Persons Overt-Withhold
Straight Wire on the personnel of the incident. You could take any incident
as a PT and run any PT process on the incident. That's a little rule. I
don't advise you doing it, however, but you can do it. It's very
interesting: "Find something unimportant about that executioner," is just
about the same as, "Find something unimportant about this room." If you
want to get a reality soaring on a pc, just run "Find something unimportant
about this room." And he'll start this not-is machinery going, you know,
and he'll run it out to some degree, and all of a sudden the room will
brighten up. Very interesting.
"Think of something you did to an executioner" would be it, rather
than, "Think of something you did to that executioner." And he will come up
with the overt, and he will find out he was the executioner in the same
castle for about three lifetimes before he suddenly came back there and got
executed. That usually is the way these things compare.
Any other questions? There is a burning question that you should ask,
is: "Are we supposed to run these things muzzled?" Now, let me just say
this, to do this for me: Let's cut down the unnecessary yak. And if the pc
seems to be ARC breaking at all, you voluntarily muzzle your auditing. You
got it? Because what he's got is an engram of being talked to or being
interrogated in some fashion, and everything that he doesn't consider
exactly necessary to the auditing session he resents. So if you find a pc
is ARC breaking, you muzzle your session. Any other questions before we
break this up?
Thank you very much for your time, I appreciate very much your coming
in. I know you had a hard day getting on to a new routine, and you have got
auxiliary duties. Several people in the HGC have been split off of
administration, and there are other things going on. Latch on to 'em, get
wheeling, but let's start making theta clears in this HGC and just make
nothing else but theta clears. I have given you a pattern here that was
thoroughly tested out in the 21st American ACC, and you can make theta
clears-there's no great difficulty to it. Thank you very much.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:ng.rd.lh
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[Supplemented by HCO B 10 March 1959, Supplemental Data Sheet......., page
439.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 19 FEBRUARY 1959
AUDITOR'S CODE #19
Do not explain, justify or make excuses for any auditor mistakes
whether real or imagined.
LRH:-.rd L. RON
HUBBARD
[Some copies of the above HCO B were issued incorrectly dated 9 February
1959.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 24 FEBRUARY 1959
TECHNICAL BULLETIN
SELECTED PERSONS OVERT WITHHOLD STRAIGHTWIRE
It is not only unreasonable but impossible to run engrams or higher
processes than Selected Persons Overt Withhold on people who have low
reality and low responsibility. Selected Persons Overt Withhold raises both
reality and responsibility and some of the cases around will only start to
respond after four to five weeks of Selected Persons Overt Withhold
Straightwire. But the main point is that they do-repeat, do respond.
We have got it made in Selected Persons Overt Withhold Straightwire.
Let's not lose it.
Selected Persons Overt Withhold Straightwire
Select a person (terminal) that is real to the preclear.
Run "Recall something you have done to " (that terminal) and
"Recall something you have withheld from (that terminal)" alternately.
(one question after the other)
Wherever the person has a misidentification or a fixated terminal on
any dynamic, that terminal should be selected out and flattened by Selected
Persons Overt Withhold Straightwire. We will be rid of these unresponsible
cases.
Do not graduate into General Overts until Selected Person Overt
Withhold Straightwire is flat. When is Selected Persons Overt Withhold
Straightwire flat? It is flat when the preclear has come up tone through
shame, blame, regret, and a recognition of his own failures and preferably
4.0 on the tone scale as per "Science of Survival".
Minimize the two-way communication, clean up present time problems with
the same process, using the terminals involved in the present time problem,
and if in doubt MUZZLE the auditor.
LRH:mc.msp,rd L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 26 FEBRUARY 1959
IDENTIFICATION
I received the following dispatch from Jack Parkhouse, in South Africa:
"On going around the Union with the Film shows so far provided a point
of correlation between attendance figures and groups has been noticed which
may be of interest to you.
1. Pretoria-had biggest group in Union before establishment of
HASI-run on the 'everybody's equal basis'. Film show result: Worst
attendance so far.
2. Cape Town-second largest 'everybody's equal' group. Second
worst attendance.
3. Port Elizabeth-third largest group-mainly run on an equality
basis. Third worst attendance.
4. East London-large group established by HASI trained auditor on
CCH. Good on control-gets people to help but definitely not on
equality basis. Attendance best yet-over �200 receipts including
book sales."
What price identification?
Best,
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 26 FEBRUARY 1959
ENGRAM RUNNING ON OLD DIANETIC CASES
OR RESTARTED CASES
It has been found that the abandonment of an unflattened engram to
start another one can leave the case in an apparent jam. Starting a new
engram without flattening the first one contacted may be, to the preclear,
the same as a command not to confront the first engram.
Stable data: The incident entered by the auditor must be wholly
flattened by Scientology commands before a second incident is approached.
The end goal of running incidents is the increasing of the ability to
confront.
When incidents are started and not finished in favour of a new
incident, the preclear may feel he is being forbidden to confront the first
one.
An incident consists of an overt engram and a motivator engram on the
same subject.
It is evidently necessary to scout the earlier auditing of any incident
that was abandoned in order to get the incident run. Otherwise, a black
detachment may result. The blackness and the detachment may exist in the
earlier auditing of the same incident rather than in the incident.
The intention of a bad auditor is to prevent confronting. Therefore,
bad auditing must be cleared away before a contacted engram can be
completely entered again.
The process that most swiftly strips off bad auditing (to clean up
engrams or otherwise) is:
"Recall something you have done to (auditor's name)."
"Recall something you have withheld from (auditor's name)."
These questions are run alternately (one after the other) and are best
run muzzled. (TR 0, 1, 2 and 3 only-auditor only nods when preclear
originates.)
This mechanism is probably behind most black or invisible cases now
extant in Scientology.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd
[pic]
Issue 90 M [1959, ca. late February]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
How to Study Scientology
L. Ron Hubbard
The first thing that a student has to find out for himself and then
recognize, is that he is dealing with precision tools here in the courses.
It isn't up to someone else to force this piece of information on him. The
whole subject of Scientology as far as the student is concerned is as good
or bad in direct ratio to his knowledge of it. It is up to a student to
find out how precise these tools are. He should, before he starts to
discuss, criticize or attempt to improve on the data presented to him, find
out for himself whether or not the mechanics of Scientology are as stated,
and whether or not it does what has been proposed for it.
He should make up his mind about each thing that is taught in the
school. The procedure, techniques, mechanics and theory. He should ask
himself these questions: Does this piece of data exist? Is it true? Does it
work? Will it produce the best possible results in the shortest time?
There are two ways to answer these questions to his own satisfaction:
Find them in a preclear or find them in himself. These are fundamentals,
and every auditor should undertake to discover them himself, thus raising
Scientology above an authoritarian category. It is not sufficient that an
instructor stand before him and declare the existence of these. Each and
every student must determine for himself whether or not the instructor's
statements are true.
As an example of a science in an Authoritarian Category, in the field
of medicine some instructors declare that multiple sclerosis is the decay
of nervous fibers, and that it is incurable, and that people who contract
the "disease" die in a relatively short period of time. It must be answered
in just this way on the examination paper or the student will find himself
with less than a passing grade. This is not instruction-this is
obstruction. In the first place, no one in a medical school knows anything
about multiple sclerosis. A good instructor would expect his students to
question such a statement and to find for themselves what can be done about
multiple sclerosis.
There are two ways Man ordinarily accepts things, neither of them very
good. One is to accept a statement because Authority says it is true and
must be accepted, and the other is by preponderance of agreement amongst
other people.
Preponderance of agreement is all too often the general public test for
sanity or insanity. Suppose someone were to walk into a crowded room and
suddenly point to a ceiling saying, "Oh, look! There's a huge, twelve-foot
spider on the ceiling!" Everyone
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
would look up, but no one else would see the spider. Finally someone would
tell him so. "Oh, yes, there is," he would declare, and become very angry
when he found that no one would agree with him. If he continued to declare
his belief in the existence of the spider he would very soon find himself
institutionalized.
The basic definition of sanity in this somewhat nebulously learned
society is whether or not a person agrees with everyone else. It is a very
sloppy manner of accepting evidence, but all too often it is the primary
measuring stick.
And then the Rule of Authority: "Does Dr. J. Doe agree with your
proposition? No? Then, of course, it cannot be true. Dr. Doe is an eminent
authority in the field."
A man by the name of Galen at one time dominated the field of medicine.
Another man by the name of Harvey upset Galen's cozy position with a new
theory of blood circulation. Galen had been agreeing with the people of his
day concerning the "tides" of the blood. They knew nothing about heart
action. They accepted everything they had been taught and did little
observing of their own. Harvey worked at the Royal Medical Academy, and
found by animal vivisection the actual function of the heart.
He had the good sense to keep his findings absolutely quiet for a
while. Leonardo da Vinci had somehow discovered or postulated the same
thing, but he was a "crazy artist" and no one would believe an artist.
Harvey was a member of the audience of a play by Shakespeare in which the
playwright made the same observation, but again the feeling that artists
never contribute anything to society blocked anyone but Harvey from
considering the statement as anything more than fiction.
Finally, Harvey made his announcement. Immediately dead cats, rotten
fruit and pieces of wine jugs were hurled in his direction. He raised quite
a commotion in medical and social circles until finally, in desperation,
one doctor made the historical statement that, "I would rather err with
Galen than be right with Harvey!"
Man would have made an advance of exactly zero if this had always been
the only method of testing evidence. But every so often during Man's
progress there have been rebels who were not satisfied with preponderance
of opinion, and who tested a fact for themselves, observing and accepting
the data of their observation, and then testing again.
Possibly the first man who made a flint axe looked over a piece of
flint and decided that the irregular stone could be chipped a certain way.
When he found that flint would chip easily he must have rushed to his tribe
and enthusiastically tried to teach his fellow tribesmen how to make axes
in the shape they desired instead of spending months searching for
accidental pieces of stone of just the right shape. The chances are he was
stoned out of camp.
Indulging in a further flight of fancy, it is not difficult to imagine
that he finally managed to convince another fellow that his technique
worked, and that the two of them tied down a third with a piece of vine and
forced him to watch them chip a flint axe from a rough stone. Finally,
after convincing fifteen or twenty tribesmen by forceful demonstration, the
followers of the new technique declared war on the rest of the tribe and,
winning, forced the tribe to agree by decree.
EVALUATION OF DATA
Man has never known very much about that with which his mind is chiefly
filled: Data. What is data? What is the evaluation of data? For instance,
if you have been in Scientology very long the chances are that someone has
glibly told you that he knew from psychoanalysis that if one could remember
childhood experiences one could be
relieved of certain psychosomatic pains. His conclusion from this tiny
scrap of information was that Scientology is not new. In 1884 when Breuer
first presented this tiny fact to Freud, he was unable to convince the
eminent Doctor, but he managed to convince Freud in the next ten years.
Then Freud convinced his friends. Medicine then fought Freud to a
standstill, but eventually psychoanalysis emerged from the imbroglio.
All these years in which psychoanalysis has taught its tenets to each
generation of doctors the authoritarian method was used, as can be verified
by reading a few of the books on the subject. Within them is found,
interminably, "Freud said ...." The truly important thing is not that
"Freud said" a thing, but "Is the data valuable? If it is valuable, how
valuable is it?" You might say that a datum is as valuable as it has been
evaluated. A datum can be proved in ratio to whether it can be evaluated by
other data and its magnitude is established by how many other data it
clarifies. Thus, the biggest datum possible would be one which would
clarify and identify all knowledge known to Man in the material universe.
Unfortunately, however, there is no such thing as a Prime Datum. There
must be not one datum, but two data, since a datum is of no use unless it
can be evaluated. Furthermore, there must be a datum of similar magnitude
with which to evaluate any given datum.
Data is your data only so long as you have evaluated it. It is your
data by authority or it is your data. If it is your data by authority,
somebody has forced it upon you, and at best it is little more than a light
aberration. Of course, if you asked a question of a man whom you thought
knew his business and he gave you his answer, that datum was not forced
upon you. But if you went away from him believing from then on that such a
datum existed without taking the trouble to investigate the answer for
yourself-without comparing it to the known universe-you were falling short
of completing the cycle of learning.
Mechanically, the major thing wrong with the mind is, of course, the
turbulence in it, but the overburden of information in this society is
enforced education that the individual has never been permitted to test.
Literally, when you are told not to take anyone's word as an absolute datum
you are being asked to break a habit pattern forced upon you when you were
a child.
Your instructor in Scientology could have told you what he found to be
true and invited you to test it for yourself, but unless you have tested it
you very likely do not have the fundamentals of Scientology in mind well
enough to be comfortable in the use of any or all of the techniques
available to you. This is why theory is so heavily stressed in Scientology.
The instructor can tell you what he has found to be true and what others
have found to be true, but at no time should he ask you to accept it-please
allow a plea otherwise.
Test it for yourself and convince yourself whether or not it exists as
truth. And if you find that it does exist, you will be comfortable
thereafter; otherwise, unrecognized even by yourself you are likely to
find, down at the bottom of your information and education an unresolved
question which will itself undermine your ability to assimilate or practice
anything in the line of a technique. Your mind will not be as facile on the
subject as it should be. It is not through courtesy that you are being
asked to check your data-you are being asked to become much better auditors
by resolving your basic and fundamental concepts.
Any quarrel you may have with theory is something that only you can
resolve. Is the theory correct, or isn't it correct? Only you can answer
that; it cannot be answered for you. You can be told what other auditors
have achieved in the way of results, and
what other auditors have observed, but you cannot become truly educated
until you have achieved the results for yourself. The moment a man opens
his mouth and asks, "Where is validation?" you can be sure you are looking
at a very stupid man. That man is saying, bluntly and abruptly, "I cannot
think for myself. I have to have Authority." Where could he possibly look
for validation except into the physical universe, and into his own
subjective and objective reality?
A LOOK AT THE SCIENCES
Unfortunately, Scientology is surrounded by a world that calls itself a
world of science, but it is a world that is in actuality a world of
Authority. True, that which is science today is far, far in advance of the
Hindu concept of the world wherein a hemisphere rested on the backs of
seven elephants which stood on seven pillars, that stood on the back of a
mud turtle, below which was mud into infinity.
The reason engineering and physics have reached out so far in advance
of other sciences is the fact that they pose problems which punish Man so
violently if he doesn't look carefully into the physical universe.
An engineer is faced with the problem of drilling a tunnel through a
mountain for a railroad. Tracks are laid up to the mountain on either side.
If he judges space wrongly the two tunnel entrances would fail to meet on
the same level in the center. It would be so evident to one and all
concerned that the engineer made a mistake that he takes great care not to
make such a mistake. He observes the physical universe, not only to the
extent that the tunnel must meet to a fraction of an inch, but to the
extent that if he were to misjudge wrongly the character of the rock
through which he drills, the tunnel would cave in-an incident which would
be considered a very unlucky and unfortunate occurrence to railroading.
Biology comes closer to being a science than some others because, in
the field of biology, if someone makes too big a mistake about a bug the
immediate result can be dramatic and terrifying. Suppose a biologist is
charged with the responsibility of injecting plankton into a water
reservoir. Plankton are microscopic "germs" that are very useful to Man.
But if through some mistake the biologist injects typhoid germs into the
water supply, there would be an immediate and dramatic result.
Suppose a biologist is presented with the task of producing a culture
of yeast which would, when placed in white bread dough, stain the bread
brown. This man is up against the necessity of creating a yeast which not
only behaves as yeast but makes a dye as well. He has to deal with the
practical aspect of the problem, because after he announces his success,
there is the "yeast test": Is the bread edible? And the brown-bread test:
Is the bread brown? Anyone could easily make the test, and everyone would
know very quickly whether or not the biologist had succeeded or failed.
Politics is called a science. The punishment for a mistake in the
"science" of politics is so tremendous that this whole culture is on the
verge of being wiped out! There are natural laws about politics. They could
be worked out if someone were to actually apply a scientific basis to
political research.
For instance, it is a foregone conclusion that if all communications
lines are cut between the United States and Russia, Russia and the United
States are going to understand each other less and less. Then by
demonstrating to everyone how the American way of life and the Russian way
of life are different, and by demonstrating it day after day, year after
year, there is no alternative but a break of affinity. By stating flatly
that Russia and the United States are not in agreement on any slightest
political theory or conduct of Man or nations the job is practically
complete. Both nations will go into anger tone and suddenly there is war.
Russia is very, very low on the tone scale. She is a totalitarian slave
state and about as safe to have in the family of nations as a mad dog at a
cocktail party. We as a nation could be very, very clever-we could try to
put Russia back together again.
We are a nation possessed of the greatest communications networks on
the face of the Earth, with an undreamed of manufacturing potential. We
have within our borders the best advertising men in the world. But instead
of selling Europe an idea we give machine guns, planes and tanks for use in
case Russia breaks out. The more threats imposed against a country in
Russia's tone level, the more dangerous that country will become. When
people are asked what they would do about this grave question, they shrug
and say something to the effect that "the politicians know best." They
hedge and rationalize by saying that after all, there is the American way
of life, and it must be protected.
What is the American way of life? This is a question that will stop
almost any American. What is the American way of life that is different
from the human way of life? We have tried to gather together economic
freedom for the individual, freedom of the press, and individual freedom,
and define them as a strictly American way of life-why hasn't it been
called the Human Way of Life?
In the field of humanities Science has been thoroughly adrift.
Unquestioned authoritarian principles have been followed. Any person who
accepts knowledge without questioning it and evaluating it for himself is
demonstrating himself to be in apathy toward that sphere of knowledge. It
demonstrates that the people in the United States today must be in a low
state of apathy with regard to politics in order to accept without question
everything that happens.
FUNDAMENTALS
When a man tries to erect the plans of a lifetime or a profession on
data which he himself has never evaluated, he cannot possibly succeed.
Fundamentals are very, very important, but first of all one must learn
how to think in order to be absolutely sure of a fundamental. Thinking is
not particularly hard to learn. It consists merely of comparing a
particular datum with the physical universe as it is known and observed.
How, for instance, would you find out for your own satisfaction that there
exists such a thing as a mock-up. Find a preclear who is also interested in
verifying such existence of mock-ups or have someone run you on them.
Your instructor has done this a sufficient number of times, and has
seen it done to others a sufficient number of times to satisfy himself that
mock-ups exist and can be run and bettered on a preclear. But just because
they exist for him and he informs you of his knowledge does not mean that
it exists for you. Unless you have made up your mind through comparison of
the information with the known universe, you will not be able to handle
mock-ups properly. When there is an authoritarian basis for your education
you are not truly educated.
Authoritarianism is little more than a form of hypnotism. Learning is
forced under threat of some form of punishment. A student is stuffed with
data which has not been individually evaluated just as a taxidermist would
stuff a snake. Such a student will be well-informed and well-educated
according to present-day standards, but unfortunately he will not be very
successful in his chosen profession.
Indecision underlies an authoritarian statement. Do not allow your
Scientology education to lie on the quicksand of indecision.
Unless you have looked into the matter of engrams and unless you have
actually run a preclear into an engram-the realization that (I) there is a
time track, and (2)
that physical pain can be stored and can be recovered, and (3) that all the
perceptics are registered during these moments of unconsciousness, will not
be yours. Your knowledge concerning the engram depends exclusively upon
what you have observed about that engram.
There have been volumes of articles written about techniques of running
engrams. There are many techniques in existence which run them. Make up
your mind whether or not they work for you.
First of all, find out to your own satisfaction whether or not there is
an engram in existence. Then determine whether or not the technique in
question will discover the engram for you, and whether or not the technique
really runs the engram. Having made certain that there is an engram, ask
yourself what kind of technique you would evolve if you decided to do
something about this object, the engram. How would you go about it? Unless
you have asked yourself this question and tried to come to a definite
conclusion about it, you will never come into agreement on the technique of
running engrams! You will be performing an authoritarian rote. You can
learn how to run an engram by rote, but unless you decide from your own
observation that there is an engram to be run you will be simply performing
some ritual in which a mistake is very easy to make.
An auditor who does not understand memory has no business attempting to
improve a preclear's memory. He could hardly know what the anatomy of
memory is. It cannot be done well by rote. About the worst thing that could
happen to a preclear is to drop into something and then feel that the
auditor is thinking, "Now, let's see-it was page 62 . . . or was it 63? . .
. and the question was . . ." while the preclear sits there, suffering, and
thinking, "Do something! Say something!" An auditor who is auditing by rote
will make mistakes like that because he does not have the basic
fundamentals as a part of his background of training.
A truly good auditor doesn't have to think twice. He knows
"instinctively" how the auditing session itself should be run. When the
basic fundamentals are securely the auditor's own there is no need for him
to be told what must be done.
You are asked to examine the subject of Scientology on a critical basis-
a very critical basis. It is not to be examined with the attitude that when
you were in school you learned that such and such was true, and since you
learned that first, the first learning takes precedence. A prime example of
this is the literary critic who says, after reviewing a book, that the book
is not a novel because it is not a cross section of life. His professor in
literature gave him a passing grade because he answered the question
"correctly" on his examination paper, and therefore a book is not a novel
unless it is a cross section of life.
There is yet to appear a good definition for aesthetics and art, and
yet they parrot a definition for a specific form of art!
Do not make the mistake of criticizing something on the basis of
whether or not it concurs with the opinions of someone else. The point
which is pertinent is whether or not it concurs with your opinion. Does it
agree with what you think?
Nearly everyone has done some manner of observing of the material
universe, and there is surely no one in Scientology who has not done some
small amount of observation of organisms. No one has seen all there is to
see about an organism, but there is certainly no dearth of organisms
available for further study. There is no valid reason for accepting the
opinion of Professor Blotz of the Blitz University who said in 1933 that
schizophrenics were schizophrenics, and that made them schizophrenics for
all the time.
If you are interested in the manifestation of insanity, there is any and
every form of insanity that you could hope to see in a lifetime in almost
any part of the world. Study the peculiarities of the people around you and
wonder what they would be like if their little peculiarities were magnified
a hundred fold. You may find that by listing all the observable
peculiarities you would have a complete list of all the insanities in the
world. This list might well be far more accurate than that which was
advanced by Kraepelin and used in the United States today.
If sanity is rationality and insanity is irrationality, and you
postulated how irrational people would be if certain of their obsessions
were magnified a hundred fold, you might well have in your possession a far
more accurate and complete list of insanities and their manifestations than
is currently in existence.
If you will take the time and effort, then, of making a complete
examination of your subject, introspectively and by observation, you will
find that you have suddenly become an excellent auditor. The hard way is to
sit down and memorize a third of a million words contained in Science of
Survival-the method all too many educational systems employ in this age.
So then we ask you to look at Scientology, study it, question it, and
use it as we present it and you will have discovered something for
yourself. And in so doing you might well discover a lot more. What you will
be doing in Scientology, the techniques and the theories are highly
workable, but they are not highly workable just because we say so!
Since Scientology is a very precise science based on proven data,
axioms, and precise procedures, it must be used exactly as stated in order
to gain the results which have been obtained. By using it with
understanding the student can observe for himself its workability. When you
have applied it as it should be, and applied as it is taught at the school,
and still find it unworkable, it is your privilege to question it and, if
you like, reject it.
But it is a very funny thing, in the history of Scientology the only
people who have shouted out against Scientology are those people who know
little or nothing about it or they have been given some erroneous data
about it and had used a very bad perversion of Scientology and said, "This
is the way it is."
So, the only advice we can give to the student is study Scientology for
itself and use it exactly as stated, then form his own opinions. Study it
with the purpose in mind of arriving at his own conclusions as to whether
or not the tenets he has assimilated are correct and workable. Compare what
you have learned with the known universe. Seek for the reasons behind a
manifestation, and postulate the manner and in which direction the
manifestation will likely proceed. Do not allow the Authority of any one
person or school of thought to create a foregone conclusion within your
sphere of knowledge. Only with these principles of education in mind can
you become a truly educated individual and a good Scientologist.
L. RON
HUBBARD
[The above article was reissued under the same title in Ability 139, ca.
June 1962. Parts of the above text were originally issued as Dianetic
Auditor's Bulletin, Vol. 2, No. 1, July 1951, Education and the Auditor-see
Volume I, page 124.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 27 FEBRUARY 1959
For All Staff
All U.S. Official Offices
London for reissue
HOW TO SELECT SELECTED PERSONS
(Supplementing HCO Bulletin of February 16, 1959)
In Selected Persons Overt Straightwire, there is an element of
diagnosis. How does one select the "selected person"?
Every time this process misses on a preclear, one of three things is at
fault, either-
1. Pc has pt problem
2. Dynamic Straight Wire should have been run a week or two
3. The wrong person was selected for the process.
The whole thing is a matter of attention units (1950). If the preclear
has his attention totally fixed on a terminal, little else is real to him.
Look at one object only in a room. How real are the other objects? If a
preclear's attention is all bound up in some person, how can he find
reality elsewhere.
Very well-how do we find, then, the "selected person"?
The most loaded two-way comm question is,
"Who in your life is to blame for the condition you're in?"
Others of like ilk produce the "selected person" you then run on
Selected Persons Overt Straight Wire.
"Who was the person who really had it in for you?"
"Who do you know or did you know that you'd really hate to be?"
If the pc to any of the above or all of them says, "myself", that's
what you have to run.
Select a new person each time pc splits off the one you're running.
You'll find some amazing valence shifts.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:mg.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 FEBRUARY 1959
ANALYSIS OF CASES
A primary skill required of an accomplished auditor would be analysis
of a case. The basic error is overestimating the case's ability. All
failures stem from a failure to undercut the reality of a case. If that
reality level is reached, the case will improve. If not, the case remains
stagnant.
RESULTS DEFINED: Case achieves a reality on change of case, somatic,
behavior or appearance, for the better.
BETTER DEFINED: Negative gain. Things disappear that have been annoying
or unwanted.
ABILITY GAIN DEFINED: Pc's recognition that pc can now do things he
could not do before.
INTELLIGENCE GAIN DEFINED: Loss of restimulation of stupidity by reason
of attempts to confront or experience the problems of life. (Intelligence
appears when stupidity is keyed out or erased.) Intelligence is a
confronting ability.
FAMILIARITY: or familiarization permits intelligence to manifest.
Reaching and withdrawing are more possible when stupidity is keyed out or
erased. Increasing ability to reach and withdraw increases intelligence.
It can be seen that when attention is fixed, the ability to reach and
withdraw decreases, therefore intelligence decreases, therefore the ability
to change decreases, therefore no "case gain".
Unfixing attention is done in various ways. As hypnotism is done by
fixing attention, a parallel observation is that a person wakes up,
receives less fixed effect, when attention becomes unfixed.
Unfixing attention must be done by increasing ability to reach and
withdraw from the specific thing or person on which attention is fixed in
the bank. The bank merely expresses a recording of past attention
fixations.
Shocks of various kinds can unfix attention but always lead to a
decrease in ability over a period. Unfixing attention by violence throws a
case downscale. As the case goes upscale the attention refixes on things
violence unfixed it from.
Clearing is a gradient process of finding places where attention is
fixed and restoring the ability of the pc to place and remove attention
under his own determinism.
Case Analysis consists then of the determination of where pc's
attention (at current state of case) is fixed on the track and restoring
pc's determinism over those places.
This is done by:
1. PT Problem running.
2. Dynamic survey and remedy of fixed points.
3. Selected items and persons survey and unfixing other-
determined attention at those points.
The auditor's skill in locating where attention is now fixed is even
greater now than the auditor's ability to remedy the fixation of the pc's
attention since this latter problem is fairly well in hand.
There are many ways of doing a survey to determine what the pc's
attention is fixed upon now. The E-Meter and interrogation of the pc are
the main methods.
"What has your attention been fixed on lately (or 'in this Life')?"
would elicit a reply that could then be used in the questions
"Recall a time when you did something to (item or person so located)."
"Recall a time when you withheld something from (item or person so
selected)."
If you find the exact item or person on which attention is fixed, you
achieve immediate case gain, which is to say reality, which is to say
interest, in-sessionness, success.
If any pc you are running has not manifested case gain, reality,
interest, in-sessionness, then one of two things is true:
1. You haven't found the item or person on which pc's attention is
other-determinedly fixed and haven't run it yet, or
2. Pc is gone-man-gone.
I trust this may be of some small assistance in learning how to analyze
a case.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 FEBRUARY 1959 BPI
TECHNICAL
ARC BREAKS WITH AUDITORS
When severe, ARC Breaks are repaired by running Selected Persons Overt
Withhold on the auditor as a selected person.
Otherwise, TR 5N.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:iwh.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 FEBRUARY 1959
BPI
TECHNICAL
CLEARING COMMANDS
Excerpt from HCO Bulletin of July 28, 1958
CLEARING COMMANDS: Clear each word with the full phrase once each with
the following:
"What is the usual definition of the English (or other language) word
?"
Do not ask for definitions over and over as a repetitive command. If
pc's definition is poor, clear command every few commands.
Clear only each different word in a bracket. Don't clear each line in a
bracket.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:iwh.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 1 MARCH 1959
Issue 2
MAGAZINE MATERIAL
TWO RULES FOR HAPPY LIVING
1. Be able to experience anything.
2. Cause only those things which others are able to experience
easily.
Man has had many golden rules. The Buddhist rule of "Do unto others as
you would have these others do unto you", has been repeated often in other
religions. But such golden rules, while they served to advance Man above
the animal, resulted in no sure sanity, success or happiness. Such a golden
rule gives only the cause point, or at best the reflexive effect point.
This is a self-done-to-self thing and tends to put all on obsessive cause.
It gives no thought to what one does about the things done to one by others
not so indoctrinated.
How does one handle the evil things done to him? It is not told in the
Buddhist rule. Many random answers resulted. Amongst them are the answers
of Christian Science (effects on self don't exist), the answers of early
Christians (become a martyr), the answers of Christian ministers (condemn
all sin). Such answers to effects created on one bring about a somewhat
less than sane state of mind-to say nothing of unhappiness.
After one's house has burned down and the family cremated, it is no
great consolation to (I) pretend it didn't happen, (2) liken oneself to Job
or (3) condemn all arsonists.
So long as one fears or suffers from the effect of violence, one will
have violence against him. When one can experience exactly what is being
done to one, ah magic, it does not happen!
The most basic proof of this is the earlier tests with problems of
comparable magnitude and later tests of "selected overts". When the problem
or terminal is no longer restimulative, it ceases to have power to harm
one.
How to be happy in this universe is a problem few prophets or sages
have dared contemplate directly. We find them "handling" the problem of
happiness by assuring us that man is doomed to suffering. They seek not to
tell us how to be happy but how to endure being unhappy. Such casual
assumption of the impossibility of happiness has led us to ignore any real
examination of ways to be happy. Thus we have floundered forward toward a
negative goal-get rid of all the unhappiness on Earth and one would have a
liveable Earth. If one seeks to get rid of something continually, one
admits continually he cannot confront it-and thus everyone went down hill.
Life became a dwindling spiral of more things we could not confront. And
thus we went towards blindness and unhappiness.
To be happy, one only must be able to confront, which is to say,
experience, those things that are.
Unhappiness is only this: the inability to confront that which is.
Hence (1) Be able to experience anything.
The effect side of life deserves great consideration. The self-caused
side also deserves examination.
To create only those effects which others could easily experience gives
us a clean new rule of living. For if one does, then what might he do that
he must withhold from others? There is no reason to withhold his own
actions or regret them (same thing) if one's own actions are easily
experienced by others.
This is a sweeping test (and definition) of good conduct-to do only those
things which others can experience.
If you examine your track you will find you are hung up only in those
actions a person did which others were not able to receive. Hence a
person's track can become a hodge-podge of violence withheld which pulls in
then the violence others caused.
The more actions a person emanated which could not be experienced by
others, the worse a person's track became. Recognizing that he was bad
cause, or that there were too many bad causes already, a person ceased
causing things-an unhappy state of being.
Pain, misemotion, unconsciousness, insanity all result from causing
things others could not experience easily. The reach-withhold phenomena is
the basis of all these things. When one sought to reach in such a way as to
make it impossible for another to experience, one did not reach, then, did
he? To "reach" with a gun against a person who is unwilling to be shot is
not to reach the person but a protest. All bad reaches never reached. So
there was no communication and the end result was a withhold by the person
reaching. This reach-withhold became at last an inability to reach-
therefore low communication, low reality, low affinity.
All bad acts then are those acts which cannot be easily experienced at
the target end.
On this definition let us review our own "bad acts" (or overts). Which
ones were bad. Only those that could not be easily experienced by another
were bad. Thus which of society's favorite bad acts are bad? Acts of real
violence resulting in pain, unconsciousness, insanity and heavy loss could
at this time be considered bad. Well what other acts of yours do you
consider "bad"? The things which you have done which you could not easily
yourself experience were bad. But the things which you have done which you
yourself could have experienced had they been done to you were not bad.
That certainly changes one's view of things!
Only processing can bring a person to a point where he or she could
experience anything without enduring consequence. So it is no wonder that
philosophy of yesteryear was stopped on "happiness" as a subject.
But all processes from the beginning of Dianetics and Scientology until
now which improved the ability to confront (or experience) were gaining
toward the goal. All processes that eradicated experience only were poor
processes. The early drop in gains in processing (1950) came about because
people dramatized an eradication of all badness. The auditors were
unwilling to let the pcs experience anything, the pcs sought to get rid of
things without experiencing things.
There is no need to lead a violent life just to prove one can
experience. The idea is not to prove one can experience but to regain the
ability to experience which is only done in processing.
Thus today we have two golden rules for happiness:
l. Be able to experience anything; and
2. Cause only those things which others are able to experience
easily.
Your reaction to these tells you how far you have yet to go in
processing. And that is the first time we knew that.
And if we achieve these two golden rules, we Scientologists would be
the happiest and most successful people in this universe for who could rule
any of us with evil?
Of course these are the characteristics of gods-But who said we were
trying to make anything else?
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd
P.A.B. No. 155
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 March 1959
PROCESSES USED IN 21ST ACC
Compiled from the Research Material and Taped Lectures of L. Ron
Hubbard
I want to take up here with great rapidity the processes from bottom to
top that we have so far found and that have been effective, and some
additional data in running them.
And first is the process Dynamic Straightwire. The way to do a survey
on Dynamic Straightwire is this: you ask the person to describe the
dynamics from one to eight. We don't care about them being sequitur-change
them round if you wish.
Now, you ask a person to describe each one of these dynamics. You are
watching an E-Meter for a change in pattern. Therefore you must carefully
isolate the pattern, before you can tell whether or not the pattern has
changed on the E-Meter needle reading. But, more important than that, you
are looking for a dynamic the preclear makes mistakes about while he is
trying to describe it, a dynamic he cannot describe, or a dynamic he won't
even approach and is very leary of, and his statement is confirmed by the E-
Meter reading. In other words, you've got the statement of the preclear in
this particular analysis being stacked up against the E-Meter reading all
the way through in an analysis or diagnosis for Dynamic Straightwire.
All right. We go all the way through, asking for a terminal on these
dynamics and we finally get a repeat. We will ask him for terminals on
these dynamics, and we will get the same dynamic to read again. Now the
basic rule which sorts this out is: Any dynamic which doesn't clear by two-
way comm has to be run. Simple as that. Any dynamic which doesn't clear by
two-way comm has to be run.
So, if you have two or three dynamics jammed up, you can hope that two
of them will clear up, leaving you with the remaining dynamic.
But this is not the complete criteria of what you run. There is another
stable datum. Don't run a terminal that is totally unreal to the preclear.
Another stable datum, which comes on top of it, is: never run a terminal
that is sensible. Never. If a terminal belongs on the dynamic, you can
almost say you'll get nowhere running it. So you're looking for terminals
that the preclear gives you for a dynamic which don't belong on the dynamic
at all.
Now, if that terminal is real to the preclear, you will get a
tremendous change in the case. If that terminal is totally unreal to the
preclear and if it does belong on the dynamic, why, you're not going to get
any change on the case, so why run it? Might as well run some other
process.
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
So, we have several conditions by which the diagnosis on Dynamic
Straightwire works. I've done enough of these now and run enough of them,
isolated enough of them and gotten conditions of change on enough of them,
to realize that every time you changed a case you had (1) a person who
couldn't describe the dynamic accurately, or who made mistakes while trying
to describe it, (2) a person who gave you a non sequitur or erroneous
terminal for that dynamic-the terminal was fairly real to the preclear,
although it didn't belong there-and (3) you ran that, and it opened up
track like mad.
What have you got here? You have a terrific identification. You are
trying to undo identification that is lying right on the top. Well, this
tells you, then, that it is neither a long process nor an invariable
process. Given enough skill, you could undoubtedly find one of these on
every case-given enough skill. But it is limited by auditor skill.
Furthermore, it gives auditors a chance to "chop up" preclears and it gives
auditors a chance to write some script, so this one has liability. And
auditors have been writing script like mad. We had one particular case
where the preclear couldn't say any terminal on the seventh dynamic, so
promptly the auditor jumps in and takes the nearest related thing to the
seventh dynamic, the thetan, he could get. This was A Head, and he ran A
Head, and the preclear had nothing to do with it, and they wondered why the
case didn't advance.
Now, you have auditors who are letting the preclear choose. In other
words, there are auditors who actually believe that a preclear is permitted
power of choice in an auditing session. And this is the biggest bug I have
found existing at this instant on this ACC. That one's a blinker. They are
probably not telling you this, that they think a preclear has power of
choice. They don't know this: that it has to be nutty if you are going to
run it-if it makes sense, why run it? They are looking for a wrongness in
the preclear and they believe that the preclear knows all about his own
case and could straighten it out all by himself. And that the auditor is an
unnecessary adjunct. Now there are several people on this ACC who believe
this and this is a great compliment to their faith in human nature, but
it's certainly of no value in an auditor. The preclear has no power of
choice at all. The one the preclear would never choose is the one you run.
An example: We had a preclear here who gave three terminals on the
fifth dynamic. One of these was a mountain. So the preclear was given the
power of choice as to which one to run and, of course, came up with a cat.
So they sat there running cats. Well, a cat happens to be right for the
fifth dynamic, so why straighten it out? The process is aimed at
straightening out something. Obviously, the mountain was wrong. The
preclear was totally stuck on the idea that there was a mountain in on
this.
We found a mountain on the eighth dynamic in another case that hasn't
been running. This case had been running metal on the sixth dynamic. So
what? Metal belongs on the sixth dynamic-why run it? Get the idea? But this
auditor had found a mountain on the eighth dynamic and ignored it. Of
course, everybody knows God is a mountain-that's obvious ....
Now, this was the one to hit. And where you find these people out of
session it is because nobody has trailed down a nutty dynamic. When they're
out of session on Dynamic Straightwire, they're not interested in it at
all, they are just not running an identification. They're running something
reasonable, and at once the biggest liability of auditors is that they are
reasonable and that they write script and write in reasonable reasons for
it all. And they're trying to audit unreasonability out of people-and these
two things just don't go together at all.
The next process up the line is Selected Person Overts. Select a
terminal who is real to the preclear and, as you undercut the process, it
comes closer and closer to
present time. The person chosen has to be closer and closer to present time
the more you try to go downscale on the process. But the person must be
real, that's a criteria in there. And the next thing about it is, you must
flatten off several of these people. And the basic reason for this is to
prepare an individual to own up to some responsibility for his own actions.
Unless he can assume some responsibility for his own actions, he won't do
anything in an auditing session, so this is the one that cures.
The auditing command for Selected Person Overts is "Recall a time you
did something to (the selected person's name)." But that is undercut by the
auditing command "Think of something you did to " or "Think of
something you have done to ." Now, the reason you say "Think" is
because these people are very chary of owning up to anything or accepting
any responsibility out in broad daylight in front of God and everybody, so
you run "Think" and you've got a lot of people who are having a rougher
time who won't own up to their own lives and who can't take responsibility
for them on the third dynamic, but can take responsibility for them on the
first dynamic. And this is the dynamic selection. So "Think" undercuts
"Recall. "
The next one-General Overts-is much less effective when it has not
already been undercut by Selected Person Overts. The individual just goes
on and on with sweetness and light. The auditing command for General Overts
is "Recall a time when you did something to somebody." Now there are other
phrases and so forth which could be used for this sort of process, but here
we are interested mainly in people. We are not very interested in MEST and
the remaining four dynamics. They'd splatter all over the place. That's why
it's "to somebody." If you said "something," you would get the remaining
four, so there is an alternate command in here if you wanted to run the
other four dynamics. You would say, "Recall a time when you did something
to something."
Now, the next one up the line from this is Not-Is Straightwire: "Recall
a time when you implied something was unimportant." And this, we find, is
best run on an alternate basis with the next auditing command, "Recall a
time when somebody else thought something was important." These two
commands are alternated, one after the other, and you get these cases that
are in a jam.
This is the direct cure of notisness; and where you have a case that is
running a bad not-is, a process can evidently be invalidated or not-ised
when the individual is out of session, or overnight. This is what Not-Is
Straightwire cures. These are the people on whom a process works once, and
never works again. These people are not-ising so badly that they can't
duplicate-and not-is, of course, is a mechanism to prevent duplication. So
you cure, not duplicate. And the cure for it is Not-Is Straightwire.
[Continued in PAB 156, page 441 ]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 MARCH 1959
HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES
(Also for Instruction in HPA/HCA and ACC)
(Supersedes all earlier HGC allowed Processes
except where these give data on the following)
Processes on gradient scale from unconscious pc to theta clear.
CCH l, 2, 3, 4
Rudiments (Not CCH 0)
PTP by Selected Person Overt-Withhold Straight Wire
Know to Mystery Straight Wire (See later bulletins)
Dynamic Straight Wire
ARC Straight Wire
Selected Person Overt-Withhold Straight Wire
General Overt-Withhold Straight Wire
Factual Havingness (and Third Rail)
ARC Break Straight Wire
Not-Is Straight Wire
Past and Future Experience
What Can You Confront
You make a mock-up for which you can be totally responsible
Track Scout
Engram Running
Route One
The target of these processes is theta clear as different from MEST
clear. Therefore, the higher MEST clear processes, Help and Step 6, are
omitted.
We are not trying to make MEST clears in the HGC; therefore, Help and
Step 6 are disallowed.
On old Dianetic cases or where engrams have been run by other auditors,
run Selected Person Overt-Withhold on "an auditor" and "a preclear" until
track is free. This is a necessary early step to get some cases moving.
Engram running should not be used by those not trained in it.
Muzzled auditing should be used when:
1. Pc ARC Breaks easily;
and
2. Auditor shows signs of over-communication.
Be prepared to run Selected Person Overt-Withhold Straight Wire for as
long as 3 to 5 weeks if pc begins to have emotional changes on it.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: iwh .jh
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 MARCH 1959
TRAINING DRILLS
NAME: ARC Break
POSITION: Student and coach sit facing each other a comfortable distance
apart.
COMMANDS: The coach makes up his mind there has been an actual specific ARC
break. He doesn't tell the student. He then says, "Start". Then the student
says:
"HAVE I DONE SOMETHING WRONG?"
The coach answers this appropriately and the student says:
"WHAT WAS IT?"
The coach answers, and then the student says:
"WHEN WAS IT?"
The student gets it described and then says:
"HOW IS IT NOW?"
Then when he's got it more or less stamped out here then he takes it on the
other side of the picture and says:
"HAVE YOU DONE SOMETHING WRONG IN THIS SESSION?"
The coach answers that appropriately and the student auditor asks:
"WHAT WAS IT?" "WHEN WAS IT?" and "HOW IS IT NOW?"
When all have been handled satisfactorily the coach ends that cycle of
action and then starts a new one.
PURPOSE: Is to train the student to handle ARC breaks in a session and to
get them handled quickly and effectively on both the overt and motivator
side, since there's always an overt connected with an auditing ARC break of
one kind or another.
TRAINING STRESS: The training stress is on the reality and actuality of ARC
breaks and the necessity of handling them. It should be pointed out that on
an E-Meter it is the ARC break that causes the rising needle and also it
must be pointed out that in actual auditing he will be using an E-Meter
since he's not running this with a meter in his hand. In real auditing he
flattens it until his meter shows no change on the subject. In running this
TR he is simply going to flatten it by the seat of his pants and the
satisfaction of the coach.
This is a 2-way comm formal auditing non-duplicative process and is
only used to patch up ARC breaks when one occurs. It is not a repetitive
command process which is supposed to do something terrific for the pc. It
doesn't. It is just supposed to keep the session on the road and is not in
itself therapeutic.
The student never answers or explains to the coach about the ARC break.
In other words, we must keep the Auditor's Code while running an ARC break
out. Probably more strongly than we would ordinarily keep an Auditor's
Code. No evaluating questions. No invalidating questions. No explanations.
It should be understood that an ARC break is the only thing that will
depress a profile. Nothing else will depress a profile except an ARC break.
Handling ARC breaks is the only thing which keeps the profile from being
depressed so this is a pretty important TR and it's really got to be smooth
and free. It is the one thing that can submerge an engram or foul the
session. It should be understood that in actual auditing if the pc gives
the auditor the Break as soon as the auditor asks for it, the question
"What is it?" is dropped.
LRH:-.rd L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 MARCH 1959
BPI
HOW TO DO A
DIAGNOSIS ON DYNAMIC STRAIGHTWIRE
You ask the person to describe the dynamics from one to eight. We don't
care about them being sequitur; any way you want to break it up, we don't
care.
Now you ask a person to describe each one of these dynamics. You are
watching an E-Meter for a change in pattern. Therefore, you have to
carefully isolate the change of pattern before you can tell whether or not
the pattern's changed on the E-Meter needle reading. But more important
than that, you are looking for a dynamic that he makes mistakes on while he
is trying to describe it, a dynamic he cannot describe, a dynamic that he
won't even approach, that he is very leary of, and his statement is
confirmed by the E-Meter reading. In other words, you have got the
statement of the pc in this particular analysis or diagnosis for Dynamic
Straightwire.
All right, then, we go all the way through asking for a terminal on
these dynamics and we finally get a repeat. We will ask him for terminals
on these dynamics; we'll get the same dynamic to read again. Now the basic
rule which sorts this out is-any dynamic which doesn't clear by two-way
comm has to be run. Simple as that. Any dynamic which doesn't clear by two-
way comm has to be run.
Don't run a terminal that is totally unreal to the preclear. Another
stable datum which comes on top of it is: Never run a terminal that's
sensible. Never. If a terminal belongs on the dynamic you can almost say
you'll get nowhere running it. So, you are looking for terminals that they
give you for a dynamic which don't belong on the dynamic at all.
Now, if that terminal is real to the pc you will get a tremendous
change in the case. If that terminal is totally unreal to the pc and if it
does belong on the dynamic, why you're not going to get any change on the
case, why run it? Might as well run some other process. It is neither a
long process nor an invariable process. Given enough skill you could
undoubtedly find one of these on every case. Given enough skill. But it is
limited by auditor skill. Furthermore, it gives auditors a chance to chop
up pcs and it gives auditors a chance to write some script.
You do not let the pc choose. You have auditors who actually believe
that a pc is permitted power of choice in an auditing session. That one's a
blinker.
Where you find pcs out of session, it's because nobody has trailed down
a nutty dynamic.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:mg.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 10 MARCH 1959
Dist:
All Staff
All Offices
SUPPLEMENTAL DATA SHEET TO HCO BULLETIN OF FEB 16, 1959
AND STAFF AUDITORS' CONFERENCE OF FEB 16, 1959
The Feb 16 Bulletins, done rapidly to inform staff auditors, omitted
the full gradient processes.
Some of the omitted (and very important) processes are Overt-Withhold
Straight Wire, General Overt-Withhold Straight Wire, ARC Break Straight
Wire, Third Rail, What Can You Confront and Mock Up Responsibility.
The complete list in order of use on any case is:
ROUTE THETA CLEAR
1. Rudiments and TR 5N
2. Present Time Problem
3. Dynamic Straight Wire
4. Overt-Withhold Straight Wire
5. General Overt-Withhold Straight Wire
6. ARC Break Straight Wire
7. Third Rail
8. What Can You Confront
9. Mock up a picture for which you could be totally responsible
10. Not-Is Straight Wire
11. Past and Future Experience
12. Engram Running
13. Route One (When theta clear is obtained)
This is a complete route to theta clear on all cases so far examined
and audited (which contained some real "what walls").
Steps 1 to 5 above inclusive, if flattened, constitute a RELEASE.
The HAS Co-Audit Processes are:
3. Dynamic Straight Wire
4. Overt-Withhold Straight Wire
5. General Overt-Withhold Straight Wire
with the Instructor starting and stopping all sessions and doing all
assessments. The auditing itself is severely muzzled.
HCA/HPA Professional Processes include 1 to 8 above inclusive.
HCS/BScn Processes include 1 to 11 inclusive.
HGS/DScn Processes include entire list.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:mp.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 MARCH 1959
BPI
MUZZLED AUDITING
Following is a despatch received from Theory and Practice Instructor,
Washington, D.C.
"Dear Ron,
"I thought you might be interested to know that the afternoon muzzled
auditing in the HCA Course is really paying off. These people have, every
one of them, attained a very hot reality on their tracks, pictures and
Scientology. In terms of past students the results are absolutely
phenomenal. It is very good. Best, John Galusha."
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mp.rd
P.A.B. No. 156
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
15 March 1959
PROCESSES USED IN 21ST ACC
(Continued from P.A.B. No. 155 [page 433])
Compiled from the Research Material and Taped Lectures
of L. Ron Hubbard
All of these straightwire processes run best with an E-Meter, using the
question "When?" About the only reason we came off time was because
auditors were using time to harass. It is not that it isn't best to run it
with time-it is best to run it with time. The muzzled fashion of running
here is "Recall a time ... when ...."
The guy says he did.
"When?"
All right, the next response on the preclear's part is, "I don't know."
Then the auditor goes into action.
Now, when you hound them and mix them up and twist them up and mess
them up with time questions, all that's happening is that the auditor is
dramatizing his own confusion about time, and he probably wouldn't accept
the preclear's answer if it was three o'clock, September 2nd, 1959.
Muzzled Auditing is very severely this: The auditor utters the auditing
command, the preclear answers it, and the auditor says, "A11 right." The
preclear originates, the auditor nods. Let's make this a very severe
definition of what we call muzzled auditing. Now, when you let the auditor
go a little bit and give him an E-Meter and "When?" my experience and
observation here in the 21st ACC is, he just goes for broke. It's rather as
if you cut two strands of a three-strand rope and he quickly busts the
other strand. In other words, it's muzzled or nothing. And where you have
somebody who is doing any chop-up or is stacking up ARC breaks in any way,
you have as your best answer "muzzled," and muzzled is muzzled. And they
can't say "When?" either, because evidently if you give them "When?" they
can go for broke and they can use "When?" and the answers thereof to chop
the preclear up.
We did try to install a muzzled "When?" For my money, it hasn't been
successful. We've had at least one of our people exceed this at once. Just
letting him open his mouth starts the machine. "It's all right for you to
say 'When?'" you can say to this auditor-"It's all right for you to say
'When?' " Right away, he says, "Well, I've got to do something else." And
so forth. We have even found that muzzled auditing wouldn't go on this one:
"I'll repeat the auditing command." You can't even let them do that. You
can't let them say this, because it has been used to invalidate the
preclear. We have
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
an auditor (he's not an auditor, he's a case) who, every time the preclear
answers the question, says, "I'll repeat the auditing command." The
preclear tries to answer the question again, and the auditor just uses this
as a non-acceptance. So this can't go as part of muzzled auditing. That so
far has been my observation.
This may be a very harsh look, but I feel from what I have observed
that I am justified.
_____________________
As I have already mentioned, we've got another condition here-
reasonability. People have been writing script on the preclear's engrams to
some degree. That is a great evil. And those people we have turned loose
and those people who are running engrams and are saying this sort of thing
are doing pretty well, and some of them are writing a bit of script. And
the main thing they are not doing is picking up the overts. There are a
couple of them stalled around here on overts.
There is a rule about this: When they cannot easily find or run the
overts, take them right straight on down to Dynamic Straightwire. These
people are not owning up to their own responsibilities and that means-
perhaps because the case has changed over to an area of irresponsibility-
that you have a situation here in which the individual has dropped out
responsibility factors to such a degree that he cannot be trusted. When a
person won't own up to his overts, you have an irresponsibility of great
magnitude. This goes hand-in-glove with failing to answer the exact
auditing command, failing to execute an auditing command, and so forth. And
that can happen while running engrams.
[Continued in PAB 157, page 453]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 17 MARCH 1959
Magazine Article
AN INSANITY QUESTIONNAIRE
The World Health Organization has issued the following questionnaire to
determine whether or not a person is insane, and infers that if one answers
"yes" to any of the following, he is insane and needs help:
Are you always worrying?
Are you unable to concentrate because of unrecognized reasons?
Are you continually unhappy without justified cause?
Do you lose your temper easily and often?
Are you troubled by regular insomnia?
Do you have wide fluctuations in your moods, from depression to
elation, back to depression, which incapacitate you?
Do you continually dislike to be with people?
Are you upset if the routine of your life is disturbed?
Do your children consistently get on your nerves?
Are you "browned off" and constantly bitter?
Are you afraid without real cause?
Are you always right and the other person always wrong?
Do you have numerous aches and pains for which no doctor can find a
physical cause?
Scientology organizations as the leaders in the field of mental ability
are doing the only successful work in correcting such disabilities.
The first sweeping, low cost attack on mental disability is now under
way in Scientology organizations with HAS Co-Auditing courses, now
beginning on all continents.
L. RON
HUBBARD
[The above HCO B was reissued from Washington, D.C., dated 23 March 1959.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 17 MARCH 1959
Issue 2
BPI
Magazine
DO IT YOURSELF THERAPY
At last we have a successful way for the untrained person or the
financially embarrassed Scientologist to make it all the way to release and
prepare himself for theta clear at low cost.
Heavily supervised co-auditing at HAS level has become possible with my
development of two things,
1. Processes that undercut most reality levels, and
2. Muzzled auditing.
For as little as 2 gns (or $10) a week, one can have the major benefits
of Scientology by giving a little and getting a lot.
HAS Co-auditing courses are run by all major Central Organizations and
are being started in HCO enfranchised centres.
The applicant enrolls in the PE Course and receives a week of theory.
He graduates to a Comm Course lasting two weeks of three nights each and
costing 2 gns (or $10) per week. He receives his HAS certificate and
graduates to co-auditing for three nights a week for 2 gns (or $10) per
week and continues on until he reaches the state of release. This may take
many months but he gains all the way in health, on his job, in his
environment.
The co-auditing is done "muzzled" and under the heavy supervision of a
trained professional who knows how to do it.
It is only successful if so done.
These new processes and muzzled auditing can be the beginning of a new
civilization. For, cases are cracking on these units with such frequency
and speed that even old timers instructing them are getting an eager new
look.
A release is a person whose case "won't get any worse". He begins to
gain by living rather than lose.
Release is a way point toward theta clear. A good release can be theta
cleared by a professional running engrams in from 50 to 125 hours.
This is the new look. If you want to know more about it, write Hubbard
Communications Office Worldwide in London or your nearest central
organization.
We can put hundreds of thousands upstairs rapidly if we follow this
well-blazed trail.
We are still winning.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:mp.rd
[pic]
Issue 92 M [1959, ca. late March]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
The Subject of Clearing
L. Ron Hubbard
A general summary of Clears and Clearing as of March 1, 1959 is of
interest to all Dianeticists and Scientologists.
I have a great deal of data now that has not been generally released
and indeed was never before known here on Earth.
The figures are in, the checks have been made. And here's what I have
found:
The first Clears I made in 1947 that were stable were in reality Theta
Clears, not Mest Clears. Had I had more finance and the data I collected
between 1947 and 1959 I would have known that.
They were made by gradually raising their confrontingness of mental
image pictures.
When I found in 1950 that other auditors could not achieve this, I made
it my thorough business to:
1. Study all phenomena related to clearing;
2. Study ways to train auditors to do the job and
3. Achieve the original state on a broad scale by auditors in
general on all types of cases.
I said we needed a better bridge. Well, we've built several.
Within the last fifteen months the data and findings have avalanched.
Once there was a breakthrough by other auditors using standard
technology to a state of release some years ago, I knew we were winning but
some didn't see it.
Release is the first state one attains on the way up. It is low and
crude but it is. It means that state one doesn't skid any more in. In
short, release means a bettered state from which one doesn't slip. A case
stops getting worse and begins to get better, no matter how slowly. Old ARC
Straightwire is the original process that created a Release (see Self
Analysis, last page).
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
Release as a state is, in actuality, the first thing a pc is trying for.
It's a gain to find level ground so that he doesn't from there on get
worse. He's stable now, he won't keep slipping, if he attains the state of
release.
I found the second goal a couple of years ago. I managed to develop
drills and skills that would make a person able to audit. The simplest form
of this now is called "muzzled auditing" and makes supervised co-auditing
possible on a very wide scale, thus achieving goal three above.
The first great breakthrough came in Winter of 1957-58 with Mest
Clearing.
Mest Clearing is shortcut clearing. By keying out engrams, one becomes
free of them
This was achieved in a very large number of cases.
BUT
not all people could be Mest Cleared,
AND
the state is not always stable.
What happens to a Mest Clear sometimes? What makes the state unstable?
A Mest Clear, according to several reports even from those given
bracelets (of which they should still be proud), starts acting like a Theta
Clear and can't make it. It's a lose. He falls back.
In short, a Mest Clear can postulate. And he postulates himself into
trouble. He can still key in engrams. His postulates operate powerfully on
his bank, evidently, and there he goes.
A Mest Clear has not been through a total confrontingness. He arrived
by what was a shortcut. His regained ability to postulate operates
unexpectedly. He puts himself into things he hadn't confronted yet. He
doesn't confront them. And there he goes.
So long as he doesn't use his large power to postulate unwisely, a Mest
Clear stays clear. If he does, he's no longer clear. (Bob Ross, by the way,
first mentioned this to me and further reports and observations bore it
out.)
Very well-there is a state called Mest Clear. It is a shortcut that is
sometimes the long way around and sometimes isn't stable.
However, a Mest Clear, even skidded, is better off than any Release.
Because of this liability (and because of later gains I made on Theta
Clearing) no HGC is now even trying for Mest Clear. It's all Theta Clearing
now. And if it's all right with you we'll use the word Clear to mean
hereafter a Theta Clear and if we mean Mest Clear we'll say so.
The Mest Clear, then, still has a malady-the ability to postulate his
engrams into heavy play.
Pursuing clearing further in 1958 I developed by early February 1959
the Confrontingness Scale of Reality. This, I find just this week, on a
specific test, is also a parallel to the Responsibility Scale.
Roughly, the Confrontingness Scale of Reality goes this way from top to
bottom:
No need to Experience a Reality
Willing to Experience a Reality
Willing to Confront a Reality
Willing to be Elsewhere from a Specific Reality
Willing to Not-Is a Reality (invisible field)
Willing to Screen a Reality (puts black curtain over it or
self)
Willing to Dub-In a Reality
Willing to Figure-Figure on a Reality
Willing to Figure-Figure on a Dubbed-In Reality
Knowing this we see how a case behaves as we raise confrontingness on
Mental Image Pictures. The person is out of valence below "Elsewhere" and
not even on the right track below "Screen" (the old "Wide-Open Case").
This was a lot of data to collide with. But being aware of the
phenomenon of Mest Clear and having developed repetitive command engram
running for the 5th London, I had to square around for Goal Three with
techniques to run low reality for the 21st American and so found the
Confrontingness Reality Scale.
All this made quite a difference in viewpoint. Things that were very
vague in 1947 became very obvious to me.
A Theta Clear, then, can be defined as a person who is at cause over
his own reactive bank and can create and uncreate it at will. Less
accurately he is a person who is willing to experience.
Operating Thetan would be the same as always-the individual at Cause
over Matter, Energy, Space, Time, Life and Form.
Theta Clear is stable. Therefore I'm not letting the HGC try for any
lower state. In any event Theta Clearing is faster than Mest Clearing but
not, of course, faster than Releasing. The maximum time to release a raving
lunatic seems to be about 600 hours of CCH 1, 2, 3 and 4-work, however,
that we don't do.
The maximum time to release a non-insane person by CCH 1, 2, 3 and 4 is
probably around 350 hours. And sometimes this route has to be taken as in a
non-consent case or a child or a very low reality case or a case that can't
or won't talk. (CCH 1, 2, 3 and 4 on such low cases is not always
successful by reason of auditing skill differences.)
The maximum time to attain a Release on a fairly low reality case is
about 175 hours-usually less, using present skills or even ARC
Straightwire, Fall 1951.
The maximum time to theta clear somebody from beginning to end has not
been determined fully for all cases by a long ways, but early data
indicates that a case with high beginning reality could make it in 75 hours
of HGC auditing. As all cases addressed so far in the HGC have responded
steadily (under auditing done by 21st ACC graduates) on the Reality Scale,
we could assume they will all go through to Theta Clear. Some cases (one
with a recent severe accident) require evidently four weeks to get up to
what you and I would call responsibility and reality on these new processes-
but even then the four weeks were all win and all gain. (The auditing was
done by a DScn who did not attend the 21st and was only verbally coached.)
Hazarding a guess, I would say we are sooner than 500 hours on Theta
Clearing from beginning to end on average cases.
So all goals listed above-examining clearing, auditor training, and broad-
scale co-auditing and clearing-are a reality now, just a dozen years from
my first incredulous creation of a Clear to general clearing to a stable
state. Of course the first goal of examining all aspects of clearing won't
be over for another twenty years but it's still been dented. And you'll
soon have that pleasure too, subjective or objective, on the subject of
Theta Clearing.
It's a dozen years back to 1947. It's nine years back to Book One. But
it's only twenty-nine years back to 1931 when I first began to work at
George Washington University on the subject of the mind and life. (It's
only fair to tell you that I'd already abandoned physical healing as a road
in 1871 after a medical career, the only fruit of which now extant is what
the medicos call Endocrinology, so that path is a little longer than we'd
let on to the public.)
I'm pretty excited about all this-and comfortable. There were times
when people got to jumping around so in the public prints that I figured
straight jackets for reporters and Commies were more vital in our logistics
than clearing. But it never entered my head to quit, not even when Time
magazine divorced me from a woman I wasn't even married to. (Invented
inverted 2nd Dynamics always make more news to Luce* people than a world
well and free.)
We can now do these things:
1. Theta clear people.
2. Train auditors to theta clear people. (It's now done at new HCA
level and at HCS level at the Academies in Washington and Los
Angeles.)
3. Supervise HAS co-auditing clear preparation plus home co-
auditing (muzzled) to prepare for clearing plus broadly practice
these processes on a wide public basis.
In short, we've definitely won. And it won't be long before everybody
knows it. If you knew what fifty people well released by HAS co-auditing
could do for Scientology in one town, you'd know we had it made.
Well, you'll know even better subjectively soon enough.
And that's clearing.
L. RON
HUBBARD
[*Henry R. Luce (1898-1967) was the co-founder, editor and publisher of
Time magazine.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London, W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 24 MARCH 1959
Dist: WW
HAS CO-AUDIT
All offices should recognize that we have something new and startlingly
successful in HAS Co-auditing done by and in the organization as an adjunct
of the PE Foundation.
The complete gen on how to do this will be released in the very near
future on these lines. This bulletin is to point out its importance.
It is expected that the following cities will begin in the central
organization HAS Co-auditing courses immediately on receipt of the
technical information:
London (already in progress), Los Angeles, New York, Melbourne,
Johannesburg (where the information already exists), Paris, Washington
(optional), Auckland (where the information already exists), Perth.
At once all names and addresses of all PE attendees should be gotten in
order as mailing lists by the above organizations for their areas and they
should stand by to make an immediate mailing.
Persons for night work should be appointed by the above organizations
as follows:
PE Foundation Director
PE Foundation Instructor
HAS Comm Course Instructor
HAS Co-audit Supervisor.
The PE Foundation basic course is one week long-5 nights. HAS Comm
Course is three nights a week, Co-audit supervised is the same three
nights. In case of crowded quarters the HAS Comm Course should be on a
different three nights than the HAS Co-audit, i.e. Monday, Wednesday,
Friday Comm Course; Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday Co-audit.
The charge to any applicant should be two or three guineas per week or
$10.
THIS IS THE MOST IMPORTANT SINGLE PROMOTION EVENT OF THIS YEAR AND
SHOULD BE TREATED AS SUCH.
MAGAZINE-MAJORS AND MINORS
It has been found in at least one organization that the purpose of
major and minor issues of the continental magazine has not been understood.
A major issue goes out once every month to the membership only; a minor
issue goes out once every month to the entire mailing list, particularly
book buyers. Certainty Issues Vol. 5 No. 23, Vol. 6 No. 3, Vol. 6 No. 2 are
typical minor issues and with their ads adjusted and made more timely are
now being sent to the entire mailing list.
Neglect in sending minor issues to the entire mailing list can result
in the eclipse of an operation, otherwise there is no adequate method of
contacting new book buyers. Minor issues are mainly slanted at new book
buyers but go to the entire list.
If your mailing lists are not so arranged as to make this possible or
if your address systems make it difficult you had better do something about
it in a hurry as these are the most uneconomical omissions that can be made
by an operation.
SCIENTOLOGY SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR
HCO offices requiring books, tapes, bulletins and other services should
request them from HCO Administrator WW, 37 Fitzroy Street, London, which
post is now occupied by Roddy Stock. The function of this post is to give
service to other Scientology organizations and HCO offices.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mp.rd
[The above HCO B was reissued from Washington, D.C., as HCO B 8 May 1959.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London, W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 24 MARCH 1959
Applicable to London
To all Staff
MINIMUM STANDARDS
If we get two HPA students per week and maintain 25 HAS Comm Course or
Co-audit students per week and never fall below this we can amply justify
the cost of No. 7 Fitzroy Street.
This is what it will take. If we have any less than this we will have
to give up 7 Fitzroy Street because of its high rental cost.
We need an absolute minimum of ten preclears in processing every week
(or twelve to adjust partial rates on some) to make a living unit.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mp.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London, W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 25 MARCH 1959
HAS CO-AUDIT & COMM COURSE
The new HAS course starts with two weeks' comm course followed by an
unlimited time on the HAS co-audit course. Almost any student can co-audit,
even if he has no reality on coaching. If a student is unreal on the comm
course, then put him on to the HAS co-audit-at least he will get some
processing and some gains.
COMMUNICATION COURSE
The comm course consists of TRs 0, 1, 2, 3. The emphasis on TR 3 is not
on comm bridges so much, but on the duplicative question.
Method: The coach sits opposite the student auditor with his back to
the centre of the room. He never flunks the student auditor. His only
originations are "start", "fine" and "that's it". He may make an occasional
short, complimentary remark.
If the student auditor is doing something wrong, the coach puts his
hand out behind him and waits for the instructor to come and handle the
difficulty. The instructor never corrects the student auditor. He just gets
him to carry on with the session.
The idea here is: 1. To get the student auditor to do the drill and not
spend all evening discussing it. 2. To prevent the coach from coaching with
unreality and invalidating the student auditor.
HAS CO-AUDIT COURSE
1. The students are briefed and told that if they blow session the
instructor will not stop them. The course exists to help people who can
help themselves. They will not be pursued.
2. The students are divided into co-auditing teams. The auditor
sits with his back to the centre of the room and the pc faces the room.
Assignment: The instructor goes to each team, puts the pc on the E-
Meter and finds a terminal for the auditor to run. He does this by asking
the question, "Who would you blame for the condition you are in?" If no
terminal bites, run "Himself". If this still doesn't bite, run Dynamic
Straightwire. The question asked on Dynamic Straightwire is "Tell me what
would represent yourself" (on Dynamic one, etc). After asking this question
about each dynamic, run the following commands on the wackiest answers.
Processes are Selected Persons Overt Straightwire. "Recall something
you have done to (terminal)," "Recall something you have withheld from
(terminal)." General Persons Overt Straightwire, "Recall something you have
done to somebody" and "Recall something you have withheld from somebody."
Each command in these two straightwire processes is repeated alternately.
The auditor does muzzled auditing. Muzzled auditing means that the
auditor says only two things. He gives the command and acknowledges the
answer to that command. If the pc says anything that is not an answer to
the command, the auditor nods his head and awaits an answer before giving
acknowledgement.
If the auditor gives the wrong command or gets confused, or if the pc
forgets the command, the auditor says nothing to the pc. What he does do is
place his hand behind him and wait for the instructor to handle the
situation.
The auditor never leaves his chair to ask the instructor anything. The
instructor never talks to an auditor who leaves his chair.
The auditor keeps on running a terminal until the pc starts repeating
answers. When he judges the process is flat he puts out his hand and the
instructor comes around to check.
At the end of the first session students change teams simply by moving
one seat round. They keep the same auditors and preclears for as long as
possible on course. Seats may be numbered to ensure consistency.
At the end of the evening the auditor writes out an auditor's report.
This places his attention on his pc, keeping him more in session, and has
him feel responsible for doing something to help his pc.
If the auditors remain strictly muzzled nothing can go wrong. It is up
to the instructor to see that they remain muzzled. He is processing the pcs
via the auditors, and to do this, rigid control must be maintained at all
times.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mp.mspjh
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[This HCO B is added to by HCO B 3 April 1959, HAS Co-Audit and Comm
Course, page 456.]
P.A.B. No. 157
PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN
The Oldest Continuous Publication in Dianetics and Scientology
From L. RON HUBBARD
Via Hubbard Communications Office
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
_____________________________________________________________________
1 April 1959
PROCESSES USED IN 21ST ACC (Concluded)
(Continued from P.A.B. No. 156 [page 441])
Compiled from the Research Material and Taped Lectures
of L. Ron Hubbard
The engram commands we are using are as follows: "What part of that
incident can you confront?", "What part of that incident can you be
responsible for?" and "What part of that incident can you confront?-for how
long?" And when we have sorted these out, we run "Find an unimportant part
of that incident."
By incident, we mean both the overt and the motivator. An engram is
some portion of an incident containing pain, unconsciousness and
exteriorization. But the whole incident would consist of the overt-
motivator which belong together; therefore we may find them running
thousands of years apart, but, nevertheless, bundled up and identified with
great thoroughness. We are running this simply with a kind of understood
acknowledgment in most cases, and we are trying not to make this a sharp
Tone 40 process, because that tends to drive the pictures away. (Some
people are still doing this to a slight degree. Their acknowledgments are a
bit too good and tend to make the engram vanish. This is a common thing.)
One thing we are faced with in this ACC is the inability of the student
to accept the fact that a case changes. This must be stressed. Why are you
auditing a case if you don't expect it to change? These students go on
auditing somebody day after day and
actually downgrade the case again by giving it the same careful
treatment throughout. They are careful, as if the preclear is still crazy.
They haven't noticed that the preclear is now doing pretty well. This leads
to ARC breaks.
One more process which I haven't mentioned so far is ARC Break
Straightwire. We are not using it on the ACC, not because it isn't good,
but merely because it is lengthy. Dynamic Straightwire, cleverly done,
takes a case apart. It starts almost any case. Selected Person Straightwire
on Overts will bring up the responsibility of a case to a point where he
can be trusted to run engrams; and ARC Break Straightwire is the one which
lays open the track. The only trouble is, I have seen it run for fifty
hours. It's a long process, but it is a valuable process.
We have one final process here. It is a central process which processes
anybody, and it is the thinking process of SCS. Now, to have the thinking
process of SCS would be very valuable, because the assertion of control is
your biggest point out. The reason auditors can't audit and the reason
cases can't run and the reason valences happen, and so forth, has to do
with handling people. Taking an old, old process here and remodeling it, we
find that we have a very fast, wound-up-doll, muzzled auditing process that
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
can kick the living daylights out of a case; and we are including the
process in the 21st ACC.
The process is simply this: "Think of an identity you could handle.
Think of an identity you couldn't handle." Or: "Think of an identity that
could be handled. Think of an identity that could not be handled." This is
the SCS Control process, Thinking version.
It is not yet decided which of the auditing commands is the best. You
can run the preclear either at cause or generally. The general process is
"Think of an identity that could not be handled. Think of an identity that
could be handled." Run alternately, one command after the other, it
probably undercuts the other process, which is "Think of an identity you
could handle. Think of an identity you couldn't handle."
It sounds very bad to say "you couldn't handle"-it is a negative
process. That is why it has to be sandwiched in with a positive process.
Strangely enough, it doesn't totally run on the positive process, because
the preclear has a private ambition-not to be handled. He doesn't want to
be controlled in any way. So you must run the negative process in on the
other side of the positive process.
I can't tell you at this stage how many cases this process can be run
on. But I do know that it is the anatomy of cases in group one, for all my
study of them so far shows that their greatest unreality is the unreality
of control. They demonstrate a hectic attitude toward the preclear because
of an anxiety about controlling him, or an apathetic attitude towards the
preclear because they know they can't control him.
The whole subject of valences finally shook out here on the 21 Ts ACC.
I hasten to tell you about it. The preclears have been through arduous
control on the whole track. Arslycus, where everybody got worked to death
(produce, produce, produce, work, work, work . . .)-Space Opera, where
control was nothing if not deadly-in fact, at every place on the track
where everybody went haywire, they had to make a total effect on people. So
the preclear who is having a bad time has as his central goal an
individuality that cannot be controlled; and this is why most of these
lower scale people want to be clear. They do not want to be not-controlled;
they just want to be absent.
This is also the reason why some people, although they say they are
willing to clear people, are really unwilling to do so; because a clear is
someone you cannot handle the way they think of handling people. So they
become unwilling to make somebody clear, and they will chop it up somewhere
along the line. So there is a reasonable reason underlying this obsessive
chop-up that some students do to a preclear, and a reasonable reason behind
an auditor's coming up to you with great unhappiness the moment his
preclear starts to make a gain. He himself wants to be clear so that he
cannot be handled, but, if he knows he can't be clear, he adopts an
identity that cannot be handled.
Various societies in various times have various things that cannot be
handled, and they get stuck with these solutions, and it is almost a
rational solution. They adopt an identity that cannot be handled-and that
is what is sitting in the preclear's chair. And sitting in the auditor's
chair is somebody who knows only too well that the preclear can never be
handled and so it doesn't matter what he does; or somebody who is
determined to handle the preclear even if it means knocking his block off.
This results in misemotional responses to handling the preclear.
This is one of those horrible simplicities.
We had processes long ago on identity and inventing identities and
various types of identities, and we also had processes on handling people
("What could you handle?
What couldn't you handle?" "What could you change? What couldn't you
change?" that sort of thing). Well, that all adds up to this process; and
this process works much faster than SCS.
However, we shall know more about the Thinking version of SCS later on.
I just wanted to give you a summary of the techniques and processes being
used in the 21st ACC, for your information.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 APRIL 1959
HAS CO-AUDIT AND COMM COURSE
Further to HCO Bulletin of March 25, 1959, the cost of the HAS Co-audit
and Comm Course is 2 gns per week payable to the evening reception on each
Monday evening. No credit is extended for this course. The price is 2 gns
per week regardless of the number of weeks spent on the course.
The following is the schedule covering the HAS Comm Course and HAS Co-
audit:
COMM COURSE
First Week
Monday Wednesday Friday
7.00 -Roll Call, Briefing 7.00 -Roll Call, Briefing 7.00 -Roll Call
7.15 ) 7.15 ) 7.15 )
8 25 )---TR 0 8 25 )---Change 7.50 8 25 )---TR 3
8.30 ) 8.30 )---TR 2 8.30 )---TR 3
9 40 )---TR 0 9.40 )---Change 9.05 9.40 )
9.45 -End 9.45 -End 9.45 -End
New students: 7.15 - 8.00-OCA test.
Second Week
Monday Wednesday Friday
7.00 -Roll Call, Bfg.
7.15 ) TR 0
7.51 )---Change 7.33
7.51 ) TR 1
8.25 )---Change 8.04
As above As above
8.25 ) TR2
9.01 )---Change 8.43
9.01 ) TR3
9.37 )---Change 9.19
9.45 -End
HAS COURSE
7.00 - 7.15 - Briefing
7.15 - 8.20 - 1st Session
NO BREAK
8.25 - 9.30 - 2nd Session
9.30 - 9.45 - Reports and Questions
Above timetable subject to alteration depending on case assessments
made.
LRH :mp.rd L. RON HUBBARD
SPECIAL HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S COURSE LECTURES
London, England
6 April-1 May 1959
On 6 April 1959, L. Ron Hubbard began personal instruction of the new
Hubbard Professional Auditor's (HPA) Course at the Academy of Scientology
in London. The emphasis was on Clearing at the HPA level. The lectures were
recorded on tape for use in future HPA/HCA courses all over the world.
** 5904C06 SHPA-1 Beingness and Communication
** 5904C07 SHPA-2 Universes
** 5904C07 SHPA-3 The Dynamics
** 5904C08 SHPA-4 Scales
** 5904C08 SHPA-5 States of Being
** 5904C09 SHPA-6 Anatomy
** 5904C09 SHPA-7 What Can Be Done with the Mind (Reality Scale)
** 5904C14 SHPA-8 Mechanisms of the Mind
** 5904C14 SHPA-9 Overt Act-Motivator Sequence
The list of Special HPA Course lectures continues in chronological
sequence on pages 459 - 461.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 14 APRIL 1959
Magazine Article
LETTER FROM AUSTRALIA
"Attached you will see a letter from Jim and Wal Wilkinson-who are very
good Scientologists operating in Adelaide, capital city of South Australia.
They have just started up and already have 30-35 on their PE Courses. I
have met them personally and believe me they are good sorts. Now I wrote to
them on Rhona's instructions asking them to apply for an HCO Franchise to
regularize their setup and told them a few things about having an HCO.
"They are very keen to have an HCO and I presume that the franchise
would be for the area of South Australia-quite a large state.
"I am very pleased that they are doing so well because now Scientology
in Aussie is really swinging in these cities: Perth, Adelaide, Melbourne
and very soon we will get Sydney and Brisbane going and LO-WE WILL HAVE
ENCIRCLED AUSTRALIA. Working it out mathematically on population basis of
Aussie with 250 auditors putting 500 people thru courses or processing a
year, in 2 years 5 percent of the people will have been thru the courses.
Of course it is very likely we are going to have more than 250 auditors
around-so watch it kiddo Aussie will be the first all Scientology country
and should produce a terrific culture-about time too-it hasn't really had
its OWN culture. Anyway that's the mockup-and we are already succeeding in
it markedly. Talk in the coffee shops is all about Dianetics or
Scientology. Our people are young and able. (Sounds like I'm really
converted to Aussie, doesn't it!) Well I guess I'm beating the drum
slightly. Anyway if you'll talk about this tremendous advance that's
getting going in Aussie (and around the world) the more people we get to
agree with it-the more it gets solid and real. You know people are
fantastically interested in Scientology really-angry young people
everywhere-are interested. Perhaps the difference in Aussie is there is a
lot of hope and many possibilities of succeeding in the game here than
elsewhere-perhaps-and also no hidebound old culture bogging them down-
tradition etc (not pooh-pooh tradition where they are useful and go ahead)
but sitting on past glories (and failures) is no good. They don't do that
in Aussie.
"Sounds like I'm giving a lecture-so will close sending you a spark of
enthusiasm. Best, Eliz. "
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mp. rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 15 APRIL 1959
EMOTIONAL TONE SCALE EXPANDED
(Cancels Bull. of April 8)
There are several misemotions hitherto not placed on the ARC Emotional
Tone Scale.
These are:
0.0 - Failure (Death)
-0.2 - Regret (Being other bodies)
-1.0 - Blame (Punishing other bodies)
-1.3 - Shame (Responsibility as blame)
In running Overt Withhold Straight Wire stubborn cases run these
emotions for some weeks of auditing and go upwards more or less in that
order. Only when they come to failure as an emotion do they then get into
apathy.
No case run on Overt Withhold Straight Wire can be said to be making
progress unless misemotions turn on below 2.0. If the right button is
reached by correct assessment, emotional reaction occurs in the running of
that button.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: rt.rd
[See also HCO B 25 September 1971RA, revised 4 April 1974, Tone Scale in
Full, Volume VII, page 404.]
SPECIAL HPA COURSE LECTURES
London, England
15-16 April 1959
** 5904C15 SHPA-10 Codes
** 5904C 15 SHPA-11 The Code of a Scientologist
** 5904C16 SHPA-12 The Logics and Axioms of Dianetics and
Scientology
** 5904C16 SHPA-13 Axioms: Second Lecture
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 17 APRIL 1959
KNOW TO MYSTERY STRAIGHT WIRE FOR EXTREME CASES
(Cancels Bull. of March 31, 1959)
The Know to Mystery Scale expanded
Not know
Know
Look
Emotion
Effort
Think
Symbols
Sex
Eat
Mystery
Wait
Unconsciousness
To assess a case on the lower rungs of processing, ask pc, against an E-
Meter, what terminal could represent each of above, select that terminal
(object or person, never a condition) which changes needle action most and
run Overt-Withhold Straight Wire on it.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mp. rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[The cancelled Bulletin of 31 March 1959 had the same title and text as
this issue, except that it did not have "Look" on the Know to Mystery
Scale.]
SPECIAL HPA COURSE LECTURES
London, England
21-22 April 1959
5904C21 SHPA-14 Types of Auditing
** 5904C21 SHPA-15 Modern Auditing Types
** 5904C22 SHPA-16 Types of Cases
5904C22 SHPA-17 Assessment
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 22 APRIL 1959
OLD AND NEW REALITY SCALE
"Old " Reality Scale "New " Reality Scale
Tone 40 to 20 Postulates Pan-determined creation
20 to 4 Consideration Self-determined creation
4 to 2 Agreements Experience
1.5 Solid terminals Confront
1.1 Terminals too solid ) Elsewhereness
Lines solid )
1 to .5 No terminal ) Invisibility
Solid line )
.5 to .1 No terminal ) Blackness
Less solid line )
.1 No real terminal )
No solid line ) Dub-in
Substitute terminal )
.0 No terminal )
No line ) Unconsciousness
LRH:mp.rd L. RON HUBBARD
copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SPECIAL HPA COURSE LECTURES
London, England
23 April-1 May 1959
** 5904C23 SHPA-18 Present Time
** 5904C23 SHPA-19 Use of the E-Meter in Locating Engrams
** 5904C28 SHPA-20 Theory of Processes
** 5904C28 SHPA-21 Processes
5904C29 SHPA-22 Specialized Auditing
** 5904C29 SHPA-23 Processing of Children
** 5904C30 SHPA-24 HAS Co-audit
5904C30 SHPA-25 Electronic Phenomena of the Mind
5905C01 SHPA-26 End of Course Lecture
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 APRIL 1959
DEFINITIONS
A CONSULTANT is an instructor who is on duty sporadically or from time
to time, but not routinely in any one place.
AN INSTRUCTOR is one who has regular classes and who is assigned to
places at specific times.
A COACH is a student who is standing in the role of "pc".
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mp.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 MAY 1959
SOLUTION TO SOLUTIONS
It is interesting when some old well-worn Scientology phenomena such as
problems and solutions resolves.
I noted in 1956 that problems tended to collapse upon one as he solved
them, if you will recall. When you asked someone to invent a problem of
comparable magnitude, his problem went further away in distance. When you
asked someone for a solution to his problem the problem approached closer.
Well, I have now found the reason for this-the "penalty of solving". It
is, I might comment, not an unimportant discovery for we all become victims
of problem-collapse when we solve things. This is why people won't solve
their problems, why they "have to have problems".
Failure to make solutions (or postulates) stick elsewhere makes the
thetan "believe" that solutions collapse problems on him.
A process to demonstrate the first observation is well known-problems
of comparable magnitude-and getting the pc to then "solve the problem"
(this last of course is not "therapeutic").
A process to overcome this collapsing of problems upon one is "What
solution could you make stick?"
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:mp.rd Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 MAY 1959
AN AFFINITY PROCESS
We have a fundamental Reality process in Overt-Withhold Straight Wire
and, at a higher level, "What can you confront?"
Variations suggest themselves but what with Administration, Congresses,
HPA Courses, ACCs and heavy promotion, I have not had time to test them.
The above form, startlingly enough, does work. It apparently cracks
lower cases than "What can you confront?" There is some evidence it raises
havingness.
A basic communication process is "Recall a time you communicated."
There have been few successful Affinity processes. However, as unlikely
as it first appears, the following is nearly a pure Affinity process.
"What would you like to confront?"
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mp .rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 MAY 1959
HOW TO WRITE A CURRICULUM
1. Establish personality of person present. (Create their beingness on
course.) Course creates a beingness, not imparts data.
2. Demonstrate how to create this beingness.
3. Establish communication by teaching the language of the subject.
4. Exemplify the communication symbols with demonstrations of ridiculous
errors.
When established, teach:
1. Each word and its definition that is used in the practice. Underline
strange words.
2. Diagnosis. You must recognize ("Conditions we are seeking to
change"), i.e. Obnosis.
3. System of classification.
4. Means of changing each class or type of child, and maintenance of
state. Subject matter: "Prevention of worsening".
Practice
Demonstration
Doingness
Note: Person who is willing to be the person who sees.
Person who sees. Person who discusses.
Person who can do something.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:mp.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 7 MAY 1959
NEW PROCESS
THEORY
It never snows but it avalanches!
Possessing now tremendous processes at lowest levels, we need a new
understanding of processing and assessment.
The broad tone scale is divided into three general parts. Highest is
Pan Determinism. Mid-range is Self-Determinism. Low range is Other-
Determinism.
The fundamental difficulty is that something has so thoroughly
overwhelmed the pc that he is it. This is Other-Determinism become the
person. Mild locks use this route to further overwhelm him. A person
doesn't really find anything in this lifetime that would have overwhelmed
him enough to aberrate him. It took great doing. Things like prenatals and
operations and shocks just use the existing overwhelm channel.
The picture of aberration is this. The person causes an effect, time
and time again. Usually this is not aberrative. But one day he causes an
unintended effect. He didn't mean to. It was wrong. This is the true overt
act-an unintended bad effect. It is not deserved by the recipient. It is a
wrong, unintended, undeserved effect. The person now tends to limit his
effects or withhold his effects. Having been wrong once, he now becomes
cautious. Next thing he knows he has assisted himself to be overwhelmed. He
now has an inflow channel over which other things, all locks, can now
overwhelm him.
Eventually he becomes an "other-determinism". This, of course, can get
nothing done, doesn't outflow, etc., etc., which adds up to all the faults
we find in an aberrated person. For example, if the pc has been overwhelmed
by money, he, in money matters, is now money. If you took some money and
threw it on the bed it wouldn't do a thing. It wouldn't stack itself up or
add up accounts. Money doesn't do anything. Therefore, the pc, as an other-
determinism, does nothing really about money-and this we find annoying in
him. It is his aberration.
Clearly all one need do as an auditor is to reverse this flow and put
the pc at cause over the button, money, to have the other-determinism (and
the overwhelmingness) fade away. Using Problems of Comparable Magnitude or
Overt-Withhold Straight Wire or simple reaching, the effect is turned to
cause and the pc comes out of it.
Assessment is only discovering what has overwhelmed the pc.
Auditing is the reversing of other-determined flows by gradient scales,
putting the pc at cause again.
THE BASIC ERROR
The question was asked me, and a fine question it was, "Why does a
thetan make his postulate fail to stick in the first place? Why would he
say, 'I can get my postulates all messed up and so cause an overt act'?"
Obviously all aberration is third dynamic. The entrance into self-
determinism requires that a thetan conceive the idea of other beings. Also
he must then conceive that there are zones of privacy from which he must
not communicate.
This error leads to obsessive or fixed channels on which one can be
overwhelmed, since he "may not" take the position of cause on this channel.
Avoidance of the places he must not communicate from leads into all
manner of difficulties, since this is inhibited communication. A person,
therefore, becomes as aberrated as he cannot communicate, as aberrated as
he is overwhelmed by Other-Determinisms, as aberrated as he himself dare
not assume cause points.
A NEW PROCESS
This leads to a new process, for use "in individual sessions". The
final phrasing is not established at this time.
"From where could you communicate?" or
"Find a place from which you could communicate," or
"Recall a place from which you have communicated."
My first tests show this to be very strong but workable. I have not
established the depth this reaches nor the complete effectiveness up scale.
But it does reverse Other-Determinism heavily.
(This, of course, does not supplant Selected Person Overt-Withhold
Straight Wire as fundamental and is not for use in HAS Co-auditing, where
Selected Persons Overt-Withhold Straight Wire is the tested allowed
process.)
This new process may open a faster route to theta clear, even though
that route is already very fast.
Note: Apparently this process, LOCATIONAL COMMUNICATION, relieves the
face pressures and terror stomachs (after turning them on) which have
proved reluctant. Terror stomachs we have a specific for. Face pressures,
we do not have totally taped.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:m .rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 8 MAY 1959
AN UN-DOABLE COMMAND
There are a very few commands that cannot be done. One of these is
"Find an unknown" ( 1954).
I have just found another one:
"Invent an other-determinism".
Perhaps if it could be run, as Jan Halpern commented, it would be a one-
shot clear.
LRH:mp.rd L. RON HUBBARD
6TH LONDON ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
London, England
4 May-13 June 1959
L. Ron Hubbard conducted the 6th London Advanced Clinical Course at the
Academy of Scientology in London, England, from 4 May to 13 June 1959. He
gave the following lectures to students:
** 5905C12 6LACC-1 Clearing
5905C13 6LACC-2 Second Lecture on Clearing Methodology
5905C14 6LACC-3 Clearing Technology
5905C19 6LACC-4 The Theory of Clearing
5905C20 6LACC-5 Clearing: Practice of
5905C21 6LACC-6 Clearing: Process-Special Cases
The list of 6th London ACC lectures continues in chronological sequence
on pages 471, 473 and 475.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 21 MAY 1959
Central Orgs
HCO Offices
CANCELS ALL EARLIER DIRECTIVES ON HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES
HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES AND ACC PROCESSES AS OF
MAY 21, 1959
The following processes are the only allowed processes for use in HGCs
anywhere.
THETA CLEAR SCHEDULE
For use on unconscious and fixedly psychotic persons unwilling to be
audited:
"You make that body sit on that chair" (or "lie on that bed"), and
CCH 1, 2, 3, 4.
For use on persons unwilling to be audited at any time:
Two way help bracket
"How could you help me?"
"How could I help you?"
Get each question answered. Use lots of two way comm. Don't Q and A
with reasons.
For use on persons unwilling to be audited by reason of session errors:
TR 5N, which is:
"What have I done wrong?"
"What have you done wrong?"
with two way comm.
For persons who are acutely ill:
Run old TR 5 if needed.
Diagnose exact button and run Overt Withhold Straight Wire or
Run Factual Havingness
Or do an assist.
For use on persons who complain that auditing has no effect on them or
who make very slow gains:
Have pc put the following thought in six sides of room, going
around in different order each time (example, front wall, back
wall, ceiling, floor, right wall, left wall).
"Put the thought into that (designated room side), 'Nothing can
have any effect on (pc's name)'.
" There are variations of this phrasing: "Nothing must be done to
(pc's name)," "Nothing can be done about (pc's name)." Depends on
what makes the meter fall.
This process probably requires about 15 to 25 hours to flatten. Use
the same wording throughout.
For use on persons in general. If this has been handled in an HAS Co-audit
well, don't handle it again:
Overt-Withhold Straight Wire after careful assessment and used on
various buttons. Dynamic Straight Wire, Know to Mystery Straight
Wire, are all more or less same process but are different ways of
assessment. Always run terminals, never conditions.
For use on persons in general, always to some extent when they enter
HGC:
S-C-S.
For use on auditors in for auditing. Run until fully flat:
Op Pro by Dup old (original) style.
For use on people going to theta clear. Use liberally and long:
"Find a spot from which you could communicate."
For use on people going to theta clear:
Find engram necessary to resolve the case each time. Check out all
terminals present in it. Make a list. Run Overt-Withhold Straight
Wire on a (each terminal in incident by general name). Don't run
off from incident that is being run. Pc will go up and down the
track but when one terminal is flat, choose next from same incident
we started with. The commands for this are "Guess at something you
have done to" "Guess at something you have withheld from".
For finishing off cases to level of theta clear:
Run Overt-Withhold Straight Wire on minds, brains, bodies, mest.
For easing off any case into comfort or completion of an intensive:
"From where could you communicate?"
HAS CO-AUDIT
The only allowed process in HAS Co-audit is Overt-Withhold Straight
Wire on present life terminals selected by instructor.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:mp.vmm.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 26 MAY 1959
The following article appeared recently in the London City Press. It
may be used by City Offices and Area Offices for information to papers.
"MAN WHO INVENTED SCIENTOLOGY"
One best-seller is often the real beginning in the story of a
publishing house. But to come into existence because of another publisher's
best-seller is unusual. This is what happened in the case of the Hubbard
Association of Scientologists International.
The HASI and all its concerns is founded on the work of one man, L. Ron
Hubbard, engineer, explorer, nuclear physicist and writer. Holding in his
mind a knowledge of Eastern thought gained in his travels, his instruction
in psychology from a medical doctor who had studied personally under
Sigmund Freud, and his training in mathematics and nuclear physics, L. Ron
Hubbard found himself convalescing in hospital towards the end of the
second world war, after a distinguished career in the United States Navy.
During the year he spent in hospital he reviewed earlier work he had
done on the fundamentals of knowledge. He was also confronted with the
deplorable nervous reactions of his friends who had been through the war.
He concluded, after many experiments, that his ideas could help people
towards greater ability and greater happiness.
He coined the word Scientology, to mean the science of knowing how to
know.
EXPERIMENT
Then followed several years of experiment, which he supported by
writing fiction. His ideas, like most new things, met with complete
disbelief in official quarters in spite of the fact that they had by this
time been practised, proved, tested and documented.
A thesis he wrote in 1948 was ignored. However, people began to hear of
his work and to get hold of carbon copies of his thesis and make more
copies of it and hand them to friends. Hubbard's correspondence grew to
embarrassing proportions as more and more people found out that Dianetics
(the branch of Scientology he wrote about at that time, the branch which
deals with mental anatomy) really worked in practice. They asked him for
lengthy explanations.
In 1950 L. Ron Hubbard thought of writing a popular text book on
Dianetics to relieve him of the task of writing dozens of long letters
every day. A publisher offered to print the book, but demanded the
manuscript within three weeks. The book was duly written and delivered-
180,000 words of it-within three weeks.
This book, DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH, was expected
to sell 6,000 copies and sold 100,000 almost immediately. It went to the
top of the best-selling lists and stayed there during the summer of 1950.
The book tells the layman how to use Dianetics. Thousands of people
began to use it. Hundreds of people wrote, spoke, and ranted for and
against it. Interest in Dianetics reached hysteria level in the United
States and various organizations were set up, with and without L. Ron
Hubbard's approval, to deal with the demand for treatment and training.
To combat this confusion of commercial exploitation, Hubbard went back to
the broader subject of Scientology and founded the Hubbard Association of
Scientologists International as the official organization which would treat
people, train people and supervise research.
Books and more books were demanded. Hubbard duly wrote them and the
HASI duly published them under its own name or under the name of one of its
offices. Since 1950, more than thirty books by L. Ron Hubbard and many
other Scientologists have been published by the HASI.
Perhaps the best-known titles are DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF
MENTAL HEALTH, SCIENCE OF SURVIVAL, SELF ANALYSIS IN SCIENTOLOGY, PROBLEMS
OF WORK and THE CREATION OF HUMAN ABILITY.
It is fitting that the main part of HASI's publishing output should be
written by the man who founded it, and that all the books it publishes
should be about Scientology in its various aspects, whether applied to
helping the individual and training professional practitioners, or to more
topical subjects such as those dealt with in ALL ABOUT RADIATION and HOW TO
LIVE THOUGH AN EXECUTIVE.
The 'international' at the end of the HASI's title is well earned. Few
publishers have offices in, and books printed in, Washington, London, Los
Angeles, Melbourne, Auckland, Johannesburg, Paris and Berlin. And this
within nine years.
TRANSLATIONS
Scientology books have been translated into many languages and the
London office (which is now the central office of the organization)
receives enquiries from all parts of the world and has on its staff people
from Australia, Greece, New Zealand, Mauritius, Rhodesia, South Africa,
Spain and the United States. Students come from far and near, east and
west, for training to become professional practitioners in Scientology or
'auditors' as they are called (an auditor: one who listens and computes).
When trained, they qualify to help other people improve their lives and
their abilities by doing simple mental exercises under their skilled
supervision; and many of them go back to their own countries and set up
offices, groups, training centres and clinics of their own. A large part of
their training consists of the study of texts published by the HASI.
The publication of DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH in
1950 started, not just a publishing house, but a world movement. The long-
ignored work of one man now suddenly affects the lives of people from
Malaya to Manchester. And the HASI becomes a very busy organization indeed.
(Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All rights reserved)"
LRH:gh.rd L. RON HUBBARD
6TH LONDON ACC LECTURES
26 May-4 June 1959
5905C26 6LACC-7 Clearing: Theta Clear Procedure
** 5905C27 6LACC-8 Clearing: General Processes (Lecture 2)
** 5905C28 6LACC-9 Clearing: General Cases-Communication
Processes
5906C02 6LACC-10 Clearing: Fixed Ideas
** 5906C03 6LACC-11 Clearing: Communication Processes, Specific
5906C04 6LACC-12 Clearing: Communication, Special Problems
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 5 JUNE 1959
FORMULA 10
This is the first practical approach I have developed toward reaching
the state of OT.
Up to and including step 7 gives us a theta clear. Steps 8, 9, 10 and
11 give us the finishing touches for OT.
This formula gives two states, then, depending on where it is used.
The full data background of all this is given in the HPA/BScn Course
tapes of Spring 1959 and the 6th London ACC tapes (which also give the way
to do this very broadly).
FORMULA 10-AN APPROACH TO OT
1. Do case assessment. Selected Person Overt-Withhold Straight Wire
(this life). (Flatten)
2. "Recall (or think of) something you have been responsible for."
(Flatten)
3. "Recall (or think of) something you have confronted." (Flatten)
4. "Recall (or think of) something you have been responsible for."
(Flatten)
5. Do case assessment. Run "From where could you communicate to a
(general terminal )" .
Note: Run any terminals that react.
6. "From where could you communicate to a body."
7. Locate and run engrams by "From where could you communicate to (A)
(generalized form of terminal found in engram)"; run all terminals
found. (B) Run until Rock incident is run (run as general terminal).
8. Reassess case for ANY terminal that has ANY reaction and run "From
where could you continue to communicate to a (generalized form of
terminal)". Run No. 8 until there are none that react.
9. "From where could you continue to communicate to a body." (Flatten)
10. "From where could you communicate to a mind."
11. "From where could you continue to communicate to a mind."
L. RON
HUBBARD
NOTE: This may be used in HGCs when tapes have been studied by auditors.
LRH:gh.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
WASHINGTON, D.C.
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 JUNE 1959
When cases crack well on Selected Persons Overts Withhold, run Problems
of Comparable Magnitude crudely on same terminals. Then go off into ARC
Break Straightwire. This is a very hot route for staff processing.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mp.bg.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[This HCO B was excerpted from an air letter written by LRH to the
Washington, D.C. Org.]
6TH LONDON ACC LECTURE
London, England
9 June 1959
5906C09 6LACC-13 Clearing: Possibilities of
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 9 JUNE 1959
CENTRAL
NEEDED MATERIAL
I have been extremely busy during the last three months getting
together vital material in the fields of research and lecture tapes.
My foremost concentration has been to back up to the limit the HAS Co-
Audit programme.
It has been quite a trick developing and testing all this material,
putting it into lecture form, and handling some crucial phases of
administration and finance as well. However I more or less seem to have
made the grade, and after three months have gotten together the following:
1. The HPA/BScn Course lectures. This covers all the fundamental and
currently sound and valid material in Dianetics and Scientology. These
carry with them as well an additional lecture series by Jan and Dick
Halpern, and some mimeograph sheets containing the actual curriculum of the
course. This brings the professional course up to a level that has never
before obtained, with a tremendous amount of summarized technical material
and emphasis. The theory is contained in my lectures, the processes are
contained in the lectures of Jan and Dick Halpern. The latter lectures are
not quite complete, in that the first two or three tapes are poorly done,
but then the material on them is available in bulletins. The recording of
these lectures is high fidelity, consisting of Theory and Practice
lectures.
2. The 6th London ACC tapes which are all on the subject of clearing.
These start with how to run an HAS Co-Audit course in their first three
lectures and continue on through all the way to theta clear and wind up
with Formula 10, which is the first formula for operating thetan. There are
some tremendous Scientology advances in this lecture series which are to be
found nowhere else. The course is designed for use in its early parts to
play to auditors with HCO Franchises. The last part is designed for the
professional auditor who has already gone through the current HPA/BScn
course. Some of the material in these lectures is extremely fundamental,
for instance, there are new assists given which cure acute illnesses.
Every Central Organization must have these two sets of tapes, since
this is the fastest way I know of to get the material out and in use.
I am very interested in getting as many theta clears as possible in
other places, and very interested in producing a few operating thetans.
We have really made good with this new material, and every promise ever
made to the Scientology public has been so far over-reached now as to make
those promises under-statements.
My answer to most organizational problems is the production of material
and the development of new promotional systems. I have not been paying too
much attention to my despatch lines, and I hope you will forgive me, for I
have considered it far more important to get out materials which, in the
final essence, answer nearly all of the problems being carried in on those
despatch lines.
Please acquire these tapes as soon as possible.
LRH:mp.rd L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 10 JUNE 1959
CO-AUDIT FORMULA
To be used by any Co-Audit Instructor
Find what the person thinks is wrong with him.
Find a terminal he believes represents it. Audit that terminal with
Overt-Withhold Straight Wire.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mp.rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 JUNE 1959
The dates of the Australian ACC in Melbourne are changed as follows:
Starts: November 9, 1959
Ends: December 19, 1959
A two-day standard Congress will be held on Saturday and Sunday,
November 7 and 8, 1959.
L. RON
HUBBARD
6TH LONDON ACC LECTURES
London, England
10-11 June 1959
5906C10 6LACC-14 Clearing: Case Entrance Points
** 5906C11 6LACC-15 Clearing: General Results
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 22 JUNE 1959
BPI
HOW TO "SELL SCIENTOLOGY"
See "What is Scientology?" article in MA Bulletin of near date to this.
Base your line of talk to strangers on the premise that the 19th
Century brutalities and foolishness of psychology, psycho-analysis and
psychiatry have made your listener doubtful of mental healing. Agree they
are right about this. Enlarge on the faults of old 19th Century practices.
Then say they are not all bad since they gave us a basis on which to
start Scientology.
Then show how Scientology learned that men weren't animals, learned
that shock and surgery on the brain was harmful, learned that sex was only
a minor basis for neurosis and insanity. All this without saying what
Scientology is or describing it.
Then, without really ever explaining what Scientology is, say it has
hope for man in a kinder, better world and that we must outgrow our fear of
mental healing and look ahead, not backward.
If you get real insistent, even oddly accusative of listener, even
slightly angry on this point and stress it over and over, you should have
some people willing to come to a PE Course. And if you also stress this in
PE Courses, in the HAS Course, in the Co-audit, you will start a new
concept of thought around the world.
You have started a new reason to get annoyed at people. They'll use it!
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:mp.vmm.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 JUNE 1959
CLEAR TEST
From now on Clear Tests will cost �3.0.0.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mp. rd
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 JUNE 1959
MA-BPI
WHAT IS SCIENTOLOGY
Scientology is the science of human ability and intelligence. It was
developed over a third of a century by Doctor Hubbard, American nuclear
physicist and leading world authority on the subject of life sources and
mental energies and structures. The Hubbard Association of Scientologists
International assists and forwards his work and is a charitable non-profit
organization with thousands of professionals who help people to help
others. The HASI conducts free basic classes in Scientology and is
authorized to train to higher levels for which, however, charges are made
amounting to about five shillings an hour for personal coaching.
Professional processing in Scientology is available from the
Association and many professional Scientologists in private practice.
Scientology is the only full study in the field of the mind developed
in the Twentieth Century. Older Nineteenth Century studies such as
psychology, developed by Wundt in 1879 in Leipzig, Germany, psycho-
analysis, developed by Freud in 1894 in Vienna, Austria, and psychiatry,
developed through the Nineteenth Century in Russia, did not necessarily
fail, since they provided data which permitted Scientology to begin.
Modern, kinder methods largely have taken the place of old brutalities
such as shock, brain surgery and years of pitiless self revelation. Man no
longer is thought of as a brute animal, charged with unconscious and
cunning force.
A brighter more modern day has shed greater understanding on the
problems of the mind and the nature of life and one need no longer shun
mental healing practised by modern, civilized people.
Scientology, in less than a decade, has become the world's primary
study of Man and the mind and has today more offices and practitioners than
all other Nineteenth Century practices combined. Thus we must learn to bury
the past of mental healing and look forward to our better day, the day of
Scientology and new hope, the day of help without threat or harm, the day
of a new and better civilization, born with the birth of a better
understanding of Man.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:gh.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 JULY 1959
Issue IV
ADD FORMULA 10
These two processes are added to Formula 10 and just after running
engrams:
Process S2-
"From where could you communicate to a victim?"
Process S22-
"Think of a place from which you could communicate to a victim."
Optimum use on low cases is obtained running S22 fully muzzled.
(Note: This is the 1st one-shot OT process.)
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:gh.cden
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London, W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 JULY 1959
GENERAL INFORMATION
PURPOSE OF THIS WORK:
To modify the data and material taught and demonstrated in the HCA/HPA
Theory and Practice course and to bring uniformity of stable data to
students and instructors.
There are six basic process types. One or more processes of each type
is included in the Theory and Practice course. Listed here are the six
basic types, the characteristic, purpose and stable datum of each. These
are the general data for each basic type. Specific data are given with the
processes themselves.
TYPE 1. STARTING AND ENDING SESSIONS.
Characteristic: Two-way communication. Two-way communication is how it is
done.
Purpose: To compose preclear into and release him from the auditing
session.
Stable Datum: Agreement. Each thing done in starting and ending sessions
is the establishment of an agreement.
TYPE 2. CONTROL PROCESSES.
Characteristic: Control by action. Preclear's physical actions are
controlled in order to do the processes.
Purpose: To place preclear's body and actions under the auditor's
control to
invite control of them by the preclear.
Stable Datum: Never let the preclear get out of doing what he is told.
TYPE 3. DUPLICATION.
Characteristic: Mimicry by action. Physical actions are duplicated.
Purpose: To establish communication.
Stable Datum: Each command in its own unit of time separate from every
other command.
TYPE 4. SUBJECTIVE.
Characteristic: Thinkingness. The preclear must think something to do the
process.
Purpose: To recover automaticities of thought and as-is unwanted
thinkingness.
Stable Datum: Body control comes before control of thinkingness.
TYPE 5. OBJECTIVE.
Characteristic: Spotting and finding. Preclear must spot or find something
exterior to himself to carry out the auditing command.
Purpose: To orient preclear in present time, drop out past and improve
havingness.
Stable Datum: Attention of preclear must be under auditor's control.
TYPE 6. STRAIGHT WIRE.
Characteristic: Remembering and forgetting. Preclear must do these things
to carry out auditing command or question.
Purpose: To re-control remembering and forgetting and relate past to
present.
Stable Datum: Specific things, not generalities.
DEFINITIONS OF THETAN, MIND AND BODY-the three parts of Man
THETAN: The awareness of awareness unit which has all potentialities
but no
mass, no wavelength and no location.
MIND: The accumulation of recorded knowns and unknowns and their
interaction.
BODY: An identifying form or non-identifiable form to facilitate the
control
of, the communication of and with and the havingness for the thetan
in his existence in the MEST universe.
A thetan himself without the body is capable of performing all the
functions he assigns to the body.
* * *
THE CCH PROCESSES-TONE 40 AUDITING
Definition of Tone 40 auditing: Positive, knowing, predictable control
toward the preclear's willingness to be at cause concerning his body
and his attention.
CCH 1-A TYPE 2-CONTROL PROCESS
NAME: Give me that hand, Tone 40.
COMMANDS: "Give me that hand." Physical action of taking hand when not
given and then replacing it in preclear's lap. And "Thank you"
ending cycle. All Tone 40 with clear intention, one command in
one unit of time, no originations of preclear acknowledged in
any way verbally or physically. May be run on right hand, left
hand, both hands ("Give me those hands") or "Don't give me that
hand", each one flattened in turn, never switching to a
different hand or command before flattening the one already
started.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated in chairs without arms, close
together. Outside of auditor's right thigh against outside of
preclear's right thigh. This position reversed for left hand.
In both hands preclear's knees are between auditor's knees.
PURPOSE: To demonstrate to preclear that control of preclear's body is
possible, despite revolt of circuits, and inviting preclear to
directly
control it. Absolute control by auditor then passes over toward
absolute control of his own body by preclear.
TRAINING Never stop process until a flat place is reached. To process
with good
STRESS: Tone 40. Auditor taught to pick up preclear's hand by wrist
with auditor's thumb nearest auditor's body, to have an exact
and invariable place to carry preclear's hand to before
clasping, clasping hand with exactly correct pressure (enough
to be real to preclear, not enough to bruise his hand over a
long run), replacing hand (with auditor's left hand still
holding preclear's wrist) in preclear's lap. Making every
command and cycle separate. Maintaining Tone 40. Stress on
intention from auditor to preclear with each command. To leave
an instant for preclear to do it by his own will before auditor
does it. Stress Tone 40 precision-this process puts order into
preclear's case, thus precision must be stressed.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in the 17th ACC, Washington, D.C.;
1957.
CCH 2-A TYPE 2-CONTROL PROCESS
NAME: Tone 40 8-C.
COMMANDS: "With that body's eyes look at that wall." "Thank you." "Walk
that body over to that wall." "Thank you." "With that right
hand touch that wall." "Thank you." "Turn that body around."
"Thank you." Run without acknowledging in any way any origin by
preclear, acknowledging only preclear's execution of the
command. Commands smoothly enforced physically. Tone 40, full
intention.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear ambulant, auditor in physical contact with
preclear as needed.
PURPOSE: To demonstrate to preclear that his body can be directly
controlled and thus inviting him to control it. Finding present
time. Havingness. Other effects not fully explained.
TRAINING Absolute auditor precision. No drops from Tone 40. No flubs.
Total
STRESS: present time auditing. Auditor turns preclear counter-clockwise
then steps always on preclear's right side. Auditor's body acts
as block to forward motion when preclear turns. Auditor gives
command, gives preclear a moment to obey, then enforces command
with physical contact of exactly correct force to get command
executed. Auditor does not check preclear from executing
commands.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, D.C., 1957, for the
17th ACC.
CCH 3-A TYPE 3-DUPLICATION PROCESS
NAME: Hand Space Mimicry.
COMMANDS: Auditor raises two hands, palms facing preclear and says, "Put
your hands against mine, follow them and contribute to the
motion." He then makes a simple motion with right hand, then
left. "Did you contribute to the motion?" "Thank you." "Put
your hands in your lap." When this is flat the auditor does
this same thing with a half inch of space between his and
preclear's palms. "Put your hands facing mine, about a half
inch away, follow them and contribute to the motion." "Did you
contribute to the motion?" "Thank you." "Put your hands in your
lap." When this is flat auditor does it with a wider space and
so on until preclear is able to follow motions a yard away.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated, close together facing
each other, preclear's knees between auditor's knees.
PURPOSE: To develop reality on the auditor using the reality scale
(solid comm line). To get preclear into communication by
control + duplication.
TRAINING That auditor be gentle and accurate in his motions, giving
preclear
STRESS: Wins. To be free in two-way comm. That the essential part of
the auditing command is the motion, not the verbal patter. When
it is necessary to physically assist preclear to do commands,
use one-hand commands, putting preclear's hand through the
command with auditor's free hand holding preclear's hand by the
wrist. Accept preclear's answer to the question, "Did you
contribute to the motion?"-his answers are accepted, whatever
they may be. Auditor always places his hands up before telling
preclear to do so. Auditor tells preclear to put his hands in
his lap and keeps his own up until preclear does so, allowing
preclear to break the solid comm line.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, 1956, as a
therapeutic version of Dummy Hand Mimicry. Something was needed
to supplant "Look at me. Who am I?" and "Find the Auditor" part
of Rudiments.
CCH 4-A TYPE 3-DUPLICATION PROCESS
NAME: Book Mimicry.
COMMANDS: Auditor makes a simple or complex motion with a book. Hands
book to preclear. Preclear makes motion, duplicating auditor's
mirror image-wise. Auditor asks preclear, "Are you satisfied
that you duplicated my motion?" If preclear is and auditor is
also fairly satisfied, auditor takes book back, acknowledges,
"Thank you", and goes to next command. If preclear says he is
and auditor fairly sure he isn't, auditor takes book back and
repeats command and gives book to preclear again for another
try. If preclear is not sure he duplicated any command, auditor
repeats it for him and gives him back the book. Tone 40 only in
motions. Verbal two-way comm quite free.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other a comfortable
distance apart.
PURPOSE: To bring up preclear's communication with control and
duplication. (Control + duplication = communication.)
TRAINING Stress giving preclear wins. Stress auditor's necessity to
duplicate his
STRESS: own motions. Circular motions are more complex than straight
lines. The basic rule on complexity in duplication processes
is: Make the motions as complex as is necessary to get the
preclear's interest and attention and no more.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard for the 16th ACC in Washington,
D.C., 1957. Based on duplication developed by LRH in London,
1952.
METHOD OF RUNNING CCH 1, 2, 3, 4.
CCH 1 is run first and run to a flat spot. Then CCH 2 is run. If CCH 2
produces change, it is flattened and followed by CCH 1. Then CCH 2 and
if it again produces change it is followed by CCH 1. This rule is
followed throughout-when
either CCH 2, CCH 3, CCH 4 produces change the process is flattened and
followed by CCH 1. This series of four processes is left when they can
be run, one after the other (1, 2, 3, 4) in the same session without
producing change.
The four CCH processes are to be run on the following cases:
INSANE: That is, a person who is extremely and obsessively unwilling to
control his body, his attention and his thoughts.
UNCONSCIOUS:Any person who is unaware, to a great degree.
HOSTILE: Person who has appeared for processing but who demonstrates a
complete unwillingness to accept order and to carry out an
auditing command.
CCH 1 "DON'T GIVE ME THAT HAND" version, is a specific process for a
case who is dramatizing a heavy compulsive withhold condition.
* * *
ARC STRAIGHT WIRE-A TYPE 6-STRAIGHT WIRE PROCESS
COMMANDS: "Recall something that was really real to you." "Thank you."
"Recall a time when you were in good communication with
someone." "Thank you." "Recall a time when you really liked
someone." "Thank you." The three commands are given in that
order and repeated in that order consistently.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other at a comfortable
distance.
PURPOSE: To give the student reality on the existence of a bank. (When
used as a training drill.) This is audited on another and is
audited until the preclear is in present time. It will be found
that the process discloses the cycling action of the preclear
going deeper and deeper into the past and then more and more
shallowly into the past until he is recalling something again
close to present time. This cyclic action should be studied and
understood and the reality on the pictures the preclear gets
should be thoroughly understood by the student. The fact that
another has pictures should be totally real to the student
under training.
NOTE: It should be thoroughly understood that this is a valuable process
and an excellent step in preparation for running the heavier
recall processes.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in 1951 in Wichita, Kansas. This
was once a very important process. It has been known to bring
people from a neurotic to a sane level after only a short
period of application. It has been run on a group basis with
success but it should be noted that the thinkingness of the
individuals in the group would have to be well under the
control of the auditor in order to have this process broadly
beneficial. When it was discovered that this process
occasionally reduces people's havingness, the process itself
was not generally run thereafter. It is still, however, an
excellent process with that proviso, a reduction of havingness
in some cases.
If this process is "policed" the auditor asks the preclear "when"
before giving the acknowledgement, as often as is necessary to
maintain control of the preclear-or as often as is necessary
for the auditor to maintain his own confidence that the
preclear is under control and doing the process. This process
can be run "muzzled" and should be, where muzzling is
indicated.
ASSESSMENT An inventory and evaluation of a preclear, his body and his
case to DEFINITION: establish processing level and procedure.
1. Determine processing level.
2. Determine process to be used.
3. Always undercut reality level of the case when assessing
processing level.
4. Establish reality level of case by two-way communication
using understanding and affinity as guides. Understanding:
What can the preclear say and talk about that is easily
understandable to the auditor? What can the auditor say and
talk about that is easily understandable by the preclear?
Affinity: What does the preclear like or dislike? What does
he detest or ignore? What is he anxious or otherwise mis-
emotional about?
5. Never overlook an obvious physical defect or communication
difficulty when making an assessment of any kind.
6. Be alert to preclear's comm lags and what produces them.
7. Observe the preclear's response to control.
8. Find out what the preclear assigns cause to-what he blames
what he feels he can do nothing about.
TERMINAL ASSESSMENT-for OVERT-WITHHOLD PROCESS
In the HCA/HPA course this is done by two-way communication. The
student should learn it by observance of the instructor. Terminal
Assessment is made to locate the terminals in the case which, when run,
will produce an increase in the responsibility and reality level of the
preclear.
A VERY BRIEF COVERAGE OF DYNAMIC AND KNOW TO MYSTERY SCOUTING
1. Discover the terminals the preclear states to represent each
part of the expanded Know to Mystery Scale. Any terminal which is
obviously aberrated and won't clear by two-way comm should be run.
2. Discover what terminals the preclear has identified with the
wrong Dynamic. Any terminal wrongly placed that won't blow by two-
way comm should be run.
NOTE: Two-way comm here does not mean invalidative or evaluative
questions or comments by auditor.
SELECTED PERSONS SCOUT
This is the assessment most used. It is applied to the persons in the
preclear's present life. There are several loaded questions which can
be used and there are several observations to be made by the auditor.
QUESTIONS: "Who is to blame for the condition you are in?"
"Who do you know or have known that you'd really hate to be?"
"Who really had it in for you?"
"Who do you know or have known that you dislike thinking
about?"
To be observed by auditor:
Comm lag: Willingness or unwillingness to communicate about a specific
person. Physical and emotional effect produced by discussion of
specific person: agitation, voice change, blushing, dopiness, etc.
NOTE: Auditor must realize that preclear has no power of choice in the
selection of terminals. The terminal is chosen by the auditor.
In a case where the preclear does not answer up to questions or shows
no useful (to the assessment) effects from questions, simply select the
person who is realest to the preclear and proceed with the process.
Continue running the persons in preclear's present life on basis of who
is realest until preclear is able to answer up to assessment questions.
Realest person at start may turn out to be the auditor. If so, run it.
OVERT-WITHHOLD SELECTED PERSONS STRAIGHT WIRE
- A TYPE 6-STRAIGHT WIRE PROCESS
COMMANDS: "Think of something you have done to ." "Thank you."
"Think of something you have withheld from ." "Thank you." Or
"Recall something you have done to ." "Thank you."
"Recall something you have withheld from ." "Thank you."
The use of the "think of' command rather than the "recall"
allows the preclear to plow through where his track is jammed
and incidents are not easily separated, to the point where he
can recall. In either case commands are run alternately, one
for one.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other at a comfortable
distance.
PURPOSE: To put the preclear at knowing cause toward the people in his
current life so that those people can no longer restimulate the
preclear in livingness.
TRAINING Any terminal run with this process is flat when that terminal
can no
STRESS: longer restimulate the preclear's reactive bank. When the
preclear can find no new incidents to recall and must repeat
old incidents to continue process, a given terminal can be
considered flat. Make sure he is repeating incidents and not
recalling similar incidents before ending the run on that
terminal. Also, the first few repeats may be just the
preclear's way of filling in a comm lag. Student should observe
and understand phenomena occurring with this process. Where
assessment has been properly made, the preclear will manifest
various mis-emotions ranging from below 0.0 on the tone scale
up to 2.0 and emotions up to 4.0. The NOT-ISNESS on the case
will show up as attempts to not-is the auditor, process or
anything preclear's attention touches. The preclear, at first,
will not correctly assign the reasons for his mis-emotions and
discomforts and will blame them on the auditor, etc. This is an
example of COROLLARY No. 3 of AXIOM 58 in action. This process
is run "muzzled" by the student in training. Muzzled auditing
is done as follows: At the beginning of session, instructor
makes an assessment of the preclear's case and chooses the
terminal to be run. He gets the preclear's agreement to run the
process and does a very brief clearing of the command with the
preclear. Then, the student auditor says, "Start of session,"
and gives the first command. When preclear has answered the
auditor acknowledges and goes on to the next command. If the
preclear originates anything, either as a statement, comment or
question the auditor nods his head as an acknowledgement. If
the preclear asks to have the command repeated, the auditor
nods his head and repeats it. This is continued until end of
session or until process is flat on that terminal. If student
has any question or thinks terminal is flat, he puts his hand
behind his chair and wig-wags to get instructor's attention. He
does not leave his chair. Near end of session instructor gives
the team notice that the session will end in two minutes. At
the end of that time, when preclear has answered the last
command and has been acknowledged, the student auditor
says, "End of session." This is all there is to muzzled
auditing done by students. The student auditor uses only TR 0,
TR2, TR3 (duplicative command) and handles originations with a
nod of his head, only. No rudiments or two-way comm beyond
"Start of session" and "End of session". Student should
understand that when he runs this process (and some others) on
preclears in the field, he should use muzzled auditing whenever
he finds himself with any tendency to over-communicate or with
any preclear who ARC breaks easily. Student should also
understand that Overt-Withhold Selected Persons, Third Rail,
ARC Break Straight Wire and Not-is Straight Wire can all
restimulate so much automatic NOT-ISNESS that the preclear will
at times apparently lose his bank, his memory, and even the
auditing command and its meaning. The only action indicated
when this occurs is to persist with the process.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in the 21st ACC, in Washington,
D.C., in 1959, as a means of ensuring wider and more
predictable case gains by more auditors, even unskilled ones.
FACTUAL HAVINGNESS-A TYPE 5-OBJECTIVE PROCESS
COMMANDS: "Look around here and find something you have." "Thank you." "
Look around here and find something you would continue. "
"Thank you." "Look around here and find something you would
permit to vanish." "Thank you." Commands are each flattened in
turn before going on to next command. Process can be begun on
any of the three commands, but the above order should be
followed. If process is begun on "vanish" the next command to
be run is "have".
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other at a comfortable
distance and with preclear facing majority of auditing room.
PURPOSE: To remedy havingness objectively. To bring about the preclear's
ability to have, or not have, his present time environment and
to permit him to alter his considerations of what he has, what
he would continue and what he would permit to vanish.
TRAINING To be run smoothly without invalidative questions. One of the
most
STRESS: effective processes known when thinkingness can be controlled
somewhat. The student should thoroughly understand that when a
preclear is set on wasting, the vanish command will at first
occupy the majority of auditing time spent on this process.
Student should understand that the three commands can be each
flattened in order any number of times and that running one of
the commands is quite apt to unflatten the other two. Process
should be continued until this no longer occurs.
THIRD RAIL is a special form of FACTUAL HAVINGNESS
COMMANDS are the same as in Factual Havingness. However the commands are
& POSITION: run in a special ratio of:
8 commands of "vanish"
2 commands of "continue" and 1 command of "have".
PURPOSE: To remedy extreme conditions of NOT-ISNESS. To remedy obsessive
waste. To permit use of the process without bogging preclear in
any one of the commands.
TRAINING Student should realize that there is very seldom any reason for
STRESS: altering this ratio and should never Q and A with the
preclear's
complaints about doing the "continue" or "vanish" commands.
Student should understand that Third Rail should be run where
auditor is uncertain where to begin with Factual Havingness.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, D.C., in 1958, as
the best form of objective havingness. Originally developed by
L. Ron Hubbard in London in 1955 as "Terrible Trio". Third Rail
developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London for the 5th London ACC.
RUDIMENTS-A TYPE 1 PROCESS-OPENING AND CLOSING SESSIONS
COMMANDS: None as such. Rudiments is the establishment of the agreements
basic to an auditing session, and the termination of them, at
end of session. Students must understand what the rudiments are
and be able to use them with any preclear who is capable of
agreeing to them, by two-way communication. They are:
1. Auditor
2. Preclear
3. Auditing room
4. Start of session
5. Preclear's goal for session.
Auditor, by two-way comm, gets preclear's agreement to each of
these, allowing preclear to state his own goals. The above
order is not necessarily the order in which they are
established. There should be enough two-way comm to get the
preclear's agreement and no more. The auditor should determine
for himself, but not tell the preclear, what he (the auditor)
intends to do with the session. At the end of session auditor
makes sure the preclear is released from agreements. Auditor
does not argue with the preclear about the preclear's goals.
NOTE: If a preclear cannot communicate about the rudiments or be brought to
agree with them fairly easily, CCH 1, 2, 3, 4 should be run
with only "Start of session" spoken by the auditor as total
rudiments. Rudiments are not used otherwise with any preclear
who needs to be run on CCH 1, 2, 3, 4. Alternatively, for more
accessible cases, do "muzzled" auditing as described above.
MOCK UP A PICTURE FOR WHICH YOU CAN BE TOTALLY RESPONSIBLE
-A TYPE 4-SUBJECTIVE PROCESS
COMMAND: "Mock up a picture for which you can be totally responsible."
"Thank you."
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other a comfortable
distance apart.
PURPOSE: To put preclear at cause with regard to mental image pictures
to the degree that engrams are under his control.
TRAINING That preclear not be run on this process before he is willing
to carry
STRESS: out a subjective process command exactly as given. Earlier
processes should be well flattened before this is attempted.
Otherwise the preclear will be given loses. The command means
exactly what it says and the preclear's thinkingness must be
well enough under control for him to view the command that way.
This process should not be run for ever without an occasional
flattening of NOT-IS Straight Wire.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, D.C., in 1958.
RE-EXPERIENCE AND EXPERIENCE PROCESS
-A TYPE 4-SUBJECTIVE PROCESS
COMMANDS: "What part of your life would you be willing to re-experience?"
"Thank you." "What part of the future would you be willing to
experience?" "Thank you." Commands run alternately, one for
one.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other a comfortable
distance apart.
PURPOSE: To bring about the preclear's ability to re-experience his past
without enduring consequence and to confront the future without
restimulation.
TRAINING That student understand that the process is run until flat and
that
STRESS: student be aware of what "flat" is. When the preclear can
easily get out of any incident he gets into and when he can re-
experience those things without enduring consequence. Where
engrams are encountered with the process the auditor should
attempt to find out the year of its occurrence by two-way comm
and flash answers and should record the dates found. The
auditor must not go into general two-way comm with the preclear
about the incidents preclear contacts. Never end the process
while preclear is sticking in an incident.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, D.C., in 1959.
PRESENT TIME PROBLEMS-PART OF RUDIMENTS-TYPE I PROCESSES
COMMANDS: Auditor, by two-way comm, discovers the preclear's present time
problem and discusses it with him. If it blows on this basis,
fine. If not, we move out of Type 1 Processes. To handle the
present time problem other than by two-way comm, discuss it
with the preclear and get the names of the terminals involved.
Ask the preclear which of these is realest. Run the one he
names with Selected Persons Overt-Withhold Straight Wire.
Discuss the problem. Find which of the remaining terminals is
most real to the preclear. Run it with S.P.O.W.S.W. Discuss the
problem and so on until the problem is run out, which is when
the preclear does not need to do anything about it.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other a comfortable
distance apart.
PURPOSE: To remove the surface difficulty that is the present time
problem so that the auditing session can progress.
TRAINING Student should know definition of a problem and should know
very
STRESS: well what happens to auditing sessions where present time
problem is unflat. A problem is "The conflict arising from two
opposing intentions". A present time problem is one that exists
in present time, in a real universe. It is any set of
circumstances that so engages the attention of the preclear
that he feels he should be doing something about it instead of
being audited. Auditor uses questions based on definition of
present time problem to find present time problems. Never leave
a present time problem half run. Preclears with whom the
rudiments cannot be readily established should not be run on
present time problems but should be run on CCH 1, 2, 3, 4.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London in 1952.
ARC BREAK STRAIGHT WIRE-A TYPE 6 PROCESS
COMMAND: "Recall an ARC break." "When?" "Thank you."
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other a comfortable
distance apart.
PURPOSE: To as-is ARC breaks. To bring about the preclear's ability to
confront and as-is ARC breaks. To straighten out the preclear's
time track which has become collapsed by ARC breaks in
restimulation. To key out and take out of restimulation the
"Rock" chain.
TRAINING To not acknowledge the preclear's execution of the command
until
STRESS: the time of the ARC break has been established and to
acknowledge with good TR 2 when the time is established. To
accept preclear's reality as to "when". If he says, "It
occurred the year I graduated from high school," accept it and
go on to next command. Assist him with two-way comm when he has
difficulty locating time. Flash answers may also be used for
this. Do not leave process until preclear can easily get out of
incidents he gets into on the process. Process is flat when
recalling ARC breaks no longer produces undue amounts of mis-
emotion. Student should understand that the process has the
limitation of being somewhat hard to clear command with person
unfamiliar with the term "ARC".
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, D.C., in 1958.
NOTE: In handling ARC breaks with the auditor, the auditor should use
Selected Persons Overt-Withhold with the auditor as the
terminal when the break is severe. Otherwise, use TR 5N.
NOT-IS STRAIGHT WIRE-A TYPE 6-STRAIGHT WIRE PROCESS
COMMANDS: "Recall a time you implied something was unimportant." "Thank
you." "Recall a time somebody else thought something was
important." "Thank you." Commands run alternately, one for one.
POSITION: Auditor and preclear seated facing each other a comfortable
distance apart.
PURPOSE: To bring NOT-ISNESS (Axiom 11) under preclear's knowing control
and to reduce the NOT-ISNESS in the preclear's bank. To improve
recall and increase reality. To generally increase preclear's
willingness to confront his past. To as-is the times when
preclear not-ised others. To bring about the ability to
evaluate importances.
TRAINING To be certain preclear can recall overt acts to some fair
degree before
STRESS: attempting this process. To make certain the preclear is not
running the process on the effect side (i.e. recalling times he
thought things were important and times others implied things
were unimportant). To persist when preclear's restimulated NOT-
ISNESS threatens to destroy the session. To run the process to
a flat spot where the preclear easily gets out of the incidents
he gets into and can recall incidents without immediately
restimulating NOT-ISNESS, which is manifested by a sudden
worsening of his recalls.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington, D.C., in 1959.
SCALE OF PROCESSES TAUGHT IN HCA/HPA
This is a scale of processes as they fit with the CONFRONTINGNESS
SCALE, from the bottom up.
1. CCH 1, 2, 3, 4.
2. Rudiments.
3. PT Problems by Overt-Withhold Straight Wire.
4. ARC Straight Wire.
5. Selected Persons Overt-Withhold Straight Wire.
6. Factual Havingness )
These two processes can be interchanged.
7. Third Rail )
8. ARC Break Straight Wire.
9. NOT-IS Straight Wire.
10. Past and Future Experience.
11. Mock up a picture for which you can be totally responsible.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:-jh.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THETA CLEAR CONGRESS LECTURES
Washington, D.C.
4-6 July 1959
L. Ron Hubbard lectured to the Theta Clear Congress at the Shoreham
Hotel in Washington, D.C., July 4 and 5, 1959. Many of these lectures were
devoted to the HAS Co-Audit program, through which widespread Theta
Clearing could be accomplished.
** 5907C04 TCC-1 HCO WW and Research
** 5907C04 TCC-2 Clearing
5907C04 TCC-3 HAS Co-audit
** 5907C05 TCC-4 Survive and Succumb ("BIack Grampus")
** 5907C05 TCC-5 Communication Processes
5907C05 TCC-6 How to Conduct a HAS Co-audit and Why
5907C06 TCC How to Co-audit (could be same tape as above)
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 9 JULY 1959
BPI
Magazine Article
Definition of Scientology-Written by LRH
for Legal when setting up HASI Ltd.
"Scientology is an organized body of Scientific research knowledge
concerning life, life sources and the mind and includes practices that
improve the intelligence, state and conduct of persons."
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :ps.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
East Grinstead, Sussex, U.K.
HCO BULLETIN OF 14 JULY 1959
SPECIAL INFORMATION FOR FRANCHISE HOLDERS
It has been many a year since I sat down and banged out a stencil, but
here I am doing it and Susie is waiting in the other room to run it off on
a Gestetner. So if you have any trouble making it out, it was done on a
German typewriter and an English mimeo machine run by a cosmopolouse and a
Texan respectively.
Actually I have been trying for several weeks to convince people that a
line should be gotten through to the US Franchise Holder but they didn't
believe it and so here I am doing it.
We have just moved a small staff of HCO WW down to Saint Hill and this
is the place from which your bulletins will be coming and out of which we
will be operating. So here and now mark down with fire or lipstick or
anything that is handy all the proper addresses to which you should address
all communications relating to all franchises, all payments, SOSs or
anything headed "RON!"
POSTAL ADDRESS: HCO SAINT HILL, East Grinstead, Sussex, England.
Telephone, East Grinstead 4786 (but use cables, not phone)
CABLE ADDRESS: SIENTOLOGY, EAST GRINSTEAD TELEX
TELETYPEWRITER ADDRESS: HCO STHIL EGSTD TELEX 8876
Here is what happened some months ago: I ordered the HCO SEC US to
issue INTERIM Franchises to able auditors in the US. Anyone qualifying
under that heading could have an HCO Franchise. These people would get
technical and organizational bulletins relating to HAS Co-audit from me and
would get a 40% discount on books and help in other ways. In return these
people would send me 10% of their gross income from Dianetics and
Scientology every week to help pay for the administration of the line,
postage, etc.
Very big things are in the wind as I told people at the Congress but I
did not tell them this subtle fact: The INTERIM HCO Franchise is a testing
area. Those people who get active, do a good job and remit their ten
percent regularly will receive a PERMANENT HCO Franchise-and that means a
great deal more than it looks on the surface.
If after a trial period which may run up to one year, the Franchise
Holder makes good on all fronts, he will be given the right to train to the
level of HCA (HPA in Sterling area). Training in Central Organizations is
being upgraded to HCS/BScn and DScn.
There is even more to an Interim Franchise than this. HCO WW has been
fortunate enough to secure the administrative services and for Interim
Franchise Holders the advices of Dr. Nile Adams. He can be contacted
through HCO Washington, 1812 19th St., N.W., Wash., D.C. Nile and I have
worked out advertising, financing and general organization for PROJECT
CLEAR U.S.
Thus an Interim HCO Franchise looks to be more than first glance
indicates.
I determined-and said very loudly-in 1950 that Scientology would go as
far as it worked and that I was not going to open up the ball until we had
all the music written. Well, I've written the music. You don't know all
about that, yet, but you will.
I am very aware of the fact that this has worked, in one way, a hardship on
all Dianeticists and Scientologists. But not even threats of storm, flood
and bankruptcy have made me swerve from that resolution. Research came
first. When research had wrapped up the human mind and dissemination I was
willing to fire with all guns-but not one minute before. So I've up and
done it and we're getting set on the firing line.
We have many riches. We have a hard corps of trained Scientologists. We
already know who our friends are. We've drawn the teeth of old-time psycho-
therapy and we've lived down our sins. But more important we can and mean
to clear the US.
The finance for this project has been worked out very thoroughly. The
job will only cost a few hundred million and, hold your hat, you're going
to make it.
Excitement is in the wind. The future is no calm vista. And we are
right now taking this vital forward step. My first action is to clear all
comm lines and ready up HCO staffs and facilities. We are putting in
teletypewriters on every continent as fast as we can get them installed and
we have other comm circuits planned. We are, in short, getting ready for
traffic. These first stages on which we are now engaged are full of tests
and reaches which are being hardened, as they prove successful, into a true
pattern of advance. About the only real sorting out is the personnel.
Central org staffs right now are running on each other about as rough a
process as you could want, Process S 2. It's named after an English brand
weed-killer.
What you want to know is, exactly what do you do now? The answer is you
carry on and build about as big an HAS Coaudit as you can and do individual
auditing and coaching. You receive from here a lot of data you need and you
remit directly to here 10% of your gross income made from Dianetics and
Scientology every week. You send this to HCO Ts Hill by postal order, your
own check or any handy means. You will receive info from US HCO offices
eventually when I am sure all lines are in place. Your local area HCO
office will be put back on the lines shortly. But you continue to remit to
Saint Hill until we have a clear picture of both your credit responsibility
and your activity. Very soon, we'll send people in to help you set yourself
up on a proper financial level with proper quarters. Meanwhile, pitch like
mad. Communicate to the public. Every bit of promotion counts.
Meanwhile, don't shame-blame-regret and lose motion. I ;earned a lot
watching this first struggle and enturbulence and we'll make it all pay
off, every bit of it and one of these fine days we'll have a sane world.
And wouldn't THAT be nice.
All the best,
L. RON
HUBBARD
HCO SAINT
HILL
PS: If you're getting any co-auditing yourself, be sure to run flat-flat-
flat, Process S2. It's muzzled. And its command is, "From where could you
communicate to a victim." And what is flat on that?? Why, to regain the
ability to communicate without reservation, of course. It's a one shot OT.
LRH
[Another issue of the same date and title made the distribution "U.S.
Franchise Holders". It also deleted the third to the last paragraph on the
previous page and replaced it with, "An HCO WW Committee has just been
formed which will be directly concerned with HCO WW Franchise matters, and
will be acting on the instructions of HCO WW. The Committee has started
with evidence of great enthusiasm and sincere desire to promote Franchise
Centres throughout the States."]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 17 JULY 1959
CenOCon
AFRICA OVER THE TOP
A cable from Jack Parkhouse tells us that HASI South Africa has topped
one thousand pounds for one week's income without special events for the
first time.
HCO Franchises are also doing very well.
As South Africa has a white population of only 2.8 million or
thereabouts, you can see that every other central organisation in the world
has been out-created.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:brb.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 18 JULY 1959
BPI
TECHNICALLY SPEAKING
We have a whole world full of "victims".
That's enough.
We don't have to be victims ourselves. It's a scarcity we don't have to
remedy.
New Definition: A Scientologist-one who is not a victim.
We can make victims into people without Q and Aing.
-------------------
Historical note: The whole Christian movement is based on the victim.
Compulsion of the overt act-motivator sequence. They won by appealing to
victims. We can win by converting victims. Christianity succeeded by making
people into victims. We can succeed by making victims into people. It's
time the inversion turned anyway.
LRH:brb.rd L. RON
HUBBARD
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 18 JULY 1959
BPI
INCOME TAX REFORM
Please write the enclosed letter to (1) your leading local paper, and
(2) your representatives in Congress.
America needs your help to survive and we need your help to spread and
effect a postulate as a mass-postulate test. This test is to determine the
amount of mest communication necessary to change the "mind" of a governing
agency. In this last respect it is purely research. But it is also a good
idea. Let's do it. Your ability to postulate is workable too. Please tell
us if you have done it.
-------------------
Dear
There comes a time in the history of any country when tax collection
activities become a disease that its economy cannot bear. Such a disease is
ordinarily healed by revolt, inflation, or financial collapse. The primary
source of disintegration in all governments, whether ancient Egypt or
modern America, is tax voracity or abuses.
While fighting a cold front with Communism the US is violently co-
operating with Communist aims by destroying her individual confidence and
initiative with a Marxist tax reform. The basic principles of US income tax
were taken from "Das Kapital" and are aimed at destroying capitalism.
Unless the US ceases to co-operate with this Red push, Communism could win
in America.
The reform of all income tax laws is needed for other reasons. (1) To
increase government revenues in order to support defense. (2) To prevent
spiraling inflation and another stock market collapse and (3) to return the
US to the basic principles of democracy as opposed to economic tyranny.
The following program should accomplish all desirable ends. The only
"losers" are the people now gaining tax bonuses and the Kremlin.
If America cannot act rationally on this matter of tax abuse, she is
condemned to a crash, another depression and Communist dominance in the
world.
Income Tax Reforms that would stabilise US Economy and could win an
election:
Charge as tax 55'o of all gross income and forbid taxes on net incomes.
Abolish criminal penalties for tax failures; substitute higher
percentiles of gross failures to pay.
Forbid use of employers' or tax payers' time to actually collect taxes
from others; (no second party tax duties).
Forbid payments of bonuses or awards to tax personnel or informants for
tax collections.
Make tax personnel personally liable for all public actions if illegal
or damaging.
Forbid the payment of tax on tax monies paid; sums paid to internal
revenue; tax payments to be an expense, all retroactive.
Delete the political aspect from income tax; make it a financial
transaction, not an advance of the principles of Karl Marx aimed to
penalise leadership or initiative.
Delete all criminal aspects from income tax law, not using penalties
about taxation to arrest men whose other crimes are suspected but cannot be
proven by other law agencies; the payment of tax, if it is to be effected,
must not be associated in the public mind with the actions of gangsters.
Use the income tax amendment to collect taxes, not fight capitalism or
the inequalities of ability amongst a people.
Forbid the invasion of privacy of personal transactions and activities
in order to collect tax beyond the examination of a corporation's books by
a qualified accountant.
Cease to penalise corporation executives exclusively because their
accounts departments fail them-penalise only the accountants who refuse to
work or who make the errors, since management to-day is becoming difficult
where the person actually making the errors and omissions cannot be
touched.
Forbid complex forms for taxation purposes. Allow only forms which list
income and calculate its gross percentage.
------------------
If the ills of income tax practice are not cured by swift law, they
will be cured by (a) Economic collapse, (b) Russian victory, (c) A revolt
of the people, or (d) The abandonment of democracy in favor of a fascist
state.
America can no longer afford the deadly disease of economic punishment
in the name of income tax. This, more surely than H-bombs is destroying her
future.
The aim of the Kremlin is to destroy the US economic system. In 1911,
the US altered her constitution to admit a Marxist tax principle. This was
the first germ of the present economic disease.
It can be handled in such a way as to save civilisation or it can be
ignored with the consequence of total destruction.
A way has been hoped for that would give the government her revenues
for defense without wrecking the economy. This is such a way since
political popularity can be bought by it without sacrificing government
revenues.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 21 JULY 1959
CenOCon
HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES
The following rundown is to be used in all HGCs.
For use on unconscious and fixedly psychotic persons unwilling to be
audited:
"You make that body sit on that chair (or lie on that bed)", and
CCH 1, 2, 3, 4.
For use on persons unwilling to be audited at any time:
Two way help bracket
"How could you help me?"
"How could I help you?"
Get each question answered. Use lots of two way comm. Don't Q and A
with reasons.
For use on persons unwilling to be audited by reason of session errors:
TR 5N, which is:
"What have I done wrong?"
"What have you done wrong?"
with two way comm.
For persons who are acutely ill:
Ask them what part of their body they think is ill.
Use that as the terminal. Run:
"From where could you communicate to a ?"
(body part named).
For use on persons who complain that auditing has no effect on them or
who make very slow gains, or who are going for OT. Run:
Process S2: "From where could you communicate to a victim?"
This is flat when pc can confront calmly a victim.
For use on persons in general. If this has been handled in an HAS Co-
audit well, don't handle it again:
Overt-Withhold Straight Wire after careful assessment and used on
various buttons, Dynamic Straight Wire, Know to Mystery Straight
Wire, are all more or less same processes but are different ways of
assessment. Always run terminals, never conditions.
For use on persons who have a p.t. problem. Get them to name the
terminals associated with the problem. Run:
"From where could you communicate to a ?"
(general form of terminal).
For use on persons in general, always to some extent when they enter HGC:
S-C-S.
For use on auditors in for auditing. Run until fully flat:
Process S 2:
"From where could you communicate to a victim?'
For use on people going to theta clear. Use liberally and long:
Assess case with E-Meter. Spot terminals needing clearing. Use:
"From where could you communicate to a ?"
on each terminal.
For use on people going to theta clear:
Find engram necessary to resolve the case each time. Check out all
terminals present in it. Make a list. Run: "From where could you
communicate to a___ ?" (each terminal in incident by general name).
Don't run off from incident that is being run. Pc will go up and
down the track but when one terminal is flat, choose the next from
the same incident we started with. Remember to resurvey incident
for new terminals when several are flat.
For finishing off cases to level of theta clear:
"From where could you communicate to a ?"
(male, female bodies, bodies, mest).
For easing off any case into comfort or completion of an intensive:
Get person to say what is wrong. Get them to name the terminal they
think is the trouble, run:
"From where could you communicate to a ?"
(terminal name).
HAS CO-AUDIT
Comm processes may be used in HAS Co-audit. Assess by asking person:
"Are you sick or well?" If he says "ill", ask, "What part of your body do
you think is ill?" Run:
"From where could you communicate to a ?"
(body part person said).
If person says "well", then say, "What person or thing have you been
most sorry for?" (meaning pity). Whatever person says, run it as a
terminal, "From where could you communicate to a ?" (generalized
form of whatever he or she said).
This gets people up to talking and you get the "word of mouth
advertising" you should have, plus a lot of better people.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:brb.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[This HCO B is superseded by HCO B 25 January 1960, OT-3 Procedure-HGC
Allowed Processes, Volume IV-16.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 22 JULY 1959
BPI
ACTUAL WORKING DEFINITION OF PSYCHOLOGY
That body of practice devoted to the creation of any effect on living
forms.
This is the totality of study. The ethics of the effect do not enter in
this subject.
It is not a science since it is not an organized body of knowledge.
In actual use it is a dramatization of Axiom 10, wholly reactive.
In this wise the word can be used by Scientologists, and this
definition can be used legally to prove Scientology isn't Psychology.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:brb.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 JULY AD 9
BPI
OUR GOALS
Well, we're easing right into the starting line for Clear Earth.
Factually, we are getting lined up for the big push.
Clearing a large population of Earth in our lifetimes is not even
improbable now the way it's going.
By establishing responsible centres all over Earth, running HAS Co-
Audits and having them train and process, by having HASI and the FC give
upper level training, by holding a tight rein on off-beat activities, we'll
make it rather easily.
The exact plan of a centre is this:
1. Sign an HCO Interim Franchise.
2. Run an HAS Co-Audit and individually process people.
3. Keep a good level of activity for several months, paying
regularly and correctly and thus establish "good credit" with HCO.
4. Obtain from HCO a permanent franchise.
5. Train to level of HCA/HPA in the centre.
6. Progress forward toward clearing area on this pattern.
Obtaining a permanent franchise is a big step. It doesn't just involve
signing a piece of paper.
It means an incorporation along exact lines of an exact activity in the
centre's area. It means an exact financial transaction wherein the centre
can obtain enough capital to fix up or build its own quarters, to hire
people, to advertise broadly.
Obtaining a permanent franchise is a big step. It means finance,
promotion, success.
The exact pattern of how this is done now exists and will be put out
when centres are ready for it. Special people will come and do the basic
work. The advertisement copy, texts, incorporation papers, everything is
being made ready right now.
We're moving from small time to Big Time.
The HASIs and their Central Organisations will upgrade to universities.
(They'll do the certificate examination and preparation for HCO so be good
to them.) In centres we'll make the specialists. In Central Organisations
we'll make the super specialists.
Now, some questions come up. What about people who never asked for a
franchise but went ahead and without helping the general push tried for a
quick buck? We take them straight out of the line-up. Auditors in the
future are either part of this
forward thrust or we forget them unpleasantly. We will close all centres
operating without legal title to operate.
There's too much at stake. We can't go by halves. We're Clearing Earth.
Therefore people fall into two groups for us, those who are with us and
those who aren't. Those who aren't will be handled by processing and where
necessary, by law.
So we're lining up now.
This is a real tough planet. It will take a really serious shove to
clear it. So here's where we start. And we start with no half-hearted
measures.
We have a new motto in HCO WW. If somebody drops a ball, we drop a
person.
First example was the solicitor for HASI Ltd. He dropped a ball, we
dropped him. And we found a really good solicitor.
It's a tough planet. We'd better face it and measure up to it.
But your first step is to say "I'm going to clear " (the continent) and
start telling people, naming your continent, "We're here to clear Africa."
And moves that don't aim that way are dispersals.
The easy part is getting people on our side. You've heard it said
"Everybody is a Scientologist. Some just haven't cognited yet."
The tough part is to keep everybody pointed toward the goal.
So a Scientologist should say first to himself: "I'm going to clear "
his continent. And then tell others, "We're here to clear " his continent.
And then work along an agreed upon program. Sign or assist an interim
franchise, be active, be OK with HCO WW, organise for and sign or assist a
permanent centre or help the HASI or HCO to get rolling.
Look how far we've come in nine years! All right, I wasn't going
nowhere. Were
So let's stop fooling around and get serious.
Clear Earth!
Best,
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :brb .rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[This HCO B is modified by HCO PL 20 April 1968, Franchise, in OEC Volume
6, page 278.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1
HCO BULLETIN OF 5 AUGUST 1959
HGC PROCESSES
The lack of results in HGC is probably due to the restimulative nature
of Communication Processes, a phenomenon we have noted on ACCs.
Therefore, I am giving you this regimen which I want you to very
thoroughly enforce so that we can regain the results and therefore income
and dissemination on the HGC.
These processes were first evolved by me in 1956 to process the
personnel of a large London company so that they would get uniform results
and would not be telling one another different processes during work. It is
therefore amongst the first packages to be "used on anybody". You have all
the data on this, I am sure. It is in the paperback on Control. Switch all
pcs to this and we'll have a happier set of auditors and better results.
Run Psychos on CCH 1, 2, 3, 4.
Switch all other cases except the acutely ill (on which you should run
Communication Process to the ill body part) to S-C-S and Connectedness.
When these are flat run the pc for a while on the following Comm
Process:
"From where could you communicate to a person with difficulties?"
When pc seems to be flattish on this, return to S-C-S and
Connectedness.
Let's increase those results.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: mc.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[This HCO B was converted from a telex sent by L. Ron Hubbard on 27 July
1959 to the D of P, London, info HCO Secretary. HCO Washington, D.C.,
converted the telex also, and issued it under the title, HGC Regimen, on 26
July 1959.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 7 AUGUST 1959
All HCO Franchise Holders
All Staffs
Central Orgs
All HCOs
THE HANDLING OF COMMUNICATION PROCESSES
SOME RAPID DATA
The most important research development of recent times is the
"Communication Process". It has gradually been evolved for nine years,
beginning in July of 1950 when I isolated Communication as one of the three
important pivots on which all mental association turned, the other two
being Affinity and Reality.
Much could be said about this evolution and the search, but the
important gain remains, that to-day, I have evolved finally a single
command type process that answers all requirements of all levels of
clearing and violates no rules of auditing.
An auditor to-day could audit with just three packages:
1. The CCHs
2. S-C-S and Connectedness, and
3. The Communication Processes.
Using these he would certainly achieve releases and clears on all cases
he could keep on the auditing roster. I must call your attention to the
facts of this: we have achieved our finite goals in auditing and clearing
can be done easily and broadly without kick-backs. Therefore all programs
should be geared with these steps:
1. Make a clear or two.
2. Use Communication Processes, in Co-audit toward clearing.
3. Groove in administratively to clear your area.
I will shortly write a small book on Communication Processes which will
give all. Meantime, the essentials of use are as follows:
1. By Communication Process is meant any process which places the
preclear at Cause and uses communication as the principal command
phrase.
A typical wording now standardised is, "From where could you
communicate to a ?"
2. The terminals to which Communication Processes are addressed
must be real terminals never significances only.
Right "From etc, to a 'husband' "
Wrong "From etc, to a 'thought' "
Right "From etc, to a 'dog' "
Wrong "From etc, to a 'mistake' "
3. All terminals employed in the command should be generalised.
Don't peg pc to one lifetime with a proper name. Always use a
generalised name since Communication Processes span lives too fast
to be limited too much.
Right "From etc, to a 'husband' "
Wrong "From etc, to 'Bill' "
Wrong "From etc, to 'your husband' "
If you isolate Bill as the terminal that needs running, find out what
Bill is to the pc. Use what the pc describes Bill to be or what rises on
the meter. Bill will turn out to be 'a husband' or 'a friend' or 'a
mechanic' or some generalised terminal. He is never run as 'Bill', as that
pegs pc to one life and rarely clears Bill whereas the generalised terminal
does clear Bill.
4. Run a Communication Process more or less muzzled. The
smoother, the more confident, the more experienced the auditor, the
less muzzle is needed. The process wins totally muzzled so err in
the direction of more muzzle, not less.
5. A Communication Process is flat when none of that class of
terminal produces change or a comm lag or a cyclic aspect on the
time track. If the pc no longer goes into past on a continuous long
run, the process is flat.
6. Use a meter. This alone tells you when a terminal is really
flat. This alone diagnoses a terminal properly. A good electrometer
can save you three hours in every five. Lack of meters means lack
of clears. Only a meter keeps the auditor from clearing the
auditor's buttons out of the preclear. Only a meter keeps processes
from being left unflat. Only a meter can show when a terminal is
clear or a preclear is clear. Use a meter if you want to clear
people. Insist on your auditor using a meter if you want to get
clear.
7. Know meter behaviour. There's a lot of data on this. But I've
recently found a new one.
A terminal needs to be run if it drops and then when ignored any
further questioning causes a needle to rise only.
The right terminal found again sticks the needle and stops the
rise.
If a terminal is left unflat (if it is run and then dropped before it
is flat), the needle in future sessions will only rise.
A steadily rising needle is by definition then the symptom of an
abandoned terminal. That terminal must be found again. If found it will
stop the rise of the needle. It must then be run and flattened. This is why
some cases bog down and this is how it is remedied.
A further discovery is that a terminal clears on the meter just like a
pc clears on a meter. Example-an unclear person doesn't read steadily at
Male or Female Clear reading, but goes above or below that reading and the
reading changes. Similarly, a terminal found on a pc reads above or below
Male or Female Clear reading. If the terminal is run by a communication
process it makes the tone arm read higher or lower than Male or Female
Clear. The running of the terminal changes the tone arm position, making it
rise and fall, rise and fall. The rises of the tone arm get easier, the
falls more rapid until at last the tone arm does not rise or fall but sits
on Male or Female Clear, depending on the sex of the pc (not the terminal).
The more flexible the tone arm, the looser the needle.
If that's Greek to you, better grab plane or train to a Central Org and
study the E-Meter because you won't make any clears until you do.
8. A preclear is mest clear when no terminal selected is, when run
by a Communication Process, productive of variation of the tone arm
from Male or Female Clear reading. A preclear is theta clear when
he can handle engrams without producing a change from clear
reading.
9. Cases do not improve if they are in a victim valence as they
self invalidate between sessions. Communication Process S2 or S22
must be run to remedy this.
10. If an assist is done by a Communication Process, the terminal
chosen (usually a body part) must be flattened fully (see 7 above)
before the case can be expected to move again on a new terminal.
11. When an auditor finds a steadily climbing needle on a pc new to
him but not auditing, he must suspect that a terminal has been run
but isn't flat. He should query past auditing or living until he
finds a terminal which stops the rise. He then runs this flat
before he goes on.
12. Old pcs benefit from a Communication Process using "an auditor"
as a
terminal to clear off the case. This is done when the auditor
fails with 11 above.
13. Old auditors can be smoothed out as cases by running a
Communication Process on "an auditor" and "a preclear". Run each
flat.
14. In general run any terminal selected back down until the tone
arm reads Male or Female Clear stably for many commands and pc is
no longer cycling on track with that terminal.
15. Process illnesses with Communication Processes if the illness
is in the way of the session. Assess by finding out what part of
body pc considers ill. Run what he says. Run it in one or several
sessions until that part reads Clear on the tone arm.
These are some of the rules above of Communication Processes.
A few cautions however should be emphasised.
Don't Self Audit with a Communication Process. Use a touch assist on
body or room instead.
Don't clip a terminal into action on a case and leave it unflat.
Flatten it in one or many sessions instead or make sure you tell the next
auditor that it is unflat.
--------------------
Communication Processes are so simple. They are apparently innocent and
charming. They are in actuality strong enough to move a whole bank. So they
should be handled with accuracy and the same respect you'd give 90%
dynamite.
--------------------
Note to HCO Secs, D of Ps and Assoc Secs and heads of Organizations: It
would be well worth your while to study this bulletin thoroughly, then have
your people study it and take an examination on it.
Those who can't pass it eventually shouldn't be handling paying
preclears until well audited and retrained for we have no passing fancy
here in Communication Processes and we use in them the cream of everything
in techniques and procedure we have learned in nine years.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :brb .cden
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 12 AUGUST 1959
HCO Franchise Holders
HCO Offices
Central Orgs
MA
A SECOND TYPE OF FRANCHISE
A second and different type of HCO Franchise is now available in
addition to the HCO HAS Co-Audit Franchise.
The new type is the HCO Processing Franchise. It permits an individual
auditor in practice to receive immediate bulletins, discounts, and tests,
and requires that he remit 10% of his income from Dianetics and Scientology
to HCO WW. This permits the individual to run an individual practice or a
guidance center without running an HAS Co-Audit.
THIS DOES NOT MEAN WE ARE ABANDONING HAS CO-AUDITS. These are the
backbone.
One auditor or several may have such an HCO Processing Franchise but if
more than one are considered under such a Franchise, the processing
earnings of the group are considered collectively.
This makes two types of Franchise. The first is the HCO HAS Co-Audit
Franchise which permits group processing, the running of an HAS Co-Audit,
the processing of individuals, and, eventually, training to professional
level. The second is the HCO Processing Franchise where individual
processing only would be done.
In the case of the HCO HAS Co-Audit Franchise HCO is going to do all it
can to help set the Franchise holder up on a permanent basis when he is
proved out, helping to establish proper finance, quarters, publications and
organizational assistance.
In the case of an HCO Franchise like the first type, we will issue now
only an interim Franchise. When it is made permanent after due test of the
holder by his use of it, HCO will assist the holder to obtain proper
finance, processing quarters and organizational assistance for the activity
of individual processing in a guidance center.
There will be a third type some day but it is not available now. This
will be an HCO Organizational Franchise where the individual works
"outside" Scientology organizations to bring order into larger non-
Scientology activities in which he will be helped by HCO as a special
activity.
Persons now holding HCO HAS Co-Audit Franchises who wish to exchange
their Franchise for an individual processing Franchise may do so. Where the
person is not running an HAS Co-Audit and sees no immediate chance of
starting one, he is liable to cancellation of Franchise. This offers such a
person the right to remain a Franchise holder even though he is only
processing individually.
Out of these enfranchised guidance centers we hope will grow clinics,
hospitals and sanitariums to cover that hole in the society now apparent.
The very unable will need such assistance and we are here providing for it
in the distant future.
An HAS Co-Audit activity is basically more important and more
immediately needed, but there are those in the society who are not up to co-
auditing and we must also remember them.
If you transfer now you do however abandon your right to start an HAS Co-
Audit and get HAS Certificates for your group. And with either Franchise
you owe HCO 10% of all you make from Dianetics and Scientology. The main
advantage of transfer is apparent only in the fact that you won't lose your
Franchise rights if you are not now running an HAS Co-Audit and don't
intend to. For all inactive Franchises will be cancelled within the next 30
days.
NEWS BULLETINS
HCO WW took over in the U.S. because of a previous randomness in
getting Franchise holders started and serviced. Some of the randomness is
still about. Some bulletins, unseen by HCO WW before issue, have been sent
out from several points in the U.S. which are not factual.
The following information is correct:
All 10%s from Franchise holders should be sent to HCO WW only, made out
to HCO WW and airmailed to HCO WW Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex,
U.K.
HCO 10%s from Central Organizations in the U.S. are sent to "L. Ron
Hubbard, Founder", which is a special division of HCO.
Contributions for research are sent to HCO WW made payable to the
Scientology Research and Investigation Fund.
These items cancel "HCO Policy Letter of July 22nd" mailed from
Washington.
Other bulletins mailed inside the U.S. to U.S. Franchise holders
requesting 10%s to be sent to L.A. should be disregarded as unauthorized.
Stable Datum: If it's postmarked HCO WW in the U.K. it's authentic,
otherwise, ignore it.
We will bring order yet. You can assist us by not being dismayed at
disorder. When you start to introduce order into anything disorder shows up
as the second postulate and blows off. Therefore our efforts to bring order
in the society or any part of it will be productive of disorder for a short
while every time. The trick is to keep on bringing order and soon the
disorder is gone and you have orderly activity remaining. But if you hate
disorder, and fight disorder only don't ever try to bring any order to
anything for the resulting disorder will drive you half mad. Only if you
can ignore disorder and can understand this principle, can you have a
working world-or a working operation, for that matter.
ADAMS QUITS
The problems of HAS Co-Audit Franchises have evidently gotten to Nile
Adams. A few days ago, when I refused to permit him to overtax Franchise
holders, he quit in Washington. His protest was against my refusal to let
Franchise holders be made to pay 25% of their gross income for the
privilege of being financed. The absolute maximum gross that a Scientology
organization can lose to other activities and still live is 18%. A high but
workable top is 15% of gross. But 25% gross is unthinkable.
If you become big enough to require as a Franchise holder an HCO office
of your own for liaison it will probably cost another 5% of your gross, but
you will get all its services and save it on other payroll. But you will
never be required to pay extravagant gross percentages while I can still
stamp on toes and zap skulls.
Nile has been ordered to 500 hours of processing at his own expense for
breaking
the Code of a Scientologist flagrantly in public for he really got mad.
That he did probably shows he was already under strain. So don't be too mad
at him. He's a good promoter and when he's seen the elephant he'll be back
in our ranks again. All he has to learn is to work for us also and he'll
learn that.
Don G. Purcell, by the way, the millionnaire who tried to seize
Dianetics in 1951, died last month after a long illness, at the Mayo (MD
type) Clinic. As in the case of the late Dr. Joseph Winter, author of much
critical literature against Dianetics, Auditors refused to audit Purcell
according to my reports.
CABLE, DON'T PHONE
We are so few at HCO WW and covering so many fronts that we cannot
accept the phone calls that keep coming in. In the first place a trans-
atlantic call takes usually an hour or two of waiting by one of us before
it is fully connected. Such calls have taken 12 hrs to complete. And we
have missed completion so often after such wasted time and have had such
bad inaudible connections even with domestic calls in England, that it's no
phone.
Use telegrams and cables instead, they're faster. They have a memory.
We can handle them without missing data not put down after a phone call.
In the Manor staff office we have a Telex. That's a teletype like in
the telegraph office. About five minutes after you file your telegram or
cable it comes complete and accurate out of our Telex, typed with copies.
These don't get lost. They get instant attention from the Communication
guard.
When a small group such as ours at HCO WW are handling indirectly
several hundred thousand people, and are handling directly, at any given
time, a few thousand and intimately a few hundred scattered all over Earth,
we have to have a Communication discipline to get anything done. You're
part of that Comm system, so if you want something done, be brief, to the
point, and use:
Airmail-Airletters-Cables-Telegrams.
And you'll be heard fast.
Be pointless, use phones, come in person, and you won't be heard.
You are much closer to HCO WW at your letter box or the telegraph
office than you would be standing at the Manor's front door. We're proud of
our Comm system. Use it!
RESEARCH NOTE
We are making fine progress with clearing. And we have three buttons we
want flat on everybody in Scientology. The first is VICTIM. The second is
MONEY. And the third-well-we'll let you know when the first two are flat on
you. The auditing command is "From where could you communicate to a
Victim?" and it's flat when the E-Meter tone arm reads clear for your sex
and stays at that reading on the command. The second is "From where could
you communicate to money?", and when the tone arm reads clear for your sex
and stays there, you'll not only be well along, you'll be able to have the
stuff.
And now if no past emergencies spring up, I can get on with some other
writing. And any day now, I may get some sleep.
LRH:brb.rd
Copyright � 1959 Best,
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED RON
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 AUGUST 1959
CenO
Info D of Ts
SUGGESTED HCA COURSE SCHEDULE
The following schedule for the HCA Course is being used in the Academy
at Washington, DC. This is a good schedule. It is sent out as data only and
has no command value.
HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL/CERTIFIED AUDITOR COURSE
Purpose: To train an auditor able to Theta Clear.
Design: The length is 8 weeks. Data and practical information are
emphasized. The Hubbard Electrometer is used and is taught to the
student well. There is one week of Comm Course, one week of Upper
Indoc, six weeks of Theory and Practice. Repeats on Comm
Course/Upper Indoc are reserved for slow students. Comm Course and
Upper Indoc are the same as in SED165. Theory and Practice are as
follows:
Week A
ARC Tone Scale
Mon. Lecture: Definition of Theta Clear.
Process: ARC Straight Wire.
Tue. Lecture: The Hubbard Electrometer and how to set it up to read the
PC. Theta Clear, Release, Mest Clear.
Process: None.
Wed. Lecture: Assessments, with and without E-Meter.
Process: Selected Persons O-W Straight Wire.
Thur. Lecture: Assessments with E-Meter. Recapitulation of various
readings. Obnosis of case.
Process: Sel. P. O-W SW.
Fri. Lecture: Assessments with E-Meter. Willingness to read what is
there to be read.
Process: Op. Proc. By Dup.
All auditing muzzled. All assessments done by instructor(s). Run only
current life
terminals on Sel. Pers. O-W SW.
Week B
Mon. Lecture: CCH 1: use of CCHs in psychotic and Stage 4 cases.
Process: same.
Tue. Lecture: Present time problems: definition and processes usable.
Using E- Meter to locate.
Process: CCH 2.
Wed. Lecture: CCH 3: Reality Scale.
Process: same.
Thur. Lecture: CCH 4: Expanded Know-Mystery Scale.
Process: same.
Fri. Lecture: CCH 1-4: use of this procedure to bring low-level cases up
to being auditable on E-Metered processes. Repeat definition of
Clear. Repeat E-Meter readings.
Process: same.
All auditing muzzled. All assessments done by instructors. Students check
assessments
at beginning of session, advise instructor if terminal needs changing, also
if terminal
runs flat during session. Turn PCs loose into prior life terminals as
rapidly as current
life terminals flattened, and all students must be running at least one
whole track
terminal by Thursday, regardless of whether current life terminals all flat
or not.
Week C
Mon. Lecture: Factual Havingness: Effect Scale.
Process: Fac. Hav.
Tue. Lecture: 3rd Rail: ARC Tone Scale (repeat).
Process: same.
Wed. Lecture: Present time problems: 8 dynamics.
Process: On PTPs.
Thur. Lecture: Effect Scale (repeat): Psycho, Neurotic, "Normal",
Release, Mest Clear, Theta Clear, OT (case levels).
Process: none.
Fri. Lecture: Scale of Confront: Types of Auditing.
Process: none.
All auditing muzzled. Assessments done by students and checked by
instructor(s).
Week D
Mon. Lecture: Facsimiles.
Process: Mock up a picture for which you . . . responsible.
Tue. Lecture: Facsimiles-types of.
Process: Experience-reexperience process.
Wed. Lecture: Flows-ridges-dispersals.
Process: ARC Break SW.
Thur. Lecture: Be-do-have.
Process: Not-is SW.
Fri. Lecture: Scales in relation to ARC tone scale: Universes/Valences.
Process: Track-scouting.
No muzzled auditing. All formal. Track-scouting, pinning dates. No
repetitive process.
Week E
Mon. Lecture: The engram: Overt-Motivator Sequence: Deds and Dedexes.
What is an "incident".
Process: Formula 10.
Tue. Lecture: Locks, Secondaries: Gradient Scales.
Process: Formula 10.
Wed. Lecture: The creation of a Theta Clear: OT as a speculative goal
for a Theta Clear.
Process: Formula 10.
Thur. Lecture: Redefinition of Theta Clear: why comparison with
other states not really possible except as a subjective
exp.
Process: Formula 10.
Fri. Lecture: Type of auditors required for creation of different states
of beingness: why creation of Theta Clear and OT require courage
and stamina. The "Monster".
All formal auditing on Formula 10. All assessments done by students.
Supervised by instructor(s) only, intervention by instructor only where
absolutely necessary.
Week F
Mon. Lecture: Basic-basic: The Rock. Gradient scale of incidents to
Rock.
Process: Formula 10.
Tue. Lecture: Gradient scale of creation of Theta Clear.
Week F, contd
Process: Formula 10. Wed. Lecture: Stabilizing and "educating" the
Theta Clear-more on "The Monster".
Process: Formula 10. Thur. Lecture: Processes usable after Theta
Clear achieved: OT as a goal: def. of OT.
Process: Formula 10. Fri. Lecture: Audlting programs, from PE
course to individual Theta Clearing and OT.
Process: Formula 10.
All formal auditing on Formula 10, making sure every student gets most of
the week on the "one-shot OT" process (at least three days). Strict
attention to good discipline and control of session. ARC and "in-
sessionness" to be superlative.
WRITTEN DATA
A student package should be issued to each student. This should
contain:
Student rules and regs.
Instructor's Code.
A sheet of definitions.
A list of scales. "Ability" 80 (or equivalent in country).
A copy of the E-Meter handbook (when available).
Student hat (when issued).
Mimeo sheet of end-of-course examination and other requirements.
Ministerial requirements.
PAB 114.
Copy of HCO B on PE/HAS Co-Audit by PE (HCO) Dir WW.
A blank HCO Franchise Form.
TIME SCHEDULE
9:00 - 10:00 Lecture and process of the day
10:00 - 10:15 Break
10:15 - 12:30 Session A
12:30 - 1:30 Lunch
1:30 - 3:45 Session B
3:45 - 4:00 Break
4:00 - 5:00 LRH Tape
5:00 - 5:30 Question and answer period.
STUDENTS ENTERING FROM UPPER INDOC
The Director of Training must so arrange matters that students as
closely follow the gradient scale of training here described as possible.
Students may enter Weeks A-C anywhere. Weeks D-F are a specific gradient
scale and may only be entered into from an earlier Theory & Practice week.
If two weeks of Th. & Practice must be run concurrently, adjust schedule
accordingly and keep students separated.
FOOTNOTE
The datum about cases not being worried about still applies, but if the
course is run well, there should be plenty of Releases and some Theta
Clears graduating.
John Fudge
(D of T, Washington, D.C.)
Copyright �1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 AUGUST 1959
UK Franchise Holders
FRANCHISE HOLDERS
Recent HCO Franchise Holder Bulletins sent out by HCO WW have been
intended in the main for the United States. They have been sent by courtesy
to Franchise Holders in the UK. The data applies equally.
We have not so far attempted very much for the UK Franchise Holder and
there is a great deal of ground work to be done. The US went through all
this many months ago and have just now completed their first instruction
courses in Washington where most Franchise Holders were carefully trained
to improve their already climbing successes.
US Franchise income is not yet high, amounting to an overall several
thousand dollars a week only. But they have not yet had six months to get
into the swing of it. When the class attendees return home from Washington
where they have been since July 1, a steady acceleration can be expected.
1. The UK Franchise Holder has a lot of groundwork to do. First in
the UK we have to learn to work better as a team.
2. UK Franchise Holders will have to get started on programs of co-
auditing to clear up the key buttons of VICTIM, MONEY and a third
one to be named later. HASI London staff is of course well along on
this route.
HCO WW is trying to bring the British Scientologist stability and
security and this will be hard to do until his or her barriers on the
subject are cleared up. We have no doubt of being able to bring security
and stability to the British Scientologist and our first job is to get him
or her to stand long enough to receive it. Hence the co-auditing program.
If we want a better world we'll have to make it better-nobody else
seems to be trying to do anything but hold the status quo of misery. And if
a better world is to be built, it will be built because we could pay our
way.
-----------------
HAS Co-Audit is in its infancy in the UK. Even in South Africa and
Australia the program is far more advanced. But this is because these areas
have had great co-operation from HCO. In the very near future HCO WW will
begin to work with the problems of the UK Franchise Holder.
Meanwhile, it would be a good idea to get one-up personally by getting
Process S 2 flattened and then you will be ready for a further step.
We appreciate your patience. It will be suitably rewarded.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:brb.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 19 AUGUST 1959
BPI
HAS CO-AUDIT-FINDING TERMINALS
If the instructor switches around terminals endlessly on a HAS Co-audit
course, then you have nothing but rising needles left on these cases. It is
necessary to get the very first terminal that dropped on the pc and convert
it to a general form and run that terminal with a Communication Process
until the terminal is again reading on the tone arm at male or female clear
(depending on the sex of the pc, not the terminal) and stays there.
This is why you don't fill up the Co-audit.
Regimen on this is find the first thing that dropped on the pc then
state it in a general term-make sure it drops. Example: pc's first
assessment was on his wife. Find it again and see if it stops the needle
rising; if it does, run: "From where could you communicate to a wife?" Note
that it is a wife, not his wife. If the needle dropped the first time he
was ever assessed on Bill, we have to find out what Bill is and run it.
On new enrollees in the Co-audit, take a body part only. A body part is
then run on the Communication Process, "From where could you communicate to
a (name of body part)".
This is only considered flat when no matter what or how many questions
are asked about that body part, it registers on the tone arm of the meter
at male or female clear, whichever the pc is. Only then can you go on to a
new process.
Communication Processes look so simple. They are in reality terribly
tricky and terribly effective.
Pick the right body part on the pc and he'll stay in the Co-audit until
he's clear on that part, that's for sure.
When you see a pc getting fouled up by lousy Co-audit handling you are
losing a student and, I am willing to confirm, gaining a victim
computation.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :brb.cden
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 19 AUGUST 1959
BPI
TO A ROMAN CATHOLIC
In Ireland, where we had an office for some years, the problem of
processing persons of the Catholic faith was thoroughly worked out and the
Church did not consider itself interested in the matter of auditing Roman
Catholics and did not restrain any from being audited when Roman Catholics
asked permission to be. Indeed Scientology is closer to the "Faculty
Psychology" of the Church in the sixteenth century than modern psychology
is. Modern psychology is not accepted by the Church because it considers
man to be an animal with no soul. Scientology not only accepts but can
prove than man does have a soul. Saint Thomas Aquinas is an early
forerunner of Scientology. Scientology is not an heretic religion and
demands no belief or faith and thus is not in conflict with faith. Several
monsignors of the Church have been interested in Scientology and have
approved of our activities. The late Pope Pius was an enemy of
psychoanalysis but was heard to express a neutral attitude toward
Scientology. He once assisted us in handling a government matter in the
United States.
All that processing requires is that you obtain a better reality on
your environment and all its drills are aimed at this. Thus it has no
conflict.
Just as your religion would not forbid you to obtain a better command
over a typewriter, so it could not be expected to forbid you to obtain a
better command over your office, staff, or home. There is no conflict here.
It is interesting that in nearly ten years of public presence, the
materialistic sciences have often rapped at Scientology (Communism is a
violent foe of ours) but never once in any country including Ireland has
the Roman Catholic Church raised its voice against us.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: brb.cden
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 27 AUGUST 1959
BPI
GROWTH WITH COMPETENCE
There is a great deal of history to the development and dissemination
of Dianetics and Scientology. And it has not been without its severe
lessons.
One of the first vows I made, in L.A. in the fall of 1950, was based on
the assumption that "it will go as far as it works", and I vowed to make it
work not just for the few but for the many and not just in expert hands but
for the tyro as well. Well, that vow has been achieved.
The HAS Co-Audit course taught in Washington, D.C., by Nibs, Dick, Jan
and Nina West has made Mest Clears using only muzzled co-auditing.
So it is working for the many in the hands of the relatively unskilled
group co-auditor.
But there were other things learned in this history. And amongst them
was the lesson that a Central Org can succeed as far as it can service.
When a Central Org can no longer service it cannot succeed. And that goes
for any individual or group in the whole of Dianetics and Scientology, and
on these the sun never sets.
Our problem then, now, is to be able to service as far as we go. We are
in the possession of powerful tools. We have relatively good literature and
will soon have better. We can promise a great deal and point proudly to
records of things we have done. We can say with truth that we have done
more than fifty thousand years of thinking man could do in understanding
and assisting the human being. We can command a very wide sphere of credit
for first discoveries. We can promise a great many things on the basis of
having delivered them. BUT CAN WE SERVICE THIS WELL AS A GROUP?
I get some very fine reports from HAS Co-Audits throughout the world.
But amongst these reports there are a few failures, a few resistive cases.
I could audit them, a great many Scientologists could audit them and push
them through. BUT the fact remains that there are auditors here and there
who cannot.
"Why?" I asked the HCO Area Secretary London the other night on telex-
"Low ARC," she replied. And this apparently explained two case failures by
field auditors.
And not very long ago when we had a bad code break with a pc in the
field, the Ethics Committee suspended the auditor for a few days and then
told him he could be reinstated but would have to sign a paper pledging to
obey the Auditor's Code and HE REFUSED TO SIGN IT. Why? Because he had
"gotten results with invalidating pcs too often", but the truth is he
hadn't gotten good results and the tests showed it so he was wrong. But why
wouldn't he sign the Auditor's Code?
These of course are isolated things BUT AT THIS PRESENT INSTANT THEY
EXIST.
Low ARC, the HCO Area Sec London said.
Well, what's this low ARC doing at this stage of the game? How come
this late in the business does an auditor get discovered who doesn't
believe in the Auditor's Code? Why do individuals and groups still flub on
occasion?
I know that all these people basically mean well. I would stake my life
on their humanity and decency. And have. But we're in something that's got
to go all the way
and the basic lessons contain this one, an Organisation will succeed as far
as it can service.
And if groups are still flubbing service let alone Administration, then
they aren't going to go very far.
Now does this mean there must be more training?
No.
There will always have to be training but this won't entirely solve
this one.
"Low ARC," the HCO Area Secretary London said. What did she mean by
that? She meant basically that these auditors somehow or other weren't
going to make a pc well. They didn't care enough about that pc to do the
job.
The button which causes such things is VICTIM. This is the central
button of the Overt Act-Motivator Sequence. Some auditor, perhaps one that
is ordinarily quite good, gets a restim. He keys in something not from what
the pc said for this couldn't aberrate anyone. He gets a restim between
sessions on the Overt Act-Motivator Sequence, and he comes back into
session with the VICTIM button in full flare. And what does he do? Almost
beyond his control he flubs. He makes a victim out of his pc. Why? Because
that's the exact action which occurs when an Overt Act-Motivator Sequence
is triggered.
Low ARC. The whole answer to it is contained in VICTIM. The auditor
feels that the pc deserves what he gets for a moment. He rationalises it
all out-but he treated the pc as a victim. A dropped ashtray, a stupid
auditor remark, an invalidation of a cognition. . . however the auditor
flubs, he is treating the pc as a victim, and the pc victimised responds
with bared engrams.
Well, true enough a lot of pcs ARC break easily because they are really
being fully fledged victims, and all the auditor has to do is slightly hint
toward victimising in the pc's estimation and bang, out goes the session.
But an auditor who ISN'T really treating the pc as his victim can pull the
pc through. The auditor who is keyed in by this victim thing drops all the
cans in the rack and flubs but grandly.
All this has been a big mystery previously. It's understood now and
thoroughly. And further, we've the processes that can do something about
it.
The right way to audit this victim item out from scratch is with a Comm
Process. Handling the whole case it is necessary in most instances to find
a specific dropping terminal on the pc, perhaps even more than one, convert
it into a generalised form and flatten it until it reads as a button right
at the clear reading of the pc's sex. When this has been worked over and
done, it is usually safe to do a plunge into this victim thing. Given the
pc in session-given the pc really answering the auditing question, then we
can handle the Overt Act-Motivator Sequence with the Comm Process, "From
where could you communicate to a victim?" The process is actually a one-
shot OT Process.
Don't make the mistake of running a pc who figure-figures his answers
or gives philosophic type answers on a Comm Process without actually making
him do it, do it, do it.
There are cases around that have been "audited" for years who have
never really done a process. This can be whipped by a Comm Process done
with paper and pencil. You locate the terminal with an E-Meter and then you
lay the instrument aside, give the pc a sheaf of paper and a pencil, and
every time he answers your auditing question, you have him or her draw the
answer on the paper. As the Comm Process exceeds language, it can be easily
checked. Even if the pc seems to be having some success but could succeed
faster you can boost it along with the "paper trick" as this is called. So
even the people who couldn't be trusted with a thinkingness process can be
run on a Comm Process using the paper trick.
All right. That's what makes an auditor not flub, and it keeps him from
being a burden to himself and others as a person too. It's a cyclone of a
process as the experienced person can tell you.
And it prevents the flubbing of service in an Organisation.
Scientologists who can't stand the sight of money or who can't seem to
get pcs are just having a fine old time being in some way or another, a
victim. So let's face this reality and understand clearly that we can
guarantee our successes as individuals and Organisations by getting bell
clear on victim.
Then we can give service. And then an Organisation can give service.
Then it's safe to make promises. And we don't get Administration chopped
up. And it's safe and successful to have an Organisation set up and
financed and running on the mission of clearing Earth.
Of course we have to go right on with our jobs whether victim is flat
or leaping about like a Texas thermometer. Of course we have to go right on
organising and planning and making the future real. We can't just quit and
say well, when we all get to be clear then we'll go-man-go. We can't afford
that.
But this time be warned. We know that with our Organisations and Comm
lines and plans we're going to go successfully or not straight up the line.
Let's see this one coming though and not fly into the thunderhead blind.
Let's understand that staffs and individual Scientologists are going to
goof just as long as the victim button is not flat and that it's going to
take quite a while to get it all flat.
People are always preparing for rainy days and failures. Well, let's
prepare for success. If we get much bigger nobody will be able to handle
anything unless we get smooth operation, smooth procurement, efficient good
looking HAS Co-Audit units, successful case handling everywhere. We won't
be able to live in a climate of 75% success and 25% failure. We won't be
able to administer with people here and there on our lines who are bound
and determined to be victims and to appoint us their executioners.
We're moving right up to the Big Win and we should be able to handle it
without going half round the bend patching up the flubs made by the victim
impulse that comes on when we're restimmed or exhausted. Let's win all the
way this time and keep it won..
You see, you can't ever get a victim valence to win. It's a plain
lesson to him, and he believes it, fallacious though it is, that when
somebody wins there is always a loser and that winning "is always an overt
act to somebody". To prevent losers, our victim doesn't win. He quits
instead.
Thus there can be no constant and safe win until we have amongst us
whipped our first big hurdle. No amount of planning, writing and care, no
amount of education can overcome this impulse. We already know it can only
be done by auditing. So let's clear up this thing, let's get the auditing,
let's make sure that when we set up something to go none of us will say,
"Oh-oh, that's a win! Mustn't! Mustn't!" and start tearing the whole thing
down.
Before we get too far along this road let's make sure we stay winners
after we've won by making sure that none among us will go victim on us and
cut our throats with the best intentions in the world.
Let's define Scientologists as "People who aren't Victims", and really
get the show on the road.
LRH:brb.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 SEPTEMBER AD 9
All U.S. Franchise
Holders from Ts Hill
All other Franchise
Holders via Central Orgs
All Central Orgs
WHY "VICTIM" WORKS AS A PROCESS
We all should have heard of the Overt Act-Motivator Sequence. If we
have not we should review "The History of Man".
The highest level of third dynamic activity and the earliest instant of
it is and was communication. Before communication (in one form or another)
there was only native state. Obviously you are not going to run out native
state-leave that to the Psychiatrists and Politicians. Therefore the
earliest button susceptible of aberration was apparently communication.
However, communication itself is not aberrative. Only the misuse and
withhold of communication is aberrative. One received his first
communication foul-up when he postulated "somebody can mess up my
postulates", when he granted that, right, then he or she had it thereafter.
The idea that communication could be harmful apparently came in about
this point. And the obvious conclusion that one could injure with
communication must have followed shortly after. That one could be injured
and that one could injure was established by "example". Here began the game
of "victim".
Death is just one of the varied forms of the game of victim. That one
could be killed by the communication words or missiles of another is just
an extreme form of the game.
That this was a game and that it was played out by Thetan "B"
pretending that he had been injured so Thetan "A" would further withhold
his postulates, has all been lost in the depths of the Reactive Mind. Death
isn't a game anymore. Not even injury is a game. We know how seriously
these things are now regarded and how utterly caved-in and lost Thetans
have been for a very, very long time.
Only with Scientology have we come back to the straight of it. And the
straight of it is that one cannot be injured until he has postulated that
Thetans can be injured and, by example of Thetans pretending to be injured,
has come to the point of himself not only consenting to be injured but
actually getting torn to shreds.
The basic postulate of injury or death (or harmful communication) is
best summed up by "victim".
To restrain others one sets an example as a victim. It might be said
that this is a last ditch way of being cause. On that thin idea rests all
the disease and death, all the agony and travail of man. It is almost the
bottom point of the Reactive Mind.
In any Overt Act-Motivator Sequence there is a villain and a victim. If
the auditor were to choose and run the "villain" then he would be violating
the basic definition of operating thetan which is "To be willing and
knowing cause over life, matter, energy, space and time", and would be
processing the pc at effect point. The basic definition of victim must then
be, as our HCO Staff Auditor pointed out, unwilling and unknowing effect of
life, matter, energy, space and time. Therefore, to keep the pc at cause we
have no choice but to process him in such a way as to face him up to
"victim".
Naturally this process is not going to run on the following cases until
they are up to it:
1. A person who cannot conceive of ever having done anything bad
to anybody or anything ("old sweetness and light").
2. A person who has a heavy present time problem (PTP).
3. A person who has had a bad ARC break with the auditor (who
conceives the auditor has made him into a victim of bad processing
or code breaks).
4. A person who needs to have several buttons cleared away which
are pressing and making his present time very bad; and
5. A person who simply fogs out hour after hour on general comm
processes and needs to have lighter buttons run until he can handle
comm processes.
With these above five things cared for, then a pc should be able to run
easily if lengthily on "From where could you communicate to a victim?"
During the run on the process all manner of chains come into view.
Monitoring the type of chain or chasing down some sideline should be
avoided thoroughly especially while running "victim". The pc is all too
willing to duck and dodge and an auditor who Qs and As (changes the process
just because the pc changed or wandered) had better go back to the Academy
for a spell or get his own case gone over at the HGC.
Pcs have gone into convulsions, screaming fits and many other
manifestations while running "victim". Of course they would, since they are
dramatizing what they have done to others and are wearing the engram in
full. But it is easier to run victim on the pc than to run engrams on him
as such for he can pull out of "victim" engrams easily with a comm process.
A large percentage of pcs will not recover and stay recovered until
"victim" has been run and flattened. This is due to their using auditing to
be "victims" of. This is the heart of the old "service facsimile". This is
why they have service facsimiles. So they can be victims.
The pc, while running victim, goes rapidly back and forth from one
valence to another. He goes through all the various phenomena of engrams,
locks and secondaries and in spite of the violence of the process, very
often would rather run victim than anything else.
But, as above, beware of trying to run this on somebody who will not
ever admit having done something or anything to anybody. This is the figure-
figure case. The difficulty here is that the person cannot face any
terminal subjectively for fear of having ruined it or for fear of ruining
it. Therefore-and watch this carefully-he does not do the comm process.
Such a person needs a comm process run on very particularized terminals
done in a general form: "From where could you communicate to a dog" or
anything else that drops. But if this is very necessary then run the person
on the paper trick even with the lighter terminals. Make him draw each
answer. Cases that have never, never moved before in hundreds of hours of
auditing, get shot down in flames with the paper trick.
While running victim, the auditor should not use "how could you
communicate" as an interjected command. It's a different process. If the
auditor is having trouble he should have run a lighter terminal. One of the
most effective light terminals and one of the best comm processes
particularly for the HAS Co-Audit is a body part. One asks the pc if he has
ever had trouble with any part of his or her body and when the answer is
given, run body part named in a generalized form such as "From where could
you communicate to a leg?"
From all the results I've been looking over lately, it would seem that the
most broadly workable form of the comm process is a body part as above or
"a body". After all, the pc IS in a body. Doing the comm process on mest
before a body part and the body are run, seems to be a little rough on the
pc (this is part of a system called universe processes), as the pc himself
as a Thetan is generally mest shy.
Auditing body parts, however, has its lighter moments. At the last
congress I gave, the body part given by the pc as a part of the body with
which he had had trouble, when run, didn't do a thing for the pc. Surprised
auditors and instructors were not long in finding out why-the pc's body
part had been run and flattened years ago by older processes and didn't
have a twitch left in it. This stuff's been working for a long time you
know.
Well, that's the way it is. A person doesn't get sick or injured unless
he's cast himself in the role of victim by reason of the game and his Overt
Acts. And if you want somebody to cease to be a disease prone (new term
there) and get up and do things and be bright and not flub and to win win
win, get him up to a point where he can run victim with a comm process and
from there on flatten the living daylights out of it.
When is victim flat? When the tone arm of the Hubbard Electrometer
reads consistently at the clear reading for the pc no matter how many more
auditing questions are asked about victims. Every terminal you run should
be run until the tone arm reads male clear (12,500 ohms) for a man, and
female clear (5,000 ohms) for a woman. And this is particularly true of a
victim.
Don't start this going in an HAS Co-Audit until the pc being audited
has had flattened on him easier terminals. And these may take an awful lot
of hours to flatten. Victim itself is a very long run. The run is shortened
by preparing the case well first so preparation time is never lost time on
this process.
There is another button, in fact there are many more special buttons.
It goes on up toward OT. And it isn't run at first on a comm process, but
that's another and later story. I'll still be around when you get ready for
it.
Meanwhile, de-victimize and win!
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:brb.cden
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 9 SEPTEMBER 1959
CenOCon
A SHORT STORY BY CABLE
On August 31 a cable was received from Lance Harrison in Perth,
Australia, at HCO Saint Hill: Charged by BMA under Medical Act with having
held myself out as willing to perform service usually performed by medical
practitioner. I have not done this. Engaged lawyer to defend. Please advise
of assistance from Organization and suggestions for further action.
HCO Saint Hill answered: LT- Sientology Melbourne- 108SH Eliz Harrison
Perth arrested BMA pour out money and time to beat this deal stop you
handle dispatch follows- Best-Ron-
HCO Perth-
107SH Harrison defense important phone Melbourne Best-Ron
LT- Sientology East Grinstead Re BMA Lance Harrison. Lance not enfranchised
unco-operative refuses have lawyer contacted have engaged lawyer watch your
interests-Erica HCO Perth
LT-
HCO Perth
If Harrison refuses further cancel certificates auditors code number
fifteen inform press
Best-RON
LT-
Sientology East Grinstead-
Taking action Harrison case Lance co-operating-HCO Perth Erica
LT-
Sientology East Grinstead-
79ME Ron Harrison Perth not arrested will ignore. Best-Eliz
Ron says: Fast dispatch lines handle awkward situations.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:iet.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 14 SEPTEMBER 1959
MA
NEWS BULLETIN
Well, here we are again back in evidence after the printing strike
which brought you only mimeoed issues. For these we don't apologize.
Instead we say we'd better get busy making a world where people don't have
to scream and walk out just to get enough to live on.
Hubbard Communications Office Worldwide is now safely and securely
established at Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex. Here, on half a
hundred acres of lovely grounds in a mansion where we have not yet found
all the bedrooms, we are handling the problems of administration and
service for the world of Scientology. We are not very many here and as the
sun never sets on Scientology we are very busy thetans. By means of
airmail, cables, telegrams, and in particular a teletypewriter connected to
London and many other points, we are able to get our work done between
morning and midnight-most days-and by working weekends.
Saint Hill is badly understaffed, there being only nineteen persons in
the whole place. Yet, in addition to administration lines twenty-five
thousand miles long, we have ten vital projects running. The first and
foremost of these is research and investigation. We are gathering all the
files of Scientology research the world around and bringing it to Saint
Hill to compile it. As Ron was never able to afford compiling all his works
and results before, this project is of rather vast magnitude.
Included in the project list is the application of Scientology to the
fifth dynamic. Ron has already created everbearing tomato plants and sweet
corn plants sufficiently impressive to startle British Newspapers into
front page stories about this new wizardry. The goal of the project is to
reform the world food supply. But the project has already paid off to the
extent of furnishing an entirely new theory of illness and a brand-new
prevention of illness in human beings. Ron, helped by a full-time gardener,
is doing this one in his spare time. As HCO Saint Hill personnel each wears
several hats-which is to say does many jobs-they are drafted on occasion
into the arduous work of recording growth and electrical experimental data.
Another project is the assembly of book stocks on Scientology
throughout the world and making available to Scientologists and the public
volumes that have never before been in plenty.
Saint Hill needs all manner of assistance whether culinary, electrical
wiring, helping in the kitchen or the house, running mimeo machines,
typing, almost anything. There will probably come a time when we have to
build more buildings at Saint Hill-next year, most likely-but right now
we've space for a lot of people. The whole staff has to vote to accept any
new person and it's a pretty good group.
But standing out on a lawn near a 250 year old towering cedar tree or
walking through a pleasure garden, you'd never believe that all this
activity could be going on. The apparency is that it's so calm you could
pack boxes of serenity out of it-but in actuality these are the most high
voltage lines in the whole world of Scientology.
Right now at this moment of writing, the HCO Sec World is wrestling
with rush despatches about a dying child in San Francisco, the HCO
Communicator World is
trying to set up a new HCO Office in Australia. The treasurer is handling
some financial problems in Washington and Ron has been busy reviewing some
research cases and is about to inspect an experimental installation-and it
is 10:40 p.m. of a Saturday night.
Saint Hill is an exciting place, its Offices filled with the chatter of
communication equipment, its terraces banked with flowers, its days crammed
with new things. But a stranger could be guided through most of the lakes,
grounds, courts and halls and never suspect that within a short distance of
him some of the most dedicated people on earth were getting the show on the
road.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :-jh
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 25 SEPTEMBER 1959
HAS CO-AUDIT
Here are some hints on how to run Comm Processes on assessment:
The instructor asks the preclear if he is sick or well. If the pc says
he is ill then the instructor says, "What part of the body would you say is
ill?" Whatever the pc answers, this is then run on "From where could you
communicate to a .... (generalized terminal) body part." If the pc answers
that he is well, the instructor says, "Have you ever been ill?" The pc will
in general say yes. The instructor then says, "What part of your body was
ill?" and runs the Comm Process on whatever the pc says.
Giving you advance scoop on a new research win it seems that the most
effective and rapid clearing could take place with what we will call
Universal Processes. This means running a Comm Process on Universe as
follows:
"From where could you communicate to the physical Universe."
"From where could you communicate to a body."
"From where could you communicate to a mind."
"From where could you communicate to a Thetan."
This is all experimental at this stage but it would be a separation
process from all universes the thetan is anxious about and should be quite
successful in general use.
However I give you this not to use but to show you that we would
probably win further and better if we began to steam people up on the
subject of being clear and then slammed right in on whatever universe they
could handle on Co-audit. I would then run Co-audit as follows:
Do the actions described above on body part and when the pc has come
through that go at once on to the physical universe and then graduate him
on to any body part that bangs on the meter and finally when various parts
are flat get him into running the body as a general terminal.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :iet.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 26 SEPTEMBER 1959
DATA ON CLEARING A STAFF MEMBER
AFTER SPECIFIC TERMINALS ARE FLAT WITH
OVERT-WITHHOLD STRAIGHT WIRE
"What would you like to confront?" until nominally flat.
Then:
"You make a mock-up for which you could be totally responsible," run
until Mest Clear.
Then:
"From where could you communicate to a body?" until Theta Clear.
Scout out and run Present Time Problems as they come up with:
"Invent a problem of comparable magnitude to that problem," E-Meter check
for these each session and then don't spend the whole of every session on
it. Just run it until she/he doesn't have to do anything about it right
now.
On ARC breaks run TR 5N: "What have you done to me?" "What have I done
to you?" then "What have you done to me?"
Run this regimen and no other and send special weekly reports labeled
"THACKER CLEAR PROJECT".
This will get them clearer faster than any other project I know just
now.
Best
Converted from Telex Comm
in Los Angeles Ron
LRH:rsh.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 SEPTEMBER 1959
BPI
TECHNICAL NOTES ON CHILD PROCESSING
The best process in Self Analysis, for a child if he can do it, is ARC
Straight Wire, in the back of the book.
The best process for children in general is some version of TR 10
(Notice that ............[Room Object] ). The variation which is best is
"Feel my arm," "Feel your arm," "Feel my face," "Feel your face," etc, all
done with the hand. Another version for very young children is "Where is
the table?" "Where is the floor?" etc on room objects.
Injured children respond best to touch assists and to locational "Where
did you fall?" "Where are you now?" etc repetitive until child is well.
For an unwilling child use short sessions (as short as two minutes) but
always begin and end the session complete with goals and PT Problem query.
For a bad-off child use CCH 1 and 2; these are heroic but effective.
They require a very skilled auditor and no interference.
Give the child the dignity of real sessions. And when a child flips to
trying to audit you as a turnabout, let him.
Remember that if you spoil Scientology for a child with bad auditing
you may close the door on the only way out he'll have in this life.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :iet.cden
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 SEPTEMBER 1959
HCO Franchise Holders
Association Secretaries
HCO Secretaries
THE ORGANIZATION OF A PE FOUNDATION
Even though we haven't the time, personnel or mest to do in many places
a full dress PE Foundation, I think it would help if I described a minimum
full dress PE.
A PE Foundation is itself but it is also, in a Central Org, one of the
six departments. In either case, whether done as an HAS Co-audit Franchise
or as a Central Org Department, it has the same staff and routine, handles
the same factors and confronts the same problems.
A PE Foundation is a programmed drill calculated to introduce people to
Scientology and to bring their cases up to a high level of reality both on
Scientology and on life. This is best accomplished not by giving them
samples and bits and trying to lead them into auditing but by giving them
gen and serious results as heavily and rapidly as possible. A PE Foundation
in its attitude goes for broke on the newcomers, builds up their interest
with lectures and knocks their cases apart with Comm Course and Upper
Indoc.
There are basically three divisions to a PE Foundation; the first of
these is the free course; it is the purpose of this course to:
Inform and interest by showing the people that this applies to them and
is a duplicate of their own actions and thinkingness. Only then does
Scientology communicate. Don't overwhelm-penetrate. Show them that this
is how they think, not how we think they think. Be factually explicit
about it, talk with certainty and not with apologies.
A PE Course curriculum should now consist of a mixture of drills and
lectures. The first evening lecture should talk about definitions in life
as found in Scientology. The dynamic principle of existence, the eight
dynamics, a preview of the next evening's lecture should be given, and this
lecture should consist of a very rapid survey of Comm Course TRs Zero and
One and should sail in the second hour into the ARC triangle, and all data
for the rest of the week used in lectures should consist of ARC triangle
data taking up the whole subject and one corner at a time. The remainder of
the week previews TRs Two and Three, and says how the TRs are used in life
and how people can't do them. The last lecture's last part sells the HAS
Comm Course.
The second week and the third are spent in Comm Course with basic TRs,
encouraging not criticizing. The coach says fine when he thinks it's fine
and otherwise keeps his mouth shut. This is muzzled coaching. The student
does not get out of the Comm Course until he can be trusted to show up well
in a muzzled Co-audit. This takes at least two weeks. He pays off the
course by the week for his Comm Course as well as his later Co-audit.
The Co-audit Course runs similar to the Comm Course in hours. The only
process now permitted on an HAS Co-audit is "From where could you
communicate to a body part", the body part being selected by the instructor
with an E-Meter (in a pinch the instructor selects by observation and the
answer to the question, "Ever have anything wrong with your body?" and uses
whatever the pc says). When a key body part is flat, "From where could you
communicate to a body" can be run but only this type of process is allowed.
If you go and bring in a lot more processes you've had it. Only this
process can be counted on to bring reality and results to people on a broad
scale. When a person can't gain on it because of case then get him into
private auditing. NEVER let anyone simply walk out. Convince him he's loony
if he doesn't gain on it because that's the truth.
Very well, these are the sections of the PE Foundation. A student now
has to complete at least five weeks of co-audit before we give him an HAS
certificate. It's not a valuable certificate evidently unless we do it that
way.
Now for personnel. Nearly every PE Foundation everywhere is
understaffed. Many have to be. But one should at least know the correct
amount of staff.
The minimum full scale PE staff should consist of five people, four of
them part time, one of them full time. These people are as follows:
The PE Director. Takes no classes, makes no lectures, works from two to
ten p.m., supervises and interviews and keeps the course and other
instructors going. Lack of a PE Director without a class leaves the place
unsupervised and in a confusion.
Receptionist. Routes, handles and invoices people with the help of
other PE staff in the first rush, and then makes announcements and sells
books in the breaks.
PE Lecturer. The best and most convincing lecturer, evenings only.
Comm Course Instructor. Part-time. Anybody but the Academy Comm Course
instructor that knows his business. The Academy man will be too tough and
heartless for the public stomachs at this stage.
CoAudit Instructor. Part-time. Choose the person people tell their
troubles to. Choose a person who doesn't mind people screaming in the unit
and in fact rather likes it. This person takes responsibility for all
cases.
The PE Director, as does the HGC Director of Processing, gets in
trouble really if he takes a course or a class, as he leaves all other
activities unguided. He can drop in, he can start a class. He can give an
address of welcome, but he should not have a class. If he has one the whole
place falls apart for lack of a guiding hand and somebody competent to pick
up and sort out the emergencies and interview people.
Now roughly speaking, that's the staff curriculum and courses of a PE
Foundation. If yours is running a long way from this one, that is the
reason you're having a rough time and losing people and that's the shape
you ought to be shooting for. I know we can't all have this but when things
start to boom you'd better be able to have it or you'll go boom too. The
thing to do is to sneak up to this as a minimum size with which you can
work.
If there's no Central Org you'll need daytime secretarial and files by
and by or the PE Director will get swamped with papers.
The whole dream of a PE Foundation is to get the people in fast, get
them invoiced in a congress type assembly line, no waiting, give them hot,
excited, positive service and boot them on through to their HAS and THEN
worry about doing something else with them. And never let a student leave
or quit-introvert him like a bullet and get him to get audited. If he gets
no reality don't let him wander out. If he walks in that door for a free
PE, that's it. He doesn't get out except into an individual auditor's hands
in the real tough cases, until he's an HAS.
So that's the size and shape of it.
Luck to you.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :brb .rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 SEPTEMBER 1959
UNIVERSE PROCESSES
I have just been checking out a process series we will call Universe
O/W. It is a killer in sheep's clothing.
Assessment is done with an E-Meter to discover which of four things has
the greatest difference of needle pattern. One does not look for a drop, he
looks for the one of the four that is different than the others.
The four are:
Thetan or spirit
Mind or brain
Body or male body or female body
Physical Universe or earth or continent or town or house or
dwelling.
One uses different ways of putting these things if he doesn't get
instant difference on calling off Spirit, Mind, Body, Physical Universe. If
he does get a different pattern from the rest he proceeds to audit that
discovered thing as follows:
"Think of something you might have done to a ." (The " "
being the terminal you discovered.)
Alternated with:
"Think of something you might have withheld from a ___" (same
terminal).
Because these dive backtrack so fast the question may not be a direct
"Recall what you have done to" since that implies certainty.
This problem could be a specific for illnesses of chronic type.
This is an allowable process in HGCs.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :iet.cden
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[The above HCO B was reissued from Washington, D.C., dated 5 October 1959.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 5 OCTOBER 1959
Franchise Holders
BPI
UNIVERSE PROCESSES
Now that HCO WW at Saint Hill Manor is settling down for the long run,
thanks to the co-operation of all Central Organizations and Franchise
Holders with very few exceptions, I have been able to do some co-ordination
work on processes I have been developing and would like to give you a rapid
rundown on some of this work.
The first modern development of any importance since Comm Processes is
called "Universe Processes".
This is based on some work which started with the 1959 HPA/BScn Course.
The most gross breakdown of parts of life is: 1. The Thetan 2. The Mind 3.
The Body and 4. The Physical Universe. This division is a sort of shorthand
of the eight dynamics and gives us the stuck points of the majority. As
this division is refined it becomes the eight dynamics as used in the old
Dynamic Straight Wire.
Almost anything which applied to or was used in Dynamic Straight Wire
can also be used in Universe Processes.
The most elementary form of Universe Processes is called "Universe
O/W". This consists of doing an E-Meter assessment of the person on the
four points above, taking the most different needle reaction from the rest
(Thetan, Mind, Body and Physical Universe) and running what was found with
Overt-Withhold Straight Wire.
Example: Let us say that we found Physical Universe to be the thing
which fell the hardest or looked the most different on the E-Meter. One
would then run as an alternate question: "Recall something you have done to
the Physical Universe" alternated with "Recall something you have withheld
from the Physical Universe". When the E-Meter was reading Clear on the tone
arm for the sex of the pc, one would then reassess and use the one of the
three remaining terminals (Thetan, Mind or Body) which now fell differently
or more than the other two. Thus all four would eventually be run.
Universe O/W is based upon the observable fact that a thetan is trapped
in a thetan, a mind, a body and the physical universe. If he weren't, he or
she wouldn't be sitting in a chair. Thus we process the extremely obvious,
scouting out with an E-Meter only what obviousness is more troublesome to
the pc than the other obviousnesses. Of course it seems strange that a
thetan could think of himself being trapped in another thetan but you see
this all the time in valences. Ghosts become ghosts by being overwhelmed by
thetans they think are ghosts and so on. That a thetan is trapped in a mind
and that it is not his own mind that he is trapped in is also obvious. If
it were his own mind he would soon as-is it and you see what a hard time he
has trying to erase it: that hard time comes about because he is misowning
the mind in which he is trapped. And this is true of all traps. A thetan is
usually quite sure that there is something wrong with the ownership of his
own body and sure enough there is. And of course he's in the universe
without much understanding of it.
It is far more obscure that a thetan gets trapped in the remaining
dynamics even though this is equally true. He isn't really trapped in an
animal if he is sitting there in a human body and so forth. So Universe O/W
processes the obvious that is the most obvious.
All four of these terminals are run.
Now there is another way of attacking this problem and it is very
successful. This is the "Universe Comm Process". One assesses the pc in
exactly the same way but runs the terminal on "From where could you
communicate to a ... (one of the four universes as above)".
It is very notable that Comm Processes work best on obvious and visible
terminals and work much less well on things that are not present and worst
on things that are merely ideas or significances. You can make great
headway with a pc with "From where could you communicate to a body" when
with the same pc you might get very, very slow results with "From where
could you communicate to a brother". Therefore the easiest to run and make
progress with a Comm Process is using an obvious terminal and this of
course would be one of the four universes, thetan, mind, body and physical
universe.
However, when one runs a very obvious terminal with a Comm Process, one
must carefully avoid pinning the process in present time. One cannot
successfully run a Comm Process with "From where could you communicate to
this room". This is too specific. The pc is balked by the fact that the
Comm Process strongly calls up every room like "this room" and if he
answers anything about these other rooms he is not doing the exact auditing
command and so goes rapidly out of session. Specific terminals that permit
no large breadth of time span won't run on a Comm Process because the
process escapes the time limit imposed all too easily. One would have to
run "From where could you communicate to a room" in order to wipe out the
bad effects of "this room" on the case.
Universe Comm Processes are evidently the best version of all Comm
Processes.
The assessment of the proper terminal can be a little tricky. The
semantics of the terminal get in an auditor's way. And yet the auditor may
be led astray into using a version of the terminal that is not really an
obvious terminal. Example: The pc does not understand what a thetan is and
the meter does react to it so the auditor sorts out "soul" and "spirit",
etc, but gets a large drop on "astral body" and decides to run it only to
discover that he is running an engram of recent origin in which the words
appear. "Spirit" dropped less but would have run because it was more
general.
You are probably wondering how we can get away with running "conceive a
static", forbidden in the book The Creation of Human Ability. We can just
barely get away with it because of the nature and power of the Comm
Process. By damping out excessive individuation the Comm Process increases
havingness. A total individual can't have much of anything-you can't even
have a car really unless you can be, besides self, a "car driver" or a "car
passenger". A totally individuated person cannot be anybody but himself,
cares for nobody but himself and can share in no activity of any other
person. Hence as we flatten out this obsessive individuation we gain in the
pc usually enough havingness to run a massless identity such as a thetan.
However this terminal usually runs less well than the other three employed
in Universe Processes.
There are other developments which will be discussed in later
bulletins, such as "Think of a creation you could make unknown" but these
in general are not as important to us as the above.
If you are having trouble keeping your people on a Co-audit it's
because the things you are running on them are not real to them. I think
you will find that by using a Universe Assessment on a Co-audit as above,
you will have much more constant attendance. Try it anyway.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH: ph.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 OCTOBER AD9
HCO Secs
D of Ps
A USEFUL PROCESS
On your HGC process you have many who cannot seem to plumb an
overt/motivator sequence. On any such and many more, you will find the
following process works admirably:
"Recall being critical."
"Recall withholding criticism."
If the pc tends to become ill push on through. This is the lowest level
of force and influences body form. Try it and tell me how it goes.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :j s.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
LRH TAPE LECTURE
12 October 1959
5910C12 LECTURE Talk to HGCs
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 OCTOBER 1959
Franchise Holders
D.E.I. EXPANDED SCALE
(With a Note on Salesmen)
The original scale
4.0 Desire
1.5 Enforce
.5 Inhibit
was expanded in 1952 to
Curiosity
Desire
Enforce
Inhibit.
In 1959 I have found another vital point on this scale which gives us a
new case entrance point.
Curiosity
Desire
Enforce
Inhibit
Unknown
I suspect also that "Wait" fits between Unknown and Inhibit.
To make these agree in intention, they would become
Interest
Desire
Enforce
Inhibit
Unknow.
This scale also inverts, I find, similar to the Dynamics and below
sanity on any subject.
Unknow
Inhibit
Enforce
Desire
Interest
These points, particularly on the inverted scale, going down, are
lowered by failure. Each lower step is an explanation to justify having
failed with the upper level.
One seeks to not know something and fails. One then seeks to inhibit it
and fails. Therefore one seeks to enforce it and fails. Thus one explains
by desiring it and fails. And not really being able to have it, shows
thereafter an obsessive interest in it.
The above inversion is of course all reactive.
Reactive selling (of interest to us in a salesman campaign) would be
accomplished thusly (and this is the basic scale of selling):
The salesman refuses to let the customer forget the product;
The salesman then inhibits all efforts by the customer to refuse the
product;
The salesman enforces the product on the customer;
The salesman now finds the customer desires the product;
And the customer will remain interested.
There is an interplay here whereby the salesman reverses the scale:
Source of Sales Failure
Salesman Customer
Interest Unknow
Desire Inhibit
Enforce Enforce
Inhibit Desire
Unknow Interest
Salesmen, bringing about an inverted scale, can go downscale themselves
as they do it. They seek to interest and meet forgetfulness. They want to
sell and meet opposition. They high pressure the customer and get pressured
back. And about the time the customer wants the product the salesman is
reactively inhibiting the sale. And as the customer's interest is at its
highest the salesman forgets all about him.
SALESMAN SUCCESS
All a salesman has to do is continue to try to interest the customer
and the reactive inversion will take place.
-----------------
It is interesting that this scale, more importantly, gives us new case
entrances. A series of Comm Processes on any terminal, say "bodies", could
be run.
From where could you communicate to an unknown body an unwanted body a
necessary body a desirable body an interesting body
This would pick the case off the bottom and run it to the top on any
terminal that has gone totally reactive.
By the way, don't take my remarks on salesmen as being "all for the
best". The basic overt act is making people want useless objects and
spaces, and unfortunately for him that's often part of the business of the
salesman. He, unlike us, sometimes isn't fishing people out of the mud.
He's often more likely pushing them in. Therefore he needs our help to get
square with the world. As his income depends on making people want things
and buy things (even though sometimes they need them), we haven't much
choice but to show him the mechanics of selling, to the end of getting him
to help pull others out of the mud. Making somebody want something they
really need is no crime, but the salesman is on very shaky ground. What do
people really need? We had best not try to get involved in the ethics of
all this, or to persuade them to sell only needed items.
The whole economic structure needs the salesman; he is the key of the
whole structure. But we can leaven the flow of even useless goods by
letting an invitation to freedom trickle in the same channel.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:dd.rd.-h
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 14 OCTOBER 1959
BPI
LONDON UP
Good old HASI London is finally stepping high again under Assoc Sec
Herbie Parkhouse and HCO Area Sec Valerie Obin.
HASI topped a thousand plus fifty pounds for the week.
This hasn't happened regularly since the days of Jack Parkhouse.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:dd.rd
Copyright �1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 15 OCTOBER 1959 HCO Secs
Assoc Secs
MY WHEREABOUTS IN NOVEMBER
I am about to do a Magellan by jet in somewhat less than 80 days, so I
too can yawn and say: "It's a small world."
The following dates exist according to Cook's:
Leave Saint Hill 31 st October, 1959
Depart London 31 st October
Arrive Calcutta 1st November
Arrive Singapore 4th November
Arrive Melboume 5th November
Arrive Fiji Islands 21st November
(International Date Line)
Arrive Honolulu 21st November
Arrive Los Angeles 24th November
Arrive Washington 26th November
Arrive London 30th November
Arrive Saint Hill 30th November
Around the World in 30 Days.
Best,
LRH:dd nm
Copyright � 1959 RON
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 20 OCTOBER AD9
HCO Secs
Franchise Holders
D of P Central Orgs
AN EXPERIMENTAL PROCESS
Recall Processes have always worked well. But it has been hard to get
the most fundamental processes that would reach the lowest cases.
Here are some Recall Processes that work way down South of the Auks:
COMM RECALL PROCESS:
"Recall a Communication"
KNOW MYSTERY RECALL PROCESSES:
"Recall an Unconsciousness"
"Recall Waiting"
"Recall a Mystery"
"Recall Sex"
"Recall Eating" (or a variation
"Recall Food")
"Recall a Symbol"
"Recall Thinking"
"Recall an Effort"
"Recall an Emotion"
"Recall Looking"
"Recall Knowing"
"Recall Not-Knowing"
These are very good, especially on bad off cases. They all work.
When the lowest seems flat one can go to one above. Probably there is
an E-Meter tellingness that denotes flatness. I'm working on this and will
have the gen soon.
The earliest experiments of this were on "Recall a Mystery" as a method
of raising IQ and the pc was spouting poetry he'd "forgotten".
There are many possible versions of these simplicities as one can run
them on terminals and significances. Also, remember that these things
(Recall Processes) take the pc out of PT and put him back in. You stop one
with the PC back in PT. The Comm bridge to be used on this process is:
"When you next get an answer close to present time we will end this process
if it is all right with you." Then don't go on for an hour or two, catch it
with 8 or 10 commands by seeing the pc is doing a short cycle at the time
and has started back up.
"Recall Exhaustion" is a simple, very effective version of a work
process.
"Recall Creating" is a good way, apparently, to mop up Step 6 flubs.
Therefore you can use these processes in the HGC or you can, when it is
okayed, use them in training. These are individual processes and not co-
audit. As a note on co-audit, the process, the only basic affinity process,
"What would you like to confront," could cut your co-audit attendance
losses. It is now allowed, having been carefully tested. Man, do they get
interested in cases and hence into session. This is a fine individual
process for pcs that "have no reality on pictures".
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :js.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 25 OCTOBER 1959
BPI
PSYCHOANALYSIS GOES CAPITALISTIC
The following despatch is interesting since by comparing what we know
about the mind now and what the Russians are here criticising in
psychoanalysis, I can estimate where Russian mental research is. And it's
right there thousands of miles behind us. Russia is so consumed with her
"equalism" that all her mental research is negative and no gain.
Socialism, Communism and such are basically designed by people who
cannot work to award people who will not work and amongst other things they
defy all forms of creation, production and creativeness-as I can soon
demonstrate to you. This is not a matter now of my ideas. It's a scientific
fact.
So here's Ivan, spokes manning as usual for the Great Idle Classes on
the subject of psychoanalysis, which turns out to be capitalistic and the
cause of all war. Ha!
NEW YORK HERALD TRIBUNE, Paris, of Friday, October 23, 1959. By United
Press International.
"Russia Raps Psychoanalysis as
Justifying War to West.
LONDON, OCTOBER 22.
A Soviet science correspondent said last night that the Soviet medical
profession considers that psychoanalysis 'indirectly justifies war' and
helps shore up the Western powers.
The attack on psychoanalysis was made in an English-language broadcast
to the United Kingdom. It was a broadcast by the Moscow radio's science
correspondent, who was not named.
'The essence of psychoanalysis,' said the broadcast, 'seems to be that
it erroneously ascribes to the instincts, or more correctly to the sexual
urge, a mystic, supernatural power, which causes and determines everything
in human life.'
'With a Grin'
The Soviet medical profession, the Moscow radio went on, 'treats all
this with a grin.' It added:
'It considers these absurd views to be widespread not just because some
of the idle rich like to delve into their own sexual emotions,
pathologically hypertrophied by a life of idleness and luxury.
'No, the favourite ground for psychoanalysis is also at times a result
of the fact the views advocated by the following of this doctrine are to
the advantage of the powers that be. By asserting the supremacy of the
instincts, psychoanalysis justifies war.
'When they maintain that the main motive force in man's behaviour is
urges and instincts, the psychoanalysts are also indirectly vindicating
such things as unemployment, poverty, widespread industrial accidents and
so on."
LRH:js.nm
Copyright � 1959 L. RON HUBBARD
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 30 OCTOBER 1959
BPI
TO RETAIN CO-AUDIT PC'S INTEREST IN CASE
All auditors should remember the definition of a preclear in session
and that is: that he is interested in and talking to the auditor about his
case.
On a terminal contacted with the E-Meter in an assessment, if needle
action slows down, with little change in its action, run the terminal to a
comm lag flat point, then do another assessment, and run the terminal
found. Remember all terminals run and check them out on an E-Meter later.
It may be that after getting one terminal handled you will have to go back
to a terminal flattened on a comm lag basis and re-run it.
Eventually the tone arm will come to clear reading for the pc's sex but
only if many terminals are run and come back to and run again.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:js.cden
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
SPECIAL HCO BULLETIN OF 31 OCTOBER 1959
HCO Secs ) ONLY
Tech Secs )
CREATE PROCESSES-DANGERS & ADVANTAGES
Just before I leave on extended trips I always take the safety measure
of writing down the newest and latest and exactly where we are in proven
research.
The newest and best as now authorized only for staff member use on
Staff Theta Clearing and the Co-audit, and processing of staff members
only, and not at this time for use in the HGC or on the general public, is
the Create series of processes.
These are the first effective OT processes and as such, when used on
persons not yet Theta Clear, they have certain dangers. Additionally, they
are the most valuable series of processes which we have. They can be used
in one form or another on any level of case and will reach pretty much all
the way to the top.
As to dangers, I refer you to our experiences with Step 6 processes.
Here was a series with great promise which in many cases became rather
deadly. The datum here is that when you improve the ability of a pc to make
and see a picture you also inadvertently improve every picture in the bank
including engrams, and anybody who has seen a totally solid motivator
engram will agree that it is not pleasant.
Create processes stem from a new study I have made of the Cycle of
Action as given in FUNDAMENTALS OF THOUGHT. Axiom 10 becomes confused by
the Thetan with the Cycle of Action. Draw the two and look at them as each
other and you will see what I mean-identifying them is chaos. We get a
"slip" automaticity which, whenever a person starts to create, forces him
over into destruction. There is enough philosophy in this demonstrable fact
to make it the subject of my next large book.
Cancelling any bad effect from this slip automaticity from Create to
Destroy has been solved by using the middle point of the Cycle of Action-
Survive. In Scientology the dynamic principle of existence is "Create" as
in Dianetics it was "Survive" (see FUNDAMENTALS OF THOUGHT).
A case run toward Create is best run on this and the inverted ARC
triangle- "What Would You Like To Create". This becomes the key process of
OT from any level. However, obsessive creation is in effect the whole
engram bank and the reactive mind and a lot of other things. Therefore it
is best to beware of beefing up the engrams for too long a period of time.
The most tested way of easing a case off from the deadly Step 6 phenomena
is to change from "What Would You Like To Create" back to "What Would You
Like To Confront" at routine intervals. "What Would You Like To Confront"
cancels out Step 6 phenomena by easing down the Survive part of the Cycle
of Action. Confront and Survive are of the same order of thing. Survival
could be represented best by "continuous confronting" at a process level.
Too much "What Would You Like To Create" gets us into too persistent and
solid a bank on occasion. The bank is surviving. Therefore the pc is made
very uncomfortable and should then be run a bit on "What Would You Like To
Confront".
"What Would You Like To Confront" should be interspersed with "What
Would You Like To Create" at a ratio perhaps of a session of each or, in a
severe case, an hour of one then an hour of the other.
"What Would You Like To Destroy" is under test and apparently should
run. This would be a psycho curer for sure. But "What Would You Like To
Confront" would
have to be interspersed with "What Would You Like To Destroy" in order to
keep the bank from overwhelming the pc.
Here then we have three processes:
"What Would You Like To Confront?"
"What Would You Like To Create?"
"What Would You Like To Destroy?"
These are on the Cycle of Action as Create Survive Destroy. They are
given above in the order of best tested. We know "What Would You Like To
Confront" will make pcs feel wonderful and will straighten out Step 6's
habit of making the bank more formidable. It is a good, sound, well tested
process.
"What Would You Like To Create" is the key to all cases, but to run it
you will have to salt it down with periods of running "What Would You Like
To Confront". "What Would You Like To Destroy", though not much tested at
this writing, might also have to be interspersed with "What Would You Like
To Confront".
We will probably discover that all three of these have to be run and
that the last one will be the best case entrance at my guess.
A new child process, very successful, has already emerged from this
rationale. This is: "You Do Something You Think I'll Like". Various
simplifications of the Confront and Destroy commands would be something
like: "What Would You Like To Look At" and "What Would You Like To Tear
Up". The last one is not tested.
A sure kill on a pc would be to run "What Would You Like To Confront"
until it has eased off and then to run "What Would You Like To Create"
until it gets grim, and then "What Would You Like To Confront" again, and
back and forth. This is somewhat tested as a combo at this writing and it
works well.
Under test right now is the way of running all three parts of the Cycle
of Action to obtain the smoothest possible recovery by the pc.
Right now this data is only for staffs of Central Orgs as it is very
dynamite and very experimental, but it also gives the best and clearest
promise of rapid case gains and we want Central Org staffs up before we
release this stuff more widely. This is about as revolutionary in rapid
effect as engram running was in its time and place. We're really into
something here with a high rapid gain which when it is all smoothed out and
sweeping the field will take us right over the top unless we find stops on
the part of auditors that we can't easily overcome. And I think we can whip
all the bugs and get it wheeling.
I came down to Sthil last Spring to find the route to OT that almost
anybody could follow. Well, I'm betting even at this early look that we've
got our teeth into it with Create series.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH: dd.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[pic]
Issue 107 [1959, ca. early November]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
On Bringing Order
We will bring order yet. You can assist us by not being dismayed
at disorder. When you start to introduce order into anything disorder
shows up as the second postulate and blows off. Therefore, our efforts
to bring order in the society or any part of it will be productive of
disorder for a while every time. The trick is to keep on bringing
order and soon the disorder is gone and you have orderly activity
remaining. But if you hate disorder and fight disorder only, don't
ever try to bring order to anything for the resulting disorder will
drive you half mad. Only if you can ignore disorder and can understand
this principle, can you have a working world-or a working operation,
for that matter.
[pic]
Copyright � 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All rights Reserved.
MELBOURNE CONGRESS LECTURES
Melbourne, Australia
7-8 November 1959
L. Ron Hubbard gave the following lectures to the Melbourne Congress in
Melbourne, Australia, on November 7 and 8, 1959:
5911C07 MC-1 Welcome Address
5911C07 MC-2 Recent Developments on O.T.
5911C07 MC-3 The Route Through Step Six
5911C08 MC-4 Importances
5911C08 MC-5 Valences
** 5911C08 MC-6 Final Lecture
1ST MELBOURNE ADVANCED CLINICAL COURSE LECTURES
Melbourne, Australia
9-30 November 1959
L. Ron Hubbard gave the following lectures to the students of the 1st
Melbourne Advanced Clinical Course in Melbourne, Australia, between
November 9th and 30th in 1959:
** 5911C09 1MACC-1 The Know-how of Auditing
** 5911C09 1MACC-2 Demonstration of an Assist (LRH MTS-2)
**5911C10 1MACC-3 Valence Splitting-Entering a Mind Process
5911C10 1MACC-4 Demo of Knocking Down a Tone Arm
** 5911C11 1MACC-5 Cycle of Action, Create, Destroy, Relative
Importances
5911C11 1MACC-6 Demo: Force Process-Discreditable Creation
** 5911C12 1MACC-7 The Rule of the Weak Valence
5911C12 1MACC-8 Demo: Dynamic Straightwire Assessment
5911C12 1MACC-9 The Rehabilitation of Judgment
** 5911C13 1MACC-10 How to Have a Game Instead of a Case
5911C16 1MACC-11 The Collapsed Cycle of Action
5911C16 1MACC-12 Getting the Pc into Session
5911C17 1MACC-13 Case Assessment
5911C17 1MACC-14 Demo: Case Assessment
The list of 1st Melbourne ACC lectures continues in chronological
sequence on page 546.
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 12 NOVEMBER 1959
Fran Hldrs
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS IN AUDITING
Avoidance of Double Acknowledgement is vital if you ever hope to keep
the preclear in session.
Double Acknowledgement occurs when the pc answers up, the auditor then
acknowledges, and the pc then finishes his answer, leaving the auditor with
another acknowledgement to do (and also leaving the auditor with no
session).
Wrong:
Command: "What could you say to your father?"
Pc: "I could say, 'Hello'."
Auditor: "Fine."
Pc: " '. . . Father, how are you?' I could say that."
Auditor: (weakly) "Good. What could you say to your father?"
Pc: "I could say, 'Are you feeling well?' "
Auditor: (desperate by now) "Good!"
Pc: " '. . . enough to go fishing?' "
Auditor: "Well okay all right. Now "
A pc is not always sure he has answered the question so he often
changes his mind. If the auditor gives him Tone 40 or any acknowledgement
at all in between a pc's reply the auditor is wrong.
You just don't "encourage" a pc with a lot of agreement OK's and Yes's
in the middle of answers. The pc answers, the pc is sure he has answered
and the auditor then acknowledges. After all, it is the pc that must be
satisfied.
There are many ways to mis-acknowledge a pc. But any mis-
acknowledgement is only and always a failure to end the cycle of a command-
auditor asks, pc replies and knows he has answered, auditor acknowledges.
Pc knows auditor has acknowledged. That is a full auditing command cycle.
Don't forget it and expect a process to work, it won't. The roughest spot
in most auditors is TR 2, not so much how to acknowledge but when.
An auditor running into this with a pc should handle it this way.
Auditor: "What could you say to your father?"
Pc: "I could say, 'Are you feeling well?' "
Auditor: "Did that answer the question?"
Pc: "Well, no. I could say, 'Are you feeling well enough to go
fishing?' "
Auditor: "Did that answer the question?"
Pc: "Yes, I guess it did. He always liked fishing and sympathy."
Auditor: (sure pc is through) "Good! What could you say to your
father?"
And there's the way of it. If the pc is not sure he has answered and
that the auditor has accepted the answer, the pc will get no benefit from
the auditing. And that's how important that is.
Mood can be expressed by an acknowledgement. Evaluation can also be
accomplished by acknowledgement, depending on the tone of voice with which
it is uttered.
There is nothing bad about expressing mood by acknowledgement, except when
the acknowledgement expresses criticalness, ridicule, or humour.
You can always spot a bad auditor. He does two things: he talks too
much to the pc and he stops the pc from properly answering.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH :js.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[The above HCO B is a combination of HCO B 15 September 1958, More on
Training Drill Two, and HCO B 12 January 1959, Tone of Voice-
Acknowledgement.]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 18 NOVEMBER 1959
Assn Secs )
HCO Secs ) only
Ds of P )
1ST MELBOURNE ACC MATERIAL
The following Technology is being taught on the 1st Melbourne ACC which
began November 9, 1959, at HASI Melbourne:
Bring tone arm of meter to clear reading for sex of pc at the beginning
of session by getting withholds off the case, use two-way comm and "What
question shouldn't I ask you?" and overts in PT restim on various dynamics.
Auditing of processes on average pc not to begin until tone arm so
registers. On lower than clear reading arms if all else fails to run S-C-S.
In extremely difficult cases to do an assessment by dynamics for
current overts to get pc's tone arm to read clear before session. Then,
seeing needle changes on any one dynamic, to ferret out the overt.
75 hours spent getting pc in session not too long. Tone Arm trick to be
done each session.
Create series of processes "What would you like to confront?" and "What
would you like to create?" "What part of a (assessed terminal) would you
be willing to create?" alternated with "What part of a (same terminal)
would you be willing to confront?"
Cases in 1st Melbourne were started on clearing tone arm then running
"Think of entering a mind." "Think of not entering a mind." Alternated.
Goal of course is to get whizzing up toward OT.
Some of the scheduled processes to be run include: "What force would it
be all right to use?" "What force would it be all right not to use?" The
same pattern of process to be applied to postulates, spaces, masses, forms
on various dynamics. Experimental version: "What (as in this
paragraph) would it be all right to make?" "What______would it be all right
not to make?"
The main valence splitter is given above in entering minds. But another
easier valence splitter (similar in action to Overt Withhold Straight Wire)
is "Tell me a difference between (any specific or general terminal) and
yourself." "Tell me a similarity between (same terminal) and yourself." The
extreme version is "Tell me of a difference between yourself and a body."
"Tell me a similarity between yourself and a body." Not necessarily
recommended as not tested. This last is called Valence Differentiation.
My goal at Saint Hill, in which all Orgs are assisting, is to
consolidate research and produce rapid OTs. The above processes are some of
the fruits already garnered.
The 1st Melbourne Congress and ACC tapes are available from Melbourne
or from HCO WW, same prices. Not too high. The full rationale of these
processes and others are on these lectures and demonstration tapes of the
1st Melbourne.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:js jh
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 18 NOVEMBER 1959
BPI
Congratulations HASI-South Africa! To celebrate its second birthday
Johannesburg made two �1,000 weeks in a row.
L. RON
HUBBARD
1ST MELBOURNE ACC LECTURES
Melbourne, Australia
18-30 November 1959
5911C18 1MACC-15 Alter-isness, Keynote of all Destruction
5911C18 1MACC-16 Demo: Minus Randomity Areas
5911C19 1MACC-17 Minus Randomity, Clue to Case Assessment
5911C19 1MACC-18 Intricacies of Create-Create Series
5911C20 1MACC-19 Rationale of Create Series
5911C20 1MACC-20 Responsibility of Creation
** 5911C23 1MACC-21 Responsibility for Zones of Creation
5911C23 1MACC-22 Demo: Responsibility for Destruction
** 5911C24 1MACC-23 The Universe of a Thetan
5911C24 1MACC-24 Demo: Turning on Pictures
5911C25 1MACC-25 Counter-create
** 5911C25 1MACC-26 Individuation
** 5911C26 1MACC-27 The Constancy of Fundamentals of Dianetics
and Scientology
** 5911C26 1MACC-28 The Handling of Cases-Greatest Overt
5911C27 1MACC-29 Clearing Up the Whole Track
5911C27 1MACC-30 Principal Incidents on the Track
5911C30 1MACC-31 The Anatomy of Havingness
5911C30 1MACC-32 Processes
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
157 Spring Street, Melbourne, Australia
HCO BULLETIN OF 30 NOVEMBER 1959
ACC Instructors
ACC Students
Assoc Secs
HCO Secs
ALLOWED PROCESSES 1ST MELBOURNE ACC
The following processes are to be run in the last three weeks of the
ACC at the option and discretion of the Instructors in consultation with
individual auditors:
Melbourne 1.
Arduous Case Assessment by dynamics and other means: Overt-Withhold
Straight Wire only on terminals having mass and no terminals of
significance only. General terminals preferred.
Melbourne 2.
Preclear put in two-way comm with auditor by "Think of something you
are willing to let me know." "Think of something you could withhold." And
by other means if indicated by Instructor. Occasionally auditor asks, "How
are you going?" "Is there anything you would like to tell me?" This is
followed by "What would you like to confront?" alternated with "What would
you rather not confront?"
Two-way comm is re-established frequently by above method where pc is
in or near PT on process.
Melbourne 3.
Establish two-way comm with the pc and get tone arm down by getting off
all overts and withholds on any dynamic.
Run dynamic assessment. Run small amounts of alternate create with
large amounts of alternate confront on the same terminal create was run on.
Commands of Alternate Create: "What part of a .....would you be willing
to create?" "What part of a .....would you rather not create?"
Commands of Alternate Confront: "What part of a (same terminal as used
for create) could you confront?" "What part of a ......would you rather not
confront? "
Alternate means two questions run one after the other consecutively,
one command positive followed by one negative.
Melbourne 4.
Two-way comm established and continued by auditor with pc during
session. Get the stories, establish the overts, pinpoint incidents in time
helpfully for pc.
Melbourne 5.
Assists on body to be run by Communication Processes. "From where could
you communicate to a ..........(body part)?" Assists for PT location to be
run with "To what could you communicate from this room?"
Any other ways of cracking cases now known will be run only by
Instructors.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:-.rd
copyright �1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[The above HCO B was reissued from Saint Hill as HCO B 4 December 1959,
same title.]
5912C10 SH DEMO Demo of New HGC Process by LRH
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 DECEMBER 1959
BPI
NEW HORIZONS IN SCIENTOLOGY
With the First Melbourne ACC we begin a new era in Scientology,
greater, broader and more successful than anything we have experienced
before.
A complete new technical front has moved solidly forward, based not so
much on new materials but on a wider understanding of older data, and it is
sufficiently startling in its approach and effectiveness to give new
confidence to every Scientologist, his case and his dissemination problems.
I myself have never before felt so confident and have never before had
such spectacular auditing successes in such short periods of time.
Various problems we have faced are now explained and our various
vulnerabilities have been turned into new skills. We have been losing too
many people from PE Courses, particularly Co-audits. We have lost too many
Scientologists and even though they are replaced in even greater numbers by
new ones the point has been one without previous solution. Too many
Scientology marriages have gotten into difficulties. Auditors and Central
Orgs have been hampered by too low incomes. We have lost too many
executives and principals in scientology and have failed to make newer
people into adequate better people. All these problems were, in their
combined effect upon us, slowing us down. Please understand that we were
slowed down only to the extent of doubling our numbers every year. But
understand also that I have not been unaware of the things that had to be
solved before we could skyrocket off the launching pad and take our
position in civilization's van.
All these problems have now been solved by this new technology. We know
why people leave PE and Co-audits and we can remedy it. We know why we have
lost Scientologists and can get them back and completely prevent new
losses. We can salvage almost any marriage with entirely new approaches to
this problem. We can rehabilitate our own executives and push newer ones
into higher responsibility zones more rapidly and effectively. We have it
MADE.
Now, understanding that in our earliest days we had to carry on with
enthusiasm in lieu at times of know-how and that we bore up silently under
many difficulties, we should not again make the mistake that we are merely
entering into a new exhilaration which will itself become spent and have to
be replaced by a newer forward motion. Of course there will be new forward
motions but as soon as you grasp what has happened here you will see
clearly that it is within our power to accomplish the following:
1. Retain all our people with better and better states of being.
2. Knit ourselves into a tight and mutually supportive third
dynamic which can resist all encroachment and which can expand to
encompass a much wider range of activities.
3. Assist our incomes to a point where we can command the
facilities necessary to our responsibilities.
These briefly are the goals we have been achieving; now we can achieve
them without setbacks and losses here and there.
As soon as you look over this technology I am sure you will agree that it
is a forward step of great magnitude and that it is based upon principles
already known, but which are applied to the problems in a new way.
The thirty-four hours of recorded lectures in Melbourne and the
forthcoming lectures of the US Congress in early January, followed by an
HCS course based on this material, plus the ACC in South Africa will put
anyone who can reach only a little in possession of this information.
The data itself is too lengthy for swift coverage in bulletins. It is
based on new data on the cycle of action and even more importantly upon new
handling of overts and withholds in clearing cases.
In successive weeks I will try to give you in our bulletins some of
this data. It is too much to write all at once. Central Orgs are at this
moment being supplied with the tapes on all this as a background of HCS and
BScn courses and every possible way will be utilized to put all of this
into your hands. You will, however, have to reach a little. If you do you
will be greatly rewarded.
It has taken nearly ten years for me to build a better bridge. Well, I
have no qualms about this one. It will stand any loads and stresses. We
know the basic buttons of aberration full and finally. And all too truly
you will never be the same again.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:js.nm
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 15 DECEMBER 1959
BPI
Franchise Hldrs
HAS CO-AUDIT
It has been found that the Overt-Withhold Straight-Wire Process runs
better on HAS Co-Audit than the Communication Process, as the Communication
Process does not get off overts, it causes people to "blow" the course.
To revert to previous instructions, then, run the following Process on
HAS Co-Audits:
"Recall something you have done to ........" (terminal)
"Recall something you have withheld from ......" (terminal)
(one question after the other)
The Co-Audit Instructor should select a terminal by communicating
freely with the pc, asking questions relating to pc's present life
terminals and the eight dynamics. Pc will be fixated on any terminals
against which he has committed overt acts-even though these overts may have
been not-ised. The terminal chosen by the Instructor must be real to the pc
and must show charge on the E-Meter.
Keep up the Co-Audit pc's interest in Case. This is a most important
factor if large groups are to be maintained. If there is little change in
needle reaction and no obvious signs of mis-emotion on terminal, then run
terminal to a comm lag flat point and then locate another terminal. After
this terminal has been handled it may be preferable to return to previous
terminal, but this is a matter for the Instructor's discretion.
If pc runs out of answers (for Co-Audit only) abandon terminal and find
another.
"What have you done?" "What have you withheld? " is the general form of
this process and may be used.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH js.cden
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[See also HCO B 15 December AD 9, Urgent Change in All Co-audit Courses, on
the following page, which was issued later than the above HCO B. ]
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE WORLDWIDE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex, U.K.
HCO BULLETIN OF 15 DECEMBER AD9
Franchised Auditors
Assn Secs
HCO Secs
All PE Fnds and Personnel
URGENT CHANGE IN ALL CO-AUDIT COURSES
Here we go. I told you in the last Franchise Bulletin that we had hit a
jackpot. Of course, you to some degree put this down to the usual Hubbard
enthusiasm. But my enthusiasm and encouragement was what kept us at it
until we knew what we had to know to go for broke on OT and quite
incidentally on all lower level cases. And this isn't even related to
enthusiasm. No more cold-blooded statement was ever made than my telling
you that the situation was definitely corralled. It is. I am sorry that the
gen is sort of complicated and requires know-how, and would much rather
have arranged it so all we had to do was push the button and we got a
clear, but as soon as you see and experience this data I think you will be
very happy with it.
It all begins back in Wichita when I wrote that extremely unpopular
article which is still appearing in Advanced Procedure and Axioms-FULL
RESPONSIBILITY. It turns out that this is the hottest thought the old man
ever thought but it didn't come into view in its full importance for more
than eight years.
The one thing the public doesn't want to have anything to do with is
FULL RESPONSIBILITY. They shudder and they run whenever they think of it.
So thee and me will have to shoulder the load and shove them at the sausage
machine and all that. For the whole story develops around this center pin
of responsibility. There was so much to the story and so many possible
variations of the tale that getting it all in line and trailmarking a way
through the darkly woods has been a very painful job-both to you and to me.
But we did it. And we've got it. And if we can just hold still long enough
we'll have the full benefit of it.
Overt acts and withholds are important technology. If you can get
somebody to take the overts out of any incident the incident will tend to
vanish. And it would vanish completely except for one thing. Telling
another person about one's overts is not enough. It is also necessary to
take full responsibility for them. Thus the old wheeze about confession as
advocated by one of the pagan churches (pagan to Scientology), that all one
had to do was whisper one's misdeeds and they would go away, turns out to
be so halfhearted that it becomes a very vicious operation. I've just been
all over this ground and can tell you as a technical fact that the simple
imparting of one's sins, or, more comprehensibly, one's overts and
withholds, is as inadequate as using paste to build a skyscraper-and about
as dangerous. If the Church or somebody then pretended to take
responsibility for the confided overts, then we've spun our fellow in just
like that and we've degraded the person and the society. The person who
confides must then take responsibility for the action he considered a sin
by means of honest processing or it's just no-go, no-show, spin-down-spin-
in. And there went the co-audits running overt-withhold. And there went up
the tone arms when the pc told us his crimes. The rule is a thorough,
harsh, unavoidable rule: When we get a person to confide a crime, we must
then run on that crime what part of it he could be responsible for until it
goes. ALERT YE HGCs. If you don't do just that you'll have some very
unhappy people on your hands.
THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED THAT-whenever a person has discovered to the
auditor a sin, crime or discreditable act or discreditable creation, that
auditor is honor bound on all dynamics to run at once a process that will
bring about the person's taking responsibility for his action. If the
auditor does not he will have a spinning pc.
THIS GIVES US THE ONLY PROCESS WE COULD GET AWAY WITH IN A PE CO-AUDIT:
That would be a process which recovered responsibility. The currently
indicated process, done without assessment, would be "WHAT PART OF YOUR
LIFE (PAST) COULD YOU BE RESPONSIBLE FOR?" DO NOT RUN ANYTHING ELSE IN CO-
AUDIT!
Of course doing an overt or a withhold is a refusal to take
responsibility in some sphere, but overts and withholds are the offshoot of
responsibility or lack of it not vice versa.
Now go back and read this again and start clearing some people. More
gen later.
Best,
L. RON
HUBBARD
Writ by me for thee URGENT EXPRESS.
LRH:-.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 16 DECEMBER 1959
BPI
IMPORTANT
RESPONSIBILITY FOR O/Ws
To the degree that a pc does not take responsibility for his Overts and
Withholds his bank becomes solid.
On all cases on which Overt-Withhold is being run it is absolutely
necessary that they be levelled off with responsibility on the incident, or
the session involved, or both.
A tone arm brought down by reducing the Overts and Withholds can be
made high again because Overt-Withhold has a Step 6 reaction of toughening
up the bank and making masses and facsimiles solid, unless the terminal and
the session is handled with:
"What part of a ........could you be responsible for? "
LRH :js.rd L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
[pic]
Issue 110 [1959, ca. late December]
The Magazine of
DIANETICS and SCIENTOLOGY
from
Washington, D.C.
Techniques of Child Processing
L. Ron Hubbard
Tomorrow's cases are child cases today. Whole civilizations have
changed because somebody changed the children. In the past, the children
were usually changed for the worse. Today let's be different and change
them for the better.
But whatever the benefits and reasons of child processing, however much
it may do to smooth out a home and improve the future, the fact remains
that it is a highly technical subject. The processing of children requires
more technically perfect auditing and more properly applied sessions and
processes than the average adult.
To achieve the greatest benefit for children, one should first achieve
the greatest possible command of auditing skill and Scientology theory and
practice. Because a child is helplessly unable to express his ARC breaks
violently enough to be listened to is no reason he should be given them.
Child processing demands more perfect auditing than adult processing
and therefore requires a better trained auditor than the average. If you
would process children, be a Professional auditor first even if the
children are your own. You will find that it will pay.
With that reservation in mind, here are a few very modern developments
in the processing of children. These are the best processes I know and the
only processes that have worked out over a long period of time on a great
many children.
TYPE OF SESSION
A child must be given a very formal session. A child's case will go
downhill generally if the child is processed hit or miss, any old time,
with careless sessioning. A child's session must be given the full dignity
of an adult session. It must be opened and closed. All the formalities of a
session must be observed-and of course the auditing must be done in a place
where the session cannot be broken in upon by outside persons or
influences.
The old technique of "short sessioning" works very well with a child.
All one does is formally open and close a session and run within it only a
minute or two of some simple process as below. The attention span of a
child is short and if the child is even faintly unwilling to be audited,
you can coax the child into short sessions and then, as time goes on,
lengthen them gradually.
Copyright �1959 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved.
ASSISTS ON CHILDREN
Of course one does not open and close a session with any formality
while doing an assist. The preclear is always too tied up with the
emergency and the agony to do anything but the process.
The best assist for a child is "Where did it happen?" and, after asking
this, "Where are you now?" getting the child to point each time he answers
the questions.
"Look at my fingers" while touching around the injured area lightly, is
also a good assist for an injured child.
ROUTINE CHILD PROCESSES
Probably the most worthwhile child process which works as early as
first speech is: "Where is the____?" using "table," "chair" and other room
objects, but avoiding bodies. The child takes this at first as a language
examination and is very proud of it. It occasionally blows grief charges on
losses.
Very effective on a child that is normal or has a physical defect is an
alternate touching of the child's arm, the auditor's arm, and using various
duplicative body parts first on the auditor then on the child,
accomplishing in effect: "From where could you communicate to a body?" with
the actual command: "Feel my arm," "Thank you," "Feel your arm," "Thank
you," and so on, using common body parts. But a warning with this-if it
turns on a somatic, do the same process session after session until the
child is very bright and alert all the time. This is a very fine child
psychosomatic process.
CHILDREN WITH ROUGH CASES
Very young children and children who are older but have rough cases,
respond well to CCH I and CCH 2-but if you have to look those up to find
out what they are, or if you are not a Professional, don't try them.
A version of TR 5 "You make that body sit in that chair" can be run
even on babies by substituting bed for chair.
INSTILLING CONFIDENCE
The worst crime most Scientology parents commit is demanding the child
be far better and brighter than he or she can manage at once. This has the
effect of making the child feel that he can't really do anything to please
his parents and that he is thus failing them. The right thing to do is to
acknowledge what the CHILD thinks he can do or is all right. Otherwise you
are evaluating for the preclear and that's a Code break. A child seeking
the approval of his parents is always inventing new tricks to attract
attention. This means the child is already feeling neglected without
reason, but is not in itself any bad sign. Acknowledge the tricks and spend
more time with the child.
RECALL PROCESSES
Self Analysis Recall Processes contained on the next but last page of
the book Self Analysis can be run on a child with some success. For the
very young children, these require rewording.
___________________
The aforementioned may seem brief to you, but it is a complete
catalogue of workable and invariably helpful processes for children. If
they can run any more than this, they're adults.
L. RON
HUBBARD
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 DECEMBER AD9
BPI
RESPONSIBILITY
If the definition of operating thetan is knowing and willing cause over
all dynamics then we can see at once that responsibility must go hand in
hand with making an operating thetan.
One cannot as-is acts for which one is taking no responsibility, but
for which one is really responsible.
The reason one gets amnesia on his past lives or even denies their
existence lies with responsibility. He or she is unwilling to take
responsibility for having been this or that other identity. This keys in in
present time and closes one down every time one stops taking responsibility
for one's fellows. Fighting 'other identities' in present time one ceases
to be responsible for other identities. Therefore those he has had in the
past become 'other people' and one dramatizes his own past identities
because he cannot take responsibility for them.
When one falls away from responsibility on the various dynamics he can
then become less and less able to influence those dynamics and therefore
becomes a victim of them. One must have done to other dynamics those things
which other dynamics now seem to have the power to do to him. Therefore one
can be injured. One can lose control. One can become in fact a zero of
influence and a vacuum for trouble.
The way one becomes separate from others is by his own overt acts
against them. These overt acts become withholds and the person then
individuates very strongly. You have seen this happening in auditing. The
more overt acts the Auditor pulls on the pc the less willing the Auditor is
to audit that pc. Further, the more overt acts the pc pulls on the Auditor
the less willing he is to stay in session. It only looks as though cause
and effect is at work. Actually all life consists of opposed causes where
it is aberrated.
The way a person blows out of session or blows out of an organization
or blows out of Scientology is a simple one. He withholds information and
hides his overts. After a while he blows himself off. Show me a pc blowing
session and I will show you a pc who has not levelled with his Auditor and
who is guilty of undeclared overts against the dynamics and the Auditor.
Show me a staff member who is blowing the Organization and I will show you
a staff member who is guilty of undeclared overts against the Organization.
It is fatal to audit anyone unless full two-way comm is established
between the Auditor and the pc. A person who goes on being audited without
asserting his responsibility for what he has done is a person who will make
no auditing gains or whose auditing gains will slump. As most of the human
race has undeclared overts this fact alone assumes gigantic proportions in
forwarding Scientology and for that reason alone we will have to give it a
lion's share of attention from here on out.
Of course you will see that many people at first will not come near us
for fear of what we will find out. But as this is better understood you
will find that the people who come to us will come with a willingness to
bare their guilt to us and get it sorted out.
As this is so much the case we must then therefore have amongst us none
with
undeclared overts against the dynamics which would prevent their getting
gains in processing or who would render a person's confidences liable to
use for less pure purposes.
Along with this technical discovery then goes the administrative must
that our noses must be clean and our hearts cleared. Our strength will be
the strength of a billion if we have nothing to hide.
This may or may not be popular. I don't care about that. It is
effective. I do care about that.
And remember that whenever a person discloses to view discreditable
overts and withholds we must run what part of that act or incident could
you be responsible for.
You're going to see more case gains than you've ever seen before-
providing you have the stamina to get over this first hump.
So here we change from irresponsible to responsible, from guilt to
strength and all in the twinkling of an eye.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH:js.rd
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 31 DECEMBER AD 9
Fran Hldrs
HCO Secs
Assn Secs
HASI
Dept Heads
BLOW-OFFS
Scientology Technology recently has been extended to include the
factual explanation of departures, sudden and relatively unexplained, from
sessions, posts, jobs, locations and areas.
This is one of the things man thought he knew all about and therefore
never bothered to investigate, yet, this amongst all other things gave him
the most trouble. Man had it all explained to his own satisfaction and yet
his explanation did not cut down the amount of trouble which came from the
feeling of "having to leave".
For instance man has been frantic about the high divorce rate, about
the high job turnover in plants, about labour unrest and many other items
all stemming from the same source-sudden departures or gradual departures.
We have the view of a person who has a good job, who probably won't get
a better one, suddenly deciding to leave and going. We have the view of a
wife with a perfectly good husband and family up and leaving it all. We see
a husband with a pretty and attractive wife breaking up the affinity and
departing.
In Scientology we have the phenomenon of preclears in session or
students on courses deciding to leave and never coming back. And that gives
us more trouble than most other things all combined.
Man explained this to himself by saying that things were done to him
which he would not tolerate and therefore he had to leave. But if this were
the explanation all man would have to do would be to make working
conditions, marital relationships, jobs, courses and sessions all very
excellent and the problem would be solved. But on the contrary, a close
examination of working conditions and marital relationships demonstrates
that improvement of conditions often worsens the amount of blow-off, as one
could call this phenomenon. Probably the finest working conditions in the
world were achieved by Mr. Hershey of Chocolate Bar fame for his plant
workers. Yet they revolted and even shot at him. This in its turn led to an
industrial philosophy that the worse workers were treated the more willing
they were to stay which in itself is as untrue as the better they are
treated the faster they blow off.
One can treat people so well that they grow ashamed of themselves,
knowing they don't deserve it, that a blow-off is precipitated, and
certainly one can treat people so badly that they have no choice but to
leave, but these are extreme conditions and in between these we have the
majority of departures: the auditor is doing his best for the preclear and
yet the preclear gets meaner and meaner and blows the session. The wife is
doing her best to make a marriage and the husband wanders off on the trail
of a tart. The manager is trying to keep things going and the worker
leaves. These, the unexplained, disrupt organizations and lives and it's
time we understood them.
People leave because of their own overts and withholds. That is the
factual fact and the hardbound rule. A man with a clean heart can't be
hurt. The man or woman who must must must become a victim and depart is
departing because of his or her own overts and withholds. It doesn't matter
whether the person is departing from a town or a job or a session. The
cause is the same.
Almost anyone, no matter his position, can remedy a situation no matter
what's
wrong if he or she really wants to. When the person no longer wants to
remedy it his own overt acts and withholds against the others involved in
the situation have lowered his own ability to be responsible for it.
Therefore he or she does not remedy the situation. Departure is the only
answer. To justify the departure the person blowing off dreams up things
done to him, in an effort to minimize the overt by degrading those it was
done to. The mechanics involved are quite simple.
It is amazing what trivial overts will cause a person to blow. I caught
a staff member one time just before he blew and traced down the original
overt act against the Organization to his failure to defend the
Organization when a criminal was speaking viciously about it. This failure
to defend accumulated to itself more and more overts and withholds such as
failing to relay messages, failure to complete an assignment, until it
finally utterly degraded the person into stealing something of no value.
This theft caused the person to believe he had better leave.
It is a rather noble commentary on man that when a person finds
himself, as he believes, incapable of restraining himself from injuring a
benefactor he will defend the benefactor by leaving. This is the real
source of the blow-off. If we were to better a person's working conditions
in this light we would see that we have simply magnified his overt acts and
made it a certain fact that he would leave. If we punish we can bring the
value of the benefactor down a bit and thus lessen the value of the overt.
But improvement and punishment are neither one answers. The answer lies in
Scientology and processing the person up to a high enough responsibility to
take a job or a position and carry it out without all this weird hocus-
pocus of "I've got to say you are doing things to me so I can leave and
protect you from all the bad things I am doing to you." That's the way it
is and it doesn't make sense not to do something about it now that we know.
A recent Secretarial Executive Director to all Central Organizations
states that before a person may draw his last pay cheque from an
Organization he is leaving of his own volition he must write down all his
overts and withholds against the Organization and its related personnel and
have these checked out by the HCO Secretary on an E-Meter.
To do less than this is cruelty itself. The person is blowing himself
off with his own overts and withholds. If these are not removed then
anything the Organization or its people does to him goes in like a javelin
and leaves him with a dark area in his life and a rotten taste in his
mouth. Further he goes around spouting lies about the Organization and its
related personnel and every lie he utters makes him just that much sicker.
By permitting a blow-off without clearing it we are degrading people, for I
assure you, and with some sorrow, people have not often recovered from
overts against Scientology, its Organizations and related persons. They
don't recover because they know in their hearts even while they lie that
they are wronging people who have done and are doing enormous amounts of
good in the world and who definitely do not deserve libel and slander.
Literally, it kills them and if you don't believe it I can show you the
long death list.
The only evil thing we are doing is to be good, if that makes sense to
you. For by being good, things done to us out of carelessness or
viciousness are all out of proportion to the evil done to others. This
often applies to people who are not Scientologists. Just this year I had an
electrician who robbed HCO of money with false bills and bad workmanship.
One day he woke up to the fact that the Organization he was robbing was
helping people everywhere far beyond his ability to ever help anyone.
Within a few weeks he contracted TB and is now dying in a London hospital.
Nobody took off the overts and withholds when he left. And it's actually
killing him-a fact which is no fancy on my part. There is something a
little terrifying in this sometimes. I once told a bill collector what and
who we were and that he had wronged a good person and a half hour later he
threw a hundred grains of Veronal down his throat and was lugged off to
hospital, a suicide.
This campaign is aimed straightly at cases and getting people cleared.
It is aimed at preserving staffs and the lives of persons who believe they
have failed us.
Uneasy lies the head that has a bad conscience. Clean it up and run
responsibility on it and you have another better person, and if anybody
feels like leaving just examine the record and sit down and list everything
done to and withheld from me ;and the Organization and send it along. We'll
save a lot of people that way.
And on our parts we'll go along being as good a manager, as good an
Organization and as good a field as we can be and we'll get rid of all our
overts and withholds too.
Think it will make an interesting new view?
Well, Scientology specializes in those.
L. RON
HUBBARD
LRH :js.cden
Copyright � 1959
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
SUBJECT INDEX
1957 - 1959
acknowledgement(s) (cont.)
A ultimate in ~ would be
end of universe, 351
why stress on acknowledgement, 349
aberration, aberrative, acts, bad, defn., are those acts which
cannot be easily
common denominator of aberration and lack of
experienced at the target end, 432
orientation, 109 admiration and critical are a dichotomy,
245
communication and aberration, affinity; see also ARC; C&MSCS
common denominator of, 28 defn., actually the
consideration of distance, 139
communication itself is not aberrative, misuse weakest
corner in ARC triangle, 139
and withhold of communication is aber- Affinity Process,
"What would you like to con
rative, 518 front?", 463, 536
cut communication with the mass causes aber- age and auditing,
34
ration, remedy of, 147 Alternate Confront, commands of, 547
person becomes as aberrated as he cannot com- Alternate
Create, commands of, 547
municate, as he is overwhelmed by other- A.M.A.'s proposed
principles of medicalethics, 2
determinisms, as he himself dare not assume analytical
inspection, primary characteristic of reac cause points,
466 tive mind is response to a situation without ~,
consists of a number of lessons which a person has
269
learned too well, 18 anaten ensues when one direction of
command is run
education and ~,18, 29 too long, 220
radiation, aberrative character of, 52 anaten, pc with loss of
havingness will agitate or go
relationship between ~ and learning rate, 15 anaten
and tend to be upset in general, 187
ability, abilities, anchor points and pain in the head, 98
ability gain is pc's recognition that pc can now do anchor
points of body, 151
things he could not do before, 428 answers is an
opposite side to problems, 321
madness is compounded of disarranged ~,170 APA, American
Personality Analysis; see OCA
neuroses and psychoses are exaggerated, concen- apathy,
preclear in apathy generally doesn't know he
trated abilities, 169 has a PTP, 177
past life abilities, 80 Aquinas, Saint Thomas, is an early
forerunner of
psychiatrist sees in every ability an insanity, 170
Scientology, 514
rehabilitation of abilities, 79 ARC; see also affinity;
communication; reality
technique, 82 auditors fail to make pc feel they are
interested in
Academy, goal of, 25, 250 pc when they handle him with
poor ARC, 242
Academy, no cases at Academy, 309 cause of auditor having low
ARC, 516
Academy training, 309 CCH and ARC, 92, 174
ACC and HPA/HCA, 206 control by ARC is taught in Comm Course,
242
ACC Auxiliary Procedure, 301 formal auditing is control by ARC,
242
ACCClearProcedure [1958],311,322,369 in auditing, defn., A =
ability to be in or at a
omit "What part of that can you confront best?"
distance from something; R = ability to co-exist
from ~, 369 with something; C = ability to
transmit thought
accidents, using assists on, 262, 263 between two or more
points, 311
ACC Preparatory Process schedule for running en- keeping pc in
session is done withgood ARC, 243
grams [1959], 389 loss of havingness in an
auditing session can be
acknowledgement(s), 543; see also TR 2 repaired by repair
of ARC of session, 157, 177,
a control factor, 349 187
double acknowledgement, loss of, is more important
than loss of havingness,
by auditor causes OCA/APA drop in comm 157
level, 334 low, whole answer to it is contained in
victim, 516
cause and avoidance of, 308 tone is established by ARC,
104
its general use is putting a period to the communi-
triangle, 92,136; see also C&MSCS
cation cycle, 349, 350 the way it is used,
104
mis-acknowledgement is only and always a failure
weakest corner is affinity, 139
to end the cycle of a command, 543 when another tries
to chop your ARC, 105
mood can be expressed by, 383 ARC break(s), 296
of children, 110 defn., assignment of responsibility for a
sudden
perfect acknowledgement, what it communicates,
drop in affinity, reality or communication, 364
349 can hide rock once found, 300
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
ARC break(s) (cont.) assist(s) (cont.)
difficulties, 304 is auditing on several dynamics, 262
dropped havingness and ~, how to distinguish "Keep it from
going away" as assist, 263, 264
between, 157,177 not a substitute for medical
attention, 264
handling, 437 on body by Communication Processes, 547
"Have I done something you feel is wrong in on
children, 554
this session?" "Describe it to me", 296 what
techniques comprise an assist, 260
is a disorder, 378 association-differentiation are two
principles of mind,
is only thing that will depress a profile, 437
150
must all be repaired thoroughly, ARC must be assumption occurs
within a few minutes after birth,
maintained, 174 226
OCA/APAwhole line (or majority of points) drops assumption of
beingness, 257, 258, 271; see also
means ARC breaks with auditor, 334 valences
retard results, 382 astigmatism, a distortion of image, is
only an anxiety
thetan will dream up ARC breaks to exteriorize his to
alter the image, 39
attention from a PTP, 304 astral body is an aberration,
414
TR 5N is ARC break handling, 353 atomic bomb, facts about and
protection from; see
two conditions under which pc violently protests
radiation;All About Radiation
about ~, 303 attention,
with auditors, 430 bank merely expresses a recording of
past atten
ARC Break Straightwire, 453, 489 tion fixations, 428
cannot be run on a case that is motivator hungry, clearing
is a gradient process of finding places
397 where attention is fixed and restoring
ability of
CCH-50 is its processing number, 363 pc to place
and remove attention under his own
commands of and how to run, 363, 389 determinism,
428
good and badpoints of, 364 consequences of fixed
attention, relation to no
is very useful in husband-wife co-auditing teams,
"case gain", 428
364 span of child is short, 553
to as-is ARC breaks, 489 unfixing attention, 428
works well on medium level pcs, 381 by violence
throws a case downscale, 428
ARC Straight Wire, 69, 294, 316 must be done by
increasing ability to reach and
as a training process, 483 withdraw from
specific thing or person on
commands and how to run, 111, 316 which
attention is fixed in bank, 428
cyclic aspect of, 317 Attention by Duplication 9, No. 4
[process], 395
TR 11, 69, 316 audit, auditing,
arguments, caused by failure to handle originations, defn.,
that process which restores confidence in
371 confronting and undoes necessity to
confront
as-is, communication tends to as-is mass, 138 thought,
time, life, energy, matter and space,
as-ising requires taking responsibility, 555 311
assessment(s), defn., reversing of other-determined flows by
defn., discovering what has overwhelmed pc, 465
gradient scales, putting pc at cause again, 465
defn., inventory and evaluation of pc, his body
acknowledgements in, 543
and his case to establish processing level and
age and auditing, 34
procedure, 484 ARC formal auditing, description of,
242
dynamic assessment, 407 ARC in auditing, 311
of a case on lower rungs of processing using Know assist
is auditing on several dynamics, 262
to Mystery Scale, 460 assists, difference to
auditing at large, 259
Assigning Identity [learning process], 31 audit the case one
is auditing, 3 1 2
assist(s), defn., an action undertaken by a minister to barriers
to, 244; see also auditing, gross auditing
assist the spirit to confront physical difficulties
errors [in full index]
which can then be cared for with medical metho- basic
rule of, is to start with something pc can do
dology by a medical doctor as needful, 259
and then get him to do it better, 161,181,182
accidents, using assists, 262, 263 being interesting
is not auditing, 355
be professional and definite, 261 Child Processing; see
Child Processing
difference between formal session and assist, 259, command;
see command
260 does require stamina, 107
first aid always precedes an assist, 262 effect point,
don't process pc at, 518 .
for PT location by Comm Process, 547 experimental ~ and
standard techniques, 282
in an assist you always count on fact that thetan formal
auditing, defn., control by ARC, 242
himself would, if he could, do right thing, 262
different than Tone 40 auditing, 242
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
audit, auditing (cont.) auditor(s)('s) (cont.)
four points of auditing error, 285, 292 crimes, two
biggest, are rough and choppy auditing
getting pc to talk to you honestly, 315 and
overestimating level of case, 397
gradient approach of auditing, 312 don't talk to pc
much during session, 379
Group Auditing; see Group Auditing establishing
auditor with pc, 314
how it becomes a problem to pc, 195 ethical auditor,
what he does, 392
length of time used in processing [1959], 447 fail to
make pc feel they are interested in pc when
muzzled, 379, 440, 504, defn. auditor says only
they handle him with poor ARC, 242
two things-gives command and acknowledg- goal of,
to discover an ability in pc and improve it,
es answer to that command; if pc says any-
5,159,178
thing not an answer to command, auditor goal of,
to help pc re-establish confidence in his
nods his head and awaits an answer before
ability to confront thetans, thought, time, life,
giving acknowledgement [1959], 441, 451
energy, matter and space, 31 1
is remedy for rough auditing, 397 goals of, stack up on a
gradient scale between
of engrams, 416 thetan inoperative and thetan who
can operate,
when muzzled auditing should be used, 436 155, 175
new mother, 361 handling pc who is not co-operative,
159,178
offbeat processing, 282 having low ARC, cause of, 516
OT, goal of all processing, 161,181 how to increase
pc's willingness to confront past,
participation of pc in session; see session, in ses-
489
sion interest in case, from auditor and pc, 405
pc complains that auditing has no effect on him or length
of time to become an auditor, 329
who makes very slow gains, what to run, 497 levels
of auditors and processes [1957], 84
pc unwilling to be audited, what to run, 326, 468, making
pc physically well without pc finding out
497 about it, 182
pc who isn't cogniting regularly is being processed must be
able to duplicate, 355
beyond his ability to do, 181 Operating Thetan,
only goal worthy of auditor's
psychotic persons unwilling to be audited, what to
attention, 176
run, 468, 497 pc and ~, when they are cleared for
session, only
requires that you obtain a better reality on your
then begin on case, 301
environment and all its drills are aimed at this, pc gain,
auditor unhappy about, 454
514 remains at cause in all sessions without
forbidding
running out bad auditing, 419 pc to be at cause,
161,181
session; see session staff auditor, 83, 84
skill, four grades of, 83 grounds on which to refuse to
process or release
skill is a discipline in living and a know-how of the a
pc, 51
parts of life, 236 students in Academy are
auditors, not pcs, 250
teaches pc that he can be at cause without having treating
pc as a victim, 516
to be because he doesn't dare be at effect, 160,
unable to produce good results, cause and handling
180 of, 285, 292
theory of, 311, 312 using a process on which he has high
reality will
Tone 40; see Tone 40 auditing obtain high results
with a pc, 60
auditor(s)('s), validated auditor [1957], 84
ARC breaks with auditors, 430 will always be senior to
Clears, 237
attitude required to confront the world, 108 Auditor's Code; see
also C&MSCS
bad auditor talks too much to pc and stops pc addition
to the, 82
from properly answering, 308, 544 change
[1958], 306
basic fundamentals, when they are securely the No.
19,417
auditor's own there is no need for him to be OCA/APA
profile dropped, cause and handling of,
told what must be done, 425 285
book auditor, 83, 84, 85 Scientologist operates within
boundaries of Audi
can be smoothed out as cases by running a Com-
tor's Code and Code of a Scientologist, 281
munication Process on "an auditor" and "a
authoritarianism is little more than a form of hypno
preclear", 505 tism, 424
certified auditor, 83, 84 authority and preponderance of
agreement ordinarily
clearing the auditor; see clearing the auditor
make man accept things, 420
commands, before auditor gives them, he makes authorship,
mis-responsibility is the miscalling of, 98
certain he has pc's attention on him again and
automaticity, automaticities,
off last question, 296 increasing learning rate
by drill usually only in
confidence, 379 creases familiarity and
automaticity, 22
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
automaticity, automaticities (cont.) blow-off, improvement of
conditions often worseas
of form, solution to, 210 the amount of, 557
responsibility and, 167 blows, justification for, 558
we take over automaticities only to rehabilitate blows, reason
for, 555, 557, 558
ability of thetan, 232 Bodhi is evidently our
"Clear", 217
awareness, increased, is only factor which offers any body, bodies,
530
road out, 107 defn., a solid appendage which makes
a person
awareness of awareness unit; see thetan recognizable, 151
axiom(s); see also Axioms & Logics defn., identifying form
or non-identifiable form to
Axiom 10 becomes confused by thetan with cycle
facilitate control of, communication of and
of action, 539 with and havingness for thetan
in his existence
not-isness (Axiom 11), how to bring under pc's in
mest universe,480
knowing control and to reduce the not-isness in anchor
points of, 151
pc's bank, 489 assists on body by Communication
Processes, 547
psychology is in actual use a dramatization of body
control comes before control of thinking
Axiom 10, wholly reactive, 499 ness, 479
Scientology Axiom 58, 393 body part run on Communication
Process, 513,
Scientology, principles and axioms of, are con-
519
siderations agreed upon from which stem this can't
change without changing mind, 151
universe and livingness, 344 control of body by pc,
184
thetan defined in Axiom 1, 223 death of body and
handling of, 224, 227
electronic structure around body, 151
first step to control of pc's body, 240
B GE is something that mocks up
bodies, 226
is a mass, a solid terminal, 240
baby, how to feed and handle, 361 parts of man-thetan, mind,
body, 129
bad acts, defn., are those acts which cannot be easily physical
universe undercuts the body, 129
experienced at the target end, 432 reason for
holding on to body, 186
bank; see reactive mind shut-off of memory actually occurs
with pick-up
barbarianism, violence leads to, 343 of new body, 226
barbarism,howto cure, 252 theta clear can exist knowingly
independent of
barbarism, what it is, 251 bodies, 155, 176
Basic Affinity Process, "What would you like to con- thetan
himself without body is capable of per
front?", 536 forming all functions he
assigns to body, 480
basic personality; see personality, basic Body Confrontingness,
commands and how to run,
be, being, beingness, 319
assumption of beingness, 257, 258, 271, 272; see Body Mimicry,
Full, 6
also valences Body-Room Contact, CCH 6, 67
be, do and have depend on communication, 92 Book and Bottle;
see Opening Procedure by Dupli course creates a beingness, not
imparts data, 464 cation
covert theft of beingness, 257 book auditor, 83, 84, 85
D.E.I. Scale on beingness, 271 Book Mimicry; see CCH 4, Book
Mimicry
preclear who assumes aches of another wishes to book one
clear; see Clear, mest clear
be that other; he is short on beingness, 272 BP; see
personality, basic
Beingness Processing is best solution to valences, 257 "Bring Order"-
the motto of HCO, 391
271 B.Scn./HCS Course [1958], 366
belief or faith, Scientology demands no, and thus is Buddha, 217
not in conflict with faith, 514 Buddhism, why it won, 134
betrayal,defn.,helpturnedtodestruction,219 buttons we want flat on
everybody in Scientology:
better, defn., negative gains; things disappear that
victim, money, 508
have been annoying or unwanted, 428 buttons which
depress clearing if pc has erroneous
between lives series, 226 definitions for them, 321
birth, ideal conditions for, 361
birth, prenatals and conception are a bounce from a
death, 411 C
birth, within a few minutes after it, assumption
occurs, 226 cable, don't phone, 508
black field, 191, 256 cancer, 52
blindness, 38 Can't Have [process] ,10
blindness is an extreme unawareness, 96 can't have, waste what you
can't have, 141
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
case(s); see also preclear case(s), types of cases and handling
(cont.)
analysis of cases, 428 invisible case, 405
assessments of a case on lower rungs of processing
invisible case, cannot see mock-ups, how to
using Know to Mystery Scale, 460 crack,
400
auditor and pc when they are cleared for session,
nervous-dispersed case, there is no real gain in
only then begin on case, 301 running
significance until hellos and okays
audit the case one is auditing, 312 are run,
235
Dynamic Straight Wire, cleverly done, takes a case
not-ising by figure-figure, 405
apart, starts almost any case, 453 running
Help is necessary on a case that is hung
finding the engram necessary to resolve case, 352
up, 239
gain depends on taking responsibility, 555 wide-
open case, 447, defn., case that has pic
how case behaves as we raise confrontingness on
tures and everything and is impatient to get
mental image pictures, 447 on with
it but does not markedly alter the
interest in case, from auditor and pc, 405
bank with thinking alone is not a high case
keep up co-audit pc'sinterest in case, 550
but an old "wide open case" of Dianetic
make-or-break point of case, 129 days,
159,179
most aberrative thing on case is association with
undercutting cases, 404
mest, 189 causability, degree of knowing, 160, 180
no "case gain", relationship to fixed attention, cause;see
also effect
428 evaluation on a cause basis, 166
not-isness on case, indicators of, 485 last ditch way of
being cause, 518
not to run on victim process, 519 of husband and wife
quarrel, 364
present time problem, relationship to case; see pre- only
those things which others are able to experi
sent time problem ence easily, 431
release is a person whose case "won't get any cause point
and effect point, bridge between, on any
worse", 444 subject, 359
remedies, 468, 497 cause points, degree to which person
becomes aber
results, what a result is, 428 rated, 466
scale of deterioration of case, 390 CCH(s), 5, 278, 394, 400;
see also applicable lectures
Selected Persons Straightwire on Overts will bring in
16th ACC, 3
up responsibility of case to a point where he
defn., stands for Communication, Control and
can be trusted to run engrams, 453
Havingness, 33
starting a case [1959], 402 defn., is really C for
Control, D for Duplication, C
there are no cases in the Academy, 309 for
Communication, Ct for Control of Thought
two biggest auditor crimes are rough and choppy =
Havingness, 128
auditing and overestimating level of case, 397
ARC and CCH, 92
types of cases and handling, background theory of CCH,
130
ARC Break Straight Wire cannot be run on case
case history, 249
that is motivator hungry, 397 commands and how to
run, 312
bad off and good condition case require special
Course [1957], 58
handling, 159,160,179,180 curriculum of CCH
[1957] ,121
basic difference amongst cases lies in ability to does not
work unless each command is in a sepa knowingly
cause, 160,180 rate unit of time, 354
black case, 405 goal of CCH, 5,129
case of a student, 309 long form, 267
children with rough cases, 554 psychos, run on CCH 1, 2,
3, 4, 502
confront case, 405 running CCHs, 183, 482
dub-in case, 405 Tone 40 auditing, 480
experience case, 405 training and CCHprocesses, [1957]
61, [1959] 394
failed case, defn., case in which thought can use of,
379
always be overpowered by mest, 118 CCH 0, 157, 205,
294, 314
figure-figure case, somebody who will not ever defn., a
collection of mechanical aids to assist pc's
admit having done something or anything to
participation in session and to assist the auditor
anybody, 519 in ARC, 158,178
getting special cases to participate in session, is
firstly establishing the rudiments of session, dis 159,178
cussing the goals of pc for intensive, handling
Help and Step 6 do not work on low level ~, 322 PTP and
clearing auditor for pc, 238
high case, how you tell, 159, 179 purpose of, 239
how to handle cases that self-invalidate between
rudiments, goals and present time problem, 65
sessions, 504 starting session, 296
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
CCH Ob-Help in full-starting session, 219 CCH 88, Enforced
Nothingness, 246
rules governing the running of, 220 center, exact plan of a,
500; see also franchise
Step 6, Mock-ups and Help, CCH Ob, two pro- central org can
succeed as far as it can service, 515
cesses that clear a pc, 243 certificates, why all begin
with word "Hubbard", 288
CCH 1, change,
"Don't give me that hand" version, 483 is "ought to be-
should be" postulate, 88
"Give me that hand", Tone 40, 240, 313, 480 obsessive,
130
"Give me your hand", Tone 40, 65 when attention is fixed,
ability to reach and with
Reality Scale and CCH 1, 240 draw decreases,
therefore ability to change
running of CCH 1 , 183 decreases, 428
session, 53 character of person, determining by observing
his
what it does, 240 intent concerning
communication, 105
CCH 1 and 2 used for bad-off child, 526 charge, terminal chosen must
be real to pc and must
CCH 2, Tone 40 8-C, 66, 313, 481 show charge on E-Meter,
550
commands and goal of, 247 child, children,
CCH 3, Hand Space Mimicry, 66, 314, 481 acknowledgement of, 110
Book Mimicry and ~ are not Tone 40, 400 attention
span of, is short, 553
CCH 3 was Book Mimicry in 1958; see CCH 4, condition of,
109
Book Mimicry education, 30
Hand Space Mimicry called CCH 4 in 1958, 248 how to handle
children, 81,105
how to run, 248, 249, 401 instilling confidence in
children, 554
CCH 3(c), S-C-S on a person, 317 is a thetan in usually rather
bad condition, 34
CCH 3 & 4, only valid if they heighten ARC, 174 is dependent
on exterior evaluation, 166
CCH 4, Book Mimicry, 66, 314, 482 is suffering from death shock,
109
Book Mimicry called CCH 3 in 1958, 248 not permitted to
work, 214
CCH4 was Hand Space Mimicry in 1958;see
originationsofachild,371
CCH 3, Hand Space Mimicry processing of; see Child
Processing
Hand Space Mimicry and ~ are not Tone 40, 400 requires
understanding and assistance in control-
IQ changes produced by CCH 4, 247 ling the
environment around him, 110
motions are the commands, 401 routine of, 81
product, purpose and procedure of Book Mimicry, using
good 8-C on children, 82
247-48, 400 with rough cases, 554
CCH 5, Location by Contact, 67 Child Processing, 553
CCH 5, Tone 40 Locational Processing, purpose, pro- age of
child in processing, 34
cedure and commands of, 254 assists on children, 554
CCH 6, Body-Room Contact, 67 auditing a 10-year old child, 53
CCH 6, Opening Procedure by Duplication [1957], demands more
perfect auditing than adult process
purpose, procedure and commands of, 254
ing, needs very formal session, 553
CCH 7, Contact by Duplication, 68 give the child the dignity of
real sessions, 526
CCH 7 [1958]: Tone 40 8-C-"Keep it from going processes for
different types of children, 526
away", 255 routine child processes, 554
CCH 8 [1958]: Tone 40 8-C-"Hold it still1', 255 short
sessioning works very well with a child, 526,
CCH 8, Trio, 68 553
CCH 9, Tone 40 "Keep it from going away", 69 "You do something
you think I'll like" [child pro
is a withhold process, 230 cess], 540
CCH 9 [1958]: Tone 40 8-C-"Make it a little more choice, power of,
81
solid", 255 Christianity is based on the victim;
compulsion of
CCH 9, 10, & 11, why they are run, 233 overt act-motivator
sequence, 494
CCH 10, Tone 40 "Hold it still", 69 Christianity, why it won, 134
CCH 11, Tone 40 "Make it a little more solid", 69 chronic somatic;
see somatic, chronic
CCH 12, Limited Subjective Havingness, 70 civilizations, past ~
have vanished, 126
commands of, 256 Clear(s),
CCH 13, Subjective Solids, 70 defn., in an absolute sense
would be someone who
commands of, 256 could confront anything and
everything in past,
CCH 14, Then and Now Solids; see Then and Now present
and future, 114
Solids defn., a thetan who can knowingly be at
cause
CCH 15, Rising Scale Processing, 72 over life, matter,
energy, space and time, sub
CCH 18, 99 jective and objective [1957] ,172
CCH-50, processing number of ARC Break Straight defn, a
person at willing and knowing cause over
Wire, 363 his own life, his body and his
surroundings and
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
Clear(s) (cont.) Clear(s), theta clear (cont.)
without a reactive or subconscious mind [1958],
made by gradually raising their confrontingness
217 of mental image pictures, 445
able to confront the physical universe, other bo-
mest clear and ~, difference between, 376
dies, his own body, other minds, his own
processes on gradient scale from unconscious pc
mind and other beings-without trimmings,
to theta clear [1959], 436
101 route theta clear, list of processes, 439
are the lucky, 1 53 schedule [1959], 468
attainment of "Clears" [1958], 217 three grades of
Clear [1959], 375
auditors will always be senior to Clears, 237 Training
0-Confronting, first step on the road to
basic personality capable of all attributes of Clear,
Clear, 101
284 what are Clears, 375
being Clear gives one the potential of being and you
cannot stay Clear unless you solve things by
makes the being rather easy, and fun; makes it
the greatest good for the greatest number of
possible to continue to be something, 236
dynamics, 237
Bodhi is evidently our "Clear", 217 clear(ed)(ing), [1947-
1949] 273, [1947] 318
know-how in auditing to Clear, 286 defn., a gradient
process of finding places where
mest clear, attention is fixed and restoring
ability of pc to
defn., a Book One clear; clear in terms of
place and remove attention under his own
facsimiles, 155,175 determinism, 428
defn., can see facsimiles with sonic present life-
buttons which depress clearing if pc has erroneous
time, has no psychoses or neuroses, upper
definitions for them, 321
part of OCA/APA graph, above 135 IQ cleared
Zulu is a cleared Zulu, 236
[1957] ,156, 176 Earth, 501
defn., freedom from keyed-in engrams, 375 fields,
clearing of, 209, 210
defn., thinks of himself as a body and is subject in
Dianetics vs. in Scientology, 270
to one; all engrams are effectually keyed out
mest clearing is shortcut clearing, 446
without being examined; has excellent re-
reality, 235
calls, 375 responsibility, basic clearing
process using, 321
defn., preclear is mest clear when no terminal
staff clearing,291
selected is, when run by a Communication
theta clearing is faster than mest clearing but not
Process, productive of variation of tone arm
faster than releasing, 447
from male or female clear reading, 504 up a
goal, 327
clearing processes for, 377 up states of mind and
psychosomatics, 302
difference between mest clear and theta clear,
why some people are unwilling to clear people,
376, 445 454
is a way station on the road to theta clear or clear
bracelets [1958], 341
OT, 376 Clearing by Valences, 274
Procedure [1958], 205 LRH session, Clearing by
Valences, 276
what makes the state unstable, 446 clearing commands;
see commands, clearing
needs training, 237 Clear Procedure, Clearing Procedure, 296,
382
one's first duty is to be Clear, 1 53 ACC Clear
Procedure, 3 1 1, 322, 369
procedure for certifying Clears [1958], 289 auditing the
pc on Clear Procedure, 243
Project Clear processes, how to run, 144 definitions,
goals, 155
theta clear, 375 HGC Clear Procedure outline [1958], 219
defn., a clear obtained by Clear Procedure
Scientology: Clear Procedure Issue One, 172
[1957],155,175 Step One: Participation
in session by the pc,
defn. , can exist knowingly independent of
157,176
bodies [1957] ,155, 156, 175, 176 Step
Two: Placing the preclear at cause, 182
defn., has no obsessive engrams; can put back at
Step Three: Establish control of pc's body by
will his reactive bank or any engram in it and
pc, 184
blow it off again at a glance, 376
Step Four: Find the auditor, 188
defn., person at cause over his own reactive
Step Five: Pc versus mest, 189
bank and can create and uncreate it at will;
Step Six; see Step 6
person who is willingto experience, 447
Step Seven (Optional): Establish pc's control
defn., preclear is theta clear when he can handle
over his "bank", 191
engrams without producing a change from
Step Eight: Make some time, 191
clear reading [1959], 504 Standard Clearing
Procedure [1958], 274
Clears made in 1947 that were stable were in
standardization of Clear Procedure, 285, 292
reality theta clears, not mest clears, 445
what Clear Procedure consists of, 285, 292
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
clear(ing) the auditor, 122,123, 301 command(s) (cont.)
best way of, 326 un-doable commands, 467
commands of, 239 communicate(s), communication, 104; see also
4th
with the pc after D of P interview, 307 London
ACC Lectures, Vol. 11-270; C&MSCS
coach, defn., a student who is standing in the role of
aberration, earliest button susceptible of aber
"pc", 42, 462 ration was apparently
communication, 518
blows occur when coach gives too few wins, 116
aberration is caused by cut ~ with the mass,
co-audit(ing), remedy of, 147
ARC BreakStraight Wire isvery useful inhusband-
acknowledgement, its general use is putting a
wife co-auditing teams, 364 period to the
communication cycle, 349, 350
formula, 475 be, do and have, 92
HAS Co-Audit, 380, 449, 498, 524, 527 breaking a solid
communication line, 140
allowed process, 469 character of person,
determining by observing his
Comm Course and ~ [1959], 456; see also
intent concerning communication, 105
Communication Course common denominator of ~
and aberration, 28
Course [1959], 451 communication ability proceeds
from control, 24
finding terminals, 513 Communication-Control-
Havingness; see CCH
how to run a co-audit, 452 consequences of cut
communication, 148
Overt-Withhold Straight Wire better than control
+ duplication = communication, 248, 355
Comm Process on HAS Co-Audit, 550 duplicative
factors of, 355
processes, 439, 498, 550 first discoverable
ability of a pc is ~, 5
terminals, one of most effective light terminals
havingness drop and communication, 138,177
and one of best Comm Processes particularly
how to communicate to a group, 336
for HAS Co-Audit is a body part, 519 idea
that communication could be harmful, 518
untrained person can go release on, 444
inhibited communication, 466
6th London ACC tapes tell how to run an HAS
intention communicates, 338
Co-Audit Course, 474 is-ness and
communication, 146
PE Co-Audit process, 552 is raised by holding things
in, 231, 232
retain co-audit pc's interest in case, 538, 550 misuse
and withhold of ~ is aberrative, 518
student intensives and co-auditing processes, 75 OCA/APA
drop in comm level caused by double
urgent change in all co-audit courses [1959], 551
acknowledgement by auditor, 334
Code, Auditor's; see Auditor's Code parts of communication, 5
Code of a Scientologist [1957], 1; see also C&MSCS persuasion
and ~, differences between, 82
Scientologist operates within the boundaries of the
point past which communication is bad and short
Auditor's Code and ~, 281 of which lack of
communication is bad, 177
cognition, defn. unknown confronting or not con- preclear is
as well as he can originate a ~, 370
fronting, when uncovered, gives us the phenom-
Processes; see Communication Processes
enon of cognition, 311 rehabilitation of
communication, 93
master cognition, "I knew it all the time", 88
relationship to obsessive games condition, 104
Training 13, Fishing a Cognition, 73, 240 sound in
communication, 138
colds and psychosomatics, process to cure, 246 success level
of a person is his ~ level, 92
command(s), tends to as-is mass, 138
anaten ensues when one direction of command is terminal
is a live mass or something that is capable
run too long, 220 of causing, receiving or
relaying ~,1 14, 164
before auditor gives them, he makes certain he has third
dynamic activity, highest level of, and ear
pc's attention on him again and off last ques-
liest instant of it is and was communication,
tion, 296 518
clearingcommands, [1957] 122, [1958] 298,301, third
dynamic, how it violates the ~ formula,
[1959] 430 336
mis-acknowledgement is only and always a failure to a
specific individual, 336
to end the cycle of a command, 543 two-way comm,
122, 136; see also Dianetics '55!
modification of auditing question for process that as
a process, 160,179
dives backtrack fast, 529 does not mean
invalidative or evaluative ques
no auditing command must depend upon any
tions or comments by auditor,484
other auditing command or it won't be in pres-
is not conversation, it is a highly specialized
ent time, 354, 355, 384 thing,
122,161,181
repeating commands, theory of, 355 must remain
"two-way", 196
Tone 40, giving a command and just knowing that
one-way communication as-ises havingness,
it will be executed despite any contrary appear-
two-way doesn't and actually raises the tone
ances, 240 of pc, 195
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
communicate(s), communication (cont.) confession, 551
two-way comm (cont.) confessions and IQ, 201
two ways to err: permit two-way comm to a
confront(ing), confrontingness, 100, 116, 211, 318;
point where the pc's havingness is injured;
see also TR 0
chop communication to such a degree that ability
to ~ the future without restimulation, 488
havingness is injured, 157 Affinity Process, "What
would you like to con
what it consists of, 125 front?", 463
war, how it can come about by lack of ~, 423 auditing
restores confidence in confronting and
withhold ~, ability to, advances IQ, 201 undoes
necessity to confront, 311
withholds and communication, 93, 201 Confrontingness
Scale, 489; see also Scn 0-8
with hurtful things, 104 Confrontingness Scale of
Reality, 447
communication bridge, what it is, 373, 536 is a parallel
to Responsibility Scale, 446
Communication Course, [1957] 58, [1958] 335, Confront Scale is
the scale of disintegrating reality,
451, [1959] 456;seealsoCo-Audit,HAS 404
ARC in Comm Course, 242 drama, 213
HAS Comm Course, 449, 451, 456, 527 eyesight and
confronting, 37
Communication Process(es), 5 first step of handling anything is
gaining ability to
defn, any process which places pc at cause and
face it, 113
uses communication as the principal command "If you
can't stand it, confront it", 100
phrase [1959], 503 incidents, end goal of running
incidents is increas
assists for PT location and on body by ~, 547
ing ability to confront, 419
auditors can be smoothed out as cases by running
irresponsibility and contronting, 96
a ~ on "an auditor" and "a preclear", 505 level,
212
avoid pinning the process in present time, 531 mental
image pictures and ~, 114, 447; see also
basic ~, "Recall a time you communicated", 463
mental image pictures
body part run on ~, "From where could you mest clear
has not been through a total ~, 446
communicate to a (name of body part)", 513 not-is,
when a person can confront something, he
cautions regarding Communication Processes, 505 no
longer has to not-is it, 413
Comm Recall Process, 536 obsessive confronting, 319
D.E.I. Scale and ~, 534 preclear's past, how to
increase willingness to con
don't self audit with a ~, 505 front, 489
end phenomena [1959], 504, 513 present time, 96
essentials of use of Communication Processes, 503 rock is
confrontingness on a via, 320
how to run Comm Processes on assessment, 524 survival
represented best by "continuous confront illnesses, process with
Communication Processes if ing" at a process level, 539
illness is in the way of session, 505 survive and ~
are of same order of thing, 539
increases havingness by damping out excessive theta
clears were made by gradually raising their
individuation, 531 confrontingness of mental
image pictures, 445
Locational Communication relieves face pressures things
which are worth confronting, 213
and terror stomachs, 466 unhappiness is inability
to ~ that which is, 431
on Universe: separation process from all universes unknown
~ or not ~, when uncovered, gives us
the thetan is anxious about, 524 the
phenomenon of cognition, 311
restimulative nature of~, 502 work, 214
terminals employed in command should be gen- you have to
be able to hold the position in the
eralized, 503, 513 face of something, 232
terminals to which ~ are addressed must be real Confront
Processes,
terminals never significances only, 503 Alternate
Confront, commands of, 547
use of E-Meter [ 1 959], 504 Body Confronting,
commands and how to run, 319
why pc doesn't do it, 519 standard Confrontingness
Processes, 215
work best on obvious and visible terminals, 531
Subjective Confrontingness, commands and how
Comparable Magnitude, Problems of; see Problems of to run,
319
Comparable Magnitude confused scene, mechanics of taking
over, 262
complexities, postulates go from simplicities to ~, 345 confusion(s),
composed, OCA/APA drop in, cause of, 334 anatomy of
confusion, 14
compulsive outflow, how to stop a, 350 blows off when order is
put in, 378
condition, defn., is a circumstance regarding a mass or how to
handle confusion, 262
terminal, 164 student, why he may experience
somatics and con difference between condition and terminal, 164
fusions, 344
conduct, good conduct-do on]y those things which Connectedness
[process], 97, 317
others can experience, 432 can also be run outside,
191
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
Connectedness [process] (cont.) create, creating, creation, 320; see
also FOT
clears stuck needles, 243, 297 "create" is dynamic
principle of existence in
commands of Connectedness, 297 Scientology as
"survive" was in Dianetics, 539
commands of GP-3, Connectedness, 318 obsessive creation,
539
command with "you" added, 229 reactive bank comes from
obsessive creating, 320
Control Connectedness; see Control Connected- spirit
is source of all creation, 270
ness thetan's answer to being threatened or struck
is to
control version, 294 create, 320
earliest commands of, 190 Create Processes,
is the basic process on association of theta with
Alternate Create, commands of, 547
mest, 163 dangers and advantages, 539
most basic of spotting processes, 189 "Recall creating",
536
used to bolster havingness, 317 creativeness, radiation hits
at, 52
why it works, 189 Creative Processing; see also Mock-up
Processes
conscience, bad, 559 commands and running, 205
Consequences of Solutions [process] ,1 1 needle consistently
out of pace with supposed
considerations and postulates, 139 command execution,
cause of, 206
considerations, principles and axioms of Scientology criminals,
234
are ~ agreed upon and from which stem this critical,
OCA/APA: critical;see OCA/APA
universe and livingness, 344 critical, "Recall being
critical" "Recall withholding
consultant, defn., an instructor who is on duty
criticism" [process], 532
sporadically or from time to time but not curiosity,
533
routinely in any one place, 42, 462 curriculum, how to
write a, 464
Contactby Duplication;see CCH 7 cycle of action, Axiom 10 becomes
confused by
control, 9, 204; see also Start-Change-Stop; thetan with
~, 539
C&MSCS cycling action of pc into the past, 70
acknowledgement is a control factor, 349
body control comes before control of thinking
ness,479 D
body, control of by pc, 184, 240, 267
by ARC is taught in Comm Course, 242 dating incidents with E-
Meter, 389; see also E-Meter
by Tone 40 is taught in Upper Indoc, 242 datum, data; see
also knowledge
children, using good 8-C on, 82, 110 course creates a
beingness, not imparts data, 464
communication ability proceeds from control, 24
education is the process of placing data in recalls
Communication-Control-Havingness; see CCHs of
another, 28
communication is reached by control plus dupli-
evaluationofdata,421
cation, 248, 355 evaluation of importance of data in
philosophy,
facsimiles are control mechanisms, 231 346
factors available to the auditor, 23 evaluation of
importance of datum is often more
Find the Auditor is part of Control, 204
important than the datum itself, 345
mind (attention), control of, 267 is as valuable as it has
been evaluated, 422
parts of control, 6 observe for yourself that presented
data exist and
person, control of, 267 are true, 422, 425
preclear, control of, 204 power of choice over data, 21
situation, how to control, 261 power of Scientology is
that it, by stressing single,
thinkingness, control of, 119, 255, 267 simple
truths, eliminates oceans of mere data,
whole track, control of, 454 346
8-C, good and bad, 212 prime datum, no such thing; there
must be two
8-C on students, 90 data since datum is of no use
unless it can be
Control Connectedness, 205 ~ evaluated by datum of similar
magnitude, 422
Control Processes, characteristic, purpose, stable stable datum,
60
datum of, 479 thinking consists of comparing a
particular datum
Control Trio, 119 with physical universe as it is
known and ob
commands, 111, 278 served, 424
how to run, 278, 279 utilization of data and education,
30
is a three-stage process on a heavy spotting Dear Alice, Part A;
see TR I
control, 190 Dear Alice, Part B; see TR 2
conversation is not two-way comm, 161 death, dead, 223
correspondence courses, frailties of, 331 child is suffering
from death shock, 109
course; see training exteriorization and death, 225
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
death, dead (cont.) disseminate Scientology without telling what it
is,
handling of dead bodies, 227 476
havingness and death, 225 dissemination, use of "learning
rate" in, 20
injury or death (or harmful communication), basic
dissemination, you cannot communicate in 25 min
postulate of, is best summed up by "victim", utes
something which took 25 years to develop,
518 106
is a forgettingness, 223 do, doingness,
is just one of varied forms of game of victim, 518 be, do,
have triangle used to establish goals real to
isn't a game anymore, 518 pc, 279
mind, partial death of, 224 Havingness Scale consists of
the doingnesses with
of the body, 224 regard to mass, 141
past deaths of famous historical figures, 411
importance of willingness to do, 80
prenatals, birth, conception and sexual incident problem
is not a condition or a terminal, it is a
are a bounce from a death, 411 "how" or
"whether"; it is a doingness not a
what happens after, 226 person, 315
what it is, 224 Doctors of Scientology, 102
defend, don't protect and defend, 147 D of P, abbreviation for
Director of Processing, 334;
defense, consequences of, 147 see also Director of
Processing
definition, how to handle mis-definition on vital D of T; see
Director of Training
words, 301, 321 double acknowledgement; see
acknowledgement,
D.E.I. Scale, double
Comm Processes and D.E.I. Scale, 534 dramatization of past
experience, inability to restrain
evolution ofthe D.E.I. Scale, 533 ~ occurs when one
has decided he can do
on beingness, 271 nothing about such an
experience; thereafter he
stealing and D.E.I. Scale, 257 is the effect of
all similar pictures, 359
delivery, how to run out, 361 dramatized, difference between
restimulation being ~
departures, sudden and relatively unexplained, 557 and an
origination, 371
desire, D.E.I. Scale, 533 dub-in is a continuous characteristic of
person in a
destroy, help and destroy are opposite ends of the single
lifetime and may not be present in the
same string, 252 ensuing lifetime, 398
destroy, psychiatrist thinks ~ is same as help, 252; dummy
auditing; see also TRs
see also suppressive person [in full index] five
dummy auditing processes, 384
destruction, betrayal is help turned to ~, 219 Step Two:
Acknowledgement, 349
Dianetics; see also DMSMH Step Three: Duplication, 3 54
Axioms of; seeAxioms & Logics Step Four: Handling
Originations, 370
basic difference between Dianetics and Scien- duplicate,
duplication, duplicative,
tology, 270 auditor must be able to duplicate,
355
branch of Scientology which deals with mental
communication, duplicative factors of, 355
anatomy, 470 control + duplication =
communication, 248, 355
dichotomy, admiration and critical are a ~, 245 Dummy
Auditing-Step Three: Duplication, 354
Director of Processing, grounds on which to refuse or not-is
is a mechanism to prevent duplication, 435
release a pc, 51 Training 3, Duplicative Question, 62
Director of Processing indicates the processes to be Duplication
Processes, 7
used by auditors on pcs [1959], 381; see also
Duplication Processes, characteristic, purpose, stable
case supervisor [in full index] datum, 479
Director of Training, duress, to keep chaos from exploding, 212
goal of training from viewpoint of ~, 345 dwindling spiral,
the idea of "worse than" is the
grounds on which to refuse a student already whole
of~, 178
registered or to send student to Examiner, 51
dynamic(s),
instructors and ~ responsible for any future failure
Assessment, 407
student may have in processing pcs, 50 Clear, you
cannot stay Clear unless you solve
should never instruct Academy, 264 things by the
greatest good for the greatest
Dir of Procu, abbreviation for Director of Procure-
number of dynamics, 237
ment, 334 Know to Mystery and Dynarnic scouting,
484
disappearances, sudden, stay hung in the bank, 137 represent
list for 8 dynamics, 407
disconnection from present time, 97 1st dynamic process, 367
disease, mechanism of, 147 3rd dynamic,
diseases, venereal, 147 highest level of and earliest
instant of ~ activity
disorder, ARC break is a disorder, 378 is and
was communication, 518
dispatch lines, fast ~ handle awkward situations, 521
how it violates the communication formula, 336
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
dynamic(s), 3rd dynamic (cont.) E-Meter(s),
how we work on the third dynamic, 251 dating
incidents with E-Meter, 389
riot is simply a psychosomatic momentary needle
rising steadily is symptom of anabandoned
injury or traumatic condition on the ~, 261
terminal, 504
5th dynamic, application of Scientology to the ~, needle
that is stuck will run to loose if proper flow
522 direction is selected, 220
Dynamic Straight Wire, 402, 414, 433 use of E-Meter [1959],
504
analysis for, 433 valences, E-Meters don't register
well on, 284
cleverly done, takes a case apart; starts almost any
Emotional Tone Scale expanded, 459; see also Tone
case, 453 Scale
commands and how to run, 402, 407, 408 enemies of the pc, run
Help on, 268
how to do a diagnosis on ~-, 438 enforce, D.E.I. Scale, 533
looking for terminals pc gives you which don't Enforced
Nothingness, CCH 88, increases havingness,
belong on that dynamic at all, 433 246
never run a terminal that is sensible, 438 engram(s),
trying to undo identification, 434 by keying them out
one becomes free of them,
446
commands [1959],453
E difference between engrams and
incidents, 453
how to run, [1958], 352
education, 28 impact engrams, why people hang on to, 230
aberration and ~ closely associated, 29 locating the
engram [1958], 352
aberration in education, 1 B mest clear is freedom
from keyed-in engrams, 375
and utilization, 30 necessary to resolve the case, 352
basic science of education, 17 overt and motivator
engrams, 414, 453
can show a person he can be at effect without running
[1959],403,409,410,411
liability, 160, 180 old Dianetic cases or
restarted cases, 419
child education, 30 once you have found an
incident stay on it
is process of placing data in recalls of another, 28
until it is flat, 403
logics of education, 345 Reality Scale and engram
running, 405
more esoteric and difficult subject is made, less
reassessing on meter when charge on first item
student will be able to handle subject, 114
dissipated, results of, 410
necessities of education, 29 thing that keeps
individuals from running en offbreed and peculiar schools, successes
of, 31 grams adequately is R factor, 404
Scientology and ~, difference between, 22 theta clear
has no obsessive engrams; can put back
loppy education can work, 31 at will his
reactive bank or any engram in it and
effect(s); see also cause blow it off again at a glance,
376
auditing is teaching pc that he can be at cause enough and
not enough, 211
without having to be because he doesn't dare be
environment, all that processing requires is that you
at effect, 160,180 obtain a better reality
on your ~ and all its
bridge between cause point and effect point on
drills are aimed at this, 514
any subject, 359 environment, being dangerous toward
environment,
don't process pc at effect point, 518 146
high games condition is no effect on self, total equal, men
are not, 274
effect on others, 136 escape, 133
Lie about Effect [process], 10 from this universe , 1 34
neurotic and psychotic, relationship to effect, ethical
auditing, 391, 392
169 ethical standards in America, 391
psychology is a body of practice devoted to crea- evaluate,
evaluated, evaluation,
tion of any effect on living forms, 499 auditor
evaluation makes OCA/APA drop in re
true overt act is unintended bad effect; not de-
sponsibility, 334
served by recipient, 465 child is dependent on
exterior evaluation, 166
Effort Processing and eyesight, 36 data is your data only so
long as you have eval
electric shock, 15 uated it, 422
Tone 40 is for unconscious, psycho, non-commu-
identification is inability to ~ differences in time,
nicative, electric shock case pc, 242
location, form, composition or importance, 393
electronic structure around body, 151 importances, bring about
the ability to evaluate
emergency, defn., something that requires a necessity
importances by Not-ls Straight Wire, 489
level, 214 intelligence and judgment are measured by
ability
how to help in an emergency, 261 to evaluate
relative importances, 393
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
evaluate, evaluated, evaluation (cont.) eyes, eyesight (cont.)
knowledge, person who accepts it without ques-
Havingness and eyesight, 37, 38
tioning it and evaluating it is demonstrating
how eyes function, 36
himself to be in apathy toward that sphere of
thetan doesn't look through his eyeballs, 36
knowledge, 424
logic, ability to evaluate importances and unim
portances is the highest faculty of logic, 393
F
necessity to have evaluation by others, 166
of data, 421, 422 facsimile(s); see also mental image
pictures
of importance of data in philosophy, 316 are control
mechanisms 231
of importance of datum is often more important degrees
of pc reality on, 390
than the datum itself, 345 imposes itself on body
anchor points, 151
on a cause basis, 166 interchange of, 231
evil and good, 166 mest clear is clear in terms of
facsimiles, 175
evil, not taking responsibility ~or, 167 necessity for
pictures, 230
exhaustion, "Recall Exhaustion" [process], 536 preclear,
when you improve ability of pc to make
experience, experienced and see a picture you also
inadvertently im-
bad acts are those acts which cannot be easily
prove every picture in the bank including
experienced at the target end, 432 engrams,
539
good conduct-do only those things which others Factual
Havingness, 307, 486
can experience, 432 commands, 318
idea is not to prove one can experience but to failed case,
defn, a case in which thought can always
regain the ability to experience which is only
be overpowered by mest, 118
done in processing, 432 faith, Scientology demands no
belief or faith and thus
inability to restrain dramatization of past experi-
is not in conflict with faith, 514
ence occurs when one has decided he can do familiarity
or familiarization permits intelligence to
nothing about such an experience; thereafter he
manifest, 428
is the effect of all similar pictures, 359 field(s),
defn., any thing interposing between pc
no reason to withhold own actions or regret them
(thetan) and something he wishes to see,
if one's own actions are easily ~ by others, 431
whether mest or mock-up, 209
Past and Future Experience [process], 403, 408, are
black, grey, purple, any substance, or invisible,
409 209
Re-experience and Experience Process, 488 black, 191,
256
teaches you never to do anything the second time, clean-up
of, 205
356 clearing of, 209, 210
what it is, 408 invisible, 70,191, 256
experimental auditing and standard techniques, 282 is a self-
protective or destructive device, 209
Extension Course, 331, 357 is one or more incidents, 210
exteriorize(s), exteriorization, 118, 149 process to
vanquish, 246
defn., the phenomenon of being in a position of rules of
fields, 209
space dependent on only one's consideration, Step 6,
totally clear up a field before running, 207
able to view from that space, bodies and the testing
for fields, 209
room, as it is, 149 field auditor, rights of, 41
ability to, what it depends on, 149 fifth dynamic; see
dynamic, 5th
compulsive, 186 Fight the Wall, commands and how to run, 9
death and exteriorization, 225 figure-figure,
difficulty of, reason for, 280 case is somebody who will
not ever admit having
loss and exteriorization, 280, 324 done
something or anything to anybody, 519
one never changes the process just because some- case not-
ising by ~, result of handling, 405
body compulsively exteriorizes, 186 mechanism
about a situation, 404
Opening Procedure by Duplication will ~, 395 preclear who
figure-figures his answers, 516
point of exteriorization, 156, 176 Find a Spot, commands and
how to run, 8
process, 149 Find the Auditor is part of Control, 204
extraversion-introversion process, Locational, Body first aid
always precedes an assist, 262
and Room, 394 first dynamic; see dynamic, 1 st
eyes, eyesight, 118, 121 fixation, how to locate and unfix, 428
bad eyesight, 89 flip-flopping, defn, a process by which the
pc's ex confronting and eyesight, 37 cess motion
is taken off, 184
Effort Processing and eyesight, 36 flow, E-Meter needle that
is stuck will run to loose if
glasses and eyesight, 36 proper flow direction is
selected, 220
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
flows, help follows laws of flows, not terminals, 220; game(s),
see also Scientology 8-80 conditions, 104
force, "What force would it be all right to use?" [pro-
best processes are those which fastest convert
cess], 545 unknowing games conditions to
knowing
forget, forgetting(ness), 245 games conditions, 9
bad memory, specific process for, Forgetting run no-
games condition, 15
in brackets, 245 one is in an obsessive games
condition when
death is a forgettingness, 223 one
obsessively cuts everyone else's commu how one mechanically forgets,
11 nication, 104
mechanism, 228 withhold is a games condition on
communi
Objective Forgettingness [learning process], 31
cation, 201
spiritual being, forgettingness of, 224 death isn't a
game anymore, 518
Forgetting, 6-way bracket [process], 245 hidden game, pc is
compulsively playing, 196
formal auditing; see auditing, formal of life, 102
Formula 10, addition to, 478 problem is a game, 196
Formula 10, an approach to OT, 472, 474 Gautama Sid&artha, 217
franchise(s), GE; see genetic entity
exchanging types of franchises, 506 General Help bracket
[process], 321
HCO HAS Co-Audit Franchise, 506 General Overts, commands of,
43 5
HCO Processing Franchise, 506 genetic entity, defn.,
something that mocks up
holders, 512 bodies, 226
should send 10% to HCO WW, 507 genetic line, defn., a
series of mocked-up automatici special information for, 492
ties which produce according to a certain blue
interim franchise,492 print from the earliest times
of life on this
permanent franchise, 500 planet through until now,
224
Freedom Congress, 76 genetic line, atomic radiation does reverse it,
108
freedom, religion of Scientologist is ~ for all things ghosts and
spirits, don't invalidate, 226
spiritual on all dynamics which means adequate ghosts,
how they come about, 530
discipline and knowledge to keep that ~ "Give me that
hand", Tone 40; see CCH 1
guaranteed, 281 "Give me your hand", Tone 40; see CCH 1
Freud, psychoanalysis developed by Freud in 1894 in glasses and
eyesight, 36
Vienna, Austria, 477 glasses, whole problem of glasses is
the problem of
"From where could you communicate to a body?"
confronting, 37
[process], 472 goal (s),
"From where could you communicate to a (general clearance of,
326
form of terminal)?", run for PTPs, 497 clearing up
a, 124, 327
Full Body Mimicry, 6 gradient scale of processes which will
establish
fundamentals, how to be sure of, 424 goals which are
real to the pc by casual two
future, ability to confront without restimulation, 488
way comm, 279
Future Process, 125 Help and goals, 125
how to establish, 279
necessity to clear, 183
G put pc more in session with
goals, 314
rudiments and goals, 122
gain(s), Goals Process, 123, 279, 326
ability gain, defn., pc's recognition that pc can gold discs,
defn., 36
now do things he could not do before, 428 good and
evil, 166
auditor unhappy about preclear gain, 454 government, defn.,
that body created by the aggre intelligence gain, defn., loss of
restimulation of gate irresponsibility of a people,252
stupidity by reason of attempts to confront or
deterioration of government, 182
experience problems of life; intelligence appears
handling, 106
when stupidity is keyed out or erased; intelli-
insanity of governments, 251
gence is a confronting ability, 428 what made
governments persevere, 211
negative gain, defn., things disappear that have GPs 1-15, 72-
73
been annoying or unwanted, 428 GP-3; see Connectedness
preclear who complains that auditing has no effect gradient
scale, pcs gain on a smooth gradient scale
on him or who makes very slow gains, what to
and do not suddenly become something, 155,
run, 468, 497 175
unstable gain, cause and handling of, 285, 292 gradient
scale, thoroughness of training is achieved on
Galen, 421 a gradient scale, 345
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
Group Auditing, group auditor, 23 HCA/HPA Course, 54
all group auditing is done from tone 40.0, 24 contents
and coverage of [1958], 291
assistant group auditor, 24 curriculum [1957], 26, 55
model processes, 23 examination [1958], 306
reason group auditors vary commands is they're
processes [1957], 5, 111
afraid interest will flag, 24 purpose of, 25
group, how to communicate to a group, 336 training, 40
group recruiting, 379 1959 HCA Course becomes a Clearing
Course, 376
HCA, Hubbard Certified Auditor [1958], 288
HCO Board of Review, travelling, 102
H HCS, Hubbard Clearing Scientologist
[1958], 288
Course, 287
Hand Contact Mimicry, 5,140 grade of, 286
whys and wherefores of, 136 head, anchor points and pain in the
head, 98
Hand Mimicry, gradient scale of spaces, 6 healing, mental, 476
Hand Mimicry, Training 5, 63 hell(s),
Hand Space Mimicry; see CCH 3 a total myth and vicious lie,
226
happy, how to be, 431 man-made hells, 133
Harvey, 421 Hello and Okay [process], 136, 137
HAS Co-Audit; see Co-Audit, HAS commands, 235
HAS Comm Course; see Communication Course, HAS run on
terminal to improve reality on it, 243
HAS, Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist [1958], 288 toothache,
"Hello and Okay" Process on, 136
HASI, Hubbard Association of Scientologists Inter- Help, 239, 320; see
also CCH Ob; clear the auditor
national, 470, 471 betrayal is help turned to
destruction, 219
have, having, havingness, defn., to be able to touch or
bracket(s),
permeate or to direct the disposition of, 278
general Help bracket, 321
ARC, loss of, is more important than loss of hav- on
the rock, 320
ingness, 157 Two-way Help bracket, 301,
468, 497
ARC, repair of, restores havingness, 157, 177 5-
or 9-way bracket, 294
be, do, have triangle used to establish goals real to
9-way bracket, 219, 297
pc, 279 destroy and help are opposite ends of the
same
commands, 307 string, 252
Comm Process increases havingness by damping follows laws
of flows not terminals, 220; see also
out excessive individuation, 531 Scientology 8-
80
communication runs down havingness, 138 general Help
and Step 6, 302
Connectedness used to bolster havingness, 317 goals
and help, 125
death and havingness, 225 is necessary on a case that is
hung up, 239
drop on critical on OCA/APA means ~ drop, 334 on an
item, 298
dropped ~ and ARC breaks, how to distinguish on enemies of
pc, 268
between, 157,177 psychiatrist thinks destroy is the
same as help,
dropped havingness and communication, 177 252; see
also suppressive person [in full index]
Enforced Nothingness, CCH 88, increases ~, 246 PT
problem, if it doesn't free on Help it is under
Factual Havingness; see Factual Havingness pinned
by a similar earlier problem, 268
loss of havingness, pc will agitate or go anaten and
scouting and running Help, 297
tend to be upset, 187 Step 6 and Help do not work on
low level cases,
one-way communication as-ises havingness, two-
322
way doesn't and actually raises tone of pc, 195
Training 13, 122
perception, relationship to havingness, 18, 37, 38 valence
splitting is most reliably done by running
postulate which underlies ~ is "enough", 88 Help in
brackets on the valence, 285, 292
problems, havingness is the clue to problems, 117 Waste
Help [process] violates rule of terminals-
PTP, threat to ~, how to handle, 195,196 run
temminals, not conditions, 285, 292
remedy havingness objectively, 486 HGC allowed processes
[1959], 381, 436, 497
Subjective Havingness; see Subjective Havingness HGC, purpose
of, 25
Trio, ~ of an objective variety, 190; see also Trio HGS,
Hubbard Graduate Scientologist [1958], 288
two-way comm and havingness, 157 High School Indoctrination;
see TR 7
waste and have, 141, 275 "Hold it still" [process], 255
Havingness Processes, 7 commands and how to run, 7
Havingness Scale, defn., consists of the doingnesses Keep it
from going away-Hold it still-Make it
with regard to mass, 141 more solid-on two
objects, 187
H-bomb, 45; see also All About Radiation solves motion and
no motion, 233
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
HPA/HCA; see HCA/HPA income tax; see tax, income
Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist; see HAS Individuality [process],
1 0
Hubbard Association of Scientologists International;
individuation,obsessive,531
see HASI Indoc Instructor, purpose of, 25
Hubbard Certified Auditor; see HCA indoctrination,
Hubbard Clearing Scientologist; see HCS Course, goal of, 16
Hubbard Graduate Scientologist; see HGS Five Levels of, 26, 384
Hubbard('s), L. Ron and Procedure CCH, 128
career of, 470 High School Indoctrination; see TR 7
lecturing on writing, 80 Upper Indoctrination Course
[1957], 58
LRH session, Clearing by Valences, 276 industrial technology vs.
mental technology, 221
medical career in past life, 448 inflow and outflow, prevention
of, 146
purpose, 252 inflow, "Keep it from going away" solves both
out
writer in New York, 96 flow and inflow, 233
human spirit; see thetan inhibit, D.E.I. Scale, 533
husband and wife, why they quarrel, 212, 364 injured children, what to
run, 526
hydrogen bomb, 45; see also All About Radiation injuries, assist
does not attempt to cure ~ requiring
hypnotism, authoritarianism is little more than a medical
aid, 264
form of hypnotism, 424 injury, basic postulate of, is
best summed up by
hysteria and radiation, 44 "victim", 518
insanity,
of governments, 251
I pain, misemotion, unconsciousness,
insanity all
result from causing things others
could not
ideas, Rising Scale Processing is run when the pc can
experience easily, 432
change icleas, 144 psychiatrist sees in every
ability an insanity, 170
identification, 418, defn, is inability to evaluate dif-
psychoanalysis says all insanity derives from love,
ferences in time, location, form, composition or
170
importance, 393 in session; see session, in session
undo identification by Dynamic Straightwire, 434 instructor,
defn., one who has regular classes and who
identity, identities; see also valences is assigned to
places at specific times, 42, 462;
adoption of, that cannot be handled, 454 see also
Course Supervisor [in full index;; train Assigning Identity
[learning process], 3 1 ing
past identities, dramatizing, 555 may refuse to train or
release a student, 51
rock is a basic shift of identity, 411 softness, error of,
90
ill, illness, stable data for, 50, 112
acutely, what to run, 502 intelligence,
formula for creating, 147 decreases when attention is
fixed, 428
pc, what to run, 468, 497 familiarity or familiarization
permits intelligence
person becomes ill if prevented from outflowing, 146 to
manifest, 428
process with Communication Processes if illness is
increasing ability to reach and withdraw increases
in the way of session, 505 intelligence, 428
impact engrams, why people hang on to, 230 intelligence gain,
defn., loss of restimulation of
implants, between-life, 389 stupidity by reason of
attempts to confront or
importances, evaluation of; see evaluation experience
problems of life; intelligence appears
incident(s), when stupidity is keyed out or
erased; intelli
confront, "What part of that incident can you con-
gence is a confronting ability, 428
front?" [process], 410 judgment and ~ are
measured by ability to evalu
dating incidents with E-Meter, 389 ate relative
importances, 393
difference between engrams and incidents, 453
quotient, defn, ability to withhold or give out a
engram running, once you have found an incident
datum on a self-determined basis, 118
stay on it until it is flat, 403 ability to
withhold communication advances
field is one or more incidents, 210 IQ, 201
mind is a mechanism for overcoming the lack of ~,
changes produced by Book Mimicry, 247
lack of experience in present time, 151
change, theory behind, 201
most scarce tend to stick hardest, 151 confessions
and IQ, 201
overts, if you can get somebody to take the overts
difference between personality and IQ, 200
out of any ~ the ~ will tend to vanish, 551
factors behind the handling of IQ, 199
running incidents, 419 "Recall a mystery", method of
raising IQ, 536
sexual incident is a bounce from a death, 411 test,
taken several times, aspect of, 199
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
intention communicates, 338
intention of pc is easy to overwhelm, 183
L
intention, problem is a conflict arising from two op
posing intentions,488 language of a subject, establish
communication by
interest, D.E.I. Scale, 533 teaching, 464
interesting, being interesting in auditing, 355 learning isn't
memorizing, 424
Interim Franchise, 492 learning lag and process lag, 18
invalidate, cases that self-invalidate between sessions, Learning
Processes, five, 31
how to handle, 504 learning rate, 17, 20, defn., the
rate one will permit
invalidate pc, "I'll repeat the auditing command" has
ideas to inflow, 28
been used to, 441 aberration and ~, relationship
between, 15
Invent a Problem [process], 383 consequences, 20
"Invent something worse than (terminal)" [process],
dissemination, use of "learning rate" in, 20, 21
158, 367 governs reading time, 22
invisible case, cannot see mock-ups, how to crack, increasing ~
by drill usually only increases famili
400 arity and automaticity, 22
invisible field, 70, 1 91, 256 learning lag and learning
rate, 1 9, 20
IQ; see intelligence quotient learn, willingness to, 79
irresponsibility and confronting, 96 lesson, learning the wrong, 18
irresponsibility of great magnitude, when a person levels of auditors
and levels of processes [1957], 84
won't own up to his overts, 442 lie reaction, if pc reads
high on tone arm, gets incon
is-ness and communication, 146 sistent lie reaction, use
"What have you had to
be responsible for?", 297
life,
J auditing skill is a discipline
in living and a know how of the
parts of life, 236
Justinian first great Christian emperor 211 game of life, 102
juvenile delinquent, 113 life vs. life, no liability; life
via mest vs. life, some
liability; life vs. mest, total
liability, 174
running away from, 115
K why Scientology is senior to
life, 237
line, establish line so pc can become aware of
auditor,
140
"keeping things from going away" is a basic mechan- lines and
terminals, 140
ism which guards against loss, 230 lines and
terminals, Reality Scale, 139
"keeping things from going away" is ~bility which
lives,past;seepastlives
gradually cultivates ability of thetan to remain living,
two rules for happy, 431
where he is, 232 Locational, Body and Room, an
extraversion-intro"Keep it from going away" [process], 255
version process, commands of, 394
as assist, 263, 264 Locational, commands and how to run, 6
commands and how to run, 7 Locational Communication [process],
466
solves both outflow and inflow, 233 relieves face
pressures and terror stomachs, 466
Keep it from going away-E~old it still-Make it more Locational,
if turns on a somatic it must be run
solid-on two objects, 187 until ~ no longer
turns on somatics, 192
key words, clear, 301 Locational Processing, 394; see also TR 10
knowing causability, degree of, 160,180 an attention process,
commands of, 394
knowing in the fullest sense of the word, Scientology as an
assist, 260
is~ 281 Problems of Comparable or Incomparable
Magni
knowledge isn't recalling, 30; see also data tude and ~,
which to run, 325
knowledge, person who accepts it without question- to bring the
pc up to present time, 239
ing it and evaluating it is demonstrating himself to
handle problems, 122
to be in apathy toward that sphere of knowl- Location by
Contact, CCH 5, 67
edge, 424 location can restimulate, 227
Know Mystery Recall Processes, 536 Location-Control Processes, 6
Know to Mystery and Dynamic scouting,484 logic, ability to
evaluate importances and unim
Know to Mystery Scale, assessments of a case on
portances is the highest faculty of logic, 393
lower rungs of processing using, 460 logics; see Axioms
& Logics
Know to Mystery Scale expanded, 460 logics of education, 345
Know to Mystery Straight Wire for extreme cases, "Look around here
and tell me something you could
460 do" [test process], 182
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
"Look at me. Who am I?" [process], 5, 188 mental,
"Look at my fingers" [assist process], 260 healing, 476
loss, 120 machinery is made, why, 230
exteriorization and loss, 280, 324 research, Russian,
537
"keeping things from going away" is a basic technology
vs. industrial technology, 221
mechanism which guards againstloss, 230 mental image
pictures, defn., are only de-solidified
prevents pc from conceiving a static; he associates
present times, 34; see also facsimiles
a static with loss, 324 case, how it behaves as
we raise confrontingness
"Recall a moment of loss" [process], 120, 325
on, 447
why it is held on to, 137 confronting and, 114
love, psychoanalysis says all insanity derives from may be
the mind's or the body's; body carries
love, 170 around ~ and thetan does the same
and these
LRH; see Hubbard, L. Ron two combine to forrn the mind,
224
mind is that structure of ~ and machinery
on
which the pc is depending for his
opinions and
M ideas, 150
pc is creating any he sees, 210
machinery, pc operating on, 150,182 picture is memory on a
via, 375
madness is compounded of disarranged abilities, 170 put pc
at cause with regard to, 487
"Make it alittle more solid" [process], 255 reactive mind's
anatomy is concerned with ~
Keep it from going away-Hold it still-Make it
ordinarily unseen by person which nevertheless
more solid-on two objects, 187 dictate his
illnesses and responses, 269
man('s), significance vs. mechanics of, 32
contest with the machine age, 221 theta clears were made by
gradually raising their
inhumanity to man; see All About Radiation
confrontingness of ~, 445
is a human spirit which is enwrapped, more or less, mest,
mest universe,
in a mind, which is in a body, 223 body is an
identifying form or non-identifiable
parts of man: thetan, mind, body, 129, 149, 480
form to facilitate control, communication and
real enemies; see All About Radiation havingness
for thetan in existence in ~, 480
manic motion, cure for pc who is in, 248 Connectedness is
the basic process on association
marital quarrels, cause of, 364 of theta with mest, 163
mass (es), creation of mest, 189
aberration is caused by cut communication with failed
case is a case in which thought can always be
the mass, remedy of, 147 overpowered by
mest, 118
are masses, they are not particles, 164 life vs.
life, no liability; life via mest vs. life, some
are something that are shed from a thetan by
liability;life vs. mest, total liability, 174
mock-up, and particles are something that are
most aberrative thing on case is association with
shed from masses, 165 mest, 189
body is a mass, a solid terminal, 240 pc versus mest,
Step Five of Clear Procedure, 189
communication tends to as-is mass, 138 physical universe
undercuts the body, 129
condition is a circumstance regarding a mass or thetan
trapped in, 530
terminal, 164 mest clear; see Clear, mest clear
fear of seeing is fear of mass, 209 Mimicry, Full Body,
[process], 6
Havingness Scale consists of doingnesses with Mimicry, Hand
Contact; see Hand Contact Mimicry
regard to mass, 141 mind, 530; see also reactive mind
vanishment of, 139 defn, that structure of mental image
pictures and
mechanics vs. significance of mental image picture,
machinery on which pc is depending for his
32 opinions and ideas, 150
medical attention, assist is not a substitute for, 264 defn,
accumulation of recorded knowns and un
medical ethics, A.M.A.'s proposed principles of, 2 knowns
and their interaction, 480
Melbourne 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 [processes], 547 association-
differentiation are the two principles
memory, memorizing, of the mind, 150
learning isn't memorizing, 424 body, can't change
without changing mind, 151
of past existences, restoration of, 224; see also control
of, 267
past lives desires about new or different states of
mind,
shut-off of memory actually occurs with pick-up
clearing up, 302
of new body, 226 is a bridge between spirit and body,
224
specific process for a bad ~ is Forgetting run in is a
mechanism for overcoming the lack of
brackets, 245 incidents, lack of experience
in present time,
why it is shut off, 224 151
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
mind (cont.) necessity level (cont.)
man is a human spirit which is enwrapped, more or
emergency is something that requires a ~, 214
less, in a mind, which is in a body, 223 needle, E-
Meter; see E-Meter needle
partial death of, 224 nervous-depressed on OCA/APA, 118
parts of man: thetan, mind, body, 129, 223 nervous is toughest
point to raise on a graph, how it is
Scientology is only full study in field of mind
done, 334
developed in Twentieth Century, 477 neurosis, defn.,
unknowing and unwilling effect, 169
structure of, 150 psychosis and~, difference between,
169
thetan is misowning the mind in which he is neurotic, defn.,
the subject of one ormore unknown
trapped, 530 causes to which he is
unwilling effect, but he
minister assists the spirit to confront physical diffi-
can still function to some degree, 169
culties which can then be cared for by a no-games
condition, 15;see also game conditions
medical doctor as needful, 259 nomenclature, establish
communication by teaching
ministers, personal counseling for, 200 language of
subject, 464
Mirror Image Hand Mimicry, 6 not-is(ing)(ness),
misacknowledgement is only and always a failure to case ~ by
figure-figure, results of handling, 405
end the cycle of a command, 543 cure of not-isness,
435
misacknowledgement of pc, 308 how to bring under pc's
knowing control and to
mis-definition on vital words, how to handle, 301 reduce
the ~ in pc's bank (Axiom 11), 489
misemotion, pain, unconsciousness, insanity, all result is a
mechanism to prevent duplication, 435
from causing things others could not experience on
case, indicators of, 485
easily, 432 remedy extreme conditions of not-
isness, 486
mis-responsibility, defn, the miscalling of authorship, 98 when a
person can confront something, he no
"Mock up a picture for which you can be totally longer
has to not-is it,413
responsible" [process], 487 Not-Is Straight Wire, commands
of and how to run,
mock-up(s), 390, 403, 412, 435, 489
if a mock-up disappears or flies out of control, Not Know,
Objective, [process], 8
don't red herring after it, just have him mock
up the same item again, 205
invisible case cannot see ~, how to crack, 400
O
masses are something that are shed from a thetan
by mock-up, 165 Objective Forgettingness [learning
process], 31
persistence of, is dependent upon a pc's willingness
Objective Havingness, 7
to let one survive, 209 Objective Not Know, 8
Mock-up Processes, 174, 191; see also Creative Pro- Objective
Processes, characteristic, purpose, stable
cessing datum of, 480
money, button we want flat on everybody in Scien- Objective Show Me,
commands and how to run, 43,
tology, 508 395
money, "From where could you communicate to Objective Solids,
commands, 8
money?" [process], 508 objects, theft of, is really
an effort to steal a se~f, 257,
money, Scientologists who can't stand the sight of, or
271
who can't seem to get pcs are just being a obnosis, 88
victim, 517 observe for yourself that presented data
exist and are
mother, processing a new, 361 true, 425
motion and no motion, solved by "Hold it still", 233 OCA/APA,
motion, flip-flopping is a process by which the pc's
critical, 118
excess motion is taken off, 184 cured by CCH
88, Enforced Nothingness, 246
motion, manic, cure for pc who is in, 248 may be
influenced by Op Pro by Dup, 245
motivator; see also overt-motivator sequence drop in,
ARC Break Straightwire cannot be run on a case
appreciative-lowered reality level, 334
that is motivator hungry, 397 comm level-
double acknowledgement by audi
overt and motivator, magnitude of, 416 tor, 334
muzzled auditing; see auditing, muzzled composed-loss of
auditor, poor CCH 0 in Find
the Auditor, 334
critical-havingness drop, 334
N responsibility from
former week-auditor eval
uation, 334
natives and children, retrograded state of, 109 evaluation
of, with regard to auditing, 118
necessity level, defn., a sudden heightened willingness is a
picture of a self, 257
which untaps a tremendous amount of ability, 214 nervous-
depressed, 118
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
OCA/APA (cont.) orientation, lack of, is being surrounded by things
nervous is toughest point to raise on a graph, how
you cannot understand, 109
it is done, 334 origination(s), 370; see also TR 4
processes to run on pcs with high or low OCA/
arguments caused by failure to handle ~, 371
APA, 117, 381 difference between an origination
and restimula
profile, tion being dramatized, 371
ARC break is only thing that will depress a, 437
how to handle, 371, 372
dropped, cause and handling of, 285, 292, 334 of
a child, 371
how to read profiles on OCA: comparing cur- Tone 40
processes do not handle pc's , 370
rent ~ with previous one, 334 Origins
(Originations) [process], 321
is a picture of a valence, 257, 274 OT; see Operating
Thetan
or case, unchanged after auditing, cause and other-
determined, auditing is the reversing of~ flows
handling of, 276, 285, 292, 334 by
gradient scales, putting pc at cause again,
reduced, cause of, 397 465
reviewing week's profiles, 207 outflow, how to stop a
compulsive, 350
to change an OCA/APA it is necessary to shift outflowing,
person becomes ill if prevented from, 146
selves, 257 outflow, "Keep it from going away" solves
both
Opening Procedure by Duplication, Book and Bottle, inflow
and ~, 233
245, 254, 399 out of sessionness, 304
commands and how to run, 7, 188, 399 out of valence, how to
handle, 11
exteriorization, 395 overt (s), 551
interrupting process is fatal, 396 General Overts,
commands of, 435
low critical on OCA/APA may be influenced by, if you
get somebody to take overts out of any
245 incident the incident will tend to
vanish, 551
old style commands, 111 minimizing an ~ by degrading
those it was done
Tone 40 Book and Bottle is not ~, 395 to, 558
Operating Thetan, 375 motivator and overt engrams, 414
defn., theta clear plus ability to operate function-
motivator and overt, magnitudes of, 416
ally against or with mest and other life forms,
responsibility and overts, 442, 453, 551
155, 175 separation from others by ~ against them,
555
defn., can be at cause knowingly and at will over true
overt act is an unintended bad effect not
life, matter, energy, space and tirne, sub-
deserved by recipient,465
jectively and objectively, 156, 162, 176, 191,
withholds and,
518 checking before leaving org, 558
defn., an educated basic personality, 284 pc's
bank becomes solid to degree that he does
defn, cause over matter, energy, space, time, life
not take responsibility for his ~, 552
and form, 447 people leave because of their
own ~, 557
defn., is knowing and willing cause over all dynam-
why people are sick, 413
ics, 555 Overt Act Straight Wire, commands of and how to
ability, handling time, 98 run, 389
Formula 10 is first formula for, 474 overt-motivator engrams,
453
goal of all processing, 161, 181 overt-motivator sequence, 518;
see also HOM
only goal worthy of auditor's attention, 156, 176 basic
postulate of ~, 359
our actual goal, 155 process for pcs who cannot seem to
plumb an ~,
responsibility must go hand in hand with making
532
an Operating Thetan, 555 there is a villain and a
victim in any ~, 518
Opponents [process], commands, 10 victim is central button of ~,
516
Op Pro by Dup; see Opening Procedure by Dupli- Overt-Withhold
Process, terminal assessment for, 484
cation Overt-Withhold Selected Persons Straight Wire;
see
order, Selected Persons Overt-Withhold
Straight Wire
bringing ~ is keynote of handling any area, 378 Overt-
Withhold Straight Wire, 459
"Bring Order" the motto of HCO, 391 better than Comm
Process on HAS Co-Audit,
confusion blows off when order is put in, 378
550
keynote of a thet2n is order, 262 data on clearing a staff
member after specific
when you start to introduce order into anything
terminals are flat with ~, 525
disorder shows up as the second postulate and
overwhelm(ed)(ings),
blows off, 507, 541 assessment is discovering what
has ~ pc, 465
organizational goals of Scientology [1959], 548 fundamental
difficulty is that something has so
organization and victim button, 517 thoroughly ~ pc
that he is it; other-determin
org board, purposes posted on, 25 ism has become person,
465
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
overwhelm(ed)(ings) (cont.) people, too few and too many, 149
pc's intention is easy to overwhelm, 183 people, why some
are unwilling to clear others, 454
person becomes as aberrated as he is overwhelmed perception,
relationship to havingness, 18, 37
by other-determinisms, 466 personal counseling for
ministers, 200
valences are the sum of ~ of the pc, 274 Personal
Efficiency; see PE
Ownership Processing, 19 personality,
Oxford Capacity Analysis; see GCA/APA basic, 160
capable of all attributes of Clear,
284
P OT is an educated ~, 284
thetan has a ~, 257
pain, difference between personality and IQ, 200
anchor points and pain in the head, 98 split personality,
11
misemotion, unconsciousness, insanity all result person,
control of, 267
from causing things others could not experience
persuasion vs. communication, 82
easily, 432 philosophy, Scientology, how it is
undercutting older
pc in extreme ~, what he can be audited on, 235
philosophy, 345
PTP is pain in body part, what to run, 168 physical universe;
see mest universe
pan-determinism is highest part of Tone Scale, 465 picture; see
facsimile
paper trick, 516, 519 position in space, to maintain, is power, 232;
see also
participation, 319 Scientology 8-80
in session; see session, in, pc participation postulate(s),
postulated, postulating,
particles are something that are shed from masses,
considerations and postulates, 139
165 go from simplicities to complexities, 345
particles, masses are masses, they are not ~,164 injured, one
cannot be injured until he has postu
past, lated that thetans can be injured, 518
ability to re-experience, 488 mest clear can ~, can
still key in engrams, 446
civilizations have vanished, 126 of change is "ought to be-
should be", 88
cycling action of pc into the past, 70 positive
postulating is Tone 40, 240, 386
deaths of famous historical figures, 411 Scientology,
everything in it has been directly and
existences, restoration of memory of, 224; see also
actively ~ by person at some point in past, 345
past lives second postulate, when you start to
introduce
how one mechanically forgets the past, 11 order
into anything disorder shows up as the
identities, dramatizing, 555 second postulate
and blows off, 507
increasing pc's willingness to confront past, 489 succumb,
315
Then and Now Solids makes pc capable not only why a
thetan makes his ~ fail to stick, 465
of contacting and handling present time, but power, defn.,
is contained in the ability to maintain a
also any segment of the past, 34 position in
space, 232; see also Scn 8-80
track valences are preferable to run over present power of
choice,21,81
life valences, 284 preclear(s)('s),
Past and Future Experience, 403,408,409 defn., a precise thing,
part animal, part pictures
past life, past lives, and part God, 161, 181
abilities, 80 ability gain is pc's recognition that pc
can now do
amnesia on, reason for, 225, 555 things he could not
do before, 428
pc is stuck in ~ or has recurring facsimiles of~ ARC
breaks, two conditions under which nc
during processing, handling of, using Then and
violently protests ARC breaks, 303
Now Solids, 266 assessment is discovering what has
overwhelmed
people upset about, 151 pc, 465
responsibility and, 555 assuming aches of another
wishes to be that other;
Pavlov, 172 he is short on beingness, 258, 272
pc; see preclear auditor's relationship to pc; see auditor
PE, body, control of, by pc, 184, 240
Co-Audit process, 552 communication is first discoverable
ability of a pc, 5
Course curriculum, 527 cycling action of pc into the past,
70
Foundation, defn., a programmed drill calculated
difference amongst, 160,180
to introduce people to Scientology and to
difficulties of,
bring their cases up to a high level of reality
bank becomes solid to degree that pc does not
both on Scientology and life, 527
take responsibility for his O/Ws, 552
basic course, 449 fundamental diMculty is
that something has so
personnel, 528 thoroughly
overwhelmed pc that he is it;
Unit, purpose of, 25 other-determinism
has become person, 465
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
preclear(s)('s), difficulties of (cont.) present life valences,
past track valences are prefer getting handled, 454
able to run over ~, 284
how auditing becomes a problem to pc, 195 present time,
who isn't cogniting regularly, reason why and assists
for PT location by Comm Process, 547
handlingof,181 Comm Process, avoid pinning the
process in~,
doesn't dare be effect, 160,180 531
enemies of, 268 confronting present time, 96
figure-figures his answers, 516 disconnection from
present time, 97
gain on a smooth gradient scale and do not sud-
Locational Processing to bring pc up to ~, 239
denly become something, 155,175 mental image
pictures are only de-solidified pres
have service facsimiles so they can be victims, 519
ent times, 34
hidden game, pc is compulsively playing, 196 mind is a
mechanism for overcoming the lack of
"I'll repeat the auditing command" has been used
incidents, lack of experience in ~, 151
to invalidate pc, 441 Recall Processes take pc out
of PT and put him
in session, getting pc; see session, in back in,
536
intention, easy to overwhelm, 183 Then and Now Solids
consists exactly of making
interest in case, 405 pc capable not only of
contacting and handling
is as well as he can originate a communication, 370
~, but also any segment of the past, 34
liability, there is no real liability to a pc in this
time, by a sequence of de-solidifying present time
universe except one: becoming total subject of
one evidently achieves time, 34
mest, 174 present time problem, 168, 315, 488; see also
prob
line, pc aware of, before terminal, 140 lem
mental image pictures; see mental image pictures defn.,
is one which has its elements in the material
misacknowledgement of pc, 308 universe in PT,
which is going on now, and
must be kept at cause as much as possible, 174
which would demand pc's attention to such an
must be permitted to find out what is wrong, 312
extent that he would feel he had better be
OCA/APA and preclear; see OCA/APA doing something
about it rather than be
operating on machinery, 182 audited, 168
originations;see TR4 defn., (problem itself, not just its
terminals, must
participationinsession;seesession,in exist in PT)
something worrying pc so much
present time problem; see present time problem
that he will have a difficult time keeping his
process, real and unreal to pc, difference between,
attention on auditing, 243, 296
182 defn., one that exists in PT, in a real
universe; any
reality level of pc, 312 set of circumstances that
so engages attention
static, what keeps a pc from conceiving a, 120 of
pc that he feels he should be doing some
terminals and preclears; see terminals thing about
it instead of being audited, 488
thinkingness, how to bring under pc's control, 255 flat
when pc doesn't have to do anything about it,
types of preclears and what to run, 390 407
can change ideas, then run Rising Scale Process-
handling, [1957] 162, 192, [1958] 303, 405,
ing, 144 [1959] 525
complains that auditing has no effect on him or
as an intensive, 315
who makes very slow gains, what to run, by
Comparable Magnitude, 8
468, 497 establishing if any, and
handling, 314
hard to audit, in propitiation, does obsessive
how to run PTP [1958], 315
agreement, has hypnotic eyelid flutter,
run only PTP that reads, 315
seems unnatural about talking or not talking,
use "From where could you communicate to a
how to get into session, 315
(general form of terminal)?", 497
ill pc, what to run, 468, 497 use Selected
Persons O/W Straight Wire [1959],
in extreme pain, what he can be audited on,
402
235 using "worse than" [process], 158,
177
stuck in a past life or has recurring facsimiles of
if it doesn't free on Help it is under-pinned by a
past lives during processing, handling of,
similar earlier problem, 268
using Then and Now Solids, 266 is a highly
vital point of pc participation, 158, 177
unwilling to be audited, what to run, 326, 468, is
pain in some member of the body, what to run,
497 168
valence and preclear; see valence is the only thing which
can keep a case from gain
what can he do, 183 ing, 161,181
Prelogics; see Axioms & Logics left in restim, or not located
at all, effect on OCA/
prenatals, birth, conception are a bounce from a APA,
handling of, 276, 285, 334
death, 411 makes it hard for pc to confront session,
311
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
present time problem (cont.) Problems of Comparable/Incomparable
Magnitude
pc generally doesn't know he has one which is nag-
[process] (cont.)
ging him, 158,177 process to run when pc's
communication is too
personnel involved in a ~ must exist right now in
poor to run ~, 254
the physical universe, 406 Problems of Comparable
Magnitude, 10, 114, 122,
psychosomatics may come under head of ~, 243 303, 316
stalls cases, 382 handling and running, 164, 229
there are many people who cannot tackle a ~ with
procedure, 165
a process, 159 reason it works, 167
thetan will dream up ARC breaks to exteriorize his process(es),
229
attention from a ~, 304 basic chart of process
types [1957] ,131
things to audit present time problemwith, 168 best
processes are those which fastest convert
threat to havingness is present time problem, 195
unknowing games conditions to knowing games
why case doesn't change in presence of, 195
conditions, 9
Present Time Problem Process, 196 flattening, 398
to run when pc's communication is too poor to freeze,
240
run Problems of Comparable/lncomparable gradual
scale of processes [1959], 397
Magnitude, 254 lag and learning lag, 18
"What part of that problem could you be respon- levels
of auditors and processes [1957], 84
sible for?",296,315 on gradient scale from
unconscious pc to theta
pressures, Locational Communication relieves face clear,
list [1959], 436
pressures and terror stomachs, 466 only assist
in processing the pc, 16 1,1 81
prime datum, no such thing; there must be two data real and
unreal to pc, difference between, 182
since datum is of no use unless it can be evalu-
running with no apparent gain, reason for, 195
ated by datum of similar magnitude, 422 six
basic process types, 479
prison and army systems of punishment, 235 survival, all ~
have aligned on "survive", 320
privacy, invasion of, 496 terminals, in the absence or
unreality of a terminal
problem(s); see also present time problem the
significance in a process will not function,
defn, conflict arising from two opposing inten-
235
tions, 488 unreality of processes, too high for a
pc, 96
auditing, howit becomes a problem to pc, 195 unstable gain
means too many processes or pro basic anatomy of, 113
cesses not flattened, handling of, 285
basic problem is postulate-counter postulate, 303 what
they are, 161,181
handling and running, 164 which turns on a somatic must
be continued until
handling of, unless the pc can get idea of problem,
it no longer turns on somatics, 159, 179
the technique is unworkable, 165 processing; see auditing
havingness is the clue to problems, 117 Process July, 200
Invent a Problem [process], 383 professional auditor; 102
invention of, why not aberrative, 196 profile(s); see OCA/APA
is a game, 196 Project Clear check sheet [1957] ,143
is not a condition or a terminal; it is a "how" or Project Clear
processes, how to run, 144
"whether"; it is a doingness, not a person, 315
propaganda, Russian,45
is two-terminaled, 303 pro-survival valences, never run, 284
Locational Processing to handle, 122 protect and defend,
don't, 147
mis-definition of, 303 psychiatry, psychiatric, psychiatrists,
penalty of solving problems, 462 a swindle, 47
scale of succumb problems, 315 developed through the
Nineteenth Century in
solutions, belief that solutions collapse ~ on
Russia, 477
thetan, cause of, 462 psychosis, neurosis and
psychiatrists, 169
thetan thinks he needs them to keep his attention report
on two cases that have received psychiatric
exteriorized from rock chain, 304 and Euro-
Russian therapy from the govern
"What part of that problem could you be respon-
ment, 234
sible for?" [process], 315 sees in every ability an
insanity, 170
when is it flat, 10 thinks destroy is the same as help,
252; see also
why people won't solve their problems, 462
suppressive person [in full index]
Problems of Comparable/Incomparable Magnitude psychoanalysis, 537
[process], 196 condemning
facts of, 138
incomparable magnitude as alternate to compar-
developed by Freud in 1894 in Vienna, Austria,
able magnitude, 165
477
Locational Processing and ~, which to run, 325 says all
insanity derives from love, 170
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
psychology, defn., body of practice devoted to crea- reach and
withdraw mechanism, 201
tion of any effect on living forms, 499 reach-
withhold phenomena, 432
developed by Wundt in 1879 in Leipzig, Germany, reactive
mind, 269; see also mind
477 bank merely expresses a recording of past atten
]
is in actual use a dramatization of Axiom 10,
tion fixations, 428
wholly reactive, 499 bank of pc becomes solid to
degree that he does
is not accepted by Roman Catholic Church be- not take
responsibility for his overts and with
cause it considers man to be an animal with no
holds, 552
soul, 514 bottom point of, 518
Wundtian psychology, 46 case, bad off, can't handle
the bank, 160,180
psychosis and neurosis, difference between, 169 clearing in
Dianetics vs. in Scientology, 270
psychosomatic(s); see also somatic comes from obsessive
creating, 320
clear up, 302 primary characteristic of, is response to
a situation
colds, tiredness and ~, process to cure, 246 without
analytical inspection, 269
difficulties, handled by Withhold, 118 Step Seven, Clear
Procedure: Establish pc's control
difficulties, obvious, or sexual parts, audit last, 93
over his "bank", 191
may come underhead of PTproblem, 243 sudden
disappearances stay hung in the bank,
psychotherapy never worked, why, 201 137
psychotic, psychos, reactivity, make-break point of, 359
defn., complete subject of one or more unknown reading time,
learning rate governs ~, 22
causes to which he is unwilling effect and any reality;
see also C&MSCS
effort on his part to be cause is interfered with
auditors unable to produce good results, cause and
by things to which he is the effect, 169
handling of, related to auditor's reality, 292
persons unwilling to be audited, what to run, 468,
Confrontingness Scale of Reality, 447
497 is a parallel to Responsibility Scale,
446
run psychos on CCH 1, 2, 3, 4, 502 is the scale
of disintegrating reality, 404
state, difference between ~ state and sane state is
engram running inhibited by inadequate R-factor,
ability to make things solid, 188 404
PT; see present time establish reality of terminal before you
try to clear
PTP; see present time problem, it with significance,
235, 433
punishment, not an answer, 558 hellos and okays are run on
terminal to improve
punishment, prison and army systems of, 235 reality on
it, 243
OCA/APA drop in appreciative-lowered
reality
level, 334
Q pictures, pc's reality on, 390
preclear, reality level of, 312
Q and A, defn., auditor changes the process just be-
processing requires obtaining a better reality on
cause pc changed or wandered, 519
environment, 514
Q and A, examples of, 371 Reality Scale, 136,139,140, 401
Qs (Prelogics); see Axioms & Logics CCH I and ~, 240
engram running and ~, 405
Havingness Scale, part of~, 141
R lines and terminals, 139
old and new ~, 461
radiation, recall(s)(ing),
aberrative character of, 52 education is the process of
placing data in recalis
atomic radiation reverses the genetic line, 108 of
another, 28
creativeness hit by, 52 is therapeutic, 29
danger of, 45 knowledge isn't recalling, 30
effects of, 108 "think of" command rather than "recall",
485
hysteria and radiation, 44 "think" undercuts "recall",
435
in war; see All About Radiation Recall Processes, 536
problems of fallout; see All About Radiation Comm Recall
Process, 536
reaction to radiation is wholly mental, 46 communication
process, basic, "Recall a time you
real threat of; see AU About Radiation
communicated", 463
resolution of, 52 Know Mystery Recall Processes, 536
surviving radiation, 48 on children, 554
treatment of radiation disease; see AAR "Recall a
moment of loss" [process], 120, 325
reach and withdraw, increasing ability to increases "Recall
a secret" [process], 93
intelligence and unfixes attention, 428 "recall
a time" vs. "recall something", 415
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
Recall Processes (cont) rising needle in session, cause of, 504
"Recall being critical" "Recall withholding criti- Rising Scale
Processing,
cism" [process], 532 basic version, 243
stop with pc back in PT, 536 CCH 15, Rising Scale
Processing, 72
Re-experience and Experience Process, 488 commands and how to
run, 8
Registrar, auditing ARC breaks on, 360 is in reality an OT
process, 243
Registrar, vital training data, 250 run when the pc can
change ideas, 144
rehabilitation of abilities, 79 rock, 299
rehabilitation of communication, 93 defn, that which a person
has used to reach
Rehabilitation Process, key, 379 people or things with and
is determined in value
Release, defn., average a third of graph higher than by
its creativeness or destructiveness; it is
first test, above 115 IQ [1957] ,156, 176
simply the reach and withdraw mechanism
Release is a person whose case "won't get any worse";
which makes a ridge and this causes the stuck
he begins to gain by living rather than lose, 444 of
the needle, 299
religion of a Scientologist is freedom for all things defn.,
basic, earliest shift of identity, 411
spiritual on all dynamics, 55, 281 basic
locating question, 300
remedies for case problems, 468 chain, to key out and take out
of restimulation,
remedy of havingness, objectively, 486 489
remedy of restimulation, 11 cycle of the rock (object): person
(1) failed to
repair of ARC restores havingness, 177 communicate
himself; (2) started using some
repeating commands, theory of, 355 thing to
communicate with; (3) put the last
responsibility,321, 555 item on automatic
anditcreatedforhim;(4)it
defn., total responsibility would be willing to
failed, 299
admit the authorship of any created thing any-
Help bracket on the rock, 320
where whether yours or another's, 98 is an object,
not a significance, 299
ARC break is assignment of ~ for a sudden drop in is the
thing pc uses to reach people; it is confront affinity,
reality or communication, 364 ingness on a via, 320
as-ising requires taking responsibility, 555 Step 6,
caution: it is almost fatal to run Step 6 if
automaticity and responsibility, 167 the rock is
not out, 322
case gain depends on taking responsibility, 555 thetan
thinks he needs problems to keep his atten commands of
Responsibility [process], 190 tion exteriorized from
the rock chain, 304
Confrontingness Scale of Reality is a parallel to whole
track rock, 295
Responsibility Scale, 446 rough auditing, remedy for, is
muzzled auditing, 397
drop in responsibility from former OCA/APA is rudiments,
487
auditor evaluation, 334 CCH 0 is firstly
establishing the ~ of session,
must go hand in hand with making an Operating
238
Thetan, 555 goals and rudiments, 122
overts, telling about, isn't enough; it is necessary Russian
mental research, 537
to take responsibility for them, 551 Russian propaganda,
45
past lives and responsibility, 555
pc's bank becomes solid to the degree that he does
not take ~ for his overts and withholds, 552
S
Selected Person Straightwire on overts will bring
up ~ of case to point where he can be trusted Saint
Hill Manor, 522
to run engrams, 453 sales failure, source of, 534
restimulation, restimulative, sane state, difference between a
psychotic state and ~
ability to confront the future without ~, 488 is
ability to make things solid, 188
difference between ~being dramatized and an ori- scarce,
incidents which are most ~ tend to stick
gination, 371 hardest, 151
intelligence gain is loss of ~ of stupidity by reason scarcity
and abundance, 148, 150
of attempts to confront or experience problems
schizophrenic, defn., split personality; one in another's
of life, 428 valence, 11
of student, how it is overcome, 344 schizophrenic, how to
handle, 11
remedy of restimulation, 11 sciences, a look at the, 423
results, defn., case achieves a reality on change of
Scientologist(s), defn., one who controls persons,
case, somatic, behavior or appearance, for the
environments and situations, 55, 281
better, 428 are the free people, 145
retraining, problem of, 78 can get the job done, 332
riot, defn, simply a psychosomatic momentary injury
characteristics of, 281
or traumatic condition on 3rd dynamic, 261 Code of,
[1957], 1
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
Scientologist(s) (cont.) Scientology (cont.)
everybody is a ~, some just haven't cognited yet, science
of human ability and intelligence, 477
501 student, subject of Scientology is as good or
bad in
in his training, must approximate route of actual
direct ratio to his knowledge of it, 420
research and discovery, 328 study Scientology with
purpose of arriving at your
is first cousin to Buddhist, 55 own conclusions as
to whether or not the tenets
one who is not a victim, 494, 517 you have
assimilated are correct and workable,
operates within the boundaries of Auditor's Code
426
and Code of a Scientologist, 281 the way out, 134
religion of is freedom for all things spiritual on the work
was free, 173
all dynamics, 55 training; see training
Scientology, undercutting any older philosophy, 345
defn., knowing in the fullest sense of the word, 281
Scientology Clear Procedure-Issue One, 172; see also
defn, an organized body of scientific research
Clear Procedure
knowledge concerning life, life sources and the
scouting, how to run, 297
mind and includes practices that improve the S-C-
S;seeStart-Change-Stop
intelligence, state and conduct of persons, 491 S-C-S
Control Process, Thinking version, 454
axioms and principles of ~ are considerations secret,
"Recall a secret" [process] ,93
agreed upon and from which stem this universe secrets,
only disturbing element in secrets is guilt
and livingness, 344 which accompanies them,
201; see also missed
Axiom 58, 393; see also Axioms & Logics withhold
[in full index]
basic lessons of: spirit is source of all; you are a seeing,
fear of seeing is fear of mass, 209
spirit, 270 see, thetan's ability to, 209
chief uses are in fields of education, organization, Selected
Person Overts, commands of and how to
mental disability and religion, 281 run, 434
clearing in ~consists of discoveringsource of reac- Selected
Person Overt-Withhold, commands of and
tive mind itself and making it vanish, 270
how to run, 406
demands no belief or faith and thus is not in con- Selected
Person Overt-Withhold used on present time
flict with faith, 514 problem, 402
Dianetics and Scientology, Selected Persons Overt Acts,
commands of and how
basic difference between: Dianetics attacked to
run, 389
reactive mind on a materialistic level; Scien-
Selected Persons Overts Straightwire, 397
tology attacks reactive mind on a spiritual
will bring up the responsibility of case to point
level, 270 where he can be trusted to run
engrams, 453
Dianetics, the branch of Scientology which Selected
Persons Overt Straightwire, how to select
deals with mental anatomy, 470 person,
commands and how to run, 427
what we want out of, 134 Selected Persons Overts
Withhold, when cases crack
disseminate ~ without telling what it is, 476
well on, what to run, 473
does not fit into any other frame of reference, but Selected
Persons Overt-Withhold on auditor as a
other things fit into its frame of reference, 345
selected person, 430
early attacks on, 172 Selected Persons Overt Withhold
Straightwire, com everything in ~ has been directly and actively
mands of and how to run, 417
postulated by person at some point in past, 345 as
a training process, 485
goals, 55, 283 Selected Persons Scout, 484
empowering a thetan to overcome his own self-
determinedbasis, ability to withhold or give out a
problems, 283 datum on a ~,118
organizational goals [1959], 548 self-determinism,
entrance into ~ requires that thetan
is the data necessary to live, 236 conceive idea
of other beings, 465
man who invented Scientology, 470 self-determinism is mid-range
on Tone Scale, 465
mind, Scientology is only full study in field of selling,
basic scale and ethics of, 533, 534
mind developed in Twentieth Century, 477 service
facsimile, deJn., a series of facsimiles which
mustn't be confidential, 147 you call a
facsimile, which can be applied to the
not only accepts but can prove that man does have
control of others, 231
a soul, 514 service facsimile is a solution, 167
philosophy of a new age, 153 service facsimile,
relationship to victim, 519
power of ~ is that it, by stressing single, simple session(s),
truths, eliminates oceans of mere data, 346 auditor
and pc when they are cleared for session,
reactive mind and; see reactive mind only then
begin on case, 301
research was financed at first by Ron's writings auditor
remains at cause in all sessions without
and expeditions, 172 forbidding pc to be at
cause, 161
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
session(s) (cont.) solids and chronic somatics, 87
CCH 0 is collection of mechanical aids to assist solids,
radiationis invalidation of, 52
pc's participation in session and auditor in Solids
[process] ,11
ARC, 158,178 Objective Solids, commands, 8
child must be given a very formal session, 553
Subjective Solids, CCH 13, 70, 256
child, unwilling, use short sessions, 526 solution(s),
difference between formal session and assist, 260 Clear,
you cannot stay Clear unless you solve
Ending the Session, Training 9(c), 340 things by the
equation of the optimum solu
how to establish, 238 tion, 237
in session, defn, pc is interested in and talking to
Consequences of Solutions [process] ,11
auditor about his case, 538 failure to make ~
(or postulates) stick elsewhere
getting pc, 157, 301 makes thetan believe that
~ collapse problems
keeping pc in ~ is done with good ARC, 243 on
him, 462
pc participation in session, 157,176 to
automaticity of form, 210
how to gain, 161, 181 to solutions, 462
is necessary for processing to work, how it
issomatic(s),
achieved, 319 chronic somatic
handling, 87
is necessary in order to place pc somewhat at
chronic somatics and solids, 87
cause point in actual fact of auditing,
chronic somatic, specific for a, 319
158,178 process which tums on a ~
must be continued
pc who is not participating in session is not
until it no longer turns on ~,159, 179, 192
at cause, 161,181 student, why
he may experience somatics and con
put pc more in session with goals, 314 fusions,
344
opening and closing of, 487 sonic, visio turns on before, 324
out of sessionness, 304 sound in communication, 138
PTP is any worry that keeps pc out of session, 243 sound, Trio
on, 324
PTP makes it hard for pc to confront session, 311 South African
native, impossible to train, 108
starting, 301, 314 spirit; see thetan
and ending ~, characteristic, purpose, stable spot,
Find a Spot, commands and how to run, 8
datum, 479 Spotting, 189
bad off case and case in very good condition
Connectedness, most basic of spotting processes,
alike require special handling, 159, 179
189
CCH 0; see CCH 0 depends for its workability on the
dislike of a
Training 9(b), 340 thetan of being located,
163
when does it begin, 259 Short Spotting, version of TR
10,160,180
sexual incident is a bounce from a death, 411 steps,
163,192
sexual parts, audit ~ or psychosomatic difficulties
workability of, 193
last,93 squirrels scream when we're winning, 253; see
also
shock, electric, 15 suppressive person [in full index]
Short Sessioning as a technique, 368 stable datum, 60
Short Sessioning works very well with a child, 553 staff auditor; see
auditor, staff
Short Spotting, version of TR 10, 160, 180 standard techniques and
experimental auditing, 282
sick or injured, person doesn't get ~ unless he's cast Start-Change-
Stop, 205, 296, 297, 317; see also
himself in role of victim by reason of the game
C&MSCS
and his overt acts, 520 commands and how to run,
6,185, 296
sick, overts and withholds are why people are ~, 413 on a
person, CCH 3(c), commands and how to run,
significance (s), 317
establish reality of terminal before you try to clear
phenomena while running, 187
it with significance, 235 steps, 162,192
on a nervous-dispersed case there is no real gain in
what it does, 187
running ~ until hellos and okays are run, 235 Start-C-
S oldest version, 294
rock is an object, not a significance, 299 static,
terminals to which Comm Processes are addressed
conceiving a ~, why it is painful, 280, 324
must be real terminals never ~ only, 503 story of
a static, 4
simplicities, postulates go from ~ to complexities, what
keeps a pc from conceiving a, 120
345 Static Preparation, command of, 111
simplicity, 4 stealing and D.E.I. Scale, 257
situation, how to control a situation, 261 Step 6, 295, 298, 341
situations, how a person handles terminals and ~, 404 caution:
it is almost fatal to run Step 6 if the rock
societies, barbarian, 251 is not out, 322
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
Step 6 (cont.) succumb problems, scale of, 315
Creative Processing, 191; see also Creative Process- suicide
and nervous breakdown, university students,
ing 29
Help and ~ do not work on low level cases, 322 Supervisor,
"What didn't work?", 317
how to run Clear Procedure Step 6, 322 survival, survive, 320
processes, experiences with, 539 all processes have
aligned on "survive", 320
Step 6 Mock-ups and Help CCH Ob clear a pc, 243 confront
and ~ are of same order of thing, 539
totally clearup a field before running~, 207 could be
represented best by "continuous con
stomach, guilty of the overt act of eating, 14
fronting" at a process level, 539
stomach, terror ~, 15, defn., simply a confusion in a "create"
is dynamic principle of existence in
high degree of restimulation in the vicinity of
Scientology as "survive" was in Dianetics, 539;
the vagus nerve, 14 see also Fundamentals of
Thought
Locational Communication, relieves face pressures of
things, who causes it, 137
and terror stomachs, 466 scale of, 209
specific for, 14 sweetness and light, defn., person who cannot
con
Stop Supreme, commands of, 186 ceive of ever having done
anything bad to
stop, why emphasis on, 9 anybody or anything, 519
Straight Wire, 441, 480 S2 Process, "From where could you
communicate to
ARC Break Straightwire; see ARC Break Straight- a
victim?", 478, 497, 508, 519
wire end phenomena, 493
ARC Straight Wire; see ARC Straight Wire flat when pc
can confront calmly a victim, 497
characteristic, purpose, stable datum of ~, 480 or S22
to remedy victim valence, 504
commands, 8 S22 Process, "Think of a place from which you
could
Dynamic Straight Wire; see Dynamic Straight Wire
communicate to a victim", 478
Know to Mystery Straight Wire for extreme cases,
460
new HGC process-a new Straight Wire, 363
T
Not-ls Straight Wire; see Not-ls Straight Wire
Overt Withhold Straight Wire; see Overt Withhold TA; see tone
arm
Straight Wire laoist, Scientologist is distant relative
to ~, 55
Selected Persons Overts Straightwire; see Selected tax, income
tax reform, 495
Persons Overts Straightwire Technical Division, purpose
of, 25
Selected Persons Overt Withhold Straightwire; see techniques,
when you want results you had better use
Selected Persons Overt Withhold Straightwire
standard techniques, 282
student(s)('s); see also training teenagers, why they revolt, 212
answer the student's questions, 50 telex, use of, 508
case of, 309 terminal(s),
how students are handled, 344 defn., live mass or
something that is capable of
in Academy are auditors, they are not pcs, 250
causing, receiving or relaying communication,
more esoteric and difficult subject is made, less
114
student will be able to handle subject, 114 defn.,
it would be any fixed mass utilized in a
reasons why student would be refused training or
communication system, 164
completion, 51 abandoned terminal, symptom of, is a
steadily
restimulation of, how it is overcome, 344 rising
needle, 504
university ~, suicide and nervous breakdown, 29 body is
a mass, a solid terminal, 240
why he may experience somatics and confusions, choosing
terminals, pc is not to choose what termi 344
nal to run, 434, 438
8-C on students, 90 clear just like a pc clears on a
meter, 504
Subjective Confrontingness, commands and how to condition and
~, difference between, 164
run, 319 finding ~ on HAS Co-Audit, 513
Subjective Havingness, CCH 12, Limited ~, 70 generalized vs.
proper names, 503
Subjective Havingness commands, 8 get first ~ that dropped on
pc, convert it to gen
Subjective Havingness, how to run, 400 eral form, run ~
with Communication Process
subjective processes, characteristic, purpose, stable
[1959], 513
datum of, 479 lines and terminals, 140
Subjective Solids, CCH 13, 70 Reality Scale of, 139
commands of CCH 13, 256 one of most effective light ~
is a body part, 519
success level of a person is his communication level, problem
is not a condition or a ~; it is a "how" or
92 "whether"; it is a doingness, not a
person, 315
succumb postulates, 315 problem is two-terminaled, 303
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
terminal(s)(cont.) thetan(s)('s) (cont.)
PT problem itself, not just its ~ must exist in PT,
characteristics of,
296 child is a thetan in usually rather bad
condition,
reality of terminals, 433 34
don't run terminals totally unreal to pc, 433, 43 8
doesn't look through his eyeballs, 36
establish the reality of a terminal before you
is source of all creation, 270
try to clear it with significance, 235
keynote of thetan is order, 262
hellos and okays are run on terminal to improve
man is a human spirit which is enwrapped, more
reality on it, 243 or less,
in a mind, which is in a body, 223
terminal chosen must be real to pc and must
thetan in good shape can be cause, 159,179
show charge on E-Meter, 550 defined in Axiom 1,
223
terminals to which Communication Processes
difficulties of,
are addressed must be real terminals never
forgettingness of spiritual being, 224
significances only, 503 misowning the
mind in which he is trapped,
sensible terminal, in Dynamic Straight Wire never
530
run one, 438 thetans pretending to be
injured, 518
situations and ~, how a person handles, 404 thetan
trapped in another thetan, seen in
switching around terminals without flattening
valences, 530
results in rising needles, 513 things wrong with
thetan are lower harmonics
Terrible Trio; see Trio of characteristics of a
thetan, 257, 271
terror stomach; see stomach, terror thinks he needs problems
to keep his attention
tests were originally devised in the total belief that
exteriorized from rock chain, 304
man could not be changed, 199 why thetan makes
his postulate fail to stick,
theft of objects is really an effort to steal a self, 257,
465
271 ghosts and spirits, don't invalidate, 226
Then and Now Solids, CCH 14, 33, 71, 265 human spirit,
evidence of, 223
commands, 8 Operating Thetan; see Operating Thetan
makes pc capable of contacting and handling pres- parts of
man: thetan, mind, body, 129, 223
ent time and any segment of the past, 34 self-
determinism, entrance into, requires that
procedure, 265, 266 thetan conceive idea of other
beings, 465
theta body, defn., thetan very often carries with him Spotting
depends for its workability on the dislike
a theta body, which he mocked up on past of
a thetan of beinglocated, 163
track and which is a number of facsimiles of old
trying to prove he is not simple, 4
bodies he has misowned and is carrying along
valences, thetan valences are preferable over body
with him as control mechanisms which he uses
valences, 284
to control body he is using, 228 Think a Thought, TR 12,
71
theta bop, needle reaction, 225 thinking consists of comparing
particular datum with
theta clear; see Clear, theta physical universe as it
is known and observcd,
theta, Connectedness is basic process on association
424
of theta with mest, 163 thinkingness,
thetan(s)('s), 530, defn., awareness of awareness as-is
unwanted thinkingness, 479
unit which has all potentialities but no mass, no
body control comes before control of ~, 479
wavelength and no location, 480 control of
thinkingness, 119
abilities of, 169 preclear's ~, how to bring under his
control, 255
ability to see, 209 "think of" command rather than "recall",
485
keeping things from going away cultivates abil- "think"
undercuts "recall", 435
ity of thetan to remain where he is, 232 third
dynamic; see dynamic, 3rd
thetan himself without body is capable of per- Third Rail, a
special form of Factual Havingness, 486
forming all functions he assigns to body, 480 Thought
Processes, 8
answer to being threatened or struck is to create, Thoughts in
Walls, commands and how to run, 8
320 "throw it away" and '~hold it in", 232
ARC breaks, thetan will dream up ~ to exteriorize time,
his attention from a present time problem, 304 by
a sequence of de-solidifying present time, one
Axiom 10 becomes confused by thetan with cycle
evidently achieves time, 34
of action, 539 OT ability is handling time, 98
basic personality, thetan has a, 257 shift, 98
body is identifying form or non-identifiable form tiredness,
colds and psychosomatics, process to cure,
to facilitate the control, communication and
246
havingness for thetan in existence in mest uni- tone
arm, if pc reads high on ~, what to run, 297
verse, 480 tone is established by ARC, 104
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
tone is most directly observed by communication, training(cont.)
104 stable datum in training: when in doubt, handle
tone of voice, acknowledgement, 383 student with much
stricter positive placement
Tone Scale, Emotional Tone Scale expanded, 459 and
direction, 90
Tone Scale is divided into three parts: highest is pan- stable
datum of all training: "A student is gradu
determinism, mid-range is self-determinism, low ated
when his training level is such that he
range is other-determinism, 465 could be
entrusted with an HGC preclear", 40
Tone Scale, person broadens up the, 140 why Scientology training
is non-aberrative, 344
Tone 40, training drills, 437; see also TRs
defn., giving a command and just knowing that it changes
in training drills, 91, 353
will be executed despite any contrary appear-
trainingroutines;seeTRs
ances, 240 translations of Scientology books, 471
defn, positive postulating, 240 trapped, thetan is misowning
the mind in which he is
defn., positive postulate with no counter-thought,
trapped, 530
386 traps, how you are kept in one, 202
auditing, defn., is control by direct Tone 40 com- Trio, 401
mand, 242 CCH 8, Trio, 68
auditing, defn., positive, knowing, predictable con-
commands of, 323, 401
trol toward the pc's willingness to be at cause
condition to running Trio, 323
concerning his body and his attention, 480 Control
Trio; see Control Trio
Book Mimicry and Hand Space Mimicry are not how to run,
117, 323
Tone 40, 400 objective variety Havingness, 190
CCH starts with Tone 40, but the training con- old-time
Trio, commands of, 190
tinuity of CCH does not, 394 on sound, 324
control by Tone 40 is taught in upper indoc, 242 "Recall
a moment of loss" and Trio, chief exteri
formal auditing and Tone 40 auditing, two dif-
orization processes, 325
ferent types of auditing, 242 Terrible Trio,
commands and how to run, 7
group auditing is done from tone 40.0, 24 undercut in
Trio, 119
nothing to do with voice, 385 what it does, 324
originations, in all processes not Tone 40 pc's ori- Trio on
Valences, commands and how to run, 7
ginations are handled, 370 TRs; see also training drills
process, how to run, 254, 255 how to flunk Upper Indoc
TRs, 385
unconscious, psycho, non-communicative, electric TR0, 116
shock case pc, Tone 40 is for, 242
confronting, first step on the road to Clear, 101
Tone 40 Book and Bottle is not Opening Procedure
confronting isn't just looking; don't try to con by
Duplication, 395 front with your eyeballs only, 101
Tone 40 "Hold it still", CCH 10, 69 Confronting
Preclear, 61, 100
Tone 40 "Keep it from going away", CCH 9, 69 how it is
run, 115
Tone 40 Locational Processing, purpose, procedure TR 1, Dear
Alice, 61
and commands of CCH 5, 254 defn., to say
something to somebody with the
Tone 40 "Make it a little more solid", CCH 11, 69
full confidence that they will receive it, 336
Tone 40 on an Object; see TR 8 and Tone 40 on an Object,
335
Tone 40 on a Person; see TR 9 how to do TR One, 337
Tone 40 8-C;see CCH 2 TR 2, Acknowledgements, 61, 350; see also
ac
Tone 40 8-C processes, CCH 7, 8 & 9, 255
knowledgement
toothache, "Hello and Okay" Process on, 136 how TR Two is
done, 350
track can become a hodge-podge of violence withheld
more on Training Drill Two, 308
which pulls in then violence others caused,
not so much how to acknowledge but when,
432 543
traffic cop, how to handle, 99 TR 3, Duplicative Question, 62
training; see also student how TR Three can unjam the
track, 356
Academy of Scientology, purpose of, 25 theory of TR
Three, 355
course creates a beingness, not imparts data, 464 TR 4,
Preclear Originations, 62, 370
courses, ladder of courses, 288 how to do, 371, 372
difference between education and Scientology, 22 TR 5,
Doctors of Scientology, 102 Hand Mimicry, 63
gradient scale in training, 345 "Seat that body in
that chair", 111
need of training, 77, 128 Sit in that Chair, 91
order of training processes, 394 "You make that body
sit in that chair" "Thank
skills, 76 you", 243
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
TRs (cont.) Upper Indoc, control by Tone 40 is taught in, 242
TR 5N, 468 Upper Indoctrination Course [1957], 58
commands of, 497 Upper Indoc TRs, how to flunk, 385
is ARC break handling, 353 upset, when a loss of
havingness is experienced, a pc
TR 6, Plain 8-C, 63, 91 will agitate or go anaten
and tend to be upset in
TR 7, Hi-School Indoc, 63 general, 187
how to run, 384
TR 8, Tone 40 on an Object, 64
how to do, 385 V
TR One and Tone 40 on an Object, 335
TR 9, Tone 40 on a Person, 64, 386 vacuum, defn., a super-
cold object which, if brought
TR 9(b), Starting the Session, 340 into contact
with bank, drinks bank, 11
TR 9(c), Ending the Session, 340 valence(s), 454, defn, mental
package of ideas and
TR 10, Locational Processing, 67, 160, 180, 190;
considerations really belonging to another
see also Locational Processing person
and unknowingly borrowed by pc, 276;
make the pc use his eyes to view the objects,
see also universes
159,179 are the sum of overwhelmings of the
pc, 274
Short Spotting, version of TR Ten, 160,180 best
solution to ~ is Beingness Processing, 257,
"You notice that object", 159,179 271
TR 11, ARC Straight Wire, 69, 316; see also ARC E-Meters
don't register well on, 284
Straight Wire how to split, 11
TR 12, Think a Thought, 71 in presence of valences pc
cannot change his mind
TR 13, Fishing a Cognition, 73 easily when he
misowns the consideration, 275
truth, it takes truth to live with a swiftly changing OCA/APA
profile is a picture of a valence, 274
world, 153 out of valence, how to handle, 11
truths, importance of various truths, 33 past track valences
are preferable to run over pres
TV, 150 ent life valences, 284
two-way communication; see communication, two- people from
whom one felt one could not with
way hold anything are most aberrative ~ on
case,
Two-way Help bracket; see help, Two-way Help 202
bracket person who can have a valence isn't
subject to it,
275
U pro-survival valences, never
run, 284
"split" personality is one in another's
~, 11
unconscious(ness), splitting is most reliably done by
running Help in
pain, misemotion, ~-, insanity, all result from caus-
brackets on the valence, 285, 292
ing things others could not experience easily,
thetan ~- are preferable over body ~, 284
432 valence closure, basic mechanism of, 202
participation by unconscious person, 159, 178 victim
valence, run Communication Process S2 or
person, what to run, 183, 468, 497 S22 to
remedy, 504
Tone 40 is for unconscious, psycho, non-commu- victim
valence, you can't ever get a ~ to win, 517
nicative, electric shock case pc, 242 "withhold" on
a valence, 325
undercutting cases, 404 Valence Processes,
un-doable commands, 467 Clearing by Valences, 273, 274
unethical auditor actions, 392 LRH session, 276
unfixingattention, 428 "Think of something you could withhold
from
unhappiness is inability to confront that which is,
(valence)", 201, 325
431 Trio on Valences, commands and how to run, 7
Universal Processes, 524, 531 Valence Differentiation, 545
universe(s); see also valences valence splitter, "Think of
entering a mind"
physical;seemestuniverse "Think of not entering a
mind", alternated,
process for separation from all universes the thetan
545
is anxious about, 524 Wasting Valence, commands for,
284
Universe Processes, 529, 530 validated auditor, 84
Universe Comm Process, 524, 531 value or importance is denoted by
scarcity or abund Universe O/W [process], 529, 530 ance of
things, 148
unknown, D.E.I. Scale, 533 venereal diseases, 147
unstable gain, cause and handling of, 285, 292 verbal direction
from LRH, put it in writing, 111
unwilling to be audited, psychotic persons, what to victim(s),
494, 557, defn, unwilling and unknowing
run, 468, 497 effect of life, matter,
energy, space and time, 518
SUBJECT INDEX- 1957/1959
victim (s) (cont.) "What would you like to confront?", Affinity
Process,
ARC, low, whole answer to it is contained in vic-
463, 536, 539
tim, 516 whole track, control on, 454
auditor treating pc as a victim, 516 whole track rock, 295
basic postulate of injury or death (or harmful com- wide-
open case, 447, defn., case that has pictures and
munication) is best summed up by "victim",
everything and is impatient to get on with it
518 but does not markedly alter bank with
thinking
button and organization, 517 alone is not a high
case but an old ~ of Dianetic
cases not to run on Victim Process, 519 days,
159,179
central button of overt act-motivator sequence, willingness
to do, importance of, 80
516 willingness to learn, 79
Christianity is based on the victim, 494 wins, blows occur
when coach gives too few ~, 116
death is just one of varied forms of game of ~, 518 withdraw
and reach; see reach and withdraw
flat, when is Victim flat, 520 withhold(s)(ing); see also
overts, withholds and
game of, where it began, 518 defn, a games condition
on communication, 201
in any overt act-motivator sequence, there is a vil-
ability to, 202
lain and a ~, 518 advances IQ, 201
item, how to audit, 516 IQ is the ability to
withhold or give out a
money and ~ are buttons we want flat on every-
datum on a self-determined basis, 118
body in Scientology, 508 communication, 93
person doesn't get sick or injured unless he's cast
effects of, 413
himself in role of ~ by reason of the game and
importance of, 551
his overt acts, 520 no reason to withhold own
actions or regret them
Process S2; see S2 Process if one's own actions are
easily experienced by
Process S22; see S22 Process others, 431
relationship to service facsimile, 519 people from whom
one felt one could not with Scientologists, people who aren't ~, 494,
517 hold anything are most aberrative valences on
to restrain others one sets an example as a ~, 518
case, 202
valence; see valence, victim scale of, 230, 233
why "victim" works as a process, 518 what it does, 413
violence, 343 Withhold Process, 93
leads to barbarianism, 343 psychosomatic difficulties
handled by, 118
track can become a hodge-podge of violence running on
valences and body parts, 325
withheld which pulls in then ~ others caused, words,
clear key words, 301
432 words, how to handle mis-definition on vital ~, 301
unfixing attention by ~ throws a case downscale, work,
confronting, 214
428 worksheets, session notes [1959], 406
visio, process to turn on, 324 Wundtian psychology, developed by
Wundt in 1879
visio turns on before sonic, 324 in Leipzig, Germany, 46,
477
W Numerals
wait, D.E.I. Scale, 533 8-C, 384; see also control
war, 113, 423 commands of, 384, 394
waste, wasting, Plain 8-C, TR 6, 63, 91
commands for Wasting Valence, 284 Tone 40 8-C; see Tone 40
8-C
people usually have to waste before they can have, types
of, 184
275 8-C Solids, commands and how to run, 6
Third Rail, to remedy obsessive waste, 486 20th ACC training
procedure, 294
what you can't have, 141
Waste Help [process] violates rule of terminals-run
terminals, not conditions, 285, 292
"What force would it be all right to use?" [process],
545
"What part of that (body part) can you be respon
-sible for?" [process], 243
"What part of your life (past) could you be respon
-sible for?" [process], 552
"What solution could you make stick?" [process], 462
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF TITLES
Abbreviations 334 Carrying On 295
Ability Congress Lectures 193 CCH 394
Academy Training Curriculum & CCH (Concluded) 400
Examination OEC Vol 4 - 274 CCH Ob-Help in Full-Starting
Session 219
ACC Auxiliary Procedure 301 CCH 18 99
ACC Clear Procedure 311 CCH 88-Enforced Nothingness 246
ACC Clear Procedure Change 369 Change Auditor's Code 306
ACC Preparatory Process Schedule for Change of HCO Policy Letter of
Running Engrams 389 15 December 1958 380
ACCs 347 Changes in TrainingDrills 91
ACC Schedule 339 Clear Bracelets 341
ACCs-HPA/HCA 206 Clearing Commands 430
Acknowledgements in Auditing 543 Clearing Congress Lectures 290
Acknowledgement-Tone of Voice 383 Clearing of Fields 209
Actual Working Definition of Psychology 499 Clearing Reality 235
Add Formula 10 478 Clear Procedure 296
Addition to the Auditor's Code 82 Clear Procedure Continued-Step One:
Adventure of Communication, The 92 Participation in Session by
the Pc 157
Affinity Process, An 463 Clear Procedure-Definitions, Goals 155
AfricaOver the Top 494 Clear Test 476
All About Radiation 49 Co-Audit Formula 475
Allowed Processes I st Melbourne ACC 547 Code of a Scientologist, The
All Preclears Are Expected Comment on Beingness Processing, A
271
to . . . OEC Vol. 4-498 Communication 104
Amendment to HCO B 11 April Communicationand Is-ness 146
1958 see OEC Vol 4-609 Communication Course 335
American College of Personnel Confronting (Ability 52) 100
Efficiency, Dublin 338 Confronting (PAB 129) 211
Amusingly Effective Process, An 383 Confronting Present Time 96
Analysis of Cases 428 Congratulations HASI-South Africa 546
Anti-Q & A TR see Vol. Vlll-221 Contents and Coverage of HCA/HPA
Course 291
ARC Breaks with Auditors 430 Control 204
ARC in Comm Course 242 Control and the Mechanics of S.C.S. 194
Assists in Scientology 259 Control Trio 119
Attainment of "Clears", The 217 Correction of HCO Policy Letter
Auditing ARC Breaks on Registrar and 1 Oct. 1958 see OEC
Vol 4-271
Assistant Registrar 360 Create Processes-Dangers& Advantages 539
Auditing a 10-Year Old Child 53 Credo of a Good and Skilled
Auditing the Pc on Clear Procedure 243 Manager, The see
footnote Vol 1- 97
Auditor's Code No. 19 417 Curriculum of CCH 121
Axioms and Logics 305 Data on Clearing a Staff Member After
Axioms of Scientology, The Specific Terminals Are Flat with
-The Prelogics-The Logics Overt-Withhold Straight Wire
525
-The Axioms of Dianetics see-305 Dates of the Australian ACC,
The 475
Basic Chart of Process Types, A 131 "Death" 223
Basic Locating Question of the Definition of Scientology-Written
by
Rock, The 300 LRH for Legal When Setting Up
Basic Postulate of Overt Act- HASI Ltd 491
Motivator Sequence 359 Definitions 42, 462
Beingness Again 257 D.E.I. Expanded Scale 533
Big Auditing Problem, The 107 Dissemination OEC Vol 6-457
Blow-offs 557 Dissemination Tips OEC Vol 6-101
B.Scn/HCS Course 366 Does Clearing Cancel the Need for Training? 236
Campaign for Ethical Auditing, A 391 Do It Yourself Therapy
444
Dummy Auditing-Step Two: HGC Current Procedure 397
Acknowledgment 349 HGC Procedure (7 Dec. 57) 162
Dummy Auditing-Step Three: Duplication 354 HGC Procedure (11 Jan. 58)
197
Dummy Auditing-Step Four: Handling HGC Processes 502
Originations 370 HGC Processes for Those Trained in
Education 28 Engram Running or Trained in These
Eighteenth A.C.C., The 126 Processes 402
Emotional Tone Scale Expanded 459 HGC Regimen see footnote-502
Enemies of the Pc 268 HGC Running of Pcs 198
Enforced Nothingness-CCH 88 246 How to Do a Diagnosis on Dynamic
Engram Running on Old Dianetic Cases Straightwire 438
or Restarted Cases 419 How to Handle Work see OEC Vol 0-122
Escape 133 How to Read Profiles on OCA: Comparing
Ethics OEC Vol. 1-361 Current Week Profile with Week Before
334
Example of Clearing by Valences, An 276 How to Run an Engram 352
Experimental Process, An 536 How to Select Selected Persons 427
Explanation of Aberrative Character How to "Sell Scientology"
476
of Radiation 52 How to Study Scientology 420
Extension Course Curriculum 357 How to Write a Curriculum 464
Eyesight and Glasses 36 How We Work on the Third Dynamic 251
Factors Behind the Handling of IQ, The 199 HPA Courses for Staff 339
Field Activities 378 HPA/HCA-ACCs 206
Finding Terminals-HAS Co-Audit 513 HPA/HCA Course Curriculum 26
First First Dynamic Process, The 367 Hubbard Certified Auditor Course,
The 54
Five Levels of Indoctrination and Hubbard Certified Auditor Course
Lectures 42
Procedure CCH, The 128 Identification 418
Five Levels of Indoctrination, The 384 Income Tax Reform 495
Flattening a Process 398 Inept Students OEC Vol 4-148
Formula 10 472 Insanity Questionnaire, An 443
Franchise Holders 512 Intensive Processes for Use in
Free Clearing Project 216 Operation Clear and Operation
Freedom CongressLectures 86 Staff Clear see Vol VIII-393
Future Plans 208 InterimProcess 43
General Information 479 Know to Mystery Straight Wire for
Goal of Indoctrination Course 16 Extreme Cases 460
Good Processes 9 Learning How to "Clear" 286
Government Project Stable Data 106 Learning Rate (Part 1) 17
Group Auditing 23 Learning Rate (Part 2) 20
Group Processing see footnote- 24 Letter from Australia 458
Growthwith Competence 515 Levels of Skill 83
Handling of Communication Processes, List of "Purposes" 25
The-Some Rapid Data 503 London Clearing Congress Lectures 332
HAS Co-Audit (24 Mar. 59) 449 London Congress on Nuclear Radiation
HAS Co-Audit (25 Sept. 59) 524 and Health Lectures 27
HAS Co-Audit (15 Dec. 59) 550 London Up 535
HAS Co-Audit & Comm Course (25 Mar 59) 451 Man's Contest with the Machine
Age 221
HAS Co-Audit and Comm Course (3 Apr 59) 456 Man Who Invented Scientology
470
HAS Co-Audit-Finding Terminals 513 Melbourne Congress Lectures 542
Havingness-New Commands 307 Mest ClearProcedure 205
HCA Course Examination 306 Minimum Standards 450
HCA/HPA Course Processes 111 Ministerial Qualifications OEC Vol 5-281
HCO Board of Review OEC Vol 4-269 More Confronting 113
HGC Allowed Processes (10 Jan. 59) 381 More on Training Drill Two
308
HGC Allowed Processes (4 Mar. 59) 436 More Workable Commands for Testing
95
HGC Allowed Processes (21 July 59) 497 Muzzled Auditing 440
HGC Allowed Processes and ACC Processes My Whereabouts in November
535
as of May 21,1959 468 Needed Material 474
New HCA Course You Can Begin at Home 328 Rights of the Field Auditor,
The 41
New HCA/HPA Course 387 Rock, The 299
New HGC Process-A New Straight Wire 363 Routing of Profiles OEC Vol
4-502
New Horizons in Scientology 548 Rudiments and Goals 122
New Process 465 Rules Governing the Running of CCH Ob
News Bulletin 522 "Help" 220
Not-Is StraightWire 390 Running Valences 284
"Offbeat" Processing 282 Scale of Withhold, The 230
Old and New Reality Scale 461 Scientology and the Reactive Mind 269
On Bringing Order 541 Scientology Axiom 58 393
Op. Pro. by Dup. 399 Scientology: Clear Procedure-Issue One 172
Organizational Health Chart Scientology: The Philosophy of a New Age
153
see footnote OEC Vol 7-115 Second Type of Franchise, A 506
Organization of a PE Foundation, The 527 Selected Persons Overt
Withhold
Our Goals 500 Straightwire 417
Out of Sessionness 304 Short Sessioning 368
Pair of Processes, A 245 Short Story by Cable, A 521
Parts of Man, The 149 Signs of Success 253
People Permitted to Audit Engrams by Solids and Chronic Somatics
87
Scientology Processes 348 Solution to Solutions 462
People's Questions 75 Some More CCH Processes 278
Perfect Dissemination Program, Something Has Happened!!! 365
The OEC Vol 6-105 Special Hubbard Professional Auditor's
Post Case Analysis Routine 307 Course Lectures 457
Present Time Problem 168 Special Information for Franchise Holders
492
Present Time Problem-Running of 303 Specific for Terror Stomach 14
Problems: Handling and Running 164 Stable Data for Instructors (24 May
57) 50
Procedure CCH (HCO Training Bulletin) 5 Stable Data for Instructors (4
Sept. 57) 112
Procedure CCH (PAB 133) 238 Staff Auditors' Conference of
Procedure CCH (PAB 146) 323 February 16, 1959 404
Procedure CCH Continued (PAB 134) 247 Staff Clearing 291
Procedure CCH Continued (PAB 135) 254 Staff Members' Outside Auditing
Procedure CCHContinued (PAB 136) 265 Regulation OEC Vol 4- 609
Procedure for Certifying Clears 289 Standard Clear Procedure and an
Processing a New Mother 361 Experimental Road: Clearing by
Processes 229 Valences 273
Processes to Be Run on HGC Preclears Standardization of Clear
Procedure 285
from This Date 117 Standardization of Clear Processes 292
Processes Used in 21st ACC (PAB 155) 433 Step 6 341
Processes Used in 21st ACC (PAB 156) 441 Story of a Static, The 4
Processes Used in 21 st ACC (Concluded) Student Intensives and Co-
Auditing Processes 75
(PAB 157) 453 Subject of Clearing, The 445
Project Clear Check Sheet 143 Suggested HCA Course Schedule 509
Psychoanalysis Goes Capitalistic 537 Supplemental Data Sheet to HCO
Bulletin
Psychosis, Neurosis and Psychiatrists 169 of Feb. 16,1959 and
Staff Auditors'
Radiation Picture and Scientology, The 44 Conference of Feb.
16,1959 439
Reality Scale, The 136 Teaching of the 18th ACC, The 58
Rehabilitation of Abilities, The 79 Technically Speaking 494
Report on Two Cases That Have Received Technical Notes on Child
Processing 526
Psychiatric and Euro-Russian Therapy Techniques of Child
Processing 553
from the Govelnment 234 Techniques to Be Used on HGC Preclears
342
Responsibility 555 Theory of Training in Scientology, The 344
Responsibility for O/Ws 552 Theta Clear Congress Lectures 490
Reviewing Week's Profiles 207 Threat to Havingness, The 195
Rights of the Directors of Training and To a Roman Catholic 514
Processing, Staff Auditors, and Instructors Today's Riches in
Scientology 32
Regarding Preclears and Students 51 Tone of Voice-Acknowledgement
383
To Retain Co-Audit Pc's Interest in Case 538 Who Should Take Which
Class 264
Training and CCH Processes 61 Why "Victim" Works as a Process 518
Training Drill Change 353 Withholds and Communication 93
Training Drills 437 1st Melbourne ACC Material 545
Training-What It Is Today-How We Tell 1st Melbourne Advanced
Clinical Course
People About It 40 Lectures 542
TR 9 (b) and TR 9 (c) 340 5th London Advanced Clinical Course
Two Rules for Happy Living 431 Lectures 333
Un-doable Command, An 467 6th London Advanced Clinical Course
Universe Processes (29 Sept. 59) 529 Lectures 467
Universe Processes (5 Oct. 59) 530 8-C on Students 90
Urgent Change in All Co-Audit Courses 551 16thAmericanAdvanced Clinical
Useful Process, A 532 Course Lectures 3
Validation Committee 102 17th American Advanced Clinical
Violence 343 Course Lectures 13
Vital Training Data 309 18th American Advanced Clinical
Vital Training Data for Training Hats Course Lectures 90
and Registrar 250 19th American Advanced Clinical
We Are the Free People 145 Course Lectures 204
What About Validation? 76 20th ACC Training Procedure 294
What Are Clears? 375 20th American Advanced Clinical
What Is Scientology 477 Course Lectures 293
What to Tell New HGC Auditors to 21stAmericanAdvanced Clinical
Process on Preclears 60 Course Lectures 374
When a Verbal Direction Is Given 111 1950 Success Congress Lectures
374
When Cases Crack Well on Selected 1959 HCA Course Becomes a Clearing
Persons Overts Withhold 473 Course, The 376